Nissan - Quest - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004

ENGINE SECTION ACC ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM A ACC C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3 F Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................. 6 G Accelerator Control ................................................... 6 H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ACC-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001717834 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 ACC-2 2008 Quest ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717835 Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal ACC C D E F G H I LBIA0372E 1. Adjustable pedal electric motor 2. 4. Accelerator position sensor (non-ad- 5. justable pedal) Adjustable accelerator pedal 3. Accelerator position sensor (adjustable pedal) J Non-adjustable accelerator pedal K CAUTION: • Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). • Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. • Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. • Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). • Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. • Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL L M N Removal 1. 2. 3. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". O P Revision: August 2007 ACC-3 2008 Quest ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. • Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. • When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. LBIA0374E 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: • Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. • Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. • Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. • Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. • When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. LBIA0373E 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. • Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. • Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: • Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. • Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. • Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 ACC-4 2008 Quest ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". A ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR ACC Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. • Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. • When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. C D E F LBIA0374E 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. • Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. • When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. G H I LBIA0373E 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: • Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. • Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. • Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. J K Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. • Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ACC-5 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control INFOID:0000000001717836 PEDAL TRAVEL Accelerator control pedal - total travel Revision: August 2007 73.2 mm (2.88 in) ACC-6 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION ACS AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ............................................................... 2 F Description ................................................................ 2 G H I J ACS L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ACS-1 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Description INFOID:0000000001719533 Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-25. Revision: August 2007 ACS-2 2008 Quest BODY SECTION AP ADJUSTABLE PEDAL A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM ........................ 3 Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)..... 3 Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........................................................ 7 Terminal and Reference Value for Pedal Adjusting Control Unit ............................................................... 7 Trouble Diagnosis ..................................................... 7 Removal and Installation .........................................12 F G H Automatic Drive Positioner Adjustable Pedal ............ 3 AP J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AP-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718824 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 AP-2 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM A Automatic Drive Positioner Adjustable Pedal INFOID:0000000001718825 Automatic drive positioner adjustable pedal. Refer to SE-11. B Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) INFOID:0000000001718826 C COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION D E F G H AP J LIIA2451E 1. Pedal adjusting control unit M14 (view with instrument panel removed) 4. A. A/T device M34 B. A/T selector lever (view with center console removed) 2. Pedal adjusting switch B22 3. Pedal adjusting motor E109 (view with instrument lower panel LH removed) K L M SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The adjustable pedal system power supply is controlled by the pedal adjusting control unit. Power is supplied at all times • through 40A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to circuit breaker-2 terminal 1 • through circuit breaker-2 terminal 2 • to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 5. With the ignition switch in ON or START, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 4. Ground is supplied • to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 1 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 • to pedal adjusting switch terminal 4 • through body grounds B7 and B19. When the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position, ground is supplied • to pedal adjusting control unit terminal 3 Revision: August 2007 AP-3 N O P 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through A/T device (park position switch) terminal 7 • through A/T device (park position switch) terminal 6 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then pedal adjusting control unit recognizes that A/T selector lever is in P position. With power supplied, pedal adjusting switch is energized • through pedal adjusting control unit terminal 7 • to pedal adjusting switch terminal 1. With power supplied, pedal adjusting switch is energized. When pedal is adjusted forward, power is supplied • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 3 • to pedal adjusting motor terminal 1. Then ground is supplied • to pedal adjusting motor terminal 2 • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 2 • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 4 • through body grounds B7 and B19. With power and ground supplied, accelerator and brake pedals move forward. When pedal is adjusted backward, power is supplied • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 2 • to pedal adjusting motor terminal 2. Then ground is supplied • to pedal adjusting motor terminal 1 • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 3 • through pedal adjusting switch terminal 4 • through body grounds B7 and B19. With power and ground supplied, accelerator and brake pedals move backward. Revision: August 2007 AP-4 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIRING DIAGRAM — PEDAL — A B C D E F G H AP J K L M N O WIWA1772E P Revision: August 2007 AP-5 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1773E Revision: August 2007 AP-6 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718827 A B C LIIA2452E D Terminal and Reference Value for Pedal Adjusting Control Unit INFOID:0000000001718828 E Terminal Wire Color 1 B/W Ground 3 G/Y A/T device (park position switch) signal 4 R/W Ignition switch (ON or START) 5 W 7 G/W Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — 0 A/T selector lever in other than P position Battery voltage Item A/T selector lever in P position Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery power supply Pedal adjusting switch power supply output 0 Battery voltage — Battery voltage Ignition switch ON A/T selector lever in other than P position 0 Ignition switch ON A/T selector lever in P position F G H Battery voltage Trouble Diagnosis AP INFOID:0000000001718829 WORK FLOW J 1. 2. 3. K 4. 5. Check the symptom and customer's requests. Perform the preliminary check. Refer to "PRELIMINARY CHECK". According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM". Does adjustable pedal system operate normally? YES: GO TO 5. NO: GO TO 3. Inspection End. L M PRELIMINARY CHECK 1.CHECK ADJUSTABLE PEDAL MECHANISM N Check the following. • Movable part of accelerator pedal or brake pedal is deformed or there is foreign material in it. • Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is deformed or broken. OK or NG OK >> Preliminary check is OK. NG >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part and check again. O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM NOTE: Always check the WORK FLOW before troubleshooting. Refer to "WORK FLOW". Revision: August 2007 AP-7 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Adjustable pedal system does not operate. Diagnosis/service procedure Reference page 1. Pedal adjusting control unit power supply and ground circuit inspection. "PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND INSPECTION" 2. Pedal adjusting switch power supply and ground circuit inspection. "PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND INSPECTION" 3. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection. "PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION" 4. Replace pedal adjusting motor. 1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection. Adjustable pedal system does operate when ignition switch is turned ON and A/T selector lever is in other than P position. 2. Pedal adjusting control unit signal inspection. 3. Replace pedal adjusting control unit. Adjustable pedal system does not operate when ignition switch is turned ON and A/T selector lever is in P position. 1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection. AP-12 "A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection" "PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT IGNITION SIGNAL INSPECTION" AP-12 "A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection" Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Ignition Signal Inspection 1.CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 4 and ground. Connector M14 Terminal (+) (-) 4 Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting control unit ignition signal is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: August 2007 AP-8 LIIA0885E 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Pedal Adjusting Control Unit Power Supply And Ground Inspection A 1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 7 and ground. Terminal Connector (+) M14 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) C Ignition switch ON A/T selector lever in P position Battery voltage D Ignition switch OFF A/T selector lever in other than P position 0 (-) 7 Ground B LIIA2041E E OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting control unit power supply and ground is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit. Check voltage between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground H : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. AP J LIIA0887E 3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT K Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting control unit. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M N LIIA0888E A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection O 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DETENT SW “ON/ OFF” Contents The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other than P position (ON)” judged from the A/T device (park position switch) signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 AP-9 2008 Quest P ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> A/T device (park position switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit. Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 3 and A/T device connector M34 terminal 7. 3-7 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0891E 3.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) Check continuity between A/T device terminals 6 and 7. Terminals 6 7 Condition Continuity P position Yes Other than P position No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace A/T device. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation". LIIA2203E 4.CHECK A/T DEVICE GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between A/T device connector M34 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting control unit. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0893E Pedal Adjusting Switch Power Supply And Ground Inspection 1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH POWER SUPPLY Revision: August 2007 AP-10 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect pedal adjusting switch connector. 3. Check voltage between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground A B : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. C LIIA0894E 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH HARNESS 1. 2. D Disconnect pedal adjusting control unit. Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 7 and pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 1. 7-1 3. E F : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between pedal adjusting control unit connector M14 terminal 7 and ground. 7 - Ground G : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0895E OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting control unit. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H 3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT AP Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 4 and ground. J 4 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. K L LIIA0896E Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection M 1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect pedal adjusting switch. Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch terminals as follows. N O Terminals 1 3 4 Condition Continuity Pedal adjusting switch forward. Yes Pedal adjusting switch neutral. No Pedal adjusting switch backward. Yes Pedal adjusting switch neutral. No Revision: August 2007 AP-11 P LIIA0897E 2008 Quest ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals 1 2 4 Condition Continuity Pedal adjusting switch backward. Yes Pedal adjusting switch neutral. No Pedal adjusting switch forward. Yes Pedal adjusting switch neutral. No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace pedal adjusting switch. 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect pedal adjusting motor. Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminals 2, 3 and pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 1, 2. 2-2 3-1 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminals 2, 3 and ground. 2 - Ground 3 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0898E OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to ACC-3, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718830 Refer to ACC-3 and BR-5. Revision: August 2007 AP-12 2008 Quest TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SECTION AT AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE A B AT D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 5 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 39 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................39 Fail-Safe ..................................................................39 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair .......................................................41 A/T Electrical Parts Location ...................................47 Circuit Diagram ........................................................49 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .....................49 Check Before Engine Is Started ..............................54 Check at Idle ............................................................54 Cruise Test - Part 1 .................................................55 Cruise Test - Part 2 .................................................57 Cruise Test - Part 3 .................................................57 Shift Schedule .........................................................58 Symptom Chart ........................................................59 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value .............66 CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ..............69 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................74 INDEX FOR DTC ................................................. 5 Alphabetical Index ..................................................... 5 DTC No. Index .......................................................... 5 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 7 Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ..................................................... 7 Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement .......................................................................... 7 Precaution ................................................................. 8 Service Notice or Precaution ..................................... 9 PREPARATION ..................................................10 Special Service Tool ............................................... 10 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 12 Description ...............................................................77 On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................77 Possible Cause ........................................................77 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................77 Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN .....................................78 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................79 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 13 Checking A/T Fluid .................................................. 13 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ....................................... 14 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................18 H I J K L M DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR... 80 N Description ...............................................................80 On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................80 Possible Cause ........................................................80 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................80 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................80 O DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR ....................... 82 P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ......36 Introduction ............................................................. 36 OBD-II Function for A/T System .............................. 36 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 36 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .................. 36 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................ 38 Revision: August 2007 G DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ..... 77 A/T FLUID ...........................................................13 Cross-Sectional View .............................................. 18 Shift Mechanism ...................................................... 18 TCM Function .......................................................... 30 Input/Output Signal of TCM ..................................... 32 CAN Communication ............................................... 32 Line Pressure Control ............................................. 32 Shift Control ............................................................ 33 Lock-Up Control ...................................................... 34 F AT-1 Description ...............................................................82 On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................82 Possible Cause ........................................................82 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................82 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................82 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ............................................................. 83 Description .............................................................. 83 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 83 Possible Cause ....................................................... 83 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 83 Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW .............................. 84 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85 Component Inspection ............................................ 87 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 108 Possible Cause ..................................................... 108 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 108 Wiring Diagram - AT - 1STSIG ............................. 109 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ......... 111 Description ............................................................ 111 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 111 Possible Cause ..................................................... 111 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 111 Wiring Diagram - AT - 2NDSIG ............................. 113 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 88 Description .............................................................. 88 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 88 Possible Cause ....................................................... 88 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 88 Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ..................................... 89 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 90 Component Inspection ............................................ 91 DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE ............................................... 93 Description .............................................................. 93 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 93 Possible Cause ....................................................... 93 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 93 Wiring Diagram - AT - FTSP ................................... 94 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 95 Component Inspection ............................................ 96 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 98 Description .............................................................. 98 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98 Possible Cause ....................................................... 98 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98 Wiring Diagram - AT - TRSC .................................. 99 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................100 Component Inspection ...........................................100 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ......... 116 Description ............................................................ 116 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116 Possible Cause ..................................................... 116 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 116 Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RDSIG ............................. 117 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119 DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION .......... 120 Description ............................................................ 120 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120 Possible Cause ..................................................... 120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 120 Wiring Diagram - AT - 4THSIG ............................. 121 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122 DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION .......... 123 Description ............................................................ 123 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123 Possible Cause ..................................................... 123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 123 Wiring Diagram - AT - 5THSIG ............................. 124 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCKUP) .................................................................... 127 Description ............................................................ 127 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127 Possible Cause ..................................................... 127 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 127 Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ............................. 128 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129 DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT ................ 102 Description .............................................................102 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................102 Possible Cause ......................................................102 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................102 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSATC .............................103 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................104 Component Inspection ...........................................104 DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) ................ 130 Description ............................................................ 130 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130 Possible Cause ..................................................... 130 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 130 Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/A .................................. 131 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 Component Inspection .......................................... 134 DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE ............................................. 106 Description .............................................................106 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................106 Possible Cause ......................................................106 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................106 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................106 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ........ 135 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ......... 108 Description ............................................................ 135 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135 Description .............................................................108 Revision: August 2007 AT-2 2008 Quest Possible Cause ..................................................... 135 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 135 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ................................ 136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137 Component Inspection .......................................... 138 Component Inspection ........................................... 168 DTC P0780 SHIFT ........................................... 170 Description ............................................................. 170 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 170 Possible Cause ...................................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 170 Wiring Diagram - AT - SFTFNC ............................. 171 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ....... 140 Description ............................................................ 140 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140 Possible Cause ..................................................... 140 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 140 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ................................ 141 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 Component Inspection .......................................... 143 DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) .............................................................. 174 Description ............................................................. 174 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 174 Possible Cause ...................................................... 174 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 174 Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/C .................................. 175 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176 Component Inspection ........................................... 177 DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C ....... 145 Description ............................................................ 145 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 145 Possible Cause ..................................................... 145 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 145 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/C ................................ 146 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 147 Component Inspection .......................................... 148 DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON ........................... 179 Description ............................................................. 179 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 179 Possible Cause ...................................................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 179 Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/CS ................................ 180 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 181 Component Inspection ........................................... 182 DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON ....................................................... 150 Description ............................................................ 150 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 150 Possible Cause ..................................................... 150 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 150 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/CS ............................. 151 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 152 Component Inspection .......................................... 153 DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT .......... 184 Description ............................................................. 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 184 Possible Cause ...................................................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 184 Wiring Diagram - AT - LVRSW .............................. 185 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186 Component Inspection ........................................... 187 DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D ....... 155 Description ............................................................ 155 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 155 Possible Cause ..................................................... 155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 155 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/D ................................ 156 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157 Component Inspection .......................................... 158 Description ............................................................. 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 188 Possible Cause ...................................................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 188 Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN .............................. 189 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190 Component Inspection ........................................... 191 DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................... 192 AT D E F G H I J K L M N O Description ............................................................. 192 DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) .............. 165 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .... 193 Description ............................................................ 165 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 165 Possible Cause ..................................................... 165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 165 Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/B .................................. 166 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ....... 193 Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position .. 194 In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ....... 195 In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 195 Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position) .......................... 196 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position.. 196 Revision: August 2007 B DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL .... 188 DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E ........ 160 Description ............................................................ 160 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160 Possible Cause ..................................................... 160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 160 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/E ................................ 161 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162 Component Inspection .......................................... 163 A AT-3 2008 Quest P Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position ......................................................................197 Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1 .......................198 A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2 ..................................199 A/T Does Not Shift: D2→ D3 ..................................200 A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4 ..................................201 A/T Does Not Shift: D4→ D5 ..................................202 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .............................203 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ...................203 Lock-up Is Not Released .......................................204 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" ..................................205 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, When Selector Lever "D" → "L" Position .........................206 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" ..................................207 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, When Release Accelerator Pedal ....................................207 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .....208 TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate .................209 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 222 Transmission wire ................................................. 222 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .................... 224 Removal ................................................................ 224 Inspection After Removal ...................................... 224 Installation ............................................................. 224 OVERHAUL ...................................................... 225 Component ........................................................... 225 Location of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers ..................................................... 231 DISASSEMBLY ................................................ 232 Disassembly .......................................................... 232 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .............. 251 Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake .............. 251 One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 ........... 257 Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake ....................... 259 Differential Gear Assembly ................................... 265 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................. 211 Description .............................................................211 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ..........211 Wiring Diagram - AT - SHIFT .................................212 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................212 ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 268 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ 215 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 292 Removal and Installation .......................................215 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 268 Adjustment ............................................................ 275 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 276 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ............................... 217 Component ............................................................217 Removal ................................................................217 Installation .............................................................218 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .................................. 219 Revolution Sensor Replacement ...........................219 Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ..............219 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ....219 ATF Cooler ............................................................220 ATF Cooler Valve ..................................................220 Control Cable Adjustment ......................................221 Side cover ..............................................................222 Revision: August 2007 AT-4 General Specification ............................................ 292 Shift Schedule ....................................................... 292 Stall Speed ............................................................ 293 Line Pressure ........................................................ 293 Time Lag ............................................................... 293 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 293 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 294 Clutch, Gear and Brakes ....................................... 294 Final Drive ............................................................. 296 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 297 Turbine Revolution Sensor ................................... 297 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 297 2008 Quest INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index INFOID:0000000001717837 B NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT AT-77. DTC D OBD-II Except OBD-II CONSULT-III GST*1 CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 P0731 AT-108 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 P0732 AT-111 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 P0733 AT-116 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 P0734 AT-120 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 P0735 AT-123 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-127 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P0710 AT-88 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-77 ELEC TH CONTROL — P1726 AT-192 ENG SPD INP PERFOR — P0726 AT-106 P0711 P0711 AT-93 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) FLUID TEMP SEN GEAR LEVER SWITCH Reference page E — P0825 AT-184 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) P0745 P0745 AT-130 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) P0775 P0775 AT-165 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) P0795 P0795 AT-174 PC SOL C STC ON P0797 P0797 AT-179 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-83 SHIFT P0780 P0780 AT-170 SHIFT SOL A P0750 P0750 AT-135 SHIFT SOL B P0755 P0755 AT-140 SHIFT SOL C P0760 P0760 AT-145 SHIFT SOL D P0765 P0765 AT-155 SHIFT SOL E P0770 P0770 AT-160 SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 P0762 AT-150 TCM POWER INPT SIG P0882 P0882 AT-188 TCM PROCESSOR — P0613 AT-82 TURBINE SENSOR P0717 P0717 AT-98 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR — P0500 AT-80 VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T P0722 P0722 AT-102 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000001717838 NOTE: Revision: August 2007 AT-5 2008 Quest F G H I J K L M N O P INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-77. DTC OBD-II Except OBD-II CONSULT-III GST*1 CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” — P0500 VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR AT-80 — P0613 TCM PROCESSOR AT-82 P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-83 P0710 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-88 P0711 P0711 FLUID TEMP SEN AT-93 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) Reference page P0717 P0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-98 P0722 P0722 VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T AT-102 — P0726 ENG SPD INP PERFOR AT-106 P0731 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-108 P0732 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-111 P0733 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-116 P0734 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-120 P0735 P0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN AT-123 P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127 P0745 P0745 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) AT-130 P0750 P0750 SHIFT SOL A AT-135 P0755 P0755 SHIFT SOL B AT-140 P0760 P0760 SHIFT SOL C AT-145 P0762 P0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON AT-150 P0765 P0765 SHIFT SOL D AT-155 P0770 P0770 SHIFT SOL E AT-160 P0775 P0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) AT-165 P0780 P0780 SHIFT AT-170 P0795 P0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) AT-174 P0797 P0797 PC SOL C STC ON AT-179 — P0825 GEAR LEVER SWITCH AT-184 P0882 P0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG AT-188 — P1726 ELEC TH CONTROL AT-192 U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-77 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. Revision: August 2007 AT-6 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > PRECAUTIONS A Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001717839 B The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS AT system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service ManD ual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag F Module, see the SR section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harG ness connectors. Precaution for On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of A/T and Engine INFOID:0000000001717840 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: • Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. • Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) • Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. • Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. • Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement H I J K L INFOID:0000000001717841 • When replacing A/T assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and initialize TCM if necessary. M TCM INITIALIZATION PATTERNS N TCM Replaced with new one Not replaced Replaced with old one A/T assembly Erasing EEPROM in TCM Remarks Not required Not required because the EEPROM in TCM is in the default state. Not replaced Replaced with new or old one Replaced with new or old one Not replaced P Required because data cannot be conformed to previous data written in the EEPROM in TCM. Required Replaced with new or old one NOTE: “Old one” is the TCM or A/T assembly that has been used on other vehicles. METHOD FOR TCM INITIALIZATION Revision: August 2007 O AT-7 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Set the vehicle following the items listed below. • Ignition switch “ON”. • Selector lever “P” or “N” position. • Engine not running. • Vehicle speed is 0km/h (0 MPH). • Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. • Malfunction was not detected. 2. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. 3. Touch “INITIALIZATION”. 4. Initialize TCM following the direction in display. Precaution INFOID:0000000001717842 NOTE: Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT section. • Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. SEF289H • When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. SEF291H • Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". MEF040DA Revision: August 2007 AT-8 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. A B AT SEF217U D • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". Use paper rags not cloth rags during work. After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid", AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid". Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000001717843 E F G H I J K L ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-14, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-16. M N OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS • A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. • The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure on AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. • For details of OBD-II, refer to AT-36. • Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71. Revision: August 2007 AT-9 2008 Quest O P PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717844 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 — (J-34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 — (J-34301-2) Hoses 3 — (J-34298) Adapter 4 — (J-34282-2) Adapter 5 — (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 — (J-34301-15) Square socket Measuring line pressure AAT896 Measuring line pressure KV311J0010 (J-45542) Adapter SCIA3019E Adjusting park/neutral position (PNP) switch KV911J0060 (J-45404) Alignment tool SCIA3018E • Removing oil pump assembly • Removing thrust roller bearing a: 250 mm(9.84 in) b: 160 mm(6.30 in) ST33290001 (J-34286) Puller NT414 Installing differential side oil seals a: 60 mm(2.36 in) dia. b: 74 mm(1.85 in) dia. ST33400001 (J-26082) Drift NT086 Revision: August 2007 AT-10 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor Removing and installing return springs a: 320 mm(12.60 in) b: 174 mm(6.85 in) A B AT NT423 D • Installing oil seal • Installing thrust roller bearing a: 77 mm(3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mm(2.185 in) dia. ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift E F NT115 Removing outer race and adjust shim a: 62 mm(2.44 in) dia. b: 40 mm(1.57 in) dia. ST30612000 (J-25742-2) Drift G H NT073 ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge 1 GG91030000 (J-25765-A) Torque wrench 2 HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3 HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter Checking differential side bearing preload I J K NT124 L a: 60 mm(2.362 in) dia. b: 45 mm(1.772 in) KV40102500 (J-28815) Drift M N SCIA5517E • Removing tapered roller bearing • Installing manual valve oil seal a: 38 mm(1.496 in) dia. b: 28.5 mm(1.122 in) dia. ST33061000 (J-8107-2) Drift O P NT073 Revision: August 2007 AT-11 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV38100500 ( — ) Drift a:80 mm(3.15 in) dia. b:60 mm(2.362 in) dia. Installing tapered roller bearing NT115 Installing outer race and adjust shim a: 76 mm(2.992 in) dia. KV40100621 (J-25273) Drift SCIA5518E ST30022000 ( — Drift a: 56 mm(2.205 in) dia. b: 110 mm(4.331 in) dia. c: 15 mm(0.591 in) ) SCIA5519E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717845 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Puller Removing tapered roller bearing NT077 Puller a: 60 mm(2.36 in) dia. b: 35 mm(1.38 in) dia. NT411 Revision: August 2007 AT-12 2008 Quest A/T FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T FLUID A Changing A/T Fluid 1. INFOID:0000000001717846 Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”. B Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) 2. 3. 4. AT Stop the engine. Remove the engine undercover. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer. Drain plug D E : 39 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) F G LLIA0066E 5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out. Fluid grade and capacity 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. I : Refer to MA-11. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid". If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5. Checking A/T Fluid J K INFOID:0000000001717847 Warm up the engine. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. L M Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) a. b. H N Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the “P” park position. O WLIA0014E P Revision: August 2007 AT-13 2008 Quest A/T FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lintfree paper. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the LLIA0065E reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: • Do not overfill the transaxle. • Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds. 5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) 6. WLIA0014E Check the fluid for the following conditions: • If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid". Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle. • If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the transaxle. Refer to CO-16. SMA853B A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning INFOID:0000000001717848 Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. 2. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. Revision: August 2007 AT-14 2008 Quest A/T FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes or bypass valve. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. A B AT SCIA2945E D 5. 6. 7. 8. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: • Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. • Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. • Avoid contact with eyes and skin. • Do not breath vapors or spray mist. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet hose. E F G SCIA2955E H I J SCIA2962E 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle. Remove the banjo bolts. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE". A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE AT-15 L M N O P NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. Revision: August 2007 K 2008 Quest A/T FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: • Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. • Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. • Avoid contact with eyes and skin. • Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. SCIA2955E SCIA2965E 6. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. 10. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE". 8. SCIA2966E A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. a. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended. SCIA2967E Revision: August 2007 AT-16 2008 Quest A/T FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/ fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended. A B AT SCIA5257E D A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-17 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000001717849 SCIA2575E 1. Converter housing 2. 2nd brake 3. One-way clutch No. 2 4. Control valve assembly 5. Side cover 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. Forward clutch 8. Direct clutch 9. Transaxle case cover 10. B5 brake 11. Transaxle case 12. U/D clutch 13. U/D brake 14. Final gear 15. Differential case 16. Output shaft 17. Counter driven gear 18. Counter drive gear 19. Input shaft 20. Oil pump 21. One-way clutch No. 1 22. 2nd coast brake 23. Torque converter 24. Main rear planetary gear 25. Main front planetary gear 26. U/D rear planetary gear 27. U/D front planetary gear Shift Mechanism INFOID:0000000001717850 CONSTRUCTION Revision: August 2007 AT-18 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I SCIA2576E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear J K L 25. Parking pawl M FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function N Forward clutch 1 F/C Connect input shaft 20 to main rear internal gear 10. Direct clutch 2 D/C Connect input shaft 20 to main sun gear 11. U/D clutch 3 U/D.C Connect U/D sun gear 15 to U/D front planetary carrier 16. 2nd coast brake 4 2nd C/B Lock main sun gear 11. 2nd brake 5 2nd/B Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11. 1st and reverse brake 6 1st & R/B Lock main front internal gear 13. U/D brake 7 U/D.B Lock U/D sun gear 15. B5 brake 8 B5/B Lock U/D rear planetary carrier 18. One-way clutch No. 1 9 O.C1 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main sun gear 11, when 2nd brake 5 operations. One-way clutch No. 2 10 O.C2 Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear 13. Revision: August 2007 AT-19 O P 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Clutch Shift position F/C 1 D/C 2 Brake U/D.C 3 2nd C/ B 4 2nd/B 5 1st & R/ B 6 One-way clutch U/D.B 7 B5/B 8 O.C1 9 O.C2 10 Remarks P PARK POSITION R REVERSE POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION 1st 1⇔2 2nd 2⇔3 D*1 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔ 4⇔5 3rd 3⇔4 4th 4⇔5 5th 1st 1⇔2 L*2 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 2nd 2⇔3 3rd : Operates : In transition between applied and released. *1: A/T will not shift to 5th when lever switch is pushed (indicated A/T indicator “4”). *2: A/T will not shift to 3th when lever switch is pushed (indicated A/T indicator “2”). NOTE: When shifting D to L position or lever switch pushes (indicated A/T indicator “4” at D position or “2” at L position), down shift permission control is activated. Refer to AT-33, "Shift Control". POWER TRANSMISSION “N” position Since both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. “P” position • The same as for the “N” position, both the forward clutch and the direct clutch are released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. • The parking pole linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. Revision: August 2007 AT-20 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I SCIA2577E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear J K L 25. Parking pawl M “D”, “L” positions 1st gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. Main front internal gear is going to rotates counterclockwise. One-way clutch No. 2 operates. (Lock counterclockwise rotation of main front internal gear.) Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise. Revision: August 2007 AT-21 2008 Quest N O P A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. 16. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) 17. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise. 18. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. 19. Final gear clockwise. • During deceleration, main front internal gear clockwise due to rotation itself clockwise of main front small planetary pinion gear, but driving force loses due to free of one-way clutch No. 2. Therefore, engine brake does not operate. SCIA2585E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear Revision: August 2007 AT-22 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear A 25. Parking pawl “D”, “L” positions 2nd gear 1. Input shaft rotates clockwise. B 2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) 3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. AT 4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. 5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. 6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. D 7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) 8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. 9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. E 10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. 11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. 12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. F 13. U/D sun gear rotates clockwise. 14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. G 15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) 16. U/D rear internal gear rotates counterclockwise. 17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. H 18. Final gear clockwise. • During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-23 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SCIA2587E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl “D”, “L” positions 3rd gear 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. Revision: August 2007 AT-24 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. A 7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) 8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. 9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. B 10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. 11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. 12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise. AT 13. U/D brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D sun gear.) 14. U/D front planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of U/D front planetary pinion gear. D 15. U/D rear internal gear and output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D front planetary carrier and one. 16. Final gear clockwise. • During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, E engine brake operates. F G H I J K L M N O P SCIA2588E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake Revision: August 2007 AT-25 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl “D” positions 4th gear 1. Input shaft rotates clockwise. 2. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) 3. Main rear internal gear rotates clockwise. 4. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. 5. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise for rear planetary pinion and one. 6. 2nd brake and 2nd coast brake operates. 7. One-way clutch No. 1 operates. (Lock rotation of main sun gear.) 8. Main planetary carrier revolves clockwise due to reaction force of front large planetary pinion gear. 9. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main planetary carrier and one. 10. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. 11. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. 12. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.) 13. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one. 14. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one. 15. Final gear clockwise. • During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. Revision: August 2007 AT-26 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I J K L SCIA2592E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear M N O 25. Parking pawl P “D” positions 5th gear 1. 2. 3. 4. Input shaft rotates clockwise. Forward clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main rear internal gear.) Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.) Main rear planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and main rear planetary unit rotates clockwise as one. Revision: August 2007 AT-27 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Main front large planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself for main rear planetary pinion gear and one, and main front planetary unit rotates clockwise as one. 6. Counter drive gear rotates clockwise for main front planetary unit and one. 7. Counter driven gear rotates counterclockwise. 8. U/D front internal gear rotates counterclockwise for counter driven gear and one. 9. U/D clutch operate. (Connect U/D sun gear to U/D front planetary carrier.) 10. U/D front planetary pinion gear cannot rotate itself, and U/D unit rotates counterclockwise as one. 11. Output shaft rotates counterclockwise for U/D unit and one. 12. Final gear clockwise. • During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. SCIA2593E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear Revision: August 2007 AT-28 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear A 25. Parking pawl B “R” position 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Input shaft rotates clockwise. Direct clutch operates. (Connect input shaft to main sun gear.) AT Main sun gear rotates clockwise. Main rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. Main front large planetary pinion gear rotates itself counterclockwise for rear planetary pinion gear and D one. 6. Main front small planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. E 7. 1st and reverse brake operates. (Lock rotation of main front internal gear.) 8. Main planetary carrier revolves counterclockwise due to reaction force of front small planetary pinion gear. 9. Counter drive gear rotates counterclockwise for main planetary carrier and one. F 10. Counter driven gear rotates clockwise. 11. U/D front internal gear rotates clockwise for counter driven gear and one. 12. U/D front planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. G 13. U/D sun gear rotates counterclockwise. 14. U/D rear planetary pinion gear rotates itself clockwise. H 15. B5 brake operate. (Lock rotation of U/D rear planetary carrier.) 16. U/D rear internal gear rotates clockwise. 17. U/D front planetary carrier and output shaft rotates clockwise for U/D rear internal gear and one. I 18. Final gear counterclockwise. • During deceleration, driving force is connected to input shaft directly without one-way clutch. Therefore, engine brake operates. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-29 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SCIA2594E 1. Forward clutch 2. Direct clutch 3. U/D clutch 4. 2nd coast brake 5. 2nd brake 6. 1st and reverse brake 7. U/D brake 8. B5 brake 9. One-way clutch No. 1 10. One-way clutch No. 2 11. Main sun gear 12. Main planetary carrier 13. Main front internal gear 14. Main rear internal gear 15. U/D sun gear 16. U/D front planetary carrier 17. U/D front internal gear 18. U/D rear planetary carrier 19. U/D rear internal gear 20. Input shaft 21. Counter drive gear 22. Counter driven gear 23. Output shaft 24. Parking gear 25. Parking pawl TCM Function INFOID:0000000001717851 The function of the TCM is to: • Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. • Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. • Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE Revision: August 2007 AT-30 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS (or SIGNAL) PNP switch Throttle angle signal Throttle position signal Engine speed signal Engine torque signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Turbine revolution sensor Vehicle speed signal Lever switch signal Stop lamp switch signal ⇒ TCM ACTUATORS Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Engine brake control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-III communication line CAN communication line On board diagnosis Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Shift solenoid valve C Shift solenoid valve D Shift solenoid valve E Pressure control solenoid valve A Pressure control solenoid valve B Pressure control solenoid valve C O/D OFF indicator lamp A B ⇒ AT D E CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM F G H I J K L M WCIA0645E N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-31 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Input/Output Signal of TCM Control item Throttle angle signal(*5) Throttle position signal(*5) Revolution sensor Turbine revolution sensor Vehicle speed signal MTR (*1) (*5) INFOID:0000000001717852 Line pressure control Vehicle speed control Shift control Lock-up control Engine brake control Fail-safe function (*3) Self-diagnostics function X X X X X X X X(*2) X(*2) X X(*2) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Engine speed signals(*5) Input Engine torque signals(*5) X X X X X PNP switch X X X X X X X(*4) Lever switch X X X X X Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X A/T fluid temperature sensor X ASCD Operation signal(*5) (*5) Overdrive cancel signal TCM power supply voltage signal X Shift solenoid valve A/B/C/D/E Pressure control solenoid valve A Output X(*4) Pressure control solenoid valve B X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Pressure control solenoid valve C Self-diagnostics X X X X X X(*4) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X table(*5) X *1: Spare for revolution sensor *2: Spare for throttle angle signal *3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function. *4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error. *5: CAN communications. CAN Communication INFOID:0000000001717853 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Line Pressure Control INFOID:0000000001717854 • The pressure control solenoid A controls linear line pressure by control signal from TCM and line pressure for clutches and brakes to reduce shift shock. • This pressure control solenoid A controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. Revision: August 2007 AT-32 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E SCIA2605E LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN F In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the pressure control solenoid A current valve and thus controls the line pressure. G Shift Control INFOID:0000000001717855 The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. H I J K L M SCIA3569E Basically TCM programmed for economy mode, but TCM changes to several shift schedule automatically according to specified condition. N SPECIAL SHIFT MODE Upslope Mode When TCM detects upslope from load of engine torque and decrease of acceleration, this mode changes shift points in high-speed side according to the upslope degree and avoids busy shift of A/T. Downslope Mode When TCM detects downslope from increase of acceleration with accelerator full close, this mode operates moderate engine brake by changing shift points in high-speed side. Hot Mode Control This control lowers ATF temperature by changing shift points when the temperature is extremely high. Down Shift Permission Control In order to avoid the over speed of the engine, down shift is done only at under a constant vehicle speed. Revision: August 2007 AT-33 2008 Quest O P A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > UP/DOWN SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the pressure to each clutch or brake in order to reduce shifting shock at each shifting (Up, Down, Coast down). N-D SHIFT CONTROL This control improves the N-D shift quality due to controlling line pressure solenoid valve according to forward clutch piston stroke learned in N-D shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to forward clutch at N-D shift (include L). N-D SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the forward clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a forward clutch engaging time and a rotation change rate. N-R SHIFT CONTROL This control improves the N-R shift quality due to controlling shift pressure solenoid valve according to direct clutch piston stroke learned in N-R shift learning control and applying best hydraulic pressure to direct clutch at N-R shift. N-R SHIFT LEARNING CONTROL This control learns the direct clutch hydraulic pressure due to monitoring a direct clutch engaging time and a rotation change rate. TORQUE REDUCTION CONTROL This control improves the shift quality due to sending torque reduction request signal from TCM to ECM and cutting engine torque increase of shift at N-D shift, N-R shift and 1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5. If accelerator pedal is depressed rapidly, this control establishes the upper limit value of engine torque and avoids engine flare at 2 ⇔ 3, 3 ⇔ 4 and 4 ⇒ 2 of clutch to clutch shift. Lock-Up Control INFOID:0000000001717856 The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the pressure control solenoid valve C, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. Lock-up Operation Condition Table Selector lever D position Lever switch (A/T indicator) OFF (D) L position ON (4) OFF (3) ON (2) 3 2 Gear position 5 4 4 Lock-up × – × × – Slip lock-up × × × – – TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL Lock-up Control System Diagram SCIA2612E Revision: August 2007 AT-34 2008 Quest A/T CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Lock-up Released • In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the pressure control solenoid valve C and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. A B Lock-up Applied • In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the pressure control solenoid valve C and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. AT SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the pressure control solenoid valve C is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-Clutched State • The current output from the TCM to the pressure control solenoid valve C is varied to steadily increase the pressure control solenoid valve C pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip Lock-up Control • In the slip region, the pressure control solenoid valve C current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low degree of opening. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-35 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction INFOID:0000000001717857 The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". OBD-II Function for A/T System INFOID:0000000001717858 The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II INFOID:0000000001717859 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) INFOID:0000000001717860 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( with CONSULT-III or GST) CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710 etc. These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) • 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. • Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-III can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-III (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-III display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". Revision: August 2007 AT-36 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 B Items Freeze frame data 2 3 A AT Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) D 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. E HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-III, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following. • If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. • When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-III or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". • Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) • 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) • Freeze frame data • 1st trip freeze frame data • System readiness test (SRT) codes • Test values How to erase DTC (with CONSULT-III) • If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-III “ON” and touch “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F G H I J K L M How to erase DTC (with GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-117, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function". How to erase DTC (no tools) The O/D OFF indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Erase DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Erase DTC with ECM. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". Revision: August 2007 AT-37 2008 Quest N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000001717861 DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check. • If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-23, or see EC-616. 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U Revision: August 2007 AT-38 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000001717862 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority B chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT AT-77. Priority Detected items (DTC) 1 U1000 CAN communication line 2 Except above D Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000001717863 The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunction in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode, a driving condition is selected according to the malfunctioning location, and line pressure is set at the maximum. For this reason, the customer will be subjected to uncomfortable “slipping” or “poor acceleration” of the vehicle. In that case, handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-41). E F G FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible. NOTE: Line pressure is set at the maximum in fail-safe mode. Although gear position differs depending on the type of fail-safe modes, CONSULT-III indicates “5th”. H I DTC Malfunction items Fail-safe* P0500 Vehicle speed signal No learning control. P0613 TCM processor Fail-safe mode 4 P0705 PNP switch Fail-safe mode 4 P0710 ATF temperature sensor circuit Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits lock-up control. P0711 ATF temperature sensor function Sets ATF temperature data at 111°C (232°F) after 15 minutes. Inhibits lock-up control. P0717 Turbine revolution sensor Fail-safe mode 1 P0722 Revolution sensor Uses vehicle speed signal from combination meter as a substitute. Inhibits learning control. P0726 Engine speed signal input circuit performance Fail-safe mode 1 P0731 1st gear function No 1st gear, no control for N-D shift. P0732 2nd gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0733 3rd gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0734 4th gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0735 5th gear function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0744 Lock-up function Fail-safe mode 1 P0745 Pressure control solenoid valve A Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. Revision: August 2007 AT-39 J K L M N 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC Malfunction items Fail-safe* P0750 Shift solenoid valve A Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 1 • Fail-safe mode 7. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0755 Shift solenoid valve B Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 1 • Fail-safe mode 8 P0760 Shift solenoid valve C Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 2 • Fail-safe mode 5 • Fail-safe mode 9 P0762 Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON Fail-safe mode 2. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. Shift solenoid valve D Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 1 • Fail-safe mode 10. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0770 Shift solenoid valve E Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. • Fail-safe mode 6. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0775 Pressure control solenoid valve B Fail-safe mode 3 P0780 Shift function Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts input torque to prevent clutch slipping. P0795 Pressure control solenoid valve C Fail-safe mode 1 P0797 Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON Fail-safe mode 1 P0825 Lever switch No lever switch control. P0882 TCM power input signal Fail-safe mode 1 P1726 Electric throttle control • The accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a predetermined accelerator angle to make driving possible. • No lock-up, no learning control. CAN communication circuit Any one of fail-safe modes • Fail-safe mode 1 • Fail-safe mode 1. Also, ECM restricts engine torque to prevent clutch slipping. • No learning control. • No lock-up, no learning control, no special shift mode control. P0765 U1000 *: For fail-safe modes 1 to 10, refer to "Fail-safe mode list". Fail-safe mode list Fail-safe mode Fail-safe mode 1 Fail-safe mode 2 (CONSULT-III displays “8”) Fail-safe mode 3 Selector lever Pressure control solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve Gear position*1 A B C D E A B C D position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position 3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Revision: August 2007 AT-40 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Fail-safe mode Fail-safe mode 4 Fail-safe mode 5 Fail-safe mode 6 Fail-safe mode 7 Fail-safe mode 8 (CONSULT-III displays “1”) Fail-safe mode 9 (CONSULT-III displays “8”) Fail-safe mode 10 (CONSULT-III displays “6”) Selector lever Pressure control solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve Gear position*1 A B C D E A B C D position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF D position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 2nd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF D position 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 2nd ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse*2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF D position 5th OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF L position (2nd)*3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position 4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF D position 4th OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF L position 3rd OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF R position Reverse*2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF A B AT D E F G H I J *1: CONSULT-III indicates “5th”. *2: Reverse gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 3.342) *3: 3rd gear ratio difference (Gear ratio: 2.301) K How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000001717864 INTRODUCTION L The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed signal, ECM (throttle opening) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. SAT631IB Revision: August 2007 AT-41 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the "WORK FLOW". SAT632I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on the example (Refer to "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart") should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins. SEF234G WORK FLOW A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to "Information From Customer") and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (Refer to "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart"), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. Work Flow Chart Revision: August 2007 AT-42 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I J K L SCIA8466E *1. "Information From Customer" *2. "Diagnostic Worksheet Chart" *3. AT-39 *4. AT-49 *5. AT-49, AT-49 *6. AT-49 *7. AT-69 *8. AT-36 *9. AT-38 *10. AT-77 *11. AT-192 *12. AT-193 *13. AT-59 *14. AT-36 *15. AT-77 *16. AT-192 *17. EC-43 M N O DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information From Customer P KEY POINTS • • • • WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model WHEN..... Date, Frequencies WHERE..... Road conditions HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Revision: August 2007 AT-43 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN Trans. Model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) ❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th) ❏ Intermittent ( ❏ No down-shift times a day) ❏ 2nd → 3rd (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) ❏ Lock-up malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position) ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kick down ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit Diagnostic Worksheet Chart 1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-39 ❏ A/T fluid inspection 2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) ❏ State ❏ Amount AT-49 ❏ Stall test, time lag test and line pressure test ❏ Stall test ❏ Engine ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Direct clutch ❏ 1st and reverse brake 3 ❏ B5 brake ❏ One-way clutch No. 2 ❏ Oil pump ❏ Oil strainer ❏ Oil leak for each range circuit AT-49, AT49 ❏ Time lag test ❏ Oil pump ❏ Oil strainer ❏ Oil leak for “D” position circuit ❏ Oil leak for “R” position circuit ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Direct clutch ❏ 1st and reverse brake ❏ One-way clutch No. 2 ❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part: Revision: August 2007 AT-44 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-49 A Check before engine is started ❏ The O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on. AT-193. ❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-54 B ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-80. ❏ TCM processor. AT-82. ❏ PNP switch. AT-83. ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-88. ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-93. ❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-98. ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-102. ❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-106. ❏ 1st gear function. AT-108. ❏ 2nd gear function. AT-111. ❏ 3rd gear function. AT-116. ❏ 4th gear function. AT-120. ❏ 5th gear function. AT-123. ❏ Lock-up function. AT-127. ❏ Shift function. AT-170. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-130. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-165. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-174. ❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-135. ❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-140. ❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-145. ❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-155. ❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-160. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-179. ❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-150. ❏ Lever switch circuit. AT-184. ❏ TCM power input signal. AT-188. ❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-192. ❏ CAN communication. AT-77. ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4-1. 4 AT D E F G H I J Idle inspection 4-2. ❏ Engine cannot be started in “P” and “N” position. AT-194. ❏ In “ P” position, vehicle moves when pushed. AT-195. ❏ In “N” position, vehicle moves. AT-195. ❏ Large shock when shifted from “N” to “D” position. AT-196. ❏ Vehicle does not creep backward in “R” position. AT-196. ❏ Vehicle does not creep forward in “D” or “L” position. AT-197. K AT-54 L Driving tests M Part 1 4-3. ❏ Vehicle cannot be started from D1. AT-198. ❏ A/T does not shift: D1 → D2. AT-199. ❏ A/T does not shift: D2 → D3. AT-200. ❏ A/T does not shift: D3 → D4. AT-201. ❏ A/T does not shift: D4 → D5. AT-202. ❏ A/T does not perform lock-up. AT-203 ❏ A/T does not hold lock-up condition. AT-203. ❏ Lock-up is not released. AT-204. AT-55 N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-45 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Part 2 ❏ Vehicle cannot be started from D1. AT-198. ❏ A/T does not shift: D1 → D2. AT-199. ❏ A/T does not shift: D2 → D3. AT-200. ❏ A/T does not shift: D3 → D4. AT-201. AT-57 Part 3 ❏ A/T does not shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, when lever switch “OFF”→“ON”. AT-205. ❏ A/T does not shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, when selector lever “D”→“L”. AT-206. ❏ A/T does not shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, when lever switch “OFF”→“ON”. AT-207. ❏ A/T does not shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, when release accelerator pedal. AT-207. ❏ Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake. AT-208. ❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-57 ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-80. ❏ TCM processor. AT-82. ❏ PNP switch. AT-83. ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor circuit. AT-88. ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor performance. AT-93. ❏ Turbine revolution sensor circuit. AT-98. ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) circuit. AT-102. ❏ Engine speed input circuit performance. AT-106. ❏ 1st gear function. AT-108. ❏ 2nd gear function. AT-111. ❏ 3rd gear function. AT-116. ❏ 4th gear function. AT-120. ❏ 5th gear function. AT-123. ❏ Lock-up function. AT-127. ❏ Shift function. AT-170. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve A. AT-130. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve B. AT-165. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C. AT-174. ❏ Shift solenoid valve A. AT-135. ❏ Shift solenoid valve B. AT-140. ❏ Shift solenoid valve C. AT-145. ❏ Shift solenoid valve D. AT-155. ❏ Shift solenoid valve E. AT-160. ❏ Pressure control solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-179. ❏ Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON. AT-150. ❏ Lever switch circuit. AT-184. ❏ TCM power input signal. AT-188. ❏ Electric throttle control system. AT-192. ❏ CAN communication. AT-77. ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4 4-3 5 ❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction parts. 6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-49 7 ❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.) AT-59 8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. AT-69AT-74 Revision: August 2007 AT-46 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T Electrical Parts Location INFOID:0000000001717865 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P WCIA0583E Revision: August 2007 AT-47 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. A. TCM (transmission control module 2. (view with glove box removed) A. Shift lock button B. Overdrive control switch C. Shift position indicator 3. O/D OFF indicator 4. 5. A. Turbine revolution sensor F37 B. Terminal cord assembly F30, F62 C. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch F29 (view with battery tray removed) Revolution sensor F38 (view with intake air duct removed) 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector E20 Revision: August 2007 AT-48 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000001717866 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O BCWA0594E Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001717867 A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid leakage and fluid level check • Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid". Revision: August 2007 AT-49 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Fluid condition check Inspect the fluid condition. Fluid status Conceivable Cause Required Operation Varnished (viscous varnish state) Clutch, brake scorched Replace the A/T fluid and check the A/T main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.) Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid Replace the A/T fluid and check for places where water is getting in. Large amount of metal powder mixed in Unusual wear of sliding parts within A/T Replace the A/T fluid and check for improper operation of the A/T. SAT638A STALL TEST Stall test procedure 1. 2. 3. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. SAT647B 4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA7463E 5. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. 6. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the accelerator pedal. 7. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. 8. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. 9. Cool down the A/T fluid. CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat step 5 through 9 with selector lever in “L” and “R” positions. Revision: August 2007 AT-50 SAT514G 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Stall speed: 2,430 - 2,730 rpm A Judgement stall test B Selector lever position D, L Possible cause R AT O • Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) • Forward clutch (slipping) • One-way clutch No. 2 D O H • Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) • Direct clutch (slipping) • 1st and reverse brake (slipping) L L • Engine or torque converter one-way clutch H • Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) • B5 brake (slipping) • Oil pump • Oil strainer (clogging) • Oil leak for each range circuit H Stall rotation H E F G O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value H L: Stall speed lower than standard value TIME LAG TEST Time lag test procedure 1. 2. 3. I Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Check the amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. J K L SAT647B M 4. 5. 6. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. Engine start, apply foot brake. Measure time lag by using stopwatch from moment when shift lever is shifted in “N” to “D” position and “N” to “R” position until moment slightly shock can be felt. CAUTION: • Make sure to take 3 measurement and take the average value. • Make sure to keep interval for more than one minute between time lag tests. (That purpose is to remove clutch/brake pressure was left unfinished.) Time lag: “N” to “D” position: “N” to “R” position: Revision: August 2007 N O P SCIA7463E Less than 0.7 sec. Less than 1.2 sec. AT-51 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Judgement time lag test Result of time lag test Possible cause Longer than standards “N” to “D” position • Line pressure is low (pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction, primary regulator valve malfunction) • Forward clutch (slipping) • One-way clutch No. 2 • Oil leak for “D” range circuit Longer than standards “N” to “R” position • • • • • • Line pressure is low Direct clutch (slipping) 1st and reverse brake (slipping) Oil leak for “R” range circuit Oil pump Oil strainer (clogging) LINE PRESSURE TEST Line pressure test port Location of line pressure test port is show in the figure. SCIA2669E Line pressure test procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary. NOTE: The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving. Switch of A/C and light etc. are off. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [SST: (J34301-C)] and adapter [SST: (J-45542)]. CAUTION: Make sure to check no oil leak after installing oil pressure gage. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA7463E Revision: August 2007 AT-52 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and the stall speed. CAUTION: • Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during measurement. • When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer to "STALL TEST". 7. After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the specified torque. A B AT :7.4 N·m (0.75 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G D CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. Line pressure E Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Engine speed D, L positions F R position At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88) At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287) G Judgement of line pressure test Judgement H Possible cause Higher than standards both “D”, “L” and “R” positions • Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction • Primary regulator valve malfunction Lower than standards both “D”, “L” and “R” positions • • • • • I Pressure control solenoid valve A malfunction Primary regulator valve malfunction Oil pump malfunction B5 bake malfunction Oil leak for each range circuit malfunction Lower than standards only “D” position • Oil leak for “D” range circuit malfunction • Forward clutch malfunction Lower than standards only “R” position • Oil leak for “R” range circuit malfunction • Direct clutch malfunction • 1st and reverse brake malfunction J K L ROAD TEST Description • The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. • The road test is perform in the following three stages. 1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-54. 2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-54. 3. Cruise test • Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-55, AT57, AT-57. M N O P SAT786A Revision: August 2007 AT-53 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items. • Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete. SAT496G Check Before Engine Is Started INFOID:0000000001717868 1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Does O/D OFF indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds? YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Perform the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". 3. Go to AT-54, "Check at Idle". No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-193, "O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On". Check at Idle INFOID:0000000001717869 1.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Turn ignition switch “START”. Does the engine start? YES >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-194, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position". 2.CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". (Do not start engine.) 2. Move selector lever in “D”, “L” or “R” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “START”. Does the engine start in either position? YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-194, "Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position". No >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Move selector lever to “P” position. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. 5. Engage the parking brake. When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move? YES >> Enter a check mark at “In P position, vehicle moves when pushed” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Start the engine. Revision: August 2007 AT-54 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Move selector lever to “N” position. 3. Release the parking brake. Does vehicle move forward or backward? YES >> Enter a check mark at “In N position, vehicle moves” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 5. A B 5.CHECK SHIFT SHOCK 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “D” position. When the transaxle is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock? YES >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 6. AT D E 6.CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. Does the vehicle creep backward? YES >> GO TO 7. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. F G 7.CHECK “D” AND “L” POSITIONS FUNCTIONS H Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transaxle is put into the “D” and “L” positions. Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” and “L” positions? YES >> Go to AT-55, "Cruise Test - Part 1", AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 2", and AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 3". No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep forward in D or L position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. I J Cruise Test - Part 1 INFOID:0000000001717870 1.CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1 1. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid. Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 3. Move selector lever to “P” position. 4. Start the engine. 5. Move selector lever to “D” position. 6. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle. With CONSULT-III Read off the gear positions. Starts from D1? YES >> GO TO 2. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 AT-55 2008 Quest K L M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3.CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 4. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 5.CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 6.CHECK LOCK-UP When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the lock-up status. Does it lock-up? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 7.CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD Check lock−up hold. Does it maintain lock-up status? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not hold lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 8.CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate. With CONSULT-III Read the lock-up status. Revision: August 2007 AT-56 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Does lock-up cancel? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57). NO >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57). Cruise Test - Part 2 B INFOID:0000000001717871 1.CHECK STARTING FROM D1 1. 2. A AT Move selector lever the “D” position. Accelerate at half throttle. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position. Does it start from D1? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. D E F 2.CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the correct speed. • Refer to AT-58. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. G H I 3.CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transaxle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the correct speed. • Refer to AT-58. J With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, accelerator angle and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. K 4.CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE M When the transaxle changes speed D2 → D3, return the accelerator pedal. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-57). NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Cruise Test - Part 3 O P Confirm lever switch is in OFF position. (O/D OFF indicator lamp “OFF”.) Confirm gear selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D5. Release accelerator pedal. Push lever switch while driving in D5. (O/D OFF indicator lamp “ON” and A/T indicator “4”.) With CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 N INFOID:0000000001717872 1.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D5 TO D4) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L AT-57 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does A/T shift from D5 to D4? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, when lever switch OFF → ON” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 2.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO L3) 1. 2. 3. Driving in D4. Move selector lever from D to L position while D4. Release accelerator pedal. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does A/T shift from D4 to L3? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, when selector lever D → L position” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (L3 TO L2) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Confirm lever switch is in OFF position. (A/T indicator “3”.) Confirm gear selector lever is in L position. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to L3. Release accelerator pedal. Push lever switch while driving in L3. (A/T indicator “2”.) With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does A/T shift from L3 to L2? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, when lever switch OFF → ON” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4.CHECK SHIFT DOWN (L2 TO L1) Release accelerator pedal. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does A/T shift from L2 to L1? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, when release accelerator pedal” on diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 5.CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Depress and release accelerator pedal while driving in L1. With CONSULT-III Read the gear position. Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in L1 position? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Perform the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis. Shift Schedule INFOID:0000000001717873 VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS Revision: August 2007 AT-58 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Accelerator angle Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) A D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1 100 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 90 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 80 % 65 (40) 100 (62) 152 (94) 227 (141) 178 (111) 142 (88) 86 (53) 45 (28) 70 % 53 (33) 80 (50) 125 (78) 185 (115) 147 (91) 137 (85) 68 (42) 38 (24) 60 % 46 (29) 71 (44) 106 (66) 156 (97) 108 (67) 78 (48) 46 (29) 22 (14) 50 % 43 (27) 67 (42) 97 (60) 145 (90) 98 (61) 68 (42) 40 (25) 18 (11) 40 % 38 (24) 60 (37) 89 (55) 130 (81) 89 (55) 56 (35) 30 (19) 13 (8) 30 % 33 (21) 50 (31) 70 (43) 108 (67) 68 (42) 45 (28) 25 (16) 12 (7) 20 % 23 (14) 35 (22) 49 (30) 77 (48) 49 (30) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) 10 % 17 (11) 29 (18) 39 (24) 58 (36) 44 (27) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) B AT D E F G H VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP I Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 50 % 190 (118) 137 (85) 15% 101 (63) 72 (45) 0-8% 73 (45) 70 (43) J K • Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. • Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. • Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. L VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP Accelerator angle 0 - 10 % Gear position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 45 (28) 42 (26) 5th 58 (36) 55 (34) M N • Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. • Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine. O • Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001717874 Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble any RE5F22A model transaxle parts unless specified to do so in AT section. Revision: August 2007 AT-59 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment ON vehicle With selector lever in D position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle With selector lever in R position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle AT-66 4. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 5. Control valve assembly AT-222 6. Torque converter AT-224 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 8. B5 brake AT-259 9. One-way clutch No.2 AT-232 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Time lag is large. (“N” →“ D” position) OFF vehicle Revision: August 2007 AT-221, AT219 3. TCM AT-66 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 6. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 7. Control valve assembly AT-222 8. Torque converter AT-232 9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 10. 1st and reverse brake AT-232 11. B5 brake AT-259 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed. AT-49 AT-221, AT219 3. TCM 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment ON vehicle Reference page AT-221, AT219 3. TCM AT-66 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 6. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 8. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 9. Control valve assembly AT-222 10. Accumulator AT-232 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. TCM AT-66 5. Control valve assembly AT-222 6. Accumulator AT-232 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 AT-60 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Condition ON vehicle Time lag is large. (“N” →“ R” position) OFF vehicle Engine does not start in “N”, “P” position. Engine starts in positions other than “N” or “P”. Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N” → “D”, “R”. Engine stall when vehicle slow down. Acceleration is extremely poor. ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle Gear does not change from D1 → D2. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. TCM AT-66 5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 6. Control valve assembly AT-222 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 8. 1st and reverse brake AT-232 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-3, SC-10 2. Control cable adjustment AT-221 3. PNP switch AT-83 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-3, SC-10 2. Control cable adjustment AT-221 3. PNP switch AT-83 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 4. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 5. Control valve assembly AT-222 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 4. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 5. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 6. Control valve assembly AT-222 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment AT-221, AT219 3. Engine speed signal AT-106 4. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 8. Control valve assembly 9. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle 10. 2nd brake Revision: August 2007 Reference page B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O AT-222 AT-251, AT257 AT-251 11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-257 12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-232 AT-61 A 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Condition ON vehicle Gear does not change from D2 → D3. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Gear does not change from D3 → D4. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Gear does not change from D4 → D5. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 8. Control valve assembly AT-222 9. U/D brake AT-232 10. B5 brake AT-259 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 7. Control valve assembly AT-222 8. U/D clutch AT-232 9. U/D brake AT-232 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Control valve assembly AT-222 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 8. 2nd coast brake 9. One-way clutch No.1 ON vehicle In D range, does not downshift to 1st gear. Revision: August 2007 AT-251, AT257 AT-257 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 6. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 7. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 8. Control valve assembly AT-222 9. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle Reference page AT-251, AT257 10. 2nd brake AT-251 11. One-way clutch No.1 AT-257 12. One-way clutch No.2 AT-232 AT-62 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Condition ON vehicle In D range, does not downshift to 2nd gear. OFF vehicle ON vehicle In D range, does not downshift to 3rd gear. OFF vehicle ON vehicle In D range, does not downshift to 4th gear. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 8. Control valve assembly AT-222 9. U/D brake AT-232 10. B5 brake AT-259 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 7. Control valve assembly AT-222 8. U/D clutch AT-232 9. U/D brake AT-232 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Control valve assembly AT-222 7. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 OFF vehicle 8. 2nd coast brake 9. One-way clutch No.1 Does not lock-up or lock-up is not released. ON vehicle Reference page AT-251, AT257 B AT D E F G H I J K L AT-257 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Stop lamp switch signal AT-209 3. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 4. TCM AT-66 5. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 6. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 7. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 8. Control valve assembly AT-222 OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter A M N O AT-224 P Revision: August 2007 AT-63 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Condition ON vehicle Engine brake does not work. Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. TCM AT-66 3. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 4. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 5. Control valve assembly AT-222 6. 2nd coast brake OFF vehicle Shift point is high or low. ON vehicle ON vehicle Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position) OFF vehicle ON vehicle Large shock. (“N” →“ R” position) OFF vehicle Revision: August 2007 Reference page AT-251, AT257 7. U/D brake AT-232 8. B5 brake AT-259 1. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 2. Engine speed signal AT-106 3. Electric throttle control signal AT-192 4. Revolution sensor AT-102 5. TCM AT-66 6. Control valve assembly AT-222 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 7. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 8. TCM AT-66 9. Control valve assembly AT-222 10. Accumulator AT-232 11. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 5. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 6. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-165 7. TCM AT-66 8. Control valve assembly AT-222 9. Forward and direct clutch assembly AT-232 10. 1st and reverse brake AT-232 AT-64 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Shock is too large when shift up. Shock is too large for coast down. Condition ON vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 5. TCM power input signal AT-188 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-165 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 14. TCM AT-66 15. Control valve assembly AT-222 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 5. TCM power input signal AT-188 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-165 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 14. TCM AT-66 15. Control valve assembly AT-222 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-65 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Shock is too large for kick down. Condition ON vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “R”,“N” or“ D” position. OFF vehicle With selector lever in P position, vehicle does not enter parking condition or, with selector lever in another position, parking condition is not cancelled. Vehicle runs with transaxle in “ P” position. Vehicle runs with transaxle in “N” position. ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Actual engine torque signal AT-106 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-88 5. TCM power input signal AT-188 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-135 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-140 8. Shift solenoid valve C AT-145 9. Shift solenoid valve D AT-155 10. Shift solenoid valve E AT-160 11. Pressure control solenoid valve A AT-130 12. Pressure control solenoid valve B AT-165 13. Pressure control solenoid valve C AT-174 14. TCM AT-66 15. Control valve assembly AT-222 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. Control valve assembly AT-222 3. Torque convertor AT-232 4. Parking component AT-225 5. Gear system AT-232 1. PNP switch AT-83 2. Control cable adjustment AT-221 3. Control valve assembly AT-222 4. Parking component AT-225 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. PNP switch AT-83 3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment AT-221, AT219 4. Line pressure test AT-49 1. Fluid level and state AT-49 2. PNP switch AT-83 3. Control cable and PNP switch adjustment 4. Line pressure test TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value AT-221, AT219 AT-49 INFOID:0000000001717875 TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT WCIA0537E Revision: August 2007 AT-66 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TCM INSPECTION TABLE A Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Terminal Wire color Item Condition Data (Approx.) B When turning ignition switch ON. 1 Y/W 0 - 1.5V A/T PV IGN relay AT When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V 3 L CAN-H 4 P CAN-L – 14 B Ground – 0V Lever switch: “ON” position 0V Lever switch: “OFF” position Battery voltage 16 O Lever switch – – D – E F 21 G/B Pressure control solenoid valve B ground When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. G When turning ignition switch ON. 22 L 0V Battery voltage H Revolution sensor power supply When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V I When turning ignition switch ON. 23 G Battery voltage Turbine revolution sensor power supply J When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V Selector lever: “P”, “R” and “L” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage K 24 25 26 27 28 BR G/R W/B Y/R W PNP switch A Shift solenoid valve B Shift solenoid valve D M N O Power supply (Memory back-up) Pressure control solenoid valve C ground Revision: August 2007 L When turning ignition switch OFF. Battery voltage When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V AT-67 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire color Item 29 B/W Revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119Hz 30 R Turbine revolution sensor When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371Hz 31 G/Y PNP switch B Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage 32 P/B PNP switch C Selector lever: “D” and “L” position 0V 33 34 R/V P PNP switch PN Condition Data (Approx.) Other than the above Battery voltage Selector lever: “P” and “N” position Battery voltage Other than the above 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V Power supply 35 L/Y Pressure control solenoid valve A When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz 36 W/L Pressure control solenoid valve B When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 0V 37 38 39 40 41 42 R/B Y/B Y/B L/G R/Y LG/B Shift solenoid valve C Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) Power supply (A/T PV IGN relay) Pressure control solenoid valve A ground Fluid temperature sensor When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 4.0V When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 3.0V When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.8V When ATF temperature 100°C (212°F) 0.5V Fluid temperature sensor ground Revision: August 2007 – AT-68 0V 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire color 43 V/W 45 O/B 46 W/G 47 BR/Y 48 B Item Condition PNP switch PA Pressure control solenoid valve C Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve E Data (Approx.) Selector lever: “P”, “N” and “L” position 0V Other than the above Battery voltage When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300Hz When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. 0V When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V Ground – A B AT D E 0V CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000001717876 F CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. G A/T diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is displayed. Displays TCM self-diagnosis results. Displays TCM input/output data in real time. I CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER H Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". J TCM part number can be read. WORK SUPPORT MODE K Work item Work item INITIALIZATION Condition Under the following conditions. • Ignition switch “ON”. • Selector lever “P” or “N” position. • Engine not running. • Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH). • Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. • Malfunction was not detected. L Usage Use to initialize TCM in a case of replacing transaxle or TCM. Refer to AT-7, "Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement". M N SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC place check marks for results on the “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-41, "How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". Reference pages are provide following the items. O Display item list P Revision: August 2007 AT-69 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > X: Applicable TCM self-diagnosis —: Not applicable OBD-II (DTC) MIL indicator Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... O/D OFF indicator lamp*3 “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III or GST CAN COMM CIRCUIT • When TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. X U1000*4 U1000*4 VEH SPD SE/CIRMTR • ECM detects a malfunction in vehicle speed sensor signal, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN communication. X P0500 P0500 TCM PROCESSOR • TCM processor is malfunctioning. — P0613 — PNP SW/CIRC • PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern X P0705 P0705 ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC • Normal voltage is not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on. • During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low. X P0710 P0710 FLUID TEMP SEN • ATF temperature signal does not change. — P0711 P0711*2 TURBINE SENSOR • Signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. • Unexpected signal input during running. X P0717 P0717 VHCL SPEED SENA/T • Signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. • Unexpected signal input during running. X P0722 P0722 ENG SPD INP PERFOR • Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. X P0726 P0726 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN • A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0731 P0731*2 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN • A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0732 P0732*2 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN • A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0733 P0733*2 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN • A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0734 P0734*2 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN • A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. X P0735 P0735*2 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN • A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. X P0744 P0744*2 X P0745 P0745 X P0750 P0750 X P0755 P0755 X P0760 P0760 X P0762 P0762*2 X P0765 P0765 X P0770 P0770 X P0775 P0775 PC SOL A(L/ PRESS) SHIFT SOL A SHIFT SOL B • Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. • TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. SHIFT SOL C SFT SOL C STUCK ON SHIFT SOL D SHIFT SOL E PC SOL B(SFT/ PRS) • Condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. • Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. • TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Revision: August 2007 AT-70 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC) MIL indicator Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... O/D OFF indicator lamp*3 “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III lamp , “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III or GST X P0780 P0780*2 SHIFT • No rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting time is long. • Shifting ends immediately. • Condition in malfunction engine revs up usually shifting. PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) • Normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. • TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. X PC SOL C STC ON • Condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular. X P0797 P0797*2 GEAR LEVER SWITCH • Lever switch signal is incorrectly input due to open, short, and so on. — P0825 — TCM POWER INPT SIG • Voltage supplied to TCM is too low. — P0882 P0882 ELEC TH CONTROL • The electric throttle control system for ECM is in a malfunction, after that TCM inputs the result by CAN commnication. X P1726 P1726 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. A *1 B AT D P0795 P0795 E F G H • No NG item has been detected. — X X I *1: Refer to AT-38, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)". *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. J *3: Indicate it when performing TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS). Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". *4: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-77. K DATA MONITOR MODE NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). Display item list NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-III performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. Revision: August 2007 AT-71 L M N O P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > X: Standard —: Not applicable Monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h) X X X VHCL/S SE-MTR* (km/h) X — X FLUID TEMP SE* (V) X — X FLUID TEMP* (°C) — — X COOLAN TEMP* (°C) — — X BATTERY VOLT* (V) X — X ENGINE SPEED* (rpm) X X X Signal input with CAN communication line. TURBINE REV* (rpm) X — X Turbine revolution computed from signal of turbine revolution sensor is displayed. OUTPUT REV* (rpm) — — X Output revolution computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. PNP SW A* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW B* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW C* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW PA* (ON/OFF) X — X PNP SW PN (ON/OFF) X — X MANU MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X NON M-MODE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X UP SW* (ON/OFF) X — X DOWN SW* (ON/OFF) X — X RANGE SLCT SW (ON/OFF) X — X This means lever switch. BRAKE SW* (ON/OFF) X — X This means stop lamp switch signal via CAN communication line. CLSO THL POS (ON/OFF) X — X ASCD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X ASCD OD OFF (ON/OFF) X — X ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X TCS GEAR HOLD (ON/OFF) X — X TCS SFT CNG (ON/OFF) — — X Requests TCM for shift schedule change. LOCK-UP* (ON/OFF) — — X Always “ON” during lock-up, regardless of types. SLCT LVR POSI* — — X Displays “##” when TCM can not judge selector lever position. MANU GR POSI — — X Always displays “##”. X Indicates current gear position. When setting in P or N position, indicate by shift solenoid valves. When setting in R position, displays “1”. Displays “##” when TCM can not judge gear position. Monitored item (Unit) GEAR* Revision: August 2007 — — AT-72 Remarks Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM. Displays status of engine coolant temperature. Signal input with CAN communication line. Not mounted but displayed. Signal input with CAN communication line. 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item selection A ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU NEXT GR POSI — — X Displays “##” when TCM can not judge gear position. REDCT DEM SIG (ON/OFF) — — X Displays status of engine torque reduction demand signal. TC SLIP RATIO — — X SLIP REV (rpm) — — X Difference between engine speed and torque converter input shaft speed. Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM. For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. Monitored item (Unit) Remarks ACCELE ANGLE* (%) X X X PC SOL A OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL A MON* (A) — X X PC SOL B OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL B MON* (A) — X X PC SOL C OUT* (A) — — X PC SOL C MON* (A) — X X SFT SOL A OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL B OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL C OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL D OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL E OUT* (ON/OFF) — — X SFT SOL A MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL B MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL C MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL D MON* (ON/OFF) — X X SFT SOL E MON* (ON/OFF) — X X G-RATE (G) — — X F-SAFE MODE (OK/1 to 10) — X X Numbers indicate types of fail-safe modes. Refer to AT-39, "Fail-Safe". VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — X Signal input with CAN communication line. X The details for data of shift schedule are as follow: NOR: Normal mode UP1: Upslope 1 mode UP2: Upslope 2 mode (steeper then “UP1”) DOWN: Downslope mode HOT1: Hot 1 mode HOT2: Hot 2 mode (higher temperature than “HOT1”) SHIFT SCHDULE Voltage (V) Revision: August 2007 — — — — AT-73 X B AT D E F G H I J K L Displays the value measured by the voltage probe. 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Frequency (Hz) — — X DUTY-HI (high) (%) — — X DUTY-LOW (low) (%) — — X PLS WIDTH-HI (ms) — — X PLS WIDTH-LOW (ms) — — X Monitored item (Unit) Remarks The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. *: Also, the items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data mode of self-diagnostic results only if DTC is detected. For details, refer to "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE". ACTIVE TEST MODE Test item Test item Condition Description SHIFT SOLENOID A SHIFT SOLENOID B SHIFT SOLENOID C SHIFT SOLENOID D SHIFT SOLENOID E PRESSURE CONTROL SOL A PRESSURE CONTROL SOL B Under the following conditions. • Ignition switch “ON” • Selector lever “P” or “N” position • Engine not running • Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH). • Ignition voltage is more than 10.5V. • Malfunction was not detected.* Each shift solenoid operate ON/OFF by receiving the drive signal. Each pressure control solenoid is activated by receiving the drive signal. PRESSURE CONTROL SOL C *: Except when P0711, P0731, P0732, P0733, P0734, P0735, P0744, P0762, P0780 or P0797 is detected. NOTE: Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, “TEST IS STOPPED” will be displayed. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717877 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-III) Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-117, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function". OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Refer to EC-59, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)". TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-III) Refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Description As a method for locating the suspect system, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output and the O/D OFF indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC. Diagnostic procedure 1.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position. 3. Wait 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Revision: August 2007 AT-74 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO AT-193, "O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On". A 2.JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE: After turning ignition switch “ON” (at step 6), perform within 2 seconds (while O/D OFF indicator lamp come B on.). 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. AT 2. Push shift lock release button. 3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. 4. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.) 5. Depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.) D 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 7. Move the selector lever to the “N” position and release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.) 8. Move the selector lever to “D” position and depress brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “ON”.) E 9. Release brake pedal. (Stop lamp switch signal “OFF”.) 10. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. F >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to "Judgement self-diagnosis code". If the system does not go into self-diagnostics, refer to AT-209, "TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate". G H >> DIAGNOSIS END Judgement self-diagnosis code When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by longer illumination of the indicator lamp. I J K L M N O P SCIA2758E ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS Revision: August 2007 AT-75 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. • However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by erasing the memory using the CONSULT-III. Revision: August 2007 AT-76 2008 Quest DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description A INFOID:0000000001717878 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission AT with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717879 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-III or U1000 without CONSULT-III is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units. Possible Cause D E INFOID:0000000001717880 F Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717881 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 6 seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-79, "Diagnosis Procedure". J WITH GST K Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III”. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-77 2008 Quest DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - CAN INFOID:0000000001717882 BCWA0604E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-78 2008 Quest DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717883 A 1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with in CONSULT-III. Is any malfunction of the "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" indicated? Yes >> Print out CONSULT-III screen, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart". No >> INSPECTION END B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-79 2008 Quest DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description INFOID:0000000001717884 The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717885 • This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SE/CIR-MTR” with CONSULT-III or 15th judgement flicker without CONSULT-III is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717886 • Harness or connectors (The signal circuit is open or shorted.) • Combination meter • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • Wheel sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717887 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL/S SE-A/T: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more ACCELE ANGLE: 10 % or less If DTC is detected, go to AT-80, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717888 1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. 3. Drive vehicle, and then make sure that the values of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” and “VHCL/S SE-MTR” are same. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 3.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-5. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 AT-80 2008 Quest DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. A 4.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-80, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. B AT 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-81 2008 Quest DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0613 TCM PROCESSOR Description INFOID:0000000001717889 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. SCIA2820E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717890 • This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “TCM PROCESSOR” with CONSULT-III is detected when TCM processor is malfunctioning. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717891 TCM DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717892 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-82, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717893 1.CHECK DTC With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-82, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". Is the “TCM PROCESSOR” displayed again? YES >> Replace TCM. NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 AT-82 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH A Description INFOID:0000000001717894 • The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission range switch. • The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. • TCM judges the selector lever position by the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. B Selector lever PNP switch A PNP switch B PNP switch C PNP switch PA PNP switch PN P ON OFF OFF ON ON R ON ON OFF OFF OFF N OFF ON OFF ON ON D OFF ON ON OFF OFF L ON ON ON ON OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic Possible Cause E F G INFOID:0000000001717896 • Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch DTC Confirmation Procedure H INFOID:0000000001717897 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 4. 5. D INFOID:0000000001717895 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-III or P0705 without CONSULT-III is detected when PNP switch signals input with impossible pattern. 1. 2. 3. AT I J K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Move selector lever to each position. SLCT LVR POSI: “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” or “L” position Wait for at least 5 consecutive seconds at each position. If DTC is detected, go to AT-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-83 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW INFOID:0000000001717898 BCWA0595E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-84 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717899 A 1.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III B Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Move selector lever to “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position and check the value of “PNP SW A”, “PNP SW B”, AT “PNP SW C”, “PNP SW PA” and “PNP SW PN”. Selector lever “PNP SW A” “PNP SW B” “PNP SW C” “PNP SW PA” “PNP SW PN” P ON OFF OFF ON ON R ON ON OFF OFF OFF N OFF ON OFF ON ON D OFF ON ON OFF OFF L ON ON ON ON OFF 1. 2. D E F Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Move selector lever to “P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position and check voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground. G H Connector No. Selector lever E142 Terminal 24 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 Ground 43 Ground P 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V R 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage N Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V D Battery voltage 0V 0V 0V Battery voltage L 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V I SCIA2826E J K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. N Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the PNP switch connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check the voltage between PNP switch connector terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Voltage F29 1 - Ground Battery voltage O P Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between PNP switch connector terminal 1 and ground. SCIA3576E Revision: August 2007 AT-85 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector Terminal Voltage F29 1 - Ground 0V 7. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch • Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-3. 3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND PNP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector and PNP switch connector. Check continuity between TCM connector terminals 24, 31, 32, 43 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Continuity 24 - Ground Selector lever: “P”, “R” and “L” position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “R”, “N”, “D” and “L” position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “D” and “L” position Yes Other than the above No Selector lever: “P”, “N” and “L” position Yes Other than the above No 31 - Ground E142 32 - Ground 43 - Ground ALDIA0205ZZ 4. If OK, check the following. Harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. Open or short-circuit in the harness between combination meter and TCM. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch A, B, C, PA. • Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of PNP switch. • PNP switch. Refer to AT-87, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-83, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK TCM 1. 2. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-86 2008 Quest DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717900 B PNP SWITCH 1. Check continuity between PNP switch terminals while moving selector lever. Refer to the following table. AT D E SCIA3577E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected. (Refer to step 1 above.) If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. (Refer to step 1 above.) If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to AT-219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment". If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-87 2008 Quest DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000001717901 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717902 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-III or P0710 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage not applied to ATF temperature sensor due to open, short, and so on. - When during running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717903 • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717904 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Warm up engine so that engine coolant temperature is more than 50°C (122°F). COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F) Maintain the following conditions for at least 16 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to drive vehicle.) COOLAN TEMP: More than 50°C (122°F) SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-90, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-88 2008 Quest DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS INFOID:0000000001717905 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0340E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-89 2008 Quest DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717906 1.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. Item name Fluid temperature sensor 1. 2. Condition Display value (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V Without CONSULT-III Start engine. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42 while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-89, "Wiring Diagram - AT FTS". Connector E142 Terminal 41 - 42 (ground) Temperature Voltage (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V SCIA2871E 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Disconnect the TCM connector. 5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42. Connector E142 Terminal 41 - 42 (ground) Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ 4. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2872E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-90 2008 Quest DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. A Connector Terminal F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ B AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2873E D 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY E Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 5.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. G Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance 10°C (°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ H I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". J SCIA4323E 6.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-88, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. L M 7.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection N O INFOID:0000000001717907 P A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Revision: August 2007 K AT-91 2008 Quest DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 4. Temperature Resistance 10°C (°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ If NG, repair and replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". SCIA4323E Revision: August 2007 AT-92 2008 Quest DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE Description A INFOID:0000000001717908 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic B INFOID:0000000001717909 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT • Diagnostic trouble code “FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-III or P0711 without CONSULT-III is detected when ATF temperature signal does not change. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717910 • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor E DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717911 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F G H WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 15 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) VHCL SPEED SE-A/T: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-95, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST I J K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-93 2008 Quest DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - FTSP INFOID:0000000001717912 BCWA0341E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-94 2008 Quest DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717913 A 1.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. B AT Item name Fluid temperature sensor 1. 2. Condition Display value (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V D E Without CONSULT-III Start engine. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals 41 and 42 while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-94, "Wiring Diagram - AT FTSP". F G Connector E142 Terminal 41 - 42 (ground) Temperature Voltage (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 100°C (212°F) 0.5V H I SCIA2871E 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 4. Disconnect the TCM connector. 5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. J K 2.CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between terminals 41 and 42. L M Connector E142 Terminal 41 - 42 (ground) Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ 4. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. N O SCIA2872E P 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-95 2008 Quest DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.31 kΩ 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2873E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. Connector Terminal F30 4-8 Temperature Resistance 10°C (°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". SCIA4323E 6.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-93, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717914 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor. Revision: August 2007 AT-96 2008 Quest DTC P0711 FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 4 and 8. A Connector Terminal F30 4-8 4. Temperature Resistance 10°C (°F) 5.80 - 7.09kΩ 110°C (°F) 0.23 - 0.26kΩ B If NG, repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". AT SCIA4323E D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-97 2008 Quest DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000001717915 • The turbine revolution sensor detects forward clutch drum rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transaxle. The revolution sensor is located on the output side of the automatic transaxle. With the two sensors, input and output rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. • Hall IC is installed in turbine revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with input rpm speed. Size of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed. SCIA2830E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717916 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE SENSOR” with CONSULT-III or P0717 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When signal from turbine revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. - When unexpected signal input during running. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717917 • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Turbine revolution sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717918 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 consecutive minute. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: Except 1st position If DTC is detected, go to AT-100, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-98 2008 Quest DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - TRSC INFOID:0000000001717919 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0342E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-99 2008 Quest DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717920 1.CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. Monitor item Condition TURBINE REV 1. 2. During driving (lock-up ON) Specification Approximately matches the engine speed. Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 23 and 30. Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal Condition E142 23 - 30 (ground) When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 371 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2925E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and turbine revolution sensor. • Turbine revolution sensor. Refer to AT-100, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-98, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717921 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR 1. Remove turbine revolution sensor. Revision: August 2007 AT-100 2008 Quest DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity) 3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at turbine revolution sensor tip [gap is within 5 mm (0.20 in)]. CAUTION: Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot change. 4. Signal Voltage (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V A B AT SCIA3578E D If NG, replace turbine revolution sensor. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-101 2008 Quest DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000001717922 • The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. • Hall IC is installed in revolution sensor, it itself handles in pulse of rectangular wave signal and transmits it to TCM due to hall effect. TCM recognizes the pulse with vehicle speed. Size of output doesn't depend on a rotation number and is fixed. SCIA2830E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717923 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN-A/T” with CONSULT-III or P0722 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When signal from revolution sensor does not input due to open, short, and so on. - When unexpected signal input during running. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717924 • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Revolution sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717925 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE-A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE-MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive minutes. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) VHCL/S SE-A/T: 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If the check result is NG, go to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-102 2008 Quest DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSATC INFOID:0000000001717926 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0596E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-103 2008 Quest DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717927 1.CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE-AT”. Monitor item Condition VHCL/S SE-AT 1. 2. Specification Approximately matches the speedometer reading. During driving Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 22 and 29. Connector Terminal E142 22 - 29 (ground) Data (Approx.) Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear. 119 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2928E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and revolution sensor. • Revolution sensor. Refer to AT-104, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-102, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717928 REVOLUTION SENSOR 1. Remove revolution sensor. Revision: August 2007 AT-104 2008 Quest DTC P0722 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance to the terminal. (Do not mistake polarity) 3. Inspect the voltage of HIGH and LOW signal by shaking magnetic body from side to side at revolution sensor tip [gap is within 5mm (0.20 in)]. CAUTION: Make sure to shake direction from bolt hole to sensor-self when shaking magnetic body. If not, voltage value cannot change. 4. Signal Voltage (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V A B AT SCIA3578E D If NG, replace revolution sensor. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-105 2008 Quest DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE Description INFOID:0000000001717929 The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717930 • This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “ENG SPD INP PERFOR” with CONSULT-III or 14th judgement flicker without CONSULT-III is detected when malfunction is detected in engine speed signal, actual engine torque signal or torque reduction signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717931 • Harness or connectors (The signal circuit is open or shorted.) • ECM DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717932 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL/S SE-A/T: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 % SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-106, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717933 1.CHECK DTC WITH ECM With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-9. • If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-77. 1. 2. 2.CHECK DTC WITH TCM With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. While monitoring “ENGINE SPEED”, check for engine speed change corresponding to “ACCELE ANGLE”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit. • Refer to EC-591. 1. 2. 3. Revision: August 2007 AT-106 2008 Quest DTC P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK DTC A Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-106, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. B 4.CHECK TCM AT 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-107 2008 Quest DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION Description INFOID:0000000001717934 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 1st A B C D E D ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) L ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717935 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0731 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717936 • Shift solenoid valve A (Off stick.) • 2nd brake • 2nd coast brake • One-way clutch No.1 • One-way clutch No.2 • Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717937 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 1st gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-110, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-108 2008 Quest DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - 1STSIG INFOID:0000000001717938 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0344E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-109 2008 Quest DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717939 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0750. Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following item: 2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake". 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 3.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-108, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Revision: August 2007 AT-110 2008 Quest DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION A Description INFOID:0000000001717940 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as AT control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 2nd A B C D E D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) L OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic D E INFOID:0000000001717941 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0732 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. F Possible Cause G INFOID:0000000001717942 • Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve C (Off stick.) • Shift solenoid valve D (On stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve C (On stick.) • U/D brake • 2nd coast brake • 2nd brake • One-way clutch No.1 • One-way clutch No.2 • B5 brake • Hydraulic control circuit H I J K L M DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717943 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 3. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 2nd position Revision: August 2007 O P WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. N AT-111 2008 Quest DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 2nd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-115, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-112 2008 Quest DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - 2NDSIG INFOID:0000000001717944 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0597E Revision: August 2007 AT-113 2008 Quest DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCWA0598E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-114 2008 Quest DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717945 A 1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D 2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E F G Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following item: U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". 2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - H I J K 4.CHECK DTC L Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-111, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-115 2008 Quest DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION Description INFOID:0000000001717946 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 3rd A B C D E D OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) L OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717947 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0733 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717948 • Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve C (Off stick.) • Shift solenoid valve D (Off stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) • B5 brake • U/D clutch • U/D brake • Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717949 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 3rd gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-119, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 AT-116 2008 Quest DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RDSIG INFOID:0000000001717950 B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0599E Revision: August 2007 AT-117 2008 Quest DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCWA0313E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-118 2008 Quest DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717951 A 1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F 3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following item: B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232. U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H I 4.CHECK DTC J Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-119 2008 Quest DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION Description INFOID:0000000001717952 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 4th D A B C D E OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717953 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0734 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717954 • Shift solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve B (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Forward and direct clutch assembly • U/D clutch • U/D brake • 2nd coast brake • One-way clutch No.1 • Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717955 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 4th position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 4th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Revision: August 2007 AT-120 2008 Quest DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. A Wiring Diagram - AT - 4THSIG INFOID:0000000001717956 B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0345E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-121 2008 Quest DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717957 1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0745. Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following item: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232. One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 4.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-120, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Revision: August 2007 AT-122 2008 Quest DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION A Description INFOID:0000000001717958 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fifth gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as AT control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Shift solenoid valve Gear position 5th D A B C D E OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717959 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 5TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0735 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot be shifted to the 5th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause D E F INFOID:0000000001717960 G • Shift solenoid valve B (Off stick.) • Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) • Shift solenoid valve E (On stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A (On stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve B (On stick.) • Forward and direct clutch assembly • Direct clutch • 2no coast brake • One-way clutch No.1 • Hydraulic control circuit H I J K DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717961 L CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. M N WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 5th position [Vehicle speed and accelerator angle: 5th gear position retainable condition. (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".)] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-126, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 AT-123 2008 Quest O P DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Wiring Diagram - AT - 5THSIG INFOID:0000000001717962 BCWA0346E Revision: August 2007 AT-124 2008 Quest DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O BCWA0347E P TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-125 2008 Quest DTC P0735 A/T 5TH GEAR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717963 1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following item: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. 2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 4.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Revision: August 2007 AT-126 2008 Quest DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description A INFOID:0000000001717964 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, AT etc. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717965 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-III or P0744 without CONSULT-III is detected when A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. Possible Cause F G DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717967 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 3. 4. E INFOID:0000000001717966 • Shift solenoid valve D (Off stick.) • Pressure control solenoid valve C (Off stick.) • Torque converter clutch • Hydraulic control circuit 1. 2. D Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 20°C (68°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Accelerate vehicle to more than 100 km/h (62 MPH) and maintain the following conditions for at least 12 consecutive seconds. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 5th position SLIP REV: Less than 100 rpm ACCELE ANGLE: More than 5 % LOCK-UP: ON (Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".) [Vehicle speed: Constant speed of more than 100 km/h (62 MPH).] Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-129, "Diagnosis Procedure". H I J K L M N O WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 P AT-127 2008 Quest DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG INFOID:0000000001717968 BCWA0348E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-128 2008 Quest DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717969 A 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0765. Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC P0795. Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D 3.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following item: Torque converter clutch. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G 4.CHECK DTC H Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-129 2008 Quest DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) Description INFOID:0000000001717970 • The pressure control solenoid valve A is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. • The pressure control solenoid valve A regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. SCIA2831E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717971 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL A(L/PRESS)” with CONSULT-III or P0745 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717972 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717973 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-130 2008 Quest DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/A INFOID:0000000001717974 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0349E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-131 2008 Quest DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717975 1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-III After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “PC SOL A OUT” and “PC SOL A MON”. Monitor item • PC SOL A OUT • PC SOL A MON 1. 2. Display value (Approx.) Condition When releasing accelerator pedal with setting selector lever to “P” position. 1.00 A When depressing accelerator pedal fully setting selector lever to “P” position. 0.32 A Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40. Connector Terminal Condition Data (Approx.) E142 35 - 40 When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2908E 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 35 and 40. Connector Terminal E142 35 - 40 Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2909E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-132 2008 Quest DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. A Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 3-6 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. AT SCIA2910E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY D Check the following. E • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. G H Connector Terminal F72 1-2 Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". J SCIA4326E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID K VALVE A Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve A. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". L M 7.CHECK DTC N Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-130, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. O 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: August 2007 AT-133 P 2008 Quest DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A (LINE PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717976 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F72 1-2 4. Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4326E Revision: August 2007 AT-134 2008 Quest DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A A Description INFOID:0000000001717977 • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve A is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve A D1, L 1 D2, L2 D3, L3 D4 D5 Reverse ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) B AT D On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717978 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL A” with CONSULT-III or P0750 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause G H DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717980 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 5. F INFOID:0000000001717979 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Shift solenoid valve A 1. 2. 3. 4. E I J K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd position If DTC is detected, go to AT-137, "Diagnosis Procedure". L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-135 2008 Quest DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A INFOID:0000000001717981 BCWA0350E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-136 2008 Quest DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717982 A 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL A OUT” and “SFT SOL A MON”. B AT Monitor item Condition • SFT SOL A OUT • SFT SOL A MON Indication When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. OFF D E Without CONSULT-III 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. F Connector E142 Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.) 46 - Ground When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in 1st gear.) Battery voltage G When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. H 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2875E I 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 46 and ground. Connector Terminal E142 46 - Ground K Resistance (Approx.) Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) L 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. M SCIA2877E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-137 2008 Quest DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 2 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2878E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F67 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4334E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve A. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-135, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717983 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Revision: August 2007 AT-138 2008 Quest DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F67 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. A B If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". AT D SCIA4334E E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-139 2008 Quest DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description INFOID:0000000001717984 • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve B is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve B D1 , L 1 D2, L 2 D3, L 3 D4 D5 Reverse ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717985 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL B” with CONSULT-III or P0755 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001717986 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Shift solenoid valve B DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717987 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd and 4th ⇒ 5th position If DTC is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-140 2008 Quest DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B INFOID:0000000001717988 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O BCWA0351E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-141 2008 Quest P DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717989 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL B OUT” and “SFT SOL B MON”. Monitor item Condition • SFT SOL B OUT • SFT SOL B MON 1. 2. Indication When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. OFF Without CONSULT-III Drive vehicle. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.) 25 - Ground When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in 1st or 5th gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2880E 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 25 and ground. Connector Terminal E142 25 - Ground Resistance (Approx.) Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2881E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-142 2008 Quest DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. A Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. AT SCIA2882E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY D Check the following. E • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. G H Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F68 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". J SCIA4335E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B K Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve B. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". L M 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. N O 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection P INFOID:0000000001717990 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Revision: August 2007 AT-143 2008 Quest DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve B harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F68 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4335E Revision: August 2007 AT-144 2008 Quest DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C A Description INFOID:0000000001717991 • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve C D1, L 1 D2, L2 D3, L3 D4 D5 Reverse ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) B AT D On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717992 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL C” with CONSULT-III or P0760 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause G H DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717994 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 5. F INFOID:0000000001717993 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Shift solenoid valve C 1. 2. 3. 4. E I J K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th position If DTC is detected, go to AT-147, "Diagnosis Procedure". L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-145 2008 Quest DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/C INFOID:0000000001717995 BCWA0352E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-146 2008 Quest DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717996 A 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”. B AT Monitor item • SFT SOL C OUT • SFT SOL C MON Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF D E Without CONSULT-III 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. F Connector E142 Voltage (Approx.) Terminal Condition 37 - Ground When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) G Battery voltage H When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V SCIA2884E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT J 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 37 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2885E N 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. O P Revision: August 2007 AT-147 2008 Quest DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2886E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F69 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4338E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-145, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717997 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C Revision: August 2007 AT-148 2008 Quest DTC P0760 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F69 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. A B If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". AT D SCIA4338E E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-149 2008 Quest DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON Description INFOID:0000000001717998 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. • This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve C is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve C D1 , L 1 D2, L 2 D 3, L3 D4 D5 Reverse ON (Open) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717999 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SFT SOL C STUCK ON” with CONSULT-III or P0762 without CONSULT-III is detected when condition of shift solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718000 • Shift solenoid valve C (On stick.) • Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718001 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 3rd ⇒ 4th position ACCELE ANGLE: More than 10 % If DTC is detected, go to AT-152, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-150 2008 Quest DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/CS INFOID:0000000001718002 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O BCWA0353E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-151 2008 Quest P DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718003 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL C OUT” and “SFT SOL C MON”. Monitor item • SFT SOL C OUT • SFT SOL C MON 1. 2. Condition Indication When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. OFF Without CONSULT-III Drive vehicle. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.) 37 - Ground When shift solenoid valve C operates. (When driving in 1st, 2nd, 3rd or reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve C does not operate. 0V SCIA2884E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 37 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 37 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2885E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-152 2008 Quest DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. A Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 4 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. AT SCIA2886E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY D Check the following. E • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. G H Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F69 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". J SCIA4338E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C K Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. L M 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-150, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. N O 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection P INFOID:0000000001718004 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C Revision: August 2007 AT-153 2008 Quest DTC P0762 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve C harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F69 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4338E Revision: August 2007 AT-154 2008 Quest DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D A Description INFOID:0000000001718005 • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve D is a normally open, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve D D1, L 1 D2, L2 D3, L3 D4 D5 Reverse OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) B AT D On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718006 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL D” with CONSULT-III or P0765 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause G H DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718008 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 5. F INFOID:0000000001718007 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Shift solenoid valve D 1. 2. 3. 4. E I J K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 2nd ⇒ 3rd position If DTC is detected, go to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure". L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-155 2008 Quest DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/D INFOID:0000000001718009 BCWA0600E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-156 2008 Quest DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718010 A 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL D OUT” and “SFT SOL D MON”. B AT Monitor item Condition • SFT SOL D OUT • SFT SOL D MON Indication When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. OFF D E Without CONSULT-III 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. F Connector E142 Voltage (Approx.) Terminal Condition 26 - Ground When shift solenoid valve D operates. (When driving in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear.) G Battery voltage H When shift solenoid valve D does not operate. 0V SCIA2889E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. I 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D CIRCUIT J 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 26 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 26 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2890E N 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. O P Revision: August 2007 AT-157 2008 Quest DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2891E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F70 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4339E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve D. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-155, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001718011 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D Revision: August 2007 AT-158 2008 Quest DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve D harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F70 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. A B If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". AT D SCIA4339E E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-159 2008 Quest DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E Description INFOID:0000000001718012 • Shift solenoid valves are installed directly in control valve body. The shift solenoid valves operates of ON and OFF by the control signal from TCM. Combinations of 5 shift solenoid valves, A, B, C, D and E, shifts gear positions. • The shift solenoid valve E is a normally closed, ON-OFF type solenoid. Gear position Shift solenoid valve E D 1, L1 D2, L 2 D3, L 3 D4 D5 Reverse OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) NOTE: The condition of shift solenoid valve E is ON (Open) with shifting D2 ⇔ D3 (L2 ⇔ L3) and D3 ⇔ D4. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718013 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOL E” with CONSULT-III or P0770 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718014 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Shift solenoid valve E DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718015 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Move selector lever between “N” and “R”. SLCT LVR POSI: “N”⇔“R” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-160 2008 Quest DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/E INFOID:0000000001718016 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O BCWA0355E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-161 2008 Quest P DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718017 1.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “SFT SOL E OUT” and “SFT SOL E MON”. Monitor item Condition • SFT SOL E OUT • SFT SOL E MON 1. 2. Indication When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) ON When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. OFF Without CONSULT-III Drive vehicle. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.) 47 - Ground When shift solenoid valve E operates. (When driving in reverse gear.) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve E does not operate. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2896E 2.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal 47 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 47 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2897E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-162 2008 Quest DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground. A Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 5 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. AT SCIA2898E 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY D Check the following. E • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 5.CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. G H Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F71 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". J SCIA4340E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E K Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and shift solenoid valve E. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". L M 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-160, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. N O 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection P INFOID:0000000001718018 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E Revision: August 2007 AT-163 2008 Quest DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". 2. Disconnect shift solenoid valve E harness connector. 3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F71 1 - Ground Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 11 - 16 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4340E Revision: August 2007 AT-164 2008 Quest DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) Description A INFOID:0000000001718019 B • The pressure control solenoid valve B is normally high, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. • The pressure control solenoid valve B controls linear shift pressure by control signal from TCM and controls 2nd coast brake directly under 2nd, 3rd, 4th and direct clutch directly under 5th and reverse. AT D E SCIA2831E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718020 F • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)” with CONSULT-III or P0775 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. G Possible Cause H INFOID:0000000001718021 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Pressure control solenoid valve B I DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718022 J NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure". L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-165 2008 Quest DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/B INFOID:0000000001718023 BCWA0356E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-166 2008 Quest DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718024 A 1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-III After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “PC SOL B OUT” and “PC SOL B MON”. Monitor item AT Display value (Approx.) Condition • PC SOL B OUT • PC SOL B MON B Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A Other than the above. 0.30 A D E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36. F Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal Condition E142 36 - 21 (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. G 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. H SCIA2911E I 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 21 and 36. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 36 - 21 (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω J K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. M SCIA2912E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 7. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F30 3-7 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2913E Revision: August 2007 AT-167 2008 Quest DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal F73 1-2 Condition Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω Temperature: 20°C (68°F) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4341E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve B. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-165, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001718025 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B 1. 2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve B harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-168 2008 Quest DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B (SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. A Connector Terminal F73 1-2 4. Condition Temperature: 20°C (68°F) Resistance (Approx.) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω B If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". AT SCIA4341E D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-169 2008 Quest DTC P0780 SHIFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0780 SHIFT Description INFOID:0000000001718026 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. • This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718027 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT” with CONSULT-III or P0780 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When no rotation change occurs between input (turbine revolution sensor) and output (revolution sensor) and shifting time is long. - When shifting ends immediately. - When engine revs up unusually during shifting. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718028 • Shift solenoid valve D (Off error.) • Shift solenoid valve E (Off error.) • Pressure control solenoid valve A (On/Off error.) • Pressure control solenoid valve B (On/Off error.) • Pressure control solenoid valve C (On/Off error.) • Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718029 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Make sure that ATF temperature is within the range below. FLUID TEMP: More than 60°C (140°F) If out of range, drive the vehicle to warm up the fluid. Drive vehicle and allow the following conditions. SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position GEAR: 1st ⇒ 2nd ⇒ 3rd ⇒ 4th ⇒ 5th position (Vehicle speed: Refer to AT-292, "Shift Schedule".) If DTC is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-170 2008 Quest DTC P0780 SHIFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SFTFNC INFOID:0000000001718030 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0601E Revision: August 2007 AT-171 2008 Quest DTC P0780 SHIFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCWA0602E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-172 2008 Quest DTC P0780 SHIFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718031 A 1.CHECK EACH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0765 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D” (Refer to AT-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0770 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E” (Refer to AT-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 2.CHECK EACH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT D Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for the following DTCs. • “DTC P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A” (Refer to AT-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B” (Refer to AT-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".) • “DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C” (Refer to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F 3.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace transmission wire or control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire" or AT222, "Control Valve Assembly". G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-173 2008 Quest DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) Description INFOID:0000000001718032 • The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. • The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and torque converter clutch. • Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. • When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. SCIA2833E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718033 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)” with CONSULT-III or P0795 without CONSULT-III is detected under the following conditions. - When normal voltage is not applied to solenoid due to open, short, and so on. - When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718034 • Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) • Pressure control solenoid valve C DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718035 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Run engine for at least 13 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-176, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Revision: August 2007 AT-174 2008 Quest DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/C INFOID:0000000001718036 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0357E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-175 2008 Quest DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718037 1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-III After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”. Monitor item • PC SOL C OUT • PC SOL C MON 1. 2. Display value (Approx.) Condition Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A Other than the above. 0.20 A Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal Condition E142 45 - 28 (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2914E 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 45 - 28 (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2915E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2916E Revision: August 2007 AT-176 2008 Quest DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY A Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F74 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω D E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". F G SCIA4342E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID H VALVE C Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". 7.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-174, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. L 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M N INFOID:0000000001718038 O PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Revision: August 2007 J K 8.CHECK TCM Component Inspection I AT-177 P 2008 Quest DTC P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C (TCC AND SHIFT PRESSURE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F74 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω 4. If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4342E Revision: August 2007 AT-178 2008 Quest DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON Description A INFOID:0000000001718039 • This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. • This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT • The pressure control solenoid valve C is normally low, 3-port linear pressure control solenoid. • The pressure control solenoid valve C is activated to control the apply and release of the 2nd brake and 1st and reverse brake, and D torque converter clutch. • Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. E • When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. F SCIA2833E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718040 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “PC SOL C STC ON” with CONSULT-III or P0797 without CONSULT-III is detected when condition of pressure control solenoid valve C is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio or lock-up status is irregular. Possible Cause H INFOID:0000000001718041 I • Pressure control solenoid valve C (On stick.) • Hydraulic control circuit J DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718042 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Run engine for at least 4 consecutive minutes at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnosis Procedure". M WITH GST N Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. O P Revision: August 2007 AT-179 2008 Quest DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PC/CS INFOID:0000000001718043 BCWA0358E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-180 2008 Quest DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718044 A 1.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-III After warming up the engine and transaxle, turn ignition switch “OFF”. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out the value of “PC SOL C OUT” and “PC SOL C MON”. Monitor item AT Display value (Approx.) Condition • PC SOL C OUT • PC SOL C MON B Selector lever: Manual shift gate position 1.00 A Other than the above. 0.20 A D E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Start the engine. Check pulse between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. F Data (Approx.) Connector Terminal Condition E142 45 - 28 (Ground) When engine is running with idle speed and setting selector lever to “P” position. G 300 Hz OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. H SCIA2914E I 2.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals 28 and 45. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) E142 45 - 28 (Ground) Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω J K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. M SCIA2915E 3.CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY WITH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 2 and 5. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F62 2-5 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA2916E Revision: August 2007 AT-181 2008 Quest DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and terminal cord assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F74 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". SCIA4342E 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY AND PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between terminal cord assembly and pressure control solenoid valve C. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace transmission wire. Refer to AT-222, "Transmission wire". 7.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer toAT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001718045 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C 1. 2. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect pressure control solenoid valve C harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-182 2008 Quest DTC P0797 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C STUCK ON < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. A Connector Terminal Condition Resistance (Approx.) F74 1-2 Temperature: 20°C (68°F) 5.0 - 5.6 Ω 4. B If NG, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". AT SCIA4342E D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-183 2008 Quest DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000001718046 Lever switch is installed in A/T device. It sends lever switch position (ON or OFF) signals to TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718047 • This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “GEAR LEVER SWITCH” with CONSULT-III is detected when TCM monitors lever switch signal, and judges as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718048 • Harness or connectors (Lever switch circuit is open or shorted.) • Lever switch (built into A/T device) DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718049 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position. Wait for at least 30 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-186, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 AT-184 2008 Quest DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - LVRSW INFOID:0000000001718050 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0606E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-185 2008 Quest DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718051 1.CHECK LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “RANGE SLCT SW”. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between the TCM connector terminal and ground. 1. 2. 3. Connector No. Terminal E143 16 - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Lever switch: “ON” position 0V Lever switch: “OFF” position Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA3580E 2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T DEVICE (LEVER SWITCH) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check the continuity between TCM connector terminal 16 and ground. Connector No. Terminal E143 16 - Ground Condition Continuity Lever switch: “ON” position Yes Lever switch: “OFF” position No 4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA3581E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Open or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T device (lever switch). • Open or short-circuit in the harness for ground of lever switch. • Lever switch. Refer to AT-187, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-184, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK TCM 1. 2. Check TCM input/output signal. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Revision: August 2007 AT-186 2008 Quest DTC P0825 LEVER SWITCH CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001718052 B LEVER SWITCH Check continuity between A/T device (lever switch) terminals 1 and 2. Switch position Continuity ON Yes OFF No AT D E SCIA3582E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-187 2008 Quest DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL Description INFOID:0000000001718053 When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the selfdiagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001718054 • This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. • Diagnostic trouble code “TCM POWER INPT SIG” with CONSULT-III or P0882 without CONSULT-III is detected when voltage supplied to TCM is too low. Possible Cause INFOID:0000000001718055 • Harness or connectors (Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) • A/T PV IGN relay DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001718056 CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “TRANSMISSION” with CONSULT-III. Start engine. Depress accelerator pedal or drive vehicle and maintain the following condition for at least 20 consecutive seconds. TURBINE REV: More than 800 rpm If DTC is detected, go to AT-190, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 AT-188 2008 Quest DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN INFOID:0000000001718057 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P BCWA0605E TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value" . Revision: August 2007 AT-189 2008 Quest DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718058 1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground. Connector Terminal Voltage (Approx.) E143 1 - Ground 0 - 1.5V 27 - Ground E142 34 - Ground 38 - Ground Battery voltage 39 - Ground 3. 4. SCIA2930E Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between TCM terminals and ground. Connector Terminal Voltage (Approx.) E143 1 - Ground 0V 27 - Ground Battery voltage 34 - Ground 0V 38 - Ground 0V 39 - Ground 0V E142 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following: • Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27 • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39 • 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • 10A fuse (No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R) • Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3. • A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-191, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14, 48 and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA2933E 4.CHECK DTC Check again. Refer to AT-188, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". Revision: August 2007 AT-190 2008 Quest DTC P0882 TCM POWER INPUT SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. A 5.CHECK TCM B 1. Check TCM input/output signal. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Component Inspection AT INFOID:0000000001718059 D A/T PV IGN RELAY 1. 2. E Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. F Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. G If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay. SCIA1245E H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-191 2008 Quest DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1726 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000001718060 This DTC is displayed with other DTCs regarding ECM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTCs displayed. Refer to AT-39. When this DTC is detected, lock-up operation and learning control are canceled. Revision: August 2007 AT-192 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On A INFOID:0000000001718061 SYMPTOM: B O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE AT 1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-77. NO >> GO TO 2. D 2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN". Connector Terminal Voltage (Approx.) E143 1 - Ground 0 - 1.5V F G 27 - Ground E142 34 - Ground 38 - Ground H Battery voltage 39 - Ground 3. 4. SCIA2930E Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT PWR/IN". Connector Terminal Voltage (Approx.) E143 1 - Ground 0V 27 - Ground Battery voltage 34 - Ground 0V 38 - Ground 0V 39 - Ground 0V E142 L M 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N Check the following: • Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 27 • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 1, 34, 38 and 39 • 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • 10A fuse (No. 48, located in the IPDM E/R) • Ignition switch. Refer to PG-3. • A/T PV IGN relay. Refer to AT-191, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. O P 4.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Revision: August 2007 J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. I AT-193 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect the TCM harness connector. 3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 14, 48 and ground. Refer to AT-189, "Wiring Diagram - AT - PWR/IN". Continuity should exist. 4. If OK, check harness for short-circuit to ground or the power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA2933E 5.CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter". 6.SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Engine Cannot Be Started in "P" or "N" Position INFOID:0000000001718062 SYMPTOM: • Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position. • Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “L” or “R” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check starting system. Refer to SC-10. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. • Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". 3.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? Revision: August 2007 AT-194 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83. NO >> INSPECTION END In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed A INFOID:0000000001718063 B SYMPTOM: Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed. AT DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT D Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83. NO >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. • Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". F G 3.SYMPTOM CHECK H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves INFOID:0000000001718064 J SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position. K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL L Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. M 2.CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-83. NO >> GO TO 3. N O 3.CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. • Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". P 4.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Revision: August 2007 AT-195 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Large Shock ("N" to "D" Position) INFOID:0000000001718065 SYMPTOM: A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Accumulator. Refer to AT-232. Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position INFOID:0000000001718066 SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed. Revision: August 2007 AT-196 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. B 2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION AT Check the control cable and PNP switch position. • Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment". D E 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. F G 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. 1st and reverse brake. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". Torque convertor. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I J 5.CHECK TCM K 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position INFOID:0000000001718067 SYMPTOM: P Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” or “L” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 AT-197 O 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK CONTROL CABLE AND PNP SWITCH POSITION Check the control cable and PNP switch position. • Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable and PNP switch position. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment" or AT219, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment". 3.CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate pressure control solenoid valve A? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-130. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". Torque convertor. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1 INFOID:0000000001718068 SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-196, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in "R" Position". 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Revision: August 2007 AT-198 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check the line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning item. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". B 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM AT 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J A/T Does Not Shift: D1→ D2 INFOID:0000000001718069 K SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE L 1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position", AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1". M N 2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. O P 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. Revision: August 2007 AT-199 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following items: One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". 2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D2→ D3 INFOID:0000000001718070 SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position",AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1". 2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following items: Revision: August 2007 AT-200 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A B 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT D 6.CHECK SYMPTOM E Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F A/T Does Not Shift: D3→ D4 INFOID:0000000001718071 G SYMPTOM: • The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed. • The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up. H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position", AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1". 2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I J K Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. L 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS M Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. N 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM O 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". Revision: August 2007 AT-201 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: D4→ D5 INFOID:0000000001718072 SYMPTOM: • The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed. • The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” or “L” position and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in "D" or "L" Position",AT-198, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started from D1". 2.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following items: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: August 2007 AT-202 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up INFOID:0000000001718073 AT SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. F 2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. I J 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Torque converter. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L 5.CHECK TCM M 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N O 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition INFOID:0000000001718074 SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds. Revision: August 2007 AT-203 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Torque converter. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Lock-up Is Not Released INFOID:0000000001718075 SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS). Revision: August 2007 AT-204 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 4. AT 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: Torque converter. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 6.CHECK SYMPTOM I Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" INFOID:0000000001718076 K SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D5 to D4, when pushed lever switch to “ON” position. (O/D OFF indicator lamp “ON” and A/T indicator “4”.) L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL M Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. N 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS O Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. P 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. - Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following items: Forward and direct clutch assembly. Refer to AT-232. Revision: August 2007 AT-205 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear, When Selector Lever "D" → "L" Position INFOID:0000000001718077 SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from D4 to L3, when changed selector lever from “D” to “L” position. (A/T indicator “3”.) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: U/D clutch. Refer to AT-232. U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: August 2007 AT-206 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear, When Lever Switch "OFF" → "ON" INFOID:0000000001718078 AT SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from L3 to L2, when pushed lever switch to “ON” position. (A/T indicator “2”.) D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. F 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. H 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. 3. Check the following items: U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K 4.CHECK TCM L 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 5.CHECK SYMPTOM N Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. O A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear, When Release Accelerator Pedal INFOID:0000000001718079 SYMPTOM: A/T does not shift from L2 to L1, when releasing accelerator pedal. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Revision: August 2007 AT-207 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. Check the following items: 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". 2nd brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake". One-way clutch No.1. Refer to AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". One-way clutch No.2. Refer to AT-232. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. - 4.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake INFOID:0000000001718080 SYMPTOM: No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear in “L” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate shift solenoid valve E, electric throttle control system? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-160, AT-192. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Revision: August 2007 AT-208 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-222, "Control Valve Assembly". 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-232. A 3. Check the following items: 2nd coast brake. Refer to AT-251, "Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake", AT-257, "One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1". B U/D brake. Refer to AT-232. B5 brake. Refer to AT-259, "Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake". OK or NG AT OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK TCM D 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E 5.CHECK SYMPTOM F Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate INFOID:0000000001718081 SYMPTOM: O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good. H I DESCRIPTION • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch The park/neutral (PNP) switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. • Stop lamp switch signal Detects the brake pedal state (stop lamp switch is ON or OFF) and sends a signal via CAN communication line to the TCM. • Closed throttle position signal ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator pedal position sensor, and sends the signal via CAN communication line to TCM. J K L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK PARK/ NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT M Check the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-83. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. N 2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT O Check the stop lamp switch circuit. Refer to BRC-10 (with TCS/ABS) or BRC-50 (with VDC/TCS/ABS). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P 3.CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. Revision: August 2007 AT-209 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK DATA MONITOR (WITH CONSULT-III) With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “A/T” with “DATA MONITOR” mode in CONSULT-III. 3. Depress or release accelerator pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “CLSD THL POS”. 4. Depress or release brake pedal and read out ON/OFF signaling action of the “BRAKE SW”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-66, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Value". 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-77. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the TCM. Revision: August 2007 AT-210 2008 Quest A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A Description INFOID:0000000001718082 • The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: B With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. AT The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. • The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. D Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location INFOID:0000000001718083 E F G H I J K L BCIA0017E M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-211 2008 Quest A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AT - SHIFT INFOID:0000000001718084 BCWA0603E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718085 SYMPTOM 1: • Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. • Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. • Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: Revision: August 2007 AT-212 2008 Quest A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position. • Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”. A 1.CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE B Check the key interlock cable for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-217. AT 2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION D Check the selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". E 3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. F Connect A/T device harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Selector lever is set in “P” position. Check operation sound. G Condition Brake pedal Operation sound When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and selector lever is set in “P” position. Depressed Yes Released No H OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. I 4.CHECK POWER SOURCE J 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check the voltage between A/T device harness connector M34 terminal 5 and ground. Condition Brake pedal Data (Approx.) When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position. Depressed Battery voltage Released 0V K L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. SCIA3437E 5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-213 2008 Quest A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4. Condition Continuity When brake pedal is depressed Yes When brake pedal is released No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-5. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SCIA2126E 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. • 10A fuse [No.1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness connector E38 terminal 3. • Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector E38 terminal 4 and diode-4 harness connector E149 terminal 2. • Harness for short or open between diode-4 harness connector E149 terminal 1 and A/T device harness connector M34 terminal 5. • Diode-4 • Ignition switch (Refer to PG-3.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M34 terminal 6 and ground. Continuity should exist. 4. Connect A/T device harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3438E Revision: August 2007 AT-214 2008 Quest SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718086 CONTROL DEVICE B AT D E F G H I WDIA0357E 1. Selector knob 2. Cluster lid C 4. Shift lock solenoid 5. A/T device harness connector 3. J Selector lever K SELECTOR KNOB Removal • ⇐ : Front of vehicle 1. Slide the selector knob cover (1) downwards with fingers to reveal the selector knob clip (2). 2. Gently pry the selector knob clip (2) outward to remove it using suitable tool. 3. Lift the selector knob up to remove. L M N O LDIA0198E Installation 1. 2. 3. P Set the selector knob in place on the selector lever and push the selector knob downward. Install the selector knob clip into the groove on the selector knob. Slide the selector knob cover upwards to conceal the selector knob clip. CONTROL CABLE Revision: August 2007 AT-215 2008 Quest SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WDIA0358E 1. Selector lever Revision: August 2007 2. Control cable AT-216 2008 Quest KEY INTERLOCK CABLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > KEY INTERLOCK CABLE A Component INFOID:0000000001718087 B AT D E F G H WCIA0231E CAUTION: • Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. • After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Removal 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001718088 Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device and remove interlock rod from cable. I J K L M N WCIA0232E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-217 2008 Quest KEY INTERLOCK CABLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable. WCIA0233E Installation 1. 2. 3. INFOID:0000000001718089 Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. Turn ignition key to lock position. Set selector lever to P position. WCIA0233E 4. 5. 6. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod. WCIA0234E Revision: August 2007 AT-218 2008 Quest ON-VEHICLE SERVICE < SERVICE INFORMATION > ON-VEHICLE SERVICE A Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. INFOID:0000000001718090 Remove intake air duct. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. • Do not reuse seal bolt. B AT D BBIA0272E Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. E INFOID:0000000001718091 F Remove battery and bracket. Disconnect electrical connector. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. • Do not reuse seal bolt. G H I BBIA0273E Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718092 J 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove battery and bracket. Remove cable from range lever. Set range lever in neutral position. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number 5. 6. K L : KV911J0060 (J-45404) Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. M N SCIA5374E O 7. 8. 9. Tighten PNP switch bolts. Reinstall range lever and cable. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-221, "Control Cable Adjustment". 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-87, "Component Inspection". P BBIA0274E Revision: August 2007 AT-219 2008 Quest ON-VEHICLE SERVICE < SERVICE INFORMATION > ATF Cooler INFOID:0000000001718093 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain ATF. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler. Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. • Do not reuse sealing parts. BBIA0275E ATF Cooler Valve INFOID:0000000001718094 SCIA2975E 1. ATF cooler valve assembly 2. Hose clamp 3. Heater hose 4. Heater pipe 5. Outlet water hose 6. Hose clip 7. ATF cooler assembly 8. Transaxle assembly 9. Control cable bracket 10. Inlet water hose COMPONENT INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 AT-220 2008 Quest ON-VEHICLE SERVICE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature. A Dimension “A”: More than 72.0 mm (2.835 in) A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face and valve shaft end face. B AT SCIA2711J D 2. Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes more. E F G SCIA2993E 3. H Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed. Dimension “A”: Less than 66.5 mm (2.618 in) A: Distance between ATF cooler valve port end face and valve shaft end face. I J SCIA2711J Control Cable Adjustment K INFOID:0000000001718095 L Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in the P position. CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut. 3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown. M N O BBIA0279E Specified force 4. 5. : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb) Tighten control cable lock nut. Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. • Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. • Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. Revision: August 2007 AT-221 2008 Quest P ON-VEHICLE SERVICE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Side cover INFOID:0000000001718096 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove engine under cover. Drain ATF. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid". Remove side cover bolts and side cover. SCIA4144E INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. Refer to AT-225, "Component". Control Valve Assembly INFOID:0000000001718097 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control valve assembly. SCIA4151E INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. • Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to AT-225, "Component" for specified torque. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 SCIA4152E Transmission wire INFOID:0000000001718098 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove PNP switch. Refer to AT-225, "Component". Remove side cover. Refer to AT-222, "Side cover". Revision: August 2007 AT-222 2008 Quest ON-VEHICLE SERVICE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. 4. Remove transmission wire. A B AT WCIA0238E D INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-223 2008 Quest REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal INFOID:0000000001718099 Remove the engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-110. Inspection After Removal INFOID:0000000001718100 • Drive plate runout CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. Maximum allowable runout: Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly". • If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate and ring gear. SAT977H • When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” : 14 mm (0.55 in) or more SAT044A Installation INFOID:0000000001718101 • Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • When replacing the A/T assembly, initialize TCM. Refer to AT-7, "Precaution for A/T Assembly or TCM Replacement". • Perform road test. Refer to AT-49, "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis". Revision: August 2007 AT-224 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OVERHAUL A Component INFOID:0000000001718102 B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P SCIA5433E 1. Adjust shim 2. O-ring 3. Differential gear assembly 4. O-ring 5. Tapered roller bearing 6. Tapered roller bearing 7. Outer race 8. O-ring 9. Compression spring Revision: August 2007 AT-225 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. U/D brake piston assembly 11. U/D brake damper assembly 12. Snap ring 13. U/D brake band assembly 14. U/D clutch assembly 15. U/D gear assembly 16. Thrust needle roller bearing 17. Thrust bearing race 18. Seal ring 19. Transaxle case 20. B5 brake cushion plate 21. B5 brake disc 22. Snap ring 23. Thrust bearing race 24. U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly 25. Thrust bearing race 26. U/D RR planetary carrier assembly 27. Thrust needle roller bearing 28. Adjust shim 29. B5 brake flange 30. B5 brake plate 31. O-ring 32. Snap ring 33. Return spring 34. B5 brake piston 35. Transaxle case cover Revision: August 2007 AT-226 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O SCIA5434E 1. Snap ring 2. 2nd brake plate 3. Return spring 4. O-ring 5. Oil pump assembly 6. Oil seal 7. 2nd brake piston Snap ring 8. 2nd brake sleeve 9. 10. 2nd brake disc 11. 2nd brake flange 12. One-way clutch No.1 13. 2nd coast brake hub 14. Snap ring 15. 2nd coast brake plate 16. Snap ring 17. O-ring 18. 2nd coast brake piston 19. Return spring 20. 2nd coast brake disc 21. 2nd coast brake flange Revision: August 2007 AT-227 P 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 22. Thrust washer 23. Thrust washer 24. Return spring 25. 1st and reverse brake piston 26. Thrust bearing race 27. Counter drive gear sub assembly 28. One-way clutch outer race sub assem- 29. Thrust washer bly 30. Snap ring 31. Thrust bearing 32. O-ring 33. Snap ring 34. Planetary gear assembly 35. FR planetary ring gear assembly 36. Snap ring 37. 1st and reverse brake disc 38. 1st and reverse brake flange 39. 1st and reverse brake plate 40. 1st and reverse brake flange 41. One-way clutch No.2 42. Thrust bearing 43. Thrust bearing race 44. Thrust needle roller bearing 45. Seal ring 46. Forward and direct clutch assembly 47. Planetary sun gear sub assembly 48. Thrust bearing race 49. Thrust needle roller bearing 50. RR planetary ring gear assembly 51. Thrust needle roller bearing 52. Thrust bearing race Revision: August 2007 AT-228 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O SCIA5435E P 1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. Forward clutch accumulator piston 4. Compression spring 5. Accumulator cover 6. O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. Range lever 9. Washer plate 10. PNP switch 11. Lock washer 12. Parking lock pawl 13. Torsion spring No.1 14. Parking lock pawl shaft 15. Spring guide sleeve 16. Torsion spring No.2 17. Parking lockpin sub assembly 18. U/D brake apply tube sub assembly Revision: August 2007 AT-229 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Tube clamp 20. Oil reservoir plate 21. Oil cleaner magnet 22. Tube clamp 23. Differential gear lube apply tube 24. Seal ring 25. Thrust roller bearing 26. Straight screw plug 27. O-ring 28. Straight screw plug 29. Differential side oil seal 30. Torque converter 31. Transaxle housing 32. O-ring 33. O-ring 34. Spring washer 35. Hexagon bolt 36. Washer 37. ATF cooler assembly 38. gasket 39. Drain plug 40. Air breather hose 41. O-ring 42. A/T fluid charging pipe 43. A/T fluid level gauge 44. Manual valve lever sub assembly 45. Parking lock rod sub assembly 46. Control valve assembly 47. Suction cover gasket 48. Suction cover 49. Side cover 50. Seal bolt 51. Governor apply gasket 52. Sensor clamp 53. Transmission wire 54. Transaxle lube apply tube 55. Tube clamp 56. Tube clamp 57. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly 58. Bearing race 59. Seal ring 60. Seal bolt 61. Turbine revolution sensor 62. Differential side oil seal 63. Manual valve oil seal 64. O-ring 65. Anchor bolt 66. Revolution sensor 67. Seal bolt 68. Governor apply gasket 69. Transaxle case 70. Oil reservoir plate 71. Oil strainer sub assembly 72. Manual detent spring sub assembly 73. Parking lock pawl bracket 74. Governor apply gasket 75. Copper washer 76. Fluid cooler tube Revision: August 2007 AT-230 2008 Quest OVERHAUL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Location of Needle Bearings, Bearing Races and Thrust Washers INFOID:0000000001718103 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M N O P SCIA5436E Revision: August 2007 AT-231 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > DISASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001718104 Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove torque converter from transaxle case by holding it firmly and turning while pulling straight out. SCIA4134E 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove A/T fluid level gauge. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe. Remove air breather hose. Remove fluid cooler tube. SCIA4135E 8. Remove turbine revolution sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the turbine revolution sensor and transaxle case. SCIA4137E 9. Remove revolution sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the revolution sensor and transaxle case. SCIA4136E Revision: August 2007 AT-232 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Remove nut and range lever. A B AT SCIA4138E D 11. Pry off the lock washer using suitable tool. E F G SCIA4139E H 12. Loosen nut and remove lock washer. 13. Remove washer plate. I J K SCIA4140E 14. Remove PNP switch from transaxle case. L Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 20 (0.79) 1 B 33 (1.30) 1 M N SCIA4141E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-233 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. Remove hexagon bolt. 16. Remove ATF cooler assembly, washer and spring washer. 17. Remove O-rings from the ATF cooler assembly. SCIA4142E 18. Remove side cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage side cover and transaxle case. SCIA4143E SCIA4144E 19. Disconnect solenoid connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA4146E Revision: August 2007 AT-234 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 20. Remove sensor clamp bolt. A B AT SCIA4148E D 21. Remove sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage A/T fluid temperature sensor. E F G SCIA4147E 22. Remove suction cover bolts. H I J SCIA4150E K 23. Remove suction cover and suction cover gasket. L M N SCIA4149E O 24. Remove control valve assembly bolts from transaxle case. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 P SCIA4152E Revision: August 2007 AT-235 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 25. While holding control valve assembly, disconnect parking lock rod sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly and remove control valve assembly. NOTE: Shift position is “N”. SCIA4153E 26. Remove governor apply gaskets. SCIA4154E 27. Remove transmission wire. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage solenoid connectors and A/T fluid temperature sensor. SCIA4155E 28. Remove oil pump assembly bolts from transaxle case. SCIA4156E Revision: August 2007 AT-236 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT SCIA4157E D 29. Remove oil pump assembly using Tools. Tool numbers : ST33290001 (J-34286) E F G SCIA5359E 30. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly. H I J SCIA4396E K 31. Remove one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. 32. Remove thrust washer. L M N SCIA4159E O 33. Remove transaxle housing bolts from transaxle case. P SCIA4160E Revision: August 2007 AT-237 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 *:Torx bolt SCIA5495E 34. Remove transaxle housing using suitable tool. SCIA4162E 35. Remove governor apply gasket. 36. Remove seal ring. SCIA4163E 37. Remove tube clamp. SCIA4164E Revision: August 2007 AT-238 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 38. Remove differential gear lube apply tube using suitable tool. CAUTION: • Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube apply tube. • Be careful not to damage transaxle housing. A B AT SCIA4165E D 39. Remove oil reservoir plate. E F G SCIA4166E 40. Remove oil cleaner magnets from oil reservoir plate. H I J SCIA4167E K 41. Remove differential gear assembly. L M N SCIA4168E O 42. Remove oil strainer sub assembly. P SCIA4169E Revision: August 2007 AT-239 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 43. Remove oil reservoir plate. SCIA4170E 44. Remove tube clamp. SCIA4171E 45. Remove U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: • Be careful not to bend or damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly. • Be careful not to damage transaxle case. SCIA4172E 46. Disconnect manual detent spring sub assembly from manual valve lever sub assembly using suitable tool. SCIA4174E 47. Remove manual valve lever sub assembly from parking lock rod sub assembly. SCIA4175E Revision: August 2007 AT-240 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 48. Remove parking lock rod sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4176E D 49. Remove bolts for manual detent spring sub assembly. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 16.7 (0.657) 1 B 14.0 (0.551) 1 E F G SCIA4177E 50. Remove manual detent spring sub assembly. H I J SCIA4178E K 51. Remove parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No.1. L M N SCIA4179E O 52. Remove parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl. P WCIA0420E Revision: August 2007 AT-241 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 53. Remove parking lockpin sub assembly. SCIA4181E 54. Remove spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No.2. SCIA4182E 55. Remove manual valve oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. SCIA4183E 56. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race from U/D gear assembly. WCIA0338E 57. Remove U/D gear assembly. 58. Remove seal rings from U/D gear assembly. SCIA4185E Revision: August 2007 AT-242 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 59. Remove U/D clutch assembly. A B AT SCIA4186E D 60. Remove anchor bolt. E F G SCIA4193E 61. Remove U/D brake band assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case. H I J SCIA4187E 62. Remove U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing races. 63. Remove U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. K L M N SCIA5505E O 64. Remove thrust needle roller bearing, adjust shim and thrust bearing race from U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. P WCIA0339E Revision: August 2007 AT-243 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 65. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA4190E 66. Remove U/D brake damper assembly. 67. Remove O-rings from U/D brake damper assembly. SCIA4191E 68. Remove U/D brake piston assembly and compression spring. 69. Remove O-ring from U/D brake piston assembly. SCIA4192E 70. Remove transaxle case cover bolts from transaxle case. SCIA4194E Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 2 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 *:Stud bolt SCIA5413E Revision: August 2007 AT-244 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 71. Tap transaxle case cover using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage transaxle case cover. A B AT SCIA4196E D 72. Remove transaxle case cover. E F G SCIA4197E 73. Remove governor apply gaskets from transaxle case. H I J SCIA4198E K 74. Remove tube clamp. L M N SCIA4199E O 75. Remove transaxle lube apply tube using suitable tool. CAUTION: • Be careful not to bend or damage transaxle lube apply tube. • Be careful not to damage transaxle case. P SCIA4200E Revision: August 2007 AT-245 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 76. Remove forward and direct clutch assembly. 77. Remove thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and seal ring from forward and direct clutch assembly. SCIA5421E 78. Remove planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller bearings. SCIA5499E 79. Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly bushing. CAUTION: Measure at different places and take an average. If it is greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary sun gear sub assembly. Standard Allowable limit :22.200 - 22.226mm (0.8740 - 0.8750in) :22.276 (0.8770in) SCIA4255E SCIA4256E 80. Remove RR planetary ring gear assembly. 81. Remove thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race from RR planetary ring gear assembly. SCIA4203E Revision: August 2007 AT-246 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 82. Remove planetary gear assembly. 83. Remove thrust bearing race from planetary gear assembly. A B AT SCIA4204E D 84. Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bushing. CAUTION: Measure at different places and take an average. If it is greater than the maximum, replace it with a new planetary gear assembly. E F Standard Allowable limit :30.056 - 30.082mm (1.1833 - 1.1843in) :30.132 (1.1863in) G SCIA4254E 85. Remove thrust bearing. H I J SCIA4205E K 86. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. L M N SCIA4206E O 87. Remove 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake discs and 1st and reverse brake plates. • INSPECTION - Check that the sliding surface of discs are not worn and burnt. If necessary, replace them. CAUTION: Replace new discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in A/T fluid. P SCIA4207E Revision: August 2007 AT-247 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 88. Remove FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch No.2. SCIA4208E 89. Make sure that the FR planetary ring gear assembly turns freely counterclockwise and locks clockwise. SCIA4414E 90. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA4209E 91. Remove return spring. SCIA4210E 92. While pushing the piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/ cm2) into the oil passage of transaxle case as shown and remove 1st and reverse brake piston. SCIA4211E Revision: August 2007 AT-248 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 93. Remove O-rings from 1st and reverse brake piston. A B AT SCIA4212E D 94. Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing race from counter drive gear sub assembly. E F G SCIA4213E 95. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. H I J SCIA4214E K 96. Remove counter drive gear sub assembly. L M N SCIA4215E O 97. Remove differential side oil seal from transaxle case and transaxle housing using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch transaxle case and transaxle housing. P SCIA4216E Revision: August 2007 AT-249 2008 Quest DISASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > SCIA4217E 98. Remove outer race and adjust shim from transaxle case. Tool number : ST30612000 (J-25742-2) SCIA5360E 99. Remove thrust roller bearing from transaxle housing. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) SCIA5361E Revision: August 2007 AT-250 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS A Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake & 2nd Brake INFOID:0000000001718105 COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J SCIA4384E 1. Return spring 4. Oil seal 7. 2nd brake sleeve 10. 2nd brake plate 2. Snap ring 3. O-ring 5. Oil pump assembly 6. 2nd brake piston 8. O-ring 9. 2nd brake flange 11. 2nd brake disc 12. Snap ring 13. 2nd coast brake piston 14. Return spring 15. Thrust washer 16. 2nd coast brake flange 17. 2nd coast brake plate 18. Snap ring 19. 2nd coast brake disc 20. Snap ring K L M DISASSEMBLY 1. N Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly. O P SCIA4396E Revision: August 2007 AT-251 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly. SCIA4218E 3. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA4219E 4. Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates. SCIA4220E 5. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number 6. : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA5362E 7. Remove return spring. SCIA4222E Revision: August 2007 AT-252 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. 9. While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd coast brake piston. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake piston. Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston. A B AT SCIA4223E D 10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. E F G SCIA4224E 11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. H I J SCIA4225E K 12. Remove return spring. L M N SCIA4226E O 13. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake piston. P SCIA4227E Revision: August 2007 AT-253 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. 15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. SCIA4228E INSPECTION • Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates is not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates is worn or burnt, replace it CAUTION: Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF. ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Install O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-ring. • Apply ATF to O-ring. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump assembly. SCIA4229E 4. Install snap ring using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly. SCIA4227E 5. Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up. SCIA4226E Revision: August 2007 AT-254 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. A B AT SCIA4225E D 7. Install snap ring using suitable tool. E F G SCIA4224E 8. Install O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. 9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. 10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly. H I J SCIA4230E K 11. Install return spring. L M N SCIA4222E O 12. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) P 13. Install snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA5362E Revision: August 2007 AT-255 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates. SCIA4220E 15. Place clutch spring compressor on 2nd coast brake flange, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) 16. Install snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA5363E 17. Set a dial indicator as shown. 18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke :1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in) If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". SCIA5500E 19. Set a dial indicator as shown. 20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check 2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke :0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in) SCIA5501E 21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SCIA4218E Revision: August 2007 AT-256 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 22. Install oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using Tool. A Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: • Do not reuse oil seal. • Apply ATF to oil seal. B AT SCIA5364E One-Way Clutch Outer Race Sub Assembly & 2nd Coast Brake Hub & One-Way Clutch No.1 INFOID:0000000001718106 D E COMPONENTS F G H I J K L M SCIA4234E 1. Thrust washer 2. One-way clutch outer race sub assembly 4. Thrust washer 5. 2nd coast brake hub 3. One-way clutch No.1 DISASSEMBLY N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-257 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove thrust washer from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. SCIA4235E 2. 3. Remove 2nd coast brake hub from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. Remove thrust washer from 2nd coast brake hub. SCIA4236E 4. Remove one-way clutch No.1 from one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. SCIA4237E ASSEMBLY 1. Install one-way clutch No.1 into the one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. CAUTION: Do not mistake the direction of one-way clutch No.1. SCIA4238E Revision: August 2007 AT-258 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Install thrust washer into 2nd coast brake hub. CAUTION: Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the 2nd coast brake hub. 3. Install 2nd coast brake hub into one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. CAUTION: While turning the 2nd coast brake hub, slide it into one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. A B AT SCIA4236E D 4. Coat the thrust washer with petroleum jelly. Align the tab of the washer with the hollow of the one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. E F G SCIA4235E INSPECTION H • Hold one-way clutch outer race sub assembly, and check that 2nd coast brake hub turns freely clockwise and locks counterclockwise. I J SCIA4239E Transaxle Case Cover & B5 Brake K INFOID:0000000001718107 L COMPONENTS M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-259 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SCIA5441E 1. Transaxle case cover 2. Seal ring 3. O-ring 4. Return spring 5. Snap ring 6. B5 brake piston 7. Seal ring 8. Bearing race 9. U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly 10. Tube clamp 11. Forward clutch accumulator piston 12. Compression spring 13. Accumulator cover 14. O-ring 15. Seal ring 16. B5 brake cushion plate 17. B5 brake plate 18. B5 brake flange 19. Snap ring 20. B5 brake disc DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove tube clamps. SCIA5502E Revision: August 2007 AT-260 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly and transaxle case cover. A B AT SCIA4241E D 3. Remove bearing race and seal rings from transaxle case cover. E F G WCIA0386E 4. 5. 6. Remove accumulator cover, compression spring and forward clutch accumulator piston. Remove O-ring from the accumulator cover. Remove seal ring from the forward clutch accumulator piston. H I J SCIA4243E 7. K Remove snap ring using suitable tool. L M N SCIA4244E 8. O Remove B5 brake flange, B5 brake discs, B5 brake plates and B5 brake cushion plate. P SCIA4245E Revision: August 2007 AT-261 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) CAUTION: Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation. 10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA5365E 11. Remove return spring. SCIA4247E 12. While pushing B5 brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove B5 brake piston. SCIA4248E 13. Remove O-rings from B5 brake piston. 14. Remove seal ring from transaxle case cover. SCIA4249E INSPECTION • Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates are not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates are worn or burnt, replace them. CAUTION: Soak new clutch discs at least 2 hours in ATF. ASSEMBLY Revision: August 2007 AT-262 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Install seal ring in transaxle case cover. CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal ring. • Apply ATF to seal ring. 2. Install O-rings in B5 brake piston. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. 3. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case cover with ATF. 4. Press B5 brake piston into the transaxle case cover. A B AT SCIA4249E D 5. Place return spring on B5 brake piston. E F G SCIA4247E 6. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number 7. H : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) I CAUTION: Do not press return spring too much to avoid deformation. Install snap ring using suitable tool. J SCIA5365E 8. 9. Install B5 brake cushion plate. CAUTION: Be sure direction of B5 brake cushion plate. Install B5 brake flange, B5 brake plates and B5 brake discs as shown. K L M N SCIA4245E O 10. Install snap ring using suitable tool. P SCIA4244E Revision: August 2007 AT-263 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Install O-ring in accumulator cover. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-ring. • Apply ATF to O-ring. 12. Install seal ring in forward clutch accumulator piston. CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal ring. • Apply ATF to seal ring. 13. Install forward clutch accumulator piston, compression spring and accumulator cover in transaxle case cover. 14. Tighten accumulator cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". SCIA4243E 15. Install seal rings and bearing race in transaxle case cover. CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal rings. • Apply ATF to seal rings. • Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. • Assemble the selected bearing race in the correct order. Refer to AT-268. WCIA0386E 16. Install the U/D clutch apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool. SCIA4252E 17. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". SCIA5502E Revision: August 2007 AT-264 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 18. Set a dial indicator as shown. A 19. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown, measure the B5 brake piston stroke and check the B5 brake piston moves smoothly. B Piston stroke :2.34 - 2.70mm (0.0921 - 0.1063in) If the B5 brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". AT SCIA5503E D Differential Gear Assembly INFOID:0000000001718108 COMPONENTS E F G H I J SCIA4407E 1. O-ring 2. Tapered roller bearing 4. Tapered roller bearing 5. O-ring 3. K Differential gear assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. L Remove O-rings from differential gear assembly. M N O SCIA4408E P Revision: August 2007 AT-265 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove tapered roller bearings using Tool. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) SCIA5366E ASSEMBLY 1. Install tapered roller bearings in differential gear assembly using Tools. Tool numbers : KV38100500 ( — ) : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: Do not reuse tapered roller bearings. SCIA5368E Revision: August 2007 AT-266 2008 Quest REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Install O-rings in differential gear assembly. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. A B AT SCIA4408E D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-267 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. INFOID:0000000001718109 Install the new differential side oil seal into transaxle case using Tool. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) CAUTION: • Do not reuse differential side oil seal. • Apply ATF to differential side oil seal. SCIA5369E Distance : 3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.118 - 0.157 in) SCIA4473E 2. Install counter drive gear sub assembly. SCIA4215E 3. Install snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA4214E Revision: August 2007 AT-268 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Install new O-rings in 1st and reverse brake piston. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. 5. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF. 6. Install 1st and reverse brake piston in transaxle case. A B AT SCIA4212E D 7. Put return spring on 1st and reverse brake piston. E F G SCIA4210E 8. While compressing the return spring by hand, install the snap ring into groove using suitable tool. H I J SCIA4209E 9. Put thrust bearing race and thrust bearing on counter drive gear sub assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing and thrust bearing race. K L M N SCIA4213E O 10. Install FR planetary ring gear assembly with one-way clutch No. 2. P SCIA4208E Revision: August 2007 AT-269 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Install 1st and reverse brake flanges, 1st and reverse brake discs and 1st and reverse brake plates. SCIA4207E 12. Install snap ring using suitable tool. SCIA4206E 13. Set a dial indicator as shown. 14. Applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) and measure the 1st and reverse brake piston stroke. Piston stroke : 1.39 - 2.21 mm (0.0547 - 0.0870 in) In a case that is out of reference, check the following items: • Oil pressure leak • Damage of O-ring • Wear damage of discs SCIA4258E 15. Install thrust bearing. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing. SCIA4205E 16. Install planetary gear assembly. 17. Install thrust bearing race in planetary gear assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing race. SCIA4204E Revision: August 2007 AT-270 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 18. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in RR planetary ring gear assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. 19. Install RR planetary ring gear assembly. A B AT SCIA4203E 20. Install planetary sun gear sub assembly and thrust needle roller bearings. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearings. D E F G SCIA5499E 21. Install forward and direct clutch assembly. H 22. Install thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and new seal ring in forward and direct clutch assembly. CAUTION: • Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. • Apply ATF to seal ring. • Do not reuse seal ring. I J K SCIA5412E L 23. Check the distance of “A”. “A” : 50.850 - 51.825 mm (2.0020 - 2.0404 in) M CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust with in standards again. N SCIA4259E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-271 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 24. Install transaxle lube apply tube using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend and damage transaxle lube apply tube. SCIA4260E 25. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4199E 26. Install new governor apply gaskets in transaxle case. CAUTION: • Do not reuse governor apply gaskets. • Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets. SCIA4198E 27. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case. SCIA4197E 28. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: Use old seal bolts for re-installing transaxle case cover when checking and adjusting the end play. SCIA4194E Revision: August 2007 AT-272 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > A Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 2 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 B AT *:Stud bolt SCIA5413E 29. Tighten anchor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". D E F G SCIA4193E H 30. Install new O-ring in U/D brake piston assembly. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-ring. • Apply ATF to O-ring. 31. Coat the inner surface of transaxle case with ATF. 32. Install compression spring and U/D brake piston assembly. I J SCIA4192E 33. Install new O-rings in U/D brake damper assembly. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. 34. Install U/D brake damper assembly. K L M N SCIA4191E O 35. Install snap ring using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the snap ring is deformed, replace it. P SCIA4190E Revision: August 2007 AT-273 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 36. Install thrust needle roller bearing, adjust shim and thrust bearing race in U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to adjust shim, thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. 37. Install U/D RR planetary ring gear sub assembly. SCIA5414E 38. Install U/D RR planetary carrier assembly and thrust bearing races. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing races. SCIA5505E 39. Install U/D brake band assembly. SCIA4187E 40. Install U/D clutch assembly. SCIA4186E 41. Measure the U/D brake piston stroke by applying and releasing the compressed air (4Kg/cm2) as shown. CAUTION: Measure U/D brake piston stroke after assembling U/D clutch assembly. Piston Stroke : 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661 in) SCIA4263E Revision: August 2007 AT-274 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B AT SCIA4625E D 42. If the piston stroke is out of standards, select another U/D brake piston. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". E F G SCIA4264E Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718110 H ADJUST PRELOAD OF TAPERED ROLLER BEARING 1. Install adjust shim and outer race in transaxle case using Tools. I Tool numbers : KV40100621 (J-25273) : ST30022000 ( — ) J K SCIA5370E 2. 3. L Install differential gear assembly in transaxle case. Install transaxle housing into transaxle case. M N O SCIA4265E P Revision: August 2007 AT-275 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: Use old seal bolts for re-installing transaxle housing when checking and adjusting preload. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 SCIA4267E *:Torx bolt SCIA5495E 5. Measure turning torque of differential gear assembly using Tools. Tool numbers 6. : KV40102500 (J-28815) : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Turn differential gear assembly in both directions several times to seat bearing rollers correctly. Turning torque (New bearing) : 0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb) SCIA5371E If the preload is not within specification, remove differential gear assembly from transaxle case. Re-select adjust shim. Refer to AT-296, "Final Drive". Assembly (2) 1. 2. 3. INFOID:0000000001718111 Remove transaxle housing and differential gear assembly from transaxle case. Install new seal rings in U/D gear assembly. CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal rings. • Apply ATF to seal rings. Install U/D gear assembly. SCIA4185E Revision: August 2007 AT-276 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Install thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race in U/D gear assembly. a. Perform the following procedure for adjustment. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race. A B AT SCIA5415E D b. Make sure that measurement “E” is within the specifications. Specification E : 1.269 - 1.645 mm (0.0500 - 0.0648 in) E NOTE: “E” is the height between the edge of transaxle case and the roller part of thrust needle roller bearing. F G SCIA5452E H I J SCIA5459E c. d. If measurement “E” is outside the specifications, replace “T” with one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". CAUTION: When adjusting “T”, use “S” of thickness 0.81mm (0.032in). If all of “T” do not fit “E” within the specifications, replace “S” with one that has applicable thickness. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". CAUTION: When adjusting “S”, use “T” of thickness 0.80mm (0.031in). K L M N O P SCIA5488E Revision: August 2007 AT-277 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > e. Make sure that measurement “E” is within the specifications. SCIA5452E 5. Install new manual valve oil seal into transaxle case until it is flush using Tool. Tool number : ST33061000 (J-8107-2) CAUTION: • Do not reuse manual valve oil seal. • Apply ATF to manual valve oil seal. SCIA5486E 6. 7. Install spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No. 2 in transaxle case. Tighten spring guide sleeve and torsion spring No. 2 torx bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4182E 8. Install parking lockpin sub assembly. SCIA4181E 9. Install parking lock pawl bracket and parking lock pawl. WCIA0420E Revision: August 2007 AT-278 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Install parking lock pawl shaft and torsion spring No. 1. A B AT SCIA4179E D 11. Install manual detent spring sub assembly. E F G SCIA4178E 12. Temporarily tighten the bolts. H Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 16.7 (0.657) 1 B 14.0 (0.551) 1 I J SCIA4177E K 13. Install parking lock rod sub assembly. L M N SCIA4176E O 14. Install manual valve lever sub assembly connect parking lock rod sub assembly to it. P SCIA4175E Revision: August 2007 AT-279 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. Connect manual detent spring sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly using suitable tool. SCIA4174E 16. Tighten manual detent spring sub assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4550E 17. Install U/D brake apply tube sub assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage U/D brake apply tube sub assembly. SCIA4270E 18. Tighten tube clamp bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4171E 19. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle case. 20. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component". SCIA4170E Revision: August 2007 AT-280 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 21. Install oil strainer sub assembly in transaxle case. 22. Tighten oil strainer sub assembly bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". A B AT SCIA4169E D 23. Install differential gear assembly. E F G SCIA4168E 24. Drive new differential side oil seal into transaxle housing using Tool. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) Distance : 14.8 - 15.8 mm (0.583 - 0.622 in) H I CAUTION: • Do not reuse differential side oil seal. • Apply ATF to differential side oil seal. J SCIA5372E K L M N SCIA4474E 25. Install new thrust roller bearing in transaxle housing using Tool. Tool number O : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: Do not reuse thrust roller bearing. P SCIA5373E Revision: August 2007 AT-281 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 26. Install oil cleaner magnets on oil reservoir plate. SCIA4167E 27. Install oil reservoir plate in transaxle housing. 28. Tighten oil reservoir plate bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component". SCIA4166E 29. install differential gear lube apply tube using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage differential gear lube apply tube. SCIA4272E 30. Tighten tube clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4164E 31. Install new governor apply gasket. CAUTION: • Do not reuse governor apply gasket. • Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gasket. 32. Install new seal ring. CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal ring. • Apply ATF to seal ring. SCIA4163E Revision: August 2007 AT-282 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 33. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle housing as shown. Refer to GI42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant". CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle housing and transaxle case. A B AT SCIA5506E 34. Install transaxle housing in transaxle case. 35. Tighten transaxle housing and transaxle case bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: Do not reuse seal bolts. D E F G SCIA4267E H Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 13 B 35 (1.38) 2 C 45 (1.77) 1 D* — 1 I J K *:Torx bolt SCIA5495E L 36. Install new oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using Tool. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) M CAUTION: • Do not reuse oil seal. • Apply ATF to oil seal. N SCIA5364E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-283 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 37. Install thrust washer and one- way clutch outer race sub assembly in oil pump assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SCIA4274E 38. Check the distance of “B”. “B” : 51.09 - 51.71 mm (2.0114 - 2.0358 in) CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards again. SCIA4275E 39. Place oil pump assembly through the input shaft in horizontal position, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump assembly with transaxle case. Lightly press oil pump assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop one-way clutch outer race sub assembly. SCIA4276E 40. Tighten oil pump assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component". SCIA4156E SCIA4157E Revision: August 2007 AT-284 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 41. Set a dial indicator as shown, move the input shaft and measure the end play. End play A : 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224 in) B AT SCIA4277E D If the end play is out of standards, select another thrust bearing race. Refer to AT-294, "Clutch, Gear and Brakes". E F G SCIA5417E H 42. Remove transaxle case cover. 43. Apply silicone RTV to transaxle case cover as shown. Refer to GI-42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant". CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from transaxle case cover and transaxle. I J K SCIA5507E 44. Install transaxle case cover in transaxle case. L M N SCIA4197E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-285 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 45. Tighten transaxle case cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: Do not reuse seal bolts. SCIA4194E Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 30 (1.18) 8 B 45 (1.77) 2 C 48 (1.89) 2 D* — 1 *:Stud bolt SCIA5413E 46. Install new governor apply gaskets. CAUTION: • Apply petroleum jelly to governor apply gaskets. • Do not reuse governor apply gaskets. SCIA4154E 47. Install transmission wire. CAUTION: • Be careful not to break the solenoid connector and A/T fluid temperature sensor. • Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA4155E 48. While holding control valve assembly, connect the parking lock rod sub assembly to manual valve lever sub assembly. NOTE: Shift position is “N”. SCIA4153E Revision: August 2007 AT-286 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 49. Tighten control valve assembly bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 55 (2.17) 2 B 50 (1.97) 2 C 16 (0.63) 2 A B AT SCIA4152E 50. Install new suction cover and suction cover gasket in control valve assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse suction cover gasket. D E F G SCIA4149E 51. Tighten suction cover gasket and suction cover bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". H I J SCIA4150E 52. Install sensor clamp and A/T fluid temperature sensor in control valve assembly. K L M N SCIA4147E O P Revision: August 2007 AT-287 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 53. Tighten sensor clamp bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4148E 54. Connect the solenoid connectors. SCIA4146E 55. Apply silicone RTV to side cover as shown. Refer to GI-42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant". CAUTION: Completely remove all moisture, oil and sealant from side cover and transaxle case. SCIA5508E 56. Install side cover in transaxle case. SCIA4143E Revision: August 2007 AT-288 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 57. Tighten new side cover torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: Do not reuse seal bolts. A B AT SCIA4144E D 58. Install new O-rings in ATF cooler assembly. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-rings. • Apply ATF to O-rings. 59. Install ATF cooler assembly, washer and new spring washer. CAUTION: Do not reuse spring washer. 60. Tighten hexagon bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". E F G SCIA4142E 61. Install PNP switch to manual valve lever sub assembly. 62. Temporarily tighten the bolts. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 20 (0.79) 1 B 33 (1.30) 1 H I J SCIA4141E 63. Install new washer plate and new lock washer. CAUTION: Do not reuse washer plate and lock washer. 64. Tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". K L M N SCIA4140E O 65. Install Tool. Tool number : KV991J0060 (J-45404) P 66. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. SCIA5374E Revision: August 2007 AT-289 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 67. Tighten PNP switch torx bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component". SCIA4434E 68. Bend the lock washer using suitable tool. SCIA4139E 69. Install range lever in manual valve lever sub assembly. 70. Tighten range lever nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". SCIA4138E 71. Install turbine revolution sensor in transaxle case. 72. Tighten new turbine revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal bolt. • Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA4137E 73. Install revolution sensor in transaxle case. 74. Tighten new revolution sensor bolt to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". CAUTION: • Do not reuse seal bolt. • Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA4136E Revision: August 2007 AT-290 2008 Quest ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 75. Install new O-ring in A/T fluid charging pipe. CAUTION: • Do not reuse O-ring. • Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 76. Install A/T fluid charging pipe in transaxle housing. 77. Install fluid cooler tube with new copper washers. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. 78. Tighten fluid cooler tube union to specified torque. Refer to AT225, "Component". 79. Install air breather hose. 80. Install A/T fluid level gauge. A B AT SCIA4135E 81. Install drain plug and new gasket in transaxle housing. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. 82. Tighten drain plug to specified torque. Refer to AT-225, "Component". 83. Install torque converter. D E F G H I SCIA4134E 84. Check the distance of “C”. “C” J : 14.0 mm (0.551 in) CAUTION: If the distance is out of standards, adjust within standards again. K L SCIA4279E M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-291 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification INFOID:0000000001718112 Engine VQ35DE Automatic transaxle model RE5F22A Automatic transaxle model code number CK710 Stall torque ratio 1.8: 1 Transaxle gear ratio 1st 4.657 2nd 3.032 3rd 1.982 4th 1.341 5th 1.018 Reverse 5.114 Final drive 2.269 Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF * Fluid capacity 7.4 (7-7/8 US qt, 6-1/2 Imp qt) CAUTION: • Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluid. • Using automatic transaxle fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF will deteriorate in driveability and automatic transaxle durability, and may damage the automatic transaxle, which is not covered by the warranty. *: Refer to MA-11. Shift Schedule INFOID:0000000001718113 VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS Accelerator angle Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) D1→D2 D2→D3 D3→D4 D4→D5 D5→D4 D4→D3 D3→D2 D2→D1 100 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 90 % 67 (42) 105 (65) 170 (106) 241 (150) 230 (143) 160 (99) 92 (57) 45 (28) 80 % 65 (40) 100 (62) 152 (94) 227 (141) 178 (111) 142 (88) 86 (53) 45 (28) 70 % 53 (33) 80 (50) 125 (78) 185 (115) 147 (91) 137 (85) 68 (42) 38 (24) 60 % 46 (29) 71 (44) 106 (66) 156 (97) 108 (67) 78 (48) 46 (29) 22 (14) 50 % 43 (27) 67 (42) 97 (60) 145 (90) 98 (61) 68 (42) 40 (25) 18 (11) 40 % 38 (24) 60 (37) 89 (55) 130 (81) 89 (55) 56 (35) 30 (19) 13 (8) 30 % 33 (21) 50 (31) 70 (43) 108 (67) 68 (42) 45 (28) 25 (16) 12 (7) 20 % 23 (14) 35 (22) 49 (30) 77 (48) 49 (30) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) 10 % 17 (11) 29 (18) 39 (24) 58 (36) 44 (27) 32 (20) 22 (14) 8 (5) VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING COMPLETE LOCK-UP Revision: August 2007 AT-292 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Accelerator angle A Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 50 % 190 (118) 137 (85) 15% 101 (63) 72 (45) 0-8% 73 (45) 70 (43) B • Lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. AT • Perform lock-up inspection after warming up engine. • Lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. D VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING SLIP LOCK-UP Accelerator angle Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) (Approx.) Gear position 0 - 10 % Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 45 (28) 42 (26) 5th 58 (36) 55 (34) E F • Slip lock-up vehicle speed indicates the speed in D position. • Perform slip lock-up inspection after warming up engine. • Slip lock-up vehicle speed may vary depending on the driving conditions and circumstances. G Stall Speed INFOID:0000000001718114 H Stall speed 2,430 - 2,730 rpm Line Pressure INFOID:0000000001718115 Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Engine speed J D, L positions R position At idle speed 333 - 392 (3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57) 500 - 608 (5.1 - 6.2, 73 - 88) At stall speed 1,285 - 1,393 (13.1 - 14.2, 186 - 202) 1,706 - 1,981 (17.4 - 20.2, 247 - 287) Time Lag I K INFOID:0000000001718116 L Selector lever Time N to D position Less than 0.7 sec. N to R position Less than 1.2 sec. Shift Solenoid Valves Shift position M INFOID:0000000001718117 N Shift solenoid valve Remarks A B C D E P OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) PARK POSITION R OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Open) REVERSE POSITION N OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) NEUTRAL POSITION Revision: August 2007 AT-293 2008 Quest O P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Shift solenoid valve Shift position Remarks A B C D E 1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 1⇔2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2⇔3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Open) 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 3⇔4 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Open) 4th OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 4⇔5 OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 5th OFF (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) 1st ON (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 1⇔2 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2nd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) 2⇔3 OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Open) 3rd OFF (Open) OFF (Closed) ON (Open) ON (Closed) OFF (Closed) D L Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 NOTE: When shifting D to L position or lever switch sets in “ON” position (indicated O/D OFF indicator lamp), down shift permission control is activated. Refer to AT-33, "Shift Control". Solenoid Valves Solenoid valves INFOID:0000000001718118 Connector (Color) Terminal Shift solenoid valve A F30 (BR) 2 Shift solenoid valve B F62(GR) 1 Shift solenoid valve C Resistance (Approx.) 11 - 16 Ω F62(GR) 4 Shift solenoid valve D F30 (BR) 1 Shift solenoid valve E F30 (BR) 5 Pressure control solenoid valve A F62(GR) 3-6 F30 (BR) 3-7 F62(GR) 2-5 Pressure control solenoid valve B 5.0 - 5.6 Ω Pressure control solenoid valve C Specified resistance at 20°C (68°F). Clutch, Gear and Brakes INFOID:0000000001718119 2ND BRAKE Number of 2nd brake plates 4 Number of 2nd brake discs 4 Number of 2nd brake flange Piston stroke 1 mm (in) 1.10 - 1.50 (0.0433 - 0.0591) Thickness mm (in) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) Thickness of 2nd brake flanges Part number* 31537 8Y011 31537 8Y012 31537 8Y013 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. 2ND COAST BRAKE Revision: August 2007 AT-294 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Number of 2nd coast brake plates 3 Number of 2nd coast brake discs 3 Number of 2nd coast brake flange 1 Piston stroke mm (in) A B 0.76 - 1.44 (0.0299 - 0.0567) B5 BRAKE AT Number of B5 brake plates 6 Number of B5 brake discs 6 Number of B5 brake flange 1 Number of B5 brake cushion plate 1 Piston stroke mm (in) D 2.34 - 2.70 (0.0921 - 0.1063) E Thickness mm (in) Part number* 5.0 (0.197) 5.1 (0.202) 5.2 (0.205) 5.3 (0.209) 5.5 (0.217) 31667 8Y016 31667 8Y017 31667 8Y018 31667 8Y019 31667 8Y020 Thickness of B5 brake flanges F G *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE H Number of 1st and reverse brake plates 4 Number of 1st and reverse brake discs 5 Number of 1st and reverse brake flanges 2 Piston stroke mm (in) I 1.39 - 2.21 (0.0547 - 0.0870) FORWARD AND DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY J Thickness mm (in) Part number* 0.81 (0.0319) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) 31435 8Y060 31435 8Y061 31435 8Y062 31435 8Y063 31435 8Y064 31435 8Y065 31435 8Y066 31435 8Y067 Thickness of thrust washer races End play mm (in) K L M 0.188 - 0.570 mm (0.0074 - 0.0224) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. N U/D BRAKE Piston type Mark Piston length mm (in) Part number* A — 63.7 (2.508) 31615 8Y005 B 1 64.2 (2.528) 31615 8Y004 C 2 64.7 (2.547) 31615 8Y003 D 3 65.2 (2.567) 31615 8Y002 E 4 65.7 (2.587) 31615 8Y001 Piston stroke mm (in) O P 5.76 - 6.76 mm (0.2268 - 0.2661) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. U/D RR PLANETARY RING GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY Revision: August 2007 AT-295 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Thickness mm (in) 31435 8Y100 31435 8Y101 31435 8Y102 31435 8Y103 31435 8Y104 31435 8Y105 31435 8Y106 31435 8Y107 31435 8Y108 0.81 (0.0319) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) 1.60 (0.0630) Thickness of adjust shims Part number* *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. U/D GEAR ASSEMBLY Thickness mm (in) 31435 8Y021 31435 8Y068 31435 8Y069 31435 8Y070 31435 8Y071 31435 8Y072 31435 8Y073 31435 8Y074 0.80 (0.0310) 0.90 (0.0350) 1.00 (0.0400) 1.10 (0.0430) 1.20 (0.0470) 1.30 (0.0510) 1.40 (0.0550) 1.50 (0.0590) Thickness of thrust washer races Part number* *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. PLANETARY SUN GEAR SUB ASSEMBLY Inner diameter of planetary sun gear sub assembly bushing mm (in) Standard 22.200 - 22.226 (0.8740 - 0.8750) Allowable limit 22.276 (0.8770) PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY Inner diameter of planetary gear assembly bushing mm (in) Standard 30.056 - 30.082 (1.1833 - 1.1843) Allowable limit 30.132 (1.1863) Final Drive INFOID:0000000001718120 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS Thickness mm (in) 1.00 (0.0394) 1.05 (0.0413) 1.10 (0.0433) 1.15 (0.0453) 1.20 (0.0472) 1.25 (0.0492) 1.30 (0.0512) 1.33 (0.0524) 1.36 (0.0535) 1.39 (0.0547) 1.42 (0.0559) 1.45 (0.0571) Part number* Thickness mm (in) 1.48 (0.0583) 1.51 (0.0594) 1.54 (0.0606) 1.57 (0.0618) 1.60 (0.0630) 1.65 (0.0650) 1.70 (0.0669) 1.75 (0.0689) 1.80 (0.0709) 1.85 (0.0728) 1.90 (0.0748) 31438 8Y001 31438 8Y002 31438 8Y003 31438 8Y004 31438 8Y005 31438 8Y006 31438 8Y007 31438 8Y008 31438 8Y009 31438 8Y010 31438 8Y011 31438 8Y012 Part number* 31438 8Y013 31438 8Y014 31438 8Y015 31438 8Y016 31438 8Y017 31438 8Y018 31438 8Y019 31438 8Y020 31438 8Y021 31438 8Y022 31438 8Y023 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. TURNING TORQUE Turning torque of final drive assembly Revision: August 2007 0.7 - 1.2 N·m (0.08 - 0.12kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb) AT-296 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000001718121 A Condition ATF temperature Voltage (Approx.) Resistance (Approx.) 0°C (32°F) 4.0V 9.8 kΩ 20°C (68°F) 3.0V 4.2 kΩ 80°C (176°F) 0.8V 0.54 kΩ 100°C (212°F) 0.5V 0.31 kΩ Turbine Revolution Sensor B AT INFOID:0000000001718122 D Condition Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body. Signal Voltage* (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V *: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance. E F Revolution Sensor INFOID:0000000001718123 Condition Connect 12V power supply and 100 Ω resistance, and then shake magnetic body. Signal Voltage* (Approx.) HIGH 1.2 - 1.6V LOW 0.4 - 0.8V G H *: Voltage with both end of 100 Ω resistance. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AT-297 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER SECTION ATC AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...... 3 Contaminated Refrigerant ......................................... 3 General Refrigerant Precaution ................................ 4 Precaution for Leak Detection Dye ........................... 4 A/C Identification Label ............................................. 4 Precaution for Refrigerant Connection ...................... 4 Precaution for Service of Compressor ...................... 8 Precaution for Service Equipment ............................. 9 PREPARATION ..................................................11 Special Service Tool ............................................... 11 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment.... 11 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 13 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..............................15 Refrigerant Cycle .................................................... 15 Refrigerant System Protection ................................ 15 Component Part Location ....................................... 16 OIL ......................................................................19 Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor ........... 19 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL .........................21 Description .............................................................. 21 Operation ................................................................ 21 Description of Control System ................................. 22 Control Operation .................................................... 23 Discharge Air Flow .................................................. 25 System Description ................................................. 26 CAN Communication System Description ............... 27 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................31 Schematic ................................................................35 Wiring Diagram - A/C,A - .........................................36 Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value ....44 A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function .......................45 Operational Check (Front) .......................................47 Operational Check (Rear) ........................................48 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control .....................................................................49 Mode Door Motor Circuit .........................................51 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit .......................................57 Intake Door Motor Circuit .........................................69 Defroster Door Motor Circuit ....................................74 Front Blower Motor Circuit .......................................76 Rear Blower Motor Circuit .......................................84 Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit ......................93 Magnet Clutch Circuit ..............................................98 Insufficient Cooling ................................................ 102 Insufficient Heating ................................................ 109 Heater Pump Circuit .............................................. 110 Noise ..................................................................... 113 Self-Diagnosis ....................................................... 114 Memory Function ................................................... 116 Ambient Sensor Circuit .......................................... 117 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit ........................................ 119 Optical Sensor Circuit ............................................ 122 Intake Sensor Circuit ............................................. 125 G H I ATC K L M N CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 127 Removal and Installation ....................................... 127 O AMBIENT SENSOR ........................................ 129 Removal and Installation ....................................... 129 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR .................................... 130 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................28 Removal and Installation ....................................... 130 CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) ............................... 28 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 29 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 30 OPTICAL SENSOR ......................................... 131 Revision: August 2007 F Removal and Installation ....................................... 131 INTAKE SENSOR ........................................... 132 ATC-1 2008 Quest P Removal and Installation .......................................132 DUCTS AND GRILLES .................................... 155 BLOWER MOTOR ........................................... 134 Component ........................................................... 155 Removal and Installation ....................................... 158 Component ............................................................134 Removal and Installation .......................................135 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ................................ 136 Removal and Installation .......................................136 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ....... 137 Component ............................................................137 Removal and Installation .......................................138 HEATER CORE ............................................... 140 Component ............................................................140 Removal and Installation .......................................141 HEATER PUMP ............................................... 143 Removal and Installation .......................................143 DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ......................... 144 Removal and Installation .......................................144 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .................................. 145 Component ............................................................145 Removal and Installation .......................................146 MODE DOOR MOTOR .................................... 148 Removal and Installation .......................................148 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR .................................. 150 Component ............................................................150 Removal and Installation .......................................151 REFRIGERANT LINES ..................................... 160 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................ 160 Component ........................................................... 162 Removal and Installation for Compressor ............. 164 Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 165 Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 168 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 168 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 169 Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe ....................................................................... 169 Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor ................................................................... 173 Removal and Installation for Condenser ............... 173 Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator ..... 175 Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator ...... 177 Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve ..................................................................... 178 Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve ..................................................................... 178 Checking of Refrigerant Leaks .............................. 179 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 179 Dye Injection ......................................................... 179 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 180 VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL ................... 153 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 183 Component ............................................................153 Removal and Installation .......................................154 Service Data and Specification (SDS) .................. 183 Revision: August 2007 ATC-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718831 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) INFOID:0000000001718832 C D E F G H WARNING: I • CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. ATC • Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. • The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following K handling precautions must be observed: - When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. - When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just L before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. - Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without M proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used. - Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or SAE J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) N recovery equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers. O - Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Contaminated Refrigerant INFOID:0000000001718833 If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: • Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. • Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. • Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. Revision: August 2007 ATC-3 2008 Quest P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. • If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precaution INFOID:0000000001718834 WARNING: • Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. • Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. • Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). • Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. • Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. • Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. • Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. • Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Precaution for Leak Detection Dye INFOID:0000000001718835 • The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. • Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. • The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J41995). • For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions prior to performing work. • A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). • Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service. • Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed. • Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). • Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. • Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134A (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. • The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. A/C Identification Label INFOID:0000000001718836 Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have an identification label on the underside of hood. Precaution for Refrigerant Connection INFOID:0000000001718837 A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. • Expansion valve to cooling unit • Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) Revision: August 2007 ATC-4 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Refrigerant pressure sensor A FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION • The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the Oring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. • The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. B C D E F G H SHA815E O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-5 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front A/C Compressor and Condenser WJIA1967E 1. High-pressure service valve 2. Low-pressure service valve 3. High-pressure pipe 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Low-pressure flexible hose 6. High-pressure flexible hose 7. Shaft seal 8. Condenser 9. Liquid tank 10. Pressure relief valve 11. Compressor 12. High/low pressure pipe (production) 13. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) 14 15 Revision: August 2007 High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) ATC-6 Expansion valve (front) 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear A/C A B C D E F G H I ATC LJIA0016E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. K L O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications M Connection type O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 10 J2476 89956 9.25 (0.3642) 1.78 (0.0701) 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 71L00 11.0 (0.433) 2.4 (0.094) 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 72L00 14.3 (0.563) 2.3 (0.091) 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) 92477 N8200 17.12 (0.6740) 1.78 (0.0701) 92195 AH300 21.8 (0.858) 2.4 (0.094) New Former New Former New SHA814E Former New 12 16 19 24 mm (in) W mm (in) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. WARNING: Revision: August 2007 ATC-7 2008 Quest N O P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. • When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber. • When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. • After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. • When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection. • Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. • Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. • Always replace used O-rings. • When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply oil to threaded portion. • O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. • When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. • Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. • After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. WJIA1774E 1. Plug 2. O-ring A. Torque wrench B. Apply oil C. Do not apply oil to threads D. NG (no good) E. OK (okay) F. Inflated portion Precaution for Service of Compressor INFOID:0000000001718838 • Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. • When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. • When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". • Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with oil, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. • After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both directions. This will equally distribute oil inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour. • After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" Revision: August 2007 ATC-8 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Precaution for Service Equipment INFOID:0000000001718839 A RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. B ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. C VACUUM PUMP The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. • Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. • For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. • If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. D E F G H I RHA270D ATC MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a or 134a). Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified oil. K L M SHA533D N SERVICE HOSES Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. O P RHA272D SERVICE COUPLERS Revision: August 2007 ATC-9 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close RHA273D REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified oils have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME. RHA274D CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Revision: August 2007 ATC-10 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718840 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-38873-A) Pulley installer Installing pulley B C D E LHA171 Removing pulley KV99233130 (J-29884) Pulley puller F G LHA172 H HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment INFOID:0000000003260970 Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified oil with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its oil. I Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/oil. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or oil) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed ATC use of the refrigerants/oil. Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/oil contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. K Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HFC-134a (R-134a) ( — ) Refrigerant Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size: Thread size • large container 1/2”-16 ACME L M N S-NT196 Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type S Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate compressors (NISSAN only) Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) — ( — ) NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S S-NT197 Revision: August 2007 ATC-11 2008 Quest O P PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0130 (ACR2005-NI) ACR5 A/C Service Center Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging WJIA0293E Checking for refrigerant leaks (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-41995) Electronic refrigerant leak detector AHA281A Leak detection dye (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety goggles (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) Quantity 24, 1/4 ounce bottles of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner ZHA200H Checking for refrigerant leaks when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector SHA438F Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) — (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) SHA439F For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. — (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with (J-41447) 1/4 ounce bottles SHA440F Revision: August 2007 ATC-12 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner For cleaning dye spills. A B C SHA441F Identification: • The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size: Thread size • 1/2”-16 ACME — (J-39183-C) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) D E F G RJIA0196E Hose colors: • Low side hose: Blue with black stripe • High side hose: Red with black stripe • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: • 1/2”-16 ACME Service hoses: • (J-39500-72B) High side hose • (J-39500-72R) Low side hose • (J-39500-72Y) Utility hose H I S-NT201 Hose fitting to service hose: • M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. Service couplers: • (J-39500-20A) High side coupler • (J-39500-24A) Low side coupler ATC K L S-NT202 For measuring of refrigerant Fitting size - thread size: • 1/2” - 16 ACME — (J-39699) Refrigerant weight scale M N S-NT200 Capacity: • Air displacement: 4 CFM • Micron rating: 20 microns • Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size: Thread size • 1/2”-16 ACME — (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) S-NT203 Commercial Service Tool Revision: August 2007 INFOID:0000000001718842 ATC-13 2008 Quest O P PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number Tool name Description (J-41810-NI) Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a) For checking refrigerant purity and system contamination RJIA0197E Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E (J-44614) Clutch disc holding tool Clutch disc holding tool WHA230 Revision: August 2007 ATC-14 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A Refrigerant Cycle INFOID:0000000001718843 Refrigerant flow B The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank, through the front and rear evaporators, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coils are controlled by a front and rear externally equalized expansion valves, located inside the front and rear evaporator cases. Refrigerant System Protection C INFOID:0000000001718844 D Refrigerant pressure sensor The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi), or below about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2, 17.4 psi). E F Pressure Relief Valve The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/ G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-15 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > cm2, 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. WJIA1342E Component Part Location INFOID:0000000001718845 FRONT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 ATC-16 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJIA2219E 1. Defroster nozzle (part of the instrument panel) 2. Fresh air duct 3. P Defroster duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH side demister duct extension 6. LH side demister duct extension 7. LH side demister duct 8. RH ventilator duct 9. Center ventilator duct 10. LH ventilator duct 11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 13. Floor junction duct extension 14. Floor junction duct 15. Floor distribution duct ⇐ 16. Floor duct Revision: August 2007 12. Floor connector duct ATC-17 Front 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR REFRIGERATION SYSTEM LJIA0086E 1. Rear overhead duct 2. Rear heat duct 3. Rear heater and cooling unit assembly 4. Clips Revision: August 2007 ATC-18 2008 Quest OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL A Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor INFOID:0000000001718846 The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: • Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor • Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Oil B C D Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following test conditions: • Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm • A/C switch: On • Blower fan speed: Maximum position • Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] • Intake position: Recirculation ( ) • Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes. Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. E F G Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. H Amount of Oil to be Added I Oil to be added to system Part replaced m Amount of oil (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) Remarks ATC Front evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) Rear evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak — K L *1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of oil is needed. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-19 2008 Quest OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA1716E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1. New compressor 2. Old compressor 3. Recovery/recycling equipment 4. Measuring cup X 5. Measuring cup Y 6. New oil A. Drain oil from the new compressor into clean container B. Record amount of oil recovered C. Add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of new oil when replacing liquid tank D. Install new oil equal to recorded amounts in measuring cups X plus Y Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. Drain the oil from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. Drain the oil from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this oil to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Revision: August 2007 ATC-20 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL A Description INFOID:0000000001718847 The front air control provides automatic regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the driver's and passenger's selected "set temperature", regardless of the outside temperature changes. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following six sensors: • Ambient sensor • In-vehicle sensor • Intake sensor • Optical sensor (providing one input for driver and one input for passenger side) • PBR (position balanced resistor). • Engine coolant temperature sensor (via CAN communication) • Vehicle speed signal (via CAN communication) The front air control uses these signals (including the set temperature) to automatically control: • Outlet air volume • Air temperature • Air distribution The front air control also provides separate regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature for the rear passenger area. The system is based on the rear temperature and blower settings selected from rear air control (front) control dials located in the overhead console, or from the rear temperature and blower settings from the rear air control (rear) control dials, when the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator light is on) on the rear air control (front). The front air control is used to select: B C D E F G H • Outlet air volume • Air temperature/distribution Operation INFOID:0000000001718848 I AIR MIX DOORS CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL) The air mix doors are automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined ATC value by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload. BLOWER SPEED CONTROL Blower speed is automatically controlled based on temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position. When AUTO switch is pressed, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume (if required). When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing. K L INTAKE DOORS CONTROL The intake doors are automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor. Recirculation is not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes. M MODE DOOR CONTROL N The mode door is automatically controlled by: The temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload. O DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL The defroster door is controlled by: Turning the defroster dial to front defroster. P Revision: August 2007 ATC-21 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL WJIA2144E When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control outputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of certain symptoms. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Description of Control System INFOID:0000000001718849 The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. Revision: August 2007 ATC-22 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: A B C D E F G H I WJIA2013E Control Operation INFOID:0000000001718850 ATC Front air control K L M N O WJIA2014E P Revision: August 2007 ATC-23 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear air control WJIA2015E DISPLAY SCREEN Displays the operational status of the system. AUTO SWITCH • The compressor, intake doors, air mix doors, outlet doors and blower speed are automatically controlled so that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator. • When pressing AUTO switch, air inlet, air outlet, blower speed, and discharge air temperature are automatically controlled. TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (DRIVER SIDE) Increases or decreases the set temperature. TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (PASSENGER SIDE) Increases or decreases the set temperature. REAR TEMPERATURE/MODE CONTROL DIAL (FRONT) Increases or decreases the set temperature and changes the location of the rear discharged air. REAR TEMPERATURE/MODE CONTROL DIAL (REAR) Increases or decreases the set temperature and changes the location of the rear discharged air. RECIRCULATION ( ) SWITCH • When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. • When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. • REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON the D/F position, or in floor mode. DEFROSTER ( ) SWITCH Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position. The compressor remains ON until the ignition is turned OFF. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH When switch is ON, rear window is defogged. OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.) MODE SWITCHES Controls the air discharge outlets. FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL Revision: August 2007 ATC-24 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Manually control the blower speed. Seven speeds are available for manual control (as shown on the display screen). A REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (FRONT) When the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off) the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower control dial (rear) position. The rear air control (front) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings. REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (REAR) B When the REAR CTRL switch is on (indicator on) the rear air control (rear) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (front) blower control dial (front) position. The rear air control (rear) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings. C Discharge Air Flow D INFOID:0000000001718851 FRONT E F G WJIA2016E H I ATC K WJIA0528E REAR L NOTE: M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-25 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Hot air comes from the floor vents, cold air comes from the roof vents, and blend air comes from both vents. LJIA0127E System Description INFOID:0000000001718852 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION WJIA1674E Revision: August 2007 ATC-26 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G WJIA2017E CAN Communication System Description H INFOID:0000000001718853 I Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-27 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) INFOID:0000000001718854 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Diagnostic mode Description SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays front air control self-diagnosis results. DATA MONITOR Displays front air control input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Front air control part number can be read. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Display Item List DTC Reference page B2572 EE changed by calibration ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" B2573 Battery voltage out of range SC-4 B2574 Air mix door motor (passenger) circuit failure ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" B2575 BCM not responding to A/C request ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" B2576 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-76 B2577 Air mix door motor (driver) circuit failure ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" B2578 In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (low) B2579 In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (high) B257A Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure B257B Ambient sensor circuit open B257C Ambient sensor circuit short B257D In-vehicle sensor motor circuit open B257E In-vehicle sensor motor circuit short B257F Optical sensor (driver) circuit open or short B2580 Optical sensor (passenger) circuit open or short B2581 Intake sensor circuit short B2582 Intake sensor circuit open B2583 Defroster door motor circuit failure ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" B2584 Intake door motor (passenger) circuit failure ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" U1000 CAN bus fault LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart" B2586 Intake door motor (driver) circuit failure ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" B2587 Stuck button ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" B2587 Mode door motor circuit failure ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit" ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit" DATA MONITOR Display Item List Monitor item BATT VIA CAN IGN VIA CAN Value Contents "V" Displays battery voltage signal. "ON/OFF" Displays ignition switch signal. DVR SUNLD SEN "W/M2" Displays optical sensor (driver) signal. PAS SUNLD SEN "W/M2" Displays optical sensor (passenger) signal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-28 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item Value Contents AMB TEMP SEN "°C/°F" Displays ambient temperature sensor signal. EVAP TEMP SEN "°C/°F" Displays intake sensor signal. INCAR TMP SEN "°C/°F" Displays in-vehicle temperature sensor signal. RR TEMPSET FR "V" Displays air mix door (front) set point signal. RR TEMPSET RR "V" Displays air mix door (rear) set point signal. MODE FDBCK "V" Displays mode door motor feedback signal. DVR MIX FDBCK "V" Displays intake door motor (driver) feedback signal. PAS MIX FDBCK "V" Displays intake door motor (passenger) feedback signal. RR FDBCK "V" Displays air mix door motor (rear) feedback signal. RECIRC "ON/OFF" DEFROST "V" D Displays recirculation switch signal. E Displays defroster switch signal. "ON/OFF" Displays AUTO switch signal. A/C "ON/OFF" Displays A/C switch signal. MODE "ON/OFF" Displays MODE dial signal. L TEMP UP "ON/OFF" Displays driver side temperature control dial (temp increase) signal. L TEMP DOWN "ON/OFF" Displays driver side temperature control dial (temp decrease) signal. R TEMP UP "ON/OFF" Displays rear temperature control dial [front (temp increase)] signal. R TEMP DOWN "ON/OFF" Displays rear temperature control dial [front (temp decrease)] signal. RR DEFOG "ON/OFF" Displays rear defroster request signal. FAN UP "ON/OFF" Displays front blower motor (blower speed increase) signal. FAN DOWN "ON/OFF" Displays front blower motor (blower speed decrease) signal. MODE SELECT B C AUTO " [ PNL ]" " [ MIX ]" " [ FLR ]" " [ DEFR ]" " [ MAX ]" " [ DENT ]"* A F G H I ATC Displays mode door motor position. K *: DENT is displayed when MODE dial is between selections. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718855 L CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION M Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. O Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. P Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Display Item List Revision: August 2007 N Displays BCM input/output data in real time. ATC-29 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item name “operation or unit” Contents IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays “IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal. COMP ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal. FAN ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower fan motor switch signal. How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000001718856 WORK FLOW SHA900E *1 ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)" SYMPTOM TABLE Symptom Reference Page A/C system does not come on. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System. A/C system display is malfunctioning. Go to Navigation System, or Integrated Display System. A/C system cannot be controlled. Go to Self-diagnosis Function. Air outlet does not change. Mode door motor is malfunctioning. ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" Intake door does not change. Intake door motor is malfunctioning. AV-150 (With NAVI.) or AV-94 (Without NAVI) Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. Discharge air temperature does not change. Air mix door motor is malfunctioning. ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control" Defroster door motor is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor. ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor. ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" Rear blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Blower Motor. ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit" Rear discharge air temperature and/or air outlet does not change. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Air Control circuit. ATC-93, "Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit" Revision: August 2007 ATC-30 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Reference Page Magnet clutch does not engage. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" Insufficient cooling Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling" Insufficient heating Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. ATC-109, "Insufficient Heating" Noise Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. ATC-113, "Noise" Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis. ATC-114, "Self-Diagnosis" Memory function does not operate. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Memory Function. ATC-116, "Memory Function" Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718857 A B C D E ENGINE COMPARTMENT F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-31 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA2221E 1. Refrigerant pressure sensor E111 4. Heater pump E127 2. Compressor F3 (view from right tire housing) 3. Ambient Sensor E1 FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Revision: August 2007 ATC-32 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJIA2018E P 1. Intake door motor (driver) M58 2. Air mix door motor (driver) M39 3. In-vehicle sensor M32 4. Evaporator 5. Intake sensor M305 6. Variable blower control (front) M122 7. Air mix door motor (passenger) M306 8. Mode door motor M304 9. Defroster door motor M303 10. Intake door motor (passenger) M302 11. Heater pump relay E128 12. Front air control M49, M50 13. Optical sensor M16 14. Front blower motor M62 REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Revision: August 2007 ATC-33 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA2019E 1. Rear air control (rear) B150 Revision: August 2007 2. Rear blower motor B134 ATC-34 3. Air mix door motor (rear) B146 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718858 A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJWA0433E Revision: August 2007 ATC-35 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - A/C,A - INFOID:0000000001718859 WJWA0434E Revision: August 2007 ATC-36 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJWA0435E P Revision: August 2007 ATC-37 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJWA0436E Revision: August 2007 ATC-38 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJWA0437E P Revision: August 2007 ATC-39 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALIWA0052GB Revision: August 2007 ATC-40 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJWA0439E P Revision: August 2007 ATC-41 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALIWA0053GB Revision: August 2007 ATC-42 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJWA0440E P Revision: August 2007 ATC-43 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000001718860 FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WJIA2020E TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUES FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL Terminal No. Wire Color Item Ignition Switch 1 LG 2 G/W Optical sensor (driver) ON Air mix door motor (passenger) CW ON 3 Y Sensor ground ON 4 L/R Compressor ON signal 5 L/Y Fan ON signal 6 Y/B Air mix door motor (driver) feedback ON Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Clockwise rotation - 0 - 5V Battery voltage 0V ON A/C switch OFF 5V ON A/C switch ON 0V ON Fan switch OFF 5V ON Fan switch ON 0V - 7 LG Mode door motor feedback ON 8 R/L Illumination + ON Park lamps ON - 9 R/Y Illumination - - Park lamps ON 0 - 5V 0 - 5V Battery voltage PIIA2344E Heater pump OFF Battery voltage Heater pump ON 0V 10 R/L Heater pump ON 11 R/W Intake sensor ON - 0 - 5V 12 W/G Aux blower speed ON - 0 - 5V 13 O Variable blower control ON - 0 - 5V 14 Y/R Air mix door motor (passenger) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 15 G/Y Power supply for IGN ON - Battery voltage 16 W/L Rear defroster request ON - Battery voltage 17 L/B Air mix door motor (driver) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 18 Y/G Air mix door motor (driver) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 19 L/O Mode door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 20 SB Mode door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 21 R Intake door motor (driver) CW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 22 R/B Intake door motor (driver) CCW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 23 W Defroster door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage Revision: August 2007 ATC-44 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. Wire Color 24 W/B 25 GR/R 26 Item Ignition Switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Defroster door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Ambient sensor ON - 0 - 5V O/B Sensor return ON - 0 - 5V 27 Y/R Power supply for BAT - - Battery voltage 28 W/G Sensor power ON - 5V 29 LG/B Air mix door motor (passenger) feedback ON - 0 - 5V 30 G/B Air mix door motor (rear) feedback ON - 0 - 5V 31 BR In-vehicle sensor motor (+) ON - Battery voltage 32 BR/W In-vehicle sensor signal ON - 0 - 5V 33 R/G Front AUX (rear) ON - 0 - 5V 34 BR/Y Front aux backlight dim ON Headlamps OFF Battery voltage 35 V/W Front aux tell tale LED ON Tell tale OFF Battery voltage 36 B Ground - - 40 P CAN-L ON - - 41 L CAN-H ON - - 42 SB Optical sensor (passenger) ON - 43 P/L Air mix door motor (rear) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 44 LG/R Air mix door motor (rear) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 45 P Intake door motor (passenger) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 46 P/B Intake door motor (passenger) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 47 Y/L Rear aux blower pot ON Rear blower motor 0 - 5V 0 - 5V Battery voltage B C D E F 0V G 0 - 5V 48 W/R Rear aux temp pot ON Rear air control (rear) temperature control dial 49 G/O Front aux blower pot ON Rear air control (front) blower motor 0 - 5V 50 GR/L Front aux temp pot ON Rear air control (front) temperature control dial 0 - 5V A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function A H I ATC K INFOID:0000000001718861 L DESCRIPTION NOTE: If using CONSULT-III refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)". The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, CAN system, battery voltage, and stuck button on front air control. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by the following: On the AV switch, hold the memory "4" button and rotate the audio volume control dial until the Self-Diagnostic screen shows on the display. Scroll down and select "Confirmation/Adjustment" with the joystick. Select "Auto Climate Control" with the joystick to start the self-test. The fan bars will flash on the display during the self-test, and then the fault codes (if any are present) will display in the ambient temperature area. Refer to "SELFDIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". The fault codes will continue to scroll until self-diagnostic mode is exited. To exit Revision: August 2007 ATC-45 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > self-diagnostic mode, press the "BACK" button on the AV switch repeatedly until the screen displays the HVAC status. WJIA2022E SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART NOTE: If using CONSULT-III refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)". Code No. Reference page 02 EE changed by calibration ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" 03 Battery voltage out of range SC-4 12 Air mix door motor (passenger) circuit failure ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 20 BCM not responding to A/C request MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" 21 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-76 22 Air mix door motor (driver) circuit failure ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 30 In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (low) 31 In-vehicle sensor circuit out of range (high) 38 Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure 40 Ambient sensor circuit short 41 Ambient sensor circuit open 44 In-vehicle sensor motor circuit open 46 In-vehicle sensor motor circuit short 50 Optical sensor (driver) circuit open or short 52 Optical sensor (passenger) circuit open or short 56 Intake sensor circuit short 57 Intake sensor circuit open 62 Defroster door drive short /open/out of limits ATC-74, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" 72 Intake door motor (passenger) short/open ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" 80 CAN bus fault LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart" Revision: August 2007 ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit" ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit" ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit" ATC-46 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Code No. Reference page 82 Intake door motor (driver) short/open ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" 90 Stuck button ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" 92 Mode door motor short/open/out of limits ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" Operational Check (Front) A B INFOID:0000000001718862 The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. Conditions C : Engine running and at normal operating temperature D CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the temperature to 32°C (90°F). Rotate the blower control dial counterclockwise (hold blower control dial until system shuts OFF). Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. 6. Press the AUTO switch. Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature. E F 7. Rotate the blower control dial counterclockwise (hold blower control dial until system shuts OFF). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-116, "Memory Function". If OK, continue with next check. G H CHECKING BLOWER 1. Rotate blower control dial clockwise to turn system on. Blower should operate on low speed. The fan display should have one bar lit (on display). I 2. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed and fan display until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave blower on maximum speed. ATC If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. K CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR 1. 2. Press each mode switch and press DEF ( ) switch. Each position indicator should change shape (on display). L 3. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". Mode door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-51, "Mode Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF or D/F is selected. M N O CHECKING RECIRCULATION 1. Select vent ( ) mode switch and then press recirculation ( ) switch one time. Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Press recirculation ( ) switch one more time. Recirculation indicator should go off. 3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should change slightly). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-69, "Intake Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Rotate temperature dial counterclockwise (driver side or passenger side) until 16°C (60°F) is displayed. Revision: August 2007 ATC-47 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" or ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Rotate temperature dial clockwise (driver side or passenger side) until 32°C (90°F) is displayed. 2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109, "Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" or ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECK A/C SWITCH 1. 2. Press A/C switch when AUTO switch is ON, or in manual mode. A/C switch indicator will turn ON. • Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING AUTO MODE 1. 2. Press AUTO switch. Display should indicate AUTO. • If ambient temperature is warm, and selected temperature is cool, confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle, and set temperatures.) If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control", then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-98, "Magnet Clutch Circuit". If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair", ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures. Operational Check (Rear) INFOID:0000000001718863 The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. Conditions : Engine running and at normal operating temperature CHECKING REAR BLOWER MOTOR 1. Press the AUTO switch on the front air control. 2. Rotate rear air control (front) blower control dial to low speed. 3. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. 4. Leave blower on maximum speed. 5. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 6. Rotate rear air control (rear) blower control dial to low speed. 7. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. 8. Leave blower on maximum speed. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING REAR DISCHARGE AIR Revision: August 2007 ATC-48 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial from maximum heat to maximum cold. 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial from maximum heat to maximum cold. 5. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". Air mix door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. A B C D E F G LJIA0127E CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE DECREASE H 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). I 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 5. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102, ATC "Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. K L CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat. 2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat. 5. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109, "Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-93, "Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit". If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures. Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control INFOID:0000000001718864 SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. INSPECTION FLOW Revision: August 2007 ATC-49 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - AUTO MODE 1. 2. Press AUTO switch. Display should indicate AUTO. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and set temperatures.) Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM". OK or NG OK >> System OK. NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motors, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system. Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) There are two PTCs (passenger and driver) (1) built into the front air control. They can be set from 16°C (60°F) to 32°C (90°F) temperature range by rotating the temperature dial. The set temperature is displayed. WJIA2023E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 ATC-50 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. A B C WJIA2024E D 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connectors. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 15 and connector M50 (B) terminal 27, and ground. E F Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Front air control connector Terminal No. M49 (A) 15 M50 (B) 27 (-) Ground OFF ACC ON Approx. 0V Approx. 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage G WJIA2025E H I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check 10A and 15A fuses [Nos. 2 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78. ATC • If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. • If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. K CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 2. 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 36 and ground. L Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. N WJIA2026E O Mode Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718865 SYMPTOM: P • Air outlet does not change. • Mode door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DISCHARGE AIR 1. Press each of the four mode position switches and then press the tor should change shape (on display). Revision: August 2007 ATC-51 (DEF) switch. Each position indica2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when DEF ( ) or D/F ( ) is selected. Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK MODE DOOR OPERATION Check and verify mode door mechanism for smooth operation in each mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair as necessary. 5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK THE MODE DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT Perform diagnostic procedure for the mode door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace motor. Refer to ATC-148, "Removal and Installation". 7.RECHECK FOR CODES Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnostic codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 8. 8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Repair as necessary. NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Mode door control system components are: Revision: August 2007 ATC-52 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Front air control • Mode door motor • PBR (built into mode door motor) • In-vehicle sensor • Ambient sensor • Optical sensor • Intake sensor A B System Operation The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. In AUTO mode the mode door position is set by the front air control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver or passenger. C D E F G H I ATC WJIA0423E K Mode Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION L Mode Door Motor M WJIA0434E The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. N O P WJIA0424E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Revision: August 2007 ATC-53 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Press the B/L ( ) mode switch. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19 while pressing the floor ( ) mode switch. Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 19 20 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Press floor mode switch Battery voltage WJIA2027E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20, 19 and ground. 20 - Ground 19 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2028E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press the mode switch to the D/F ( ) mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 19 and terminal 20 while pressing the mode switch to the vent ( ) mode. Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 20 19 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Press vent mode switch Battery voltage WJIA2029E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 ATC-54 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C WJIA2030E 5.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. D Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 20, 19 and the mode door motor harness connector (B) terminal 5, 6. 20 - 5 19 - 6 E F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. G WJIA2031E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND H 1. 2. 3. I Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28. ATC Connector Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (M50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K WJIA2032E L 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 28 and ground. N Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. O WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS Revision: August 2007 ATC-55 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-1 : Continuity should exist. WJIA2035E OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 7 and ground while cycling mode switch through all modes. Voltage : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2036E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 7 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2037E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 ATC-56 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector and front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 7. A B Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Air Mix Door Motor Circuit WJIA2038E D INFOID:0000000001718866 E SYMPTOM: • Discharge air temperature does not change. • Air mix door motor does not operate. F INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. 2. G Turn the temperature control dial (driver) clockwise until 32°C (90°F) is displayed. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. H >> GO TO 2. 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Turn the temperature control dial (driver) counterclockwise until 16°C (60°F) is displayed. 2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. I ATC 3.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS K L M Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 5. N 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation from 16°C (60°F) to 32°C (90°F) in each mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair as necessary. 6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 7. Revision: August 2007 ATC-57 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7.CHECK THE AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT Perform diagnostic procedure for the air mix door motors. Refer to "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace air mix door motor. Refer to ATC-150. 8.RECHECK FOR CODES Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnostic codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 9. 9.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: • • • • • • • Front air control Air mix door motors (driver, passenger, and rear) PBR (built-into air mix door motors) In-vehicle sensor Ambient sensor Optical sensor Intake sensor System Operation The front air control receives data base on the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear passengers. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. In AUTO mode the air mix, intake, mode door, and defrost door positions are set by the front air control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear passengers. Revision: August 2007 ATC-58 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new door position data is returned to the front air control. A B C D E F WJIA0427E Air Mix Door Control Specification G COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motors H I WJIA0435E The driver and front passenger air mix door motors are attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The rear air mix door motor is attached to the rear heater & cooling unit assembly. These motors rotate so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front (or rear) air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors. ATC K L M WJIA0428E N O P WJIA0429E Revision: August 2007 ATC-59 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA0430E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (driver) to 32°C (90°F). Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control dial (driver) to 16°C (60°F). Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 18 17 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage WJIA2039E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18, 17 and ground. 18 - Ground 17 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2040E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (driver) to 16°C (60°F). Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control dial (driver) to 32°C (90°F). Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 17 18 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage WJIA2041E OK or NG Revision: August 2007 ATC-60 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". A 4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17. B C Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. D WJIA2042E 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 18, 17 and the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 5, 6. 18 - 5 17 - 6 F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. E H WJIA2043E I 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Connectors Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. ATC K L WJIA2032E M 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 28 and ground. Continuity should not exist. P OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS Revision: August 2007 ATC-61 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-1 : Continuity should exist. WJIA2035E OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 6 and ground while rotating temperature control dial from 32°C (90°F) to 16°C (60°F). Voltage : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2044E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 6 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2045E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 ATC-62 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (driver) harness connector and front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (driver) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 6. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. C WJIA2046E D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) E 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (passenger) to 32°C (90°F). Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 and terminal 14 while rotating temperature control dial (passenger) to 16°C (60°F). Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 14 2 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage F G H WJIA2047E I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. ATC 2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2, 14 and ground. K L 2 - Ground 14 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. M WJIA2048E N 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (passenger) to 16°C (60°F). Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 and terminal 14 while rotating temperature control dial (passenger) to 32°C (90°F). Connector Front air control: M49 Revision: August 2007 Terminals (+) (-) 2 14 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage ATC-63 O P WJIA2049E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 and terminal 14. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2050E 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 2, 14 and the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 5, 6. 2-5 14 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2051E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Connectors Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (M50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. WJIA2032E 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND Revision: August 2007 ATC-64 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 28 and ground. A B Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. C WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. E F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. G WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. H I ATC : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. K WJIA2035E 3-1 : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. M 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 29 and ground while rotating temperature control dial (passenger) from 32°C (90° F) to 16°C (60° F). Voltage N O : Approx. 0 - 5V P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2052E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND Revision: August 2007 ATC-65 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 29 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2053E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector and front air control harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (passenger) harness connector M306 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 29. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2054E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum hot. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold. Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 43 44 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage WJIA2055E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43, 44 and ground. 43 - Ground 44 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: August 2007 ATC-66 WJIA2056E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control dial (rear) to maximum hot. Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 44 43 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage B C D WJIA2057E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". E 4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN F 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44. Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. I WJIA2058E 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. ATC Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 43, 44 and the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 1, 6. 43 - 1 44 - 6 K : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. L M WJIA2059E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND N 1. 2. 3. O Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. P Connectors Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (M50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: August 2007 WJIA2032E ATC-67 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 28 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-2 : Continuity should exist. WJIA2060E OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 30 and ground while rotating temperature control dial (rear) from maximum cold to maximum hot. Voltage : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2061E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND Revision: August 2007 ATC-68 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 30 and ground. A B Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. C WJIA2062E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector and front air control harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 30. E F Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2063E H Intake Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718867 I SYMPTOM: • Intake door does not change. • Intake door motor does not operate normally. ATC INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REC ( ) K 1. Press the vent mode ( ). 2. Press REC ( ) switch. The REC ( )indicator should illuminate. 3. Press REC ( ) switch again. The REC ( ) indicator should go out. 4. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound changes slightly). Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. L M 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK N Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. O 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS P Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK THE INTAKE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS Perform diagnostic procedure for the intake door motor. Refer to "Intake Door Motor Circuit". Revision: August 2007 ATC-69 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace front air control or repair wiring. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR OPERATION Check and verify intake door mechanism for smooth operation. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor. Refer to ATC-145. NG >> Repair intake door mechanism. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Intake door control system components are: • • • • • • • Front air control Intake door motor (driver and passenger) PBR (built into intake door motors) In-vehicle sensor Ambient sensor Optical sensor Intake sensor System Operation The intake door control determines the intake door (driver and passenger) positions based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motors rotate closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motors rotate in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines the intake doors positions based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the DEFROST, or OFF switches are pushed or A/C switch is OFF, the front air control sets the intake doors at the fresh position. Recirculation is not allowed in DEFROST, D/F, or Floor modes. WJIA1751E Intake Doors Control Specification WJIA1202E Revision: August 2007 ATC-70 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Intake door motors The driver and passenger intake door motors are attached to the intake unit. They rotate so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. B C D WJIA0433E E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 22 21 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage G H WJIA2064E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. I ATC 2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22, 21 and ground. 22 - Ground 21 - Ground K L : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. M WJIA2065E N 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. O Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit out of self-diagnostic mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". P WJIA2066E Revision: August 2007 ATC-71 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 21 22 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2067E 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor (driver) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 22, 21 and the intake door motor (driver) harness connector M58 (B) terminal 1, 6. 1 - 22 6 - 21 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2068E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 45 and terminal 46 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 45 46 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage WJIA2069E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND Revision: August 2007 ATC-72 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46, 45 and ground. 46 - Ground 45 - Ground A B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. C WJIA2070E D 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit out of self-diagnostic mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 46 45 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage E F G WJIA2071E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". H I 4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45. ATC K Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 5. L WJIA2072E M 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46, 45 and the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector terminal 1, 6. 46 - 1 45 - 6 O : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: August 2007 N ATC-73 P WJIA2073E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Defroster Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718868 SYMPTOM: • Defroster door does not change. • Defroster door does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DEFROSTER DOOR 1. Press the vent switch ( ). 2. Press the defrost switch ( ). Defroster indicator should illuminate. 3. Listen for defroster door position change (blower sound should change slightly). Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Perform diagnostic procedure for defroster door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. 5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR OPERATION Check and verify defroster door mechanism for smooth operation. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. NG >> Repair defroster door mechanism. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Defroster door control system components are: • • • • • • • Front air control Defroster door motor PBR (built into defroster door motor) In-vehicle sensor Ambient sensor Optical sensor Intake sensor System Operation The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the defroster switch. When the defroster switch is depressed, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts. Revision: August 2007 ATC-74 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines defroster door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. Auto mode may be floor/defrost mode, but full defrost mode is only a manually selected mode. A B C D E F WJIA0438E G COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Defroster door motor The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The front air control sends voltage to rotate the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door. H I ATC LJIA0063E K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 24 and terminal 23 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" M N Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 23 24 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage O WJIA2074E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. P 2.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND Revision: August 2007 ATC-75 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23, 24 and ground. 24 - Ground 23 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2075E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press the "BACK" button repeatedly to exit self-diagnostic mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 24 23 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage WJIA2076E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2077E 5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 24, 23 and the defroster door motor harness connector M303 (B) terminal 1, 6. 24 - 1 23 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Front Blower Motor Circuit WJIA2078E INFOID:0000000001718869 SYMPTOM: Revision: August 2007 ATC-76 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. A INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - FRONT BLOWER 1. 2. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. B C 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS D Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. E 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS F Check for any service bulletins. G >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 5. H I 5.CHECK BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION Check and verify blower motor operates in all speeds. Does blower motor operate in all speeds? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR". ATC K 6.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION L M Component Parts N Blower speed control system components are: • • • • • • • • • Front air control Front Blower motor Front Blower motor relay Variable blower control (front) In-vehicle sensor Ambient sensor Optical sensor Intake sensor Engine coolant temperature (via CAN communication) Revision: August 2007 ATC-77 O P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Operation WJIA2079E Automatic Mode In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control and variable blower control (front) based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor, engine coolant temperature sensor (via CAN communication), and potentio temperature control (PTC). When the air flow is increased, the duty ratio of the blower fan motor′s drive signal is changed at 8%/sec. to prevent a sudden increase in air flow. In addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low engine coolant temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are available. Starting Fan Speed Control Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode). In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50°C (122°F), the blower will not operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperatures. In the most extreme case (very low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210 seconds as described above. After the engine coolant temperature reaches 50°C (122°F), or the 210 seconds has elapsed, the blower speed will increase to the objective blower speed. Start up from normal operating or hot soak condition (Automatic mode). The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed. The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective blower speed). Blower Speed Compensation Sunload When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low speed. The speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower operates at low speed. During high sunload conditions, the front air control causes the blower speed to increase. Blower Speed Control Specification WJIA0441E Revision: August 2007 ATC-78 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Variable Blower Control (Front) The variable blower control (front) is located on the cooling unit assembly. The variable blower control (front) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). B C D WJIA0442E E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting blower speed control. F G H I ATC K WJIA2080E L 1.CHECK FUSES Check 20A fuses (No. 28 and 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box). For fuse layout. Refer to PG-79. M Fuses are good. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 7. N 2.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-79 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Press the AUTO switch. 3. Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal (+) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 3. WJIA0326E 3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor relay connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 3 and 6 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1896E 4.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY Check voltage between front blower motor relay connector H-2 terminal 1 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0080E 5.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor connector. Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 5 and 7 and front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal (+). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0968E 6.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 ATC-80 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminal 2 and ground. A Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace blower motor relay. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2147E 7.REPLACE FUSES D 1. Replace fuses. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Activate the front blower motor. 4. Does fuse blow? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Inspection End. E F 8.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY G 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check front blower motor relay. Refer to "Front Blower Motor Relay". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace front blower motor relay. H 9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR I Check front blower motor. Refer to "Front Blower Motor". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". ATC 10.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT K Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 6 and 3 and ground. L Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair harness or connector. M N WJIA2148E 11.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-81 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect variable blower control (front) harness connector. 2. Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to ATC154, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2083E 12.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect variable blower control (front) connector and front blower motor relay connector. Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 (A) terminals 5 and 7 and variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 (B) terminal 1. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2081E 13.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Check front blower motor. Refer to "Front Blower Motor". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace front blower motor relay. 14.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 (A) terminal 3 and front blower motor harness connector M62 (B) terminal (-). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2149E 15.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 4 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2150E 16.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 ATC-82 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect front air control connector. 2. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 13 and variable blower control (front) connector M122 (A) terminal 2. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2084E 17.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. D Reconnect all disconnected parts except the variable blower control (front) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn front blower motor to maximum speed. Check voltage between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 2 Ground 5V Front air control: M122 E F G WJIA2158E OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to ATC-154, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". H COMPONENT INSPECTION I Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. ATC K L M N O P LJIA0068E Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. • Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. Revision: August 2007 ATC-83 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. WJIA2168E Rear Blower Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718870 SYMPTOM: • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear). • Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (front) only. • Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (rear) only. • Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected. • Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (rear) speed selected. • Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (front). • Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (rear). INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) 1. 2. Press AUTO switch. Turn the rear air control (front) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation (REAR CTRL indicator off). 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1. Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower motor back the rear air control (rear). 2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation. 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> • Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 ". • Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 ". NO >> • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 " 3.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1. Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower motor back the rear air control (rear). 2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation. 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 ". 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. Revision: August 2007 ATC-84 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > >> GO TO 5. 5.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS A Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> INSPECTION END. B SYSTEM DESCRIPTION C Component Parts Rear blower speed control system components are: • Front air control • Rear air control (front) • Rear air control (rear) • Variable blower control (rear) • Rear blower motor • Rear blower motor relay D E System Operation F G H I ATC K WJIA2085E Rear Blower Control NOTE: The rear blower motor can only operate when the front blower motor is on. When the rear air control (front) blower control dial is turned on and the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), it allows the rear air control (rear) to control the rear blower motor speed. If the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off), the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower speed control dial position. L M COMPONENT DESCRIPTION N Variable Blower Control (Rear) The variable blower control (rear) (1) is located on the rear blower motor case (1). The variable blower control (rear) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). O P WJIA2086E TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 Revision: August 2007 ATC-85 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2099E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2093E TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE Revision: August 2007 ATC-86 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. A B Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. C WJIA2099E D 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. E F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. G WJIA2093E H 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 49 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 6. I ATC Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. K WJIA2101E L TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) M 1. Disconnect rear air control (front) connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Press AUTO switch. Does rear blower motor operate in high speed? YES >> GO TO 17. NO >> GO TO 2. N O 2.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY P Revision: August 2007 ATC-87 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear blower motor harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Press AUTO switch. 5. Rotate rear air control (front) blower speed control dial to maximum speed (REAR CTRL indicator off). 6. Check voltage between rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 9. LJIA0099E 3.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect variable blower control (rear) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between variable blower control connector B151 terminal 1 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2154E 4.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check voltage between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Front air control: B151 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 2 Ground 4.5 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. WJIA2155E 5.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 4 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2150E 6.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR Check rear blower motor. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 ATC-88 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between rear blower motor connector B134 terminal (-) and variable blower control (rear) connector B151 terminal 3. B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. C D WJIA2156E 8.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 12 and variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 (B) terminal 2. F Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. H WJIA2157E 9.CHECK FUSES I Check 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 14. ATC 10.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY K Check rear blower motor relay. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor Relay". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace rear blower motor relay. L 11.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR BLOWER MOTOR AND FUSE BLOCK (J/ B) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3 terminal 3N and 8N and rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+). M N Continuity should exist. O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P LJIA0107E 12.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 ATC-89 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3 terminal 7N and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0102E 13.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector E30 terminal 3Q and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace fuse block (J/B). NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0101E 14.REPLACE FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Replace fuses. 3. Reconnect all disconnected parts. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Activate the rear blower motor from the rear air control (front). 6. Does fuse blow? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 15. No >> Inspection End. 15.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR Check rear blower motor. Refer to "Rear Blower Motor". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". 16.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector and variable blower control (rear). Check continuity between rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (rear). Refer to ATC154, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0104E 17.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY Revision: August 2007 ATC-90 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. A Battery voltage should exist. B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2087E 18.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FRONT AUX BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector M50. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. E F Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front) Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. G WJIA2152E H TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear air control (rear) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V I ATC K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. WJIA2099E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1, and 9 and ground. N Continuity should exist. O OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2100E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT FOR SHORT Revision: August 2007 ATC-91 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2152E 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT BETWEEN FRONT AIR CONTROL AND REAR IAR CONTROL REAR 1. Disconnect front air control harness connector. 2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 47 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 6. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2153E COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Blower Motor Relay Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relays. WJIA0973E Rear Blower Motor Check that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. Revision: August 2007 ATC-92 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and ensure that the blower motor rotates freely and quietly. A B C LJIA0115E D Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit INFOID:0000000001718871 SYMPTOM: • Temperature cannot be adjusted from the rear air control. E INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) OPERATIONAL CHECK F 1. 2. 3. G Press AUTO switch (rear air controls only operate when front blower is on). Turn the rear blower motor to maximum speed from the rear air control (front). Turn rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise and then counterclockwise (REAR CTRL indicator off). 4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets in the maximum heat position and cold air at rear roof discharge air outlets in the maximum cold position. Does the rear air control (front) operate properly? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check rear air control (front). Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)". H I 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) OPERATIONAL CHECK ATC Press the REAR CTRL switch on rear air control (front) to send control to the rear air control (rear). Turn the rear blower motor to maximum speed from the rear air control (rear). Turn rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial slowly clockwise and then counterclockwise (REAR CTRL indicator on). K 4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets in the maximum heat position and cold air at rear roof discharge air outlets in the maximum cold position. Does the rear air control (rear) operate properly? L YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)". M CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS 1. 2. 3. 3. Perform a complete operational check (rear) for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-48, "Operational Check (Rear)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS N O Check for any service bulletins. P >> GO TO 5. 5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> System OK. Revision: August 2007 ATC-93 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Rear air control system components are: • Front air control • Rear air control (front) • Rear air control (rear) • Air mix door motor (rear) System Operation WJIA2102E Rear Air Control The front air control must be turned on before either rear air control can be used. When the REAR CTRL indicator is off the rear air control (front) will control all rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations. When the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), the rear air control (rear) will control all the rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) SYMPTOM: • Temperature/mode operation is malfunctioning. 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE Revision: August 2007 ATC-94 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 3 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 3 Ground 4.5V A B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. WJIA2103E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT VOLTAGE D Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 7 and ground. E Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 7 Ground 4.5V F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. WJIA2104E H 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. I Continuity should exist. ATC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. K WJIA2093E L 5.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 8 and ground. M Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 8. N O WJIA2105E 6.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 ATC-95 P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2108E 7.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 50 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 7. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2109E 8.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 8. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2107E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AUX TEMPERATURE POT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear air control (rear). Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 7 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 7 Ground 4.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2110E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE VOLTAGE Revision: August 2007 ATC-96 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 3 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 3 Ground 4.5V A B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6 WJIA2103E D 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE RETURN GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 8 and ground. E Continuity should exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. G WJIA2105E 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. H Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 9 and ground. I Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1 and ground. ATC Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2106E L 5.CHECK REAR AUX TEMP CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONM TROL FOR OPEN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 48 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 7. N O Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2111E 6.CHECK REFERENCE VOLATAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 ATC-97 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2108E 7.CHECK REFERENCE RETURN GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 8. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. Magnet Clutch Circuit WJIA2107E INFOID:0000000001718872 SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MAGNET CLUTCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Press vent switch ( ). Press the A/C switch. Display shows , A/C. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and set temperatures.) Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 5. Revision: August 2007 ATC-98 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR A Check and verify ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit". >> GO TO 6. B 6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR Check and verify intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". C >> GO TO 7. 7.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS D Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". E SYSTEM DESCRIPTION F The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the following table. Ambient temperature °C (°F) Compressor ON intake temperature C (°F) Compressor OFF intake temperature C (°F) 0 (32) 2.5 (37) 2.0 (36) 10 (50) 2.5 (37) 2.0 (36) 20 (68) 2.5 (37) 1.5 (35) 30 (86) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) 40 (104) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) 50 (122) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) G H I ATC K L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. M N O P WJIA2112E Revision: August 2007 ATC-99 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". 2.PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST Perform Auto Active Test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". Does magnet clutch operate? Yes or No Yes >> • WITH CONSULT-III GO TO 5. • WITHOUT CONSULT-III GO TO 6. No >> Check 10A fuse (No. 33, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3. 3.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and compressor (magnet clutch) connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 and compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1. 33 – 1 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0331E 4.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage direct current to terminal. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch". SJIA0197E 5.CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". A/C SW ON A/C SW OFF : COMP ON SIG ON : COMP ON SIG OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL Revision: August 2007 ATC-100 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 27 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 4. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2113E 7.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL) 1. 2. 3. D Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 4 and ground. E F Terminals (+) Front air control connector (-) Terminal No. Condition Voltage (Approx.) A/C switch: ON 0V A/C switch: OFF 5V G WJIA2114E M49 4 Ground H OK or NG I OK >> GO TO 8. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal ATC and Installation of BCM". 8.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. K Start engine. Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70 and ground. L Terminals (+) ECM connector Terminal No. F54 70 (-) Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) A/C switch: ON 0.36 - 3.88V M N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Refer to EC-603. WJIA2192E O 9.CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". P FAN CONTROL SWITCH ON FAN CONTROL SWITCH OFF : FAN ON SIG ON : FAN ON SIG OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. Revision: August 2007 ATC-101 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 5. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2115E 11.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL) 1. 2. 3. Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 5 and ground. Terminals (+) Front air control connector (-) Terminal No. M49 5 Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) A/C switch: ON Blower motor operates 0V A/C switch: OFF 5V WJIA2116E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 12.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION Check CAN communication. Refer to ATC-27, "CAN Communication System Description". • BCM – ECM • ECM – IPDM E/R • ECM – Front air control OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s). Insufficient Cooling INFOID:0000000001718873 SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Press the AUTO switch. 2. Turn temperature control dial (driver) counterclockwise until 16° C (32° F) is displayed. 3. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 ATC-102 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS A Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer toATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. B 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS C Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 3. D 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". E 5.CHECK DRIVE BELTS F Check compressor belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Adjust or replace compressor belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". G 6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION H Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation. Does air mix door operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace air mix door control linkage. I 7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION ATC Check and verify cooling fan motor for smooth operation. Refer to EC-463, "Description". Does cooling fan motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check cooling fan motor. Refer to EC-463. K 8.CHECK RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT BEFORE USAGE L Check recovery/recycling equipment before connecting to vehicle. Verify there is no pressure in the recovery/ recycling equipment by checking the gauges. If pressure exists, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. M >> GO TO 9. 9.CHECK REFRIGERANT PURITY N 1. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. 2. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling and refrigerant identifier. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Check contaminated refrigerant. Refer to ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". O 10.CHECK FOR EVAPORATOR FREEZE UP P Start engine and run A/C. Check for evaporator freeze up. Does evaporator freeze up? YES >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES". NO >> GO TO 11. 11.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE Check refrigerant pressure with manifold gauge connected. Refer to "Test Reading". Revision: August 2007 ATC-103 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES". NG >> GO TO 12. 12.CHECK AIR DUCTS Check ducts for air leaks. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Repair air leaks. PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES RJIA1601E Revision: August 2007 ATC-104 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > *1 "PERFORMANCE CHART" *4 ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" *2 "PERFORMANCE CHART" *3 "Trouble Diagnoses for UNUSUAL Pressure" A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O P WJIA0361E *1 ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" Revision: August 2007 *2 ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" *3 ATC-105 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > PERFORMANCE CHART Test Condition Testing must be performed as follows: Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Windows Open Hood Open TEMP. Max. COLD Mode switch (Ventilation) set Recirculation (REC) switch (Recirculation) set Max. speed set Blower speed (FR and RR) Engine speed Idle speed RR system ON Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. Test Reading Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Relative humidity % Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) 25 (77) 9.7 - 13.7 (49 - 57) 30 (86) 12.6 - 16.6 (55 - 62) 35 (95) 14.9 - 19.9 (59 - 68) 40 (104) 17.3 - 23.3 (63 - 74) 50-70 Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % High-pressure (Discharge side) Low-pressure (Suction side) Air temperature °C (°F) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 25 (77) 1,059 - 1,294 (10.8 - 13.2, 153.6 - 187.7) 216 - 255 (2.2 - 2.6, 31.3 - 37.0) 30 (86) 1,206 - 1,481 (12.3 - 15.1, 174.9 - 214.8) 255 - 304 (2.6 - 3.1, 37.0 - 44.1) 35 (95) 1,393 - 1,706 (14.2 - 17.4, 202.0 - 247.5) 275 - 343 (2.8 - 3.5, 39.8 - 49.8) 40 (104) 1,510 - 1,844 (15.4 - 18.8, 219.0 - 267.4) 343 - 422 (3.5 - 4.3, 49.8 - 61.2) 50-70 Trouble Diagnoses for Unusual Pressure Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table). Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High Revision: August 2007 ATC-106 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle • Low-pressure pipe is not cold. • When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approx- Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. • Clean condenser. • Check and repair cooling fan as necessary. Evacuate and recharge system. Engine tends to overheat. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair engine cooling system. • An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. • Plates are sometimes covered with frost. • Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side • Excessive refrigerant discharge flow • Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. ↓ Improper expansion valve adjustment AC359A Refrigerant cycle E F G H Replace expansion valve. I ATC High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low Gauge indication C D Poor heat exchange in condenser (After compressor operation stops, high-pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle imately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2, 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. A B Insufficient condenser cooling performance ↓ Air suction by cooling fan is in1. Condenser fins are sufficient. clogged. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan Both high- and low-pressure sides are too high. Corrective action Probable cause Corrective action K High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. • Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. • Check oil for contamination. L M AC360A High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. Refrigerant cycle N Probable cause Corrective action High- and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor". No temperature difference between high- and low-pressure sides. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor". AC356A P Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low Revision: August 2007 ATC-107 O 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. AC353A Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action • There is a big temperature difference between liquid tank outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. • Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. Liquid tank inside is slightly clogged. • Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. • Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. • Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side. High-pressure pipe located be- • Check and repair malfunctioning parts. tween liquid tank and expan• Check oil for contamination. sion valve is clogged. Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. Low refrigerant charge. ↓ Leaking fittings or components. Check refrigerant system for leaks. Refer to ATC-179, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment. 2. Malfunctioning expansion valve. 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. • Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. • Check oil for contamination. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. • Check and repair malfunctioning parts. • Check oil for contamination. Evaporator is frozen. • Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". • Replace compressor. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor". Air flow volume is too low. • Replace liquid tank. • Check oil for contamination. Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action • Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. • The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. • Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. • Replace liquid tank. AC354A Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative Revision: August 2007 ATC-108 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the malfunction is caused by water or foreign particles. • If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. • If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove the particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). • If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion valve. • Replace liquid tank. • Check oil for contamination. Low-pressure side becomes negative. Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve′s pipe is frosted or dewed. AC362A Insufficient Heating A B C D E F G INFOID:0000000001718874 SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating H INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Press the AUTO switch. 2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver) clockwise until 32° C (90° F) is displayed. 3. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. Can this symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform complete system operational check. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". 2.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. I ATC K L >> GO TO 3. 3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". N 4.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. O Check for proper engine coolant level. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". Check hoses for leaks or kinks. Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". Check for air in cooling system. P >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK HEATER PUMP 1. 2. Rotate temperature control dial to full hot 32°C (90°F). Rotate fan control dial counterclockwise to maximum speed. Revision: August 2007 ATC-109 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Heater pump should be activated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check heater pump circuit. Refer to ATC-110, "Heater Pump Circuit". 6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION Check the operation of the air mix door. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the air mix door motor circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". 7.CHECK AIR DUCTS Check for disconnected or leaking air ducts. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair all disconnected or leaking air ducts. 8.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses. OK or NG OK >> Hot inlet hose and a warm outlet hose: GO TO 9. NG >> Both hoses warm: GO TO 10. 9.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM Check engine control temperature sensor. Refer to EC-188. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Retest. 10.CHECK HEATER HOSES Check heater hoses for proper installation. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> 1. Back flush heater core. 2. Drain the water from the system. 3. Refill system with new engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". 4. GO TO 11 to retest. 11.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Replace heater core. Refer to ATC-140. Heater Pump Circuit INFOID:0000000001718875 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Heater pump control system components are: • Front air control • Heater pump relay • Heater pump • Intake sensor System Operation Revision: August 2007 ATC-110 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > The heater pump improves heater performance specifically at idle conditions. It is designed to operate in either of the following 2 situations: 1. Front blower motor set to maximum speed and temperature control dial (driver or passenger) set to full hot 32° C (90° F) or 2. Engine coolant temperature (signal via CAN communication) minus heater core outlet temperature (intake sensor input to front air control) is greater than 20° C (68° F). If the difference is less than 16° C (61° F), the heater pump will not operate unless the conditions in item No. 1 above are met. A B C D E F G WJIA1780E H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR HEATER PUMP CIRCUIT 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO HEATER PUMP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I Disconnect heater pump connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Set front blower motor to maximum speed. Turn temperature control dial (passenger or driver) to full hot 32° C (90° F). Check voltage between heater pump harness connector E127 terminal 1 and ground. (1) - Ground ATC K : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. WJIA2117E 2.CHECK HEATER PUMP GROUND 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between heater pump harness connector E127 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground L N : Continuity should exist. O OK or NG OK >> Replace heater pump. Refer to ATC-143. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2118E 3.CHECK HEATER PUMP RELAY 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check heater pump relay. Refer to "Heater Pump Relay". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 ATC-111 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace heater pump relay. 4.CHECK RELAY POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between heater pump relay harness connector E128 terminals 1, 5 and ground. 1 - Ground 5 - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1783E 5.CHECK HEATER PUMP MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (A) terminal 3 and heater pump harness connector E127 (B) terminal 1. 3-1 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (A) terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WJIA2119E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEATER PUMP RELAY AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 10 and heater pump relay harness connector E128 (B) terminal 2. 2 - 10 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (B) terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WJIA2120E OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Heater Pump Relay Revision: August 2007 ATC-112 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. A Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No B If NG, replace relay. C LHA160 D Noise INFOID:0000000001718876 SYMPTOM: Noise E INSPECTION FLOW F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-113 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA1972E *1 ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *2 *4 ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)" *5 ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *3 ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor" EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" Self-Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718877 SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. Revision: August 2007 ATC-114 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSPECTION FLOW A 1.CONFIRM AUTO MODE OPERATION 1. 2. Press the AUTO switch. Display should indicate AUTO. (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on ambient, in-vehicle and set temperatures.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. B C 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK (FRONT) Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS D E F Check for any service bulletins. Have any service bulletins been issued? YES >> Refer to appropriate service bulletin. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refer to MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control". 5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT H I ATC Check ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. K 6.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR CIRCUIT L Check in-vehicle sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-119, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. M 7.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT N Check optical sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-122, "Optical Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. O 8.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. P 9.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTORS PBR CIRCUIT Check air mix door motors PBR circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 ATC-115 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 10.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". Memory Function INFOID:0000000001718878 SYMPTOM: Memory function does not operate. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MEMORY FUNCTION 1. Set the temperature to 32°C (90°F). 2. Press the OFF switch. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Press the AUTO switch. 6. Confirm that the set temperature remains at previous temperature. 7. Press OFF switch. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control". >> GO TO 6. 6.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 ATC-116 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Ambient Sensor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718879 A COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (driver side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the front air control. B C D E WJIA0338E AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100 seconds. This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. F G H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. I ATC K WJIA2121E L 1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. M Disconnect ambient sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 and ground. N Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. O WJIA0526E 2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL Revision: August 2007 ATC-117 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 25. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2122E 3.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR Check ambient sensor. Refer to "Ambient Sensor". OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace ambient sensor. ATC-129. 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. 4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 26. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2123E OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor Revision: August 2007 ATC-118 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > After disconnecting ambient sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor component side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 12.73 −10 (14) 9.92 −5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 A B C D E F G WJIA0527E If NG, replace ambient sensor. Refer to ATC-129, "Removal and Installation". In-vehicle Sensor Circuit H INFOID:0000000001718880 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION I In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on instrument lower driver panel. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a value. It is then input into the front air control. ATC K L WJIA2193E M DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR N O P LJIA0088E SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2578 or B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 30 or 31 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor motor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2570 or B257E is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 44 or 46 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis Revision: August 2007 ATC-119 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND GROUND Self-diagnosis DTC B2578 or B2579 (with CONSULT-III) or code 30 or 31 (without CONSULT-III) is present. Refer to ATC-28, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)". Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 7. 2.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR RETURN VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 4 and ground. Approx. 5V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. LJIA0089E 3.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR VOLTAGE Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 1 and ground. Approx. 5V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. WJIA2132E 4.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Check in-vehicle sensor. Refer to "In-vehicle Sensor". OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. 5.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 26. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 4 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> 1. 2. WJIA2130E Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". Go to self-diagnosis ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. Revision: August 2007 ATC-120 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 32. B C Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should not exist. D WJIA2131E E OK or NG OK >> 1. 2. NG Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". Go to self-diagnosis ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. >> Repair harness or connector. 7.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR VOLTAGE (SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46) 1. 2. 3. 4. F G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 3 and ground. H Battery voltage should exist. I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 9. ATC WJIA2159E 8.CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT (SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46) K Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 terminal 2 and ground. L Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130. NG >> Repair harness or connector. M WJIA2128E N 9.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR MOTOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL (SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODES 44 OR 46) O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-121 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect front air control connector. 2. Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector M32 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 31. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2127E COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor (1) connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 4 at sensor component side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 21.40 −10 (14) 16.15 −5 (23) 12.29 0 (32) 9.41 5 (41) 7.27 10 (50) 5.66 15 (59) 4.45 20 (68) 3.51 25 (77) 2.79 30 (86) 2.24 35 (95) 1.80 40 (104) 1.45 45 (113) 1.18 WJIA2194E If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Refer to ATC-130, "Removal and Installation". Optical Sensor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718881 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The optical sensor M16 (1) is located on the passenger side defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control WJIA2133E OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS Revision: August 2007 ATC-122 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > The front air control also includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. A B C DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B257F or B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. D E F WJIA2134E G 1.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect optical sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 1 and ground. Connector Optical sensor: M16 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 1 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 5. I ATC WJIA2135E L 2.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE Check voltage between optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Optical sensor: M16 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 2 Ground 5V K M N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. O WJIA2136E 3.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 ATC-123 P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 3 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace optical sensor. Refer to ATC-131. NG >> GO TO 4. WJIA2137E 4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN OPTICAL SENSOR AND BCM 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 (B) terminal 3 and BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 18. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2169E 5.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORTED 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 1. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 (B) terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2138E OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORTED 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 42. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between optical sensor harness connector M16 (B) terminal 2 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2139E OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 ATC-124 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Intake Sensor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718882 A COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. B C D E WJIA0482E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. F G H WJIA2140E I 1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M305 terminal 2 and ground. ATC K Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. L WJIA0465E 2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 26. M N O Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2141E 3.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR Check intake sensor. Refer to "Intake Sensor". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 ATC-125 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132. 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. 4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 11. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 2 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2142E OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 209.0 −10 (14) 160.0 −5 (23) 123.0 0 (32) 95.8 5 (41) 74.9 10 (50) 58.9 15 (59) 46.7 20 (68) 37.3 25 (77) 30.0 30 (86) 24.2 35 (95) 19.7 40 (104) 16.1 45 (113) 13.2 WJIA0978E If NG, replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 ATC-126 2008 Quest CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONTROL UNIT A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718883 FRONT AIR CONTROL B Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C". Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). C D E F LJIA0196E 4. G Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. H REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. 2. 3. I Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to EI-38. ATC Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). K L M LJIA0195E 4. Remove the rear air control (front). N Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) O Removal P Revision: August 2007 ATC-127 2008 Quest CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. WJIA2143E 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-128 2008 Quest AMBIENT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > AMBIENT SENSOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718884 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. C D E WJIA0341E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-129 2008 Quest IN-VEHICLE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718885 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-130 2008 Quest OPTICAL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OPTICAL SENSOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718886 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. B Remove the front demister grille. Refer to LT-46, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. C D E ALIIA0061ZZ F INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-131 2008 Quest INTAKE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718887 Intake Sensor WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim (1). LIIA2480E Revision: August 2007 ATC-132 2008 Quest INTAKE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. A B C LIIA2481E D 4. 5. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-133 2008 Quest BLOWER MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BLOWER MOTOR Component INFOID:0000000001718888 Front Blower Motor LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case 2. Blower motor side cover 3. Blower motor case Rear Blower Motor WJIA2145E 1. Rear blower motor Revision: August 2007 2. Rear blower motor case ATC-134 3. Variable blower control (rear) 2008 Quest BLOWER MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718889 A FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the RH and LH ventilator duct. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation". Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation". Remove the blower motor side cover. Remove the front blower motor. C D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR BLOWER MOTOR E Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-135 2008 Quest IN-CABIN MICROFILTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718890 FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. LJIA0012E REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to MA-7. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Revision: August 2007 ATC-136 LJIA0058E 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY A Component INFOID:0000000001718891 Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I ATC K L WJIA1968E 1. High/low pressure pipe (production) 2. 4. Front heater core pipe and hose as- 5. sembly 7. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) ⇐ High/low pressure pipe bracket 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly Heater pump 6. High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) Front M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-137 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0066E 1. Rear heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Rear A/C pipes 3. Rear heater core pipes 4. Rear heater core hose 5. Rear blower motor 6. Underfloor rear A/C pipes 7. Underfloor rear heater core pipes Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718892 FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Revision: August 2007 ATC-138 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout". 9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: • Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". A B C D E F REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY G Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". H Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. I Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: ATC • Rear blower motor • Rear blower motor resistor • Rear air mix door motor Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit K assembly. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. L LJIA0021E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: • Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • Recharge the A/C system. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-139 2008 Quest HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER CORE Component INFOID:0000000001718893 Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case Revision: August 2007 2. Blower motor side cover ATC-140 3. Blower motor case 2008 Quest HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly A B C D E F G H I ATC K L WJIA2146E 1. Front cover 2. Evaporator and heater core case 3. Evaporator 4. Side cover 5. Heater core 6. Rear blower motor 7. Blower motor case 8. Variable blower control (rear) ⇐ Front M N Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718894 FRONT HEATER CORE O Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the side cover. Revision: August 2007 ATC-141 2008 Quest P HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. LJIA0019E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. 2. 3. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. LJIA0069E 4. 5. Remove the rear heater core bracket. Remove the rear heater core. LJIA0071E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-142 2008 Quest HEATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER PUMP A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718895 Heater Pump B C D E F G H I ATC WJIA2220E 1. Cowl top extension 2. Heater pump electrical connector 3. Heater pump 4. Front heater core pipe and hose assembly 5. Heater hose ⇐ Front K REMOVAL L 1. 2. 3. 4. M Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-18. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-143 2008 Quest DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718896 Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-144 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE DOOR MOTOR A Component INFOID:0000000001718897 Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I ATC K L WJIA0446E 1. Intake door motor (driver) 2. Air mix door motor (driver) 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-145 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718898 DRIVER SIDE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. LJIA0082E Revision: August 2007 ATC-146 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A PASSENGER SIDE Removal B 1. 2. 3. C Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D E F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-147 2008 Quest MODE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718899 Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor. LJIA0083E Revision: August 2007 ATC-148 2008 Quest MODE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-149 2008 Quest AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Component INFOID:0000000001718900 Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0446E 1. Intake door motor (driver) Revision: August 2007 2. Air mix door motor (driver) ATC-150 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 2008 Quest AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly A B C D E F G H I ATC K WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718901 L M FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) Removal N 1. 2. 3. 4. O Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. P LJIA0084E Revision: August 2007 ATC-151 2008 Quest AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door motor. LJIA0021E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-152 2008 Quest VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL A Component INFOID:0000000001718902 Variable Blower Control (Front) B C D E F G H I ATC K L WJIA0514E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Air mix door motor (passenger) 6. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 7. Intake sensor M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-153 2008 Quest VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Variable Blower Control (Rear) WJIA2145E 1. Rear blower motor 2. Rear blower motor case 3. Variable blower control (rear) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718903 VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the two variable blower control (rear) screws. Remove the variable blower control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-154 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > DUCTS AND GRILLES A Component INFOID:0000000001718904 Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O P WJIA2219E 1. Defroster nozzle (part of the instrument panel) 2. Fresh air duct 3. Defroster duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH side demister duct extension 6. LH side demister duct extension Revision: August 2007 ATC-155 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. LH side demister duct 8. RH ventilator duct 9. Center ventilator duct 10. LH ventilator duct 11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 12. Floor connector duct 13. Floor junction duct extension 14. Floor junction duct 15. Floor distribution duct ⇐ 16. Floor duct Front Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0086E 1. Rear overhead duct 4. Clips Revision: August 2007 2. Rear floor duct ATC-156 3. Rear heater and cooling unit assembly 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Grilles A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O LJIA0197E 1. Overhead console 2. Overhead console front grilles 3. Overhead console rear grilles 4. Front demister grille 5. LH ventilator grille 6. Center LH ventilator grille 7. Center ventilator grille screws 8. Center RH ventilator grille 9. Cluster lid C 10. RH ventilator grille 11. Instrument panel 12. RH side demister grille 13. Front pillar finisher RH Revision: August 2007 ATC-157 2008 Quest P DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718905 DEFROSTER NOZZLE NOTE: The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly. Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRESH AIR DUCT Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the defroster nozzle. Remove the fresh air duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DEFROSTER DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the defroster duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Installation Revision: August 2007 ATC-158 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Remove the floor junction duct. B C Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION D Removal 1. 2. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension. E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. G Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-36. Remove the floor duct. H Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR OVERHEAD DUCT I Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation". ATC NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to EI-38. K Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. L REAR FLOOR DUCT Removal M 1. 2. 3. N Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Reposition the floor carpet out of the way. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O GRILLES Removal 1. 2. Remove the interior trim panel(s) as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to EI-31 or EI38. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 ATC-159 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure INFOID:0000000001718906 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WJIA2195E 1. Shut-off valve A. Preferred (best) method 2. A/C service valve 3. Recovery/recycling equipment WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant WJIA2196E 1. Shut-off valve 2. A/C service valve 3. Recovery/recycling equipment 4. Refrigerant container (HFC-134a) 5. Weight scale (J-39650) 6. Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699) Revision: August 2007 ATC-160 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Manifold gauge set (J-39183) C. For charging A. Preferred (best) method B. Alternative method A B C D E F G H I ATC K L M N O WJIA1923E 1 ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quanti- 3 ty in Compressor". ATC-179, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". 2 ATC-179, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling". Revision: August 2007 4 ATC-161 5 ATC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component INFOID:0000000001718907 Front A/C Compressor and Condenser WJIA1967E 1. High-pressure service valve 2. Low-pressure service valve 3. High-pressure pipe 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Low-pressure flexible hose 6. High-pressure flexible hose 7. Shaft seal 8. Condenser 9. Liquid tank Revision: August 2007 ATC-162 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Pressure relief valve 11. Compressor 12. High/low pressure pipe (production) 13. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) 14 15 High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) A Expansion valve (front) Rear A/C B C D E F G H I ATC K L LJIA0016E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-163 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Compressor INFOID:0000000001718908 Compressor Mounting WJIA0371E 1. Stud 2. Compressor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield. Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts". Remove the compressor mounting stud. Disconnect the compressor connector. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Revision: August 2007 ATC-164 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch INFOID:0000000001718909 A Magnet Clutch Assembly B C D E F WJIA0372E G 1. Magnet clutch assembly 2. Magnet coil 3. Pulley 4. Clutch disc 5. Snap ring 6. Thermal protector (built in) 7. Compressor H REMOVAL NOTE: I For clarity, the compressor is shown out of the vehicle, but the compressor does not need to be removed to remove the compressor clutch. 1. Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield. ATC 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts". 3. Disconnect the compressor electrical connector. 4. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary K using Tool as shown. Tool number 5. : J-44614 L Remove the clutch disc. M WHA228 6. N Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. O P RHA072C Revision: August 2007 ATC-165 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. WJIA1017E 8. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. WHA212 9. Remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. INSPECTION Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. WHA183 Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. WHA213 Revision: August 2007 ATC-166 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. 3. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : — A B (J-38873-A) C D WJIA1016E 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. E F G WHA184 5. H Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Refer to ATC162, "Component". Tool number I : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. ATC K WHA229 L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-167 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to MA-13, "Checking Drive Belts". 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. WHA194 BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose INFOID:0000000001718910 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the engine under cover. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose INFOID:0000000001718911 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the engine under cover. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Revision: August 2007 ATC-168 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe A INFOID:0000000001718912 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe 5. 6. 7. 8. D F G INFOID:0000000001718913 H REMOVAL 2. 3. 4. C E INSTALLATION 1. B Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". WARNING: I • Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. • If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. ATC Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the K way. Refer to ATC-143, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. L Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool M (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. N • A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. • Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. O LJIA0182E Revision: August 2007 ATC-169 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. • A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. LJIA0183E 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. LJIA0184E 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. • Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) • Electric throttle control actuator (3) • ⇐: Front LJIA0185E 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. • ⇐: Front LJIA0186E Revision: August 2007 ATC-170 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. • ⇐: Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. A B C LJIA0187E D 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. E F G LJIA0188E d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. H I ATC LJIA0189E e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. K L M N LJIA0190E INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. • Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. • Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. Revision: August 2007 ATC-171 2008 Quest O P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. • Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) • Electric throttle control actuator (3) • ⇐: Front LJIA0185E b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. • ⇐: Front LJIA0191E c. d. e. f. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. LJIA0184E 3. a. b. c. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: • Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. • Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. • Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). LJIA0188E d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. Revision: August 2007 ATC-172 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. • ⇐: Front CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. A B C LJIA0191E D 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor E F INFOID:0000000001718914 REMOVAL G 1. 2. H Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. I ATC WJIA0123E K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. • Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for Condenser INFOID:0000000001718915 L M N REMOVAL 1. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. Revision: August 2007 ATC-173 O P 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. WJIA0124E 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. WJIA0373E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Revision: August 2007 ATC-174 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator INFOID:0000000001718916 A Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I ATC LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case 2. Blower motor side cover 3. Blower motor case K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the blower motor side cover. Remove the front blower motor. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. L M N O LJIA0018E 5. Remove the blower motor case. Revision: August 2007 ATC-175 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator. LJIA0019E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them. • When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction arrow printed on the side of the filters. Revision: August 2007 ATC-176 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator INFOID:0000000001718917 A Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I ATC K L M LJIA0020E 1. Front cover 2. Evaporator and heater core case 3. Evaporator 4. Side cover 5. Heater core 6. Rear blower motor 7. Blower motor case 8. Variable blower control (rear) N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. O Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the rear blower motor. Remove the variable blower control (rear). Revision: August 2007 ATC-177 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to ATC158, "Removal and Installation". 6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator. LJIA0021E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve INFOID:0000000001718918 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal and Installation". Remove the cooler grommet. Remove the expansion valve. WJIA0128E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve bolts A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb) : Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve INFOID:0000000001718919 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air and contaminants. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 ATC-178 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A Expansion valve bolts A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb) : Refer to ATC-162, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Checking of Refrigerant Leaks Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 2. 3. 4. D E F G H INFOID:0000000001718921 I Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evapoATC rator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. K After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak L detector (J-41995). NOTE: • Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be M checked are clean. • Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. • Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any subN stance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection INFOID:0000000001718922 NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. 2. C INFOID:0000000001718920 Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. 1. B Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi). Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. Revision: August 2007 ATC-179 2008 Quest O P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Connect the injector tool (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector INFOID:0000000001718923 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. AHA281A 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. SHA707EA 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. SHA706E Revision: August 2007 ATC-180 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. A B C SHA708EA D CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R134a) Service Procedure". 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. E F Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified G amount of refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa H (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) pressure. Conduct the leak test from the high pressure side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low pressure side (evaporator drain hose to shaft seal). Refer to ATC-162, "Component". Clean the compoI nent to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. • Compressor ATC • High and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal • Liquid tank • Refrigerant pressure sensor • Service valves. Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the ser- K vice valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the ser- L vice valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). • Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the M manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: N Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, O then repeat the leak check. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. P If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. Start the engine. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually. A/C switch: ON Air flow: VENT mode Revision: August 2007 ATC-181 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Intake position: RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature: MAX cold e. Blower fan speed: HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. SHA839E 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to ATC-47, "Operational Check (Front)". Revision: August 2007 ATC-182 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Service Data and Specification (SDS) INFOID:0000000001718924 COMPRESSOR B Make ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL Model DKS-17D Type Swash plate Displacement 175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3) / revolution Cylinder bore x stroke 30.5 x 24.0 mm (1.20 x 0.94 in) Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V ribbed C D E OIL F Name NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Total in system 220 m Compressor (service part) charging amount Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Capacity (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 lmp fl oz) REFRIGERANT G H Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) I ATC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 ATC-183 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION AV AUDIO VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4 Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................49 Noise Inspection ......................................................52 Power Supply Circuit Inspection ..............................53 Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power and Ground Supply Circuit Inspection .....................54 Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit Inspection ........................................55 Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection .................57 Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection .................57 Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth) ..............58 Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) ...................59 AV Switch Check .....................................................61 Audio Communication Line Check (Without NAVI)....61 Audio Communication Line Check (With NAVI) ......62 Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) ..........62 Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) ....................63 Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System) ................................64 Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (BOSE System) .........................................67 Sound Is Not Heard from Center Speaker (BOSE System) ...................................................................70 Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer (BOSE System) .........................................................................70 Removal and Installation .........................................72 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 AUDIO ................................................................. 6 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 6 System Description ................................................... 7 Schematic ............................................................... 10 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO - ....................................... 15 Audio Unit (Base System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ...................................................... 37 Audio Unit (Mid Level System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................. 37 Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Base and Mid Level System) ................................. 37 Audio Unit (Bose System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ...................................................... 39 Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE System) ....................................................... 40 BOSE Speaker Amp. Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................................ 43 Terminal and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp ......................................................................... 43 Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........................................... 45 Terminal and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit .................................................... 45 AV Switch Harness Connector Terminal Layout .... 46 Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch ......... 47 Satellite Radio Tuner Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................................ 48 Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner ....................................................................... 48 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ......................... 49 Revision: August 2007 AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................. 78 System Description ..................................................78 Wiring Diagram - W/ANT - .......................................79 Location of Antenna .................................................80 Window Antenna Repair ..........................................80 DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM .................... 82 AV-1 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................82 System Description ..................................................82 Schematic ................................................................84 2008 Quest F G H I J AV L M N O P Wiring Diagram - DVD - .......................................... 85 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 91 Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 91 Removal and Installation ........................................ 92 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM .................... 94 System Description ................................................. 94 Schematic (With Monochrome Display) .................. 95 Schematic (With Color Display) .............................. 96 Wiring Diagram - INF/D - ........................................ 97 Schematic ..............................................................109 Wiring Diagram - COMM - .....................................110 Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ...................................113 Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) ..................................113 Display Unit (With Color Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........................................114 Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Color Display) ...............................................114 Display Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ....................................................................116 Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit ........................................................................117 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................119 Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch .......119 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Monochrome Display Unit) .............................................119 Self-Diagnosis Mode .............................................120 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Color Display) ..................................................................122 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) ..................................123 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode .............................125 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function .......................127 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom ...................127 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Monochrome Display .............................................128 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Color Display .........................................................128 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit ...............................................130 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch ..............................................................131 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) .....................................................132 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit ..................................................................132 Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) ..................................................................133 Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit ........................................................................134 Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) .......................................................................134 Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit..134 Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) .....................................................134 Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) ..........................136 Revision: August 2007 AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) .................................................... 138 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) ................................. 138 Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) .................. 139 Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed ................................................................... 141 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) .......................................................... 141 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) ....................................................... 142 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) ..................................................... 143 No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) ......................... 144 Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) ............................................. 144 Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored ........ 145 CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display) ...................................................................... 145 Steering Wheel Audio Control Switch Check (Without Bluetooth) ............................................... 145 Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) ................ 146 Removal and Installation ....................................... 148 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 150 System Description ............................................... 150 CAN Communication System Description ............ 152 Component Parts Location ................................... 153 Schematic ............................................................. 154 Wiring Diagram - NAVI - ....................................... 155 Schematic ............................................................. 162 Wiring Diagram - COMM - .................................... 163 NAVI Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................................... 166 Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit ........................................................................ 166 Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit ........................................................................ 168 Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit .... 168 Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 168 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 168 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 168 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) .................................. 169 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 171 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................. 173 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .......................... 179 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 180 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit .................................................. 180 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit .............................................. 181 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Unit ........................................................... 181 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch .............................................................. 183 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit ........................................................................ 184 AV-2 2008 Quest Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit .................................................................. 185 Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit ........................................................................ 186 Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit ........................................................................ 186 Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit .... 186 Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit.. 187 Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit .. 187 Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit .. 187 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 188 Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 189 Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) .................. 190 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 192 CAN Communication Line Check .......................... 193 If NAVI control unit detects that DVD-ROM map Is not inserted ........................................................... 193 If NAVI control unit detects that inserted DVDROM map Is malfunctioning or if it Is impossible to load data from DVD-ROM map ............................. 193 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna Is Malfunctioning ............................ 194 Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen ..................... 194 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 195 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 196 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) ....................................... 197 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) .......................................................... 197 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) ....................................................... 198 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) ..................................................... 199 NAVI Screen Is Rolling .......................................... 200 Guide Sound Is Not Heard .................................... 201 Screen Is Not Shown ............................................. 202 A/C Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is Shown) .................................................................. 202 FUEL ECONOMY Screen Is Not Shown ............... 203 Average Fuel Economy Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) ....................................................... 203 Distance to Empty Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) .................................................................. 203 Driving Distance or Average Speed Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) ........................................ 203 No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) .......................... 204 Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) .............................................. 204 Navigation System Does Not Activate ................... 205 Previous NAVI Conditions Are Not Stored ............ 205 Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored ......... 205 Position of Current Location Mark Is Not Correct .. 205 Radio Wave from GPS Satellite Is Not Received .. 205 Driving Test ........................................................... 206 Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction ...... 206 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit .................. 215 Removal and Installation ....................................... 215 TELEPHONE ................................................... 217 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ......................................................................... 217 System Description ................................................ 217 Wiring Diagram - H/PHON - .................................. 219 Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout .............................................................. 221 Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit .................................................................. 221 Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function .... 222 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Bluetooth Control Unit ........................................... 222 Removal and Installation ....................................... 223 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-3 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719363 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 AV-4 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719364 B Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts C D PBIC0191E E F G H I J AV L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-5 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719365 WKIA5227E 1. Front tweeter LH M109 2. Combination meter M24 3. Combination switch (spiral cable) M30, M102 4. Display unit M93 5. Center speaker (with BOSE) M110 6. Display control unit (with color display) M94, M95 7. Front tweeter RH M111 8. Satellite radio tuner (if equipped) M128, M129 9. Steering wheel audio control switches 10. Audio unit M43, M44, M45, M46, M127, M252 11. AV switch M98 12. BOSE speaker amp (with BOSE) M112, M113 13. Rear speaker LH, RH B45, B131 14. Rear tweeter LH D516 15. Rear tweeter RH D506 16. Front door speaker LH, RH D3, D103 17. Subwoofer (with BOSE, driver seat view) B11 18. Rear audio remote control unit (if equipped) B23 Revision: August 2007 AV-6 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Description INFOID:0000000001719366 A BASE SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] • to audio unit terminal 6 and • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to AV switch terminal 1 and • to display unit terminal 1. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to audio unit terminal 10 and • to AV switch terminal 2 and • to display unit terminal 2. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to display unit terminal 3. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied • to AV switch terminal 5 and • to display unit terminal 6 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 • to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH • to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH. B C D E F G H I Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (If Equipped) Power is supplied • from audio unit terminal 32 • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13. Ground is supplied • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 • through body grounds B7 and B19. Audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29 • to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit. J AV L MID LEVEL SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] • to audio unit terminal 6 and • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to AV switch terminal 1 and • to display unit terminal 1 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 1 (with color display). With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to audio unit terminal 10 and • to AV switch terminal 2 and • to display unit terminal 2 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 10 (with color display). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to display unit terminal 3 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 12 (with color display). Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied • to AV switch terminal 5 and • to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 3 (with color display). Revision: August 2007 AV-7 2008 Quest M N O P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 • to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH • to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH. Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (If Equipped) Power is supplied • from audio unit terminal 32 • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13. Ground is supplied • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 • through body grounds B7 and B19. Audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29 • to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit. Speed Sensitive Volume System (If Equipped) Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions. BOSE® SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times • through 15A fuse [No. 18, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to subwoofer terminal 6 • through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] • to audio unit terminal 6 and • to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 1 • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to AV switch terminal 1 and • to display control unit terminal 1. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to audio unit terminal 10 and • to AV switch terminal 2 and • to display control unit terminal 10. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to display control unit terminal 12. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied • to subwoofer terminal 5 • through body grounds B7 and B19 and • to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 17 • to AV switch terminal 5 • to display unit terminal 1 and • to display control unit terminal 3 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 • to BOSE speaker amp. terminals 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30. Audio signals are amplified by the BOSE speaker amp. The amplified audio signals are supplied • through BOSE speaker amp. terminals 2, 3, 9,10,11,12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 19 • to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH Revision: August 2007 AV-8 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to terminals + and - of center speaker • to terminals + and - of rear speaker LH and RH • to terminals + and - of rear tweeter LH and RH and • to terminals 1 and 2 of subwoofer. A Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. B Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Power is supplied • from audio unit terminal 32 • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13. Ground is supplied • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 • through body grounds B7 and B19. Audio signals are supplied • through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29 • to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of rear audio remote control unit. C Speed Sensitive Volume System Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions. F D E G Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) NOTE: Factory installed satellite radio systems may be identified by the location of the satellite radio tuner antenna. Factory installed satellite radio antennas are installed on the front of the roof and dealer installed antennas are H installed on the rear of the roof. Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuse [No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box] I • to satellite radio tuner terminal 32. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] J • to satellite radio tuner terminal 36. Radio signals are supplied from the satellite radio antenna to satellite radio tuner terminal 37. Audio signals are supplied • through satellite radio tuner terminals 21, 22, 23 and 24 AV • to terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44 of audio unit. Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-9 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719367 BASE SYSTEM ALNWA0169GB Revision: August 2007 AV-10 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > MID LEVEL SYSTEM (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0170GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-11 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > MID LEVEL SYSTEM (WITH COLOR DISPLAY) ALNWA0171GB Revision: August 2007 AV-12 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > BOSE SYSTEM (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0172GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-13 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > BOSE SYSTEM ALNWA0173GB Revision: August 2007 AV-14 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AUDIO - INFOID:0000000001719368 A BASE SYSTEM B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O P ALNWA0174GB Revision: August 2007 AV-15 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4738E Revision: August 2007 AV-16 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4739E P Revision: August 2007 AV-17 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALNWA0175GB Revision: August 2007 AV-18 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > MID LEVEL SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0176GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-19 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA3159E Revision: August 2007 AV-20 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4742E P Revision: August 2007 AV-21 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY ALNWA0177GB Revision: August 2007 AV-22 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH COLOR DISPLAY A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0178GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-23 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALNWA0179GB Revision: August 2007 AV-24 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0180GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-25 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > BOSE SYSTEM ALNWA0181GB Revision: August 2007 AV-26 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0182GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-27 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4749E Revision: August 2007 AV-28 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4750E P Revision: August 2007 AV-29 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4751E Revision: August 2007 AV-30 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4752E P Revision: August 2007 AV-31 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY ALNWA0183GB Revision: August 2007 AV-32 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH COLOR DISPLAY A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0184GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-33 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALNWA0185GB Revision: August 2007 AV-34 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O ALNWA0186GB P Revision: August 2007 AV-35 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ALNWA0187GB Revision: August 2007 AV-36 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Audio Unit (Base System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719369 A B C WKIA5202E D Audio Unit (Mid Level System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719370 E F G AWNIA0854ZZ H Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Base and Mid Level System) INFOID:0000000001719371 I Terminal (Wire color) + Item – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom J AV 2 (L/W) 1 (L/R) Audio sound signal front LH Output ON No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. Receive audio signal L SKIA0177E M 4 (W/B) 3 (L/B) Audio sound signal front RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Receive audio signal O SKIA0177E 5 (G/W) Ground Antenna signal 6 (Y) Ground Battery power Ground Illumination control signal 7 (R/Y) Revision: August 2007 Output ON – More than 10V Poor radio reception. Input – – Battery voltage System does not work properly. ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V Input AV-37 N Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled. 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + 8 (R/L) Item – Ground Illumination signal Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch OFF Operation Reference value (Approx.) Lighting switch is in 1st position. Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF. 3V or less Battery voltage 10 (V) Ground ACC signal Input ON Ignition switch ACC or ON 14 (G) 13 (B/Y) Audio sound signal rear LH Output ON Receive audio signal Example of symptom Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is in 1st position. System does not work properly. No sound from rear speaker LH or rear tweeter LH. SKIA0177E 16 (L) 15 (R/G) Audio sound signal rear RH Output ON No sound from rear speaker RH or rear tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 21 (BR) Ground Remote control A Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 22 (W) Ground Remote control B Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 23 (W/R) Ground Remote control C Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 24 (Y/B) Ground Remote control D Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 25 (Y) – Remote control ground – – – 0V Rear audio remote control unit switches do not function. 27 (W) 26 (B) Output ON Receive audio signal Audio sound signal LH No sound from LH headphone channel. SKIA0177E 29 (G) 28 (R) Audio sound signal RH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. SKIA0177E Revision: August 2007 AV-38 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + 30 31 (Y/G) 32 (Y/R) Signal input/ output Item – – Shield – Condition Ignition switch – Operation – A Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. B C Ground Remote control enable signal Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. D Ground Remote control switch power supply Output ON Audio unit ON Battery voltage Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. E F 65 (B/R) Ground Audio RX Input ON Audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume SKIA4403E 66 (BR) Ground Audio TX Output ON H Audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume G I J SKIA4402E 67 – Shield – – – 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. AV *1 With satellite radio tuner *2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner L Audio Unit (Bose System) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719372 M N O WKIA5225E P Revision: August 2007 AV-39 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for Audio Unit (BOSE System) Terminal (Wire color) + – 2 (W) 1 (B) Item Audio sound signal front LH Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch ON Operation INFOID:0000000001719373 Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 4 (V) 3 (LG) Audio sound signal front RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 5 (G/W) Ground Antenna signal 6 (Y) Ground Battery power Ground Illumination control signal 7 (R/Y) Output ON – More than 10V Poor radio reception. Input – – Battery voltage System does not work properly. ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled. Input 8 (R/L) Ground Illumination signal Input OFF Lighting switch is in 1st position. Battery voltage Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is in 1st position. 10 (V) Ground ACC signal Input ON – Battery voltage System does not work properly. – – – 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. – More than 6.5V Amp. does not work properly. 11 12 (G/W) 14 (BR) – Shield Ground Amp. ON signal Output ON 13 (B/R) Audio sound signal rear LH Output ON No sound from rear speaker LH or rear tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: August 2007 AV-40 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + Item – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Reference value (Approx.) A Example of symptom B 16 (L) 15 (B/W) Audio sound signal rear RH Output ON No sound from rear speaker RH or rear speaker RH. Receive audio signal D SKIA0177E 21 (BR) 22 (W) 23 (W/R) 24 (Y/B) 25 (Y) Ground Ground Remote control A Output Remote control B Output Ground Remote control C Ground Remote control D – Remote control ground Output Output – ON ON ON ON – Audio unit ON Audio unit ON Audio unit ON Audio unit ON – Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 5V C 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 0V Rear audio remote control switches do not function. E F G H I 27 (W) 26 (B) Audio sound signal LH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from LH headphone channel. J AV SKIA0177E L 29 (G) 28 (R) Audio sound signal RH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. M SKIA0177E 30 31 (Y/G) 32 (Y/R) – Shield – – – 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. Ground Remote control enable signal Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. Ground Remote control switch power supply Output ON Audio unit ON Battery voltage Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. Revision: August 2007 AV-41 2008 Quest N O P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + 42 (R) Item – 41 (G) Audio signal LH Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Receive satellite radio tuner signal. Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom No sound on LH channel when satellite radio signal is received. SKIB3609E 44 (B) 43 (W) Audio signal RH Input ON No sound on RH channel when satellite radio signal is received. Receive satellite radio tuner signal. SKIB3609E 45 46 48 (L) – Ground Shield REQ1 (AUDIOSAT) – Input – ON ON – – – Approx. 0 V Set to the satellite radio mode – SKIB3825E 49 (V) *1 (W/R) *2 Ground Communication signal (AUDIOSAT) Input ON Set to the satellite radio mode – SKIB3824E 50 (LG) *1 (B/R) *2 Ground Communication signal (SAT-AUDIO) Output ON Set to the satellite radio mode – SKIB3826E 65 (B/R) Ground Audio RX Input ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E Revision: August 2007 AV-42 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + Item – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation A Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom B 66 (BR) Ground Audio TX Output Operate audio volume ON Audio does not operate properly. D SKIA4402E 67 – Shield – ON – Interference and distortion heard from speakers. 0V C E *1 With satellite radio tuner *2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner F BOSE Speaker Amp. Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719374 G H I WKIA5204E Terminal and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp Terminal (wire color) + – 1 (Y) Ground Item Battery Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch Operation – – INFOID:0000000001719375 Reference value (Approx.) Battery voltage Example of symptom System does not work properly. J AV L M 9 (G) 10 (B/Y) Rear speaker LH and rear tweeter LH Output ON No sound from rear speaker LH or rear tweeter LH. Receive audio signal N SKIA0177E O 11 (L) 12 (R/G) Rear speaker RH and rear tweeter RH Output ON No sound from rear speaker RH or rear tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: August 2007 AV-43 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (wire color) + 13 (L/W) Item – 14 (L/R) Front door speaker LH and front tweeter LH Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Receive audio signal Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom No sound from front door speaker LH or front tweeter LH. SKIA0177E 15 (W/B) 16 (L/B) Front door speaker RH and front tweeter RH 17 (B) Ground Ground 18 (O) 2 (O/B) Output ON Receive audio signal – ON – Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from front door speaker RH or front tweeter RH. SKIA0177E Center speaker – – No sound from center speaker. SKIA0177E 19 (W) 3 (G) Subwoofer Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from subwoofer. SKIA0177E 22 (LG/R) Ground Subwoofer ON signal Input ON – 24 (L) 23 (B/W) Audio sound signal rear RH Input ON Receive audio signal More than 6.5V Subwoofer does not work properly. No sound from rear speaker RH or rear tweeter RH. SKIA0177E 26 (BR) 25 (B/R) Audio sound signal rear LH Input ON No sound from rear speaker LH or rear tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: August 2007 AV-44 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (wire color) + Signal input/ output Item – Condition Ignition switch Operation Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom A B 28 (V) Audio sound signal front RH 27 (LG) Input ON No sound from front door speaker RH or front tweeter RH. Receive audio signal D SKIA0177E 30 (W) Audio sound signal front LH 29 (B) Input ON No sound from front door speaker LH or front tweeter LH. Receive audio signal C E F SKIA0177E 31 (G/W) Amp. ON signal Ground Input ON – More than 6.5V Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout System does not work properly. G INFOID:0000000001719376 H I J WKIA5205E AV Terminal and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719377 L Terminal (Wire color) + Item – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom M N 2 (W) 1 (B) Audio sound signal LH Input ON Receive audio signal No sound from LH headphone channel. O SKIA0177E P 4 (G) 3 (R) Audio sound signal RH Input ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. SKIA0177E Revision: August 2007 AV-45 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + Item – 5 – 6 (R/L) Ground 7 (W) – 8 (Y/G) Ground 9 (B) Shield Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Example of symptom 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. Battery voltage Rear audio remote control unit does not illuminate. 0V Rear audio remote control unit switches do not function. – – Input ON – – Remote control enable signal Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. Ground Remote control A Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 10 (W) Ground Remote control B Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 11 (G/R) Ground Remote control C Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 12 (Y/B) Ground Remote control D Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 13 (Y/R) Ground Remote control switch power supply Input ON Audio unit ON Battery voltage Rear audio remote control does not operate. 15 (B) – – ON 0V – Illumination Remote control ground Ground – Reference value (Approx.) Lighting switch ON – AV Switch Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719378 WKIA5206E Revision: August 2007 AV-46 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch INFOID:0000000001719379 A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B C + – 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 2 (V) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 3 (R/L) Ground Illumination signal Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Input OFF Battery voltage AV switch illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). Turn lighting switch OFF. Approx. 3.0V or less Changes between 0 and 12V. AV switch illumination cannot be controlled. 0V – Input ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. 4 (R/Y) Ground Illumination control signal 5 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 6 (V) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON – System does not work properly. D E F G H I SKIA0175E 7 – Shield ground – – – – – J 8 (LG) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – L SKIA0176E 12 (R) *1 (V) *2 13 (G) *1 (G/O) *2 14 (B/Y) *1 (R/B) *2 Ground Ground – Remote control A Remote control B Remote control ground Input Input – ON ON – Press MODE switch 0V Press SEEK UP switch 0.75V Press VOL UP switch 2V Except for above 5V Press POWER switch 0V Press SEEK DOWN switch 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch 2V Except for above 5V – – Steering wheel audio controls do not function. O Steering wheel audio controls do not function. P Steering wheel audio controls do not function. *2 With bluetooth control unit AV-47 M N *1 Without bluetooth control unit Revision: August 2007 AV 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Satellite Radio Tuner Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719380 WKIA5207E Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner Terminal (Wire color) + – 22 (R) 21 (G) Item Audio signal LH Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch ON Operation INFOID:0000000001719381 Voltage (approx.) Receive audio signal. SKIB3609E 24 (B) 23 (W) Audio signal RH Output ON Receive audio signal. SKIB3609E 25 26 28 (L) – Ground Shield REQ1 (SAT-AUDIO) – Output – – ON ON – Approx. 0 V Set to the satellite radio mode SKIB3825E 29 (V) *1 (W/R) *2 Ground Communication signal (SAT-AUDIO) Output ON Set to the satellite radio mode SKIB3824E Revision: August 2007 AV-48 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) + Item – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation A Voltage (approx.) B 30 (LG) *1 (B/R) *2 Ground Communication signal (AUDIO-SAT) Input ON Set to the satellite radio mode C SKIB3826E 32 (Y) 36 (V) 37 Ground – Battery power supply ACC power supply OFF Input Antenna signal ACC – − Battery voltage – – D E *1 With satellite radio tuner *2 With pre-wiring for satellite radio tuner F AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000001719382 It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the AV switch and diagnose the input signals from the steering switch. STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE 1. 2. 3. G H Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC. While pressing the “4” switch, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) If unable to start self-diagnosis mode refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)". Press each switch and listen for beep. I J AV WKIA5232E EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE • Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends. L DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION • It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding a beep when each AV switch and steering switch is pressed. • It can check for continuity of harness between AV switch and steering switch. Trouble Diagnosis M INFOID:0000000001719383 N The majority of audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction. O MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE AND MID LEVEL SYSTEM) P Revision: August 2007 AV-49 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Possible cause Inoperative • Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". • Audio communication line check. Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV136, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" (with color display). • AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Steering switch does not operate • Steering switch check. Refer to AV-58, "Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth)". • AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio screen is not shown • Display unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display). • Display control unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with color display). All speakers do not sound • Audio unit One or several speakers do not sound • Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-62, "Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System)". • Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-63, "Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System)". Poor sound • Audio unit • Speaker Noisy • Audio unit • Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM) Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)". Symptom Possible cause Inoperative • Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". • AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (without NAVI) or AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (with NAVI). • Audio communication line check (without NAVI). Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)". • Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)". If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Steering switch does not operate • Steering switch check. Refer to AV-58, "Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth)". • AV switch check. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (without NAVI) or AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" (with NAVI). • Audio communication line check (without NAVI). Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)". • Audio communication line check (with NAVI). Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)". If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio screen is not shown • Display unit check. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (without NAVI), AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" (with NAVI). All speakers do not sound • Audio unit • BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground circuit check. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". • BOSE speaker amp. ON signal • BOSE speaker amp. Revision: August 2007 AV-50 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Possible cause A • Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-64, "Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System)". • Rear speaker check. Refer to AV-67, "Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (BOSE System)". • Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-70, "Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer (BOSE System)". • Center speaker check. Refer to AV-70, "Sound Is Not Heard from Center Speaker (BOSE System)". C Poor sound • Audio unit • BOSE speaker amp. • Speaker D Noisy • Audio unit • BOSE speaker amp. • Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) One or several speakers do not sound B E FOR RADIO ONLY Symptom F Possible cause No sound • Audio unit • Antenna feeder, wiring or connections • Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections Noisy • • • • • • All radio stations stored in memory are deleted • Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". • Audio unit Audio unit Antenna feeder, wiring or connections Antenna amplifier, power supply, wiring or connections Noise prevention parts Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment G H I NOTE: J The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction. • Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mounAV tains or buildings blocking the signal. • Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings. L FOR CD ONLY Symptom Possible cause M CD cannot be inserted. CD cannot be ejected. The CD cannot be played. Audio unit N The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted. FOR SATELLITE RADIO TUNER (FACTORY INSTALLED) ONLY O P Revision: August 2007 AV-51 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Possible cause Inoperative • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) power and ground circuit inspection. Refer to AV-54, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power and Ground Supply Circuit Inspection". • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) communication circuit inspection. Refer to AV-55, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit Inspection". If above check is OK, replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Right or left channel does not sound • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) right channel audio signal circuit inspection. Refer to AV-57, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection". • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) left channel audio signal circuit inspection. Refer to AV-57, "Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection". If above check is OK, replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Poor reception • Location of vehicle. Make certain vehicle is in an open area (clear view of sky). • Satellite radio antenna or antenna feeder. Refer to AV-80, "Location of Antenna". Noisy • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) ground. • Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness shield wires. • Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.). Refer to AV-52, "Noise Inspection". NOTE: Pressing the SAT button, the display unit will display `NO SAT' when the following conditions exist: • Loss of power to the satellite radio tuner (factory installed) • Open or short in the REQ1, TXD, or RXD circuits. If the satellite antenna is disconnected or inoperative, the display unit will display ANTENNA. Noise Inspection INFOID:0000000001719384 The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause. NOTE: The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical components, one by one. TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE Occurrence condition Occurs only when engine is ON. Possible cause A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of the noise varies with changes in the engine speed. • Ignition components A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is running and the lighting switch is ON. • Generator The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. Noise only occurs when various electrical components are operating. Revision: August 2007 • Fuel pump condenser A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches. • Relay malfunction, radio malfunction The noise occurs when various motors are operating. • Motor case ground • Motor AV-52 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Occurrence condition Possible cause • Rear defogger coil malfunction • Open circuit in printed heater • Poor ground of antenna amplifier or antenna feeder line The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when it is vibrating excessively. • Ground wire of body parts • Ground due to improper part installation • Wiring connections or a short circuit Power Supply Circuit Inspection A B C INFOID:0000000001719385 1.CHECK FUSES D Check that the following fuses are not blown. Unit Terminals 6 Audio unit Signal name Battery power E Fuse No. 31 10 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 AV switch 1 Battery power 19 BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) 1 Battery power 31 Subwoofer (BOSE system) 6 Battery power 18 F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. H 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. I Disconnect audio unit, subwoofer (with BOSE) or BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) connector. Check voltage between the audio unit and ground. Terminal No. Unit (+) Connector Audio unit Terminal J (-) OFF ACC ON 6 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 10 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage M43 AV L SKIA1992E M 3. Check voltage between subwoofer (BOSE system) and ground. Terminal No. Unit Subwoofer (+) Connector Terminal B11 6 N (-) Ground OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage O P WKIA1162E 4. Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) and ground. Revision: August 2007 AV-53 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. Unit BOSE speaker amp. (+) Connector Terminal M113 1 OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage (-) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. SKIA4311E 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between subwoofer (BOSE system) harness connector B11 terminal 5 and BOSE speaker amp. (with BOSE) harness connector M113 terminal 17 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. WKIA1163E Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Power and Ground Supply Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719386 1.CHECK FUSES • Check that the following fuses are not blown. Unit Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Signal name Fuse No. 32 Battery power 31 36 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) M128 connector. Check voltage between the satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and ground. Terminal No. Unit (+) Connector Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Terminal (-) OFF ACC ON 32 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 36 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage M128 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 WKIA4539E AV-54 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. A 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Inspect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) case ground. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B). Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit. B C Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Connector Terminal A: M128 25 26 Audio unit Connector B: M127 Continuity D Terminal 45 Yes 46 OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness, connector or satellite radio tuner (factory installed) case ground. Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Communication Circuit Inspection E WKIA4540E F G INFOID:0000000001719387 1.CHECK HARNESS - 1 H 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 and audio unit connector M127. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 28 and audio unit harness connector M127 (B) terminal 48 J Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 28 and ground. AV Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA4541E 2.CHECK HARNESS - 2 1. L M Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 29 and audio unit harness connector M127 (B) terminal 49 N Continuity should exist. 2. O Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 29 and ground. Continuity should not exist. P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA4542E 3.CHECK HARNESS - 3 Revision: August 2007 AV-55 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 30 and audio unit harness connector M127 (B) terminal 50 Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 (A) terminal 30 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA4543E 4.CHECK REQ1 SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector and audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 28 and ground with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. 28 - Ground : Refer to AV-48, "Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". WKIA4544E 5.CHECK TXD SIGNAL 1. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 29 and ground with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. 29 - Ground : Refer to AV-48, "Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". WKIA4545E 6.CHECK RXD SIGNAL 1. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness connector M128 terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 30 - Ground : Refer to AV-48, "Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner". OK or NG OK >> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 AV-56 WKIA4546E 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Left Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719388 A 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B). Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit. B C Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Connector Terminal A: M128 4. Audio unit Connector 21 Continuity 41 B: M127 22 D Terminal Yes 42 E Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and ground. WKIA4547E F Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Connector A: M128 Terminal 21 Continuity — Ground 22 G No H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. I 2.CHECK LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 terminals 21 and 22 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 21 - 22 J AV : Refer to AV-48, "Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner". OK or NG OK >> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". L M WKIA4548E N Satellite Radio Tuner (Factory Installed) Right Channel Audio Signal Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719389 O 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 (A) and audio unit connector M127 (B). Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit. Revision: August 2007 AV-57 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Connector A: M128 4. Terminal Audio unit Connector 23 B: M127 24 Continuity Terminal 43 Yes 44 Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and ground. WKIA4549E Terminals Satellite radio tuner (factory installed) Connector A: M128 Terminal 23 Continuity — Ground 24 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and audio unit. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector M128 terminals 23 and 24 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 23 - 24 : Refer to AV-48, "Terminal and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner". OK or NG OK >> Replace satellite radio tuner (factory installed). Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Steering Switch Check (without bluetooth) WKIA4550E INFOID:0000000001719390 1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". 2. Operate steering switch. Does steering switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV switch connector and spiral cable connector. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal. Revision: August 2007 AV-58 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals Spiral cable Connector A AV switch Terminal Connector Terminal 32 M30 B 13 31 M98 14 24 4. Continuity Yes 12 C Check continuity between AV switch and ground. LKIA0189E D Terminals AV switch (+) Connector Continuity (–) Terminal E 12 M98 13 Ground No 14 F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. G 3.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals. Connector Terminal Connector 32 M30 31 24 Terminal H Continuity I 16 M102 17 Yes 20 J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36. WKIA4424E 4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals. Terminal 16 20 17 17 Signal name L Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 652 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. AV M 165 0 N O 0 WKIA4457E 652 OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) P INFOID:0000000001719391 1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". Revision: August 2007 AV-59 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Operate steering switch. Does steering switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV switch connector and bluetooth control unit connector. Check continuity between AV switch connector (A) M98 terminals 12, 13, and 14 and bluetooth control unit connector (B) B506 terminals 17, 18, and 19. Terminal No. AV switch (A) Connector Bluetooth control unit (B) Terminal Connector 12 M98 Terminal 17 13 B506 14 4. Continuity 18 Yes 19 Check continuity between AV switch and ground. WKIA5248E Terminal No. AV switch (+) (A) Connector (–) Continuity Terminal 12 M98 13 Ground No 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. 3.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect spiral cable connector. Check continuity between bluetooth control unit connector (A) B506 terminals 12, 13, and 14 and spiral cable connector (B) M30 terminals 24, 32, and 31. Terminals Bluetooth control unit (A) Connector Terminal Spiral cable (B) Connector 12 B506 13 Continuity Terminal 24 M30 14 32 Yes 31 OK or NG OK >> GO TO4. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5249E 4.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK Revision: August 2007 AV-60 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals. A Connector Terminal Connector 32 M30 31 24 Terminal Continuity 16 M102 17 B Yes 20 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36. C WKIA4424E 5.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE D Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals. E Terminal 16 20 17 17 Signal name Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 652 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. F 165 0 G 0 WKIA4457E 652 OK or NG OK >> Replace bluetooth control unit. Refer to AV-223, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". AV Switch Check I INFOID:0000000001719392 J 1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". Does AV switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. AV L 2.CHECK AV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check AV switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-131, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch" (without NAVI) or AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch" (with NAVI). OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. Audio Communication Line Check (Without NAVI) N O Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" (with color display). OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace malfunctioning part. AV-61 M INFOID:0000000001719393 1.CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE Revision: August 2007 H 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Audio Communication Line Check (With NAVI) INFOID:0000000001719394 1.CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-189, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace malfunctioning part. Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) INFOID:0000000001719395 1.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and front door speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH). Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal Connector 2 D3 1 4 M43 D103 3 2 M109 1 4 M111 3 3. Continuity Terminal + + - Yes + + - Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground. WKIA1220E Terminals Audio unit Connector Terminal — Continuity 2 M43 1 4 Ground No 3 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 2.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Revision: August 2007 AV-62 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. A Terminals (+) Connector Connector Terminal Condition Terminal 2 M43 B (-) Reference signal C 1 M43 4 D Receive audio signal 3 E SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". F G SKIA4278E Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (Base and Mid Level System) INFOID:0000000001719396 H 1.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. I Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and rear speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH). Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. J Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal Connector 13 B45 14 15 M44 B131 16 13 D516 14 15 D506 16 3. Continuity AV Terminal + L + Yes - M + - N + Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground. O Terminals Audio unit Connector Terminal — Continuity WKIA1164E 13 M44 14 15 Ground No 16 Revision: August 2007 AV-63 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 2.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal Connector 14 M44 16 Condition Reference signal Terminal 13 M44 15 Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace rear speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4281E Sound Is Not Heard from Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (BOSE System) INFOID:0000000001719397 1.HARNESS CHECK 1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and front door speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH). Revision: August 2007 AV-64 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. A B Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal Connector 13 D3 14 15 D103 16 M112 13 M109 14 15 M111 16 3. Continuity Terminal C + + + D Yes E + - F Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and ground. G WKIA1221E Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Terminal — Continuity H 13 M112 14 15 Ground I No 16 J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. AV 2.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-65 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Connector Terminal Terminal 13 M112 Condition Reference signal 14 M112 15 16 Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 3. SKIA4283E 3.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio unit Connector BOSE speaker amp. Terminal Connector Terminal 1 M43 29 2 30 M112 3 27 4 4. Continuity Yes 28 Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Audio unit Connector Terminal — Continuity 1 M43 2 3 Ground No SKIA4284E 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 4.FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. Connect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connector. Revision: August 2007 AV-66 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. 3. Push “POWER” switch. 4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. A B Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal Connector Terminal 2 Condition Reference signal C 1 D M43 4 M43 Receive audio signal 3 E SKIA0177E F OK or NG OK >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". G SKIA4278E Sound Is Not Heard from Rear Speaker or Rear Tweeter (BOSE System) 1.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. I Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and rear speaker and tweeter connector (LH or RH). Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Terminal 9 10 11 M112 12 9 10 11 12 3. H INFOID:0000000001719398 J AV Speaker or tweeter Connector B45 B131 D516 D506 Continuity Terminal L + + + M Yes N + - O Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal and ground. P WKIA1165E Revision: August 2007 AV-67 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector — Terminal Continuity 9 10 M112 Ground 11 No 12 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 2.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M112 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal Connector 9 M112 11 Condition Reference signal Terminal 10 M112 12 Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation" or AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 3. SKIA4314E 3.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector M112. Revision: August 2007 AV-68 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M112 terminal. A B Terminals Audio unit Connector BOSE speaker amp. Terminal Connector Terminal 13 26 M112 15 23 16 4. C 25 14 M44 Continuity Yes D 24 Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. E Terminals Audio unit Connector — Terminal F Continuity 13 G SKIA4315E 14 M44 Ground 15 No H 16 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. I 4.REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. J Connect audio unit connector M44 and BOSE speaker amp. connector M112. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M44 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. AV L Terminals (+) Connector Condition (-) Terminal Connector 14 Reference signal M Terminal 13 N M44 16 M44 15 Receive audio signal O SKIA0177E P OK or NG OK >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4316E Revision: August 2007 AV-69 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Sound Is Not Heard from Center Speaker (BOSE System) INFOID:0000000001719399 1.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals and center speaker harness connector M110 terminals. Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Center speaker Terminal Connector 2 M113 Terminal M110 18 Continuity + Yes WKIA1222E 3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals and ground. Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector — Terminal 2 M113 Continuity Ground 18 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 2.CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector M113 terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal Connector Condition Reference signal Terminal WKIA1223E M113 18 M113 2 Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Sound Is Not Heard from Subwoofer (BOSE System) INFOID:0000000001719400 1.CHECK FUSE Revision: August 2007 AV-70 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check that the following fuse is not blown. A Unit Terminal Subwoofer Signal name 6 Battery power Fuse No. 18 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect subwoofer connector. Check voltage between the subwoofer and ground. B C D Terminal No. Unit (+) Subwoofer Connector Terminal B11 6 (-) Ground OFF ACC ON E Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. G WKIA1166E 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between subwoofer harness connector B11 terminal 5 and ground. I Continuity should exist. J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. AV WKIA1167E 4.CHECK SUBWOOFER AMP. ON SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect subwoofer connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Operate system and check voltage between subwoofer harness connector B11 terminal 4 and ground. L M N Voltage : More than approx. 6.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. O P WKIA1168E 5.HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connectors. Revision: August 2007 AV-71 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector terminal. Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Continuity Terminal Connector Terminal 3 B11 1 19 B11 2 M113 4. Subwoofer Yes Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground. WKIA1169E Terminals BOSE speaker amp. Connector Terminal 3 M113 Continuity — Ground 19 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. 6.SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminals with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal Connector Terminal Condition Reference signal WKIA1170E M113 19 M113 3 Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719401 AUDIO UNIT Removal 1. 2. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect electrical connectors. Revision: August 2007 AV-72 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the audio unit (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors. A B C WKIA5256E D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E AV SWITCH Removal 1. 2. F Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C". Remove screws (A) and AV switch (1). G H I LKIA0710E J Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AV BOSE SPEAKER AMP. Removal 1. 2. 3. L Disconnect battery negative terminal. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove Bose speaker amp (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connector (2). M N O WKIA5257E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. BOSE SUBWOOFER Removal 1. Remove pedal adjusting switch and power seat switch LH. Revision: August 2007 AV-73 2008 Quest P AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove outer pedestal finisher. 3. Remove front seat LH. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation". 4. Remove Bose subwoofer. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER SPEAKER Removal 1. 2. Remove combination meter cover. Refer to IP-10. Remove the center speaker (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connector. LKIA0718E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three front door speaker screws. Remove the front door speaker. Disconnect front door speaker electrical connector. WKIA1173E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. 2. Remove the front speaker cover. Refer to IP-10. Remove the front tweeter (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connector. LKIA0719E Revision: August 2007 AV-74 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A REAR SPEAKER Removal B 1. 2. 3. C Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three rear speaker screws and remove speaker. Disconnect rear speaker electrical connector. D E WKIA1175E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F REAR AUDIO CONTROL UNIT G Removal 1. 2. 3. Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the headlining. CAUTION: Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage to the headlining. Disconnect rear audio electrical connector. Remove the rear audio remote control unit. H I J WKIA1201E AV Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. L REAR TWEETER Removal 1. 2. 3. M Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove push pins and remove tweeter. Disconnect connector. N O P WKIA1176E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Revision: August 2007 AV-75 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38. Disconnect satellite radio antenna. Remove satellite radio antenna nut (A). Remove satellite radio antenna. LKIA0675E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SATLLITE RADIO TUNER Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Disconnect satellite radio tuner connectors. Remove satellite radio tuner bolts (1). LKIA0664E 4. Remove satellite radio tuner unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES Removal 1. 2. Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation". Remove horn switch screws and remove horn switch. WKIA1224E Revision: August 2007 AV-76 2008 Quest AUDIO < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering wheel rear cover. A B C WKIA1225E D 4. Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering wheel switches. E F G WKIA1226E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H I J AV L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-77 2008 Quest AUDIO ANTENNA < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUDIO ANTENNA System Description INFOID:0000000001719402 With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp. When the radio switch is turned ON, antenna signal is supplied • through audio unit terminal 5 • to the antenna amp. terminal 1. Then the antenna amp. is activated. The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit through the antenna amp. Revision: August 2007 AV-78 2008 Quest AUDIO ANTENNA < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - W/ANT - INFOID:0000000001719403 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4960E Revision: August 2007 AV-79 2008 Quest P AUDIO ANTENNA < SERVICE INFORMATION > Location of Antenna INFOID:0000000001719404 WKIA4247E ←: To audio unit 1. Satellite radio tuner (if equipped) M128, M129 2. M502, M601 3. M48, M501 4. M64, M350 5. M351 6. Satellite radio antenna (if equipped, factory installed) 7. Antenna feeder 8. Window antenna grid RH 9. Antenna amp. M602 10. Window antenna grid LH Window Antenna Repair INFOID:0000000001719405 ELEMENT CHECK 1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on each side. SEL250I Revision: August 2007 AV-80 2008 Quest AUDIO ANTENNA < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger. A B C SEL122R D 2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist. E F G H I J SEL252I 3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point. AV L M N SEL253I Element Repair O Refer to GW-91, "Filament Repair". P Revision: August 2007 AV-81 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719406 WKIA5228E 1. DVD player M153, M154 4. R15 Video monitor (without rear roof console assembly) R53 Front video monitor (with rear roof console assembly) 2. Audio unit M46 3. Rear video monitor (with dual monitor system) R55 System Description INFOID:0000000001719407 Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times • through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to DVD player terminal 16. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to DVD player terminal 15. Power is also supplied • from DVD player terminals 31 and 32 • to video monitor terminals 11 and 12. Ground is supplied • to DVD player terminal 22 Revision: August 2007 AV-82 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through grounds M57, M61, and M79. Audio signals are supplied • through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 • to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. Video signals are supplied • through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29 • to front video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 and rear video monitor (models with dual monitor system) terminals 5 and 8. On dual monitor DVD entertainment systems, video signals are also supplied • through DVD player terminals 25 and 30 • to rear video monitor terminals 6 and 7. A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-83 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719408 WKWA4762E Revision: August 2007 AV-84 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - DVD - INFOID:0000000001719409 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4763E Revision: August 2007 AV-85 2008 Quest P DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4764E Revision: August 2007 AV-86 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > MODELS WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4765E P Revision: August 2007 AV-87 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (SINGLE MONITOR) WKWA4766E Revision: August 2007 AV-88 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (DUAL MONITOR) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4767E P Revision: August 2007 AV-89 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4768E Revision: August 2007 AV-90 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719410 A Symptom DVD player inoperative Possible causes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Repair order 1. 2. 3. Power supply Ground circuit Audio enable circuit DVD enable signal Audio enable signal DVD player Audio unit 4. 5. 6. 7. No sound when playing DVD 1. 2. 3. 1. Audio signal circuits DVD player Audio unit 2. 3. Video monitor is inoperative/does not operate properly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power supply Video monitor ground circuit Video circuits Data signal Video monitor DVD player 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Refer to AV-91, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". Refer to AV-91, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". Check audio enable circuits for open or short between audio unit terminals 39, 40 and DVD player terminals 11, 9. Push power switch of DVD player and verify approx. 5V is present at terminal 39 of audio unit. Push power switch of DVD player and verify approx. 5V is present at terminal 9 of DVD player. Remove DVD player for repair. Remove audio unit for repair. Check audio signal circuits for open or short between DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 and audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. Remove DVD player for repair. Remove audio unit for repair. Operate DVD player and verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 11 and 12 of video monitor. Verify approximately 5 volts is present at terminal 10 of video monitor. Check video monitor ground circuits between DVD player terminals 19 and 27 and video monitor terminals 1 and 2. Check video circuits between DVD player terminals 23 and 24 and video monitor terminals 7 and 8. Check data signal circuit for open or short between DVD player terminal 29 and video monitor terminal 5. Remove video monitor for repair. Remove DVD player for repair. B C D E F G H I J 1. 2. 3. 4. Data signal DVD player remote control batteries DVD player remote control Video monitor 1. 2. 3. 4. Check data signal circuit for open or short between DVD player terminal 28 and video monitor terminal 6. Replace DVD player remote control batteries. Replace DVD player remote control. Remove video monitor for repair. Headphones inoperative 1. 2. 3. Headphone batteries Headphones Rear audio remote control unit 1. 2. 3. Replace headphone batteries. Replace headphones. Replace rear audio remote control unit. L Snowy video/poor audio 1. 2. Harness or connectors DVD player 1. 2. Check harness and connectors for open or short. Check DVD player. M Snowy video (audio OK) 1. 2. Harness or connectors DVD player 1. 2. Check harness and connectors for open or short. Check DVD player. No video (audio OK) 1. 2. 3. Harness or connectors DVD player Video monitor 1. 2. 3. Check harness and connectors for open or short. Check DVD player. Check video monitor. Dim video (audio OK) 1. 2. 3. Harness or connectors DVD player Video monitor 1. 2. 3. Check harness and connectors for open or short. Check DVD player. Check video monitor. DVD remote control is inoperative/does not operate properly N O P Power Supply Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719411 1.CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuses are not blown. Revision: August 2007 AV AV-91 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit Terminals DVD player Signal name Fuse No. 16 Battery power 22 15 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect DVD player connector. Check voltage between the DVD player and ground. Terminal No. Unit (+) Connector DVD player Terminal (-) OFF ACC ON 16 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 15 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage M153 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. WKIA1197E 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector P105 terminal 22 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. • Repair harness or connector. WKIA1198E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719412 DVD PLAYER Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect electrical connectors. Remove DVD player screws, using power tool. Pull out DVD player and disconnect DVD player connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VIDEO MONITOR (WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY) Removal Revision: August 2007 AV-92 2008 Quest DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove video monitor screws. 2. Disconnect connector. 3. Remove video monitor housing. A B C WKIA1200E D 4. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws. Remove the video monitor from video monitor housing. E F G WKIA1219E Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. H VIDEO MONITOR (WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY) Removal I 1. 2. 3. 4. J Remove rear roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38. Disconnect the video monitor connector. Remove the video monitor screws. Remove the video monitor and housing. AV L M WKIA1199E 5. N Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor. O P WKIA1219E Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 AV-93 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000001719413 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM Refer to Owner′s Manual for integrated display operating instructions. AV SWITCH SYSTEM Refer to Owner′s Manual for AV switch operating instructions. Using the AV switch at the center of the instrument panel, the controls of the following systems are centralized: • Integrated display system (Drive computer, setting screen, clock, etc.) • Audio system PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR • Brightness of LED backlight display may change, depending on in-car temperature. In low temperatures, the refreshing rate of the picture also becomes low because of the low response of the LCD monitor. When passenger area becomes warm, however, the LCD recovers the normal display. • Backlight sometimes flickers or darkens according to the total operation hours and the number of times switched ON and OFF. In this case, entire display unit should be replaced. (Backlight cannot be replaced separately.) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R), and • through 15A fuse (No. 34 and 41, located in IPDM E/R) • to CPU of IPDM E/R, and • through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in fuse and fusible link box), and • to audio unit terminal 6 • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to display unit terminal 1 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 1 (with color display) and • to AV switch terminal 1 and • to combination meter terminal 40. When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to display unit terminal 2 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 10 (with color display) and • to AV switch terminal 2 and • to BCM terminal 11. When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in IPDM E/R, and • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to display unit terminal 3 (with monochrome display) or display control unit terminal 12 (with color display). Ground is supplied • to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display) or display unit terminal 1 (with color display) • to display control unit terminal 3 (with color display) and • to AV switch terminal 5 and • to combination meter terminal 20 and • to BCM terminal 67 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. DRIVE COMPUTER Refer to Owner′s Manual for drive computer operating instructions. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 AV-94 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic (With Monochrome Display) INFOID:0000000001719414 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4769E Revision: August 2007 AV-95 2008 Quest P INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic (With Color Display) INFOID:0000000001719415 WKWA4770E Revision: August 2007 AV-96 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - INF/D - INFOID:0000000001719416 A (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY) B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O P WKWA4771E Revision: August 2007 AV-97 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4772E Revision: August 2007 AV-98 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4773E P Revision: August 2007 AV-99 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4774E Revision: August 2007 AV-100 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4775E P Revision: August 2007 AV-101 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > (WITH COLOR DISPLAY) WKWA4776E Revision: August 2007 AV-102 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4777E P Revision: August 2007 AV-103 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4778E Revision: August 2007 AV-104 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4779E P Revision: August 2007 AV-105 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4780E Revision: August 2007 AV-106 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4781E P Revision: August 2007 AV-107 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4782E Revision: August 2007 AV-108 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719417 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4798E Revision: August 2007 AV-109 2008 Quest P INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - COMM - INFOID:0000000001719418 WKWA4783E Revision: August 2007 AV-110 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > (WITH MONOCHROME DISPLAY) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4961E P Revision: August 2007 AV-111 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > (WITH COLOR DISPLAY) WKWA4785E Revision: August 2007 AV-112 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719419 A B C D WKIA5208E Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display) INFOID:0000000001719420 Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery power 2 (V) Ground ACC signal 3 (G) 4 (R/L) 6 (B) Ground Ignition signal Ground Ground Signal input/ output Condition Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom E F Ignition switch Operation Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. H Battery voltage A/C operation is not possible. Vehicle information setting is not possible. I Input ON – Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Illumination signal Input Ground – OFF ON Battery voltage Turn lighting switch OFF. 3.0V or less – 0V Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). G J AV – L 7 (P/L) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8pulse) Input ON Drive computer item is not displayed correctly. When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) M SKIA0168E N 8 (B/R) Ground Audio TX Output ON Operate audio volume. Audio does not operate properly. P SKIA4402E 9 – Shield ground Revision: August 2007 – – – AV-113 – O – 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 10 (BR) Ground Audio RX Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch ON Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Operate audio volume. Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E 11 (V) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON – 12 – Shield ground – – – 13 (LG) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON – System does not work properly. SKIA0175E – – System does not work properly. SKIA0176E 14 (L) – CAN-H – – – – – 16 (P) – CAN-L – – – – – Display Unit (With Color Display) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719421 WKIA5209E Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Color Display) Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output INFOID:0000000001719422 Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom – + – 1 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V 2 (L/W) Ground Power supply (Inverter) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. 3 (L/R) Ground Power supply (Signal) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. Revision: August 2007 AV-114 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + 6 (R/W) – 7 RGB signal (G: green) Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B Screen looks reddish. C D SKIA4981E 7 – Shield ground – – – – – E 8 (R) 21 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal Output ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed. – G SKIA4983E 9 (B) 21 RGB area (YS) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed. Press the “TRIP” button. F H I SKIA0162E J Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. 23 Display communication signal (DCU-DSP) 13 (P/B) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – 14 (LG) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 11 (B/W) Input ON – SKIA4364E 17 (R/L) 7 RGB signal (R: red) Input AV L M N Screen looks bluish. O SKIA4980E P 18 (B) 7 RGB signal (B: blue) Input ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Screen looks yellowish. SKIA4982E Revision: August 2007 AV-115 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 19 (G) 21 RGB synchronizing signal Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Press the “TRIP” button. Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Screen is rolling. SKIA0164E 20 (W) 21 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Output ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed. – SKIA4983E 21 22 (L) – Shield ground 23 Display communication signal (DSP-DCU) – Output – ON – – – Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. – SKIA4363E 23 – Shield ground – – – Display Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout – – INFOID:0000000001719423 WKIA5210E Revision: August 2007 AV-116 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719424 A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom System does not work properly. B C 1 (Y/R) Ground Battery Power 2 (L/W) Ground Power Supply (Inverter) Output ON – 9V 3 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V 4 (L/R) Ground Power Supply (Signal) Output ON – 9V 5 (P/B) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – 7 (LG) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – 10 (V) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. G 12 (G) Ground Ignition signal Input ON – Battery voltage Vehicle information setting is not possible. H Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd Battery voltage Lighting switch position OFF 0V 14 (R/L) Ground Illumination signal Input OFF – Battery voltage Screen is not shown. D – Screen is not shown. E F Input OFF Display unit does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position. I J 16 (P/L) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8–pulse) Input ON Value of vehicle speed information is not accurately displayed. When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) SKIA0168E AV L 25 (L) – CAN-H – – – – – 26 (P) – CAN-L – – – – – M 28 (V) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ Output ON System does not work properly. – O SKIA0175E 29 – Shield ground – – – – N – P 30 (LG) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0176E Revision: August 2007 AV-117 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 36 (B/W) 37 Display Communication signal (DCU-DSP) 37 – Shield ground 37 Display Communication signal (DSP-DCU) Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Output ON Press the “TRIP” button. – – – ON Press the “TRIP” button. Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. SKIA4364E 38 (L) Input – – Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. SKIA4363E 39 – Shield ground – – – 40 (B/R) Ground Audio TX Communication signal Output ON Operate audio volume. – – Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4402E 42 (BR) Ground Audio RX communication signal Input ON Operate audio volume. Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E 47 – Shield ground – – – – – 49 – Shield ground – – – – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 50 (R/L) 47 RGB signal (R: red) Output Screen looks bluish. SKIA4980E 51 (B) 49 RGB area (YS) signal Output ON Press the“TRIP” button. RGB screen is not shown. SKIA0162E Revision: August 2007 AV-118 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + 52 (R/W) – 47 RGB signal (G: green) Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B Screen looks reddish. C D SKIA4981E E 53 (W) 49 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed. – F SKIA4983E G 54 (B) 47 RGB signal (B: blue) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Screen looks yellowish. I SKIA4982E 55 (R) 49 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed. – H J AV SKIA4983E L 56 (G) 49 RGB synchronizing signal Output ON Press the “TRIP” button. Screen is rolling. SKIA0164E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM N INFOID:0000000001719425 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch O INFOID:0000000001719426 P Refer to AV-47, "Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch". On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Monochrome Display Unit) INFOID:0000000001719427 DESCRIPTION • Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically. • Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen. Revision: August 2007 AV-119 M 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSIS ITEM Mode Self-diagnosis Item Description Reference page NETWORK CHECK Check network between control unit and switch connected from display unit via communication line. AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" PARTS CHECK • Perform diagnosis and setting of display unit. • Perform self-diagnosis for auto air conditioner system. AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" VERSION CHECK Displays version of each unit. AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" Self-Diagnosis Mode INFOID:0000000001719428 OPERATION PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” switch, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) If unable to start self-diagnosis mode refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)". WKIA5232E 4. 5. Display unit connection check screen. Select each connecting unit (IVCS, CHANGER, SATELLITE RADIO). SKIA4377E 6. Self-diagnosis screen is displayed. • Using the joystick, select each item, and perform diagnosis. CAUTION: If self-diagnosis cannot be activated, refer to AV-127, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". SKIA4378E NETWORK CHECK Revision: August 2007 AV-120 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Selecting NETWORK CHECK on self-diagnosis screen displays selfdiagnostic results. A B C SKIA4379E D Diagnosis item Contents DTC return condition Reference at error HVAC OK/NG Communication error between combination meter and display unit. "DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT INSPECTION" SWITCH OK/NG Communication error between AV switch and display unit. AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" AUDIO OK/NG Communication error between audio and display unit. AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" E F G PARTS CHECK • Selecting PARTS CHECK on self-diagnosis screen displays selection screen. • Selecting DISPLAY indicates DISPLAY DETAIL screen. Display diagnosis and setting can be performed. • Selecting HVAC indicates HVAC DETAIL screen. Air conditioner system self-diagnosis can be performed. H I J SKIA4381E AV DISPLAY DETAIL SCREEN L Items FULL BLINK BLANK–ADJ WARNING Description All display unit segments turn ON. M Adjust the display timeout for 5 to 15 seconds. (Default is 10 seconds.)Note Select warning indication ON/OFF. (Default is ON.) N NOTE: Except an audio screen. SKIA4382E O HVAC DETAIL SCREEN P Revision: August 2007 AV-121 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Press the joystick, start air conditioner system self-diagnosis. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". SKIA4383E VERSION CHECK Check ID and version of display, AV switch, and audio. DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check terminals and connector of display unit for damage, bent or loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display unit connector. Check resistance between display unit harness connector terminals. Display unit connector Terminal M93 14 Resistance (Approx.) 16 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness between display unit and data link connector. SKIA6867E On Board Self-Diagnosis Function (With Color Display) INFOID:0000000001719429 DESCRIPTION • Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually. • Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen. • CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set value. DIAGNOSIS ITEM Mode Self-diagnosis (DCU) Revision: August 2007 Description Display control unit diagnosis. AV-122 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Mode Display diagnosis CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT Vehicle signals CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Description On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signalNOTE, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. A B Display status of CAN communication. NOTE: Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown. Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) C INFOID:0000000001719430 D OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard. If selfdiagnosis mode can not be started refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)". E F G WKIA5232E 4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Confirmation/Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. H I J AV WKIA4476E 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”. • Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. • A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the diagnosis. L M N SKIA4208E O P Revision: August 2007 AV-123 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation screen will be shown. • When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen will be shown. • When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for the part will not appear on the screen. SKIA4209E 7. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. • If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. 8. WKIA4477E Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. • When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/ adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.” • When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. • When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. “DCU is abnormal”. SKIA4211E SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -". Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Screen switch Switch color DCU* Red × × Gray DISPLAY Audio unit GPS antenna Diagnosis No. 1 x x 2 x × 3 × 4 *: DCU = Display control unit CAUTION: • When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-144, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)". • When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown". Self-Diagnosis Codes Revision: August 2007 AV-124 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page 1 Display control unit malfunction. Refer to AV-120. 2 Display communication line between display control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-139. 3 Audio unit power supply and ground circuit. Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit. Refer to AV-136. B C Confirmation/Adjustment Mode INFOID:0000000001719431 OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. A D Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard. If selfdiagnosis mode can not be started refer to AV-136, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)". E F G WKIA5232E 4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Confirmation/Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. H I J WKIA4476E 5. 6. 7. When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial trouble diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of each item will become possible. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals” and “Auto Climate Control” will become selective. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. AV L M N WKIA4478E O P Revision: August 2007 AV-125 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS WKIA4316E • When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish • When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-141, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)", AV-142, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV143, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)". VEHICLE SIGNALS • A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of lighting switch (normal setting). • OFF: D (Day mode) • ON: N (Night mode) Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. WKIA4306E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse Condition Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – Remarks – – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position • If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". • If light is NG, refer to AV-134, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". Revision: August 2007 AV-126 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If IGN is NG, refer to AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". • If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function A INFOID:0000000001719432 B Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom INFOID:0000000001719433 C Symptom Suspect Systems and reference No screen is shown. Refer to AV-128, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Monochrome Display" (with monochrome display) or AV-128, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Color Display" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. Screen does not switch to nighttime mode after the lighting switch is turned to 1st. Refer to AV-133, "Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-134, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. TRIP and FUEL ECON screen do not appear. Refer to AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-134, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. • Trip odometer (DIST) is not added up. • Average vehicle speed (AVG) is not displayed. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. Average fuel consumption (AVG) is not displayed. • Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). • Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display unit). If above is normal, replace display. Distance to empty (DTE) is not displayed. • Check if speedometer operates. If it does not operate, go to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). • Check if fuel gauge operates. If it does not operate, go to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". • Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display unit). If above is normal, replace display unit. Door warning screen does not appear. • Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" (with monochrome display) or AV-132, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit" (with color display). • Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" (with monochrome display) or AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. AV switch and all switch operation are not possible. (Do not start self-diagnosis.) • Refer to AV-131, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch". • Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". • Refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)" (with color display). If above is normal, replace display unit. Audio operation is not possible. • Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". • Refer to AV-134, "Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display)" (with monochrome display) or AV-136, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" (with color display). Previous vehicle conditions are not stored. Refer to AV-145, "Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored". Revision: August 2007 AV-127 2008 Quest D E F G H I J AV L M N O P INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Monochrome Display INFOID:0000000001719434 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuses for display unit are blown. Unit Display unit Power souse Fuse No. Battery power 19 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 Ignition switch ON or START 12 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display unit connector. Check voltage between display unit connector and ground. Terminals (+) Connector M93 Ignition switch position (–) OFF ACC ON 1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 2 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 3 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage Terminal SKIA4386E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between display unit and fuse. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 6 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair ground harness. SKIA4387E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Color Display INFOID:0000000001719435 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT Revision: August 2007 AV-128 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3 and ground. A B Approx. 9V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. C D WKIA1227E 3.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M94. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2, 4 and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3. E F Terminals Display control unit Connector Terminal Connector 2 M94 4. Display unit M93 4 Continuity G Yes H Terminal 2 3 Check continuity between display unit and ground. I Terminals WKIA1229E Display unit Connector M93 Terminal 2 3 Continuity — J Ground No AV OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness. L 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13, 14 and ground. M Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. O WKIA2079E 5. CHECK HARNESS 1. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Revision: August 2007 AV-129 2008 Quest P INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13, 14 and display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 5, 7. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness. WKIA2080E 6.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows. 1. Terminals Connector Terminal — Ignition switch Continuity M93 1 Ground OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1228E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719436 1.CHECK FUSE Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown. Terminals Connector Terminal M94 Power source Fuse No. 1 Battery power 19 10 ACC power 4 12 Ignition switch ON or START 12 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal Ignition switch position (–) 1 M94 10 12 Ground OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 0V WKIA1373E OK or NG Revision: August 2007 AV-130 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse. A 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the following display control unit terminal and ground. B C Terminals Connector Terminal — M94 3 Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes D OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E SKIA4293E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch INFOID:0000000001719437 F 1.CHECK FUSES Check the fuses below. G Unit Power source Fuse No. AV switch Battery power 19 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. I J Disconnect AV switch connector. Check voltage between AV switch and ground. AV Terminals (+) Connector M98 Ignition switch position (–) OFF ACC ON 1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 2 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Terminal L M LKIA0210E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse. N 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. O Turn ignition switch OFF. P Revision: August 2007 AV-131 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between AV switch harness connector M98 terminal 5 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair ground harness. LKIA0211E Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) INFOID:0000000001719438 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and combination meter connector M24. Check continuity between display unit connector M93 (B) terminal 7 and combination meter connector M24 (A) terminal 26. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 (A) terminal 7 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5250E 2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit and combination meter connectors. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 7 - Ground : Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display)". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit WKIA1370E INFOID:0000000001719439 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M94 and combination meter connector M24. Revision: August 2007 AV-132 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 (A) terminal 26 and display control unit connector M94 (B) terminal 16. A Continuity should exist. 4. B Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 (B) terminal 16 and ground. C Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5251E D 2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. E Connect display control unit connector and combination meter connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 and ground. F Approx. 3.5V or more G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". H SKIA4297E 3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 16 - Ground J : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". Illumination Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) AV L SKIA4616E N Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal M93 4 O Lighting switch position (–) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 3V or less P OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4393E Revision: August 2007 M INFOID:0000000001719440 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. I AV-133 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Check harness for open or short between display unit and IPDM E/R. Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719441 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals Lighting switch position (+) Connector Terminal M94 14 (–) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R. Ignition Signal Inspection (With Monochrome Display) SKIA4299E INFOID:0000000001719442 1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 3 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between display unit and fuse. SKIA4394E Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719443 1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 12 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse. WKIA1230E Audio Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) INFOID:0000000001719444 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 AV-134 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display unit connector M93. 3. Check continuity between audio unit and display unit. A (Base system) B (Mid level system) C Connector Terminal Connector 8 Display Unit: M93 Continuity B Yes C Terminal 65 Audio unit: M45 10 9 4. A 66 67 Check continuity between display unit and ground. D WKIA4203E Terminals C Connector Continuity Terminal Display unit: M93 8 E Ground No 10 F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. G 2.CHECK AUDIO TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 8 and ground. Voltage H I : Approx. 3.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". J AV SKIA4396E 3.CHECK AUDIO RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 [(A) with base system or (B) with mid level system] terminal 65 and ground. Voltage M N : Approx. 3.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". O P WKIA4204E 4.CHECK AUDIO TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 AV-135 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M45 [(A) with base system or (B) with mid level system] terminal 66 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 66 - Ground : Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". WKIA4205E 5.CHECK AUDIO RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 10 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 10 - Ground : Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display)". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4398E Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) INFOID:0000000001719445 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit. Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 4. Audio unit Terminal Connector 40 M45 42 Continuity Terminal 65 Yes 66 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1192E Display control unit Connector M95 Terminal 40 42 Continuity — Ground No OK or NG Revision: August 2007 AV-136 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. A 3.CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector M95. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 and ground. B C Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". D E WKIA1770E 4.CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95. Connect audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 and ground. G H Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". I J WKIA1771E 5.CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. AV Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 40 - Ground L M : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". N O SKIA4447E 6.CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. P Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 AV-137 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 42 - Ground : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". AV Communication Line Check (With Monochrome Display) SKIA4448E INFOID:0000000001719446 1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector and AV switch connector. Check continuity between display unit and AV switch. Terminals Display unit Connector AV switch Terminal Connector 11 M93 Continuity Terminal 6 13 M98 8 Yes LKIA0213E 12 4. 7 Check continuity between display unit and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal M93 11 13 Terminal Ground Continuity No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. 2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector and AV switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 11, 13 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 11, 13 - Ground : Refer to AV-113, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Monochrome Display)". OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to . SKIA4401E AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) INFOID:0000000001719447 1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 AV-138 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 (A) and AV switch connector M98 (B). 3. Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch. A Terminals B (A) Connector (B) Terminal 28 M95 4. Connector Continuity Terminal 30 C 6 M98 Yes 8 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. D Terminals WKIA5379E Display control unit Connector — Terminal 28 M95 Continuity Ground 30 E No F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. G 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU 1. Replace AV switch. 2. Connect display control unit and AV switch connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". H I J Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) INFOID:0000000001719448 AV 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. L Terminals M Display control unit Connector Terminal Connector 36 M95 4. Display unit M93 38 Continuity Terminal N 11 Yes 22 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. O Terminals WKIA2019E Display control unit Connector M95 Terminal 36 38 Continuity — Ground P No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 AV-139 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". WKIA1377E 3.CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4453E 4.CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 36 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 36 - Ground : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to . SKIA4452E 5.CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 38 - Ground : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 AV-140 SKIA4453E 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed INFOID:0000000001719449 A 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9, 20, 8. B C Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 55 and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 8. D Continuity should exist. 5. E Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and ground. WKIA1965E F Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. G 2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. H Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 55 - 49 I : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". AV SKIA4305E 3.CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL 1. 2. Press the “TRIP” button. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 51 - 49 M : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". N OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". O SKIA4306E Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) INFOID:0000000001719450 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Revision: August 2007 AV-141 L 2008 Quest P INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. • When the screen looks bluish. Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 50 Display unit: M93 17 47 Yes 7 Terminals B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 50 Continuity — Ground 47 WKIA4221E No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 and 47. 50 - 47 : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to . Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) SKIA4697E INFOID:0000000001719451 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. 3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. 4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. • When the screen looks reddish. Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 52 Display unit: M93 6 47 7 Yes WKIA4222E Revision: August 2007 AV-142 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals A B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 52 — Continuity B Ground 47 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL D 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 and 47. 52 - 47 E F : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) G H SKIA4698E I INFOID:0000000001719452 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. AV • When the screen looks yellowish. L Terminals B A Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 54 Display unit: M93 18 47 Continuity M Yes N 7 Terminals B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 54 47 Continuity — Ground O WKIA4223E P No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 AV-143 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 and 47. 54 - 47 : Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4356E No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) INFOID:0000000001719453 1. DISPLAY CONDITION CHECK Check display conditions of each warning screen. Warning screen Display condition DOOR OPEN Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected. LIFTGATE OPEN Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar is detected. Have conditions been met to display warning screen? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-123, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)". Is self-diagnosis result OK? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter". NO >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) INFOID:0000000001719454 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Revision: August 2007 AV-144 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE A Check communication line. Refer to AV-138, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)". OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". B Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored C INFOID:0000000001719455 1.CHECK BATTERY POWER D Check display control unit battery power. Refer to AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check display control unit battery power system harness. CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display) E INFOID:0000000001719456 F 1.CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION 1. 2. Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-123, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)". Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-179, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". G H >> GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart" after checking the state of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" displayed on the screen. I J WKIA4307E Steering Wheel Audio Control Switch Check (Without Bluetooth) INFOID:0000000001719457 AV 1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-127, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". 2. Operate steering wheel audio control switch. Does steering wheel audio control switch operate normally? OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 2. L M 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV switch connector M98 and spiral cable connector M30. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminals and AV switch harness connector terminals. N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-145 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals Spiral cable Connector AV switch Terminal Connector 32 M30 Terminal 13 31 M98 24 4. Continuity 14 Yes 12 Check continuity between AV switch and ground. LKIA0189E Terminals AV switch (+) Connector Continuity (–) Terminal 12 M98 13 Ground No 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. 3.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK Check spiral cable harness. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36. 4.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals. Terminal (+) 16 20 (–) 17 17 Signal name Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. 165 Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 652 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. 0 0 WKIA4457E 652 OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace steering wheel audio control switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Steering Switch Check (with bluetooth) INFOID:0000000001719458 1.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . 2. Operate steering switch. Does steering switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 AV-146 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect AV switch connector and bluetooth control unit connector. 3. Check continuity between AV switch connector M98 (A) terminals 13, 14, and 12 and bluetooth control unit connector B506 (B) terminals 17, 18, and 19. Terminal No. AV switch (A) Connector B Bluetooth control unit (B) Terminal Connector C 17 13 B506 18 14 4. Continuity Terminal 12 M98 A Yes D 19 Check continuity between AV switch and ground. WKIA5248E E Terminal No. AV switch (+) (A) Connector Continuity (–) F Terminal 12 M98 13 Ground G No 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. H 3.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. I Disconnect spiral cable connector. Check continuity between bluetooth control unit connector B506 (A) terminals 12, 13, and 14 and spiral cable connector M30 (B) terminals 24, 32, and 31. J Terminals Bluetooth control unit (A) Connector Terminal Spiral cable (B) Connector Terminal 12 B506 13 AV Continuity L 24 M30 32 14 Yes 31 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5249E N 4.SPIRAL CABLE CHECK Check continuity between spiral cable connector terminals. O Connector Terminal Connector 32 M30 31 24 Terminal Continuity 16 M102 17 20 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36 . Revision: August 2007 P Yes AV-147 WKIA4424E 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE Check resistance between steering wheel audio control switch terminals. Terminal 16 20 17 17 Signal name Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. 165 Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 652 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. 0 0 WKIA4457E 652 OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719459 DISPLAY UNIT Removal 1. 2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid D". Remove the display unit assembly (1) by removing the screws (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). LKIA0712E 3. Remove the rear cover (1) and front cover (2). LKIA0717E Revision: August 2007 AV-148 2008 Quest INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove the screws (A) and the display screen (1). A B C LKIA0711E D Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT E Removal 1. 2. Remove display unit assembly. Refer to "DISPLAY UNIT". Remove the screws (A) and the display control unit (1). F G H I LKIA0720E Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. J AV L M N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-149 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000001719460 NOTE: Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation. The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information). The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with a current-location mark. WKIA1371E By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can be used. The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its direction. SEL684V TRAVEL DISTANCE Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases (such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires). Refer to AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode". TRAVEL DIRECTION Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately. Type Advantage Disadvantage Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) • Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite accurately. • Direction errors may accumulate when the vehicle is driven for long distances without stopping. GPS antenna (GPS information) • Can detect the vehicle's travel direction (North/South/East/West). • Correct direction cannot be detected when the vehicle speed is low. MAP–MATCHING Revision: August 2007 AV-150 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the method described in the position detection principle, with the road map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in the DVD-ROM drive. Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display must be corrected manually. CAUTION: The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM. • In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has been repositioned. If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong road can be avoided. If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and configuration of the road. • Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVDROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due to repair. When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the current-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the currentlocation mark may leap to it. • Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible. A B C SEL685V D E F G SEL686V H I J AV SKIA0613E L GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles). The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V lites (two-dimensional positioning). Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions. • In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position changes. • There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning, which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning. • Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna. Revision: August 2007 AV-151 2008 Quest M N O P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NAVI Control Unit • The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are built-in units that control the navigation functions. • Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor, and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map. Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display unit). • Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc. • The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle. WKIA4480E Map DVD-ROM • The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information. • To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used. Display Control Unit The display control unit coordinates audio and video signals between the NAVI control unit and the display unit. Display Unit Displays NAVI system information. AV Switch AV switch allows user to input NAVI display settings. Self diagnostics are initiated using AV switch. GPS Antenna GPS antenna sends signals to NAVI control unit. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719461 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 AV-152 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001719462 A B C D E F G H I J AV L WKIA5230E 1. Steering wheel audio control switches 4. Display unit M93 7. Combination switch M28 10. Bluetooth control unit B506, B507 2. M BCM M18, M19 3. Combination meter M24 5. GPS antenna 6. Display control unit M94, M95 8. Audio unit M43, M45 9. AV switch M98 N 11. NAVI control unit B504, B505 (view with seat removed) O P Revision: August 2007 AV-153 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719463 WKWA4786E Revision: August 2007 AV-154 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - NAVI - INFOID:0000000001719464 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4787E Revision: August 2007 AV-155 2008 Quest P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4788E Revision: August 2007 AV-156 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4790E P Revision: August 2007 AV-157 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4791E Revision: August 2007 AV-158 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4789E P Revision: August 2007 AV-159 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4792E Revision: August 2007 AV-160 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4793E P Revision: August 2007 AV-161 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719465 WKWA4794E Revision: August 2007 AV-162 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - COMM - INFOID:0000000001719466 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4795E Revision: August 2007 AV-163 2008 Quest P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4796E Revision: August 2007 AV-164 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O WKWA4797E P Revision: August 2007 AV-165 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NAVI Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719467 WKIA5211E Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output INFOID:0000000001719468 Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom + – 1 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V – 2 (Y/R) Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 5 (V) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 14 (P) Voice guide signal ON Press the “GUIDE/ VOICE” button. 12 (L) Output Only route guide and operation guide are not heard. SKIA0171J 13 44 (R) – 47 Shield ground RGB signal (R: red) – Output – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Audio noise interference. – NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4977E 45 (W) 47 RGB signal (G: green) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. NAVI screen looks reddish. SKIA4978E Revision: August 2007 AV-166 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + 46 (B) – 47 RGB signal (B: blue) Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B NAVI screen looks yellowish. C D SKIA4979E 47 48 (Y) – Shield ground 49 RGB synchronizing signal – – – ON Press the “MAP” button. Video display interference. – E F Output NAVI screen is rolling. G SKIA0164E 49 61 (R/L) 63 (G) 65 (G/W) 66 (P/L) – Ground Ground Ground Ground Shield ground Illumination signal Ignition signal Reverse signal Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) – Input Input Input Input – ON ON ON ON – – Lighting switch in 1st position Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF – 3V or less Battery voltage A/T selector lever in R position Battery voltage A/T selector lever not in R position 0V When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) Video display interference. H Display unit illumination does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position.- I Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. The navigation current-location mark moves strangely when the vehicle is moving backwards. J AV L M N Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. O – P PKIA1935E 68 – Revision: August 2007 Shield ground – – – AV-167 – 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 69 (G) Ground Communication signal (+) Signal input/ output Input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON – Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom System does not work properly. SKIA0175E 70 (R) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0176E 73 74 GPS signal Input ON Connector is not connected. 5V Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit Navigation system GPS correction is not possible. INFOID:0000000001719469 Refer to AV-117, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit INFOID:0000000001719470 Refer to AV-114, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit (With Color Display)". Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch INFOID:0000000001719471 Refer to AV-119, "Terminal and Reference Value for AV Switch". Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719472 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". On Board Self-Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000001719473 DESCRIPTION • Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually. • Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen. • CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system. DIAGNOSIS ITEM Mode Description Self-diagnosis (DCU) Display control unit diagnosis. Self-diagnosis (NAVI) • NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed when no map DVD-ROM is in it. • Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS antenna and operation of each unit. Revision: August 2007 AV-168 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Mode Description On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Display diagnosis On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehi- Vehicle signals cle speed signal, light signalNOTE, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. Auto Climate Control CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT Display diagnosis Vehicle signals On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. History of Errors Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the errors occurred are also displayed. Navigation B A/C self-diagnosis of A/C system. On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Navigation A D E Display Longitude & Latitude Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude will be displayed. Speed Calibration Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused by tire wear or low -pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather. Angle adjustment Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning angle of the car mark on the display. Initialize Location This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a trailer, etc. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR C Display status of CAN communication. G H I NOTE: Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown. Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) F INFOID:0000000001719474 J OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. AV Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) L M WKIA5232E 4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. N O P WKIA4301E Revision: August 2007 AV-169 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”. • Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. • A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the diagnosis. SKIA4208E 6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation screen will be shown. • When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen will be shown. • When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for the part will not appear on the screen. SKIA4209E 7. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. • If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. 8. Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. • When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis did not detect any error. Please refer to the “confirmation/adjustment” function or service manual for more detailed diagnosis information.” • When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. • When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. “DCU is abnormal”. WKIA4304E WKIA4479E SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -". Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Revision: August 2007 AV-170 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Screen switch Switch color DCU* Red × × Gray DISPLAY A Audio unit Navigation GPS antenna Diagnosis No. B 1 x 2 x x × 3 × × C 4 *: DCU = Display control unit CAUTION: • When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)". • When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown". E Self-Diagnosis Codes Diagnosis No. D Possible cause Reference page 1 Display control unit malfunction. Refer to AV-148. 2 Display communication line between display control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-190. 3 Audio unit power supply and ground circuit. Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit. Refer to AV-189. 4 NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit. AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215. Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) F G H INFOID:0000000001719475 I OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) J AV L WKIA5232E M 4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. N O P WKIA4301E Revision: August 2007 AV-171 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”. • Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. • A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the diagnosis. SKIA4212E 6. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. • If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. 7. WKIA4309E Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. • When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.” • When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. • When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. “Center Control Unit is abnormal”. SKIA4211E • When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.” SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV163, "Wiring Diagram - COMM -". Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Screen switch Center control unit* Red × 1 Gray × 2 × 3 Yellow GPS antenna Diagnosis No. Switch color × 4 × × 5 *: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 AV-172 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-204, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)". • When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-202, "Screen Is Not Shown". A Self-diagnosis codes B Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page 1 NAVI control unit malfunction. Refer to AV-215 2 No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-193 3 When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown. 1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system. 2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage. 3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. Refer to AV-193 4 If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3. Refer to AV-193 5 GPS antenna system. 1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable. 2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. Refer to AV-215 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode D E F G H INFOID:0000000001719476 I OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. C Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) J AV L M WKIA5232E 4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. N O P WKIA4301E Revision: August 2007 AV-173 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial trouble diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of each item will become possible. 6. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “Auto Climate Control” and “Navigation” will become selective. 7. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. SKIA4220E DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS WKIA4316E • When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish • When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-197, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)", AV-198, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV199, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)". VEHICLE SIGNALS • A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of lighting switch (normal setting). • OFF: D (Day mode) • ON: N (Night mode) Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. WKIA4306E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Revision: August 2007 Condition Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position AV-174 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis item Light IGN Reverse Display ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – • • • • Condition Remarks A – B – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". If light is NG, refer to AV-186, "Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". If IGN is NG, refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". D E NAVIGATION 1. 2. C The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, "Navigation", “Error History” and "Delete Unit Connection Log" will be displayed. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. F G H WKIA4311E I DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS J AV L M N WKIA4317E • When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. O R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish P • When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-195, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)", AV-196, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and AV-199, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)". VEHICLE SIGNALS Revision: August 2007 AV-175 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of light switch (normal setting). • OFF: D (Day mode) • ON: N (Night mode) Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. WKIA4306E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – • • • • Condition – – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-184, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". If light is NG, refer to AV-186, "Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". If IGN is NG, refer to AV-186, "Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". If reverse is NG, refer to AV-187, "Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". ERROR HISTORY WKIA4318E DIAGNOSIS BY ERROR HISTORY The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed. If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past, which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis”, must be found by diagnosing the "Error History". Revision: August 2007 AV-176 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > The error history displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of the following points. • Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the NAVI control unit has malfunctioned. • Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when the error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence may be located correctly. • The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the displayed number remains 50. When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the error history), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the error history to find the items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item. Possible causes Error item Action/symptom Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro. Gyro sensor disconnected • Perform self-diagnosis. • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS disconnected GPS transmission cable malfunction GPS input line connection error GPS TCX0 over GPS TCX0 under • Perform self-diagnosis. • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. B C D Example of symptom E • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Angular velocity cannot be detected.) F G • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) • GPS receiving status remains gray. H I Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. • Perform self-diagnosis. • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. • Perform self-diagnosis. • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification • Perform self-diagnosis. • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures. • During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not performed. AV-177 L M • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) • GPS receiving status remains gray. • Location detection accuracy of the navigation system will deteriorate, depending on the error • Perform self-diagnosis. area in the memory, because GPS cannot • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, make correct positioning. the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interfer(Location correction using GPS is not perence. formed.) Revision: August 2007 J AV • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) • GPS receiving status remains gray. Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning. GPS ROM malfunction GPS RAM malfunction A 2008 Quest N O P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Possible causes Error item Example of symptom Action/symptom Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning. GPS RTC malfunction GPS antenna disconnected • Correct time may not be displayed. • After the power is turned on, the system al• Perform self-diagnosis. ways takes some time until GPS positioning • When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interferpositioning without re-collecting the whole satence. ellite information when it judged the data stored in the receiver is correct.) • Correct time of error occurrence may not be stored in the error history. Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control unit and GPS antenna. • Perform self-diagnosis. • When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has decreased. Low voltage of GPS • Perform self-diagnosis. • When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. Malfunctioning NAVI control unit. DVD-ROM Malfunction DVD-ROM Read error DVD-ROM Response Error • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) • GPS receiving status remains gray. - Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be read. • • • • Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) • GPS receiving status remains gray. Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty? If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth. Perform self-diagnosis. When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration. • The map of a particular location cannot be displayed. • Specific guidance information cannot be displayed. • Map display is slow. • Guidance information display is slow. • System has been affected by vibration. NAVIGATION 1. 2. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Steering Angle Adjustment” and “Speed Calibration” will become selective. Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. WKIA4312E Angle adjustment • Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope. WKIA4314E Speed Calibration Revision: August 2007 AV-178 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires. A B C WKIA4315E D CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor INFOID:0000000001719477 OPERATION PROCEDURE E 1. 2. 3. F Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “4” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the selfdiagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) G H WKIA5232E 4. 5. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Self-Diagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. I J AV L WKIA4301E M 6. Display status of CAN communication. Item Content Error counter CAN_COMM OK/NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK/UNKWN 0-50 Revision: August 2007 AV-179 N O P WKIA4307E 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up. (MAX50) • The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50) • If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed. AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000001719478 Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719479 1.CHECK FUSES Make sure the following fuses for the NAVI control unit are not blown. Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 2 Battery power 17 5 ACC or ON power 4 63 ON or START 12 Terminal B504 B505 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 1. 2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal 2 B504 (A) 5 B505 (B) OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Ground 63 0V WKIA5252E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit terminals and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal — B504 1 Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WKIA4207E Revision: August 2007 AV-180 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719480 A 1.CHECK FUSE Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown. Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 Battery power 19 10 ACC power 4 12 Ignition switch ON or START 12 Terminal M94 B C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. F Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals (–) Terminal 1 M94 G Ignition switch position (+) Connector OFF ACC Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Ground 10 12 0V H ON I Battery voltage WKIA5255E 0V J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse. AV 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the following display control unit terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal — M94 3 Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes L M N OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SKIA4293E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Unit P Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. 1. AV-181 O INFOID:0000000001719481 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Revision: August 2007 E 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3 and ground. Approx. 9V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. WKIA1227E 3.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2, 4 and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3. Terminals Display control unit Connector Terminal Connector 2 M94 4. Display unit M93 4 Continuity Terminal 2 Yes 3 Check continuity between display unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1229E Display unit Connector M93 Terminal 2 3 Continuity — Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness. 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13, 14 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WKIA2079E 5. CHECK HARNESS 1. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Revision: August 2007 AV-182 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13, 14 and display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 5, 7. A Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness. C WKIA2080E 6.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows. 1. E Terminals Connector Terminal — Ignition switch M93 1 Ground OFF Continuity Yes F OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness. G WKIA1228E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch H INFOID:0000000001719482 1.CHECK FUSE I Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown. J Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 Battery power 19 2 ACC power 4 Terminal M98 AV OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect AV switch connector. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals N Ignition switch position O (+) Connector L Terminal (–) 1 M98 Ground 2 OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage P WKIA1374E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse. Revision: August 2007 AV-183 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows. Terminals Connector Terminal (–) M98 5 Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WKIA2692E Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719483 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505, display control unit connector M94 and combination meter connector M24. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B505 (B) terminal 66 and combination meter harness connector M24 (A) terminal 26. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B505 (B) terminal 66 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5253E 2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector, display control unit connector and combination meter connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B505 terminal 66 and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". WKIA4209E 3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Revision: August 2007 AV-184 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B505 terminal 66 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 66 - Ground A : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit B C WKIA4210E D INFOID:0000000001719484 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M94, NAVI control unit connector B505 and combination meter connector M24. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 (A) terminal 26 and display control unit connector M94 (B) terminal 16. F G Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 (B) terminal 16 and ground. H Continuity should not exist. I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA5254E J 2.CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector, NAVI control unit connector and combination meter connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 and ground. AV L Approx. 3.5V or more OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". M N SKIA4297E 3.CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. O Drive vehicle at a constant speed. P Revision: August 2007 AV-185 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 16 - Ground : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". Illumination Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit SKIA4616E INFOID:0000000001719485 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals Lighting switch position (+) Connector Terminal B505 61 (–) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R. Illumination Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit WKIA4211E INFOID:0000000001719486 1.CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals Lighting switch position (+) Connector Terminal M94 14 (–) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R. Ignition Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit SKIA4299E INFOID:0000000001719487 1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 AV-186 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B505 terminal 63 and ground. A B Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and fuse. Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit C WKIA4212E D INFOID:0000000001719488 1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL E 1. 2. 3. F Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 12 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse. H WKIA1230E Reverse Signal Inspection for NAVI Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719489 1.CHECK REVERSE LAMP J 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Place A/T selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88. AV L 2.CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL With the A/T selector lever in R-position, check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals Terminal B505 65 M Selector lever position (+) Connector (–) Ground R-position Other than R-position Battery voltage Approx. 0V N O OK or NG WKIA4213E OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay. Reverse Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719490 1.CHECK REVERSE LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 I AV-187 2008 Quest P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Place A/T selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88. 2.CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL With the A/T selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals Selector lever position (+) Connector Terminal M94 6 (–) Ground R-position Other than R-position Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG SKIA4303E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay. AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) INFOID:0000000001719491 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Terminals B 4. A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 69 Display control unit: M95 32 70 Yes 34 Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. WKIA4214E Terminals B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 69 70 Continuity — Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU 1. 2. Replace NAVI control unit. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Revision: August 2007 AV-188 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". A B Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) INFOID:0000000001719492 C 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-53, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit. G Display control unit Connector 40 M95 4. Audio unit Terminal M45 42 E F Terminals Connector D Continuity Terminal H 65 Yes 66 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. I Terminals WKIA1192E Display control unit Connector M95 Terminal 40 42 Continuity — Ground J No AV OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. L 3.CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector M95. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 and ground. M N Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". O P WKIA1770E 4.CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95. Connect audio unit connector. Revision: August 2007 AV-189 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". WKIA1771E 5.CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 40 and ground with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 40 - Ground : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4447E 6.CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 and ground with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. 42 - Ground : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4448E Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) INFOID:0000000001719493 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Revision: August 2007 AV-190 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals A Display control unit Connector Terminal Connector 36 M95 4. Display unit M93 38 Continuity Terminal B 11 Yes 22 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. C Terminals WKIA2019E Display control unit Connector M95 Terminal 36 38 — Continuity D No E Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. F 2.CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. G Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 and ground. H Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". I J WKIA1377E 3.CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AV Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 and ground. L M Approx. 3.5V or more. N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". O SKIA4453E 4.CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. P Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 AV-191 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 36 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 36 - Ground : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4452E 5.CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 and ground with CONSULT-III or oscilloscope. 38 - Ground : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". SKIA4453E AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) INFOID:0000000001719494 1.CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and AV switch connector M98. Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch. Terminals A B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 28 4. Connector M98 30 Continuity Terminal 6 Yes 8 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA5379E A Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 28 30 Continuity — Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU 1. Replace AV switch. 2. Connect display control unit and AV switch connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 AV-192 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". A CAN Communication Line Check INFOID:0000000001719495 1.CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION 1. 2. B Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)". Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-179, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". Item content C Error counter Normal condition Error (Example) CAN_COMM OK NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN 0-50 D E WKIA4307E 3. F G H Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet. I CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet Diagnosis item Screen display Diagnosis item Screen display CAN_COMM OK NG CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN AV L >> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-38. If NAVI control unit detects that DVD-ROM map Is not inserted J INFOID:0000000001719496 M 1.CHECK DVD-ROM Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Insert identified DVD-ROM map. N If NAVI control unit detects that inserted DVD-ROM map Is malfunctioning or if it Is impossible to load data from DVD-ROM map O INFOID:0000000001719497 P 1.CHECK 1: DVD-ROM Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace identified DVD-ROM map. Revision: August 2007 AV-193 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK 2: DVD-ROM Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. 3.CHECK 3: DVD-ROM Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna Is Malfunctioning INFOID:0000000001719498 1.CHECK GPS ANTENNA Check cable for GPS antenna for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again. Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result? YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". Operating Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen INFOID:0000000001719499 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9, 20, 8. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51, 53, 55 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1965E 2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 AV-194 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. A : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". 55 - 49 B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". C SKIA4305E 3.CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL 1. 2. D Press the “TRIP” button. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 51 - 49 E : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) F G SKIA4306E H INFOID:0000000001719500 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS I 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95. 3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. 4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. • When the screen looks bluish. J AV Terminals B A Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 44 47 Continuity Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 44 L Yes 45 M Terminals B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 44 47 Continuity — Ground WKIA4215E No O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Revision: August 2007 N AV-195 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 44 and 47 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 44 and 47. 44 - 47 : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) WKIA4216E INFOID:0000000001719501 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95. 3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. 4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. • When the screen looks reddish. Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 45 Display control unit: M95 46 47 Yes 45 Terminals B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 45 Continuity — Ground 47 WKIA4217E No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 45 and 47 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 45 and 47. 45 - 47 : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 AV-196 WKIA4218E 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) INFOID:0000000001719502 A 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. B C • When the screen looks yellowish. D Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 46 Display control unit: M95 48 47 E Yes 45 F Terminals B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 46 Continuity — G Ground 47 WKIA4219E No H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. I 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 46 and 47 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminal 46 and 47. 46 - 47 J AV L : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) M WKIA4220E N INFOID:0000000001719503 O 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. 3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. 4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. • When the screen looks bluish. Revision: August 2007 AV-197 P 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 50 Display unit: M93 17 47 Yes 7 Terminals B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 50 Continuity — Ground 47 WKIA4221E No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 and 47. 50 - 47 : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) SKIA4697E INFOID:0000000001719504 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. 3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. 4. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. • When the screen looks reddish. Terminals B A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 52 Display unit: M93 6 47 7 Yes WKIA4222E Revision: August 2007 AV-198 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals A B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 52 — Continuity B Ground 47 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL D 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 and 47. 52 - 47 E F : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) G H SKIA4698E I INFOID:0000000001719505 1.CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. AV • When the screen looks yellowish. L Terminals B A Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 54 Display unit: M93 18 47 Continuity M Yes N 7 Terminals B Connector Terminal Display control unit: M95 54 47 Continuity — Ground O WKIA4223E P No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2.CHECK RGB SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 AV-199 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. 4. Check the following with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. • When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 and 47. 54 - 47 : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NAVI Screen Is Rolling SKIA4356E INFOID:0000000001719506 1.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B505 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Terminals B 4. A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 48 Display control unit: M95 43 49 Yes 41 Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA4224E B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B505 48 49 Continuity — Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. 2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B505 terminals 48 and 49 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 48 - 49 : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". WKIA4225E 3.CHECK HARNESS Revision: August 2007 AV-200 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. 3. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. A Terminals B Display control unit Connector Terminal Connector 56 M95 4. Display unit Terminal C 19 M93 49 Continuity Yes 21 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. D Terminals WKIA2775E Display control unit Connector — Terminal M95 Continuity 56 Ground 49 E No F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. G 4.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19 and 21 with CONSULT-lIl or oscilloscope. 19 - 21 H I : Refer to AV-168, "Terminal and Reference Value for Display Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Guide Sound Is Not Heard J AV WKIA2022E L INFOID:0000000001719507 1.CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING M • While driving in the dark green route, voice guide does not operate. • Is volume setting switched ON? NOTE: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. Yes or No YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up. 2.CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. O P Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B504 and audio unit connector M45. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit. Revision: August 2007 N AV-201 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals B 4. A Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B504 12 Audio unit: M45 71 14 Yes 69 Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA4226E B Connector Terminal NAVI control unit: B504 12 Continuity — Ground 14 No Ok or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. 3.CHECK VOICE GUIDE 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B504 terminal 12 and 14 with CONSULT-llI or oscilloscope. 12 - 14 : Refer to AV-166, "Terminal and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". Screen Is Not Shown WKIA4227E INFOID:0000000001719508 1.POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. A/C Screen Is Not Shown (NAVI Screen Is Shown) INFOID:0000000001719509 1.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 AV-202 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart". FUEL ECONOMY Screen Is Not Shown A INFOID:0000000001719510 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL B Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. C 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE D Check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart". E Average Fuel Economy Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) F INFOID:0000000001719511 1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL G Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. H 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE I Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38. Distance to Empty Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) J INFOID:0000000001719512 AV 1.CHECK SPEEDOMETER Confirm that speedometer is functioning. Is speedometer functioning? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". L M 2.CHECK FUEL GAUGE Confirm that fuel gauge is functioning. Is fuel gauge functioning? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". N 3.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE O Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38. P Driving Distance or Average Speed Display Is Not Shown (" *** " Is Shown) INFOID:0000000001719513 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 AV-203 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-187, "Ignition Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-38. 2.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-185, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. No Warning Message Is Displayed (Combination Meter Warning Lamp Illuminates) INFOID:0000000001719514 1. DISPLAY CONDITION CHECK Check display conditions of each warning screen. Warning screen Display condition DOOR OPEN Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected. LIFTGATE OPEN Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar is detected. Have conditions been met to display warning screen? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-169, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)". Is self-diagnosis result OK? YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter". NO >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) INFOID:0000000001719515 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-183, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for AV Switch". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2.AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-180, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 4.CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE Check communication line. Refer to AV-192, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 AV-204 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Navigation System Does Not Activate A INFOID:0000000001719516 1.POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK B Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Previous NAVI Conditions Are Not Stored C D INFOID:0000000001719517 1.CHECK BATTERY POWER E Check NAVI control unit battery power. Refer to AV-180, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for NAVI Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness. F Previous Vehicle Conditions Are Not Stored G INFOID:0000000001719518 1.CHECK BATTERY POWER H Check display control unit battery power. Refer to AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit". OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check display control unit battery power system harness. Position of Current Location Mark Is Not Correct I INFOID:0000000001719519 J 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-171, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. AV L 2.ERROR HISTORY DIAGNOSIS Was any error stored in AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode? YES or NO YES >> AV-173, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode". NO >> AV-206, "Driving Test". Radio Wave from GPS Satellite Is Not Received INFOID:0000000001719520 M N O 1.CHECK ENVIRONMENT Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building. OK or NG OK >> System is not malfunctioning. The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it is shielded by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS Revision: August 2007 AV-205 2008 Quest P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-171, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)". OK or NG OK >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Driving Test INFOID:0000000001719521 1.DRIVING TEST 1 1. Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT LOCATION CORRECTION”. 2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark. 3. Perform the distance correction of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode. Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be made. 4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-206, "Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction" after driving the vehicle? YES or NO YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.DRIVING TEST 2 • Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed? • Test pattern Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor. - Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current location and the direction, then drive the vehicle. - Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control unit with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back in the unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration. • Sample tests - Perform test pattern 1. - Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet). - Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance. Correction = A/B A: Distance shown on the screen B: Actual distance YES or NO YES >> • If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again. • If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System Owner's Manual for contact information. • Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-215, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. Example of Symptom Judged Not Malfunction INFOID:0000000001719522 BASIC OPERATION Revision: August 2007 AV-206 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Cause Remedy A No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK side. Adjust the display brightness. No guide sound is heard. Audio guide volume is too low or too high. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume. Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is driving on a dark green route. System is not malfunctioning. Screen is too dark. Motion of the image is too slow. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle reaches the proper temperature. Small black or bright spots appear on the screen. Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit). System is not malfunction. B C D VEHICLE MARK E Symptom Cause Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Name of the place varies with the screen. Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. The same place name, street name, etc. may not be displayed every time on account of the data processing. System is not malfunctioning. Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly. Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its ignition switch is turned to OFF. Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition. Screen will not switch to nighttime mode after the lighting switch is turned ON. The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done. Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function. Perform screen dimming and select the nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”. Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the vehicle is in or behind a building. Move the vehicle out to an open space. GPS satellite signal cannot be received because an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument panel. Do not place anything in the center on top of the display. L GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle. M Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. Current location is not determined. Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle. Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30 minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If advancement or retard still occur, perform the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis function. Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is always deviated to the same position.) As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be released once a year. Vehicle location accuracy is low. Remedy F G I DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET Revision: August 2007 AV-207 H 2008 Quest J AV N O P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Cause Remedy Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road. Passing point is not searched when re-searching the route. The vehicle has already passed the passing point, or the system judged so. To include the passing points that have been passed into the route again, set the route again. Route information will not be displayed. Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route searching. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Route information is not available on the dark green route. System is not malfunctioning. After the route searching, no guide sign will appear as the vehicle goes near the entrance/exit to the toll road. Drive on the recommended route. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. (On the display, only guide signs related to the recommended route will be shown.) Automatic route searching is not possible. Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no recommended route is available. Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search the route manually. In this case, however, the whole route will be searched. Performed automatic detour search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. System is not malfunctioning. Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop at more than five points, perform sharing in several steps. When setting the route, the starting point cannot be selected. The current vehicle location is always set as the starting point of a route. System is not malfunctioning. Some menu items cannot be selected. The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then operate the system. VOICE GUIDE Symptom Voice guide will not operate. Cause Remedy Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. System is not malfunctioning. The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or research the route. Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which tual road pattern. the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road to other roads. Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. ROUTE SEARCH Revision: August 2007 AV-208 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom No route is shown. Indicated route is intermittent. Cause Remedy No road to be searched is found around the destination. Find wider road (orange road or wider) nearby and reset the destination and passing points onto it. Take care of the traveling direction when there are separate up and down roads. A Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point. Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination. Turn the time-regulating search conditions OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the search conditions OFF. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning. B C D used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to the current location or the passing points may be intermittent. E When the vehicle has passed the recommended route, it is deleted from the screen. A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing point 1, then the map data from the starting point up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data may remain undeleted in some areas.) System is not malfunctioning. Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route may be recommended. Set the route closer to the basic route (gray route). G A detour route may be shown when some traffic regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area around the starting point or the destination. Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route of your choice. H In the area where highways (gray routes) are used for the search, left turn has priority around the current location and the destination (passing points). For this reason, the recommended route may be detouring. System is not malfunctioning. Landmarks on the map do not match the actual ones. This can be happen due to omission or error in the map data. As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be released once a year. Wait until the latest map has become available. J Recommended route is far from the starting point, passing points, and destination. Starting point, passing points, and destination of the route guide were set far from the desired points because route searching data around these area were not stored. Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If this road is one of the highways (gray routes), an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as the recommended route. AV F I NOTE: L Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.) M EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT N O P Revision: August 2007 AV-209 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction. SEL698V Revision: August 2007 AV-210 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A Y–intersections At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of travel deduced by the sensor may result in the current-location mark appearing on the wrong road. B C ELK0192D Spiral roads D When driving on a large, continuous spiral road (such as loop bridge), turning angle error is accumulated and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. E ELK0193D F Straight roads When driving on a long, straight road and slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and distance errors may accumulate. As a result, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location when the vehicle is turned at a corner. Road configuration ELK0194D Zigzag roads When driving on a zigzag road, the map may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. G If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. H I J ELK0195D Roads laid out in a grid pattern AV When driving where roads are laid out in a grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the map may be matched to them by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. L ELK0196D M Parallel roads When two roads are running in parallel (such as highway and sideway), the map may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. N O ELK0197D P Revision: August 2007 AV-211 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display In a parking lot SEL709V Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map, matching may place the vehicle mark on a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location. When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from the gyroscope (angular speed sensor). Therefore, the displayed direction may be wrong and the correct road may not be easily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a turntable with the ignition OFF. Place SEL710V Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads where tires may slip easily, accumulated mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when travelling on banked roads, or in other cases where the vehicle turns when tilted, an error in the turning angle will occur, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. Road not displayed on the map screen When driving on new roads or other roads not displayed on the map screen, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to a road which is on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. SEL699V Map data Different road pattern (Changed due to repair) If the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. The vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. ELK0201D Vehicle Use of tire chains Revision: August 2007 When tire chains are used, the mileage is not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. AV-212 Drive the vehicle for a while. If the distance still deviates, adjust it by using the distance adjustment function. (If the tire chain is removed, recover the original value.) 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Just after the engine is started Continuous driving without stopping Precautions for driving Abusive driving Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A If the vehicle is driven just after the engine is started when the gyroscope (angular speed sensor) correction is not completed, the vehicle can lose its direction and may have deviated from the correct location. Wait for a short while before driving after starting the engine. When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and the current-location mark may deviate from the correct road. Stop and adjust the orientation. Spinning the wheels or engaging in other kinds of abusive driving may result in the system being unable perform correct detection, and may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. If the accuracy of location settings is poor, accuracy may be reduced when the correct road cannot be found, particularly in places where there are many roads. Enter in the road displayed on the screen with an accuracy of approx. 1mm. Caution: Whenever possible, use detailed map for the correction. B C D E Position correction accuracy How to correct location F G SEL701V Direction when location is corrected H If the accuracy of location settings during correction is poor, accuracy may be reduced afterwards. Perform direction correction. I SEL702V J CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction. AV • When location correction has not been done - If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the current-location mark becomes out of place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received. • When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed - Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise loca- M tion can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected. CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current location. • When map-matching has been done - If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on a road. • When GPS location correction has been done - If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which is not on a road. CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea. WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT Revision: August 2007 AV-213 2008 Quest N O P NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually. Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the vehicle mark to deviate. LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW • The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some distance for the function to work. • Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found. ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION • The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark may not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done. • The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used. • GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped. NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen. CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. • The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel. • The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the (flat) map display. • The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more distant areas. • Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. • The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times. Revision: August 2007 AV-214 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719523 A B C D E F G H I J AV L SKIA0389E M Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719524 GPS ANTENNA N Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid D". Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove instrument panel side cover RH. Refer to IP-10. O P Revision: August 2007 AV-215 2008 Quest NAVIGATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Separate the GPS antenna (1) from the bracket by removing the screws (A). WKIA5258E 5. Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna and feeder assembly out the top. WKIA1195E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NAVI CONTROL UNIT Removal CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Remove front seat RH. Refer to SE-75. 2. Remove NAVI control unit from the seat. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 AV-216 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TELEPHONE A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719525 B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKIA5231E 1. BCM M18, M19 2. Combination meter M24 3. Audio unit M45 4. AV switch M98 5. Steering wheel audio control switches 6. Microphone R20 7. Bluetooth ON indicator R16 8. Bluetooth control unit B506, B507 (View with seat removed) 9. Bluetooth antenna (View with seat removed) System Description N O INFOID:0000000001719526 BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth telephone system operating instructions. NOTE: Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth telephone system. Revision: August 2007 AV-217 2008 Quest P TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bluetooth telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth cellular telephone to make a wireless connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be sent and received. Personal memos can be created using the Voice Recognition system. Some Bluetooth cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the Bluetooth control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to the cellular telephone operating manual. Bluetooth Telephone System Diagram WKIA4569E Bluetooth Control Unit When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth control unit will power up. During power up, the Bluetooth control unit is initialized and performs various self checks. Initialization may take up to 10 seconds. During this time the Bluetooth ON indicator will flash until initialization is complete. Voice Recognition will then become active and the Bluetooth ON indicator will remain on. Bluetooth telephone functions can be turned off using the voice recognition system. BCM The BCM supplies power for the Bluetooth ON indicator. Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches When buttons on the steering wheel audio control switch are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio control switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth control module uses this signal to perform various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system. The following functions can be performed using the steering wheel audio control switch: • Initiate Self Diagnosis of the Bluetooth telephone system • Start a voice recognition session • Answer and end telephone calls • Adjust the volume of calls • Record memos AV Switch Call volume can be adjusted using the AV switch. Microphone The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth control unit. Combination Meter The combination meter supplies speed signals to the Bluetooth control unit. Vehicle speed signals are used to determine which voice command functions will be disabled based on driving conditions. Bluetooth ON Indicator The Bluetooth ON indicator is located in the overhead console. The indicator will flash during power up while the Bluetooth control unit is initializing. This process may take up to 10 seconds. After initialization, the indicator will remain on to indicate that the system is ready for voice commands. Audio Unit Revision: August 2007 AV-218 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers. A Wiring Diagram - H/PHON - INFOID:0000000001719527 B C D E F G H I J AV L M N O P WKWA4760E Revision: August 2007 AV-219 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4761E Revision: August 2007 AV-220 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719528 A B C WKIA5226E D Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719529 E Terminal (Wire color) + – 1 (Y) Ground Item Battery power Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Input – – Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom Battery voltage System does not work properly. – Battery voltage System does not work properly. System does not work properly. 2 (V) Ground ACC power Input ACC/ ON 3 (G/R) Ground IGN power Input ON/ START – Battery voltage 4 (B/W) – Ground – – – – – 6 – Shield – – – – – 7 (R/L) 8 (B) Mic-in signal Input ON – – – 9 (G) 10 (L) Audio out Output – – – – 11(Y) – Mute – – – – – Press MODE switch Approx. 0V Press SEEK UP switch Approx. 0.75V Press VOL UP switch Approx. 2V Except for above Approx. 5V Press POWER switch Approx. 0V Press SEEK DOWN switch Approx. 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch Approx. 2V Except for above Approx. 5V 12 (R/G) 13 (G/W) Ground Ground Remote control A Remote control B Input Input ON ON H I J L M Steering wheel audio controls do not function. N O – – – – Steering wheel audio controls do not function. 14 (Y/R) – 15 (GR) – LED – – – – – 17 (V) – –- – – – – – 18 (G/O) – – – – – – – 19 (R/B) – – – – – – – 20 (B) – Ground – – – – – 21 (B) – Ground – – – – – AV-221 G AV Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Remote control ground Revision: August 2007 F 2008 Quest P TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom Ignition switch Operation – – – – – Microphone power – – – – – Bluetooth antenna signal Input – – – – + – 28 (P/L) – Speed signal 29 (R/W) – 33 – Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000001719530 The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the technician using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis. BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS • • • • • • Internal control unit failure Bluetooth antenna connection open or shorted Steering wheel audio control switches (SEND/END) stuck closed Vehicle speed pulse count Microphone connection test (with playback to operator) Bluetooth inquiry check STARTING THE DIAGNOSTIC MODE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. Wait for the Bluetooth system to complete initialization and the Bluetooth ON indicator to stop flashing. This may take up to 10 seconds. Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch SEND button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth system will begin to play a verbal prompt. WKIA4446E 4. 5. 6. While the prompt is playing, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously. The Bluetooth system will sound a 5 second beep. While the beep is sounding, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously again. The Bluetooth system has now entered into the diagnostic mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the technician by the system. WKIA4447E Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Bluetooth Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719531 1.CHECK FUSES Make sure the following fuses for the Bluetooth control unit are not blown. Revision: August 2007 AV-222 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals Connector Ignition Switch Fuse No. 1 All positions 31 2 ACC/ON 4 3 ON/START 12 Terminal B506 B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector B506. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal 1 B506 2 ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 3 0V D F OFF Ground C E Ignition switch position (–) A G WKIA4389E H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between Bluetooth control unit and fuse. I 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUITS J 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the following Bluetooth control unit terminals and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal B506 20 — AV Continuity L Yes M 4 Ground 21 OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WKIA4556E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719532 N O BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT P Removal 1. Remove front passenger seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 AV-223 2008 Quest TELEPHONE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove Bluetooth control unit (1) from bluetooth control unit bracket by removing screws (A) and disconnecting harness connector (2). LKIA0713E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing bluetooth control unit, Perform pairing procedure. Refer to Owner's Manual Pairing Procedure. BLUETOOTH ON INDICATOR Removal 1. 2. Remove front overhead console. Refer to EI-38. Release Bluetooth ON indicator tabs (A) and remove indicator (1). LKIA0714E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MICROPHONE Removal 1. 2. Remove front overhead console. Refer to EI-38. Release microphone tabs (A) and remove microphone (1). LKIA0716E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 AV-224 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION BCS BODY CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................... 3 System Description ................................................... 3 CAN Communication System Description ................. 7 Schematic ................................................................. 8 BCM Terminal Arrangement ....................................10 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................11 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ....15 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................15 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) .........................................17 Configuration ...........................................................17 Removal and Installation of BCM ............................18 F G H I J BCS L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BCS-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719305 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 BCS-2 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description A INFOID:0000000001719306 • BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. B BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. C COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION D 1. 2. Description • BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. • BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). Operation description • BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. • If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. • At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. E F G H I J BCS L M N O LIIA0757E 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch • BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table. Revision: August 2007 BCS-3 2008 Quest P BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SKIA4959E NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) • When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. • When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. • When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. LIIA0760E 5. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Operation mode • Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Revision: August 2007 BCS-4 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Normal status • When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status • When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. A B C D E F G H I WKIA4093E J CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCS BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status • With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. • Control by BCM is being operated properly. • When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. • Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status • This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. • It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. • Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status • With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. • With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. • Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status • BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. • CAN communication is not active. Revision: August 2007 BCS-5 2008 Quest L M N O P BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. • When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) • When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. • Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY • Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16. • Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-48. • Power window system. Refer to GW-17. NOTE • Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10. NOTE • Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-106. • Warning chime system. Refer to DI-34. • Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-55. • Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-25. • NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-180. NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R • Panic system. Refer to BL-48. • Theft warning system. Refer to BL-72. • Headlamp, daytime light, fog lamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to LT-5, LT25, LT-47, LT-90, or LT-35. • Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-3. • Rear window defogger system. Refer to GW-76. MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM System Input Output Remote keyless entry system Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob) • All door locking actuators • Back door opener actuator • Turn signal lamps Power door lock system • Front power door lock/unlock switch (LH, RH) • All door switches • Key switch All door locking actuators Power supply (IGN/RAP) to power window and sunroof Ignition/retained power supply Power supply to power window and sunroof system Power supply (BAT) to power window, sunroof and power seat Battery power supply Power supply to power window, sunroof system and power seat Panic alarm • Key switch • Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob) IPDM E/R Auto light system • Optical sensor • Combination switch IPDM E/R Battery saver control • Ignition switch • Combination switch • Front door switch LH and RH IPDM E/R Headlamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Tail lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Fog lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Revision: August 2007 BCS-6 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Input Output A Turn signal lamp Combination switch • Turn signal lamp • Combination meter Hazard lamp Hazard switch • Turn signal lamp • Combination meter B Room lamp timer • • • • • Interior room lamp C Key warning chime • Key switch • Front door switch LH Combination meter (warning buzzer) D Light warning chime • Combination switch • Key switch • Front door switch LH Combination meter (warning buzzer) Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent wiper • Combination switch • Combination meter IPDM E/R Rear window defogger Rear window defogger switch IPDM E/R Air conditioner switch signal Front air control ECM Blower fan switch signal Front air control ECM Low tire pressure warning system Remote keyless entry receiver • Combination meter • Display control unit Vehicle security system • • • • • • Key switch Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob) Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) All door switches Remote keyless entry receiver (keyfob) Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) All door switches Back door latch (door ajar switch) CAN Communication System Description E F G H • IPDM E/R • Security indicator lamp I INFOID:0000000001719307 J Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". BCS L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BCS-7 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719308 ALMWA0126GB Revision: August 2007 BCS-8 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J BCS L M N O ALMWA0127GB P Revision: August 2007 BCS-9 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000001719309 LIIA2443E Revision: August 2007 BCS-10 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719310 A Measuring condition Terminal Wire color Signal name Signal input/ output Ignition switch 1 BR/W Ignition keyhole illumination Output OFF Operation or condition Door is locked (SW OFF) Door is unlocked (SW ON) Reference value or waveform (Approx.) B Battery voltage C 0V D 2 GR/R Combination switch input 5 Input ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 E SKIA5291E F 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 Input ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 G SKIA5292E 4 G/R Combination switch input 3 Input ON H I Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5291E 5 6 G/B Combination switch input 2 G/W Combination switch input 1 BCS Input ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 L SKIA5292E 9 W/L 10 GR 11 Rear window defogger switch Input ON Hazard lamp flash Input OFF V Ignition switch (ACC or ON) Input ACC or ON 12 GR/L Front door switch RH Input OFF 13 O/B Rear door switch RH Input OFF 15 L/W Tire pressure warning check connector Input OFF Revision: August 2007 M Rear window defogger switch ON 0V Rear window defogger switch OFF 5V N ON (opening or closing) 0V OFF (other than above) Battery voltage Ignition switch ACC or ON Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) 0V OFF (closed) BCS-11 P Battery voltage ON (open) Battery voltage — O 5V 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Measuring condition Terminal Wire color Signal name Signal input/ output Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value or waveform (Approx.) 18 P Remote keyless entry receiver (Ground) Output OFF — 0V 19 V/W Remote keyless entry receiver (power supply) Output OFF Ignition switch OFF LIIA1893E Stand-by (keyfob buttons released) 20 Y/G Remote keyless entry receiver signal (Signal) LIIA1894E Input OFF When remote keyless entry receiver receives signal from keyfob (keyfob buttons pressed) LIIA1895E 21 O NATS antenna amp. 22 Y/B BUS G/O Security indicator lamp Input OFF → ON Ignition switch (OFF → ON) — — Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. PIIA2344E 23 Output OFF 25 BR NATS antenna amp. Input OFF → ON 27 L/R Compressor ON signal Input ON 28 L/Y Front blower monitor Input ON 29 Y/R Hazard switch Input OFF Revision: August 2007 Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4 seconds) Ignition switch (OFF → ON) A/C switch OFF A/C switch ON Battery voltage → 0V Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. 5V 0V Front blower motor OFF Battery voltage Front blower motor ON 0V ON 0V OFF 5V BCS-12 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire color Signal name Signal input/ output Measuring condition Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value or waveform (Approx.) A B 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 Output ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 Output ON D E Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 34 R Combination switch output 3 Output ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E 35 36 R/B Combination switch output 2 R/W Combination switch output 1 I Output ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E 37 B/R 38 Key inserted Battery voltage Key removed 0V Key switch Input OFF G Ignition switch (ON) Input ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — — 43 O Back door switch Input OFF 44 BR Rear wiper auto stop Input ON 47 GR/R Front door switch LH Input OFF 48 W/G Rear door switch LH Input OFF 49 W/V Cargo lamp Output OFF 55 SB Rear wiper motor output Output ON Revision: August 2007 ON (open) OFF (closed) Rear wiper operating Rear wiper stopped ON (open) OFF (closed) ON (open) OFF (closed) Any door open (ON) All doors closed (OFF) L M 0V Battery voltage N 0 Battery 0V O Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage OFF 0 ON Battery voltage BCS-13 BCS 2008 Quest P BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal 56 57 58 Wire color R/G Y/G W/R 59 G 60 GR/L Signal name Battery saver output Battery power supply Optical sensor Signal input/ output Output Input Input Measuring condition Ignition switch OFF Operation or condition 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF Reference value or waveform (Approx.) 0V ON — Battery voltage OFF — Battery voltage When optical sensor is illuminated 3.1V or more When optical sensor is not illuminated 0.6V or less ON Front door lock assembly LH actuator (unlock) Output OFF OFF (neutral) Turn signal (left) Output ON 0V ON (unlock) Battery voltage Turn left ON SKIA3009J 61 G/R Turn signal (right) Output ON Turn right ON SKIA3009J 62 R/W Step lamp LH and RH Output OFF 63 P Interior room/map lamp Output OFF 65 V All door lock actuators (lock) Output OFF 66 G/Y Front door lock actuator RH, rear door lock actuators LH/RH and back door lock actuator (unlock) 67 B/W Ground 68 W/L Power window power supply (RAP) ON (any door open) OFF (all doors closed) ON (open) Any door switch OFF (closed) OFF (neutral) OFF Input ON Output — Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage 0V ON (lock) Battery voltage OFF (neutral) Output 0V 0V ON (unlock) Battery voltage — 0V Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch OFF 0V When front door LH or RH is open or power window timer operates 0V 69 W/R Power window power supply Output — — Battery voltage 70 W/B Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage Revision: August 2007 BCS-14 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719311 A 1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK • Check 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box). • Check 10A fuses [No. 4 and 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 15A fuses [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. 2.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Terminals (+) (-) 11 Ground M18 C D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connectors and ground. Connector B Power source Condition ACC power supply Ignition switch ACC or ON E Voltage (V) (Approx.) F Battery voltage G LIIA2415E 38 Ground Ignition power supply Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage 57 Ground Battery power supply Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage Ground Battery power supply Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage M20 70 H I J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace the harness. BCS 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. 67 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA0915E CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Revision: August 2007 O INFOID:0000000001719312 BCS-15 P 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Content WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR Displays BCM input/output data in real time. ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. ITEMS OF EACH PART NOTE: CONSULT-III will only display systems the vehicle possesses. Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part) System and item CONSULT-III display WORK SUPPORT SELF− DIAG RESULTS × BCM BCM × Power door lock system DOOR LOCK × Rear defogger DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER × × ACTIVE TEST × × × REAR DEFOGGER × × Warning chime BUZZER × × Room lamp timer INT LAMP × × × Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × × Headlamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper WIPER × × Turn signal lamp Hazard lamp FLASHER × × Blower fan switch signal Air conditioner switch signal AIR CONDITIONER × Combination switch COMB SW × NVIS (NATS) IMMU × × Interior lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × Back door BACK DOOR × × × × × Retained power control RETAINED PWR × Low tire pressure monitor system AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × Oil pressure switch SIGNAL BUFFER Panic system PANIC ALARM Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × × CONFIGURATION × × × × × × WORK SUPPORT Display Item List Revision: August 2007 BCS-16 2008 Quest BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item A Description RESET SETTING VALUE Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment. CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) INFOID:0000000001719313 B 1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK 1. 2. 3. C Connect to CONSULT-III, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. Select “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Check display content in self-diagnostic results. D CONSULT-III display code Diagnosis item INITIAL DIAG E TRANSMIT DIAG ECM U1000 IPDM E/R F METER/M&A I-KEY Contents displayed No malfunction>>Inspection End Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Configuration G H INFOID:0000000003302384 I DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has three functions as follows: • READ CONFIGURATION is the function to read (extract) vehicle configuration of current BCM. • WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection is the function to select and write vehicle configuration on BCM J manually. • WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file is the function to write vehicle configuration with the data extracted from current BCM. BCS • For READ CONFIGURATION and WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. • For WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection using the following chart, identify the correct model and L configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-III software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-III WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set M or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-43, "Model Variation". N ITEM SET VAL AUTO LIGHT WITH ⇔ WITHOUT FR FOG LAMP WITH ⇔ WITHOUT SPEED SENS WIP WITH ⇔ WITHOUT O CAUTION: • When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-III. • Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. • If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. • Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. Revision: August 2007 BCS-17 2008 Quest P BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation of BCM INFOID:0000000001719315 REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to PB-5, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). • ⇐ : Front LKIA0715E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". • When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. • When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT13, "ID Registration Procedure". Revision: August 2007 BCS-18 2008 Quest BODY SECTION BL BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check .............................40 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check ....42 Front Door Lock Actuator RH Check .......................43 Door Lock Actuator Check (Sliding Door) ................44 Back Door Lock Actuator Check (Without Automatic Back Door) .....................................................44 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ..........................................................45 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 Precaution for work ................................................... 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 G H REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............. 48 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 6 Work Flow ................................................................. 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 8 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 10 HOOD .................................................................12 Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 12 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly ........... 13 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ...... 14 Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................. 15 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ........................16 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 16 System Description ................................................. 16 Schematic ............................................................... 19 Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK - ..................................... 21 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 33 Work Flow ............................................................... 33 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 34 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart ......................... 35 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection .... 35 Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) ................................................................... 35 Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) ................................................................... 37 Key Switch (Insert) Check ....................................... 39 Revision: August 2007 F BL-1 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................48 System Description ..................................................48 CAN Communication System Description ...............51 Schematic ................................................................52 Wiring Diagram - KEYLES - ....................................53 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................55 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........55 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................56 CONSULT-III Application Item .................................56 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ..................................58 Pre-Diagnosis Inspection .........................................58 Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................58 Key Switch (insert) Check .......................................60 Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) ...................................................................61 Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) ...................................................................63 Keyfob Battery and Function Check ........................65 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Inspection ...........................................................................66 ACC Power Check ...................................................67 IPDM E/R Operation Check .....................................67 Check Hazard Function ...........................................68 Check Horn Function ...............................................68 Check Headlamp Function ......................................68 Check Interior Lamp Illumination Function ..............69 ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................69 Keyfob Battery Replacement ...................................71 2008 Quest BL J K L M N O P VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM ............................................................. 72 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 137 System Description ............................................... 137 Schematic ............................................................. 142 Wiring Diagram - B/CLOS - ................................... 143 Back Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................. 148 Terminal and Reference Value for Back Door Control Unit ........................................................... 148 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 149 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ............................... 149 Self-Diagnosis Procedure ..................................... 150 Diagnosis Chart .................................................... 151 Back Door Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection .................................................. 152 Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection . 152 Back Door Close Switch System Inspection ......... 154 Pinch Strip System Inspection .............................. 155 Back Door Warning Chime System Inspection ..... 156 Half-Latch Switch System Inspection .................... 156 Open Switch System Inspection ........................... 157 Close Switch System Inspection ........................... 158 Back Door Handle Switch System Inspection ....... 159 Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection .................. 160 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 72 System Description ................................................. 72 CAN Communication System Description .............. 74 Schematic ............................................................... 75 Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - ................................... 76 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 80 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 80 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 81 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 82 Preliminary Check .................................................. 83 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 84 Diagnosis Procedure 1 ........................................... 84 Diagnosis Procedure 2 ........................................... 88 Diagnosis Procedure 3 ........................................... 89 Diagnosis Procedure 4 ........................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure 5 ........................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure 6 ........................................... 91 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM ........... 92 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 92 System Description ................................................. 92 Schematic ..............................................................100 Wiring Diagram - S/CLOS - ...................................103 Sliding Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........................................................118 Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Control Unit ............................................................118 Sliding Door Latch Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................120 Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Latch Control Unit ..................................................120 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................121 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................121 Self-Diagnosis Procedure ......................................122 Diagnosis Chart .....................................................123 Auto Sliding Door Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........................................................124 Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection ..125 Sliding Door Open/Close Switch System Inspection .........................................................................125 Sliding Door Motor System Inspection ..................126 Magnetic Clutch Line Check ..................................127 Sliding Door Encoder System Inspection ..............127 Sliding Door Remote Control Switch System Inspection .................................................................129 Child Lockout Switch System Inspection ...............130 Latch Release Actuator System Inspection ...........130 Warning Chime System Inspection .......................131 Half-Latch Switch System Inspection ....................132 Full-Latch Switch System Inspection .....................133 Neutral Switch System Inspection .........................134 Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection ...................135 DOOR ............................................................... 162 Fitting Adjustment ................................................. 162 Removal and Installation ....................................... 165 FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 168 Component Structure ............................................ 168 Removal and Installation ....................................... 168 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 170 SLIDE DOOR LOCK ......................................... 171 Removal and Installation ....................................... 171 BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 175 Component Structure ............................................ 175 Back Door Latch ................................................... 176 Back Door Power Lift Assembly ............................ 177 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 178 Wiring Diagram - F/LID - ....................................... 178 NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SystemNATS) ............................................................... 180 AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM ............. 137 Revision: August 2007 BL-2 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 180 System Description ............................................... 180 System Composition ............................................. 180 ECM Re-communicating Function ........................ 181 Wiring Diagram - NATS - ...................................... 182 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 182 CONSULT-III Function .......................................... 182 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ............................... 184 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 185 Diagnosis Procedure 1 .......................................... 187 Diagnosis Procedure 2 .......................................... 188 Diagnosis Procedure 3 .......................................... 188 2008 Quest Diagnosis Procedure 4 .......................................... 189 Diagnosis Procedure 5 .......................................... 190 Diagnosis Procedure 6 .......................................... 192 How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp ................... 193 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ...... 194 Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - ................................. 194 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 194 BODY REPAIR ................................................. 196 Body Component Parts ......................................... 197 Corrosion Protection .............................................. 200 Body Sealing ......................................................... 202 Body Construction ................................................. 206 Body Alignment ..................................................... 206 Handling Precaution for Plastics ............................ 218 Precaution in Repairing High Strength Steel ......... 221 Foam Repair .......................................................... 223 Replacement Operation ......................................... 224 A B C Body Exterior Paint Color ...................................... 196 D E F G H BL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-3 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718448 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for work INFOID:0000000001718449 • After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their operation. • Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it. Revision: August 2007 BL-4 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718450 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name B Description C Locating the noise — (J-39570) Chassis ear D E SIIA0993E F Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit G H SIIA0994E BL J Used to test keyfobs — (J-43241) Remote Keyless Entry Tester K L LEL946A M Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718451 N (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear O Locating the noise P SIIA0995E Revision: August 2007 BL-5 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow INFOID:0000000001718452 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. • Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. • Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. • Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. • Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. • Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. • Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 BL-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS D After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken G or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H porarily. • feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. BL • placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". J REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. Revision: August 2007 BL-7 2008 Quest K L M N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718453 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 BL-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. A SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) B C D Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. E F SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder H 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- BL ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-9 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718454 LAIA0072E Revision: August 2007 BL-10 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LAIA0071E P Revision: August 2007 BL-11 2008 Quest HOOD < SERVICE INFORMATION > HOOD Fitting Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718455 AWIIA0727ZZ 1. Hood hinge 2. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood assembly 4. Front grille 5. Headlamp 6. Front fender D. 6.0 - 10.0 mm (0.236 - 0.394 in) E. 0.0 - 4.0 mm (0.000 - 0.157 in) F. 5.3 - 9.3 mm (0.209 - 0.366 in) G. 5.1 - 7.1 mm (0.201 - 0.280 in) CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT Revision: August 2007 BL-12 2008 Quest HOOD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the hood lock assembly and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood clearance of hood and fender becomes 1 mm (0.04 in) lower than fitting standard dimension. 2. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and striker for looseness, and tighten the lock bolt to the specified torque. 3. Adjust the clearance and surface height of hood and fender according to the fitting standard dimension by rotating right and left bumper rubbers. CAUTION: Adjust right/left gap between hood and each part to the following specification. Hood and headlamp (B–B) 2. 3. B C : Less than 2.0 mm D HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT 1. A Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center (when viewed from vehicle front). Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb). CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque. E F G H PIIA3806E Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly INFOID:0000000001718456 BL J K L M N O P WIIA1116E Revision: August 2007 BL-13 2008 Quest HOOD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. 2. 3. 1. Hood assembly 2. Hood front sealing rubber 4. Hood hinge 5. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood insulator Support the hood by the striker with a suitable tool to prevent it from falling. Remove the hinge to hood nuts to remove the hood assembly. CAUTION: Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control INFOID:0000000001718457 WIIA1117E 1. Hood lock assembly 2. Hood lock cable 3. Radiator core support side 4. Hood ledge reinforce upper 5. Hood ledge upper 6. Clip REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-17, "Removal and Installation". Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. Remove the grommet on the dash lower panel, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. LIIA1544E Revision: August 2007 BL-14 2008 Quest HOOD < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the dash lower panel hole to the engine room. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and push the grommet into the panel hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at * mark. A B C D PIIA0173E 4. 5. Install the cable securely to the lock. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. Refer to BL-12, "Fitting Adjustment". E F G PIIA0174E Hood Lock Control Inspection H INFOID:0000000001718458 BL CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. J K L PIIA1086E M 3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply “body grease” to the points shown in the figure. N O P PIIA0176E Revision: August 2007 BL-15 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718459 LIIA2462E 1. Sliding door switch LH B46 RH B135 2. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 3. Front pillar LH 4. Front door lock assembly LH D14 (key cylinder switch) 5. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch LH D7, D8 Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH D105 6. Front door switch LH B8 RH B108 7. Back door latch (door ajar switch) D511 (with power back door) Back door switch D512 (without power back door) 8. Key switch M27 9. Sliding door lock actuator LH D205 RH D305 System Description INFOID:0000000001718460 WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70 and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57 • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to key switch terminal 1. With ignition key inserted, power is supplied • through key switch terminal 2 • to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied • to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Revision: August 2007 BL-16 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 A • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12. When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied • to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH B • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 C • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 D • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1 and 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied E • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12. When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 F • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 6 and 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied G • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12. BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through the power window serial link. H When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 • through front door switch LH terminal 1 BL • through front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 12 • through front door switch RH terminal 1 J • through front door switch RH case ground. When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 48 K • through sliding door switch LH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch LH case ground. When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 13 L • through sliding door switch RH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch RH case ground. When the back door switch is ON (door is open), ground is supplied M • to BCM terminal 43 • through back door switch terminal 1 • through back door switch terminal 3 N • through grounds D403 and D404. WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70 and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57 • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to key switch terminal 1. With ignition key inserted, power is supplied • through key switch terminal 2 • to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied • to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch Revision: August 2007 BL-17 2008 Quest O P POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14. When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied • to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4 • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1 and 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14. When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 6 and 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation signal is supplied • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14. BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through a serial link. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 • through front door switch LH terminal 1 • through front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 12 • through front door switch RH terminal 1 • through front door switch RH case ground. When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 48 • through sliding door switch LH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch LH case ground. When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 13 • through sliding door switch RH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch RH case ground. When the back door switch (built into back door latch) is ON (door is open), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 43 • through back door latch (door ajar switch) assembly terminal 7 • through back door latch assembly terminal 8 • through grounds D403 and D404. OUTLINE Functions available by operating the door lock and unlock switches on driver's door and passenger's door • Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. • Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are unlocked. Functions available by operating the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) • Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. • When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH (actuator) is unlocked. Revision: August 2007 BL-18 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door lock actuators on all doors are unlocked. A Key reminder door system When door lock and unlock switch is operated to lock doors with ignition key in key cylinder and any door open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked. B Schematic INFOID:0000000001718461 WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM C D E F G H BL J K L M N O P WIWA1808E Revision: August 2007 BL-19 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM WIWA1809E WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYS- Revision: August 2007 BL-20 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > TEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1810E P Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK - INFOID:0000000001718462 WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 BL-21 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1811E Revision: August 2007 BL-22 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1812E P Revision: August 2007 BL-23 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1813E Revision: August 2007 BL-24 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1814E WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 BL-25 2008 Quest P POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1815E Revision: August 2007 BL-26 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1816E P Revision: August 2007 BL-27 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1817E Revision: August 2007 BL-28 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O ALKWA0205GB WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM AND AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 BL-29 2008 Quest P POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1819E Revision: August 2007 BL-30 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1820E P Revision: August 2007 BL-31 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1821E Revision: August 2007 BL-32 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1822E P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718463 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Work Flow 1. INFOID:0000000001718464 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Revision: August 2007 BL-33 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-16, "System Description". 3. According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-35, "Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart". 4. Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 5, NG: GO TO 3. 5. Inspection End. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718465 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Monitor item "OPERATION" Content KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder. IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. DOOR SW–DR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW–AS "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW–RR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch RH. DOOR SW–RL "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch LH. BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch. ACTIVE TEST Test item Content ALL LOCK/UNLOCK This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–III screen is touched. DR UNLOCK This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH (actuator) unlock operation.These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–III screen is touched. OTHER UNLOCK This test is able to check door lock actuators [except front door lock assembly LH (actuator)] unlock operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–III screen is touched. Revision: August 2007 BL-34 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001718466 A Symptom Repair order Key reminder door function does not operate properly. Refer to page 1. Door switch check BL-35 2. Key switch (Insert) check BL-39 3. Replace BCM. BCS-18 Power door lock does not operate with door lock and unlock switch on main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. 1. Door lock/unlock switch check Front door lock assembly LH (actuator) does not operate. 1. Front door lock assembly LH (actuator) check BL-42 1. Door lock actuator check (Front LH) BL-42 2. Door lock actuator check (Front RH) BL-43 3. Door lock actuator check (Sliding door) BL-44 4. Back door lock actuator check (Without automatic back door system) BL-44 5. Back door lock actuator check (With automatic back door system) BL-150 1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check BL-45 Specific door lock actuator does not operate. Power door lock does not operate with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) operation. Power door lock does not operate. B C BL-40 D 2. Replace BCM. BCS-18 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check BL-35 2. Door lock/unlock switch check BL-40 3. Replace BCM. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection E F G H BL BCS-18 INFOID:0000000001718467 J INFOID:0000000001718468 K Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON L M N O • When doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW Revision: August 2007 P : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF BL-35 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. Connector M19 M18 Item Terminals (+) Back door switch 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 (–) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1041E OK or NG OK >> Door switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. 1 - 12 1 - 13 1 - 43 1 - 47 1 - 48 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground. WIIA1143E 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND SLIDING DOORS Check continuity between front or sliding door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0782E BACK DOOR Revision: August 2007 BL-36 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed A : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. B OK or NG OK >> (Front and sliding doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. C WIIA0783E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND D Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground E : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. F G WIIA0791E Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) INFOID:0000000001718469 H 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL BL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON J K L • When doors are closed: M DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF N O Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. Revision: August 2007 BL-37 P 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector M19 M18 Item Terminals (+) Back door latch (door ajar switch) 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 (–) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1041E OK or NG OK >> Door switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. 1 - 47 1 - 12 1 - 48 1 - 13 7 - 43 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and ground. 1 - Ground 7 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA1144E 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND SLIDING DOORS Revision: August 2007 BL-38 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between front or sliding door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed A : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. B C WIIA0782E D BACK DOOR Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch. E When back door is open : Continuity should exist. When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> (Front and sliding doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. F G WIIA0811E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND H Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground BL : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K LIIA0828E Key Switch (Insert) Check INFOID:0000000001718470 L 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW N : ON O • When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW M : OFF P Without CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 BL-39 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Terminal Connector (+) (–) M18 37 Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> Key switch (insert) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0567E 2.CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch. Check continuity between key switch terminals 1, 2. Terminals 1–2 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace key switch. Refer to PS-9. LIIA1906E Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check INFOID:0000000001718471 1.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK: CDL LOCK SW : ON • When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK: CDL UNLOCK SW : ON Without CONSULT-III Remove key from ignition key cylinder. Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/ unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 1. 2. Revision: August 2007 BL-40 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector Terminal (+) A Voltage (V) (Approx.) (–) B M18 22 Ground C PIIA1297E PIIA6379E D OK or NG OK >> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for "MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item". When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered? F G YES or NO YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". H 3.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. BL Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ J unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 (without automatic back door system) or D8 terminal 17 (with automatic back door system) and ground. K 15 - Ground : Continuity should exist. 17 - Ground : Continuity should exist. L WIIA0812E 4. M Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. N 11 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O P LIIA1270E 4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 12 (without automatic back door system) or terminal 14 (with automatic back door system). Revision: August 2007 BL-41 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 22 - 12 22 - 14 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. LIIA1903E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 - 16 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1271E Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Actuator) Check INFOID:0000000001718472 1.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (ACTUATOR) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly LH (actuator). Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and front door lock assembly LH (actuator) connector D14 terminals 2, 3. Connector M20 4. Terminals Connector 59 Terminals Continuity 2 Yes 3 Yes D14 65 Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and body ground. LIIA1574E Connector M20 Terminals 59 65 Ground Continuity No No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (ACTUATOR) SIGNAL 1. Reconnect BCM. Revision: August 2007 BL-42 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and ground. Terminals Connector (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Driver door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms Driver door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms (-) 59 M20 Ground 65 A B C LIIA1046E D OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (actuator). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Front Door Lock Actuator RH Check INFOID:0000000001718473 F 1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and front door lock actuator RH. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and front door lock actuator RH connector D114 terminals 2, 3. G H Connector M20 4. Terminals Connector 65 Terminals Continuity 3 Yes 2 Yes D114 66 BL Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and body ground. Connector Terminals 65 M20 Continuity Ground 66 J LIIA1479E No K No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. L 2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL M 1. 2. Reconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 65 M20 Ground 66 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms N O P LIIA1048E OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock actuator RH. Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 BL-43 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Door Lock Actuator Check (Sliding Door) INFOID:0000000001718474 1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and each door lock actuator. Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65, 66 and sliding door lock actuator connector (B) D205 (LH) or D305 (RH) terminals 2, 4. Connector M20 4. Terminals Connector Terminals Continuity 65 D205 or D305 4 Yes 2 Yes 66 Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65, 66 and body ground. WIIA1145E Connector Terminals 65 M20 Continuity Ground 66 No No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL 1. 2. Reconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 65 M19 Ground 66 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms LIIA1048E OK or NG OK >> Replace sliding door lock actuator. Refer to BL-171. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Back Door Lock Actuator Check (Without Automatic Back Door) INFOID:0000000001718475 1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and back door lock actuator. Revision: August 2007 BL-44 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M20 terminals 65, 66 and back door lock actuator connector (B) D513 terminals 2, 4. Connector Connector 65 M20 4. Terminals Terminals Continuity 2 Yes 4 Yes D513 66 A B C Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M19 terminals 50, 51 and body ground. WIIA1146E Connector Terminals 65 M20 Ground 66 D Continuity No No E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. F 2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL 1. 2. G Reconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. H Connector Terminals (+) 65 M20 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage for 300 ms (-) Ground 66 BL J LIIA1048E K OK or NG OK >> Replace back door lock actuator. Refer to BL-176, "Back Door Latch". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check L INFOID:0000000001718476 1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH M With CONSULT-III Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: N KEY CYL LK-SW O : ON • When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: KEY CYL UN-SW P : ON Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 (without automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and ground. Revision: August 2007 BL-45 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Without Automatic Sliding Door System Terminals Connector (+) (–) 6 D7 Ground 7 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 LIIA0867E With Automatic Sliding Door System Terminals Connector (+) (–) 4 D7 Ground 6 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 LIIA0566E OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and body ground. Connector Terminals Continuity D14 5 – Ground Yes WIIA0813E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals. Terminals 1–5 Condition Continuity Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to LOCK. Yes Key is turned to LOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes 5–6 OK or NG Revision: August 2007 LIIA1573E BL-46 2008 Quest POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168. A 4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 6, 7 (without automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector (B) D14 terminals 1, 6 and body ground. Without Automatic Sliding Door System Connector A: Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch C Terminals Connector Terminals Continuity 6 B: Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) 1 Yes 7 D 6 Yes E 6 Ground No 7 Ground No WIIA1159E With Automatic Sliding Door System Connector A: Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch F G Terminals Connector Terminals Continuity 4 B: Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) 1 Yes 6 B H 6 Yes BL 4 Ground No 6 Ground No WIIA0814E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-47 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718477 LIIA2463E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 2. (view with instrument panel removed) Front pillar LH 3. Front door switch LH B8 RH B108 4. Back door latch (door ajar switch) D511 (with power back door) Back door switch D512 (without power back door) 5. Key switch M27 6. Remote keyless entry receiver M120 7. Front pillar RH 8. Horn (low) E3 (below front combination lamp LH) 9. Horn (high) E108 (below front combination lamp RH) 10. Sliding door switch LH B46 RH B135 System Description INFOID:0000000001718478 INPUTS Power is supplied at all times • to BCM terminal 70 • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 57 Revision: August 2007 BL-48 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the ignition key is inserted in the ignition cylinder, power is supplied • to BCM terminal 37 • through key switch terminals 1 and 2 • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON, power is supplied • to BCM terminal 11 • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the ignition switch is in ON or START, power is supplied • to BCM terminal 38 • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 • through front door switch LH terminal 1 • through front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 12 • through front door switch RH terminal 1 • through front door switch RH case ground. When the sliding door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 48 • through sliding door switch LH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch LH case ground. When the sliding door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 13 • through sliding door switch RH terminal 1 • through sliding door switch RH case ground. When the back door switch is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 43 • through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or, • through back door latch terminal 7 (with power back door) • through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door) • through back door latch terminal 8 (with power back door) • through body grounds D403 and D404. Keyfob signal is supplied to BCM from the remote keyless entry receiver. The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the • power door locks • sliding door opener (with automatic sliding door system) • back door opener (with power back door) • interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) • panic alarm • hazard and horn reminder • keyless power window down (open) A B C D E F G H BL J K L M OPERATION PROCEDURE • The BCM only locks/unlocks the doors if the ID number matches. (Remote control entry functions) • When the keyfob is operated, the signal from the keyfob is sent and the remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal and sends it to the BCM. Only if the ID number matches does the BCM send the open/ close signal to the sliding door control unit. (Remote control automatic sliding door function) • Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened within 1 minute after the UNLOCK switch on the keyfob is pressed, all the doors are automatically locked. (Auto lock function) • When a door is locked or unlocked, the vehicle hazard lamps flash and the horn sounds to verify operation. (Active check function) • When the key is in the ignition key cylinder (when the key switch is ON) and one of the doors is open, the door lock function does not work even when the door lock is operated with the keyfob. • Keyfob ID set up is available. • If a keyfob is lost, a new keyfob can be set up. A maximum of 5 IDs can be set up. Remote Control Entry Functions Operation Description • When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the remote keyless entry receiver. Revision: August 2007 BL-49 2008 Quest N O P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number. • If the ID number matches, the BCM sends the lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator. • When the door lock actuators receive this signal, each operates to lock/unlock its door. • BCM locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob. • When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver's door will be unlocked. • Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked. Remote control entry operation conditions Keyfob operation Operation condition • With key removed (key switch: OFF) • Closing all doors (door switch: OFF) Door lock operation (locking) Door lock operation (unlocking) With key removed (key switch: OFF) Auto Lock Function Operation Description • Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened, within 1 minute after a door lock is unlocked by keyfob operation, all the doors are automatically locked. The 1 minute timer count is executed by the BCM and after 1 minute, the BCM sends the lock signal to all doors. Lock operations are the same as for the remote control entry function. Remote Control Automatic Sliding Door Function (Vehicles With Automatic Sliding Door System) For the auto sliding door system operation, refer to BL-92, "System Description". Active Check Function Operation Description When a door is locked or unlocked by keyfob operation, the vehicle hazard lamps flash and the horn sounds to verify operation. • When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the keyless remote entry receiver. • The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number. • If the ID number matches, the BCM sends the hazard lamps flashing and horn signals to the IPDM E/R. • The IPDM E/R flashes the hazard lamps and sounds the horn (when in C mode) for each keyfob operation. Operating function of hazard and horn reminder C mode S mode Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — Horn sound Once — — — Hazard and Horn Reminder BCM output to IPDM E/R for horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN-H line and CAN-L line). The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode). How to change hazard and horn reminder mode With CONSULT-III Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET". Without CONSULT-III Refer to Owner's Manual for instructions. Interior Lamp Operation When the following input signals are both supplied: • all door switches are in the OFF position (when all the doors are closed); • lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position. Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) for 30 seconds with input of UNLOCK signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to LT-107, "System Description". Panic Alarm Operation When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. Revision: August 2007 BL-50 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continuously for more than 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door power windows are simultaneously opened. Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is pressed. CAN Communication System Description A B INFOID:0000000001718479 C Refer to LAN-3. D E F G H BL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-51 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718480 WIWA1823E Revision: August 2007 BL-52 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - KEYLES - INFOID:0000000001718481 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1824E Revision: August 2007 BL-53 2008 Quest P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1825E Revision: August 2007 BL-54 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1826E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718482 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001718483 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 BL-55 2008 Quest P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718484 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-III Application Item INFOID:0000000001718486 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” Data Monitor Monitored Item Description ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch LH. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of sliding door switch RH. IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote locking signal. KEYLESS PANIC Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob. KEYLESS PSD Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob sliding door button is pushed (with RH power door only). KEYLESS PSD L Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob left sliding door button is pushed (with LH and RH power doors). KEYLESS PSD R Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob right sliding door button is pushed (with LH and RH power doors). KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote unlocking signal. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. LK/UN BTN ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob. LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch. PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob. RKE KEEP UNLK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition. Keep pushing UNLOCK, turns to ON 3 seconds after UNLOCK button is pushed. RKE LCK-UNLCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition when keyfob LOCK and UNLOCK buttons are pushed at the same time. UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch. UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. Active Test Revision: August 2007 BL-56 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test Item Description A INT ILLUM This test is able to check interior lamp illumination operation. The interior lamp illumination is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. IGN ILLUM This test is able to check ignition keyhole illumination operation. The ignition keyhole illumination is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. FLASHER RIGHT(CAN) This test is able to check right hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. FLASHER LEFT(CAN) This test is able to check left hazard reminder operation. The left hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. HORN This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. HEAD LAMP (HI) This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. POWER WINDOW DOWN This test is able to check power window down operation. The windows are lowered when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. TRUNK/BACK DOOR This test is able to check back door actuator operation. The back door is unlocked when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. B C D E F Work Support G Test Item Description REMO CONT ID REGIST keyfob ID code can be registered. REMO CONT ID ERASUR keyfob ID code can be erased. REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode. HORN CHIRP SET Horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The horn reminder mode will be changed when "CHANGE SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. HAZARD LAMP SET Hazard reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The hazard reminder mode will be changed when "CHANGE SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. H MULTI ANSWER BACK SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed when “CHANG SETT” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. AUTO LOCK SET Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. PANIC ALRM SET Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. TRUNK OPEN SET Back door opener operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. PW DOWN SET Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-III screen is touched. BL J K L M Hazard and horn reminder mode MODE 1 (C mode) MODE 2 (S mode) MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6 Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — — — Twice Once Twice — — Once Horn sound Once — — — — — — — Once — Once — MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 5 minutes Nothing 1 minute MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 0.5 seconds Nothing 1.5 seconds Panic alarm operation mode Keyfob operation Revision: August 2007 O P Auto locking function mode Auto locking function N BL-57 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trunk lid open operation mode Keyfob operation MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 0.5 seconds Nothing 1.5 seconds Keyless power window down operation mode Keyfob operation MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 3 seconds Nothing 5 seconds Trouble Diagnosis Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001718487 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-48, "System Description". Confirm system operation. • Check that the power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16. • Check that the automatic sliding door system operates normally. Refer to BL-92. • Check that the automatic back door system operates normally. Refer to BL-137. Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to BL-58, "Pre-Diagnosis Inspection". Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis". Inspection End. Pre-Diagnosis Inspection INFOID:0000000001718488 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718489 SYMPTOM CHART NOTE: • Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure". • Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-65, "Keyfob Battery and Function Check". • The panic alarm operation of the remote keyless entry system does not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder. • Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob before replacing keyfob. Symptom All functions of remote keyless entry system do not operate. The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. BL-65 2. Check BCM and remote keyless entry receiver. BL-66 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. BL-65 2. Key switch (insert) check. BL-60 3a. Door switch check (without automatic back door system). BL-61 3b. Door switch check (with automatic back door system). BL-63 4. ACC power check. 5. Replace BCM. Revision: August 2007 Reference page BL-58 BL-67 BCS-18 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Door lock or unlock does not function. (If the power door lock system does not operate manually, check power door lock system. Refer to BL-16.) Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Replace BCM. Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. Horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. (Hazard reminder OK) BL-61 2b. Door switch check (with automatic back door system). BL-63 2. Check hazard function with hazard switch. BL-68 2. Check horn function with horn switch. BL-67 G H BL BCS-18 BL-60 3. Remote keyless entry receiver system check. BL-66 J K BCS-18 1. Room lamp operation check. BL-68 2. Ignition keyhole illumination operation check. BL-69 3. Step lamp operation check. LT-107 4a. Door switch check (without automatic back door). BL-61 4b. Door switch check (with automatic back door). BL-63 L M N BCS-18 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. BL-65 2. Key switch (insert) check. BL-60 3. Check horn function. BL-68 4. Check headlamp function. BL-68 BL-59 F WW-39 2. Key switch (insert) check. 5. Replace BCM. Revision: August 2007 BL-56 BL-65 5. Replace BCM. Panic alarm (horn and/or headlamp output) does not activate when panic alarm button is continuously pressed. BCS-18 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241). NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 4. Replace BCM. E BCS-18 BL-56 1. Check horn reminder mode with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Horn reminder mode can be changed. First check the horn reminder mode setting. C D 1. Check hazard reminder mode with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Hazard reminder mode can be changed. First check the hazard reminder mode setting. 4. Replace BCM. Interior lamp and puddle lamp (if equipped) operation do not activate properly. BCS-18 2a. Door switch check (without automatic back door system). 3. IPDM E/R operation check. Sliding door open/close operation is not carried out with keyfob operation. (The automatic sliding door system is normal.) B BL-56 3. Replace BCM. A BL-65 1. Check hazard and horn reminder mode with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed. First check the hazard and horn reminder mode setting. 3. Replace BCM. Hazard reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. (Horn reminder OK) Reference page O P BCS-18 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Reference page Diagnoses/service procedure Auto door lock operation does not activate properly. (All other remote keyless entry functions OK.) 1. Check auto door lock operation mode with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Auto door lock operation mode can be changed. First check the auto door lock operation mode setting. BL-56 2. Replace BCM. Keyless power window down (open) operation does not activate properly. (All other remote keyless entry functions OK.) BCS-18 1. Check power window down operation mode with CONSULT-III. NOTE: Power window down operation mode can be changed. First check the power window down operation mode setting. BL-56 2. Check power window function with switch. GW-17 3. Replace BCM. BCS-18 Key Switch (insert) Check INFOID:0000000001718490 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW : ON • When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW : OFF Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Terminal Connector (+) (–) M18 37 Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> Key switch (insert) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0567E 2.CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch. Check continuity between key switch terminals 1, 2. Terminals 1–2 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace key switch. LIIA1906E Revision: August 2007 BL-60 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) INFOID:0000000001718491 A 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON B C D E • When doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF F G H Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. BL Connector M19 M18 Item Terminals (+) (–) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) J Back door switch 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 K Ground Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1041E L M OK or NG OK >> Door switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. N 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. Revision: August 2007 BL-61 2008 Quest O P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1 - 12 1 - 13 1 - 43 1 - 47 1 - 48 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground. WIIA1143E 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND REAR DOORS Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0782E BACK DOOR Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0783E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0791E Revision: August 2007 BL-62 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) INFOID:0000000001718492 A 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON B C D E • When doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF F G H Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. BL Connector M20 M18 Item Terminals (+) (–) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) J Back door latch (door ajar switch) 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 K Ground Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage LIIA1041E M OK or NG OK >> Door switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. N 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. Revision: August 2007 L BL-63 2008 Quest O P REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1 - 47 1 - 12 1 - 48 1 - 13 7 - 43 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and ground. 1 - Ground 7 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA1144E 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND REAR DOORS Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0782E BACK DOOR Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch. When back door is open : Continuity should exist. When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0811E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND Revision: August 2007 BL-64 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground A : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C LIIA0828E D Keyfob Battery and Function Check INFOID:0000000001718493 1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY E Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−). Voltage : 2.5V - 3.0V F NOTE: Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to BL-71, "Keyfob Battery Replacement". G H SEL237W 2.CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION BL With CONSULT-III Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. J When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should be turned as follows. Condition Monitor item Pushing LOCK KEYLESS LOCK : ON Pushing UNLOCK KEYLESS UNLOCK : ON Keep pushing UNLOCK RKE KEEP UNLK turns to ON 3 seconds after UNLOCK button is pushed. L M Pushing PANIC KEYLESS PANIC : ON Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK at the same time RKE LCK-UNLCK : ON KEYLESS PSD *1 : ON KEYLESS PSD R *2 : ON Pushing SLID DOOR LH OPEN KEYLESS PSD L *2 : ON Pushing SLID DOOR RH OPEN K N O P *1: With auto sliding door RH *2: With auto sliding door RH and LH Without CONSULT-III Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 BL-65 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> WITH CONSULT-III: Keyfob, remote keyless entry receiver and wiring harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". OK >> WITHOUT CONSULT-III: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis". NG >> WITH CONSULT-III: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis". NG >> WITHOUT CONSULT-III: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-69, "ID Code Entry Procedure". Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718494 1.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 20 and ground using an oscilloscope. Condition: Keyfob buttons released Keyfob buttons pressed : Refer to BL-55, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". : Refer to BL-55, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". LIIA1275E OK or NG OK >> Remote keyless entry receiver signal power supply, ground and signal circuits are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 2. 2.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY INSPECTION Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 19 and ground using an oscilloscope. 19 - Ground : Refer to BL-55, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". WIIA0433E 3.REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM) Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 18 and ground. 18 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". WIIA0434E 4.HARNESS INSPECTION BETWEEN BCM AND REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER 1. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver and BCM connectors. Revision: August 2007 BL-66 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector M120 terminals 1, 2, 4 and BCM connector M18 terminals 18, 19, 20. 1 - 18 2 - 20 4 - 19 3. A : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. B C Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver terminals 1, 2 and 4 and ground. WIIA0308E 1 - Ground 2 - Ground 4 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. D E OK or NG OK >> Replace remote keyless entry receiver. NG >> Repair or replace the harness between the remote keyless entry receiver and BCM. ACC Power Check F INFOID:0000000001718495 1.CHECK ACC POWER G With CONSULT-III Check "ACC ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". Monitor Item Condition ACC ON SW H BL Ignition switch position is ACC : ON Ignition switch position is OFF : OFF J Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 11 and ground. K Terminal Connector (+) (–) M18 11 Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ACC or ON Battery voltage OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> ACC power circuit is OK. NG >> Check the following: • 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)] • Harness for open or short. IPDM E/R Operation Check L M PIIA7002E INFOID:0000000001718496 O 1.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE P Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and ground. Revision: August 2007 N BL-67 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector E121 Terminal (+) (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) 51 Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> GO TO 2. PIIA6403E 2.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and horn relay. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and horn relay connector H-1 terminal 1. 51 - 1 4. :Continuity should exist. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 51 and ground. 51 - Ground :Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-58, "Trouble Diagnosis". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2171E Check Hazard Function INFOID:0000000001718497 1.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch? Yes or No Yes >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK. No >> Check hazard indicator. Refer toLT-55. Check Horn Function INFOID:0000000001718498 First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". 1.CHECK HORN FUNCTION Does horn sound with horn switch? Yes or No Yes >> Horn circuit is OK. No >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-39. Check Headlamp Function INFOID:0000000001718499 First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". 1.CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON? Yes or No Revision: August 2007 BL-68 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Yes >> Headlamp operation circuit is OK. No >> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-5. Check Interior Lamp Illumination Function A INFOID:0000000001718500 1.CHECK LAMP FUNCTION B When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH. C Interior lamp should illuminate. OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> Check interior lamp circuit. Refer to LT-106. ID Code Entry Procedure D INFOID:0000000001718501 E KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-III NOTE: • If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A spe- F cific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-III. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. G • When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the new H ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. • Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. • Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The BL code is counted as an additional code. 1. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. 2. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. J 3. The items below can be set up. • “REMO CONT ID CONFIR” Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not. K • “REMO CONT ID REGIST” Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code. NOTE: L Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required. • “REMO CONT ID ERASUR” Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code. M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-69 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-III LIIA1670E NOTE: • If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-III. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. Revision: August 2007 BL-70 2008 Quest REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. • If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new keyfob. • Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. • Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. Keyfob Battery Replacement A B C INFOID:0000000001718502 D E F G H BL J K LIIA1514E L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-71 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718503 LIIA2464E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 2. (view with instrument panel removed) Front pillar LH 3. Front door lock assembly LH D14 (key cylinder switch) 4. Main power window and door lock/un- 5. lock switch LH D7, D8 Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH D105 Front door switch LH B8 RH B108 6. Back door latch (door ajar switch) D511 (with power back door) Back door switch D512 (without power back door) 7. Sliding door switch LH B46 RH B135 Horn (low) E3 (below front combination lamp LH) 9. Horn (high) E108 (below front combination lamp RH) 8. System Description INFOID:0000000001718504 DESCRIPTION Operation Flow Revision: August 2007 BL-72 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E PIIA1367E F Setting the vehicle security system Initial condition G • Ignition switch is OFF. Disarmed phase • When the vehicle is being driven or when doors are open, the vehicle security system is set in the disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle. H Pre-armed phase and armed phase • There are three conditions to enable the vehicle security system to turn into the "pre-armed" phase and tran- BL sition into armed phase. The initial requirements are that hood, glass hatch and all doors must be closed (ignition key removed) for the transition to take place. Those three conditions are: 1. Locking vehicle with either front power door lock switch before exiting vehicle and closing all doors. J 2. Using keyfob to lock already closed doors after leaving the vehicle. 3. Using driver key cylinder switch to lock already closed doors after leaving the vehicle. • Upon any of the above three steps taking place, the security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds, then K the system automatically shifts into the "armed" phase. Canceling the set vehicle security system When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled. 1. Unlock the front doors with the key or the keyfob. 2. If equipped, open the back door with the keyfob. When the back door is closed after opening the back door with the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase. 3. If equipped, open the sliding door(s) with the keyfob. With the sliding door(s) closed after opening the sliding door(s) with the keyfob, the system returns to the armed phase. Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system Make sure the system is in the armed phase. When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps for about 50 seconds. 1. Any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob. 2. Door is opened without using key or keyfob. 3. Back door is opened without using keyfob (with automatic back door system). 4. Sliding door(s) opened without using keyfob (with automatic sliding door system). Power is supplied at all times through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] to combination meter (security indicator lamp) terminal 40 through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) to BCM terminal 70 through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] Revision: August 2007 M N O P POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT • • • • • L BL-73 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to BCM terminal 57 • through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to horn relay terminal 2 and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to IPDM E/R internal CPU. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through body ground E9, E15 and E24. INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors. To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors are closed and locked. When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 43, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch. When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 12 (without power back door) or terminal 14 (with power back door) of main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 16 of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. When the back door is open, BCM terminal 43 receives a ground signal • from terminal 1 (without power back door) of the back door switch or terminal 7 (with power back door) of the back door latch (door ajar switch) • through body grounds D403 and D404. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently • from IPDM E/R CPU • to headlamp high relay and • from IPDM E/R terminal 51 • to horn relay terminal 1. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door must be unlocked with the key or keyfob. When the key is used to unlock a door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal • from terminal 12 (without power back door) or terminal 14 (with power back door) of the main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When the BCM receives unlock signal from keyfob or key cylinder switch, the vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase) PANIC ALARM OPERATION Remote keyless entry system can operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as required. When the panic alarm is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently • from IPDM E/R CPU • to headlamp high relay and • to horn relay terminal 1. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718505 Refer to LAN-3. Revision: August 2007 BL-74 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718506 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1827E Revision: August 2007 BL-75 2008 Quest P VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - INFOID:0000000001718507 WIWA1828E Revision: August 2007 BL-76 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1829E P Revision: August 2007 BL-77 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1830E Revision: August 2007 BL-78 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1831E P Revision: August 2007 BL-79 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1832E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718508 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001718509 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 BL-80 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718510 A CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received date is displayed. C DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. D Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. E BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. F CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEM Data Monitor G Monitored Item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. KEYLESS TRUNK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door open signal from keyfob. KEYLESS PSD R Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power sliding door LH signal from keyfob. KEYLESS PSD L Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power sliding door RH signal from keyfob. KEYLESS PBD Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door close signal from keyfob. TRNK OPNR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door switch. TRNK CYL SW OFF (not equipped) TRNK OPN MNTR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of power back door position. HOOD SW OFF (not equipped) DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. BACK DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch. CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch. CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch. H BL J K L M N O P Active Test Test Item THEFT IND Revision: August 2007 Description This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. BL-81 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test Item Description HEADLAMP (HI) This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The high beam headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. VEHICLE SECURITY HORN This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-III screen is touched. Work Support Test Item Description SECURITY ALARM SET This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting. THEFT ALM TRG The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT-III screen. Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718511 WORK FLOW WIIA0599E • For “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” diagnosis, refer to BL-16. • For “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM” diagnosis, refer to BL-48. Revision: August 2007 BL-82 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001718512 A The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED in the following flow chart. B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA1152E After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart. N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-83 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001718513 SYMPTOM Diagnostic procedure PROCEDURE Diagnostic Procedure 1 Refer to BL-84, "Diagnosis Procedure 1". AII items If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Lock/unlock switch 1 Vehicle security system cannot be set by ···· Door outside key (driver) 2 3 *1 Vehicle security system does not alarm when ···· Diagnostic Procedure 3 Refer to BL-89, "Diagnosis Procedure 3". If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Combination meter Diagnostic Procedure 2 Refer to BL-88, "Diagnosis Procedure 2". BCM If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Any door is opened. Diagnostic Procedure 1 Refer to BL-84, "Diagnosis Procedure 1". If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Diagnostic Procedure 4 Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 4". Horn alarm 4 If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Check remote keyless entry function. Keyfob Security indicator does not turn “ON”. Diagnostic Procedure 6 Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 6". If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system. Refer to WW-39. Vehicle security alarm does not activate. Headlamp alarm Diagnostic Procedure 5 Refer to BL-91, "Diagnosis Procedure 5". If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. 5 Vehicle security system cannot be canceled by ···· Door outside key (driver) Diagnostic Procedure 3 Refer to BL-89, "Diagnosis Procedure 3". If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Check remote keyless entry function. Keyfob If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. *1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase. Diagnosis Procedure 1 INFOID:0000000001718514 Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR Revision: August 2007 : ON : ON : ON BL-84 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON A • When doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW B : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF : OFF C D Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. Connector M19 M18 Item Terminals (+) Back door switch 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 (–) Condition E Voltage (V) (Approx.) F G Ground Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage H LIIA1041E Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 BL OK or NG OK >> Door switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. 1 - 12 1 - 13 1 - 43 1 - 47 1 - 48 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. K L M N Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) or D512 (Back) terminal 1 and ground. O WIIA1143E 1 - Ground P : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND REAR DOORS Revision: August 2007 BL-85 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0782E BACK DOOR Check continuity between back door switch terminals 1 and 3 while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0783E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND Check continuity between back door switch connector D512 terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0791E Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR", "BACK DOOR SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : ON : ON : ON : ON : ON • When doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RR Revision: August 2007 : OFF : OFF : OFF BL-86 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR SW-RL BACK DOOR SW : OFF : OFF A Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47, 48 and ground. Connector M19 M18 Item Terminals (+) Back door latch 43 Front door switch LH 47 Sliding door switch LH 48 Front door switch RH 12 Sliding door switch RH 13 (–) Condition B C Voltage (V) (Approx.) D Ground Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage E LIIA1041E F OK or NG OK >> Door switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. G 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT H 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), BL B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and BCM connector (A) M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 43, 47 and 48. J 1 - 47 : Continuity should exist. 1 - 12 : Continuity should exist. K 1 - 48 : Continuity should exist. 1 - 13 : Continuity should exist. 7 - 43 : Continuity should exist. L 4. Check continuity between door switch connector (B) B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B46 (Sliding LH), B135 (Sliding RH) terminal 1 or back door latch (door ajar switch) connector (C) D511 terminal 7 and ground. 1 - Ground 7 - Ground M : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O P WIIA1144E 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES FRONT AND REAR DOORS Revision: August 2007 BL-87 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between front or rear door switch terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pressing and releasing switch. Door switch is released Door switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0782E BACK DOOR Check continuity between back door latch (door ajar switch) terminals 7 and 8 while pressing (closing back door) and releasing (opening back door) switch. When back door is open : Continuity should exist. When back door is closed : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> (Front and rear doors) Switch circuit is OK. OK >> (Back door) GO TO 4. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0811E 4.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH GROUND Check continuity between back door latch connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Back door switch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0828E Diagnosis Procedure 2 INFOID:0000000001718515 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK 1.SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-III Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III. Without CONSULT-III 1. Disconnect BCM. 2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. Connector Terminal (+) (-) 23 Ground M18 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ON 0 OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Security indicator lamp is OK. Revision: August 2007 LIIA0523E BL-88 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> GO TO 2. 2.SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK A Check indicator lamp condition. Refer to DI-23. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace combination meter (security indicator lamp). Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". B C 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and combination meter connector. Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M18 terminal 23 and combination meter connector (B) M24 terminal 35. 23 - 35 4. D E : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector (A) M18 terminal 23 and ground. 23 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> NG F G Check the following: • 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] • Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse >> Repair or replace harness. Diagnosis Procedure 3 WIIA1147E H INFOID:0000000001718516 BL 1.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) With CONSULT-III Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–III. Refer to BL-34, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • When key inserted in left front door key cylinder is turned to LOCK: J K KEY CYL LK-SW : ON • When key inserted in left front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: KEY CYL UN-SW L : ON Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 (without automatic sliding door system or automatic back door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system or automatic back door system) and ground. M N Without Automatic Sliding Door System or Automatic Back Door System Connector Terminals (+) (–) 6 D7 Ground 7 Condition of left front key cylinder Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 O P LIIA0867E Revision: August 2007 BL-89 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > With Automatic Sliding Door System or Automatic Back Door System Connector Terminals (+) (–) 4 D7 Ground 6 Condition of left front key cylinder Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 LIIA0566E OK or NG OK >> Key cylinder switch signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH GROUND HARNESS Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and body ground. Connector Terminals Continuity D14 5 – Ground Yes WIIA0813E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals. Terminals 1–5 Condition Continuity Key is turned to UNLOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to LOCK. Yes Key is turned to LOCK or neutral. No Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes 5–6 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168. LIIA1573E 4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER HARNESS Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 6, 7 (without automatic sliding door system) or terminals 4, 6 (with automatic sliding door system) and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector (B) D14 terminals 1, 6 and body ground. Revision: August 2007 BL-90 2008 Quest VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Without Automatic Sliding Door System Connector A: Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch Terminals Connector Terminals Continuity 6 B: Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) 1 Yes 6 Yes 7 A B 6 Ground No 7 Ground No C WIIA1159E D With Automatic Sliding Door System Connector A: Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch Terminals Connector Terminals Continuity 4 B: Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) 1 Yes 6 Yes 6 E F 4 Ground No 6 Ground No G WIIA0814E H OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Diagnosis Procedure 4 BL INFOID:0000000001718517 J VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK 1.CHECK HORN OPERATION Check if horn sounds with horn switch. Does horn operate? Yes >> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay. No >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-39. Diagnosis Procedure 5 K L INFOID:0000000001718518 M VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK 1.CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION N Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch. Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON? Yes >> Headlamp alarm is OK. No >> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-5 or LT-25. Diagnosis Procedure 6 O INFOID:0000000001718519 P DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK 1.CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch. Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch? Yes >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. No >> Refer to BL-16. Revision: August 2007 BL-91 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718520 LIIA2465E 1. Sliding door switch LH B46 RH B135 2. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 3. Front pillar LH 4. Sliding door open/close switch LH 5. Automatic door main switch R10 6. Sliding door open/close switch RH 7. Sliding door open/close switch LH B58 RH B140 8. Sliding door control unit LH B60, B61, B501 (left rear body) RH B143, B144, B401 (right rear body) 9. Sliding door motor assembly LH B59 (left rear body) RH B145 (right rear body) 10. Remote keyless entry receiver M120 11. Front pillar RH (view with instrument panel removed) System Description INFOID:0000000001718521 • It is possible to automatically open/close the sliding doors with automatic main door switch, keyfob, or sliding door open/close switch. • It is possible to switch the sliding doors between auto and manual operation by switching the automatic main door switch ON/OFF. OPERATION DESCRIPTION Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the automatic door main switch is pressed, sliding door control unit terminal 15 receives the signal. • The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage. • For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13. • Door lock status is checked through terminal 3. If the door is locked, the sliding door control unit will unlock the door through terminal 30. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit. • When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate the release actuator and unlatches the door lock. Revision: August 2007 BL-92 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder (built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF. • The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker. Remote Keyless Entry Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, sliding door control unit terminal 7 receives the signal. • The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage. • For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13. • Door lock status is checked through terminal 3, if the door is locked, the sliding door control unit will unlock the door through terminal 30. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit. • When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate the release actuator and unlatches the door lock. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder (built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF. • The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker. A B C D E F G H Sliding Door Open/Close Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the sliding door open/close switch is pressed, sliding door control unit terminal 2 receives the signal. • The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through ter- BL minal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage. • For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are J met, including automatic door main switch in the ON position, doors in the unlock position and the child lock switch in the OFF position, it sends the unlock signal to the sliding door latch control unit. • When the sliding door latch control unit receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 10 to operate K the release actuator and unlatches the door lock. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this L time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder (built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF. M • The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker. Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the automatic door main switch is pressed, the sliding door control unit terminal 15 receives the signal. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it operates the sliding door motor. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control unit detects the signal through terminal 5. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6. • When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position. • The siding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains unlocked. Revision: August 2007 BL-93 2008 Quest N O P AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, the sliding door control unit terminal 7 receives the signal. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it operates the sliding door motor. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control unit detects the signal through terminal 5. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6. • When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position. • The sliding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains unlocked. Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) Power Assist Function • When the sliding door is pushed or pulled from any position, operations switch to the auto open/close function. • The automatic door main switch must be in the ON position. Sliding Door Power Assist Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • For automatic sliding door LH, fuel lid door status is checked through sliding door control unit terminal 13. • The sliding door control unit checks the automatic transaxle selector lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 7 and battery voltage. • When the sliding door control unit detects motion through terminals 4 and 17, if the auto sliding door operating enable conditions are met, it applies power to terminals 33 and 34 to operate the door in the open direction. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 33 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder (built into the sliding door motor assembly), and the sliding door control unit switches the sliding door motor OFF and controls the magnetic clutch ON → half clutch → OFF. • The sliding door is mechanically held in the fully open position by the checker. Sliding Door Power Assist Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the handle is pulled or the door is moved in the closed direction, sliding door control unit initiates the power assist close operation. • The sliding door control unit supplies power from terminal 36 and supplies power from terminal 34 to the magnetic clutch to operate the sliding door motor and slide the sliding door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the sliding door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch closes and the sliding door control unit detects the signal through terminal 5. • When the sliding door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the sliding door motor and sends the latch command through terminal 26 to the sliding door latch control unit terminal 6. • When the sliding door auto closure operates the cinch latch motor and the full-latch switch detects this, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal and reverses the latch motor to the neutral position. • The siding door auto closure operation ends when the door is fully closed. The sliding door remains unlocked. Reverse Function • During auto open/close operation, if automatic door main switch, keyfob button or sliding door open/close switch is pressed, the sliding door reverses direction. A chime will sound to announce the reversal. Anti-Pinch Function • During auto open/close operation, if pinching of an object is detected, the sliding door reverses direction to prevent pinching by moving to the full open or close position. Intermittent Clutch Control Function • During automatic operation, if the door is stopped midway, for example due to the automatic door main switch being switched to OFF or a system error, the clutch is intermittently turned ON → OFF to prevent sudRevision: August 2007 BL-94 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > den opening or closing. Intermittent clutch control ends after 6 seconds or when no door motion is detected. If the vehicle is on level ground, intermittent clutch control is executed for 1/2 second. A Precautions • Check and inspect operation of the remote control auto sliding door system on level ground. B Auto Sliding Door Operation Enable Conditions Automatic door main switch or remote keyless entry Operation Fully closed → open Operating direction Main switch Sliding door open/close switch Fully open → closed Fully closed → open Fully open → closed — Fully closed → open C Fully open → closed D ON Automatic transmission selector lever in P position and vehicle speed signal is less than 2 km/h Vehicle stop condition Power assist — Automatic transmission selector lever in P position and vehicle speed signal is less than 2 km/h — Automatic transmission selector lever in P position and vehicle speed signal is less than 2 km/h E — F Unlock (if door is fully closed) Door lock knob state — Battery voltage Approx. 11V or more — About 9V min. (operates with warning chime for low voltage of 9 - 11V) Control When Handle Open/Closed When Operating Enable Conditions Not Yet Met Items Operation condition G H Not met case Control Main switch ON OFF Manual mode (Power operation is available with automatic door main switch and remote keyless entry) A/T selector lever P position P position Other Power close operation J 9 - 6V Stopped while constrained (clutch is engaged and warning chime sounds) K Voltage drop 9V or more 6 - 0V Manual mode Control When Operating Enable Conditions No Longer Met Description BL L Operation Condition Main switch turned OFF during power open or close Warning chime active and clutch intermittent mode → Shift to manual mode (Recovery to power mode when main switch turned ON or door fully closed) → Shift to manual mode A/T selector lever P position Warning chime active continuously (0.66 second dings) and one-way operation continues if closing Warning chime active continuously (0.33 second beep followed by 0.33 second pause) and one-way operation continues if opening. Warning chime remains on after completing open function. Stop continued Voltage drop 11 - 9V One-way operation continued (equivalent to the case of starting voltage ← 11V for handle operation with warning chime active) Normal operation Revision: August 2007 BL-95 M N O P 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Description Operation Condition Voltage drop 9 - micro reset V Motor stopped (clutch ON) → stop continued while still constrained → (Switching the main switch OFF shifts operation to intermittent mode.) → Shift to manual mode unless voltages returns to >9 V within 5 seconds Voltage drop below micro reset V (Clutch hold not possible voltage) • Stop continued while still constrained (Clutch ON circuit) Clutch is released when micro reset occurs • The clutch force is weak, so there is slipping on hills, etc. → Shift to manual mode Warning Chime Active Conditions The warning chime uses two types of audio warnings, a friendly chime and a warning chime. The friendly chime consists of dings lasting 0.66 seconds each immediately followed by the next ding. The warning chime consists of beeps lasting 0.33 seconds with a pause of 0.33 seconds between each beep. Operation status Operation or conditions When reverse operation starts When reverse operation detected During power close When vehicle not in P position During power open or close Obstacle is detected During power open When vehicle not in P position or vehicle is moving at greater than 2 km/h Warning chime pattern Friendly chime 1.33 seconds, 2 dings Friendly chime Continuous Warning chime 2 seconds, 3 beeps Warning chime Continuous until vehicle is shifted to P position Reverse Conditions Type Control Automatic door main switch, remote keyless entry or sliding door open/close switch operation Both open/close directions Detection method Operation speed and motor current change direction Non-reversed area • Between full open and approx. 45 mm (near full-open lock) • Closure operation area Number of times reverse allowed A maximum of one obstacle is allowed during an open or close operation. If a second obstacle is detected, the door will enter manual mode. Operation Chart Revision: August 2007 BL-96 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Open operation from fully closed A B C D E F G H BL LIIA0748E • Close operation from fully open J K L M N LIIA1628E Initialization Mode Initialization mode is used to set the default values of door full open position and normal motor current. It is necessary to complete initialization and reset the default settings under any of the following circumstances: • Sliding door control unit is replaced. • Sliding door motor is replaced. • Sliding door is adjusted. • Sliding door panel is replaced or repaired. • Body panel near sliding door is replaced or repaired. • Any sliding door roller is replaced or adjusted. • Any sliding door striker is replaced or adjusted. Revision: August 2007 BL-97 2008 Quest O P AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Any sliding door dovetail is replaced or adjusted. • Sliding door lock assembly is replaced. • Rear rail is replaced. • Sliding door weatherstrip is replaced. • Sliding door contact switch is replaced or adjusted. • When the battery is first connected, the sliding door control unit is automatically set to the initialization mode. The sliding door control unit may be manually set to initialization mode by performing the following procedure: SLIDING DOOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE NOTE: While in initialization mode, only the overhead sliding door open/close switches are enabled. Remote keyless entry, door pillar switch and power assist functions are disabled. Each of the power sliding doors must be initialized individually. The following procedure can be repeated for each power sliding door needing initialization. 1. Open the sliding door being initialized. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn the Automatic Door Main Switch OFF. LIIA2178E 4. Within 3 seconds after step 3, press the door pillar Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized 10 times within 10 seconds. LIIA2179E 5. 6. Within 3 seconds after step 4, turn ignition switch OFF then ON. • You should hear three sliding door warning chimes. • The three chimes indicate the sliding door control unit has entered initialization mode. • Normal door functions are disabled during initialization. Turn the Automatic Door Main Switch ON. LIIA2178E Revision: August 2007 BL-98 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Press and HOLD the overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized until the door completely closes and stops, then release the switch. A B C LIIA2178E D 8. Press and HOLD the same overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized again until the door completely opens and stops, then release the switch. 9. Press and HOLD the same overhead Sliding Door Open/Close Switch of the door being initialized again until the door completely closes and stops, then release the switch. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. The power sliding door initialization process is complete. The above procedure may be repeated for the other power sliding door (if equipped). E F SLIDING DOOR LATCH AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION • If the sliding door is ajar (with lock and striker engaged), the motor automatically retracts the door to fully close it. • During auto-close operation, if the exterior/interior handle is operated, the retraction mechanism is mechanically cancelled, and the door can open/close. G H SLIDING DOOR LATCH AUTO CLOSURE OPERATION DESCRIPTION • If the sliding door is ajar, sliding door latch control unit terminal 8 receives the signal, supplies power from terminal 3 to cinch latch motor terminals 1, grounds sliding door latch control unit terminal 9 from terminal 2, BL and rotates the cinch latch motor in the close direction. • When the motor rotates, the cable is retracted and the close lever rotated. • Pressed by the rotated close lever, the latch rotates and pulls in the door until it is fully latched. • When the sliding door is fully latched, sliding door latch control unit terminal 7 receives the signal, supplies J power from terminal 9 to cinch latch motor terminal 2, grounds sliding door control unit terminals 3 from terminal 1, and rotates the closure motor in the open direction. • Then, when the neutral switch is pressed and the signal is received by sliding door latch control unit terminal K 1, it stops the cinch latch motor and stops with the door fully closed. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-99 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718522 WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM WIWA1833E Revision: August 2007 BL-100 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1838E P Revision: August 2007 BL-101 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1839E Revision: August 2007 BL-102 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - S/CLOS - INFOID:0000000001718523 A WITH RH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O P WIWA1834E Revision: August 2007 BL-103 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1835E Revision: August 2007 BL-104 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1940E P Revision: August 2007 BL-105 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1836E Revision: August 2007 BL-106 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1837E P Revision: August 2007 BL-107 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH RH AND LH AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM WIWA1840E Revision: August 2007 BL-108 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1841E P Revision: August 2007 BL-109 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1842E Revision: August 2007 BL-110 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1843E P Revision: August 2007 BL-111 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1844E Revision: August 2007 BL-112 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1845E P Revision: August 2007 BL-113 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALKWA0206GB Revision: August 2007 BL-114 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1847E P Revision: August 2007 BL-115 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1848E Revision: August 2007 BL-116 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1849E P Revision: August 2007 BL-117 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Sliding Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718524 LIIA2445E Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Control Unit Terminal 1 2 3 4 Wire Color L/Y*1 *2 BR/W R/G Sliding door open/close switch Y/R*1 Sliding door lock/unlock actuator unlock output signal P/G *2 L*1 W/B*2 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Automatic door main switch ON 0 Automatic door main switch OFF 5 Sliding door open/close switch ON 0 Sliding door open/close switch OFF 5 Power door lock switch door unlock operation 0 → Battery voltage → 0 Other than above 0 Item Automatic door main switch ON/OFF switch Encoder pulse signal A INFOID:0000000001718525 Sliding door (motor active) PIIA1060E 5 O/B Half-latch switch Sliding door Fully open → half → fully closed PIIA2169E 6 7 G Ignition switch Y*1 Y/B*2 Power window serial link Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 When ignition switch is ON or power window timer operates PIIA2344E 8 11 12 LG/B*1 Y/G *2 R*1 G*2 Y/R Revision: August 2007 Warning chime ON 0 Warning chime OFF 5 Encoder power supply — 9 Battery power supply — Battery voltage Warning chime output signal BL-118 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color 13 LG/W*1 14 15 16 W/G*1 R/W*2 L/W*1 GR/W*2 L Item Fuel door interlock switch Condition A Fuel door closed 0 Fuel door open 5 OPEN 0 CLOSED 5 ON 0 OFF 5 UNLOCK position Battery voltage LOCK position while door is closing 0 Sliding door switch Automatic door main switch Child lockout switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) B C D E 17 Y*1 R/B*2 Encoder pulse signal B Sliding door (motor active) F PIIA1060E 18 22 23 G/Y G*1 B*2 B P position 0 Other than above 5 Encoder ground — — Ground — — A/T device (park position switch) G H BL 26 GR/L Closure motor CLOSE output signal Sliding door Fully open → half → fully closed J SIIA1480E 27 W 28 G/Y 30 G/Y*1 BR/R*2 Battery power supply Door unlock input Sliding door lock motor unlock signal — Battery voltage Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Unlock) 0 → Battery voltage Door lock (Neutral → Unlock) 0 → Battery voltage K L M 31 Y Closure motor RETURN output signal Sliding door Fully open → half → fully closed N SIIA1480E 32 B Ground 33 R Sliding door motor OPEN output signal Revision: August 2007 — — Sliding door auto OPEN operation (motor active) Battery voltage Other than above 0 BL-119 2008 Quest O P AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal 34 Wire Color Y Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Auto sliding door (Motor active) 0 Item Magnetic clutch power supply Auto sliding door (Motor active to stationary) PIIA1798E 36 37 B Y Sliding door motor CLOSE output signal Sliding door auto CLOSE operation (motor active) Battery voltage Other than above 0 — — Magnetic clutch ground *1: LH *2: RH Sliding Door Latch Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718526 LIIA2446E Terminal and Reference Value for Sliding Door Latch Control Unit Terminal Wire Color 1 G Item Neutral switch signal Condition INFOID:0000000001718527 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sliding door Fully open→ half → fully closed PIIA2170E 2 Y Cinch latch motor RETURN signal Sliding door Fully open→ half → fully closed SIIA1480E Revision: August 2007 BL-120 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) A B 3 G/B Cinch latch motor CLOSE output Latch Open (ON) → Closed (OFF) C SIIA1480E 5 SB Handle switch (open) signal Other than above 0 Handle operation 0 Other than above 5 D E 6 GR/L Cinch latch motor CLOSE signal Sliding door Fully open→ half → fully closed F SIIA1480E G H 7 LG Sliding door Fully open→ half → fully closed Full-latch switch signal BL PIIA2171E J 8 O/B Sliding door Fully open→ half → fully closed Half-latch switch signal K PIIA2169E L 9 L/B M Latch Close (OFF) → Open (ON) Cinch latch motor OPEN output SIIA1480E 10 R/W Latch release actuator output Other than above 0 Latch (Lock → Unlock) 0 → Momentarily above 0 Other than above 0 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718528 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Trouble Diagnosis Procedure 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001718529 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-92, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 BL-121 2008 Quest N O P AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Confirm system operation. 4. Perform self-diagnosis procedures. Refer to BL-122, "Self-Diagnosis Procedure". 5. Refer to diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-123, "Diagnosis Chart". 6. Inspection End. Self-Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718530 INPUT SIGNAL CHECK MODE Input signal check mode allows testing of switch input signal to the sliding door control unit. To activate input signal check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps: 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled). 3. Place A/T selector lever in P position. 4. Confirm fuel door closed (with LH sliding door). 5. Open sliding door RH or LH manually. 6. Have an assistant press and hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 7. While the assistant continues to hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start engine). 8. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds. 9. Release the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 10. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press and hold the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 11. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second. 12. Release the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 13. The input signal check mode is now initialized. The input signal check mode can test the following inputs. The back door warning chime will sound for approximately 0.5 seconds each time a switch signal input occurs. Use this test when one of these inputs is not responding during normal automatic sliding door operation. Switch signal Operation Refer to Automatic door main switch OFF → ON BL-125 Automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH OFF → ON BL-125 Sliding door open/close switch RH or LH OFF → ON BL-125 Sliding door switch RH or LH OFF (door closed) → ON (door open) BL-63 A/T device (park position switch) P position → other than P position SE-64 Fuel door interlock switch OFF (fuel door closed) → ON (fuel door open) BL-178 Sliding door lock/unlock signal LOCK → UNLOCK BL-129 Vehicle speed* Vehicle speed BL-48 Remote keyless entry signal Keyfob switch OFF → ON BL-66 Door lock/unlock signal LOCK → UNLOCK BL-63 *Back door warning chime should sound as soon as vehicle moves. Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode. OPERATING CHECK MODE Operating check mode allows self-diagnosis of the automatic sliding door system. To activate operating check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps: 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled). 3. Place A/T selector lever in P position. 4. Open sliding door RH or LH manually. 5. Have an assistant press and hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. Revision: August 2007 BL-122 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. While the assistant continues to hold the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start engine). 7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds. 8. Release the sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH 5 times in rapid succession. 10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second. 11. Release the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH. 12. Immediately close the sliding door RH or LH manually. 13. Turn automatic door main switch ON. 14. Open and close the back door with the automatic door main sliding door open/close switch RH or LH to activate operating check mode. Self-diagnosis results are indicated by the back door warning chime. Back door warning chime order A B C D E Back door warning chime length Start self-diagnosis 1.5 seconds F OK NG 1. Operating conditions diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 2. Sliding door encoder diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 3. Sliding door clutch diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 4. Sliding door motor diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds Restart self-diagnosis G H 1.5 seconds BL Item NG Result Refer to 1. Operating conditions diagnosis result One of the following operating conditions no longer met: ignition switch ON, automatic door main switch ON, A/T selector lever in P position — 2. Sliding door encoder diagnosis result Sensor diagnosis/short, pulse signal, pulse signal direction BL-127 3. Sliding door clutch diagnosis result Sliding door clutch does not operate BL-127 4. Sliding door motor diagnosis result Sliding door motor does not operate (no operating current) BL-126 5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis result Cinch latch motor does not operate (no operating current) BL-135 J K L M Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode. Diagnosis Chart INFOID:0000000001718531 Symptom Suspect systems Automatic operations are not executed from the sliding door fully closed or fully open position. (Auto open/close operations from a position midway through automatic operation, power assist, and auto closure operate normally.) Revision: August 2007 Latch release actuator system inspection BL-123 Refer to N O BL-130 P 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Suspect systems Refer to Automatic door main switch system inspection BL-125 Sliding door open/close switch system inspection BL-125 Magnetic clutch line check BL-127 Auto sliding door power supply and ground circuit system inspection. BL-124 Stops midway through sliding door open/close operations, power assist does not operate. Encoder system inspection BL-127 Warning chime does not sound. Warning chime system inspection BL-131 During auto closing operations, if obstruction is detected, the door does not operate in reverse. Encoder system inspection BL-127 During cinching operations, the door does not operate in reverse if the sliding door handle is operated. Handle switch system BL-129 Child lockout system does not operate. Child lockout switch system inspection BL-130 When the keyfob is operated, the sliding door does not operate automatically. Remote keyless entry system inspection BL-48 Half-latch switch system BL-132 Cinch latch motor system BL-135 Handle switch system BL-129 Automatic operations are not carried out together with open/close operations. (Manual operations are normal.) Auto closure does not operate. Contact switch The sliding door does not open. (Closure motor rotation is not reversed.) Auto closure operation works, but the sliding door is not fully closed. — Neutral switch system BL-134 Full-latch switch BL-133 Handle switch system BL-129 Door switch BL-37 Full-latch switch system BL-133 Handle switch system BL-129 Cinch latch motor system BL-135 Sliding door latch assembly mechanism damaged or worn. BL-130 Auto Sliding Door Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718532 1.AUTO SLIDING DOOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sliding door control unit. Check voltage between sliding door control unit connectors B60, B61 (LH) or B143, B144 (RH) terminals 12, 27 and ground. 12 - Ground 27 - Ground : Approx. battery voltage : Approx. battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the sliding door control unit power supply circuit. LIIA0751E 2.AUTO SLIDING DOOR GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 BL-124 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between sliding door control unit connectors B60, B61 (LH) or B143, B144 (RH) terminals 23, 32 and ground. 23 - Ground 32 - Ground A : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C WIIA0816E D Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718533 1.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION E Check automatic door main switch using switch operation. OK or NG OK >> Automatic door main switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. While operating the automatic door main switch, check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 1 and ground. Terminal (+) (-) 1 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Measuring condition Automatic door main switch H ON 0 OFF 5 OK or NG OK >> Automatic door main switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. BL J LIIA0753E K 3.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect automatic door main switch and sliding door control unit. Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector R10 terminals 3 (LH) or 4 (RH) and sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 15. 3 - 15 4 - 15 L M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> Replace automatic door main switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O LIIA0754E Sliding Door Open/Close Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718534 P 1.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION Check sliding door open/close switch using switch operation. OK or NG OK >> Sliding door open/close switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 BL-125 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. While operating the sliding door open/close switch, check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 2 and ground. Terminal (+) (-) 2 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Measuring condition Sliding door open/close switch ON 0 OFF 5 OK or NG OK >> Sliding door open/close switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA0755E 3.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect sliding door open/close switch and sliding door control unit. Check continuity between sliding door open/close switch connector B58 (LH) or B140 (RH) terminal 1 and sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 2. 1-2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1635E 4.SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between sliding door open/close switch connector B58 (LH) or B140 (RH) terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the sliding door open/close switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0758E Sliding Door Motor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718535 1.SLIDING DOOR MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Operate the sliding door fully open → fully closed and check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) terminals 33, 36 and ground. Terminal (+) 33 36 (-) Ground Measuring condition Fully open → half → fully closed Voltage (V) (Approx.) 0 0 → Battery voltage → 0 OK or NG LIIA0761E Revision: August 2007 BL-126 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace sliding door control unit. A 2.SLIDING DOOR MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION Connect battery power to terminals 33 and 36 on the sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) and check motor operation. 33 (+) - 36 (-) 33 (-) - 36 (+) B C : It operates. : It operates. (Reverse rotation) OK or NG OK >> Motor is OK. NG >> Replace the sliding door motor. Refer to BL-171. D WIIA0379E Magnetic Clutch Line Check INFOID:0000000001718536 1.MAGNETIC CLUTCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. E F Turn ignition switch OFF. Operate the sliding door and check voltage waveform between sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) terminal 34 and ground using an oscilloscope. G H BL 34 - Ground LIIA0762E J PIIA1798E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace sliding door control unit. K 2.MAGNETIC CLUTCH GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B69 (LH) or B141 (RH) terminal 37 and ground. 37 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> Clutch circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA0763E Sliding Door Encoder System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718537 1.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. P Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 BL-127 O 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 11 and ground. 11 - Ground : Approx. 9V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0764E 2.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 22 and ground. 22 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace sliding door control unit. LIIA0765E 3.ENCODER (POSITION) SIGNAL INSPECTION Operate the sliding door and check voltage waveform between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminals 4, 17 and ground using an oscilloscope. 4 - Ground 17 - Ground LIIA0766E OCC3383D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace sliding door encoder. 4.SLIDING DOOR ENCODER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect sliding door control unit and sliding door motor assembly. Check continuity between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) (A) terminals 4, 11, 17, 22 and sliding door motor assembly connector B59 (LH) or B145 (RH) (B) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4. Sliding Door RH 4-3 11 - 1 17 - 2 22 - 4 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Sliding Door LH 4-2 11 - 1 17 - 3 22 - 4 Revision: August 2007 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. BL-128 WIIA0817E 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Sliding door encoder circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. A Sliding Door Remote Control Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718538 B 1.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION Check sliding door remote control switch operation. OK or NG OK >> Sliding door remote control switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. C D 2.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Close the sliding door. While operating the sliding door remote control switch, check voltage between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 5 and ground. Terminal (+) 5 (-) Ground Measuring condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sliding door handle open direction operation 0 Other than above 5 OK or NG OK >> Sliding door remote control switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. E F G H LIIA0769E BL 3.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. J Disconnect sliding door remote control switch and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 1 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 5. 1-5 K : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. L M LIIA0770E 4.SLIDING DOOR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION 1. 2. N Close the sliding door. Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground O : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the sliding door remote control switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. P LIIA0771E Revision: August 2007 BL-129 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Child Lockout Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718539 1.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Set child lockout switch in LOCK position and close door. While operating the sliding door in the open direction, check voltage between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 16 and ground. Terminal (+) (-) 16 Ground Measuring condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sliding door handle in the open direction 0 OK or NG OK >> Switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0773E 2.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Disconnect sliding door remote control switch and sliding door control unit. Close the sliding door. Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 16. 2 - 16 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0774E 3.CHILD LOCKOUT SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between sliding door remote control switch connector D207 (LH) or D307 (RH) terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the sliding door remote control switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0771E Latch Release Actuator System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718540 1.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 BL-130 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. While opening the sliding door, check voltage between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 10 and ground. Terminals (+) (-) 10 Ground Measuring condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Latch release actuator operation (opening door) 0 → Momentarily above 0 Other than above 0 A B C LIIA0776E OK or NG OK >> Latch release actuator is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. D 2.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. E Disconnect latch release actuator and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between latch release actuator connector D206 (LH) or D306 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 10. 2 - 10 F : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H WIIA0380E 3.LATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR GROUND INSPECTION 1. 2. BL Close the sliding door. Check continuity between latch release actuator connector D206 (LH) or D306 (RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground J : Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> Replace the latch release actuator. NG >> Repair or replace harness. L LIIA1637E Warning Chime System Inspection 1.WARNING CHIME OUTPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. N Turn ignition switch OFF. While opening or closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door control unit connector B60 (LH) or B143 (RH) terminal 8 and ground using an oscilloscope as you press the sliding door open/close switch to reverse door direction. O P LIIA1911E Revision: August 2007 M INFOID:0000000001718541 BL-131 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8 - Ground LIIA2490E OK or NG OK >> Warning chime system is OK. NG >> Replace sliding door control unit. Half-Latch Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718542 1.HALF-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 8 and ground using an oscilloscope. 8 - Ground LIIA0781E PIIA2169E OK or NG OK >> Half-latch switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.HALF-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 2 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 8. 2-8 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1638E 3.HALF-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION 1. Close the sliding door. Revision: August 2007 BL-132 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground A : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace the cinch latch switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C LIIA0783E D Full-Latch Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718543 1.FULL-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. While fully closing and opening the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 7 and ground using an oscilloscope. F G H 7 - Ground LIIA0785E BL PIIA2171E OK or NG OK >> Full-latch switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. J 2.FULL-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. K Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 3 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 7. 3-7 L : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M N LIIA0786E 3.FULL-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION 1. O Close the sliding door. P Revision: August 2007 BL-133 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the cinch latch switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0783E Neutral Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718544 1.NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 1 and ground using an oscilloscope. 1 - Ground LIIA1639E PIIA2170E OK or NG OK >> Neutral switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.NEUTRAL SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 4 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminal 1. 4-1 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0789E 3.NEUTRAL SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION 1. Close the sliding door. Revision: August 2007 BL-134 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between cinch latch switch connector D202 (LH) or D302 (RH) terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground A : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace the cinch latch switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C LIIA0783E D Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718545 1.CINCH LATCH MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminals 3, 9 and ground using an oscilloscope. F G H 3 - Ground 9 - Ground WIIA0818E BL SIIA1480E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace the sliding door latch control unit. J 2.CINCH LATCH MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. K Disconnect cinch latch switch and sliding door latch control unit. Check continuity between cinch latch motor connector D203 (LH) or D303 (RH) terminals 1, 2 and sliding door latch control unit connector D204 (LH) or D304 (RH) terminals 3, 9. 1-3 2-9 L : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA0791E 3.CINCH LATCH MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION O P Revision: August 2007 BL-135 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connect battery power to terminals 1 and 2 on the cinch latch motor and check motor operation. 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (-) - 2 (+) : It operates. : It operates. (Reverse rotation) OK or NG OK >> Motor is OK. NG >> Replace the cinch latch motor. LIIA1913E Revision: August 2007 BL-136 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718546 B C D E F G H LIIA2466E J 1. Back door handle switch D510 2. Back door latch D511 3. Pinch strip LH D517 4. Pinch strip RH D505 5. Backdoor warning chime D514 6. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 7. Front pillar LH 8. Automatic door main switch R10 9. Back door switch 10. Back door close switch B63 11. Back door control unit B55 K 12. Remote keyless entry receiver M120 (view with instrument panel removed) 13. Front pillar RH L System Description INFOID:0000000001718547 NOTE: The automatic back door system must be initialized by fully closing the back door anytime the battery or the back door control unit has been disconnected. The automatic back door system consists of a one piece unit that combines the back door control unit along with the back door motor, back door clutch and the back door encoder. The back door latch contains a lock function that can control the two functions of automatic back door latch closure and electrical opener with a single motor when the back door is closed to the halfway state. • Back door auto closure When the back door is closed to the half-way state (half-latch) position, the motor drives to rotate the latch lever and pull it in from half latched to full latched and automatically close the door. • Power back door With the back door closed, press the automatic door main switch or press the remote keyless entry button, or pull the back door handle with the back door unlocked, the back door latch motor drives the open the locking plate and releases the latch. The back door motor then raises the door to the full open position. With the back door open, press the automatic door main switch, keyfob button or the back door close switch, the back door motor closes the door to the half-latch state. The back door latch motor then drives the latch to the full close position. On an open or close signal, the hazard lamps will flash 3 times and the warning chime will sound 3 dings lasting a total of 2 seconds. Revision: August 2007 BL BL-137 2008 Quest M N O P AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OPERATION DESCRIPTION Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the automatic door main switch is pressed, back door control unit terminal 23 receives the signal. • The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch. • When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release actuator and releases the door lock. • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder, and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then turned OFF. • The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays. Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, back door control unit terminal 21 receives the signal. • The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch. • When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release actuator and releases the door lock. • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder, and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then turned OFF. • The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays. Back Door Handle Switch Operation (Fully Closed → Fully Open Operation) • When the back door is unlocked and the back door handle is pulled, back door control unit terminal 26 receives the signal. • The back door control unit checks the automatic transaxle select lever (A/T device) position through terminal 18, vehicle speed through terminal 21 and battery voltage and automatic door main switch position through terminal 13. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime, sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps and sends the unlock signal to the back door latch. • When the back door latch receives the signal, it supplies voltage from terminal 12 to operate the release actuator and releases the door lock. • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and moves the back door in the open direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door is opened to the full-open position, the full-open position is detected by the encoder, and the back door control unit switches the back door motor OFF and the magnetic clutch is pulsed and then turned OFF. • The back door is held in the fully open position by the gas stays. Automatic Door Main Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the automatic door main switch is pressed, the back door control unit terminal 23 receives the signal. • The back door control units checks battery voltage. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps. Revision: August 2007 BL-138 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to the back door control unit terminal 22. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic clutch. • When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14 receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5. • When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed. A B C D Remote Keyless Entry Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the keyfob button is pressed for at least 0.5 seconds, the back door control unit terminal 21 receives the signal. • The back door control units checks battery voltage. E • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps. • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the F back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to G the back door control unit terminal 22. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic clutch. • When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14 H receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5. • When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed. BL Back Door Close Switch Operation (Fully Open → Fully Closed Operation) • When the back door close switch is pressed with the automatic main door switch ON, the back door control unit terminal 8 receives the signal. • The back door control units checks battery voltage. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, if the auto back door operating enable conditions are met, it sends a signal through terminal 6 and grounds terminal 9 to sound the warning chime and sends a signal to the BCM through terminal 4 to flash the hazard lamps. • The back door control unit supplies power to the magnetic clutch and the back door motor and move the back door in the close direction. (At this time, it also executes speed control, input reverse, and overload reverse control.) • When the back door reaches the half-latch state, the half-latch switch detects this and the signal is sent to the back door control unit terminal 22. • When the back door control unit receives the signal, it switches OFF the back door motor and the magnetic clutch. • When the cinch latch motor operates and the close switch detects this, the back door control unit terminal 14 receives the signal from back door latch terminal 5. • When the back door latch operates and full close is detected through terminal 14 of the back door control unit, the back door auto closure operation ends and the door is fully closed. Reverse Function The door will reverse direction during power open or close operation if the automatic door main switch, keyfob or back door close switch is operated. A chime will sound to announce the reversal. Anti-Pinch Function • During auto operation, if an object is detected in the door's path, a warning chime sounds and the back door operates in the reverse direction to prevent pinching. • During auto close operation, if an object is detected by the pinch strips in the door's path, a warning chime sounds and the back door operates in the open direction until it is fully open. Gas Stay Check • During each power open operation, the back door control unit monitors motor current draw to determine if the gas stays are functioning properly. Revision: August 2007 BL-139 2008 Quest J K L M N O P AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If a malfunction of the gas stays is detected, the back door control unit will close the back door while sounding the warning chime. The back door cannot be opened using the switches until the gas malfunction is repaired. Warning Functions • The hazard warning lamps flash and a warning chime is sounded according to the back door operating state, operations, and conditions. Auto Back Door Operation Enable Conditions Automatic door main switch Operation Operating direction Fully closed → open Remote keyless entry Fully open → closed Fully closed → open Back door handle switch Fully open → closed Main switch Fully closed → open Back door close switch Fully closed → open Fully open → closed Fully open → closed ON A/T selector lever in P position and vehicle speed less than 2 km/h Vehicle stop condition A/T selector lever in P position and vehicle speed less than 2 km/h — Battery voltage A/T selector lever in P position and vehicle speed less than 2 km/h — — — Approx. 11V (operates with warning chime for low voltage of 9 - 11V) Approx. 11V or more Control When Handle Pulled When Operating Enable Conditions Not Yet Met Items Operation condition Not met case Control Main switch ON OFF Manual mode (after finishing open/close operation if active) A/T selector lever P position P position Other than P position Power close operation only 11 > V > 9 Power operation will continue but will not begin from full close position 9 > V > reset voltage Power operation will stop and warning chime will sound Reset voltage > V No power function available Error No operation Voltage drop 11V or more Handle switch Normal Control When Operating Enable Conditions No Longer Met Description Operation Full open stop Main switch turned OFF Warning chime active → Shift to manual mode after full open or close operation is complete (Recovery to power mode when main switch turned ON or door fully closed) → Shift to manual mode A/T selector lever P position Warning chime active and one-way operation continuous (Warning chime inactive and door fully open or fully closed or operating conditions recovered) Stop continued Voltage drop 11 - 9V One-way operation continued (equivalent to the case of starting voltage ← 11V for handle operation with warning chime active) Not allowed Voltage drop 6 - 4V (Microcomputer reset voltage - clutch hold voltage) • Motor stopped • Control not possible because microcomputer being reset Control not possible because microcomputer being reset Revision: August 2007 BL-140 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Warning Chime Active Conditions The warning chime uses two types of audio warnings, a friendly chime and a warning chime. The friendly chime consists of dings lasting 0.66 seconds each immediately followed by the next ding. The warning chime consists of beeps lasting 0.33 seconds with a pause of 0.33 seconds between each beep. Operation status Operation or conditions A B Warning chime pattern Automatic door main switch operation When auto operation starts Friendly chime 2 seconds, 3 dings C When reverse request is detected from automatic door main switch, remote keyless entry or back door close switch Friendly chime 1.3 seconds, 2 dings D When obstacle is detected Warning chime 2 seconds, 3 beeps When operating with handle Warning chime 2 seconds, 3 beeps Back door handle switch operation Back door close switch operation When reverse operation starts Operating at low voltage Back door close operation Friendly chime Continuous dings Back door open operation Warning chime Continuous beeps A/T selector lever not in P position E F G Reverse Conditions Type Operation covered Detection method H Overload reverse Both directions Operation speed and motor current change direction BL Pinch strips during back door close operation Non-reversed area • For about 0.5 seconds immediately after drive motor operation starts • Between full open and approx. 7° from full open • Closure operation area Number of times reverse allowed One reversal is allowed (if a second obstacle is detected during a power open or close operation, the door reverts to manual mode). J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-141 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718548 WIWA1850E Revision: August 2007 BL-142 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - B/CLOS - INFOID:0000000001718549 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1851E Revision: August 2007 BL-143 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1947E Revision: August 2007 BL-144 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1852E P Revision: August 2007 BL-145 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1853E Revision: August 2007 BL-146 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIWA1854E P Revision: August 2007 BL-147 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Back Door Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718550 LIIA2444E Terminal and Reference Value for Back Door Control Unit Terminal Wire Color 1 B 2 B 3 Y/R INFOID:0000000001718551 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground — — Ground — — Battery power supply — Battery voltage Item Pulse must be >50ms but less than 250ms 4 GR Hazard lamp output Request to flash hazards PIIA3278E 5 LG/W Pinch strip ground 6 P/L 7 G 8 GR/B Back door close switch 9 GR 10 Warning chime output Ignition switch — — Back door motor active Battery voltage Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 Back door close switch ON 0 Back door close switch OFF Battery voltage Warning chime ground — — W Battery power — Battery voltage 11 L/B Cinch latch motor CLOSE output Back door close operation Battery voltage 12 L/W Cinch latch motor RETURN output Back door open operation Battery voltage 13 L/Y Automatic door main switch ON/OFF switch Automatic door main switch ON 0 Automatic door main switch OFF 9 14 P Close switch signal While fully opening back door WIIA1047E Revision: August 2007 BL-148 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) A B 15 O/B Open switch signal While fully closing back door C PIIA2171E A/T device (park position switch) 18 G/Y 19 BR/W Pinch strip RH 20 L/Y Pinch strip LH P or N position (Ignition is ON) 0 Other than above (Ignition is ON) 9 Detecting obstruction 0 Other than above 4 Detecting obstruction 0 Other than above 4 D E F 21 Y Power window serial link G — H PIIA2344E BL 22 BR Half-latch switch Back door close operation J PIIA2169E ON 0 OFF Battery voltage Sliding door RH warning chime request Sliding door active 0 Other than above 5 Sliding door LH warning chime request Sliding door active 0 Other than above 5 Back door handle switch (open) 0 Back door handle switch (at rest) Battery voltage 23 G/R Automatic door main switch 24 Y/G 25 LG/B 26 V/W Back door handle switch signal Terminal and Reference Value for BCM K L M N INFOID:0000000001718552 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". O Trouble Diagnosis Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001718553 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-137, "System Description". Confirm system operation. Perform self-diagnosis procedures. Refer to BL-150, "Self-Diagnosis Procedure". Refer to diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-151, "Diagnosis Chart". Inspection End. Revision: August 2007 BL-149 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001718554 INPUT SIGNAL CHECK MODE Input signal check mode allows testing of switch input signal to the back door control unit. To activate input signal check mode on the automatic sliding door, perform the following steps: 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled). 3. Place A/T selector lever in P position. 4. Using the inside emergency release lever, open the back door. 5. Have an assistant press and hold the back door close switch. 6. While the assistant continues to hold the back door close switch, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start engine). 7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds. 8. Release the back door close switch RH or LH. 9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press and hold the automatic door main back door open/close switch. 10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second. 11. Release the automatic door main back door open/close switch. 12. The input signal check mode is now initialized. The input signal check mode can test the following inputs. The back door warning chime will sound for approximately 0.5 seconds each time a switch signal input occurs. Use this test when one of these inputs is not responding during normal automatic sliding door operation. Switch signal Operation Refer to Automatic door main switch OFF → ON BL-152 Automatic door main back door open/close switch OFF → ON BL-152 Back door close switch OFF → ON BL-154 Back door handle switch OFF → ON BL-159 A/T device (park position switch) P position → other than P position SE-64 Vehicle speed* Vehicle speed Remote keyless entry signal Keyfob switch OFF → ON BL-66 Door lock/unlock signal LOCK → UNLOCK BL-40 Pinch strip LH signal OFF → ON BL-155 Pinch strip RH signal OFF → ON BL-155 — *Back door warning chime should sound as soon as vehicle moves. Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode. OPERATING CHECK MODE Operating check mode allows self-diagnosis of the automatic back door system. To activate operating check mode on the automatic back door, perform the following steps: 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn automatic door main switch OFF (system cancelled). 3. Place A/T selector lever in P position. 4. Using the inside emergency release lever, open the back door. 5. Have an assistant press and hold the back door close switch. 6. While the assistant continues to hold the back door close switch, turn ignition switch ON (DO NOT start engine). 7. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 0.5 seconds. 8. Release the back door close switch. 9. Within 8 seconds of the back door warning chime sounding, press the automatic door main back door open/close switch 5 times in rapid succession. Revision: August 2007 BL-150 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. After approximately 5 seconds, the back door warning chime will sound for 1 second. 11. Release the automatic door main back door open/close switch. 12. Immediately close the back door manually. 13. Turn automatic door main switch ON. 14. Open and close the back door with the automatic door main back door open/close switch to activate operating check mode. Self-diagnosis results are indicated by the back door warning chime. Back door warning chime order A B C Back door warning chime length Start self-diagnosis 1.5 seconds D OK NG 1. Operating conditions diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 2. Back door encoder diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 3. Back door clutch diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 4. Back door motor diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds Restart self-diagnosis E F 1.5 seconds G Item NG Result Refer to 1. Operating conditions diagnosis result One of the following operating conditions no longer met: ignition switch ON, automatic door main switch ON, A/T selector lever in P position — 2. Back door encoder diagnosis result Sensor diagnosis/short, pulse signal, pulse signal direction BL-152 3. Back door clutch diagnosis result Back door clutch does not operate BL-156 4. Back door motor diagnosis result Back door motor does not operate (no operating current) BL-152 5. Cinch latch motor diagnosis result Cinch latch motor does not operate (no operating current) BL-160 H BL J K Turn ignition switch OFF to end input signal check mode. Diagnosis Chart INFOID:0000000001718555 Symptom Automatic operations are not executed from the back door fully closed or fully open position. (Auto closure operates normally.) Suspect systems Refer to Automatic door main switch system inspection BL-152 A/T device (park position switch) BL-155 Automatic door main switch system inspection BL-152 Back door close switch system inspection BL-154 Back door control unit power supply and ground circuit system inspection. BL-152 The auto closure function does not operate. (Stops at the halfway position for auto closing operations.) Pinch strip system inspection BL-155 During auto closing operations, if obstruction is detected, the door does not operate in reverse. Back door motor assembly During close or cinch operations, the door does not operate in reverse if the back door handle is operated. Handle switch system Revision: August 2007 BL-151 M — Pinch strip system inspection Automatic operations are not carried out together with open/close operations. (Manual operations are normal.) L N O — BL-159 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Suspect systems Refer to Remote keyless entry system inspection BL-48 Power window serial link BL-149 Pinch strip system inspection BL-155 Half-latch switch system BL-156 Cinch latch motor system BL-160 Handle switch system BL-159 The back door does not open. (Closure motor rotation is not reversed.) Open switch system BL-157 Handle switch system BL-159 Warning chime does not sound. Back door warning chime system BL-156 Close switch system BL-158 Handle switch system BL-159 Cinch latch motor system BL-160 When the keyfob is operated, the back door does not operate automatically. Auto closure does not operate. Auto closure operation works, but the back door is not fully closed. Back door latch assembly mechanism damaged or worn. Back Door Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection — INFOID:0000000001718556 1.BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect back door control unit. Check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 3, 10 and ground. 3 - Ground 10 - Ground : Approx. battery voltage : Approx. battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0567E 2.BACK DOOR CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check continuity between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 1, 2 and ground. 1 - Ground 2 - Ground : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0801E Automatic Door Main Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718557 1.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION Check automatic door main switch using switch operation. OK or NG OK >> Automatic door main switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 BL-152 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between automatic door main switch connector R10 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground B : Approx. battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D LIIA0857E 3.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION E While operating the automatic door main switch, check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 23 and ground. F Terminals (+) (-) 23 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Measuring condition Automatic door main switch ON 0 OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 4. G H LIIA0802E BL 4.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect automatic door main switch and back door control unit. Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector (B) R10 terminal 2 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 23. 2 - 23 3. J K : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector (B) R10 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground L : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M WIIA0786E N 5.AUTOMATIC DOOR MAIN SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between automatic door main switch connector terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground O : Continuity should exist. P OK or NG OK >> Replace the automatic door main switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0804E Revision: August 2007 BL-153 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Back Door Close Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718558 1.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH FUNCTION INSPECTION Check back door close switch using switch operation. OK or NG OK >> Back door close switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. While operating the back door close switch, check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 8 and ground. Terminals (+) (-) 8 Ground Position of back door close switch Momentary close position Voltage (V) (Approx.) ON 0 OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA0805E 3.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect back door close switch and back door control unit. Check continuity between back door close switch connector (B) B63 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 8. 1-8 : Continuity should exist. WIIA0787E 3. Check continuity between back door close switch connector (B) B63 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0787E 4.BACK DOOR CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 BL-154 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between back door close switch connector B63 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground A : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace the back door close switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C LIIA0807E D Pinch Strip System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718559 1.PINCH STRIP SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. While operating the pinch strip, check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 19 (RH), 20 (LH) and ground. Terminals (+) (-) 19 20 Ground Measuring condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pinch strip operation 0 Other 4 OK or NG OK >> Switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. F G H LIIA0811E BL 2.PINCH STRIP CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect pinch strip and back door control unit. Check continuity between pinch strip connector (B) D505 (RH), D517 (LH) terminals 1, 2 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminals 5, 19 (RH), 20 (LH). 1 - 19 1 - 20 2-5 3. J K : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. L Check continuity between pinch strip connector (B) D505 (RH), D517 (LH) terminal 1and ground. M LIIA2257E 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N 3.PINCH STRIP GROUND INSPECTION O P Revision: August 2007 BL-155 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between pinch strip connector terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the pinch strip. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0817E Back Door Warning Chime System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718560 1.BACK DOOR WARNING CHIME CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect back door warning chime and back door control unit. Check continuity between back door warning chime connector (B) D514 terminal 2 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 6. 2-6 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door warning chime connector (B) D514 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA1148E 2.BACK DOOR WARNING CHIME CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Check continuity between back door warning chime connector (B) D514 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 9. 1-9 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door warning chime connector (B) D514 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace warning chime. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA1149E Half-Latch Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718561 1.HALF-LATCH SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 BL-156 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. While fully opening and closing the sliding door, check voltage waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 22 and ground using an oscilloscope. A B 22 - Ground C LIIA0826E D PIIA2169E OK or NG OK >> Half-latch switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.HALF-LATCH SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect back door latch switch and back control unit. Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 6 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 22. 6 - 22 3. F G : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground H : Continuity should not exist. BL OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2259E J 3.HALF-LATCH SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between back door latch (half-latch switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground K : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Replace the back door latch. Refer to BL-175. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M WIIA1150E N Open Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718562 1.OPEN SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. O Turn ignition switch OFF. P Revision: August 2007 BL-157 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. While fully closing and opening the back door, check voltage waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 15 and ground using an oscilloscope. 15 - Ground LIIA0829E WIIA1047E OK or NG OK >> Open switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit. Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 4 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 15. 4 - 15 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2260E 3.OPEN SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between back door latch (open switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the back door latch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA1150E Close Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718563 1.CLOSE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 BL-158 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. While fully opening and closing the back door, check voltage waveform between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 14 and ground using an oscilloscope. A B 14 - Ground C LIIA0831E D WIIA1047E OK or NG OK >> Close switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.CLOSE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit. Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 5 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 14. 5 - 14 3. F G : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector (B) D511 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground H : Continuity should not exist. BL OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2261E J 3.CLOSE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between back door latch (close switch) connector D511 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground K : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Replace the back door latch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M WIIA1150E Back Door Handle Switch System Inspection N INFOID:0000000001718564 1.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. O Turn ignition switch OFF. P Revision: August 2007 BL-159 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. While operating the back door handle switch, check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminal 26 and ground. Terminal (+) (-) 26 Ground Measuring condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pull the back door handle switch (ON) 0 Other (OFF) Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Back door handle switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0833E 2.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect back door handle switch and back door control unit. Check continuity between back door handle switch connector (B) D510 terminal 1 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminal 26. 1 - 26 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between back door handle switch connector (B) D510 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0788E 3.BACK DOOR HANDLE SWITCH GROUND INSPECTION Check continuity between back door handle switch connector D510 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the back door handle switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0835E Cinch Latch Motor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718565 1.CINCH LATCH MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect back door latch and back door control unit. Revision: August 2007 BL-160 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between back door latch (cinch latch motor) connector (B) D511 terminals 1, 2 and back door control unit connector (A) B55 terminals 11, 12. 1 - 12 2 - 11 4. A : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. B Check continuity between back door latch (cinch latch motor) connector (B) D511 terminals 1, 2 and ground. 1 - Ground 2 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. C LIIA2263E D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E 2.CINCH LATCH MOTOR OPERATION INSPECTION Connect battery power to terminals 1 and 2 on the back door latch connector and check motor operation. 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (-) - 2 (+) F : It operates. : It operates. (Reverse rotation) G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace the back door latch. H LIIA0838E BL 3.CINCH LATCH MOTOR SIGNAL INSPECTION 1. 2. Reconnect back door latch and back door control unit. While fully opening and closing the back door, check voltage between back door control unit connector B55 terminals 11, 12 and ground. J K Terminals (+) 11 12 (-) Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Measuring condition L While closing back door While opening back door Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> Cinch latch motor circuit is OK. NG >> Replace the back door control unit. LIIA2397E N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-161 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR Fitting Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718566 AWIIA0728ZZ 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in) E. 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in) F. 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in) G. 4.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.177 ± 0.039 in) 1. Front door hinge pillar 2. Lower roller assembly 3. Waist rail D. FRONT DOOR Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end 1. 2. Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation". Loosen the hinge nuts or bolts and adjust as needed. Striker Adjustment 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. LIIA0113E SLIDE DOOR Longitudinal clearance, surface height and outboard adjustment at front end Revision: August 2007 BL-162 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". 2. Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the sliding door and adjust as needed. A Striker Adjustment NOTE: Turn OFF automatic sliding door system, if equipped. 1. Inspect the door latch-to-striker clearance for the front and rear strikers. • Slowly open and close the sliding door. • Confirm the strikers meet the latches correctly. • Adjust striker height up or down as needed. 2. Slightly loosen the door strikers, upper and lower dovetails, and contact switch. NOTE: Loosened parts should not move on their own. 3. Open and close the door three or four times to allow the strikers and contact switch to align themselves. 4. Carefully tighten all loosened parts using care not to move the parts . 5. Open and close door three or four times to confirm smooth latching. B C D E F G H LIIA1645E BL BACK DOOR J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-163 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > AWIIA0729ZZ 1. Back door 2. Back door hinge RH & LH 3. Roof 4. Body side outer 5. Back door glass 6. Rear combination lamp 7. Rear bumper fascia 8. 17 N·m (1.7 Kg·m, 13 ft-lb) H. 10.0 mm ( 0.4in) J. 2.5 mm (0.10 in) K. 6.8 mm (0.27 in) M. 0.8 mm (0.03 in) N. 6.5 mm (0.26 in) P. 2.8 mm (0.11 in) Q. 6.7 mm (0.26 in) R. 1.4 mm (0.06 in) S. 6.2 mm (0.24 in) T. 0.4 mm (0.02 in) U. 6.2 mm (0.24 in) V. 0.4 mm (0.02 in) W. 6.1 mm (0.24 in) Revision: August 2007 BL-164 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Longitudinal clearance, surface height and outboard adjustment at front end 1. 2. 3. 4. A Open and support the back door. Slightly loosen the hinge nuts. Reposition the door as necessary and tighten the nuts. Confirm the adjustment. Repeat as necessary to obtain the desired fit. B Striker Adjustment 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. C D E LIIA1733E Removal and Installation F INFOID:0000000001718567 G FRONT DOOR CAUTION: • When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to proH tect the door and body. • When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. • Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease". BL 1. Remove the door window and module assembly. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the door harness. 3. Remove the check link cover. J 4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar. K L LIIA0423E 5. Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and remove the door assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align the front door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment". M N O P LIIA0424E SLIDE DOOR CAUTION: • When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body. Revision: August 2007 BL-165 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. • Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply "body grease". 1. Remove the upper and lower door finishers. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the door glass. Refer to GW-70. 3. Remove the door lock and handle assemblies. Refer to BL-171. 4. Remove the upper and lower male dovetail assemblies. 5. Remove the door wiring harness. 6. Remove the door. • Disconnect the rear slide door guide. • Remove the lower hinge bracket. • Remove the upper hinge bracket. WIIA0830E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align the front door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment". BACK DOOR WARNING: Always support back door when removing or replacing back door stays. Power back door opener will not support back door with back door stays removed. 1. Remove the back door glass. Refer to GW-13. 2. Remove the license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-23. 3. Remove the back door lock assembly. Refer to BL-175. 4. Remove the rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper Motor". Revision: August 2007 BL-166 2008 Quest DOOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Remove the back door wire harness. 6. Remove the rear washer nozzle and hose from the back door. Refer to WW-35, "Rear Washer Nozzle". CAUTION: Two technicians should be used to avoid damaging the back door during removal. 7. Support the back door with a suitable tool. 8. Disconnect the power back door lift arm from the door. 9. Remove the back door stays. 10. Remove the door side nuts and the back door assembly. A B C D E F G WIIA1120E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align the back door. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment". H BL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-167 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DOOR LOCK Component Structure INFOID:0000000001718568 WIIA0541E 1. Front gasket 4. Rear gasket 5. Outside handle bracket 6. Grommet 7. Key cylinder rod (Driver side only) 8. Outside handle cable 9. Door lock assembly 10. Inside handle cable 2. Outside handle 11. Lock knob cable Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. 3. Door key cylinder assembly (Driver side) Outside handle escutcheon (Passenger side) 12. Inside handle INFOID:0000000001718569 Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". Remove the front door window rear glass run. Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole. PIIA3553E 4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon (2). PIIA3554E Revision: August 2007 BL-168 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. 6. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (1). A B C D LIIA0532E 7. Remove the front and rear gaskets. E F G PIIA3557E H 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) BL J K PIIA1090E 9. Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket. L M N WIIA0542E O P Revision: August 2007 BL-169 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly. PIIA3558E 11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket. PIIA5059E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718570 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY WIIA1057E 1. Door key cylinder assembly ⇐ Pawl 2. Key cylinder escutcheon 3. Door key cylinder Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder. Revision: August 2007 BL-170 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > SLIDE DOOR LOCK A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718571 OUTSIDE HANDLE 1. 2. B Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt (TORX T30) from grommet hole. C D E PIIA3553E F 3. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle escutcheon (2). G H BL WIIA0851E 4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (2). J K L LIIA0532E 5. M Remove the front gasket and rear gasket. N O P PIIA3557E Revision: August 2007 BL-171 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. PIIA1090E 7. Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle bracket. PIIA3556E 8. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle and door lock assembly. PIIA3558E 9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector. 10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PIIA5059E SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY Revision: August 2007 BL-172 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL WIIA1121E 1. Sliding door lock assembly 2. Striker 3. Sliding door inside handle cable 4. Sliding door inside handle 5. Sliding door inside lock 6. Sliding door inside lock cable ⇐ Front 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove exterior door handle. Disconnect sliding door lock assembly electrical connectors. Remove sliding door lock assembly. • Remove screws from front and rear latches. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-173 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIIA1122E 1. Rear roller 2. Sliding door motor 4. Front roller ⇐ Front 3. Sliding door cable assembly 1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to EI-27, "Removal and Installation". 2. Disconnect slide door cables. 3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". 4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector. 5. Remove sliding door link rollers. 6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly. 7. Remove sliding door motor from sliding door cable assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 BL-174 2008 Quest BACK DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > BACK DOOR LOCK A Component Structure INFOID:0000000001718572 B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA1123E N 1. Back door motor assembly 2. Back door motor assembly bracket 3. Back door motor gear assembly 4. Back door closure rod 5. Pinch strip 6. Back door latch release cable 7. Back door handle 8. Power back door latch assembly 9. Power back door latch cinch motor 10. Back door striker 11. Dovetail (door side) 13. Back door opener actuator assembly 14. Lower back door lock assembly O 12. Dovetail (body side) 15. Back door lock bracket P Revision: August 2007 BL-175 2008 Quest BACK DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Back Door Latch INFOID:0000000001718573 WIIA1124E 1. Back door assembly 2. Manual back door latch assembly 4. Back door striker ⇐ Front 3. Power back door latch assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" Revision: August 2007 BL-176 2008 Quest BACK DOOR LOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the weather seal. 3. On manual doors, disconnect the back door latch release cable. 4. For power doors, disconnect the cinch motor electrical connector. 5. Remove the back door latch assembly (power door) or the back door lock assembly (manual door). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align the back door latch. Refer to BL-162, "Fitting Adjustment". Back Door Power Lift Assembly A B C INFOID:0000000001718574 D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA1125E N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the LH rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the closure rod to door bolt. Remove the back door motor gear assembly. Remove the back door motor. • Disconnect the electrical connector. O P INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 BL-177 2008 Quest FUEL FILLER LID OPENER < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL FILLER LID OPENER Wiring Diagram - F/LID - INFOID:0000000001718575 WIWA1855E REMOVAL Revision: August 2007 BL-178 2008 Quest FUEL FILLER LID OPENER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E LIIA2272E 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Fuel filler lid opening (LH rear fender) 2. 4. Fuel filler lid opener actuator Lock ring 3. F Electrical connector G Remove LH rear lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Open fuel filler lid. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener actuator electrical connector. Remove lock ring and fuel filler lid opener actuator. • Turn lock ring 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to remove. H BL INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-179 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718576 LIIA2467E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 2. (view with instrument panel removed) Front pillar LH 4. NATS antenna amp. M21 ECM E16 5. System Description 3. Combination Meter M24 INFOID:0000000001718577 NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions: • Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS (NATS). NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS (NATS). • All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered. If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS) components. • The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. • When NVIS (NATS) detects a malfunction, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON position. • NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-III hardware and CONSULT-III NVIS (NATS) software. When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs can be carried out. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. • When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner. System Composition INFOID:0000000001718578 The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following: • NATS ignition key • NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder • Body control module (BCM) • Engine control module (ECM) • Security indicator NOTE: Revision: August 2007 BL-180 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system. A B C D E PIIA1121E ECM Re-communicating Function F INFOID:0000000001718579 The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the G ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board. (In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-III is not necessary). NOTE: H • When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. • If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work. BL • Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID. 1. Install ECM. 2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON. J *1: To perform this step, use the key that has been used before performing ECM replacement. 3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to OFF. K 5. Start engine. If engine can be started, procedure is completed. If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual and initialize control unit. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-181 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - NATS - INFOID:0000000001718580 WIWA1856E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718581 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000003302416 CONSULT-III INSPECTION PROCEDURE Revision: August 2007 BL-182 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector. A B C BBIA0336E D 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. Touch “OTHER”. Select “NATS V.5.0”. If “NATS V5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". 7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-III Operation Manual. E F CONSULT-III DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION CONSULT-III DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE G Description C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all NATS mechanical keys are necessary. [NATS mechanical key/ BCM/ ECM*] SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart. Refer to "NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" . BL *: When replace ECM, refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . NOTE: • When any initialization is performed, all ID previously registered will be erased and all NATS mechanical keys must be registered again. • The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-III screen. • In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART Detected items [NVIS (NATS) program card screen terms] P No. Code (Self-diagnostic result of “ENGINE”) Malfunction is detected when..... Reference page J K L M N CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU [P1612] NATS MALFUNCTION P1612 Communication impossible between ECM and BCM In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Refer to BL-187. DIFFERENCE OF KEY [P1615] NATS MALFUNCTION P1615 BCM can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification between key ID and BCM is NG. Refer to BL-188. CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY [P1614] NATS MALFUNCTION P1614 BCM cannot receive the key ID signal. Refer to BL-190. ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM [P1611] NATS MALFUNCTION P1611 The result of ID verification between BCM and ECM is NG. System initialization is required. Refer to BL-188. Revision: August 2007 H O P BL-183 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Detected items [NVIS (NATS) program card screen terms] LOCK MODE [P1610] P No. Code (Self-diagnostic result of “ENGINE”) NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG — Reference page Malfunction is detected when..... When the starting operation is carried out five or more times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from being started. • Unregistered ignition key is used. • BCM or ECM’s malfunctioning. Refer to BL-189. All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble code has been detected in ECM. Refer to BL-184. Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003302417 WORK FLOW 1.STARTING ENGINE Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition switch. OK NG >> System is normal. >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS Perform SELF-DIAGNOSIS “NATS V5.0” using CONSULT-III. NOTE: NATS program card is necessary to display the “SELF-DIAGNOSIS”. No malfunction is detected>>Recheck the starting engine section GO TO 1. Malfunction related to NATS is detected>>GO TO 3. Malfunctions related to “DON’T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG” and NATS are detected>>GO TO 7. 3.IDENTIFYING NATS MALFUNCTION Self-diagnosis results referring to NATS, but no information about engine self-diagnosis result is displayed on CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis" . >> GO TO 4. 4.NATS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Repair NATS (if necessary, perform “C/U INITIALIZATION” with CONSULT-III.) >> GO TO 5. 5.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS Erase the record of “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” by using CONSULT-III. >> GO TO 6. 6.STARTING ENGINE Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition switch. NG OK >> GO TO 2. >> End of inspection. 7.IDENTIFYING NATS AND ENGINE CONTROL MALFUNCTION Revision: August 2007 BL-184 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > NATS malfunction and “DON’T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG” are displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. NOTE: This indication means that malfunction have been detected in NATS and engine control system. A B >> GO TO 8. 8.NATS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Repair NATS according to self-diagnosis results refer to NATS (if necessary, perform “C/U INITIALZATIN” with CONSULT-III.) NOTE: Do not erase “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” by using CONSULT-III. C D >> GO TO 9. E 9.IDENTIFYING ENGINE CONTROL MALFUNCTION Check engine “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” records with a generalized program card instead of the NATS program card. F >> GO TO 10. 10.ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS G Repair engine control system if engine related malfunction is detected. With engine diagnostic codes present, refer to EC-9 . Without engine diagnostic codes present, refer to EC-78 . H NOTE: If only “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed, erase the self-diagnosis results. BL >> GO TO 11. 11.STARTING ENGINE J Check if the engine could be started by inserting the key into the ignition key cylinder and operate ignition switch. OK NG >> GO TO 12. >> GO TO 2. K L 12.ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS Erase both NATS and ENGINE "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" records by using CONSULT-III NATS program card and generalized program card. M >> GO TO 13 N 13.COMFIRMATION Perform running test with CONSULT-III in engine “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” mode. O “NO DTC” is displayed>> End of inspection. Malfunction information is displayed>>GO TO 2. Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718584 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 Revision: August 2007 BL-185 2008 Quest P NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnosis related item Symptom Displayed “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on CONSULT-III screen. CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU [P1612] • Security indicator lighting up* • Engine cannot be started DIFFERENCE OF KEY [P1615] CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY [P1614] Security indicator lighting up* Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) PROCEDURE 1 (BL-187) PROCEDURE 2 (BL-188) PROCEDURE 5 (BL-190) ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM [P1611] PROCEDURE 3 (BL-188) LOCK MODE [P1610] PROCEDURE 4 (BL-189) DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG WORK FLOW (BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis") System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. — Open circuit in battery voltage line of BCM circuit C1 Open circuit in ignition line of BCM circuit C2 Open circuit in ground line of BCM circuit C3 Open or short circuit between BCM and ECM communication line C4 ECM B BCM A Unregistered key D BCM A Malfunction of key ID chip E5 Communication line between ANT/ AMP and BCM: Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage line or ground line E1 E3, E4 Open circuit in power source line of ANT/ AMP circuit E3 Open circuit in ground line of ANT/ AMP circuit E4 NATS antenna amp. E6 BCM A System initialization has not yet been completed. F ECM B LOCK MODE D Engine trouble data and NVIS (NATS) trouble data have been detected in ECM — *: When NVIS (NATS) detects a malfunction, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position. SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 Revision: August 2007 BL-186 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Non self-diagnosis related item Symptom Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) Security indicator does not light up*. PROCEDURE 6 (BL-192, "Diagnosis Procedure 6") System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram Combination meter (security indictor lamp) E2 Open circuit between Fuse and BCM C1, C2 BCM A B A C *: CONSULT-III self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”. Diagnosis Procedure 1 INFOID:0000000001718585 D Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-III screen First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-III, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-182, "CONSULTIII Function". E 1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS F Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-III screen. NOTE: In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis". 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM 1. 2. 3. G H BL Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and ground. J 70 – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following: • 50A fusible link (letter j, located in fuse and fusible link box). • Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector. K L WIIA1151E M 3.CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and ground. 38 – Ground N : Battery voltage O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following: • 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. • Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector. P WIIA0821E 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM Revision: August 2007 BL-187 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. 67 – Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1040E 5.REPLACE BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual. Does the engine start? Yes >> BCM is malfunctioning. No >> • ECM is malfunctioning. • Replace ECM. • Perform initialization or re-communicating function. • For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. • For re-communicating function, refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function". 1. 2. Diagnosis Procedure 2 INFOID:0000000001718586 Self-diagnostic results: “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen 1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen. Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as above? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis". 2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NATS ignition key? Yes >> • Ignition key ID was unregistered. No >> • BCM is malfunctioning. • Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". • Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. • For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual. Diagnosis Procedure 3 INFOID:0000000001718587 Self-diagnostic results: “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-III screen 1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-III screen. NOTE: “ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”: Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM. Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown? Revision: August 2007 BL-188 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis". A 2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> • Start engine. (END) • System initialization had not been completed. No >> • ECM is malfunctioning. • Replace ECM. • Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. Diagnosis Procedure 4 B C D E INFOID:0000000001718588 Self-diagnostic results: “LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-III screen F 1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS G Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis". H 2.ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds. 3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles). 5. Start the engine. Does engine start? Yes >> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”). No >> GO TO 3. BL J K 3.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. No >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-III AGAIN 1. 2. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-III shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. BCM is malfunctioning. No >> • ECM is malfunctioning. • Replace ECM. • Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual. Revision: August 2007 BL-189 2008 Quest L M N O P NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure 5 INFOID:0000000001718589 Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen 1.CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-III screen. Is CONSULT-III screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-185, "Trouble Diagnosis". 2.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-193, "How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly. 3.CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key. Does the engine start? Yes >> • Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning. • Replace the ignition key. • Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual. No >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP. 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 1 and ground. 1 – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace fuse or harness. LIIA1641E 5.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1 Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 2 and ground with analog tester. LIIA1642E Revision: August 2007 BL-190 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector terminals (+) 2 (-) Ground A Position of ignition key cylinder Voltage (V) (Approx.) Before inserting ignition key Battery voltage After inserting ignition key Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage Just after turning ignition switch ON Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> • Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-III Operation Manual. D E 6.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2 Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 4 and ground with analog tester. F G H WIIA0822E Connector terminals (+) 4 (-) Ground BL J Position of ignition key cylinder Voltage (V) (Approx.) Before inserting ignition key Battery voltage After inserting ignition key Pointer of tester should move for approx. 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage Just after turning ignition switch ON Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> • Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. L M N 7.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector. Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 3 and ground. O P Revision: August 2007 BL-191 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3 – Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> • NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning. NG >> • Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. LIIA1283E Diagnosis Procedure 6 INFOID:0000000001718590 “SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” 1.CHECK FUSE Check 15A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. 2.CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF. Check the security indicator lamp lights up. Security indicator lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter (security indicator lamp). Check voltage between combination meter connector M24 terminal 40 and ground. 40 – Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2491E 4.CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. Connect combination meter (security indicator lamp). Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. 23 – Ground OK or NG OK >> : Battery voltage BCM is malfunctioning. • Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". • Perform initialization with CONSULT-III. LIIA0523E Revision: August 2007 BL-192 2008 Quest NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • For initialization, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual. NG >> Check the following: • Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and BCM (NATS control unit). • Indicator lamp condition. A How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp B INFOID:0000000001718591 NOTE: • If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”. • Initialization is not necessary when only NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one. C D E SIIA1683E F G H BL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-193 2008 Quest HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER < SERVICE INFORMATION > HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - INFOID:0000000001718592 WIWA1857E Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718593 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver. Revision: August 2007 BL-194 2008 Quest HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is malfunctioning, not vehicle related. A 1.ILLUMINATION CHECK B 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Does red light (1) of transmitter illuminate when any of the three transmitter buttons (2) is pressed? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. C D E WIIA0789E 2.TRANSMITTER CHECK F Check transmitter with Tool*. *:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. OK or NG OK >> Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related. NG >> Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver). G 3.POWER SUPPLY CHECK H 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) connector. Check voltage between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror connector R17 terminal 10 and ground. 10 - Ground BL : Battery voltage J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following: • 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. • Harness for open or short between fuse and auto antidazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver). K L LIIA0839E 4.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK M Check continuity between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror connector R17 terminal 8 and body ground. 8 - Ground : Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver). NG >> Repair or replace harness. O P PIIA2368E Revision: August 2007 BL-195 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BODY REPAIR Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000001718594 LIIA0797E Component 1 Outside mirror 2 Lift gate Finisher 3 Bumper fascia Side guard molding 4 Color code A15 BW9 C30 C43 G10 K11 K12 Q11 Description Red Brawn Majestic Blue Lakeshore Slate Desert Stone Galaxy Black Smoke Radiant Silver Nordic White Pearl Paint type M M M M M M M 3P Clear coat t t t t t t t t Body Body color Base Black A15 BW9 C30 C43 G10 K11 K12 Q11 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 AG01 Body color A15 BW9 C30 C43 G10 K11 K12 Q11 Body Body color A15 BW9 C30 C43 G10 K11 K12 Q11 Body Body color A15 BW9 C30 C43 G10 K11 K12 Q11 5 Outside handle Chromiumplate Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p Cr2p 6 Radiator grille Chromiumplate +Smoke Clear Cr+HF M09 Cr+HFM 09 Cr+HFM 09 Cr+HF M 09 Cr+HF M 09 Cr+HF M 09 Cr+HF M 09 Cr+HFM 09 Center M: Metallic; 2S: 2-Coat Solid, 2P: 2-Coat Pearl; 3P: 3-Coat Pearl; t: New Cross Linking Clear Coat Revision: August 2007 BL-196 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Body Component Parts INFOID:0000000001718595 A UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O P WIIA0535E 1. Hoodledge upper RH/LH 2. Rear hoodledge reinforcement RH/LH 22. Rear floor rear 3. Hoodledge reinforcement 23. Front side member RH/LH 4. Lower front hoodledge RH/LH 24. Front side member closing plate RH/LH Revision: August 2007 21. Rear side floor rear RH/LH BL-197 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Side cowl top RH/LH 25. Front side member extension reinforcement RH/LH 6. Rear lower hoodledge RH/LH 26. Front side member reinforcement RH/LH 7. Upper dash 27. Front side member front extension RH/LH 8. Front cowl top 28. Inner front side member assembly RH/LH 9. Center cowl top 29. Floor center member assembly 10. Cowl top extension 30. Outer 3rd seat mounting bracket 11. Cowl top extension bracket RH/LH 31. Center 1st cross member assembly 12. Lower dash 32. Front side member rear extension RH/LH 13. Dash lower cross member 33. Lower guide rail assembly RH/LH 14. 2nd cross member assembly 34. 4th cab moulting cross member 15. Inner sill RH/LH 35. Rear seat cross member 16. Front floor 36. Rear side member RH/LH 17. Center front floor 37. Center rear seat cross member 18. 2nd seat mounting bracket assembly RH/LH 38. 2nd rear cross member 19 39. Front hook RH/LH Front floor rear 20. Rear floor step RH/LH Revision: August 2007 BL-198 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BODY COMPONENT PARTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIIA0366E P 1. Hood 2. Front fender (RH&LH) 18. Inner roof side rail 3. Front door assembly 19. Upper guide rail 4. Slide door assembly 20. Upper guide rail 5. Body side outer 21. Roof drip rail Revision: August 2007 17. Center pillar reinforcement BL-199 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Rear fender 22. Waist rail guide 7. Body side outer reinforcement 23. Back panel assembly 8. Back pillar reinforcement 24. Back panel assembly 9. Inner side panel 25. Standard roof assembly 10. Front pillar lower hinge brace 26. Roof assembly with sunroof 11. Outer sill reinforcement 27. Front roof rail 12. Inner lower front pillar 28. Roof side molding assembly 13. Inner upper front pillar 29. Roof bow No. 2 14. Upper hinge pillar brace assembly 30. Rear roof bow 15. Inner roof rail reinforcement 31. Rear roof rail 16. Inner center pillar Corrosion Protection INFOID:0000000001718596 DESCRIPTION To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures. ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL) To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet. Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance with cationic electrode position primer. PIIA0093E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrode position primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are employed on all body components. CAUTION: Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute minimum. PIIA0095E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of Revision: August 2007 BL-200 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf life. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N LIIA0810E O UNDERCOATING The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable. Precautions in undercoating 1. 2. 3. Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three way catalyst which are subjected to heat). Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot. Do not undercoat rotating parts. Revision: August 2007 BL-201 2008 Quest P BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating. LIIA0129E Body Sealing INFOID:0000000001718597 DESCRIPTION Revision: August 2007 BL-202 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N LIIA0812E O P Revision: August 2007 BL-203 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIIA0368E Revision: August 2007 BL-204 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0816E P Revision: August 2007 BL-205 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Body Construction INFOID:0000000001718598 BODY CONSTRUCTION LIIA0818E Body Alignment INFOID:0000000001718599 BODY CENTER MARKS Revision: August 2007 BL-206 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O P LIIA0819E PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. Revision: August 2007 BL-207 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIIA0364E DESCRIPTION • All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual. • When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself to make sure there is no free play. • When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending. • Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes. • An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side is symmetrically the same value. Revision: August 2007 BL-208 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y" and "Z". A B C D E PIIA0104E F Engine Compartment G H BL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BL-209 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT WIIA0536E Revision: August 2007 BL-210 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT POINTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0860E P Underbody Revision: August 2007 BL-211 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT WIIA0358E Revision: August 2007 BL-212 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT POINTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIIA0359E P Passenger Compartment Revision: August 2007 BL-213 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT WIIA0537E Revision: August 2007 BL-214 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT POINTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0862E P Revision: August 2007 BL-215 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > LIIA0903E Rear Body Revision: August 2007 BL-216 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O WIIA0539E P Revision: August 2007 BL-217 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MEASUREMENT POINTS LIIA0864E Handling Precaution for Plastics INFOID:0000000001718600 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS Revision: August 2007 BL-218 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Abbreviation 1. 2. Material name Heat resisting temperature °C (°F) Resistance to gasoline and solvents A Other cautions PE Polyethylene 60 (140) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe up quickly). Flammable PVC Polyvinyl Chloride 80 (176) Same as above. Poison gas is emitted when burned. EPM/ EPDM Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable TPO/ TPR Thermoplastic Olefine/ Thermoplastic Rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable PP Polypropylene 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable, avoid battery acid. UP Polyester thermoset 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene resin 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. AES Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene 80 (176) Same as above. PMMA Polymethyl Methacrylate 85 (185) Same as above. AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. AS Acrylonitrile Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. EVA Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate 90 (194) Same as above. ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (222) Same as above. PPO/ PPE Polyphenylene Oxide/ Polyphenylene Ether 110 (230) Same as above. PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. PAR Polyacrylate 180 (356) Same as above. LLDPE Lenear Low Density PE 45 (100) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless. PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Same as above. TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) Same as above. PPC Polypropylene Composite 115 (239) Same as above. Flammable POM Polyacetal 120 (248) Same as above. Avoid battery acid. PBT+P C Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. Flammable PA Polyamide (Nylon) 140 (284) Same as above. Avoid immersing in water. PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate 140 (284) Same as above. FRP Fiber Reinforced Plastics 170 (338) Same as above. PET Polyethylene Terephthalate 180 (356) Same as above. PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) Same as above. B D G H Flammable BL J Flammable K L M N Avoid battery acid. O , Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials characteristics. BL-219 E F When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them. Revision: August 2007 C 2008 Quest P BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS LIIA0824E Revision: August 2007 BL-220 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H LIIA0825E Precaution in Repairing High Strength Steel INFOID:0000000001718601 High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight. Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below: BL High strength steel (hss) used in Nissan vehicles J Tensile strength 373 N/mm Nissan/Infiniti designation SP130 • • • • • SP150 • Front bumper reinforcement • Rear bumper reinforcement 2 2 (38kg/mm ,54klb/sq in) 785-981 N/mm2 (80-100kg/mm2 114-142klb/sq in) Major applicable parts Front side member assembly Upper hoodledge Upper pillar hinge brace assembly Rear side member extension Other reinforcements K L M SP130 is the most commonly used HSS. SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength. Read the following precautions when repairing HSS: 1. Additional points to consider • The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component. When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above 550°C (1,022°F). Verify heating temperature with a thermometer. (Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.) N O P PIIA0115E Revision: August 2007 BL-221 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case, increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull the HSS panel. PIIA0116E • When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible. Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum margin of 50 mm (1.97in). PIIA0117E • When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength. PIIA0144E • The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel. Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit durability and facilitate the operation. • SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/ mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2, 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair. When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts must be replaced. Revision: August 2007 BL-222 PIIA0145E 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Precautions in spot welding HSS This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS: • The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to the metal thickness. A B C PIIA0146E D • The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no gaps. E F G PIIA0147E H • Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch. Unit:mm Thickness (t) Minimum pitch ( ) 0.6 (0.024) 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 10 (0.39) or over 12 (0.47) or over 18 (0.71) or over 20 (0.79) or over 27 (1.06) or over 31 (1.22) or over BL J K PIIA0148E Foam Repair INFOID:0000000001718602 During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS L M Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. N FILL PROCEDURES 1. - Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Install service part. O P Revision: August 2007 BL-223 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. LIIA1081E 2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. LIIA1082E Replacement Operation INFOID:0000000001718603 DESCRIPTION This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section. Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs. Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not apply in some regions or countries. Revision: August 2007 BL-224 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O PIIA0149E P Revision: August 2007 BL-225 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to the front pillar section. PIIA0150E • Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position. PIIA0151E • Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position. PIIA0152E • An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows. 1. Mark cutting lines. A: Cut position of outer pillar B: Cut position of inner pillar 2. Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar. 3. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A) 4. Remove jig and cut remaining portions. 5. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner. PIIA0153E HOODLEDGE Revision: August 2007 BL-226 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after radiator core support has been removed. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0866E P FRONT SIDE MEMBER Revision: August 2007 BL-227 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after hoodledge and radiator core support have been removed. WIIA0360E Revision: August 2007 BL-228 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0869E FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT) Revision: August 2007 BL-229 P 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after radiator core support has been removed. WIIA0361E FRONT PILLAR Revision: August 2007 BL-230 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0870E P Revision: August 2007 BL-231 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > LIIA0871E Revision: August 2007 BL-232 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0872E P Revision: August 2007 BL-233 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > CENTER PILLAR LIIA0873E Revision: August 2007 BL-234 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0874E P Revision: August 2007 BL-235 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > LIIA0904E Revision: August 2007 BL-236 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OUTER SILL A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0875E P Revision: August 2007 BL-237 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR FENDER LIIA0876E Revision: August 2007 BL-238 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR PANEL A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0877E P REAR FLOOR REAR Revision: August 2007 BL-239 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after rear panel has been removed. LIIA0878E REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION Revision: August 2007 BL-240 2008 Quest BODY REPAIR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Work after rear panel and rear end crossmember have been removed. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M N O LIIA0879E P Revision: August 2007 BL-241 2008 Quest BRAKES SECTION BR BRAKE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................15 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 21 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Brake System .................................... 2 Wiring Diagram and Trouble Diagnosis .................... 2 On-Vehicle Service ..................................................21 Removal and Installation .........................................21 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................23 Inspection ................................................................23 FRONT DISC BRAKE ....................................... 25 BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 5 Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 5 Removal and Installation ........................................... 7 REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 32 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 Component ..............................................................32 On Board Inspection ................................................33 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ...................33 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ................................................................33 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly....34 Brake Burnishing .....................................................37 BRAKE FLUID ....................................................10 Checking Brake Fluid Level .................................... 10 Changing Brake Fluid .............................................. 10 Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 10 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE ..............................11 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 38 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................14 On Board Inspection ............................................... 14 Removal and Installation ......................................... 14 Revision: August 2007 G VACUUM LINES ............................................... 23 Component ..............................................................25 On Board Inspection ................................................26 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ...................26 Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor ................................................................27 Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly....28 Brake Burnishing .....................................................30 Hydraulic Circuit ...................................................... 11 Front Brake Piping and Hose .................................. 11 Rear Brake Piping and Hose ................................... 12 Inspection ................................................................ 13 BR BR-1 General Specification ..............................................38 Disc Brake ...............................................................38 Brake Pedal .............................................................39 Brake Booster ..........................................................39 H I J K L M N O P 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718242 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SR section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000001718243 CAUTION: • Recommended fluid is brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. • To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. • Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. • Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. • If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator control unit or the battery terminal before performing the work. • Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at SBR686C very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brakes) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc brakes). WARNING: • Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Wiring Diagram and Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718244 For wiring diagrams or trouble diagnosis relating to the brake system, refer to BRC section. Revision: August 2007 BR-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718245 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-46532) Brake and clutch pedal height measurement tool Measuring brake pedal height B C D E LFIA0227E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718246 BR Tool name Description 1 Flare nut crowfoot 2 Torque wrench Removing and installing each brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) G H I S-NT360 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts J K PBIC0190E L M PBIC0191E N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-3 2008 Quest Symptom Revision: August 2007 × × × × × × × × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × × × × × × × BR-4 BR-28, BR-34 BR-28, BR-34 BR-28, BR-34 BR-30, BR-37 BR-28, BR-34 Rotor runout Rotor deformation Rotor deflection Rotor rust Rotor thickness variation STEERING Shimmy ROAD WHEEL × TIRES Shake SUSPENSION BR-25, BR-32 Rotor damage × AXLE BR-28, BR-34 Rotor imbalance × DRIVE SHAFT BR-25, BR-32 × PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NVH Troubleshooting Chart WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-26, BR-33 Shims damaged Noise Pads - uneven wear Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS BR-25, BR-32 Reference page Pads - damaged NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING INFOID:0000000001718247 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2008 Quest BRAKE PEDAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > BRAKE PEDAL A Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718248 INSPECTION 1. 2. B If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most position (closest to the floor). Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from the dash lower panel as shown. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal must be set in the forward most position (closest to the floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications. Tool number : — C D E (J-46532) BR G H I WFIA0160E J Free height “H” 156.3 - 166.3 mm (6.15 - 6.55 in) Depressed pedal height “D” under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in) Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch “C1” or “C2” 0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.029 - 0.077 in) Pedal play “A” 3. K L 3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in) Adjust the brake pedal as necessary. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". M ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. Loosen the lock nut on the input rod. CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis as shown. N O P SBR229E Revision: August 2007 BR-5 2008 Quest BRAKE PEDAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height. When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the lock nut to specification. Refer to BR-21, "Removal and Installation". Tool number : — (J-46532) WFIA0160E Free height “H” 156.3 - 166.3 mm (6.15 - 6.55 in) Depressed pedal height “D” under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in) Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch “C1” or “C2” 0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.029 - 0.077 in) Pedal play “A” 4. 5. 6. 7. 3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in) With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until the threaded ends contact the rubber stops. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock them in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (“C1” and “C2”) between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. Check the pedal play “A”. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Revision: August 2007 BR-6 2008 Quest BRAKE PEDAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718249 A Non-adjustable Pedal B C D E BR G H I WFIA0297E 1. Brake pedal assembly 2. Snap pin 3. ASCD cancel switch 4. Stop lamp switch 5. Pedal pad 6. Clevis pin J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-7 2008 Quest BRAKE PEDAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Adjustable Pedal WFIA0298E 1. Brake pedal assembly 2. Snap pin 3. ASCD cancel switch 4. Stop lamp switch 5. Pedal pad 6. Clevis pin WARNING: Do not damage the brake tube. CAUTION: • Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). • Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). • Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. • Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the brake pedal assembly by turning 45° degrees. If equipped with the adjustable pedal, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. • Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. LBIA0374E Revision: August 2007 BR-8 2008 Quest BRAKE PEDAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the brake booster clevis. 5. Remove nuts and the brake pedal assembly. Support the brake booster and master cylinder at the bulkhead so as not to damage the brake tubes. CAUTION: • Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) for installation. • Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). • Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. • Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL A B C D Check brake pedal for following items. • Clevis pin deformation • Crack of any welded portion • Brake pedal bent or damaged E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. BR • Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. • If equipped, check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or G sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward. • After installing the brake pedal assembly, adjust as necessary. Refer to BR-5, "Inspection and Adjustment". H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-9 2008 Quest BRAKE FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > BRAKE FLUID Checking Brake Fluid Level INFOID:0000000001718250 • Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the sub tank. • Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks. • If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. • Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. LFIA0204E Changing Brake Fluid INFOID:0000000001718251 CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Always keep fluid level higher than “MIN” line on sub tank. • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 4. Clean the inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 5. Bleed the brake system refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". Bleeding Brake System INFOID:0000000001718252 CAUTION: • Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation. • Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding the air out of system. • Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid. • Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. Air bleeder valve 8. 9. : 8 N·m (0.8 kg-m, 71 in-lb) Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order: Right rear brake → Left front brake → Left rear brake → Right front brake Revision: August 2007 BR-10 SBR419C 2008 Quest BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE < SERVICE INFORMATION > BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE A Hydraulic Circuit INFOID:0000000001718253 B C D E BR G H I WFIA0428E 1. Actuator 2. Master Cylinder ● Flare nut ■ Union Bolt Front Brake Piping and Hose 3. Brake Booster J INFOID:0000000001718254 K REMOVAL CAUTION: • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. • All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. • Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. L M N O P SBR419C Revision: August 2007 BR-11 2008 Quest BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then withdraw the lock spring. 4. Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper assembly. 5. Remove lock springs from the mounting portion of the brake tube and the mounting portion of the strut. WFIA0087E INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the caliper assembly, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by hand. CAUTION: • Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body. • The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected. 2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring. 3. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand, then secure it with a lock spring. 4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts to specification. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit". 5. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 6. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". SBR686C Rear Brake Piping and Hose INFOID:0000000001718255 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. • All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. • Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. SBR419C Revision: August 2007 BR-12 2008 Quest BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. 4. Remove connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. A B C WFIA0088E D INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". E • Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand. 2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the conBR necting bolt and flare nut using a torque wrench to specification. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit". 3. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. G 4. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". H SBR686C Inspection I INFOID:0000000001718256 CAUTION: If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering with other parts or loosening connecting parts, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kg-f, 176 lb-f) to the brake pedal with the engine running and keep it for about 5 seconds, then check each part for leaks. J K L M SBR389C N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-13 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER On Board Inspection INFOID:0000000001718257 LEAK INSPECTION • Check for leaking in the master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface, the reservoir hose connections, and the brake tube connections. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718258 CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas, it may cause damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid". Remove the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube attached to air cleaner case (upper). Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the harness connector for the brake fluid level switch. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tubes and the hose from the reservoir tank to the sub tank using a suitable tool. Remove the master cylinder nuts and remove the master cylinder. INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and tighten the master cylinder nuts to specification. Refer to BR-15, "Disassembly and Assembly". 2. Connect the sub tank hose to the master cylinder reservoir tank and fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 3. Plug all ports on master cylinder with your fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal. 4. Have an assistant depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of the master cylinder. • Install and tighten brake tube flare nuts to specification. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit". • Refill the brake system fluid and bleed the air from the brake system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 BR-14 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718259 A B C D E BR G H I WFIA0282E 1. Reservoir cap 4. Clamp 7. Grommet 10. Pin 2. Oil strainer 3. Hose 5. Bracket 6. Reservoir tank 8. Piston stopper 9. Cylinder body 11. Secondary piston assembly J K 12. Primary piston assembly 13. Stopper cap 14. Sub tank 15. Brake fluid level switch 16. O-ring 17. Plate 18. Guide L 19. Snap ring WITHOUT VDC MODELS M Disassembly 1. Lift up the tabs on the stopper cap and remove it from the master cylinder using a suitable tool as shown. The piston inside the master cylinder might pop out when this is done, so hold the stopper cap down at the same time. N O P BRA0031D Revision: August 2007 BR-15 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: • When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. • When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. PFIA0438E 3. 4. 5. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body. PFIA0439E 6. 7. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary. Push in the piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body using a suitable tool. PFIA0440E 8. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool. BRA0561D Revision: August 2007 BR-16 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Tap flange using a soft block such as wood, and carefully pull the secondary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged. A B C BRA0033D Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found. D E BR Assembly CAUTION: • Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. • Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the pis- G ton, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools. • Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the H piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and primary piston assembly into cylinder body in this order. CAUTION: I • Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemblies. • Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling the new inner kit. J • Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cup, and insert straight to prevent the cup from being caught by cylinder inner wall. SBR089C K 2. Perform a visual inspection of the secondary piston slit through the tank boss hole on the secondary side of the cylinder body, and install the piston stopper using a suitable tool. L M N PFIA0440E 3. 4. O Holding down the piston with the stopper cap, push the stopper cap tabs so they are firmly into the cylinder grooves, then attach the stopper cap. CAUTION: Do not reuse the stopper cap. Apply brake fluid to the grommets and attach to the cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the grommets. P BRA0035D Revision: August 2007 BR-17 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Place master cylinder assembly is a vise as described in disassembly step 2. 6. Install the reservoir tank pin so that the pin is evenly seated on both sides of the reservoir, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. PFIA0439E 7. If necessary, install brake fluid level switch. WITH VDC MODELS Disassembly 1. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: • When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. • When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. PFIA0438E 2. 3. 4. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body. PFIA0439E 5. 6. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary. Push in the primary piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inner wall of the cylinder. BRA0560D Revision: August 2007 BR-18 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool. A B C BRA0561D D 8. 9. Holding the rod of the primary piston, remove the primary piston assembly, the plate and the guide. CAUTION: Pull components straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged. Remove the plate and guide from the primary piston. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rod on the inner wall of the plate. Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found. Assembly CAUTION: • Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. • Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the piston, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools. • Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and primary piston assembly into cylinder body. CAUTION: • Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cups. Also, insert pistons squarely to prevent scratching the cylinder inner wall. • Always replace the inner kit as an assembly. WFIA0129E 2. Align the slit in the center of the secondary piston with the axial direction of the piston stopper. Visually check the secondary piston slit from the piston stopper hole and install the piston stopper. E BR G H I J K L M N O P BRA0560D Revision: August 2007 BR-19 2008 Quest BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Insert the plates and the guide into the cylinder body as shown. CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the primary piston rod. • Pay attention to the orientation of the guide. WFIA0123E 4. Press in the primary piston and install a new snap ring. CAUTION: • Make sure snap ring is fully inserted in the snap ring groove. • Do not reuse snap ring. BRA0561D 5. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: • When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. • When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. PFIA0438E 6. 7. Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)], attach the reservoir tank mounting pin so that the attachment side and the opposite side are identical. CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. If necessary, install brake fluid level switch. PFIA0439E Revision: August 2007 BR-20 2008 Quest BRAKE BOOSTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > BRAKE BOOSTER A On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718260 OPERATING CHECK B With the engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing the brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start the engine and when the vacuum pressure reaches the standard, check that the clearance between the brake pedal and floor panel decreases. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. C D E BRA0037D AIRTIGHT CHECK BR • Run the engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to the booster. Depress the brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Check that distance between the brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. • Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, then stop the engine with the pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. G H I SBR365AA Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718261 J K L M N O P WFIA0143E Revision: August 2007 BR-21 2008 Quest BRAKE BOOSTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Master cylinder 2. Reservoir tank 4. Gasket 5. Lock nut 3. Brake booster REMOVAL CAUTION: • Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing the brake booster. • Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. • Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads. • Attach the check valve in the correct orientation. 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-14, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to BR-23, "Removal and Installation". 4. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". 5. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 6. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection Apply specified vacuum to the brake booster. Then check output rod length, using a suitable tool. Standard dimension at vacuum of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg), (–19.69 inHg)] : 10.275 – 10.525 mm (0.4045 – 0.4144 in) SBR208E INSTALLATION 1. Loosen the lock nut to adjust the input rod length so that the dimension shown satisfies the specified value. Standard value : 110 mm (4.33 in) 2. After adjusting, temporarily tighten the lock nut to install the booster assembly to the vehicle. At this time, make sure to install a gasket between the booster assembly and the vehicle. 3. Connect the brake pedal with the clevis of the input rod while installing brake pedal assembly onto brake booster studs. 4. Install nuts to secure brake pedal assembly to brake booster WFIA0159E and tighten to specification. 5. Install the brake piping from the brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-11, "Hydraulic Circuit". 6. Install the brake master cylinder to the brake booster. Refer to BR-14, "Removal and Installation". 7. Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal. 8. Tighten the lock nut of the input rod to the specification. 9. Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-5, "Inspection and Adjustment". 10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". Revision: August 2007 BR-22 2008 Quest VACUUM LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > VACUUM LINES A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718262 B C D E BR G H I WFIA0429E 1. Clamp 2. Vacuum hose 4. Vacuum piping A Brake booster 3. Check valve inclusion position stamp CAUTION: • Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if the hose is installed in the wrong direction. • Insert the vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in). • Never use lubricating oil during assembly. J K L M N SBR225B Inspection INFOID:0000000001718263 P VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Revision: August 2007 O BR-23 2008 Quest VACUUM LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Use a suitable tool to check. When connected to booster side (1): Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of (–66.7 kPa) [(–500 mmHg), (–19.69 inHg)] When connected to engine side (2): No vacuum will be applied WFIA0158E Revision: August 2007 BR-24 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DISC BRAKE A Component INFOID:0000000001718264 B C D E BR G H I J WFIA0483E 1. Union bolt 2. Copper washers 3. 4. Inner shim cover 5. Sliding pin 6. Cap 7. Air bleeder 8. Cylinder body 9. Sliding pin boot 10. Piston seal 11. Piston 12. Piston boot 13. Torque member 14. Outer shim cover 15. Inner shim 16. Inner pad 17. Pad retainer 18. Pad retainer 19. Outer pad 20. Outer shim 21. Lock washer 22. Torque member bolts ⇐ Front K Brake hose L M WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. CAUTION: • While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not depress the brake pedal. • It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. • Do not damage piston boot. • If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. • Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. • Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing". Revision: August 2007 BR-25 2008 Quest N O P FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Inspection INFOID:0000000001718265 PAD WEAR INSPECTION • Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit : 10 mm (0.394 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) MAA0439D Removal and Installation of Brake Pad INFOID:0000000001718266 REMOVAL WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: • While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. • Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. • If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims. • It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. • Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. • Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing". 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin. SBR433D 3. Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and shim assemblies, then pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: • Do not damage piston boot. • When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad retainer in the direction of arrow as shown so as not to deform it. • Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid. SBR556E INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 BR-26 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, refer to MA-11, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads. 2. Install pad retainers and pad assemblies to the torque member. A B C D SBR556E 3. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached, and install the cylinder body to the torque member. E NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: • By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and sub BR tank. Watch the level of the fluid in the sub tank. • When installing pad retainer, make sure it firmly seated to the toque member. G 4. Install the sliding pin and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component". 5. Check brake for drag. 6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". H CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing". I Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor INFOID:0000000001718267 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. J Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid". Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. K L M SFIA0140E 4. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor. N O INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor. Revision: August 2007 BR-27 P 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component". CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component". CAUTION: • Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts. • Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part. 4. 5. SFIA0140E Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing". Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly INFOID:0000000001718268 NOTE: Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when disassembling or assembling cylinder body. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor". Remove cylinder body from torque member, then sliding pin boots from torque member. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston. BRB0032D 4. Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. SFIA0141E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Cylinder Body CAUTION: • Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. • Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are any non-standard conditions. Revision: August 2007 BR-28 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. A Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: • Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. • Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. B C D DISC ROTOR INSPECTION E Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. BR Runout Inspection 1. 2. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. Measurement point Maximum runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 3. G : At a point 10 mm (0.39 in) from outer edge of the disc : 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) or less CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. H I SBR019B J K Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification, replace disc rotor. L Standard thickness Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) : 28 mm (1.10 in) : 26 mm (1.02 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or less M N SBR020B ASSEMBLY O CAUTION: Do not use Genuine NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. P Revision: August 2007 BR-29 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Apply rubber grease to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. SFIA2419E 2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. SFIA0155E PFIA0272E 4. 5. 6. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, refer to MA-11, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads. Attach the pad retainer to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. SBR556E 7. After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad, install it to the torque member. 8. Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification. Refer to BR-25, "Component". Brake Burnishing INFOID:0000000001718269 Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. Revision: August 2007 BR-30 2008 Quest FRONT DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. A B C D E BR G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-31 2008 Quest REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR DISC BRAKE Component INFOID:0000000001718270 WFIA0484E 1. Union bolt 2. Brake hose 3. Copper washer 4. 7. Cap 5. Air bleeder 6. Sliding pin bolt Cylinder body 8. Piston seal 9. 10. Piston Piston boot 11. Retaining ring 12. Inner shim cover Pad retainer 13. Inner shim 14. Inner pad 15. 16. Outer pad 17. Outer shim 18. Sliding pin boot 19. Torque member bolts 20. Sliding pin 21. Torque member ⇐ Front WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. CAUTION: • While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out. • It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. • Do not damage piston boot. • If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. • Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. • Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37, "Brake Burnishing". Revision: August 2007 BR-32 2008 Quest REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Inspection INFOID:0000000001718271 A PAD WEAR INSPECTION • Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard pad thickness Pad wear limit B : 8.5 mm (0.335 in) : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) C D BRA0010D E Removal and Installation of Brake Pad INFOID:0000000001718272 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. BR Remove wheel and tires assemblies using power tool. Remove bottom sliding pin bolt. Hang cylinder body with a wire then remove pads, pad retainers, and shims from torque member. G INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim to the outer pad. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: • By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and the sub tank. Watch the brake fluid level in the sub tank. • When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component". Check the brake for any drag. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or SBR556E replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37, "Brake Burnishing". Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor I J K L M N O INFOID:0000000001718273 REMOVAL Revision: August 2007 H P BR-33 2008 Quest REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: • Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged. PFIA0413E • Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. • Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes. • Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. • Remove wheel nut and rotor. WFIA0018E INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install the disc rotor. • Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component". CAUTION: • Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts. • Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body. 4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service". 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to MA-27, "Tire Rotation". CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-37, "Brake Burnishing". Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly INFOID:0000000001718274 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin boot from the torque member. Revision: August 2007 BR-34 2008 Quest REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. A B C SBR028A D 4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston. E BR G BRD0041D 5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. H I J PFIA0269E K CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: • Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. • Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace cylinder body. • Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use Genuine NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010 or KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. Revision: August 2007 BR-35 2008 Quest L M N O P REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. SFIA0156E 2. 3. 4. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. Apply a brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot pistonside lip into the piston boot. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. PFIA0272E Fix piston boot with retaining ring. CAUTION: • Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove. • Do not reuse the retaining ring. SFIA0158E 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to MA-11 to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the torque member. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification. Refer to BR-32, "Component". SBR556E DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions) Revision: August 2007 BR-36 2008 Quest REAR DISC BRAKE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. A Measurement position Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) 3. : At a point 10 mm (0.39 in) from outer edge of the disc. : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. B C SBR019B D Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) E : 16.0 mm (0.630 in) : 14.0 mm (0.551 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) or less BR G SBR020B Brake Burnishing H INFOID:0000000001718275 CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. NOTE: Burnish the brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal /foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal /foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool the brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-37 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification INFOID:0000000001718276 Unit: mm (in) Brake model AD35VB disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Front brake 47.62 (1.87) Pad Length × width × thickness 132.0 × 53.5 × 10 (5.20 × 2.11 × 0.39) Rotor outer diameter × thickness 290 × 28 (11.42 × 1.10) Brake model AD14VE disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake 42.86 (1.69) Pad Length × width × thickness 83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.27 × 1.30 × 0.33) Rotor outer diameter × thickness Master cylinder 308 × 16 (12.13 × 0.63) Cylinder bore diameter 25.4 (1.00) Booster model Brake booster Diaphragm diameter M245T Primary 252 (9.92) Secondary 230 (9.06) Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent, DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Recommended brake fluid Disc Brake INFOID:0000000001718277 Unit: mm (in) Brake model Pad wear limit Minimum thickness Maximum runout Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) Revision: August 2007 BR-38 AD35VB (Front) AD14VE (Rear) 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 (0.0020) 26.0 (1.02) 14.0 (0.55) 0.015 (0.0006) or less 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000001718278 A Unit: mm (in) B C D E BR G H WFIA0160E Free height “H” * 156.3 - 166.3 (6.15 - 6.55) Depressed pedal height “D” [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] * Clearance “C1” or “C2” between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD switch Pedal play “A” more than 90.3 (3.55) I 0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077) 3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43) J *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad Brake Booster INFOID:0000000001718279 K Unit: mm (in) Output rod length L 10.275 - 10.525 (0.4045 - 0.4144) Clevis length 110 (4.33) M N O P Revision: August 2007 BR-39 2008 Quest BRAKES SECTION BRC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS TCS/ABS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3 Precaution for Brake Control ..................................... 3 Precaution for CAN System ...................................... 4 Wheel Sensor System Inspection ............................28 Engine System Inspection .......................................29 ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection ............................29 Solenoid Valve System Inspection ..........................30 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection ...........................................................................31 Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .....................32 ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection .......................................................32 CAN Communication System Inspection .................33 Component Inspection .............................................33 PREPARATION ................................................... 5 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ..... 35 SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................... 6 Schematic ................................................................. 6 ABS Function ............................................................ 6 EBD Function ............................................................ 6 TCS Function ............................................................ 6 Wheel Sensors .......................................................... 7 Fail-Safe Function ..................................................... 7 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ......................................... 8 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................................... 9 System Description ................................................... 9 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................10 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 13 Schematic ............................................................... 14 Wiring Diagram - TCS - ........................................... 15 Basic Inspection ...................................................... 18 Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 19 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard .............. 19 CONSULT-III Function (ABS) ................................. 21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ..................................................28 Revision: August 2007 ABS Works Frequently ............................................35 Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................35 Long Stopping Distance ..........................................36 ABS Does Not Work ................................................36 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise .................36 ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ......................................37 ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ................................................37 Vehicle Jerks During TCS Activation .......................38 WHEEL SENSORS ........................................... 39 BRC G H I J K L M Removal and Installation .........................................39 SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 40 N Removal and Installation .........................................40 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) .................................................................. 41 O Removal and Installation .........................................41 VDC/TCS/ABS P SERVICE INFORMATION ........................... 43 PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 43 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................43 Precaution for Brake System ...................................43 BRC-1 2008 Quest Precaution for Brake Control .................................. 43 Precaution for CAN System .................................... 44 PREPARATION ................................................. 45 Special Service Tool ............................................... 45 Commercial Service Tool ....................................... 45 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................... 46 System Component ................................................ 46 ABS Function .......................................................... 46 EBD Function ......................................................... 46 TCS Function .......................................................... 47 VDC Function ......................................................... 47 Wheel Sensors ....................................................... 47 Fail-Safe Function .................................................. 47 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 48 CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 49 System Description ................................................. 49 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..................................... 50 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 50 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 53 Schematic ............................................................... 54 Wiring Diagram - VDC - .......................................... 55 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 59 Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 60 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 60 CONSULT-III Function (ABS) ................................. 63 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS .................................................. 70 Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................... 70 Engine System Inspection ...................................... 71 ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection .................. 71 Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection ............. 72 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection .......................................................................... 73 Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection ................................................................ 74 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection .......................................................................... 75 Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection ..................... 76 ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection ................................................. 77 Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection .......... 78 CAN Communication System Inspection ................ 78 Component Inspection ............................................ 79 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ..... 80 ABS Works Frequently ............................................ 80 Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................ 80 Long Stopping Distance .......................................... 81 ABS Does Not Work ............................................... 81 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................ 81 ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................... 82 ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 82 Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation .............. 83 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .................................... 84 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position ........................................................................ 84 WHEEL SENSORS ............................................ 85 Removal and Installation ......................................... 85 SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 86 Removal and Installation ......................................... 86 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ................................................................... 87 Removal and Installation ......................................... 87 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ........................... 89 Removal and Installation ......................................... 89 G SENSOR ........................................................ 90 Removal and Installation ...................................... Revision: August 2007 BRC-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718289 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: E • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. BRC • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SR section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000001718290 CAUTION: • Refer to MA-11 for recommended brake fluid. • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. • To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. • Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. • Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. • If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work. • Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at SBR686C very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brakes) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc brakes). WARNING: • Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Precaution for Brake Control INFOID:0000000001718292 • During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. • Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. Revision: August 2007 BRC-3 2008 Quest I J K L M N O P PRECAUTIONS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks. • If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. • If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or error. • If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits or improper wiring. Precaution for CAN System • • • • INFOID:0000000001718293 Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured. Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V. Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable. Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape. Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in). PKIA0306E • Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.) PKIA0307E Revision: August 2007 BRC-4 2008 Quest PREPARATION [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718294 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0070 (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors B C D E WFIA0101E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718295 Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) BRC G H I S-NT360 J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-5 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Schematic INFOID:0000000001718296 AWFIA0213GB ABS Function INFOID:0000000001718297 • The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles. • If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and the ABS warning lamp turns on. • The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III. • During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. • Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. EBD Function INFOID:0000000001718298 • Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which results in reduced rear wheel slippage. • If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on. • The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III. • During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. TCS Function INFOID:0000000001718299 • Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS/TCS control unit using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, engine fuel cut is conducted while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the engine torque and decrease the amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to achieve the optimum engine torque. • Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation. • TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient. • The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation. Revision: August 2007 BRC-6 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wheel Sensors INFOID:0000000001718300 A Each wheel sensor unit consists of a wheel hub with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The wheel sensors are installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. B C D WFIA0033E Fail-Safe Function INFOID:0000000001718301 E CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS system. BRC ABS/EBD SYSTEM In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp, ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function. 1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS system. 2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS and EBD system. G H TCS SYSTEM I In case of TCS system malfunction, the SLIP indicator lamp is turned on and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS system. In case of an electrical malfunction with the TCS system, the ABS control continues to operate normally without TCS control. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-7 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Hydraulic Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000001718302 WFIA0280E Revision: August 2007 BRC-8 2008 Quest CAN COMMUNICATION [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN COMMUNICATION A System Description INFOID:0000000001718303 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-9 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000001718304 INTRODUCTION The ABS/TCS system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/ TCS equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. SEF233G SEF234G Revision: August 2007 BRC-10 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WORK FLOW A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O AWFIA0209GB P CLARIFY CONCERN Revision: August 2007 BRC-11 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. • Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while driving. • It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. [TCS/ABS] SBR339B EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET WFIA0097E Revision: August 2007 BRC-12 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718305 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P WFIA0480E 1. Rear wheel sensor RH B122 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3. trol unit) E125 (engine removed for clarity) Front wheel sensor RH E117 4. Front wheel sensor LH E18 5. TCS OFF switch M6 Combination meter M24 7. Rear wheel sensor LH B123 Revision: August 2007 BRC-13 6. 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718306 WFWA0407E Revision: August 2007 BRC-14 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - TCS - INFOID:0000000001718307 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O WFWA0408E Revision: August 2007 BRC-15 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WFWA0409E Revision: August 2007 BRC-16 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O WFWA0410E P Revision: August 2007 BRC-17 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WFWA0411E Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000001718308 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION 1. 2. Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid. Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items. • If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified torque and recheck for leaks. Revision: August 2007 BRC-18 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads, replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks. • When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly. CAUTION: The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. 3. Check the brake pads for excessive wear. POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. A B C D ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND TCS OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp (when TCS OFF switch is off), turn on for approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the TCS OFF indicator lamp and the TCS OFF switch. Refer to BRC-33, "Component Inspection". Check BRC CAN communications. If there are no errors with the TCS OFF switch or the CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to DI-5. Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp G does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis. With the engine running, make sure the TCS OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the TCS OFF switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the H TCS OFF switch. Refer to BRC-33, "Component Inspection". Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or TCS OFF indicator lamp have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuI ator and electric unit (control unit). After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". J Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing INFOID:0000000001718309 K ABS warning lamp TCS OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF – – – – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second × × × – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds – – – Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine is started. When the TCS OFF switch is pressed (TCS function OFF) – × – – × × × – × × – When the TCS/ABS control unit is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). – × × – Condition TCS/ABS malfunction When the TCS is malfunctioning L N O P X: ON —: OFF Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard INFOID:0000000001718310 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-III CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 M BRC-19 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited. Data monitor Monitor item P POSI SIG N POSI SIG GEAR Display content A/T gear position A/T gear position A/T gear position FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed ACCEL POS SIG Open/close condition of throttle valve (linked with accelerator pedal). ENGINE SPEED With engine running BATTERY VOLT Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) CRANKING SIG Cranking status STOP LAMP SW Brake pedal operation ABS WARN LAMP ABS warning lamp ON condition (Note 2) MOTOR RELAY Operation status of motor and motor relay ACTUATOR RLY SLIP LAMP Revision: August 2007 Actuator relay operation status SLIP indicator lamp status (Note 3) Condition P position Reference value in normal operation Note: Error inspection checklist ON Other than P position OFF N position ON Other than N position OFF 1st gear 1 2nd gear 2 3rd gear 3 4th gear 4 Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] Vehicle running (Note 1) Almost in accordance with speedometer display (within ±10%) BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON) 0% Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON) 0 to 100% BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" With engine stopped 0 rpm Engine running Almost in accordance with tachometer display Ignition switch ON 10 to 16V Cranking ON Not cranking OFF Brake pedal depressed ON Brake pedal not depressed OFF ABS warning lamp ON ON ABS warning lamp OFF OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS not activated) OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS activated) ON Vehicle stopped (Ignition switch ON) OFF Vehicle stopped (Engine running) ON When SLIP indicator lamp is ON ON When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF OFF BRC-20 BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" BRC-29, "Engine System Inspection" BRC-32, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" — BRC-32, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" BRC-37, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" BRC-31, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" DI-9, "Arrangement of Combination Meter" 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Data monitor Monitor item OFF LAMP EBD WARN LAMP OFF SW ASCD SIGNAL FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL Display content TCS OFF indicator lamp status EBD warning lamp status TCS OFF switch ON/OFF status ASCD operation condition Solenoid valve operation TCS SIGNAL ABS SIGNAL EBD SIGNAL Signal status TCS FAIL SIG ABS FAIL SIG EBD FAIL SIG Fail signal status Note: Error inspection checklist A BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" B Reference value in normal operation Condition When TCS OFF indicator lamp is ON ON When TCS OFF indicator lamp is OFF OFF When EBD warning lamp is ON ON When EBD warning lamp is OFF OFF TCS OFF switch ON (When TCS OFF indicator lamp is ON) BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" C D ON BRC-33, "Component Inspection" TCS OFF switch OFF (When TCS OFF indicator lamp is OFF) OFF ASCD activated ON ASCD not activated OFF Actuator (solenoid) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (solenoid) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF TCS active ABS active EBD active ON TCS not active ABS not active EBD not active OFF TCS fail ABS fail EBD fail OFF ASCD and circuit E BRC G — H I TCS system ABS system EBD system J TCS system ABS system EBD system K Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. L Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected. OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS function is not activated. M Note 3: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS function is activated while driving. N OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS function is not activated. Flashing: TCS function is active during driving. O CONSULT-III Function (ABS) INFOID:0000000001718311 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Revision: August 2007 P BRC-21 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ABS diagnostic mode Description FUNCTION TEST Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". ECU PART NUMBER ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Description If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows: Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-III screen. 6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by touching “COPY”.) • When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and TCS OFF indicator lamp. 7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning component. 8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. CAUTION: • When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory. 10. Start the engine and touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-III screen to erase the error memory. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". CAUTION: If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 4. 11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that the ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off. Display Item List Revision: August 2007 BRC-22 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition FR LH SENSOR 1 [C1104] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open RR RH SENSOR 1 [C1101] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open FR RH SENSOR 1 [C1103] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open RR LH SENSOR 1 [C1102] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open FR LH SENSOR 2 [C1108] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR RH SENSOR 2 [C1105] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. FR RH SENSOR 2 [C1107] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR LH SENSOR 2 [C1106] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. PUMP MOTOR (Note 3) [C1111] During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open. During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground. Check system B C D BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" (Note 1) G H I J BRC-30, "Solenoid Valve System Inspection" K L M BRC-31, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" N O Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction. BRC-32, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too low. BRC-32, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1110] Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or wheel speed signal malfunction. BRC-29, "ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection" BRC-23 E BRC STOP LAMP SW [C1116] Revision: August 2007 A 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] • CAN communication line is open or shorted. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction • Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more. BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2) ENGINE SIGNAL 1 [C1130] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 2 [C1131] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 3 [C1132] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 4 [C1133] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 5 [C1134] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM is abnormal. ACTUATOR RLY [C1140] ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction. BRC-29, "Engine System Inspection" BRC-31, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check. Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line first. Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results indicates a malfunction of the actuator motor relay or circuit. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector. Touch “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-III screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". From the “DATA MONITOR” screen, touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information. When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed. Display Item List Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks GEAR × × × Gear position judged by PNP switch signal is displayed. FR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. FR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT (V) × × × Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed. ACCEL POS SIG (%) × – × Throttle valve open/close status judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. Revision: August 2007 BRC-24 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks A ENGINE SPEED (rpm) × × × Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. B STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF) × × × Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SLIP LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF) status is displayed. RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF) status is displayed. RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. OFF LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. OFF SW (ON/OFF) × × × TCS OFF switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ACTUATOR RLY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS actuator relay signal (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. EBD WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – – × Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. P POSI SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. N POSI SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. CRANKING SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Ignition switch START position signal input status is displayed. TCS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. Revision: August 2007 BRC-25 2008 Quest C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Data monitor item selection Item (Unit) Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ASCD SIG – – × ASCD (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ×: Applicable –: Not applicable ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: • Do not perform active test while driving. • Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system. • The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test. Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect the CONSULT-III to the data link connector and start the engine. Touch “ABS”. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. The “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen is displayed. Touch necessary test item. 6. 7. With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”. The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test. Solenoid Valve Operation Chart ABS solenoid valve Operation ABS solenoid valve (ACT) UP KEEP DOWN UP ACTUATOR UP ACTUATOR KEEP FR RH SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF FR LH SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF *: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF NOTE: • If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. • “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. • After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6. ABS Motor Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below. Operation ON OFF ABS actuator relay ON ON ABS motor relay ON OFF NOTE: Revision: August 2007 BRC-26 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. • “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-27 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Wheel Sensor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718312 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK TIRES Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). 4.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". 5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0105E 6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 BRC-28 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor harness connector. Wheel sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 27 Front LH 23 12 Front RH E125 Rear LH Rear RH 21 30 26 15 11 Wheel sensor Connector E18 E117 B123 B122 Continuity A B Terminal 1 C 2 1 2 1 Yes D 2 E 1 2 OK or NG BRC OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. G Engine System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718313 INSPECTION PROCEDURE H 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. I Self-diagnosis results ENGINE SIGNAL 1 J ENGINE SIGNAL 2 ENGINE SIGNAL 3 K ENGINE SIGNAL 4 ENGINE SIGNAL 5 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. L 2.ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION M 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. N O ABS/TCS Control Unit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718314 INSPECTION PROCEDURE P 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results CONTROLLER FAILURE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? Revision: August 2007 BRC-29 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check all wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-28, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS Actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Solenoid Valve System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718315 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND 1. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 2 Body ground — Measured value (Approx.) 12V WFIA0475E Revision: August 2007 BRC-30 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 3 4 Body ground — — [TCS/ABS] A Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection B C WFIA0476E D E INFOID:0000000001718316 INSPECTION PROCEDURE BRC 1.CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. G Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR H ACTUATOR RLY Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. I 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION J Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. K 3. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM 1. L Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 1 Body ground — M Measured value (Approx.) 12V N O WFIA0106E P Revision: August 2007 BRC-31 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 4 Body ground — [TCS/ABS] Measured value (Approx.) 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection WFIA0477E INFOID:0000000001718317 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results STOP LAMP SW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3.STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION Turn the ignition switch ON and check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 8 and ground. 8 - Ground Brake pedal depressed : Battery voltage (approx. 12V) Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. ABS/TCS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection WFIA0478E INFOID:0000000001718318 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Revision: August 2007 BRC-32 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > A Self-diagnosis results BATTERY VOLTAGE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. B 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION C 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. D 3.ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION E Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. Signal name ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Power supply 16 Ground Ground Measured value BRC G Battery voltage (Approx. 12V) 3 — 4 H Continuity should exist. I OK or NG OK >> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair the circuit. CAN Communication System Inspection J INFOID:0000000001718319 K INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal. 2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis. Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Print out the self-diagnosis results, and refer to LAN-38. NO >> Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted. Component Inspection L M N INFOID:0000000001718320 TCS OFF SWITCH O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-33 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2. 1-2 : Continuity should exist when pushing the switch. Continuity should not exist when releasing the switch. WFIA0157E Revision: August 2007 BRC-34 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ABS Works Frequently A INFOID:0000000001718321 B 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". C D 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. • Wheel sensor mounting for looseness • Wheel sensors for physical damage • Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. E BRC 3.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS G Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair as necessary. 4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BR-13, "Inspection". Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection". Unexpected Pedal Action H I J K INFOID:0000000001718322 L 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION M Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". N 2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE Check brake pedal stroke. Is pedal stroke excessive? YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection". NO >> GO TO 3. O P SBR540A Revision: August 2007 BRC-35 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE 1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 2. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: • Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. • Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN-38. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection". 4.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. • Wheel sensor mounting for looseness • Wheel sensors for physical damage • Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Long Stopping Distance INFOID:0000000001718323 1.CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 2. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: • Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. • Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN-38. OK or NG OK >> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently". NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-18, "Basic Inspection". ABS Does Not Work INFOID:0000000001718324 CAUTION: The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less. 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation. • Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NG >> Go to BRC-37, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On". Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise INFOID:0000000001718325 NOTE: During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 1.CHECK SYMPTOM Revision: August 2007 BRC-36 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom occur only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NO >> GO TO 2. [TCS/ABS] A B 2.RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on? YES NO >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently". C D ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718326 1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSIBLE LINKS E BRC Check 40A fusible link f and 40A fusible link l for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link layout, refer to PG-3. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing. 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 1 and ground and terminal 2 and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). G H I J K WFIA0479E L 3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 3 and ground and terminal 4 and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. M N O WFIA0476E ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718327 1.CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis? Revision: August 2007 BRC-37 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> Refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NO >> Refer to DI-23. Vehicle Jerks During TCS Activation [TCS/ABS] INFOID:0000000001718328 1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION Perform data monitor with CONSULT-III for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. 3.ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 4. 4.TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 6.CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION Check the CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Refer to LAN-38. Revision: August 2007 BRC-38 2008 Quest WHEEL SENSORS [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHEEL SENSORS A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718329 B C D E BRC WFIA0146E CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. • When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. CAUTION: • Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. • Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing wheel sensor, make sure no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor, to the inside of the sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-39 2008 Quest SENSOR ROTOR [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718330 NOTE: The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". NOTE: The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 BRC-40 2008 Quest ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718331 B C D E BRC G H I J WFIA0416E 1. To left front 2. To rear right 3. 4. To front right 5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 8. Actuator harness connector K To rear left From the master cylinder primary side L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid". Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: • To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. Remove the bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Refer to BR-11 when connecting the brake tubes. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). • Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. Revision: August 2007 BRC-41 2008 Quest M N O P ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". Revision: August 2007 BRC-42 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718332 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front D air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: E • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. BRC • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SR section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. H Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000001718333 CAUTION: • Refer to MA-11 for recommended brake fluid. • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. • To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. • Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. • Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. • If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work. • Always tighten brake lines to specified torque when installing. • Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at SBR686C very low mileage. Refer to BR-30, "Brake Burnishing" (front disc brake) or BR-37, "Brake Burnishing" (rear disc brake). WARNING: • Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Precaution for Brake Control J K L M N O INFOID:0000000001718335 • During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. • Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. Revision: August 2007 I BRC-43 2008 Quest P PRECAUTIONS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks. • If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. • If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or error. • If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits or improper wiring. • If the following components are replaced with non-genuine components or modified, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on or the VDC system may not operate properly. Components related to suspension (shock absorbers, struts, springs, bushings, etc.), tires, wheels (exclude specified size), components related to brake system (pads, rotors, calipers, etc.), components related to engine (muffler, ECM, etc.), components related to body reinforcement (roll bar, tower bar, etc.). • Driving with broken or excessively worn suspension components, tires or brake system components may cause the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp to turn on, and the VDC system may not operate properly. • When the TCS or VDC is activated by sudden acceleration or sudden turn, some noise may occur. The noise is a result of the normal operation of the TCS and VDC. • When driving on roads which have extreme slopes (such as mountainous roads) or high banks (such as sharp curves on a freeway), the VDC may not operate normally, or the VDC warning lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp may turn on. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine. • Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. with VDC turned off may cause the yaw rate/side G sensor to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine. Precaution for CAN System • • • • INFOID:0000000001718336 Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured. Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V. Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable. Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape. Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in). PKIA0306E • Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.) PKIA0307E Revision: August 2007 BRC-44 2008 Quest PREPARATION [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718337 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0070 (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors B C D E WFIA0101E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718338 Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) BRC G H I S-NT360 J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-45 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION System Component INFOID:0000000001718339 AWFIA0214GB ABS Function INFOID:0000000001718340 • The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles. • If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and the ABS warning lamp turns on. • The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III. • During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. • Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. EBD Function INFOID:0000000001718341 • Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which results in reduced rear wheel slippage. • If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on. • The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-III. • During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Revision: August 2007 BRC-46 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TCS Function INFOID:0000000001718342 A • Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS/TCS/VDC control unit using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, the drive wheel right and left brake fluid pressure control and engine fuel cut are conducted while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the engine torque and decrease the amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to achieve the optimum engine torque. • Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation. • TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient. • The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation. VDC Function INFOID:0000000001718343 B C D • In addition to the ABS/TCS function, the driver steering amount and brake operation amount are detected from the steering angle sensor and pressure sensor, and the vehicle's driving status (amount of under steer- E ing/over steering) is determined using inputs from the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, wheel speed sensors, etc. and this information is used to improve vehicle stability by controlling the braking and engine torque application to the wheels. BRC • The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of VDC operation. • During VDC operation, the vehicle body and brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. • The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on when the vehicle is G subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is on a turn table or a ship while the engine is running or on a steep slope. In this case, restart the engine on a normal road and if the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off, there is no problem. H Wheel Sensors INFOID:0000000001718344 Each wheel sensor unit consists of a wheel hub with a series of internal magnets and a sensor element. The wheel sensors are installed on the inner side of the wheel knuckles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a square-wave signal. The frequency increases as the wheel speed increases. I J K WFIA0033E Fail-Safe Function L INFOID:0000000001718345 CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS/VDC system. M ABS/EBD SYSTEM In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function. 1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC system. 2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC or EBD system. VDC/TCS SYSTEM In case of TCS/VDC system malfunction, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are turned on and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS/VDC system. In case of an electrical malfunction with the TCS/VDC system, the ABS continues to operate normally without TCS/VDC control. Revision: August 2007 BRC-47 2008 Quest N O P SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Hydraulic Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000001718346 WFIA0281E Revision: August 2007 BRC-48 2008 Quest CAN COMMUNICATION [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN COMMUNICATION A System Description INFOID:0000000001718347 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-49 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000001718348 INTRODUCTION The ABS/TCS/VDC system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS/VDC complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/ TCS/VDC equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. SEF233G SEF234G Revision: August 2007 BRC-50 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WORK FLOW A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O AWFIA0205GB P CLARIFY CONCERN Revision: August 2007 BRC-51 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. • Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while driving. • It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. [VDC/TCS/ABS] SBR339B EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET WFIA0097E Revision: August 2007 BRC-52 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718349 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P WFIA0481E 1. Rear wheel sensor RH B122 Revision: August 2007 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3. trol unit) E125 (engine removed for clarity) BRC-53 Front wheel sensor RH E117 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Front wheel sensor LH E18 7. Spiral cable (includes steering angle 8. senor) M47 (steering wheel removed for clarity) 5. Combination meter M24 6. VDC OFF switch M6 Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor B125 9. Rear wheel sensor LH B123 Schematic INFOID:0000000001718350 WFWA0412E Revision: August 2007 BRC-54 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - VDC - INFOID:0000000001718351 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O WFWA0413E Revision: August 2007 BRC-55 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WFWA0414E Revision: August 2007 BRC-56 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O WFWA0415E P Revision: August 2007 BRC-57 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WFWA0416E Revision: August 2007 BRC-58 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O WFWA0417E Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000001718352 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION 1. 2. Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid. Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items. • If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified torque and recheck for leaks. Revision: August 2007 BRC-59 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads, replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks. • When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly. CAUTION: The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. 3. Check the brake pads for excessive wear. POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp (when VDC OFF switch is off), turn on for approximately 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-79, "Component Inspection". Check CAN communications. If there are no errors with the VDC OFF switch or CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to DI-5. Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis. With the engine running, make sure the VDC OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the VDC OFF switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-79, "Component Inspection". Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or VDC OFF indicator lamp have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing INFOID:0000000001718353 ABS warning lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF – – – – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second × × × – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds – – – Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine is started. When the VDC OFF switch is pressed (VDC function OFF) – × – – × × × – × × – When the ABS/TCS/VDC control unit is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). – × × – Condition ABS/TCS/VDC malfunction When the VDC is malfunctioning X: ON —: OFF Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard INFOID:0000000001718354 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-III CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 BRC-60 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited. Data monitor Monitor item Display content P POSI SIG A/T gear position N POSI SIG A/T gear position GEAR FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR ACCEL POS SIG A/T gear position Wheel speed Open/close condition of throttle valve (linked with accelerator pedal). Condition Reference value in normal operation ON Other than P position OFF N position ON Other than N position OFF 1st gear 1 2nd gear 2 3rd gear 3 4th gear 4 Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] Vehicle running (Note 1) Almost in accordance with speedometer display (within ±10%) BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON) 0% Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON) 0 to 100% BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection" With engine stopped 0 rpm BRC-71, "Engine System Inspection" I Engine running Almost in accordance with tachometer display BRC-72, "Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection" J With engine running Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor Straight-ahead Approx. 0 deg STR ANGLE SIG Steering wheel turned –756 to 756 deg YAW RATE SEN Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 d/s Vehicle running –100 to 100 d/s Transverse G detected by side G-sensor Vehicle stopped SIDE G-SENSOR Approx. 0 m/s2 Vehicle running –16.7 to 16.7 m/s2 BATTERY VOLT CRANKING SIG Cranking status STOP LAMP SW Brake pedal operation OFF SW ABS WARN LAMP Revision: August 2007 VDC OFF switch ON/OFF status ABS warning lamp ON condition (Note 2) B P position ENGINE SPEED Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Note: Error inspection checklist A Ignition switch ON 10 to 16V Cranking ON Not cranking OFF Brake pedal depressed ON Brake pedal not depressed OFF VDC OFF switch ON (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON) ON VDC OFF switch OFF (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF) OFF ABS warning lamp ON ON ABS warning lamp OFF OFF BRC-61 C BRC-33, "CAN Communication System Inspection" D E BRC G H K BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/Side/ Decel G Sensor System Inspection" L BRC-77, "ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" M — N BRC-76, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" BRC-79, "Component Inspection" BRC-82, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Data monitor Monitor item Display content EBD WARN LAMP EBD warning lamp status MOTOR RELAY Operation status of motor and motor relay ACTUATOR RLY OFF LAMP SLIP LAMP FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL CV1 CV2 SV1 SV2 Actuator relay operation status VDC OFF indicator lamp status (Note 3) SLIP indicator lamp status (Note 4) Solenoid valve operation VDC switch-over valve status DECEL G-SEN Longitudinal acceleration detected by Decel G-Sensor FLUID LEV SW ON/OFF status of brake fluid level switch STOP LAMP SW2 Revision: August 2007 ASCD operation condition Condition Reference value in normal operation When EBD warning lamp is ON ON When EBD warning lamp is OFF OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS not activated) OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS activated) ON Vehicle stopped (Ignition switch ON) OFF Vehicle stopped (Engine running) ON When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON ON When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF OFF When SLIP indicator lamp is ON ON When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF OFF Actuator (solenoid) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (solenoid) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-III) or actuator relay is inactive (when in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF Vehicle stopped ON Vehicle running OFF When brake fluid level switch ON ON When brake fluid level switch OFF OFF ASCD activated ON ASCD not activated OFF BRC-62 Note: Error inspection checklist BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection" BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection" BRC-74, "Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection" BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/Side/ Decel G Sensor System Inspection" DI-23 ASCD and circuit 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Data monitor Monitor item VDC SIGNAL TCS SIGNAL ABS SIGNAL EBD SIGNAL VDC FAIL SIG TCS FAIL SIG ABS FAIL SIG EBD FAIL SIG Display content Signal status Fail signal status Condition VDC active TCS active ABS active EBD active VDC not active TCS not active ABS not active EBD not active VDC fail TCS fail ABS fail EBD fail Note: Error inspection checklist Reference value in normal operation ON OFF ON A B VDC system TCS system ABS system EBD system C D VDC system TCS system ABS system EBD system E Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp BRC ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected. OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated. Note 3: ON/OFF timing of VDC OFF indicator lamp G ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC OFF switch is ON. OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation.) And when VDC OFF switch is OFF. Note 4: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing ON: For approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS/VDC function is activated while driving. OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated. H I Flashing: TCS/VDC function is active during driving J CONSULT-III Function (ABS) INFOID:0000000001718355 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. K ABS diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ECU PART NUMBER M Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR FUNCTION TEST N Conducted by CONSULT-III instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. O SELF-DIAGNOSIS Description If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows: Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. Revision: August 2007 L BRC-63 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-III screen. 6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by touching “COPY”.) • When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp. 7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning component. 8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. CAUTION: • When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory. 10. Start the engine and touch “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-III screen to erase the error memory. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". CAUTION: If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 4. 11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp, and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off. Display Item List Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system FR LH SENSOR 1 [C1104] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open RR RH SENSOR 1 [C1101] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open FR RH SENSOR 1 [C1103] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open RR LH SENSOR 1 [C1102] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open FR LH SENSOR 2 [C1108] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR RH SENSOR 2 [C1105] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. FR RH SENSOR 2 [C1107] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR LH SENSOR 2 [C1106] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is shorted, or sensor power voltage is unusual. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. STOP LAMP SW 1 [C1116] Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction. BRC-76, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT [C1143, C1163] Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or steering angle sensor is malfunctioning. BRC-72, "Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection" YAW RATE SENSOR [C1145] Yaw rate sensor has generated an error, or yaw rate sensor signal line is open or shorted. BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" Revision: August 2007 BRC-64 BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" (Note 1) 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV1 [C1164] Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV2 [C1165] Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV1 [C1166] Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV2 [C1167] Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. PUMP MOTOR (Note 3) [C1111] During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open. During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground. Check system A B C D BRC-74, "Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection" E BRC G H I J BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" K BRC-77, "ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too low. ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL [C1144] Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished. ST ANG SEN COM CIR [C1156] CAN communication line or steering angle sensor has generated an error. LONGITUDINAL G-SENSOR [C1113] Longitudinal G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of longitudinal G-sensor is open or shorted. BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1110] Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or wheel speed signal malfunction. BRC-71, "ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection" O CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] • CAN communication line is open or shorted. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction • Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more. BRC-78, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2) P LATERAL G-SENSOR [C1146] Lateral G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of lateral G-sensor is open or shorted. BRC-73, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" BR FLUID LEVEL LOW [C1155] Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is shorted. BRC-78, "Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection" Revision: August 2007 BRC-65 BRC-72, "Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection" 2008 Quest L M N TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system ENGINE SIGNAL 1 [C1130] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 2 [C1131] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 3 [C1132] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 4 [C1133] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 5 [C1134] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ENGINE SIGNAL 6 [C1136] ECM judges the communication between ABS/TCS/VDC control unit and ECM is abnormal. ACTUATOR RLY [C1140] ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction. BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" STOP LAMP SW 2 [C1176] ASCD brake switch or circuit malfunction. ACS-2 BRC-71, "Engine System Inspection" Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check. Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line first. Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-III self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator motor relay or circuit. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector. Touch “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-III screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". From the “DATA MONITOR” screen, touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information. When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed. Display Item List Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks GEAR × × × Gear position judged by PNP switch signal is displayed. FR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. FR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT (V) × × × Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed. ACCEL POS SIG (%) × – × Throttle valve open/close status judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. Revision: August 2007 BRC-66 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks A ENGINE SPEED (rpm) × × × Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. B STR ANGLE SIG (deg) × – × Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor is displayed. YAW RATE SEN (d/s) × × × Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed. DECEL G-SEN (d/s) × × × Longitudinal acceleration detected by decel G-sensor is displayed. × – × Transverse acceleration detected by side G-sensor is displayed. STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF) × × × Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. OFF SW (ON/OFF) × × × VDC OFF switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SLIP LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. SIDE G-SENSOR (m/s2) FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/OFF) status is displayed. RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. OFF LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × VDC OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ACTUATOR RLY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS actuator relay signal (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. EBD WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – – × Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. P POSI SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. N POSI SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. CRANKING SIG (ON/OFF) – – × Ignition switch START position signal input status is displayed. CV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Primary side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. Revision: August 2007 BRC-67 2008 Quest C D E BRC G H I J K L M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU CV2 (ON/OFF) – – × Secondary side switch-over solenoid valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Primary side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SV2 (ON/OFF) – – × Secondary side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. VDC FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × VDC fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FLUID LEV SW (ON/OFF) × – × Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × VDC operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. STOP LAMP SW2 – – × ASCD (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ×: Applicable –: Not applicable ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: • Do not perform active test while driving. • Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system. • The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test. Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect the CONSULT-III to the data link connector and start the engine. Touch “ABS”. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. The “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen is displayed. Touch necessary test item. 6. 7. With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”. The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test. Solenoid Valve Operation Chart Revision: August 2007 BRC-68 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ABS solenoid valve Operation ABS solenoid valve (ACT) UP KEEP DOWN UP ACTUATOR UP ACTUATOR KEEP FR RH SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF FR LH SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF A B C D E *: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF NOTE: • If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. • “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. • After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6. BRC G ABS Motor Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below. H Operation ON OFF ABS actuator relay ON ON ABS motor relay ON OFF I NOTE: • If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. • “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-69 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Wheel Sensor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718356 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK TIRES Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). 4.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". 5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair the circuit. 6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor harness connector. Revision: August 2007 BRC-70 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wheel sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Connector Terminal 13 Front LH 14 27 Front RH 26 E125 29 Rear LH 28 11 Rear RH 12 A Wheel sensor Connector E18 E117 B123 B122 Continuity Terminal B 1 2 1 2 1 C Yes 2 D 1 2 E OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". BRC NG >> Repair the circuit. Engine System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718357 G INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK H Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results I ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 J ENGINE SIGNAL 3 ENGINE SIGNAL 4 ENGINE SIGNAL 5 K ENGINE SIGNAL 6 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. L 2.ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION M 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection N INFOID:0000000001718358 O INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK P Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results CONTROLLER FAILURE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? Revision: August 2007 BRC-71 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check all wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-70, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS Actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Steering Angle Sensor System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718359 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL ST ANG SEN COM CIR Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.DATA MONITOR CHECK Conduct “Data Monitor” of the “STR ANGLE SIG” to check if the status is normal. Steering condition Data monitor Straight-ahead -5deg - +5deg Turn wheel 90° to the right. Approx. +90° Turn wheel 90° to the left. Approx. -90° OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and steering angle sensor M47. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 4. CHECKING STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER AND GROUND 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 BRC-72 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check voltage between steering angle sensor connector M47 and ground. [VDC/TCS/ABS] A Terminals (+) Steering angle sensor connector Terminal (-) Measured value (Approx.) B C 1 M47 3 Ground 12V 12V WFIA0398E D 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check resistance between steering angle sensor connector M47 and ground. E Terminals (-) Measured value Ω (Approx.) Ground 0Ω (+) Steering angle sensor connector Terminal M47 2 BRC G OK or NG WFIA0399E OK >> Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC78, "CAN Communication System Inspection". If the CAN communication system is OK, replace spiral cable (steering angle sensor) and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". NG >> Repair the circuit. Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection H I INFOID:0000000001718360 J CAUTION: Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. when VDC function is OFF may cause the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine. K INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK L Check self-diagnosis results. M Self-diagnosis results YAW RATE SENSOR LONGITUDINAL G-SENSOR N LATERAL G-SENSOR CAUTION: If vehicle is on turntable at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-II self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction. However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off turntable or other moving surface, and start engine. Results will return to normal. Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125. Revision: August 2007 BRC-73 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3.YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR HARNESS INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor trol unit) connector E125 connector B125 19 1 36 2 35 3 34 4 4 5 6 6 Continuity Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 4.YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Connect the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector B125 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Use “Data Monitor” to check if the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor signals are normal. Vehicle status YAW RATE SEN (Data monitor standard) SIDE G-SENSOR (Data monitor standard) DECEL G-SEN (Data monitor standard) When stopped -4 to +4 deg/s -1.1 to +1.1 m/s2 -0.11 G to +0.11 G Right turn Negative value Negative value - Left turn Positive value Positive value - Speed up - - Negative value Speed down - - Positive value OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-90, "Removal and Installation". Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718361 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL Revision: August 2007 BRC-74 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-diagnosis results A RR RH IN ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL B FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL C RR LH OUT ABS SOL CV 1 CV 2 D SV 1 SV 2 E Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. BRC 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. G H 3. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND 1. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 16 Body ground — I Measured value (Approx.) 12V J K WFIA0111E 2. L Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. M ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 31 46 Body ground — — Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection N O WFIA0112E P INFOID:0000000001718362 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Revision: August 2007 BRC-75 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR ACTUATOR RLY Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM 1. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 1 Body ground — Measured value (Approx.) 12V WFIA0106E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 46 Body ground — Measured value (Approx.) 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection WFIA0113E INFOID:0000000001718363 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results STOP LAMP SW 1 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: August 2007 BRC-76 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION A 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3.STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 terminal 23 and ground. B C D 23 - Ground Brake pedal depressed E : Battery voltage (approx. 12V) Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V BRC OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0114E G ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection INFOID:0000000001718364 H INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK I Check self-diagnosis results. J Self-diagnosis results BATTERY VOLTAGE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. K 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION L 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. M N 3.ABS/TCS/VDC CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. Signal name ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Power supply 45 Ground 31 Ground Measured value P Battery voltage (Approx. 12V) — 46 Continuity should exist. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 BRC-77 O 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair the circuit. Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection [VDC/TCS/ABS] INFOID:0000000001718365 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. 2. Check the brake fluid reservoir fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid. Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results BR FLUID LEVEL LOW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch connector E21. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3.CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH AND THE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch connector E21 and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. ABS actuator and elec- Brake fluid level switch tric unit (control unit) connector E21 connector E125 38 + 38 Ground Ground - Continuity Continuity should exist. Continuity should not exist. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair the circuit. 4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH Check continuity between brake fluid level switch terminals + and -. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace brake fluid level switch. CAN Communication System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718366 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR Revision: August 2007 BRC-78 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal. 2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis. Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Print out the self-diagnosis results, and refer to LAN-38. NO >> Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001718367 A B C VDC OFF SWITCH D Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2. 1-2 : Continuity should exist when pushing the switch. Continuity should not exist when releasing the switch. E BRC PFIA0307E G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-79 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ABS Works Frequently INFOID:0000000001718368 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". 2.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. • Wheel sensor mounting for looseness • Wheel sensors for physical damage • Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3.CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service" or RAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair as necessary. 4.CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BR-13, "Inspection". Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection". Unexpected Pedal Action INFOID:0000000001718369 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". 2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE Check brake pedal stroke. Is pedal stroke excessive? YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection". NO >> GO TO 3. SBR540A Revision: August 2007 BRC-80 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE A 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: • Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. • Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN38. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection". B C D 4.CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. E • Wheel sensor mounting for looseness • Wheel sensors for physical damage • Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections BRC OK or NG OK >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness G connector. Then retest. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Long Stopping Distance INFOID:0000000001718370 1.CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE H I 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: • Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. • Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN38. OK or NG OK >> Go to BRC-80, "ABS Works Frequently". NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-59, "Basic Inspection". ABS Does Not Work J K L INFOID:0000000001718371 M CAUTION: The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less. N 1.CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation. • Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NG >> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On". Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise INFOID:0000000001718372 NOTE: During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Revision: August 2007 BRC-81 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom occur only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on? YES NO >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-80, "ABS Works Frequently". ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718373 1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSIBLE LINKS Check 40A fusible link f and 40A fusible link l for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link layout, refer to PG-3. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing. 2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 1 and ground and terminal 16 and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). WFIA0116E 3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 31 and ground and terminal 46 and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-87, "Removal and Installation". NO >> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. WFIA0112E ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718374 1.CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS Revision: August 2007 BRC-82 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis? YES >> Refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". NO >> Refer to DI-23. Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation [VDC/TCS/ABS] A B INFOID:0000000001718375 C 1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 2. D E 2.ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION Perform data monitor with CONSULT-III for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. BRC G 3.ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 4. H I 4.TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CONNECTOR INSPECTION J K Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 6.CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION Check the CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Refer to LAN-38. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-83 2008 Quest ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position INFOID:0000000001718376 After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-III. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT” on CONSULT-III screen in this order. BBIA0336E 4. Touch “START”. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “SELECTION FROM MENU”, and “STR ANGLE SIG” on CONSULT-III screen. Then check that “STR ANGLE SIG” is within 0±2.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Revision: August 2007 BRC-84 2008 Quest WHEEL SENSORS [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHEEL SENSORS A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718377 B C D E BRC WFIA0146E CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. • When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. CAUTION: • Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. • Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing wheel sensor, make sure no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) are adhered to the pick-up part of the sensor, to the inside of the sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-85 2008 Quest SENSOR ROTOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718378 NOTE: The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". NOTE: The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 BRC-86 2008 Quest ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718379 B C D E BRC G H I J WFIA0416E K 1. To left front 2. To rear right 3. To rear left 4. To front right 5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 8. Actuator harness connector L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Changing Brake Fluid". Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: • To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. • Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. Remove the bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Refer to BR-11 when connecting the brake tubes. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). • Always tighten brake tubes to specified torque when installing. Revision: August 2007 BRC-87 2008 Quest M N O P ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Never reuse drained brake fluid. • After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-10, "Bleeding Brake System". Revision: August 2007 BRC-88 2008 Quest STEERING ANGLE SENSOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > STEERING ANGLE SENSOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003297118 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Remove the spiral cable. Refer to SRS-36, "Removal and Installation". Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). C D E ALFIA0123ZZ CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". INSTALLATION 1. BRC G H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 BRC-89 2008 Quest G SENSOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] < SERVICE INFORMATION > G SENSOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718381 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: • Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. • Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. WFIA0485E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification. CAUTION: • Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Revision: August 2007 BRC-90 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION CO ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM A CO C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 RADIATOR ........................................................ 16 Removal and Installation .........................................16 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 2 COOLING FAN .................................................. 18 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................19 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................18 Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan ...........18 WATER PUMP .................................................. 19 THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING .................................................................... 24 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 6 Troubleshooting Chart ............................................... 6 G H I Removal and Installation .........................................24 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING .......... 26 COOLING SYSTEM ............................................ 8 Cooling Circuit ........................................................... 8 Schematic ................................................................. 9 F J Removal and Installation .........................................26 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 27 ENGINE COOLANT ...........................................10 K Standard and Limit ..................................................27 System Inspection ................................................... 10 Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 11 L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001717142 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000001717143 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING • After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using the Tool and remove the sealant. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. • In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the Tool where the sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. • Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove all adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. Attach the sealant tube to Tool. • Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42. PBIC0003E Revision: August 2007 CO-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions using Tool. Tool number : WS39930000 ( – A ) CO C WBIA0567E D • If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. • As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be applied outside the holes. • Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. • If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. • Do not retighten after the installation. • After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. E F G SEM159F H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717144 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing oil pan and timing chain case S-NT046 Pressing the tube of liquid gasket WS39930000 ( – ) Tube presser S-NT052 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter S-NT564 For refilling engine cooling system KV991J0070 (J-45695) Coolant refill tool LMA053 Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant KV991J0010 (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tool Revision: August 2007 INFOID:0000000001717145 CO-4 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts A CO C PBIC0190E Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap D E PBIC1982E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-5 2008 Quest OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000001717146 Symptom Poor heat transfer Check items Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed Coolant circulation Damaged fins Dust contamination or paper clogging — Physical damage Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation Fan assembly — Radiator shroud — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction Damaged radiator shroud — Improper coolant mixture ratio — Poor coolant quality — — Coolant viscosity — Cooling hose Heater pump Water pump Radiator cap Coolant leaks Loose clamp Cracked hose Poor sealing Loose Poor sealing O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient coolant Radiator Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Revision: August 2007 CO-6 Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration 2008 Quest OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Check items High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time A CO Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Except cooling system parts malfunction C Powertrain system malfunction Installed improper size wheels and tires — D Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow Blocked bumper Mud contamination or paper clogging Blocked radiator E Installed car brassiere — F Blocked condenser G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-7 2008 Quest COOLING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit INFOID:0000000001717147 WBIA0494E 1. Cylinder block (RH) 2. Oil cooler 3. Cylinder head (RH) 4. Water pump 5. Radiator 6. Water inlet 7. Thermostat 8. Cylinder head (LH) 9. Cylinder block (LH) 10. Heater pump Revision: August 2007 CO-8 2008 Quest COOLING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001717148 A CO C D E F G H WBIA0332E I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-9 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE COOLANT System Inspection INFOID:0000000001717149 WARNING: • Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. • Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: • Improper attachment • Leaks • Cracks • Damage • Loose connections • Chafing • Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL • Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. • Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. SMA412B CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Testing pressure : 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. WBIA0568E CHECKING RADIATOR CAP 1. Inspect the radiator cap. • Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. • Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. Revision: August 2007 CO-10 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Pull the negative-pressure valve to open it and check that it closes completely when released. • Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of the radiator cap negative-pressure valve. • Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing conditions of the negative-pressure valve. A CO C SMA967B D 3. Check radiator cap relief pressure using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) E Standard: 78 – 98 kPa (0.8 – 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 – 14 psi) F Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 9 psi) • When connecting the radiator cap to the tester, apply water or coolant to the cap seal surface. • Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values. G WBIA0570E H CHECKING RADIATOR Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows: • Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. • When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward. • Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. 6. Check for leaks. Changing Engine Coolant I J K L INFOID:0000000001717150 WARNING: • To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. • Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way. M N DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. 2. 3. Remove engine undercover. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial cooling system drain. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before installation. • Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts. O P LBIA0063E Revision: August 2007 CO-11 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs. PBIC0846E CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. PBIC1285E 5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. • If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT Revision: August 2007 CO-12 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and tighten to specification. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. • The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. • Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42 . A CO C D E F G PBIC1285E H I J PBIC0846E K Radiator drain plug Cylinder block front drain plug Cylinder block RH drain plug Cylinder block LH drain plug 2. 3. : Refer to CO-16 . : Refer to EM-116 . : Refer to EM-116 . : Refer to EM-116 . L If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-13 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number 5. : KV991J0070 (J-45695) Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. • Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation". Engine coolant capacity (with reservoir) 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure 7. 8. : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: LLIA0058E The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum LLIA0057E 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. Revision: August 2007 CO-14 2008 Quest ENGINE COOLANT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. A CO C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-15 2008 Quest RADIATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > RADIATOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717151 WBIA0495E 1. Radiator 2. Radiator upper clip 4. A/T fluid cooler hose 5. Radiator hose (lower) 6. Radiator fan assembly 7. Engine coolant reservoir tank 8. Radiator hose (upper) 9. Radiator filler cap 10. Radiator core connection 11. Radiator drain plug 3. Mounting rubber 12. Air guide 13. O-ring WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Drain the coolant from the radiator. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Partially drain the A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid". Remove fresh air duct. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler hoses. NOTE: Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. Disconnect the engine coolant reservoir tank hose. Revision: August 2007 CO-16 2008 Quest RADIATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to release the lock, as shown. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not pull tabs excessively. 8. Disconnect fan electrical connectors. 9. Remove the radiator fan assembly. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core when removing. 10. If necessary, remove the radiator fan assembly from the radiator. Refer to CO-18, "Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan". 11. If necessary, remove the rubber mounting from the radiator. A CO C PBIC1216E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. E Apply pressure using Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) F WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. CAUTION: Attach a hose to the A/T fluid cooler as well. G SLC933-A 2. H Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage. I J K SLC934 L INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: • Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". M Installation of Radiator Upper Clip 1. 2. 3. Install the rmounting ubber on mounting pin of radiator core. Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connector, then insert the radiator upper clip straight into the radiator core connections until a click is heard. After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following method to make sure it is fully connected. • Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections. • Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator core forward and backward to make sure they are securely connected. N O P PBIC1241E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. Revision: August 2007 CO-17 2008 Quest COOLING FAN < SERVICE INFORMATION > COOLING FAN Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717152 REMOVAL 1. Remove radiator. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Start and warm up engine. Visually inspect that there are no engine coolant or A/T fluid leaks. Disassembly and Assembly of Radiator Fan INFOID:0000000001717153 WBIA0362E 1. Fan blade 2. Fan shroud 3. Fan motor DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove fan blade. Remove fan motor from fan shroud. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: August 2007 CO-18 2008 Quest WATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WATER PUMP A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717154 CO C D E F G WBIA0363E 1. Water pump 2. Timing chain tensioner 3. Chain tensioner cover 4. Water pump cover 5. Water drain plug 6. O-rings H CAUTION: • When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. • Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. • After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. I J REMOVAL 1. Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". 4. Remove right-hand wheel and tire assembly using power tool. 5. Remove splash shield. 6. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". 7. Remove idler pulley and idler pulley bracket. 8. Support engine at lower oil pan with a transmission jack and remove front engine insulator and bracket. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. K L M N O P PBIC0846E Revision: August 2007 CO-19 2008 Quest WATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Remove the chain tensioner assembly. a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. b. Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released. NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. SLC444B c. d. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever and into the tensioner body hole. e. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise. PBIC0848E 12. Remove chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case. PBIC0849E 13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket. PBIC1210E Revision: August 2007 CO-20 2008 Quest WATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm (1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump. • Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. • Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. 15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. A CO C JLC357B D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. E F G SLC943A H INSTALLATION 1. 2. Install new O-rings to water pump. Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown. NOTE: Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. I J K PBIC1397E 3. Install the water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump. • Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. • Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. Water pump bolts L M N 9.6 N·m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) O SLC031B 4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from installation area of rear timing chain case. Revision: August 2007 CO-21 2008 Quest P WATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose. NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. PBIC0848E 6. Install the timing chain tensioner. Timing chain tensioner bolts 7. 8.1 N·m (0.83 kg-m, 72 in-lb) Remove the stopper pin. NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. SLC448B 8. a. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the front cover. SLC446B b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent, to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to GI-42. SLC447B Revision: August 2007 CO-22 2008 Quest WATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. A Water drain plug : 9.5 N·m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb) CO C PBIC0846E D 10. Tighten idler pulley bolts. Idler pulley bolts : 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) E 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. • Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. F INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION G • Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-23 2008 Quest THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING < SERVICE INFORMATION > THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717155 WBIA0364E 1. Gasket 2. Engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". CAUTION: Perform when engine is cool. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". Disconnect lower radiator hose. Disconnect oil cooler line. Remove engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly. • Do not disassemble engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly. Replace them as a unit, if necessary. WBIA0334E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift. Thermostat Valve opening temperature Valve lift Valve closing temperature Standard Values 80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F) 8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F) 77°C (171°F) or lower SLC949A Revision: August 2007 CO-24 2008 Quest THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal paying attention to the following. • Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb coolant. A CO INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-25 2008 Quest WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING < SERVICE INFORMATION > WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717156 WBIA0365E 1. Water outlet 2. Gasket 3. O-ring 4. Heater pipe 5. Water connector 6. Water bypass pipe 7. Engine coolant temperature sensor 8. Washer 9. Water bypass hose REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Drain coolant from radiator and drain plugs on both sides of cylinder block. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. Remove fresh air duct, air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, mass air flow sensor and upper air cleaner case as an assembly. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose. Remove connector(s) from heater pipe. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. • When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring. • Refill engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. Revision: August 2007 CO-26 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Standard and Limit INFOID:0000000001717157 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) CO Unit: Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level) (US gal, Imp gal) 10.5 (2 3/4, 2 3/8) C THERMOSTAT Valve opening temperature 80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F) Valve lift D 8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 in / 203°F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) or lower E RADIATOR Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Cap relief pressure Standard F 78 – 98 (0.8 – 1.0, 11 – 14) Limit 59 (0.6, 9) Leakage test pressure 157 (1.6, 23) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 CO-27 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION DI DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) ..............................................................29 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) ..........................................30 Component Inspection .............................................31 PRECAUTION ..................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 A/T INDICATOR ................................................ 32 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Wiring Diagram - AT/IND - .......................................32 Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................33 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ............................33 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 COMBINATION METERS ................................... 5 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 5 System Description ................................................... 5 Arrangement of Combination Meter .......................... 9 Internal Circuit ......................................................... 10 Wiring Diagram - METER - ..................................... 11 Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..................................................................... 13 Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter ....................................................................... 13 Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter ............ 13 CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A) ................... 15 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 17 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 17 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 17 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection ............................. 18 Water Temperature Signal Inspection ..................... 19 Engine Speed Signal Inspection ............................. 19 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection .......................... 19 Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies ...................................................................... 21 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position ........... 21 DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit ............. 21 Electrical Component Inspection ............................. 22 Combination Meter .................................................. 22 WARNING CHIME ............................................. 34 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................34 System Description ..................................................34 CAN Communication System Description ...............35 Wiring Diagram - CHIME - .......................................36 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................37 Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout ......................................................................38 Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter .......................................................................38 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................38 Preliminary Check ...................................................38 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................38 All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate .......................39 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) .......................................................................39 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate ...................41 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................42 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate ..........42 G H I J DI L M N O REAR SONAR SYSTEM ................................... 45 WARNING LAMPS .............................................23 Schematic ............................................................... 23 Wiring Diagram - WARN - ....................................... 24 Revision: August 2007 F DI-1 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................45 System Description ..................................................45 Wiring Diagram - SONAR - ......................................47 Sonar Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ......................................................................49 2008 Quest P Terminal and Reference Value for Sonar Control Unit ......................................................................... 49 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 50 Pre-diagnosis Inspection ........................................ 50 Self-Diagnosis Function .......................................... 50 Preliminary Check .................................................. 52 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 53 Component Inspection ............................................ 53 Rear Sonar Sensors ............................................... 54 Sonar Control Unit .................................................. 54 REAR VIEW MONITOR ..................................... 55 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 55 System Description ................................................. 55 Revision: August 2007 DI-2 Schematic ............................................................... 57 Wiring Diagram - R/VIEW - ..................................... 58 Rear View Camera Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ................................................. 61 Terminal and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit ............................................... 61 CONSULT-III Function (REARVIEW CAMERA) ..... 61 Side Distance Guideline Correction ........................ 62 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 63 Rear View Is Not Displayed with the A/T Selector Lever in R Position .................................................. 64 Rear View Camera Control Unit .............................. 67 Rear View Camera .................................................. 68 2008 Quest PRECAUTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTION Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001719179 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. C D E F G H I J DI L M N O P Revision: August 2007 DI-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719180 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0191E Revision: August 2007 DI-4 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > COMBINATION METERS A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719181 B C D E F G WKIA5219E 1. 4. Combination meter M24 2. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 3. (fuel level sensor) B252 (view with fuel tank removed) ECM E16 H ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125 (view with engine removed) I System Description INFOID:0000000001719182 J UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT • Speedometer, odometer, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the combination meter. DI • Warning indicators are controlled by signals drawn from the CAN communication system and components connected directly to the combination meter. • Digital meter is adopted for odometer. L NOTE: The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter is erased when the battery is disconnected. M • Odometer/trip meter and A/T indicator segments can be checked in self-diagnosis mode. • Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode. • All warning indicators except air bag, washer fluid, security and seat belt can be checked in self-diagnosis mode. N NOTE: Under the following conditions, the meters will perform a homing function. The meter pointers will move down slightly and then move back to the resting position. This is a normal design condition. O • Approximately 60 seconds after turning the ignition switch from the ON to the OFF position • If the battery is disconnected and then reconnected Illumination control The unified meter control unit outputs the odometer, A/T indicator, fuel and temperature gauge lighting when the ignition switch is turned on. When the lighting switch is turned on, the illumination control switch can be used to adjust the brightness of the combination meter and instrument panel switch illumination. When the ignition switch is in the START position, the combination meter dial lighting and illumination control switch lighting are turned off. For additional combination meter illumination control information, refer to LT-127, "System Description". POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 DI-5 2008 Quest P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Power is supplied at all times • through 15A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 40. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 38. Ground is supplied • to combination meter terminal 20 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides a water temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. SKIB6905E TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. SKIB6904E FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable resistor signal supplied • to combination meter terminal 6 • through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 • through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 • from combination meter terminal 4. SPEEDOMETER ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. WKIA5370E ODO/TRIP METER Revision: August 2007 DI-6 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) converts a pulse signal received from the wheel sensor into a vehicle speed signal. This signal is then transmitted to the unified meter via CAN communication. • The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the combination meter and the mileage is displayed. How to Change the Display For Odo/Trip Meter Operating the odo/trip meter switch toggles the mode in the following order. A B C D E F G WKIA5371E H • Odo/trip meter switch (1) location. • When resetting with trip A displayed only trip A display is reset. (Trip B operates the same way.) I J DI WKIA5372E FAIL-SAFE Combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed below when communication is lost. Function Fail-safe specifications M Speedometer Tachometer Zero indication Fuel gauge N Water temperature gauge Illumination control Segment LCD L Meter illumination Change to nighttime mode when communication is lost. Odometer Freeze current indication. A/T position Display turns off. Buzzer O Buzzer turns off. P Revision: August 2007 DI-7 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Function Fail-safe specifications ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp TCS/VDC OFF indicator lamp Lamp turns on when communication is lost. SLIP indicator lamp O/D OFF warning lamp Oil pressure warning lamp Door warning lamp Malfunction indicator lamp CRUISE indicator lamp Warning/indicator lamp Lamp turns off when communication is lost. SET indicator lamp High beam indicator Turn signal indicator lamp Driver and passenger seat belt warning lamp Lamp turns off when disconnected. Charge warning lamp Security indicator lamp Air bag warning lamp Lamp turns on when disconnected. Low tire pressure warning lamp Lamp will flash every second for 1 minute and then stay on continuously thereafter. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 DI-8 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Arrangement of Combination Meter INFOID:0000000001719183 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O LKIA0708E Revision: August 2007 DI-9 2008 Quest P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Internal Circuit INFOID:0000000001719184 WKWA4659E Revision: August 2007 DI-10 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - METER - INFOID:0000000001719185 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4660E Revision: August 2007 DI-11 2008 Quest P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4661E Revision: August 2007 DI-12 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719186 A B C LKIA0698E D Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter INFOID:0000000001719187 E Condition Terminal No. Wire color Item 1 R/Y Illumination control switch — 4 B Fuel level sensor signal input — — 6 G/Y Fuel level sensor signal output — — 9 L CAN-H — — — 11 P CAN-L — — — 20 B/W Ground ON — 0V 21 B/W Illumination ground ON — 0V 38 O Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage 40 Y/R Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage Ignition switch Reference value (V) (Approx.) Operation or condition Lighting switch ON Refer to LT-127, "System Description". G Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter H I DI L The following items can be checked during Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode. • Gauge sweep and present gauge values. • Illuminates all odometer/trip meters and A/T indicator segments. • Illuminates all micro controlled lamps/LEDs regardless of switch position. • Displays estimated present battery voltage. • Displays seat belt buckle switch LH status. M N HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE NOTE: • Once entered, combination meter self-diagnosis mode will function with the ignition switch in ON or START. Combination meter self-diagnosis mode will exit upon turning the ignition switch to OFF or ACC. • If the diagnosis function is activated with trip A displayed, the mileage on trip A is reset to 0000.0. (Trip B operates the same way.) To initiate combination meter self-diagnosis mode, refer to the following procedure. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, while pressing the odometer/trip meter switch for 5 - 8 seconds. When the diagnosis function is activated, the odometer/trip meter will display tESt. NOTE: Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit when self-diagnosis mode of combination meter does not start. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Replace combination meter if normal. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE FUNCTIONS DI-13 J INFOID:0000000001719188 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION Revision: August 2007 F 2008 Quest O P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > To interpret combination meter self-diagnosis mode functions, refer to the following table. Event Odometer Display Description of Test/Data Odometer/trip meter A/B switch held from 5 to 8 seconds (or until released) tESt Switch released GAGE Performs sweep of all gauges, then displays present gauge values. Switch pressed (All segments illuminated) Lights all LCD segments. Compare with picture. Notes: Initiating self-diagnosis mode Gauges sweep within 10 seconds WKIA5373E Switch pressed bulb Illuminates all micro-controlled lamps/LEDs. Part may not be configured for all lamps (functions) that turn on during test. This is normal. The following lamps/LEDs are not micro driven and will not illuminate: • Air bag • Washer fluid • Security • Seat belt Switch pressed r XXXX, FAIL Return to normal operation of all lamps/LEDs and displays "r XXXX". If a malfunction exists, "FAIL" will flash. Switch pressed nrXXXX N/A Switch pressed EE XX, FAIL Displays "EE XX". Switch pressed (4 times) DtXX through Epr XX N/A Switch pressed 1nF XX Displays 8-bit market info value in Hex format. Switch pressed (3 times) cYL XX through tF N/A XXXXX "Corrected" speed value in hundredths of MPH. Gauge indication may be slightly higher. This is normal. Will display "-----" if message is not received. Will display "99999" if data received is invalid. XXXXX "Corrected" speed value in hundredths of KPH. Gauge indication may be slightly different. This is normal. Will display "-----" if message is not received. Will display "99999" if data received is invalid. Switch pressed t XXXX Tachometer value in RPM. Gauge indication may be higher at higher RPM. This is normal. Will display "-----" if message is not received. Switch pressed F1XXXX Present fuel level A/D input. This input represents fuel sender input. 000-009 = Short circuit 010-254 = Normal range 255 = Open circuit Switch pressed Switch pressed Revision: August 2007 DI-14 If a malfunction exists, "FAIL" will flash. $31 = USA $2A = Canada 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Event Odometer Display Description of Test/Data Notes: A "Filtered" fuel level. Fuel gauge indicates present filtered level per indication standard. 000-009 = Short circuit 010-254 = Normal range 255 = Open circuit XXXC Last temperature gauge input value in degrees C. Temperature gauge indicates present temperature per indication standard. Will display "---"C if message is not received. Will display "999" if data received is invalid. High = 130 deg C Normal = 70 - 105 deg C Low = less than 50 deg C Switch pressed BAtXXX Estimated present battery voltage. Switch pressed rES -X Seat belt buckle switch LH status. Switch pressed (31 times) PA -XX through PA1-XX N/A Switch pressed Switch pressed Switch pressed F2XXXX B C D 1= Buckled 0 = Unbuckled E F Return to beginning of self-diagnosis cycle. GAGE CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A) INFOID:0000000001719189 G CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. H METER diagnosis mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Description Displays combination meter self-diagnosis results. I Displays combination meter input/output data in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J Display Item List CONSULT-III display CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] VEHICLE SPEED CIRC [B2205] Malfunction Reference Page Malfunction is detected in CAN communication lines. CAUTION: Even when there is no malfunction on CAN communication system, malfunction may be misinterpreted when battery has low voltage (when maintaining 7V-8V for about 2 seconds) or 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is removed. DI-21 Malfunction is detected when an erroneous speed signal is input. CAUTION: Even when there is no malfunction on speed signal system, malfunctions may be misinterpreted when battery has low voltage (when maintaining 7V8V for about 2 seconds). DI-18 L M "TIME" indicates the condition of the self-diagnosis results judged by each signal input. • Normal: If the system is presently operating properly, but had a malfunction in the past, the time will indicate "1-63". • Malfunction: Soon after detecting malfunctions by self-diagnoses or current malfunction, "0" is indicated. After the system returns to normal operating condition, every time the ignition switch is cycled (turned to OFF from ON), a value of one is added to the counter (i.e. "1"→"2"→"3"···"63"). When the ignition switch is cycled 64 times, the result of the self-diagnoses will be erased. If a malfunction is detected again, "0" will be indicated. DATA MONITOR Display Item List Revision: August 2007 DI-15 DI 2008 Quest N O P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Contents SPEED METER [km/h] or [mph] X X This is the angle correction value after the speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is converted into the vehicle speed. SPEED OUTPUT [km/h] or [mph] X X This is the angle correction value before the speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is converted into the vehicle speed. TACHO METER [rpm] X X This is the converted value for the engine speed signal from the ECM. W TEMP METER [°C] or [°F] X X This is the converted value for the water temp signal from the ECM. FUEL METER [lit.] X X This is the processed value for the signal (resistance value) from the fuel gauge. Display item [Unit] DISTANCE [km] X X This is the calculated value for the speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), the signal (resistance signal) from the fuel gauge and fuel consumption from ECM. FUEL W/L [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of low fuel warning lamp. C-ENG W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of malfunction indicator lamp. AIR PRES W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of low tire pressure indicator lamp. SEAT BELT W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt warning lamp. X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of buzzer. DOOR W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door warning lamp. HI-BEAM IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of high beam indicator. TURN IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of turn indicator. OIL W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of oil pressure warning lamp. VDC/TCS IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of VDC OFF indicator lamp. ABS W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ABS warning lamp. SLIP IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SLIP indicator lamp. BRAKE W/L [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of brake warning lamp.* BUZZER [ON/OFF] X PNP P SW [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of park/neutral position (park) switch. PNP N SW [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of park/neutral position (neutral) switch. O/D OFF SW [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF switch. BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of parking brake switch. P RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift P range indicator. R RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift R range indicator. N RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift N range indicator. D RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift D range indicator. 4 RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 4 range indicator. 3 RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 3 range indicator. 2 RANGE IND [ON/OFF] X X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T shift 2 range indicator. X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF indicator lamp. O/D OFF W/L [ON/OFF] CRUISE IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE indicator. SET IND [ON/OFF] X Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET indicator. *: Monitor keeps indicating “OFF” when brake warning lamp is on because of parking brake operation or low brake fluid level. Revision: August 2007 DI-16 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719190 A HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Perform preliminary check. Refer to "PRELIMINARY CHECK". According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom. Does the meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2. Inspection End. B C PRELIMINARY CHECK D 1.CHECK OPERATION OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (COMBINATION METER) Perform self-diagnosis mode of combination meter. Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". Does self-diagnosis mode operate normally? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK COMBINATION METER (CONSULT-III) Perform self-diagnosis of combination meter. Refer to DI-15, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)". Self-diagnostic results No malfunction detected>>Inspection End. Malfunction detected>>Refer to DI-15, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)". 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT OF COMBINATION METER Check power supply and ground circuit of combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". NG >> Repair power supply and ground circuit of combination meter. Symptom Chart E F G H I J INFOID:0000000001719191 DI Trouble phenomenon Possible cause Improper speedometer or odometer indication. Refer to DI-18, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection". Improper tachometer indication. Refer to DI-19, "Engine Speed Signal Inspection". Improper water temperature gauge indication. Refer to DI-19, "Water Temperature Signal Inspection". Improper fuel gauge indication. L M Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". Low-fuel warning lamp indication is irregular. Improper A/T position indication. Refer to DI-32. Illumination control does not operate. Refer to LT-127. N Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719192 O 1.CHECK FUSES Check for blown combination meter fuses. P Unit Combination meter Power source Fuse No. Battery 19 Ignition switch ON or START 14 Refer to DI-11, "Wiring Diagram - METER -". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 DI-17 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal Ignition switch position (–) 38 M24 Ground 40 OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage WKIA5212E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the harness for open between combination meter and fuse. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal M24 20 21 (–) Ground Continuity Yes WKIA5213E OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection INFOID:0000000001719193 1.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. • With traction control but without VDC system, refer to BRC-21, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". • With VDC system, refer to BRC-63, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. 2.COMPARE SPEEDOMETER AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS 1. 2. Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III. Drive the vehicle at different speeds and compare speedometer gauge indication with "SPEED METER" and "SPEED OUTPUT" of "DATA MONITOR". Speedometer and "DATA MONITOR" indications should be close. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. Revision: August 2007 DI-18 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". A Water Temperature Signal Inspection INFOID:0000000001719194 1.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS B Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. C 2.COMPARE WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS 1. 2. Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III. Run the engine at different temperatures and compare water temperature gauge indication with "W TEMP METER" of "DATA MONITOR". Indication should be as follows: D E High: Normal: Cold: 130°C (266°F) 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F) Less than 50°C (122°F) F OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". Engine Speed Signal Inspection G INFOID:0000000001719195 H 1.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. I J 2.COMPARE TACHOMETER AND DATA MONITOR INDICATIONS 1. 2. Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III. Run the engine at different speeds and compare tachometer gauge indication with "TACHO METER" of DI "DATA MONITOR". Tachometer and "DATA MONITOR" indications should be close. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. L NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719196 M FUEL GAUGE The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction. • Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank shifts and the indication may fluctuate. • If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the indication will update slowly. • If the vehicle is tilted when the ignition switch is turned ON, fuel in the tank may flow to one direction resulting in a change of reading. N O LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstances, the fuel level in the tank varies, and the warning lamp ON timing may be changed. 1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Select “METER/M&A” on CONSULT-III. Using “FUEL METER” of “DATA MONITOR”, compare the value of DATA MONITOR with fuel gauge pointer of combination meter. Revision: August 2007 DI-19 2008 Quest P COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Fuel gauge pointer Reference value of data monitor [lit.] Full Approx. 76 3/4 Approx. 54 1/2 Approx. 38 1/4 Approx. 22 Empty Approx. 7 Does the data monitor value approximately match the fuel gauge indication? YES >> GO TO 2 NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to XX-XX, "*****". 2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit terminals (meter-side and harness-side) for poor connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> Repair or replace terminals or connectors. 3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector (B) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector (A). A 3. B Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B252 2 M24 6 Continuity Yes Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector (A) and ground. A Connector Terminal B252 2 WKIA5215E Continuity Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4 NG >> Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector (B) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector (A). A 2. B Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B252 5 M24 4 Continuity Yes Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector (A) and ground. WKIA5216E Revision: August 2007 DI-20 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A A Connector Terminal B252 5 Continuity Ground No B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5 NG >> Repair harness or connector. C 5.CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION Check fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-22, "Electrical Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the internal components in the fuel tank. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation". Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies D E INFOID:0000000001719197 F 1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or just before or just after stopping. Does the indication value vary only during driving or just before or just after stopping? YES >> The fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal. NO >> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, and perform the trouble diagnosis. Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position G H INFOID:0000000001719198 1.CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO FULL-POSITION I Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. J 2.CHECK IGNITION SWITCH POSITION DI Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON? YES or NO YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge. NO >> GO TO 3. L 3.OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION M Is the vehicle parked on an incline? YES or NO YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface. NO >> GO TO 4. N 4.CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO EMPTY-POSITION O During driving, does the fuel gauge move gradually toward empty-position? YES or NO YES >> Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-22, "Electrical Component Inspection". NO >> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the internal components in the fuel tank. P DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit INFOID:0000000001719199 Symptom: Display CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] at the result of self-diagnosis for combination meter. Revision: August 2007 DI-21 2008 Quest COMBINATION METERS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode for "METER/M&A" with CONSULT-III. >> Go to "CAN SYSTEM". Refer to LAN-38. Electrical Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001719201 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation". Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminals 2 and 5. Terminals 2 5 Float position mm (in) Resistance value Ω (Approx.) *1 Empty 15 (0.59) 81 *2 Full 193 (7.6) 5 *1 and *2: When float rod is in contact with stopper. LKIA0402E Combination Meter INFOID:0000000001719202 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". Revision: August 2007 DI-22 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WARNING LAMPS A Schematic INFOID:0000000001719203 B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O P ALNWA0168GB Revision: August 2007 DI-23 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - WARN - INFOID:0000000001719204 WKWA4663E Revision: August 2007 DI-24 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4664E P Revision: August 2007 DI-25 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4665E Revision: August 2007 DI-26 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4666E P Revision: August 2007 DI-27 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4667E Revision: August 2007 DI-28 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4668E Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) P INFOID:0000000001719205 1.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT SIGNAL Activate IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 DI-29 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL Select “DATA MONITOR” of “IPDM E/R”. Refer to PG-18, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)". Operate ignition switch with “OIL P SW” of data monitor and check operation status. When ignition switch is in ON position (Engine stopped) When engine running : OIL P SW CLOSE : OIL P SW OPEN OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". 3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E121 and oil pressure switch connector F106. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal 57 and oil pressure switch harness connector F106 terminal +. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LKIA0245E 4.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-31, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace the oil pressure switch. Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) INFOID:0000000001719206 NOTE: For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-8, "Inspection". 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E121 and oil pressure switch connector F106. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121 terminal 57 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LKIA0247E 2.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check oil pressure switch. Refer to DI-31, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace oil pressure switch. Revision: August 2007 DI-30 2008 Quest WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001719207 A OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Check continuity between oil pressure switch and ground. B Condition Oil pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Continuity Engine stopped Less than 29 (0.3, 4) Yes Engine running More than 29 (0.3, 4) No C D ELF0044D E F G H I J DI L M N O P Revision: August 2007 DI-31 2008 Quest A/T INDICATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND - INFOID:0000000001719208 WKWA4669E Revision: August 2007 DI-32 2008 Quest A/T INDICATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719209 A A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate INFOID:0000000001719210 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL B 1. Select "METER/M&A" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. C CONSULT-III display P RANGE IND R RANGE IND N RANGE IND D RANGE IND 4 RANGE IND 3 RANGE IND 2 RANGE IND Switch operation D Operation status P range position ON Except for P range position OFF R range position ON Except for R range position OFF N range position ON Except for N range position OFF D range position ON Except for D range position OFF 4 range position ON Except for 4 range position OFF 3 range position ON Except for 3 range position OFF 2 range position ON Except for 2 range position OFF E F G H I J OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". NG >> GO TO 2. DI 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-69, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". NG >> Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 DI-33 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719211 WKIA5220E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination meter M24 3. Key switch M27 4. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 5. Front door switch LH B8 6. Seat belt buckle switch LH B12 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125 (view with engine removed) System Description INFOID:0000000001719212 FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fuse (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to key switch terminal 1. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through body grounds M57, M61, and M79. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied • through key switch terminal 2 • to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 Revision: August 2007 DI-34 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through front door switch LH terminal 1. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. A LIGHT WARNING CHIME B With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [This is the operation of the light warning chime, except when headlamp battery saver control operates (for 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied • from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 • to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 • through front door switch LH terminal 1. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime. SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied • to combination meter terminal 24 • through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. Combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime. CAN Communication System Description C D E F G H I J INFOID:0000000001719213 DI Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 DI-35 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - CHIME - INFOID:0000000001719214 WKWA4670E Revision: August 2007 DI-36 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4671E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719215 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Revision: August 2007 DI-37 2008 Quest P WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719216 LKIA0698E Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter Terminal No. Wire color 9 L 11 Condition INFOID:0000000001719217 Ignition switch Measurement method Reference value (V) (Approx.) CAN-H OFF — — P CAN-L OFF — — 20 B/W Ground OFF — 0V 24 W/L Seat belt buckle switch LH ON 38 O Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage 40 Y/R Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage Item Unfastened (ON) Fastened (OFF) 0 Battery voltage How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001719218 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-34, "System Description". Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-38, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719219 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719220 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Revision: August 2007 DI-38 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM diagnostic test item A Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR Displays BCM input/output data in real time. ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part B Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION C Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. D BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR E Data Monitor Item Monitored item IGN ON SW F Description Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). LIGHT SW 1ST Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch. G H ACTIVE TEST Active Test Item I Test item Malfunction is detected when··· LIGHT WARN ALM This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen. IGN KEY WARN ALM This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen. SEAT BELT WARN TEST This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-III screen. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J DI L Display Item List Monitored Item CAN communication CONSULT-III display CAN communication [U1000] Description M Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. NOTE: If "CAN communication U1000" is indicated, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to LAN-38. All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719221 O 1.CHECK BCM CHIME OPERATION Select "BUZZER" on CONSULT-III, and perform "LIGHT WARN ALM", "IGN KEY WARN ALM", OR "SEAT BELT WARN TEST" active test. Does chime sound? YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Revision: August 2007 N DI-39 2008 Quest P WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > Chime Does Operate) INFOID:0000000001719222 1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR" changes with the status of front door LH. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed : DOOR SW-DR ON : DOOR SW-DR OFF Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 and ground. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed : Approx. 0V : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA1515E 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector M19 (A) and front door switch LH connector B8 (B). Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 (A) terminal 47 and front door switch LH harness connector B8 (B) terminal 1. Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 (A) terminal 47 and ground. WKIA5217E Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal 1 and exposed metal of switch while pushing and releasing switch. When front door LH switch is released When front door LH switch is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace the front door switch LH. Revision: August 2007 DI-40 LKIA0404E 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719223 A 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Refer to DI-36, "Wiring Diagram - CHIME -". Is the fuse blown? YES >> Replace the fuse. Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. NO >> GO TO 2. B C 2.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. Does warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" or DI-39, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)". D E 3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "KEY ON SW" changes when the key is inserted/removed from the ignition key cylinder. F G When key is inserted in ignition key cylinder When key is removed from ignition key cylinder : KEY ON SW ON H : KEY ON SW OFF I Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. J Terminals (+) Connector Terminal M18 37 Condition (–) Ground Voltage (V) Key is inserted Battery voltage Key is removed 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 4. DI L LKIA0255E M 4.CHECK KEY SWITCH 1. 2. N Disconnect key switch connector. Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2. Terminals 1 Condition 2 O Continuity Key is inserted Yes Key is removed No P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the key switch. WKIA3206E 5.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 DI-41 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM connector M18. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and key switch harness connector M27 terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1139E 6.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between key switch harness connector M27 terminal 1 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check harness for open between key switch and fuse. WKIA1140E Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719224 1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions. Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate". 2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Select "BCM". With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "LIGHT SW 1ST" status changes when the lighting switch is moved from ON (1st position) to OFF. Lighting switch ON (1st position) Lighting switch OFF : LIGHT SW 1ST ON : LIGHT SW 1ST OFF Without CONSULT-III Check combination switch. Refer to LT-79, "Combination Switch Reading Function". OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-79, "Combination Switch Reading Function". Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719225 1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION 1. With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. 2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition. Does warning chime sound for both steps? Revision: August 2007 DI-42 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-39, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate". A 2.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP OPERATION Turn ignition switch ON. Buckle and unbuckle driver seat belt while watching seat belt warning lamp. NOTE: While performing this test, the front passenger seat must be unoccupied. When seat belt is fastened When seat belt is unfastened B C : Warning lamp OFF : Warning lamp ON OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 3. D 3.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL E Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 and ground. F Terminals (+) Connector Terminal M24 24 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Seat belt is fastened G Battery voltage Seat belt is unfastened H 0 WKIA5218E OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". NG >> GO TO 4. I 4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH J 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH terminals 1 and 2. Terminals 1 Condition 2 DI L Continuity Seat belt is fastened No Seat belt is unfastened Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH. M WKIA1143E N 5.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 1. O P Continuity should exist. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WKIA3295E OK or NG Revision: August 2007 DI-43 2008 Quest WARNING CHIME < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> Check seat belt buckle switch ground circuit. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 DI-44 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR SONAR SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719226 B C D E F G H I WKIA5221E 1. Sonar buzzer M117 2. Rear sonar system OFF switch M116 3. Rear sonar sensor LH outer B202 4. Rear sonar sensor LH inner B203 5. Rear sonar sensor RH inner B204 6. Rear sonar sensor RH outer B205 7. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 8. F29 (view with battery tray removed) Sonar control unit B56 (view with rear lower finisher assembly LH removed) System Description J DI INFOID:0000000001719227 L FUNCTION With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to sonar control unit terminal 8, and • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 2. Ground is supplied • to sonar control unit terminal 6 • through body grounds B7 and B19. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, and the selector lever in the R position, power is supplied • to sonar control unit terminal 5 • from park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 4. With power and ground supplied, selector lever in R position, and the rear sonar system OFF switch ON, the rear sonar system will detect obstacles within 1.8 m (5.9 ft) of the rear sonar sensors. The vehicle operator is notified of obstacles by varied lengths of tone from the sonar buzzer depending on distance of obstacle being sensed. REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH Revision: August 2007 DI-45 2008 Quest M N O P REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > With power and ground supplied to the sonar control unit, selector lever in R position, the sonar system can be disabled and the sonar buzzer silenced by momentarily pressing the rear sonar system OFF switch. The rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp will be illuminated in the rear sonar system OFF switch. To disable the rear sonar system, ground is supplied • to sonar control unit terminal 13 • through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 7 • through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 6 • from body grounds M57, M61, and M79. To light the rear sonar system OFF indicator, power is supplied • to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 3 • from sonar control unit terminal 4. Ground is supplied • to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 2 • from body grounds M57, M61, and M79. The rear sonar system and buzzer will be disabled and the rear sonar system OFF indicator will be illuminated until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the rear sonar system will be enabled. Depressing the rear sonar system OFF switch momentarily will enable the rear sonar system also. Enabling the rear sonar system will cause the rear sonar system OFF indicator to go out. SONAR BUZZER With the power supplied to the sonar control unit, selector lever in R position and a stationary object at least 7.0 cm (2.8 in.) wide and 10.0 cm (3.9 in.) tall closer than 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) will be detected by the rear sonar sensors, the sonar buzzer will sound a tone. As the vehicle approaches the object, the rate of the tone will increase. When the object is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the rear bumper, the tone will sound continuously. Power is supplied • to sonar buzzer terminal + • from sonar control unit terminal 7. Ground is supplied • to sonar buzzer terminal • from sonar control unit terminal 3. REAR SONAR SENSOR With power and ground supplied to the rear sonar sensors, the sonar sensors transmit a 38.4 kHz ultrasonic signal. This signal is reflected back to the sensor by objects large enough and close enough to be detected. The rear sonar sensors measure the time from the transmitted signal to the time the signal is reflected back and sends this information to the sonar control unit. Power is supplied • to rear sonar sensors terminal 1 • from sonar control unit terminal 16. Ground is supplied • to rear sonar sensors terminal 3 • from sonar control unit terminal 15. Signal is supplied • to sonar control unit terminals 9, 10, 11 and 12 • from rear sonar sensors terminal 2. Revision: August 2007 DI-46 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - SONAR - INFOID:0000000001719228 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4672E Revision: August 2007 DI-47 2008 Quest P REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4673E Revision: August 2007 DI-48 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Sonar Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719229 A B C WKIA5222E D Terminal and Reference Value for Sonar Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719230 E Condition Terminal (Wire color) Item Ignition switch Operation Reference value (V) (Approx.) — 0 3 (R/Y) Sonar buzzer return ON 4 (O/B) Rear sonar system OFF indicator output ON 5 (G/W) Reverse signal ON Sonar control unit ground OFF 6 (B) ON 0 OFF Battery voltage Selector lever R position Battery voltage Selector lever Not R position 0 Rear sonar system OFF switch — Sonar buzzer drive signal ON G H 0 • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • No obstacles 7 (W/G) I Battery voltage J • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • Distance between rear sonar sensor and obstacle is <0.25 m (0.82 ft) or less. 0 • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • Distance between rear sonar sensor and obstacle is 0.25 to 1.8 m (0.82 to 5.9 ft). Cycles between 0.001 and 12 — Battery voltage DI L 8 (G) Sonar control unit power ON 9 (L) Rear sonar sensor signal - RH outer ON • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • No obstacles Battery voltage 10 (R) Rear sonar sensor signal - LH outer ON • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • No obstacles Battery voltage 11 (G/O) Rear sonar sensor signal - LH inner ON • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • Distance obstacles Battery voltage 12 (W) Rear sonar sensor signal - RH inner ON • Rear sonar system OFF switch ON • Selector lever in R position • Distance obstacles Battery voltage 13 (GR/L) Rear sonar system OFF switch signal ON Rear sonar system OFF switch Revision: August 2007 DI-49 F M N ON 0 OFF 9 2008 Quest O P REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Condition Terminal (Wire color) Item Ignition switch Operation Reference value (V) (Approx.) — 0 15 (G/Y) Rear sonar sensor ground ON 16 (Y) Rear sonar sensor power ON Ignition switch ON Battery voltage How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. INFOID:0000000001719231 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-45, "System Description". Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to DI-50, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection". Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-50, "Self-Diagnosis Function". Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-52, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Symptom Chart". Does the rear sonar system operate properly? If so, go to 8. If not, go to 3. Inspection End. Pre-diagnosis Inspection INFOID:0000000001719232 SENSOR STATUS CHECK • Check that the rear sonar sensor is not frozen. • Check that snow, mud, or other foreign objects are not adhering to the rear sonar sensor. • Check that there is no deformation, scratches, or other damage to the rear sonar sensor. • Check that water has not accumulated in the rear sonar sensor. CAUTION: Use water, cotton swab, or other soft material for cleaning the sensor. 1. Check that there are no obstacles within each rear sonar sensor's detection range. Detection range Rear sonar sensors 2. 3. Approx. 1.8 m (5.9 ft) maximum Check that there are no nearby ultrasound sources (such as the sounds of vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes). Check that the vehicle is on a level surface. Self-Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000001719233 There are four modes of self-diagnosis; entering diagnostics, requesting number of fault codes, requesting fault codes, and idling or clearing fault codes. These steps must be followed in order. Self-diagnosis can be manually exited by turning the ignition OFF, or selecting reverse gear. Self-diagnosis will automatically exit if a message is repeated five times without acknowledgement, before reporting number of faults if no switch activity is detected for thirty seconds or in idle mode if no switch activity is detected for thirty seconds. ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rear sonar system OFF switch indicator lamp comes on for three seconds and then goes out. Immediately push rear sonar system OFF switch ten times within five seconds. The the sonar buzzer sounds once and the rear sonar system OFF indicator flashes once. LKIA0389E Revision: August 2007 DI-50 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES MODE 1. While in diagnostic mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch once. 2. The sonar buzzer will sound once. 3. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash once and sonar buzzer will sound once for each fault code detected. 4. There will be a four second pause. 5. The number of fault codes will repeat then pause five times. NOTE: Self-diagnosis will exit unless requesting fault codes occurs before five repeats ends. A B C LKIA0388E D REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. While in requesting number of fault codes mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch once. The sonar buzzer will sound once. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will sound the first digit of the fault code followed by a one second pause. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will sound the second digit of the fault code followed by a four second pause. The fault codes will repeat then pause five times. LKIA0390E NOTE: Requesting fault codes will exit unless the fault code is acknowledged before five repeats ends. The fault code is acknowledged by pushing the rear sonar system OFF switch once (the sonar buzzer may sound). When all fault codes have been indicated, idle mode will be entered. See the following table for fault code identification. Fault Code Malfunction Rear sonar sensor LH outer 12 Rear sonar sensor LH inner 13 Rear sonar sensor RH inner 14 Rear sonar sensor RH outer 21 Sonar buzzer DI-53, "Component Inspection" 22 Rear sonar system OFF indicator DI-53, "Component Inspection" 23 Rear sonar system OFF switch DI-53, "Component Inspection" 24 Sonar control unit Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit" Check harness for open or short. If NG repair or replace harness. If OK replace sensor. Refer to EI15, "Removal and Installation". H I L M N O P NOTE: While in idle mode, self-diagnosis will automatically exit if no activity occurs for thirty seconds. DI-51 G DI IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE Revision: August 2007 F J Page Reference 11 E 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds to reset time-out counter. 2. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds to clear codes. LKIA0391E Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719234 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1.CHECK FUSES Check for blown rear sonar system fuse. UNIT POWER SOURCE FUSE Sonar control unit ON or START 12 Refer to DI-47, "Wiring Diagram - SONAR -". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector. Check voltage between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 8 and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal B56 8 Ignition switch position (-) ON or START Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between sonar control unit and fuse. WKIA1145E 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 6 and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal B56 6 (–) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 WKIA1146E DI-52 2008 Quest REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001719235 A Symptom Repair order 1. When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp does not light and the buzzer does not sound. 2. 3. 4. 1. When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp does not light but buzzer sounds. 2. 3. 1. When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar buzzer does not sound but indicator lamp lights up. 2. 3. 1. When rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp lights up and the sonar buzzer sounds intermittently (for about 4 seconds). 2. 3. 1. The rear sonar system operates with the rear sonar system OFF switch ON. 2. 3. 4. 1. When the selector lever is in the R position and the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar system does not operate. 2. 3. 1. When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp lights up and buzzer sounds although there is no obstacle within the detection range. The rear sonar sensors do not operate according to the distance between each sensor and the obstacle. (There is a large error in the obstacle detection distance.) 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Component Inspection Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection". Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF switch and sonar control unit. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check rear sonar system OFF indicator for malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection". Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF indicator and sonar control unit. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check sonar buzzer. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection". Check harness and connections between sonar buzzer and sonar control unit. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to: DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check harness between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit for an open condition. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to DI-53, "Component Inspection". Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF switch and sonar control unit. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check for PNP switch failure. Refer to AT-74, "Diagnosis Procedure". Check harness and connections between sonar control unit and PNP/reverse lamp circuits. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-50, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection". Check harness and connections between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-54, "Sonar Control Unit". INFOID:0000000001719236 SONAR BUZZER Revision: August 2007 DI-53 2008 Quest B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O P REAR SONAR SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disconnect the sonar buzzer connector M117, and apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal +. Check the buzzer operation when terminal - is connected to battery ground. Terminal to be inspected Condition + Approx. 12V - Ground Sonar buzzer Operation Sonar buzzer sounds WKIA4032E REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116. Check continuity between the following terminals. Rear sonar system OFF switch Terminal to be inspected ON Yes 6-7 OFF Continuity No WKIA1148E REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116, and apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal 3. Check the rear sonar system OFF indicator operation when terminal 2 is connected to battery ground. Terminal to be inspected Condition Operation 3 Approx. 12V 2 Ground Rear sonar system OFF indicator lights Rear sonar system OFF switch WKIA2691E Rear Sonar Sensors INFOID:0000000001719237 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to EI-15, "Removal and Installation" for rear sonar sensor removal and installation procedures. Sonar Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719238 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation" to gain access to sonar control unit. 2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 DI-54 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR VIEW MONITOR A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719239 B C D E F G H I J WKIA5223E DI 1. Display unit M93 Display control unit M94, M95 2. Data link connector M22 3. AV switch M98 4. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 5. F29 (view with battery tray removed) Rear view camera D518 6. Rear view camera control unit B512 A. Passenger seat System Description INFOID:0000000001719240 • When the A/T selector is in the R position, the display unit shows a view to the rear of the vehicle. • Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND O P AV COMMUNICATION LINE Rear view camera control unit is connected to the following units with AV communication line. Each unit transmits/receives data with AV communication line. DI-55 M N Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to rear view camera control unit terminal 1. When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to rear view camera control unit terminal 2. Ground is supplied • to rear view camera control unit terminal 3 • through grounds B117 and B132 • to rear view camera terminal 2 • through grounds D403 and D404. Revision: August 2007 L 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • NAVI control unit (with NAVI) • Display unit • Display control unit • AV switch REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 2. When A/T selector lever is in R position, power is supplied • through park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 4 • to rear view camera control unit terminal 4. Then, rear view camera control unit sends camera ON signal • through rear view camera control unit terminal 8 • to rear view camera terminal 1. An image taken by rear view camera is sent • through rear view camera terminals 3 and 4 • to rear view camera control unit terminals 9 and 10. Then an image is sent • through rear view camera control unit terminals 11 and 12 • to display unit terminals 4 and 15. An image of rear view will be projected on the display. Side Distance Guideline When A/T selector lever is in R position, rear view camera control unit is sent rear view camera guideline image • through rear view camera control unit terminals 11 and 12 • to display unit terminals 4 and 15. Rear view camera guideline will be projected on the display. Display shows image from rear view camera image and rear view camera guideline. Revision: August 2007 DI-56 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719241 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4954E Revision: August 2007 DI-57 2008 Quest P REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - R/VIEW - INFOID:0000000001719242 WKWA4674E Revision: August 2007 DI-58 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J DI L M N O WKWA4675E P Revision: August 2007 DI-59 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4676E Revision: August 2007 DI-60 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear View Camera Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001719243 A B C WKIA5224E D Terminal and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719244 E Terminal No. Wire color 1 Y 2 Condition Ignition switch Operation Reference value (V) (Approx.) Battery power OFF — Battery voltage V ACC power ACC — Battery voltage 3 B Ground OFF — 0 4 G/W Reverse signal input ON A/T selector lever in other than R position 0 5 BR AV Control ON — 0 6 SB DDL — — — 8 Y Camera power output ON 9 — Camera image input (–) ON 10 G Camera image input (+) ON Item A/T selector lever R position A/T selector lever R position — F G Battery voltage H I 6 0 J DI A/T selector lever R position L SKIA4894E 11 — Shield ground — — — M 12 W Composite image output ON A/T selector lever R position N SKIA4896E CONSULT-III Function (REARVIEW CAMERA) INFOID:0000000001719245 P CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. REARVIEW CAMERA diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the rearview camera control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the rearview camera control unit and received data is displayed. Revision: August 2007 DI-61 O 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > REARVIEW CAMERA diagnostic mode Description DATA MONITOR Displays rearview camera control unit input/output data in real time. ECU PART NUMBER Rearview camera control unit part number can be read. WORK SUPPORT SELCT GUIDELINE PATTERN Side distance guideline is optional from two patterns. ADJ GUIDELINE POSITION Side distance guideline is adjustable toward up and down, right and left. Refer to DI-62, "Side Distance Guideline Correction" for detail. DATA MONITOR Display Item List Display item [Unit] R POSI SIG [ON/OFF] ALL SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU X X Contents Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of R position signal input. Side Distance Guideline Correction INFOID:0000000001719246 This mode is used to modify the side distance guidelines if they are dislocated from the rear view monitor image, because of variations of body/camera mounting conditions. SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Create a correction line to modify the screen. Draw lines on the rearward of the vehicle passing through the following points: 200 mm (7.87 inch) from both sides of the vehicle, and • *1: 0.5 m (1.5 feet) • *2: 1 m (3 feet) • *3: 2 m (7 feet) • *4: 3 m (10 feet) and from the rear end of the bumper With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-III to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. Touch “REARVIEW CAMERA” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. CAUTION: Stop engine for safety when correcting side distance guideline. SKIA5637E Revision: August 2007 DI-62 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Shift the A/T selector lever to R position. A B C SKIA6103E D 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch “SELCT GUIDELINE PATTERN” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen. Touch “UP” or “DOWN”, and select the guide line, “PATTERN NO. 0” or “PATTERN NO. 1”, which is the closest to the corrected line. Touch “SAVE”, and confirm the guide line. Touch “END”. E F 8. Touch “ADJ GUIDELINE POSITION” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen. 9. Adjust the guide line touching “X UP”, “X DOWN”, “Y UP” or “Y DOWN” so that the corrected line can fit the guide line. 10. Touch “SAVE”, and confirm the guide line. 11. Touch “END” to finish correcting. Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection G H INFOID:0000000001719247 1.CHECK FUSES I Check for blown rear view camera system fuses. Unit Rear view camera control unit Power source Fuse No. Battery 31 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 J DI OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-3. L 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector. Check voltage between rear view camera control unit and ground. M N Terminals (+) Connector B512 Terminal (–) OFF ACC O 1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage 2 Ground 0V Battery voltage WKIA2027E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between rear view camera control unit and fuse. 3.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 DI-63 2008 Quest P REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 3 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. SKIA5081E 4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect rear view camera connector. Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 2 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness or connector. SKIA5082E Rear View Is Not Displayed with the A/T Selector Lever in R Position INFOID:0000000001719248 1.BACK-UP LAMP INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Shift A/T selector lever to R position. Does back-up lamp illuminate? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-88. 2.CHECK REVERSE POSITION INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Select “DATA MONITOR” of “REARVIEW CAMERA”. Operate ignition switch with “R POSI SIG” of “DATA MONITOR” and check operate status. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Shift A/T selector lever to R position. Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 4 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open or short between rear view camera control unit and park/neutral position (PNP) switch. SKIA5086E 3.CHECK DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 DI-64 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 5 and ground. Voltage A : Approx. 5V B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. C WKIA4198E 4.CHECK DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 5 and display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 8. E F Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 5 and ground. Continuity should not exist. G SKIA7149E H OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. I 5.CHECK AV CONTROL SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect rear view camera control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Shift A/T selector lever to R position. Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 5 and ground. Voltage J DI : Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI-67, "Rear View Camera Control Unit". L SKIA7150E M 6.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear view camera connector. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 8 and rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 1. N O Continuity should exist. 4. P Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 9 and rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 4. SKIA5095E Continuity should exist. 5. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 10 and rear view camera harness connector D518 terminal 3. Revision: August 2007 DI-65 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 7.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA SHORT CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 8 and ground. Continuity should not exist. 2. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 9 and ground. Continuity should not exist. 3. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 10 and ground. SKIA5098E Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness on connector. 8.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit. Refer to DI-63, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair power supply or ground circuit. 9.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect rear view camera control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Shift A/T selector lever to R position. Check voltage between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 8 and ground. Voltage : Approx. 6V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace the rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI67, "Rear View Camera Control Unit". SKIA5099E 10.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect rear view camera connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Shift A/T selector lever to R position. Check voltage signal between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 10 and ground. 10 - Ground: SKIA5100E SKIA4894E Revision: August 2007 DI-66 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace the rear view camera. Refer to DI-68, "Rear View Camera". A 11.CHECK COMPOSITE SIGNAL OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear view camera control unit connector and display unit connector. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 (A) terminal 12 and display unit harness connector M93 (B) terminal 15. C D Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 (A) terminal 12 and ground. E WKIA5377E Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair harness or connector. F 12.CHECK COMPOSITE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT G 1. Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 (A) terminal 11 and display unit harness connector M93 (B) terminal 4. H Continuity should exist. 2. I Check continuity between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 (A) terminal 11 and ground. J Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA5378E DI 13.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA CONTROL UNIT COMPOSITE SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. L Connect rear view camera control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage signal between rear view camera control unit harness connector B512 terminal 12 and ground. M N 12 - Ground: WKIA1827E SKIA4896E P OK or NG OK >> Replace the display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace the rear view camera control unit. Refer to DI-67, "Rear View Camera Control Unit". Rear View Camera Control Unit INFOID:0000000001719249 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 DI-67 O 2008 Quest REAR VIEW MONITOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to SE-75. Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2). LKIA0662E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000001719250 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-23. Disconnect rear view camera connector (1). Remove rear view camera screw and remove rear view camera. LKIA0663E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installing rear view camera, perform side distance guideline correction procedure. Refer to DI-62, "Side Distance Guideline Correction". Revision: August 2007 DI-68 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION EC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A EC C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 9 INDEX FOR DTC ................................................. 9 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ...................................................... 34 System Description ..................................................34 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34 Component Inspection .............................................36 DTC No. Index .......................................................... 9 PRECAUTIONS ..................................................13 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................. 13 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T ........................................................................... 13 Precaution ............................................................... 13 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 39 Description ...............................................................39 Component Inspection .............................................39 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) ....................................................... 41 Introduction ..............................................................42 Two Trip Detection Logic .........................................42 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .................43 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................59 OBD System Operation Chart .................................62 K BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ....................... 68 Basic Inspection ......................................................68 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .....................71 Procedure After Replacing ECM .............................72 VIN Registration ......................................................72 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .......73 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning .................73 Idle Air Volume Learning .........................................73 Fuel Pressure Check ...............................................75 Input/Output Signal Chart ........................................ 24 System Description ................................................. 24 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ...............................................................25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 78 CAN COMMUNICATION ....................................27 System Description ................................................. 27 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ................28 Description .............................................................. 28 Component Inspection ............................................ 30 Removal and Installation ......................................... 32 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ........................ 32 Revision: August 2007 I J AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ...............24 System Description ................................................. 25 Component Description ........................................... 26 H ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 42 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................19 Schematic ............................................................... 19 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ..................... 19 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ................................ 22 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) ..................................................................... 22 G Description ...............................................................41 PREPARATION ..................................................17 Special Service Tool ............................................... 17 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 18 F EC-1 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................78 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................82 Fail-Safe Chart ........................................................83 Symptom Matrix Chart .............................................85 Engine Control Component Parts Location .............89 Vacuum Hose Drawing ............................................96 Circuit Diagram ........................................................97 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..............99 ECM Terminal and Reference Value .......................99 2008 Quest L M N O P CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) .........................107 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................117 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................119 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ............................................................. 122 Description .............................................................122 Testing Condition ...................................................122 Inspection Procedure .............................................122 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................123 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ........................................................ 130 Description .............................................................130 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................130 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 131 Wiring Diagram ......................................................131 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................134 Ground Inspection .................................................138 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ................................................................. 139 Description .............................................................139 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................139 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................139 Wiring Diagram ......................................................140 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................140 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ............. 141 Description .............................................................141 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................141 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................141 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................141 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ................. 142 Description .............................................................142 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................142 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................143 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................143 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................144 Component Inspection ...........................................145 Removal and Installation .......................................145 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ............................................... 146 Description .............................................................146 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................146 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................146 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................146 Wiring Diagram ......................................................147 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................150 Component Inspection ...........................................152 Removal and Installation .......................................152 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER ........................................................... 153 Revision: August 2007 Description ............................................................ 153 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 153 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 153 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 155 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 158 Component Inspection .......................................... 160 Removal and Installation ....................................... 160 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .................................................... 161 Component Description ........................................ 161 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 161 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 161 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 162 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165 Component Inspection .......................................... 166 Removal and Installation ....................................... 167 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .............................. 168 Component Description ........................................ 168 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 168 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 168 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 168 Overall Function Check ......................................... 169 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 171 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172 Component Inspection .......................................... 175 Removal and Installation ....................................... 176 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .................. 177 Component Description ........................................ 177 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 177 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 177 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 177 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 179 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180 Component Inspection .......................................... 182 Removal and Installation ....................................... 183 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .................... 184 Component Description ........................................ 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 184 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 185 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185 Component Inspection .......................................... 187 Removal and Installation ....................................... 187 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ................... 188 Component Description ........................................ 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 189 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 190 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190 EC-2 2008 Quest Component Inspection .......................................... 192 Removal and Installation ....................................... 192 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 224 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 224 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 224 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 226 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229 Removal and Installation ....................................... 231 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ..................... 193 Component Description ......................................... 193 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 193 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 193 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 193 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 194 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195 Component Inspection .......................................... 198 Removal and Installation ....................................... 198 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 232 Component Description ......................................... 232 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 232 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 232 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 232 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 234 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237 Removal and Installation ....................................... 240 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ............................... 199 Component Description ......................................... 199 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 199 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 200 Component Inspection .......................................... 201 Removal and Installation ....................................... 201 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ............................. 241 Component Description ......................................... 202 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 202 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 202 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 203 Component Inspection .......................................... 204 Removal and Installation ....................................... 204 Component Description ......................................... 241 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 241 Overall Function Check ......................................... 242 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 243 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246 Component Inspection ........................................... 248 Removal and Installation ....................................... 249 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .......... 205 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ............................. 250 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ................................ 202 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 205 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 205 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 205 Component Inspection .......................................... 205 Removal and Installation ....................................... 206 Component Description ......................................... 250 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 250 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 250 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 251 Overall Function Check ......................................... 252 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 253 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 256 Component Inspection ........................................... 260 Removal and Installation ....................................... 261 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 207 Component Description ......................................... 207 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 207 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 207 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 207 Overall Function Check ......................................... 208 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 210 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 213 Removal and Installation ....................................... 215 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ............................. 262 Component Description ......................................... 262 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 262 Overall Function Check ......................................... 263 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 264 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 267 Component Inspection ........................................... 269 Removal and Installation ....................................... 270 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 216 Component Description ......................................... 216 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 216 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 216 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 216 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 218 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221 Removal and Installation ....................................... 223 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................. 271 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ................. 224 Component Description ......................................... 224 Revision: August 2007 EC-3 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 271 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 271 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 273 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276 2008 Quest A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................. 281 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................281 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................281 Wiring Diagram ......................................................283 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................286 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ............................... 291 Component Description .........................................291 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................291 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................291 Wiring Diagram ......................................................292 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................293 Component Inspection ...........................................294 Removal and Installation .......................................295 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .................. 296 Component Description .........................................296 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................296 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................296 Wiring Diagram ......................................................297 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................297 Component Inspection ...........................................299 Removal and Installation .......................................300 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .................... 301 Component Description .........................................301 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................301 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................301 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................301 Wiring Diagram ......................................................302 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................303 Component Inspection ...........................................306 Removal and Installation .......................................306 DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE .............. 307 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................307 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................307 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................308 DTC P0327, P0328 KS .................................... 314 Component Description .........................................314 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................314 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................314 Wiring Diagram ......................................................315 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................316 Component Inspection ...........................................318 Removal and Installation .......................................318 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ................... 319 Component Description .........................................319 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................319 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................319 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................319 Wiring Diagram ......................................................320 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................321 Revision: August 2007 Component Inspection .......................................... 324 Removal and Installation ....................................... 324 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .. 325 Component Description ........................................ 325 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 325 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 325 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 326 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 329 Component Inspection .......................................... 332 Removal and Installation ....................................... 332 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ........................... 333 Description ............................................................ 333 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 334 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 335 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 335 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 337 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 338 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE .............................................................. 341 Description ............................................................ 341 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 342 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 342 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 342 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 343 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 344 Component Inspection .......................................... 345 Removal and Installation ....................................... 346 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR ................ 347 Component Description ........................................ 347 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 347 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 347 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 350 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 350 Component Inspection .......................................... 352 Removal and Installation ....................................... 353 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................ 354 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 354 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 354 Overall Function Check ......................................... 355 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 355 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 359 System Description ............................................... 359 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 359 Overall Function Check ......................................... 360 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 361 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 364 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 364 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 365 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 365 EC-4 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............. 371 Description ............................................................ 371 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 371 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 372 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 372 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 373 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 374 Component Inspection .......................................... 377 Removal and Installation ....................................... 378 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 399 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 399 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 399 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 401 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 402 Component Inspection ........................................... 404 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................... 405 Component Description ......................................... 405 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 405 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 405 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 405 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 407 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 408 Component Inspection ........................................... 411 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....... 379 Description ............................................................ 379 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 379 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 380 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 380 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 381 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 382 Component Inspection .......................................... 384 Removal and Installation ....................................... 384 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ................................................... 385 Component Description ......................................... 385 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 385 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 385 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 385 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 386 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 387 Component Inspection .......................................... 389 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ................................................... 390 Component Description ......................................... 390 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 390 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 390 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 390 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 392 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393 Component Inspection .......................................... 394 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 399 C D E F On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 412 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 412 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 413 G DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 418 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 418 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 419 Overall Function Check ......................................... 419 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 420 H I DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 426 Component Description ......................................... 426 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 426 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 426 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 426 Removal and Installation ....................................... 427 J K DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 428 Component Description ......................................... 428 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 428 Overall Function Check ......................................... 428 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 429 Removal and Installation ....................................... 429 L M DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .. 430 Component Description ......................................... 430 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 430 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 430 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430 Removal and Installation ....................................... 431 N O DTC P0500 VSS .............................................. 432 Description ............................................................. 432 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 432 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 432 Overall Function Check ......................................... 433 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 433 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ............................... 434 Component Description ......................................... 399 Revision: August 2007 EC DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 412 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ...................................... 396 Component Description ......................................... 396 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 396 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 396 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 396 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 397 Component Inspection .......................................... 398 A EC-5 Description ............................................................. 434 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 434 2008 Quest P DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................434 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................434 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ................................ 436 Description .............................................................436 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................436 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................436 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................436 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR .............................. 438 Component Description .........................................438 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................438 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................438 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................438 Wiring Diagram ......................................................439 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................440 Component Inspection ...........................................442 Removal and Installation .......................................442 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ................ 443 Component Description .........................................443 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................443 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................443 Wiring Diagram ......................................................444 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................445 DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 447 Component Description .........................................447 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................447 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................447 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................448 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ........ 449 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................449 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................449 Wiring Diagram ......................................................450 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................451 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ............................... 454 Component Description .........................................454 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................454 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................454 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................454 Overall Function Check .........................................455 Wiring Diagram ......................................................456 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................457 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ................................................................ 460 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................460 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .................. 461 Description .............................................................461 On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................461 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................461 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................461 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ..... 462 Description .............................................................462 Revision: August 2007 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 462 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 462 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 462 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE.. 463 Description ............................................................ 463 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 464 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464 Overall Function Check ......................................... 465 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 466 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 467 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 471 Component Inspection .......................................... 471 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .................................. 473 Component Description ........................................ 473 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 473 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 473 Removal and Installation ....................................... 474 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .................................. 475 Component Description ........................................ 475 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 475 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 475 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 475 Removal and Installation ....................................... 476 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION ........................... 477 Description ............................................................ 477 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 478 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 479 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 479 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 481 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 482 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ............ 484 Description ............................................................ 484 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 484 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 484 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 484 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .......... 486 Component Description ........................................ 486 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 486 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 486 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 486 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 488 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 489 Component Inspection .......................................... 491 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ............... 492 Component Description ........................................ 492 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 492 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 492 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 492 EC-6 2008 Quest Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 494 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 495 Component Inspection .......................................... 498 Removal and Installation ....................................... 525 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR .......................................... 526 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .................................................................. 499 Component Description ......................................... 499 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 499 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 499 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 499 Component Description ......................................... 526 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 526 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 526 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 527 C Component Description ......................................... 528 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 528 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 528 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 528 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 529 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 530 Component Inspection ........................................... 532 Removal and Installation ....................................... 533 Component Description ......................................... 534 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 534 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 534 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 534 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 535 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 536 Component Inspection ........................................... 539 Removal and Installation ....................................... 539 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ................................ 540 Component Description ......................................... 540 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 540 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 540 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 540 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 541 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 542 Component Inspection ........................................... 545 Removal and Installation ....................................... 545 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ............................................... 510 Component Description ......................................... 510 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 510 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 510 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 511 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 512 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ............................. 546 Description ............................................................ 514 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 514 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 514 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 515 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 516 Component Inspection .......................................... 519 Removal and Installation ....................................... 520 Component Description ......................................... 546 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 546 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 546 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 546 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 548 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 549 Component Inspection ........................................... 552 Removal and Installation ....................................... 553 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .. 521 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 .............. 554 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION ............................................. 514 Component Description ......................................... 521 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 521 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 521 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 522 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 523 Component Inspection .......................................... 525 Revision: August 2007 D E F DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ................. 534 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .......................... 506 Description ............................................................ 506 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 506 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 506 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 506 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 507 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 508 Component Inspection .......................................... 509 EC DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ................. 528 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................................................. 501 Component Description ......................................... 501 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 501 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 501 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 501 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 502 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 503 Component Inspection .......................................... 504 Removal and Installation ....................................... 504 A EC-7 Component Description ......................................... 554 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ...................................................................... 554 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 554 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 554 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 556 2008 Quest G H I J K L M N O P Diagnosis Procedure .............................................559 Removal and Installation .......................................563 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 564 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 587 Component Inspection .......................................... 589 Removal and Installation ....................................... 590 Component Description .........................................564 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................564 Wiring Diagram ......................................................565 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................566 Component Inspection ...........................................569 IGNITION SIGNAL ............................................ 591 ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 570 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 603 Component Description .........................................570 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................570 Wiring Diagram ......................................................571 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................571 Component Description ........................................ 603 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 604 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 605 Removal and Installation ....................................... 607 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 573 Description .............................................................573 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................573 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................573 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT ............................................................ 575 System Description ................................................575 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................575 Wiring Diagram ......................................................576 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................577 FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 579 Component Description .........................................579 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................579 Wiring Diagram ......................................................580 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................581 Component Inspection ...........................................584 Removal and Installation .......................................584 FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 585 Description .............................................................585 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ......................................................................585 Wiring Diagram ......................................................586 Revision: August 2007 Component Description ........................................ 591 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 592 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 597 Component Inspection .......................................... 600 Removal and Installation ....................................... 602 VIAS .................................................................. 608 Description ............................................................ 608 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 609 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 610 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 611 Component Inspection .......................................... 614 Removal and Installation ....................................... 615 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ............... 616 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 616 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 618 Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 618 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 618 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 618 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 618 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 618 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 618 EGR Temperature Sensor .................................... 618 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 619 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 619 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 619 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 619 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 619 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 619 Fuel Pump ............................................................. 619 EC-8 2008 Quest INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index INFOID:0000000001717158 DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page U1000 1000* 4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-139 U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-139 U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) EC-141 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-142 P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-142 P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-146 P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-146 P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-153 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-153 P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-146 P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-146 P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-153 P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-153 P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-161 P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 EC-161 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-168 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-177 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-177 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-184 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-184 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-188 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-188 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-193 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-193 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-199 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR -B1 EC-202 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-205 P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-207 P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-216 P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-224 P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-232 P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-241 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-250 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-262 Revision: August 2007 EC-9 2008 Quest EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST* 2 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-207 P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-216 P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-224 P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-232 P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-241 P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-250 P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-262 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-271 P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-281 P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 EC-271 P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 EC-281 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-291 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-296 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-296 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-301 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-301 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-307 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-307 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-307 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-307 P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-307 P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-307 P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-307 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-314 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-314 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-319 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-325 P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-325 P0400 0400 EGR SYSTEM EC-333 P0403 0403 EGR VOL CON/V CIR EC-341 P0405 0405 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-347 P0406 0406 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-347 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-354 P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-354 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-359 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-364 P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-371 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-379 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-379 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-385 P0448 0448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-390 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-396 Revision: August 2007 EC-10 2008 Quest INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-399 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-405 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-412 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-418 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-426 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-428 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-430 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-430 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-432 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-434 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-436 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-438 P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-443 P0605 0605 ECM EC-447 P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-449 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-83 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-88 P0711 0711 FLUID TEMP SEN AT-93 P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR AT-98 P0722 0722 VHCL SPEED SEN·AT AT-102 P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-108 P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-111 P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-116 P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-120 P0735 0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN AT-123 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-127 P0745 0745 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) AT-130 P0750 0750 SHIFT SOL A AT-135 P0755 0755 SHIFT SOL B AT-140 P0760 0760 SHIFT SOL C AT-145 P0762 0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON AT-150 P0765 0765 SHIFT SOL D AT-155 P0770 0770 SHIFT SOL E AT-160 P0775 0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) AT-165 P0780 0780 SHIFT AT-170 P0795 0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) AT-174 P0797 0797 PC SOL C STC ON AT-179 P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-454 P0882 0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG AT-188 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-460 P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-460 P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-461 Revision: August 2007 EC-11 2008 Quest A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P INDEX FOR DTC < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST* 2 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-462 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-463 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-473 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-475 P1402 1402 EGR SYSTEM EC-477 P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL EC-484 P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-486 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-492 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-499 P1610 1610 LOCK MODE BL-182 P1611 1611 ID DISCARD IMM-ECM BL-182 P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU BL-182 P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY BL-182 P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY BL-182 P1800 1800 VIAS S/V-1 EC-501 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-506 P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 EC-510 P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 EC-514 P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR EC-510 P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 EC-521 P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 EC-526 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-528 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-528 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-534 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-534 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 EC-540 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-546 P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 (B1) EC-554 P2A03 2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 (B2) EC-554 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III. Revision: August 2007 EC-12 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > PRECAUTIONS A Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003288704 EC The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T E F G H I J K L M INFOID:0000000001717162 N • Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. • Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. • Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. • Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect negative battery cable. O P SEF289H Revision: August 2007 D INFOID:0000000001717161 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: • Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. • Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) • Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71. • Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. • Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. • Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution C EC-13 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Do not disassemble ECM. • If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. • If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. - Diagnostic trouble codes - 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes - Freeze frame data - 1st trip freeze frame data - System readiness test (SRT) codes - Test values PBIB1164E • When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. PBIB1512E • When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. • Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. • Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. • Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. • Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-99, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value". • Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. • Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. • Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. • Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. • Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. • Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). Revision: August 2007 EC-14 PBIB0090E MEF040D 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. A EC C SEF217U D • When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. • Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. E F G H I J SEF348N • B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure. K L M N SEC893C O P Revision: August 2007 EC-15 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. • Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. BBIA0081E • Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. • Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. • Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. SEF709Y • When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. - Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. - Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. - Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave radio can be kept smaller. - Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Revision: August 2007 EC-16 SEF708Y 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717163 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name EC Description (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit C Checking fuel pressure D E LEC642 (J-44321-6) Fuel pressure adapter Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines. F G LBIA0376E Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room. (J-45488) Quick connector release H I J PBIC0198E Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter K L S-NT564 Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in the engine coolant (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer M N WBIA0539E O P Revision: August 2007 EC-17 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Commercial Service Tool Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) INFOID:0000000001717164 Description Leak detector i.e.: (J-41416) Locating the EVAP leak S-NT703 Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J-41413-OBD) S-NT704 Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure S-NT815 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor S-NT705 Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) S-NT779 Revision: August 2007 EC-18 2008 Quest ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A Schematic INFOID:0000000001717165 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P PBIB2506E Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System INFOID:0000000001717166 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Revision: August 2007 EC-19 2008 Quest ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*3 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Battery Battery voltage*3 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 ECM function Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Actuator Fuel injector *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. • • • • • • During warm-up When starting the engine During acceleration Hot-engine operation When shift lever is changed from N to D High-load, high-speed operation • During deceleration • During high engine speed operation MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) PBIB3020E The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (Manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air Revision: August 2007 EC-20 2008 Quest ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air A fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-216. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. EC Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (Manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. • Deceleration and acceleration • High-load, high-speed operation • Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit • Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature • High engine coolant temperature • During warm-up • After shifting from N to D • When starting the engine C D E F MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. FUEL INJECTION TIMING G H I J K L M N SEF179U Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. Revision: August 2007 EC-21 2008 Quest O P ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds. Electronic Ignition (EI) System INFOID:0000000001717167 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*1 ECM function Ignition timing control Actuator Power transistor *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Firing order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. • At starting • During warm-up • At idle • At low battery voltage • During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000001717168 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input Signal to ECM Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor Vehicle speed* ECM function Fuel cut control Actuator Fuel injector *: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Revision: August 2007 EC-22 2008 Quest ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies A based on engine speed. Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled. NOTE: EC This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-19. C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-23 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000001717169 Sensor Input Signal to ECM Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal* Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature voltage*2 Battery Battery Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*1 ECM function Actuator 1 Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. System Description INFOID:0000000001717170 This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF. • When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. • When cranking the engine. • At high engine speeds. • When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. • When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. • When engine speed is excessively low. • When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. Revision: August 2007 EC-24 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description A INFOID:0000000001717171 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor EC Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator C ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Combination meter Vehicle speed* TCM Powertrain revolution* ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator D E *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. F G H SET OPERATION I Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) J ACCELERATOR OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. K CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. • CANCEL switch is depressed • More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) • Brake pedal is depressed • Shift lever is changed to N, P, R position • Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed • VDC/TCS system is operated When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. • Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch. • Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION Revision: August 2007 EC-25 2008 Quest L M N O P AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) < SERVICE INFORMATION > When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. • Brake pedal is released • A/T shift lever is in other than P and N positions • Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description INFOID:0000000001717172 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-486. ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-492 and EC-564. STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer toEC-492, EC-506 and EC-564. ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-510, EC-514, EC-521 and EC-526. ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-570. Revision: August 2007 EC-26 2008 Quest CAN COMMUNICATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN COMMUNICATION A System Description INFOID:0000000001717173 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-27 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000001717174 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PBIB1631E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING Revision: August 2007 EC-28 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J K L PBIB3073E : M From next page 1. Intake manifold collector 4. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve 2. EVAP service port 3. EVAP purge resonator N NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. O P Revision: August 2007 EC-29 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > PBIB3069E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sen- 2. sor : To previous page EVAP canister vent control valve Component Inspection 3. EVAP canister INFOID:0000000001717175 EVAP CANISTER Revision: August 2007 EC-30 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C. 3. Release blocked port B. 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C. 5. Block port A and B. 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. A EC C PBIB1212E D FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. E F G SEF445Y 2. H Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. I J K SEF943S EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L Refer to EC-377. FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-294. M EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-389. N EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-398. EVAP SERVICE PORT O P Revision: August 2007 EC-31 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. BBIA0320E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717176 EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. PBIB1214E EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. PBIB3082E How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage INFOID:0000000001717177 CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: • Do not start engine. • Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Revision: August 2007 EC-32 2008 Quest EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-III. A 5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. 6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. EC 7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-28, "Description". C D E SEF200U WITHOUT CONSULT-III 1. 2. F Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. G H I SEF462UA 3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. J K L M BBIA0664E : 1. 4. 5. 6. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. N EVAP canister To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-28, "Description". O P Revision: August 2007 EC-33 2008 Quest ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) < SERVICE INFORMATION > ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description INFOID:0000000001717178 PBIB1387E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: • Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. • Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. • Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: • Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: - Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. - Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". - Disconnect battery ground cable. • Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. • Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. • Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. • After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. • Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717179 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Revision: August 2007 EC-34 2008 Quest ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. A EC C PBIB1213E 3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER D Replace EVAP canister with a new one. E >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. G 5.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. H I SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. J 1. 2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. K L M N O P PBIB1213E 3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. Revision: August 2007 EC-35 2008 Quest ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) < SERVICE INFORMATION > >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. 7.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. 9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. 10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. SEF665U Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717180 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 EC-36 2008 Quest ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9. A 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other EC side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that C the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. D a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. E c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. F G H I J BBIA0248E Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. K Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel gauge retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-37 2008 Quest ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) < SERVICE INFORMATION > d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0248E Revision: August 2007 EC-38 2008 Quest POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description A INFOID:0000000001717181 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G SEC921C This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. H I J K L PBIB1588E Component Inspection M INFOID:0000000001717182 N PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. O P PBIB1589E PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE Revision: August 2007 EC-39 2008 Quest POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. S-ET277 Revision: August 2007 EC-40 2008 Quest NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Description A INFOID:0000000001717183 • If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNC- EC TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-III using NATS program card. Refer to BL-180. • Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELFC DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. • When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-III using NATS program card. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) D initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual, IVIS/NVIS. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-41 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction INFOID:0000000001717184 The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code SRT status Test value CONSULT-III × × × × × × — GST × × × — × × × ECM × ×* — — — × — *: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-83, "Fail-Safe Chart".) Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000001717185 When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items 2nd trip —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Lighting up Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Revision: August 2007 EC-42 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A EC Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000001717186 C ×: Applicable —: Not applicable D EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 SRT code Trip ECM*3 MIL lighting up Reference page CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 — 1 × EC-139 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 — 2 — EC-139 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 1010 — 1 × EC-141 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — Flashing*5 — INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — 2 × EC-142 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — 2 × EC-142 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — 2 × EC-146 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — 2 × EC-146 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — 2 × EC-153 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — 2 × EC-153 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — 2 × EC-146 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — 2 × EC-146 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — 2 × EC-153 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — 2 × EC-153 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — 2 × EC-161 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — 2 × EC-161 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0101 0101 — 2 × EC-168 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0102 0102 — 1 × EC-177 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT -B1 P0103 0103 — 1 × EC-177 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × EC-184 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × EC-184 ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × EC-188 ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × EC-188 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × EC-193 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × EC-193 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — 2 × EC-199 IAT SENSOR-B1 P0127 0127 — 2 × EC-202 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — 2 × EC-205 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — 2 × EC-207 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — 2 × EC-216 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × EC-224 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × 2 × EC-232 Revision: August 2007 EC-43 2008 Quest E F G H I J K L M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 ECM*3 SRT code Trip MIL lighting up Reference page HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × 2 × EC-241 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × 2 × EC-250 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × EC-262 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — 2 × EC-207 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — 2 × EC-216 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — 2 × EC-224 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × 2 × EC-232 HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × 2 × EC-241 HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × 2 × EC-250 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × 2 × EC-262 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × EC-271 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × EC-281 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — 2 × EC-271 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — 2 × EC-281 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — 2 × EC-291 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — 2 × EC-296 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — 2 × EC-296 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × EC-301 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × EC-301 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — 2 × EC-307 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — 2 × EC-307 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — EC-314 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — 2 — EC-314 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × EC-319 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × EC-325 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — 2 × EC-325 EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 × 2 × EC-333 EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 — 1 × EC-341 EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC P0405 0405 — 2 × EC-347 EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC P0406 0406 — 2 × EC-347 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × EC-354 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × 2 × EC-354 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × 2 × EC-359 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × 2 × EC-364 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — 2 × EC-371 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — 2 × EC-379 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — 2 × EC-379 Revision: August 2007 EC-44 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 ECM*3 SRT code Trip MIL lighting up Reference page A EC VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — 2 × EC-385 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — 2 × EC-390 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — 2 × EC-396 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — 2 × EC-399 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — 2 × EC-405 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — 2 × EC-412 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*6 2 × EC-418 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — 2 × EC-426 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — 2 × EC-428 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — 2 × EC-430 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — 2 × EC-430 P0500 0500 — 2 × EC-432 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — 2 × EC-434 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — 2 × EC-436 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — 2 — EC-438 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — 2 × EC-443 ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 × or — EC-447 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — 1 × EC-449 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — 1 × AT-83 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — 2 × AT-88 FLUID TEMP SEN P0711 0711 — 2 × AT-93 TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — 1 × AT-98 VHCL SPEED SEN·AT P0722 0722 — 1 × AT-102 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — 1 × AT-108 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — 1 × AT-111 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — 1 × AT-116 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — 1 × AT-120 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 0735 — 1 × AT-123 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — 1 × AT-127 PC SOL A(L/PRESS) P0745 0745 — 1 × AT-130 SHIFT SOL A P0750 0750 — 1 × AT-135 SHIFT SOL B P0755 0755 — 1 × AT-140 SHIFT SOL C P0760 0760 — 1 × AT-145 SFT SOL C STUCK ON P0762 0762 — 1 × AT-150 SHIFT SOL D P0765 0765 — 1 × AT-155 SHIFT SOL E P0770 0770 — 1 × AT-160 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS) P0775 0775 — 1 × AT-165 SHIFT P0780 0780 — 1 × AT-170 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT) P0795 0795 — 1 × AT-174 PC SOL C STC ON P0797 0797 — 1 × AT-179 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — 2 × EC-454 TCM POWER INPT SIG P0882 0882 — 1 × AT-188 Revision: August 2007 EC-45 2008 Quest C D E F G H I J K L M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-III GST*2 ECM*3 SRT code Trip MIL lighting up Reference page CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — 1 × EC-460 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — 1 × EC-460 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — 2 — EC-461 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — 2 — EC-462 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × EC-463 CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — EC-473 CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — EC-475 EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 × 2 × EC-477 COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — 2 × EC-484 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — 1 — EC-486 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — 1 — EC-492 ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — 1 — EC-499 LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — BL-180 ID DISCARD IMM-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — BL-180 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — BL-180 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — BL-180 DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — BL-180 VIAS S/V-1 P1800 1800 — 2 — EC-501 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — EC-506 ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2100 2100 — 1 × EC-510 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 P2101 2101 — 1 × EC-514 ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — 1 × EC-510 ETC MOT-B1 P2118 2118 — 1 × EC-521 ETC ACTR-B1 P2119 2119 — 1 × EC-526 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × EC-528 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × EC-528 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × EC-534 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × EC-534 TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × EC-540 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × EC-546 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — 2 × EC-554 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — 2 × EC-554 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III. *5: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to “How to Display SRT Status”. *6: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required Revision: August 2007 EC-46 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, A the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the EC 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”. For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR- C MATION ITEMS”. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III. 1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL D and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-78, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per- E form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-III With GST CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. • 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. • Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-III display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. F G H I J K L FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Revision: August 2007 EC-47 2008 Quest M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 2 3 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”. SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. SRT Item The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-III indication) CATALYST EVAP SYSTEM HO2S EGR SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 Performance Priority* Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430 3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 2 EVAP control system P0442 3 EVAP control system P0456 3 A/F sensor 1 P0133, P0153 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138, P0158 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159 3 EGR function P0400 1 EGR function P1402 EC-48 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > *: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-III. A SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and EC is shown in the table below. Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 Diagnosis ← ON → OFF C Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL “ON”) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. D E F G H I J NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: • The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. • The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. • When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. • If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. Revision: August 2007 EC-49 2008 Quest K L M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > PBIB2320E *1 “How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC” *2 “How to Display SRT Status” *3 “How to Set SRT Code” How to Display SRT Status WITH CONSULT-III Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC&SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-III display for SRT code is shown in the figure. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. NOTE: Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item. WITH GST Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) NO TOOLS A SRT code itself can be displayed while only SRT status can be. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds. 2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. Revision: August 2007 EC-50 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously. When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds. A EC C D E F PBIB2317E How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-III Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table on “SRT Item”. WITHOUT CONSULT-III The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-51 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Driving Pattern JMBIA1062GB • The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: • Sea level • Flat road • Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) • Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. Revision: August 2007 EC-52 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. A Pattern 1: • The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). EC • The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). • The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). C Pattern 2: • When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. D Pattern 3: • The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: E • Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. • The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. • If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal F and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. G 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. H *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. I SEF414S Suggested Transmission Gear Position Set the shift lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. J K TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III) The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID(OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen. The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the ECM. (eg., if the bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of the bank 1 is displayed) L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-53 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item OBDMID 01H Self-diagnostic test item Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1) HO2S 02H 03H Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 3 (Bank 1) Revision: August 2007 DTC Test value and Test limit (GST display) Description TID Unit and Scaling ID P0131 83H 0BH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0131 84H 0BH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0130 85H 0BH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0130 86H 0BH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0133 87H 04H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to Rich) P0133 88H 04H Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to Lean) P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency P0138 07H 0CH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0137 08H 0CH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage P0143 07H 0CH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0144 08H 0CH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0146 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage P0145 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage EC-54 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item OBDMID Self-diagnostic test item DTC P0151 05H Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2) HO2S 06H 07H 21H Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 3 (Bank2) Three way catalyst function (Bank1) CATALYST 22H Three way catalyst function (Bank2) Revision: August 2007 Test value and Test limit (GST display) A Description TID Unit and Scaling ID 83H 0BH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle EC P0151 84H 0BH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0150 85H 0BH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0150 86H 0BH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0153 87H 04H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to Rich) P0153 88H 04H Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to Lean) P2A03 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio P2A03 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency P0158 07H 0CH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0157 08H 0CH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0158 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage P0159 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage P0163 07H 0CH Minimum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0164 08H 0CH Maximum sensor output voltage for test cycle P0166 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage P0165 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index P0420 82H 01H Switching time lag engine exhaust index value P2423 83H 0CH Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output voltage P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index P0430 82H 01H Switching time lag engine exhaust index value P2424 83H 0CH Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output voltage P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst EC-55 2008 Quest C D E F G H I J K L M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item EGR SYSTEM EVAP SYSTEM O2 SENSOR HEATER SECONDARY AIR OBDMID 31H Self-diagnostic test item EGR function DTC Test value and Test limit (GST display) Description TID Unit and Scaling ID P0400 80H 96H Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change rate (short term) P0400 81H 96H Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change rate (long term) P0400 82H 96H Low Flow Faults: Difference between max EGR temp and EGR temp under idling condition P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp P1402 84H 96H High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase rate 39H EVAP control system leak (Cap Off) P0455 80H 0CH Difference in pressure sensor output voltage before and after pull down 3BH EVAP control system leak (Small leak) P0442 80H 05H Leak area index (for more than 0.04inch) P0456 80H 05H 3CH EVAP control system (Very small leak) Leak area index (for more than 0.02inch) P0456 81H FDH Maximum internal pressure of EVAP system during monitoring P0441 83H 0CH Difference in pressure sensor output voltage before and after vent control value close 3DH Purge flow system 41H A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) Low Input:P0031 High Input:P0032 81H 0BH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage 42H Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) Low Input:P0037 High Input:P0038 80H 0CH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage 43H Heated oxygen sensor 3 (Bank 1) P0043 80H 0CH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage 45H A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) Low Input:P0051 High Input:P0052 81H 0BH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage 46H Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) Low Input:P0057 High Input:P0058 80H 0CH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage 47H Heated oxygen sensor 3 (Bank 2) P0063 80H 0CH Converted value of Heater electric current to voltage P0411 80H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Incorrect Flow Detected Bank1: P0491 Bank2: P0492 81H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Insufficient Flow P2445 82H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Pump Stuck Off P2448 83H 01H Secondary Air Injection System High Airflow Bank1: P2440 Bank2: P2442 84H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open P2440 85H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Switching Valve Stuck Open P2444 86H 01H Secondary Air Injection System Pump Stuck On 71H Secondary Air system Revision: August 2007 EC-56 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item OBDMID DTC TID Unit and Scaling ID A Description EC 81H Fuel injection system function (Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped 82H Fuel injection system function (Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim P0174 or P0175 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped P0301 80H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the first cylinder P0302 81H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the second cylinder P0303 82H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the third cylinder P0304 83H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the fourth cylinder P0305 84H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the fifth cylinder P0306 85H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sixth cylinder P0307 86H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the seventh cylinder P0308 87H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the eighth cylinder P0300 88H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the multiple cylinders P0301 89H 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the first cylinder P0302 8AH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the second cylinder FUEL SYSTEM MISFIRE Self-diagnostic test item Test value and Test limit (GST display) A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfire Revision: August 2007 P0303 8BH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the third cylinder P0304 8CH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fourth cylinder P0305 8DH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth cylinder P0306 8EH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth cylinder P0307 8FH 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth cylinder P0308 90H 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fifth cylinder P0300 91H 24H Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the single cylinder P0300 92H 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the single cylinder P0300 93H 24H Misfiring counter at 200rev of the multiple cylinders EC-57 2008 Quest C D E F G H I J K L M N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item OBDMID A2H A3H A4H A5H Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test value and Test limit (GST display) TID P0301 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0301 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0302 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0302 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0303 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0303 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0304 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0304 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0305 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0305 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0306 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0306 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0307 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0307 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles P0308 0BH 24H EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles P0308 0CH 24H Misfire counts for last/current driving cycles No.1 Cylinder Misfire No.2 Cylinder Misfire No.3 Cylinder Misfire No.4 Cylinder Misfire MISFIRE A6H A7H A8H A9H Description Unit and Scaling ID No.5 Cylinder Misfire No.6 Cylinder Misfire No.7 Cylinder Misfire No.8 Cylinder Misfire HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC With CONSULT-III NOTE: • If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. • If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1. 1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)". 2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III. Revision: August 2007 EC-58 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. A 4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.) WITH GST NOTE: • If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 sec- EC onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. • If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1. 1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)". C 2. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). No Tools NOTE: • If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at least 10 sec- D onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. • If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-9, "DTC No. Index"), skip step 1. 1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)". E 2. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results). • If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. F • The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. - Diagnostic trouble codes - 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes - Freeze frame data G - 1st trip freeze frame data - System readiness test (SRT) codes - Test values H Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000001717187 I DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-23, or see EC-616. 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. J K L SEF217U M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-59 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. Engine running MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. • Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) • One trip detection diagnoses Ignition switch in ON position SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. Engine stopped Mode II Engine stopped When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut MIL Flashing Without DTC When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-43, "Emissionrelated Diagnostic Information". HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: • It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. • It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. • Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-60 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this 10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For A the details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 4. Fully release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: EC Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). C D E PBIB0092E How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. F Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)". Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. G H DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-23 or see EC-616. I DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. J These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) K DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-61 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code. PBIB3005E A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-9) How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)". • If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. • Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000001717188 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS • When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. • When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-42, "Two Trip Detection Logic". • The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. • The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern Revision: August 2007 EC-62 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. • The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. A SUMMARY CHART EC Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) C For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”". D E For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”". F *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-63 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the times (pattern B) without any malDTC and the freeze frame data will be functions. stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for freeze frame data will be cleared at the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the will not be displayed any longer after the moment OK is detected. 1st trip freeze frame data will be vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) stored in ECM. without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: Revision: August 2007 EC-64 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. • The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. • The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. • The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) A EC Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm C Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: • When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). • When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to D 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: E Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C F (158°F) • The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. • The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. • The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. G • The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-65 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEF393SD *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the times (pattern B) without any malDTC and the freeze frame data will be functions. stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for cle is driven once (pattern B) without the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the will not be displayed any longer after the same malfunction. 1st trip freeze frame data will be vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) stored in ECM. without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) When the same malfunction is de*7: tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Revision: August 2007 EC-66 2008 Quest ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F AEC574 • The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). • The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. • The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. G Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. • The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. • The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. • The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-67 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000001717189 1.INSPECTION START 1. 2. 3. 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Headlamp switch is OFF. Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. SEF983U Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF977U 2.REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. With CONSULT-III Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Revision: August 2007 EC-68 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". A EC 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) C PBIA8513J D Without CONSULT-III Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". 1. 2. E F 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. G 4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. H Stop engine. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". I >> GO TO 5. 5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". J >> GO TO 6. 6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING K Refer to EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. L M 7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". N O 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) 1. 2. P Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. Revision: August 2007 EC-69 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-325. • Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-319. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. >> GO TO 4. 10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". A : Timing indicator 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 11. JMBIA0964ZZ 11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". >> GO TO 12. 12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". >> GO TO 13. 13.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Revision: August 2007 EC-70 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". A 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. C 15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-71, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". A D E : Timing indicator 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 16. JMBIA0964ZZ 16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. G H I 17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-325. • Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-319. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. J K L 18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. M N >> GO TO 4. 19.INSPECTION END O Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". 2. INSPECTION END No >> INSPECTION END Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check P INFOID:0000000001717190 IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 EC-71 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. 1. Slide the harness protector off ignition coil No.1 to clear the wires. 2. Attach timing light to the ignition coil No.1 wires as shown in the figure. BBIA0196E 3. Check ignition timing. A : Timing indicator JMBIA0964ZZ Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000001717191 When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function". 2. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". 3. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". 4. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". 5. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". VIN Registration INFOID:0000000001717192 DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-43. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Revision: August 2007 EC-72 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000001717193 A DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time EC harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning D INFOID:0000000001717194 E DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. F OPERATION PROCEDURE G 1. 2. 3. H Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000001717195 I DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: • Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. • Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. J K PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. • Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) • Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) • PNP switch: ON • Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. • Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) • Vehicle speed: Stopped • Transmission: Warmed-up - With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V. - Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. With CONSULT-III Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Revision: August 2007 M N O P OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. L EC-73 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-III NOTE: • It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. • It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". 2. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. Revision: August 2007 EC-74 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check PCV valve operation. A 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-122. EC 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: • Engine stalls. C • Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000001717196 D FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. F G Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. H I J BBIA0229E FUEL PRESSURE CHECK K CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models do not have fuel return system. L Method A CAUTION: • The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. • Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”. 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. • Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). • To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. • Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. • Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-23. • Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. • Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. • Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Revision: August 2007 EC-75 2008 Quest M N O P BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. • Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. • Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. • Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. • Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). • When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. • When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. • Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. • Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 0.08in). Tightening torque: PBIB0669E 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) • Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. BBIA0230E 5. 6. 7. 8. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. • Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. • During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. • Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging • Fuel filter for clogging • Fuel pump • Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that thequick connector o-ring maintains sealability. • Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”. 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-38. • Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. • Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. • Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. • Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. • When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose fordamage and abnormality. Revision: August 2007 EC-76 2008 Quest BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. • During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. A EC At idling: 7. 8. 9. Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. Check the following. • Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging • Fuel filter for clogging • Fuel pump • Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”. C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-77 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000001717197 INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. SEF233G A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on “WORK FLOW”. Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on “Worksheet Sample” should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. SEF234G WORK FLOW Revision: August 2007 EC-78 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Overall Sequence A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N PBIB3456E Detailed Flow O 1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC*1 1. 2. Check DTC*1. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed. Revision: August 2007 EC-79 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.) Erase DTC*1. (Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".) Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart".) 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? - Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. 3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 5. 4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected again. If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-82, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble diagnosis order. NOTE: • Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected. • Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC*1 detected? Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check according to EC-130. 6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform EC-68, "Basic Inspection". With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7. Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9. 7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE With CONSULT-III Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-III “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-122. Are they within the SP value? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 8. Revision: August 2007 EC-80 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE A Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 9. EC 9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. C D >> GO TO 10. 10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-119, "CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode", EC-99, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value". 11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". E F G H I J >> GO TO 12. 12.FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6. OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" and AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".) 2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 3. INSPECTION END *1: Include 1st trip DTC. *2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET L M N O P Description Revision: August 2007 K EC-81 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: • Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. • Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SEF907L Worksheet Sample MTBL0017 DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000001717198 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-82 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC U1010 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. Priority 1 2 3 EC Detected items (DTC) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line U1010 CAN communication P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor P0128 Thermostat function P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor P0327 P0328 Knock sensor P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) P0403 EGR volume control valve P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor P0500 Vehicle speed sensor P0605 ECM P0643 Sensor power supply P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch P1610 - P1615 NATS P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0405 P0406 EGR temperature sensor P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor P0550 Power steering pressure sensor P0603 ECM power supply P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve P1805 Brake switch P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay P2101 Electric throttle control function P2118 Throttle control motor • • • • • • • • • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function P0300 - P0306 Misfire P0400 P1402 EGR system P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK) P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system P0710 P0711 P0717 P0722 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P0760 P0762 P0765 P0770 P0775 P0780 P0795 P0797 P0882 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches P1148 P1168 Closed loop control P1211 TCS control unit P1212 TCS communication line P1421 Cold start control P1564 ASCD steering switch P1572 ASCD brake switch P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor P2119 Electric throttle control actuator • • • • • • • • Fail-Safe Chart C D E F G H I J K L INFOID:0000000001717199 When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Revision: August 2007 EC-83 A 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition. CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-III display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting. 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2101 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2119 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. (When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. (When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. • When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision: August 2007 Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-84 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000001717200 A SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM EC 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment Electric throttle control actuator Ignition EGR BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 4 C 3 4 2 D Reference page E F G EC-585 4 EC-75 2 EC-579 4 4 EC-28 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 EC-39 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-68 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-591 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 EGR system Main power supply and ground circuit 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 Throttle position sensor circuit 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 Revision: August 2007 K 2 EC-85 1 2 L EC-131 EC-188, EC-199 3 A/F sensor 1 circuit 2 EC-333, EC-477 EC-168, EC-177 1 1 J EC-341 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 2 EC-514, EC-526 1 2 I EC-68 1 EGR volume control valve circuit H EC-146, EC-207, EC-216, EC-224, EC-232, EC-554 EC-193, EC-301, EC-473, EC-475, EC-540 EC-449, EC-528, EC-534, EC-546 2008 Quest M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA Knock sensor circuit 2 3 Reference page EC-314 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-319 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-325 Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 ECM 2 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit 3 2 3 3 PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-438 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 3 3 EC-443, EC-447 3 EC-161 3 EC-454 1 Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 EC-501 3 Electrical load signal circuit Air conditioner circuit 3 EC-432 3 4 EC-603 3 2 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 EC-573 3 3 3 2 ATC-28 or MTC-27 BRC-10 or BRC-50 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER Revision: August 2007 EC-86 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYMPTOM Fuel Fuel tank Fuel piping HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 5 5 5 5 5 5 Air F 5 5 5 5 5 5 — EM-15 Air cleaner EM-15 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-17 Battery SC-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 Signal plate 6 EM-116 PNP switch 4 AT-83 Cylinder head gasket 5 SC-10 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 M N Piston Connecting rod L EM-94 Cylinder block Piston ring K SC-17 Starter circuit Cylinder head I J 5 EM-17, EM-23 1 H EM-15 5 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Generator circuit G — 5 Air duct Electric throttle control actuator Engine E — 5 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle control actuator) Cranking D EM-38 Valve deposit Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) C Reference page FL-9 5 Vapor lock EC 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-116 O Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism P Timing chain EM-54 Camshaft EM-54 Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 Intake valve 5 5 EM-54 5 3 Exhaust valve Revision: August 2007 5 EC-87 EM-94 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5 5 5 BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) 5 EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION 5 Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE AC IDLING VIBRATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AA HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT Exhaust ENGINE STALL Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 5 5 5 Three way catalyst Lubrication Cooling Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Reference page EM-25, EX4 EM-29, LU10, LU-12, LU-16 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-8 Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-16 Thermostat 5 CO-24 Water pump Water gallery CO-19 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 Cooling fan CO-26 EC-463 5 Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) 5 1 1 CO-10 BL-180 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. Revision: August 2007 EC-88 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001717201 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBIA0314E Revision: August 2007 EC-89 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0321E Revision: August 2007 EC-90 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J K L BBIA0652E : M Vehicle front 1. Knock sensor harness connector 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) harness connector 3. 4. Ignition coil harness connector (bank 1) 5. Ignition coil harness connector (bank 6. 2) Power valve actuator 7. VIAS control solenoid valve 8. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) harness connector Fuel pump fuse (15A) 9. Fuel injector harness connector N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-91 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0682E : Vehicle front 1. Throttle valve (view with intake air duct removed) 4. Electronic controlled engine mount- 5. 1 harness connector Park/neutral position switch harness 6. connector (view with battery tray removed) 7. Power steering pressure sensor harness connector EGR temperature sensor harness connector (view with engine cover removed) Revision: August 2007 2. 8. EGR volume control valve harness connector EC-92 3. 9. EGR volume control valve Tie rod RH (view from under vehicle) Intake manifold collector 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E PBIB1686E F G H I J K L M BBIA0683E : N Vehicle front 1. Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (view from under the vehicle) 3. Oil pan (view from under the vehicle) 4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector 6. Air fuel ratio sensor 1 (bank 2) O P Revision: August 2007 EC-93 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0665E : Vehicle front 1. EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 4. Intake manifold collector 5. EVAP canister purge volume control 6. solenoid valve ECM harness connector 7. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector 8. EVAP service port Intake manifold collector Revision: August 2007 EC-94 3. 9. EVAP canister 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J BBIA0684E : K Vehicle front L 1. ASCD brake switch 2. Stop lamp switch 3. Fuel pressure regulator 4. Fuel pump, fuel level sensor unit and fuel filler 5. ASCD steering switch 6. MAIN switch SET/COAST switch 9. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 7. CANCEL switch 8. 10. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector (view with fuel tank removed) 11. PCV valve (view with cowl removed) M 12. Intake manifold collector N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-95 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000001717202 BBIA0663E 1. Power valve actuator 4. VIAS control solenoid valve 2. Vacuum tank 3. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. Refer to EC-19, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System. Revision: August 2007 EC-96 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000001717203 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2498E Revision: August 2007 EC-97 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBWA2499E Revision: August 2007 EC-98 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001717204 A EC C MBIB0045E D ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000001717205 E PREPARATION ECM is located in the right side of the cowl top (behind the strut tower). F G H BBIA0315E ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) L B ECM ground [Engine is running] • Idle speed Body ground R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) M [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed N PBIB1584E 3 R Throttle control motor relay power supply [Ignition switch: ON] O/L Throttle control motor (Close) P [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released PBIB1104E Revision: August 2007 EC-99 O BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V 4 J K WIRE COLOR Approximately 5V 2 I 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 14V 5 W/L Throttle control motor (Open) [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed PBIB1105E 6 8 9 GR W W/R Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) Electronic controlled engine mount-1 Electronic controlled engine mount-2 [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 950 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or less 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] • 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or less 2.0 - 3.0V [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 950 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or more 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] • 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or more 2.0 - 3.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 10 Y/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm PBIB1790E Revision: August 2007 EC-100 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) EC BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V 11 R/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 1) C [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm D PBIB1790E 12 W Power steering pressure sensor A [Engine is running] • Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V [Engine is running] • Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V E F Approximately 10V G [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 13 W H PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I Approximately 10V J [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm K PBIB1042E 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 14 W Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) L M PBIB1039E N 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm O PBIB1040E 15 W Knock sensor Revision: August 2007 [Engine is running] • Idle speed EC-101 Approximately 2.5V 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 16 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P 17 18 19 20 P/B G L L/W DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EGR volume control valve [Engine is running] • Idle speed 0.1 - 14V BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 21 22 23 L/W R/Y R/B Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 (11 - 14V) SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C Approximately 5V 24 W A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E 25 29 32 P Y/G BR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) VIAS control solenoid valve EVAP control system pressure sensor Revision: August 2007 [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V EC-102 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 33 Y Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) A C PBIB1039E D 1.0 - 4.0V E [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm F PBIB1040E 34 Y/G Intake air temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 40 41 42 V/W R/L R/W Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 G H (11 - 14V) I SEC984C J BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm L SEC985C M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-103 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Idle speed • Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after engine starting. 45 V/R SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEC991C 47 R Throttle position sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 G/O EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 BR/Y Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed 1.0 - 1.3V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.0V [Ignition switch: ON] Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • EGR system: Operating 0 - 1.5V Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - Approximately 1.0V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed 50 51 54 55 Y W/L P/L W 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Throttle position sensor 1 Mass air flow sensor EGR temperature sensor Approximately 2.6V Revision: August 2007 Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V EC-104 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 0 - 0.4V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 60 61 62 P/L L/R Y/R Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 A C SEC986C D 0.1 - 0.6V E [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm F SEC987C 66 G Throttle position sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V G 67 B Sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V H 68 BR/W PSP sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 69 L Throttle position sensor 2 I [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V 1.0 - 4.0V J K 70 W Refrigerant pressure sensor [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates.) 73 Y/B Engine coolant temperature sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - Approximately 1.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 74 78 W B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground Revision: August 2007 EC-105 L M N O P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.4V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 79 80 81 GR/R GR G/R Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm SEC987C 82 B APP sensor 1 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 83 G APP sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 85 SB Data link connector — — 86 P CAN communication line — — 90 R/V APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 O APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 94 L CAN communication line — — [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • ASCD steering switch: OFF Approximately 4V [Ignition switch: ON] • MAIN switch: Pressed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] • CANCEL switch: Pressed Approximately 1V [Ignition switch: ON] • RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approximately 3V [Ignition switch: ON] • SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approximately 2V [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Shift lever: P or N BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Except the above gear position Approximately 0V 98 99 101 102 W/B G/Y R/G O/B Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ASCD steering switch Stop lamp switch PNP switch Revision: August 2007 EC-106 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 104 106 107 108 109 111 113 WIRE COLOR O W R/L G/B R W/B B/O ITEM Throttle control motor relay Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ASCD brake switch Ignition switch ECM relay (Self shut-off) Fuel pump relay CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC C D E F G H [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I J K L 115 116 B B ECM ground [Engine is running] • Idle speed Body ground 117 LG/B EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 G Power supply for ECM (Back-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) M N : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) O CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000001717206 FUNCTION P Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-III unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.* Revision: August 2007 EC-107 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic test mode Function Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. • Diagnostic trouble codes • 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes • Freeze frame data • 1st trip freeze frame data • System readiness test (SRT) codes • Test values ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION Revision: August 2007 EC-108 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Item WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST INPUT DATA*2 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS A DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × Mass air flow sensor × Engine coolant temperature sensor × A/F sensor 1 × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × Wheel sensor × Accelerator pedal position sensor × Throttle position sensor × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × Intake air temperature sensor × EGR temperature sensor × Knock sensor × × × × × × C D × E × × × EC F × × G × H × Refrigerant pressure sensor × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × Air conditioner switch × Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × Stop lamp switch × × Power steering pressure sensor × × Battery voltage × Load signal × Fuel level sensor × × ASCD steering switch × × ASCD brake switch × × I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-109 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Fuel injector × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × Item WORK SUPPORT DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × DTC WORK SUPPORT × × × × × Air conditioner relay × Fuel pump relay OUTPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS DATA*2 SRT STATUS × × Cooling fan relay × × × EGR volume control valve × × × A/F sensor 1 heater × × ×*3 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3 × × × Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × VIAS control solenoid valve × × × × × EVAP canister vent control valve × Electronic controlled engine mount × Calculated load value × X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-43. *3: Always “COMPLT” is displayed. WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item CONDITION USAGE FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE WORK ITEM • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value Revision: August 2007 EC-110 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. • IGN SW “ON” • ENGINE NOT RUNNING • AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). • NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM • FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). • WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” • WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTIII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing VIN REGISTRATION • IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE A EC C D E F G *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. H SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".) I Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] FUEL SYS-B1 FUEL SYS-B2 • The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to EC-9.) • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. • One mode in the following is displayed. Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] • The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] J Description L M N • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. • The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. • The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/h] or [mph] • The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ABSOL TH-P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] • The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. Revision: August 2007 EC-111 K 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Freeze frame data item* INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] INT MANI PRES [kPa] FTFMCH1 Description • The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. • Always a certain value is displayed. • These items are not efficient for V42 models. *: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item ×: Applicable Monitored item ENG SPEED Unit Description Remarks rpm • Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). • Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. • If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. • The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. MAS A/F SE-B1 V B/FUEL SCHDL msec A/F ALPHA-B1 % A/F ALPHA-B2 % COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F A/F SEN1 (B1) V A/F SEN1 (B2) V HO2S2 (B1) V HO2S2 (B2) V HO2S2 MNTR (B1) RICH/LEAN • “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. • The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. • This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. • The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. • When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. HO2S2 MNTR (B2) RICH/LEAN VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. BATTERY VOLT [V] V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. ACCEL SEN 1 V ACCEL SEN 2 V TP SEN 1-B1 V TP SEN 2-B1 V • The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. • The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. FUEL T/TMP SE °C or °F • The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F • The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. Revision: August 2007 • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. EC-112 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitored item Unit Description EGR TEMP SEN V • The signal voltage of EGR temperature sensor is displayed. EVAP SYS PRES V • The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. FUEL LEVEL SE V • The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. ON/OFF • Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. ON/OFF • Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. AIR COND SIG ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. P/N POSI SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. ON/OFF • [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated. ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch are OFF. START SIGNAL CLSD THL POS PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal. HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater fan switch signal. BRAKE SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. IGNITION SW INJ PULSE-B1 msec INJ PULSE-B2 msec IGN TIMING CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW PURG VOL C/V EGR VOL CON/V Revision: August 2007 Remarks A EC C • After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. D E F G H I J K • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. • When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. BTDC • Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. • When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. % • “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current air flow divided by peak air flow. g·m/s • Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. % • Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. • The opening becomes larger as the value increases. step M N O P • Indicates the EGR volume control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. • The opening becomes larger as the value increases. EC-113 L 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitored item Unit INT/V TIM (B1) °CA INT/V TIM (B2) °CA INT/V SOL (B1) % INT/V SOL (B2) % Description • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle. • The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. • The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases. VIAS S/V-1 ON/OFF • The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating. OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating. AIR COND RLY ON/OFF • The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ENGINE MOUNT IDLE/TRVL • The control condition of the electronic controlled engine mount (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. IDLE: Engine speed is below 950 rpm TRVL: Engine speed is above 950 rpm FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF • Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. VENT CONT/V ON/OFF • The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: Closed OFF: Open THRTL RELAY ON/OFF • Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. HI/MID/LOW/ OFF • The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation MID: Middle speed operation LOW: Low speed operation OFF: Stop COOLING FAN HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON/OFF HO2S2 HTR (B2) ON/OFF I/P PULLY SPD VEHICLE SPEED IDL A/V LEARN TRVL AFTER MIL Revision: August 2007 rpm Remarks • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. • Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal. km/h or MPH • Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal. YET/CMPLT • Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET: Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully. km or mile • Distance traveled while MIL is activated. EC-114 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitored item Unit Description A/F S1 HTR (B1) % A/F S1 HTR (B2) % • Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. AC PRESS SEN V Remarks A EC • The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. SET VHCL SPD km/h or m.p.h • The preset vehicle speed is displayed. C D ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch signal. CANCEL SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal. SET SW ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST switch signal. BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal. BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. NON/CUT • Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. NON/CUT • Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. M CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. N SET LAMP ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. O A/F ADJ-B1 — A/F ADJ-B2 — MAIN SW VHCL SPD CUT LO SPEED CUT E F G H I J K L • Indicates the correction factor stored in ECM. The factor is calculated from the difference between the target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 signal. P NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item Revision: August 2007 EC-115 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT FUEL INJECTION • Engine: Return to the original trouble condition • Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-III. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. • Harness and connectors • Fuel injector • A/F sensor 1 IGNITION TIMING • Engine: Return to the original trouble condition • Timing light: Set • Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-III. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning POWER BALANCE • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. • A/C switch: OFF • Shift lever: P or N • Cut off each fuel injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-III. Engine runs rough or dies. • • • • • • COOLING FAN* • Ignition switch: ON • Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”, “LOW” and “OFF” using CONSULT-III. Cooling fan moves and stops. • Harness and connectors • Cooling fan motor • IPDM E/R ENG COOLANT TEMP • Engine: Return to the original trouble condition • Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-III. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. • Harness and connectors • Engine coolant temperature sensor • Fuel injector FUEL PUMP RELAY • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-III and listen to operating sound. Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. • Harness and connectors • Fuel pump relay EGR VOL CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Change the EGR volume control valve opening step using CONSULT-III. EGR volume control valve makes an operating sound. • Harness and connectors • EGR volume control valve VIAS S/V-1 • Ignition switch: ON • Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” using CONSULT-III and listen to operating sound. Solenoid valve makes the operating sound. • Harness and connectors • Solenoid valve ENGINE MOUNTING • Ignition switch: ON • Turn electronic controlled engine mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with the CONSULT-III. Electronic controlled engine mount makes the operating sound. • Harness and connectors • Electronic controlled engine mount PURG VOL CONT/V • Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. • Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-III. Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. • Harness and connectors • Solenoid valve FUEL/T TEMP SEN • Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III. VENT CONTROL/V • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” with the CONSULT-III and listen to operating sound. Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. • Harness and connectors • Solenoid valve V/T ASSIGN ANGLE • Engine: Return to the original trouble condition • Change intake valve timing using CONSULT-III. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. • Harness and connectors • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve Revision: August 2007 EC-116 CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Harness and connectors Compression Fuel injector Power transistor Spark plug Ignition coil 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > *: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. A DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode For details, refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". EC SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. C DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page P0441 EC-359 P0442 EC-364 P0455 EC-412 EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-418 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-371 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-207 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-232 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-207 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-232 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-262 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-250 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-241 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-262 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-250 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-241 EGR SYSTEM P0400 P0400 EC-333 EGR SYSTEM P1402 P1402 EC-477 PURG FLOW P0441 EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM A/F SEN1 HO2S2 EGR SYSTEM EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* D E F G H I J *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to V42 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens. K Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000001717207 DESCRIPTION L Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol. The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service manual. M N O SEF139P FUNCTION P Diagnostic test mode Function Service $01 READINESS TESTS This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". Revision: August 2007 EC-117 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic test mode Function DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: • Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) • Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) • Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) • Clear freeze frame data (Service $02) • Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) • Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07) Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. Service $03 Service $08 Service $09 — (CALIBRATION ID) This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can be closed. In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function. • Low ambient temperature • Low battery voltage • Engine running • Ignition switch OFF • Low fuel temperature • Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect GST to data link connector (2), which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. • Brake pedal (1) Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0690E 4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) SEF398S Revision: August 2007 EC-118 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. A EC C SEF416S D CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717208 Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-122. B/FUEL SCHDL • See EC-122. A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2 • See EC-122. COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm VHCL SPEED SE • Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V TP SEN 1-B1 TP SEN 2-B1* • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Shift lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EGR TEMP SEN • Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) AIR COND SIG • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON Revision: August 2007 G LEAN ←→ RICH J K L 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N ON Shift lever: Except above OFF EC-119 I Fluctuates around 1.5V 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) F H • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) E M N O P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine • Ignition switch: ON IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON HEATER FAN SW • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 • • • • SPECIFICATION Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF Steering wheel: Being turned ON Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF ON → OFF → ON Heater fan: Operating ON Heater fan: Not operating OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 13° - 18° BTDC IGN TIMING • • • • 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 5% - 35% CAL/LD VALUE • • • • 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s MASS AIRFLOW • • • • 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s PURG VOL C/V • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm — Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 0 step EGR VOL CON/V • • • • Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle −5° - 5°CA INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 0% - 2% INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% VIAS S/V-1 • Engine: After warming up 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF • Engine: After warming up idle the engine Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates) ON ENGINE MOUNT • Engine: Running Engine speed: Below 950 rpm IDLE Engine speed: Above 950 rpm TRVL FUEL PUMP RLY • For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON • Engine running or cranking ON • Except above conditions OFF Revision: August 2007 EC-120 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION VENT CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON A Engine coolant temperature: 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature: Between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature: Between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature: 105°C (221°F) or more HI D • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON E • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH) Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication VEHICLE SPEED • Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% AC PRESS SEN • Engine: Idle • Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates) 1.0 - 4.0V VHCL SPEED SE • Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-III value. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating. The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed ON MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF ACSD: Operating ON ASCD: Not operating OFF COOLING FAN HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) RESUME/ACC SW SET SW • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine • Air conditioner switch: OFF Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. EC C G 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) H • Ignition switch: ON • Ignition switch: ON BRAKE SW1 • Ignition switch: ON BRAKE SW2 • Ignition switch: ON CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON SET LAMP • MAIN switch: ON • When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) I EC-121 J K L M N O P *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. Revision: August 2007 F 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description INFOID:0000000001717210 The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: • B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction) • A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) • MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition INFOID:0000000001717211 • • • • • - Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) Transmission: Warmed-up After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). • Electrical load: Not applied - Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. • Engine speed: Idle Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000001717212 NOTE: Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-68, "Basic Inspection". 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-122 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717213 A OVERALL SEQUENCE EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P PBIB2268E Revision: August 2007 EC-123 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > PBIB3214E DETAILED PROCEDURE 1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-122, "Testing Condition". Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-124 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. EC NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. 2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. 3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” C D E Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. 4.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop the engine. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. F G H I J 5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL 1. 2. Stop the engine. Change engine oil. NOTE: This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition. K L M >> INSPECTION END 6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE N Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". GO TO 8. NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7. O 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P 1. 2. Check the following. Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube Clogged fuel filter Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-585.) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".) If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. Revision: August 2007 EC-125 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. 10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. Check the following. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-591.) Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-579.) Intake air leakage Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-94, "On-Vehicle Service".) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.) >> GO TO 11. 11.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12. 12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1. • For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-207, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". • For DTC P0131, P0151, refer to EC-216, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". • For DTC P0132, P0152, refer to EC-224, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". • For DTC P0133, P0153, refer to EC-232, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". • For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-554, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC. >> GO TO 14. 14.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-126 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 15. A 15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Stop the engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. EC >> GO TO 16. C 16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart". 17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. 18.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. - Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. Engine oil level is too high Engine oil viscosity Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive Noise from engine Noise from transmission, etc. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. EGR valve stuck Valve clearance malfunction Intake valve timing control function malfunction Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc. D E F G H I J K L >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. 19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM M Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. N O 20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21. 21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR Revision: August 2007 EC-127 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again. >> GO TO 22. 22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-177. 2. GO TO 29. NG >> GO TO 23. 23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29. 24.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> GO TO 29. 25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 27. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26. 26.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. 27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30. 28.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 EC-128 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. • Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct A • Looseness of oil filler cap • Disconnection of oil level gauge • Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve EC • Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve • Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket • Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts C • Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. D >> GO TO 30. 29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart". E F 30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart". G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-129 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description INFOID:0000000001717214 Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations STEP in Work Flow 2 3 or 4 Situation The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. The symptom described by the customer does not recur. 5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. 10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717215 1.INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4.CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-21, "How to Check Terminal", “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-130 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram A INFOID:0000000001717216 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2500E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-131 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 109 111 119 120 WIRE COLOR R W/B R/G R/G ITEM Ignition switch ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM Revision: August 2007 CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: OFF] 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) EC-132 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2501E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-133 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 1 B ECM ground [Engine is running] • Idle speed Body ground 115 116 B B ECM ground [Engine is running] • Idle speed Body ground Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717217 1.INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-134 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I K 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. L Continuity should exist. M 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. N 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F14, E5 • Harness for open or short between ECM and ground O P >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 EC-135 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-591. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB1915E 8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 11. PBIB1630E 9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB1191E 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-136 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. A 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC 12.CHECK 15A FUSE C 1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. D 13.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". F G H I J K L M BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. N Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. O 14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II P 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. Revision: August 2007 EC-137 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F14, E5 • Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000001717218 Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: • Remove the ground bolt or screw. • Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. • Clean as required to assure good contact. • Reinstall bolt or screw securely. • Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. • If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution". PBIB1870E Revision: August 2007 EC-138 2008 Quest DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description A INFOID:0000000001717219 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 CAN communication line 1001*2 INFOID:0000000001717220 DTC detecting condition When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal other than OBD (emissionrelated diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. Possible cause D E • Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) F G *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. H DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. INFOID:0000000001717221 Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-139 2008 Quest DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717222 BBWA2502E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717223 Go to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". Revision: August 2007 EC-140 2008 Quest DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION A Description INFOID:0000000001717224 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717225 D This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. U1010 1010 Trouble diagnosis name CAN communication bus DTC detecting condition When detecting error during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of ECM. Possible cause E • ECM F DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. INFOID:0000000001717226 Turn ignition switch ON. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717227 1.INSPECTION START I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again? With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select Service $04 with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 4. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END J K L M N 2.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-141 2008 Quest O P DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL Description INFOID:0000000001717228 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Engine speed and piston position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Wheel sensor Vehicle speed* Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve *: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. PBIB3275E This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717229 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle −5° - 5°CA INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 0% - 2% INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% Revision: August 2007 EC-142 2008 Quest DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717230 A Trouble diagnosis name DTC No. Detecting condition P0011 0011 (Bank 1) P0021 0021 (Bank 2) Intake valve timing control performance There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree. Possible cause EC • • • • Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve control solenoid valve Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft • Timing chain installation • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve timing control C D FAIL-SAFE MODE E When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function. DTC Confirmation Procedure F INFOID:0000000001717231 NOTE: • If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-161. • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at idle. G H I J WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F) B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.4 msec Shift lever P or N position 4. 5. 6. 7. K L M N Let engine idle for 10 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure". If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds. O P ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F) Shift lever 1st or 2nd position Driving location uphill Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.) Revision: August 2007 EC-143 2008 Quest DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Check 1st trip DTC. 9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717232 1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP 1. 2. Start engine. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. KG >> Go to LU-8, "Inspection". PBIA8559J 2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-145, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). 5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) Check the following. • Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end • Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. SEC905C 6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned. Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned? Yes or No Revision: August 2007 EC-144 2008 Quest DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54. No >> GO TO 7. A 7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT Refer to EM-84, "Inspection After Installation". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean lubrication line. EC C 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-320 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-326 for CMP sensor (PHASE). D >> INSPECTION END E Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717233 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. 4. F Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as follows. Terminal Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist.) If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Removal and Installation G H I PBIB0193E J K L M PBIB2275E INFOID:0000000001717234 N INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-54. O P Revision: August 2007 EC-145 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description INFOID:0000000001717235 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air ECM function Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater con- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater trol The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717236 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0031 0031 (Bank 1) P0051 0051 (Bank 2) P0032 0032 (Bank 1) P0052 0052 (Bank 2) SPECIFICATION 0 - 100% INFOID:0000000001717237 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) • A/F sensor 1 heater Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) • A/F sensor 1 heater DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause INFOID:0000000001717238 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-150, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-146 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717239 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2505E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-147 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: August 2007 EC-148 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2506E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-149 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717240 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-150 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0656E : 1. 2. 3. E Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector F Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. G Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. H I PBIB1683E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse K L >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M N Continuity should exist. O 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P 5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: August 2007 EC-151 2008 Quest DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace. 7.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717241 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB1684E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717242 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-25. Revision: August 2007 EC-152 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER A Description INFOID:0000000001717243 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC Sensor Input signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ECM function Actuator C Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater D The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. E OPERATION Engine speed rpm F Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. • Engine: After warming up • Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON G CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717244 H Specification data are reference values. I MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) OFF • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load On Board Diagnosis Logic J ON K INFOID:0000000001717245 L DTC No. P0037 0037 (Bank 1) P0057 0057 (Bank 2) P0038 0038 (Bank 1) P0058 0058 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high DTC detecting condition Possible cause The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater M The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater O P DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717246 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 N EC-153 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 6. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 7. Check 1st trip DTC. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-154 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717247 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2507E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-155 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 25 WIRE COLOR P ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) CONDITION [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Revision: August 2007 DATA (DC Voltage) EC-156 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2508E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-157 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 6 WIRE COLOR GR ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm. BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 55 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717248 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E Revision: August 2007 EC-158 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > : Vehicle front A 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. C 2.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Oil pan (1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3) Turn ignition switch ON. D E F BBIA0685E G 3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. I J PBIB0112E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse L M >> Repair harness or connectors. 4.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals O Bank ECM Sensor P0037, P0038 25 2 1 P0057, P0058 6 2 2 P Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Revision: August 2007 EC-159 2008 Quest DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER Refer to EC-160, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717249 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. SEF249Y Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717250 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-25. Revision: August 2007 EC-160 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717251 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. EC C D PBIB1842E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717252 Specification data are reference values. F MONITOR ITEM INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2) CONDITION • • • • E Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load SPECIFICATION Idle 0% - 2% 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50% G H On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717253 I DTC No. P0075 0075 (Bank 1) P0081 0081 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit DTC detecting condition An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve J K INFOID:0000000001717254 L 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnosis Procedure". M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-161 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717255 BANK 1 BBWA2548E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-162 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC C 7 - 12V 11 R/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 1) D [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm E PBIB1790E 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM F [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-163 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2549E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-164 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) EC BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C 7 - 12V 10 Y/L Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm D PBIB1790E 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V F [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717256 I 1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. J K L M BBIA0065E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. N Voltage: Battery voltage O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. P PBIB0192E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors F44, F101 (bank 1) Revision: August 2007 EC-165 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F44, F101 (bank 1) • Harness for open and short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-166, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717257 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows. Terminals Resistance 1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Revision: August 2007 EC-166 PBIB0193E 2008 Quest DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. A EC C PBIB2275E D Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717258 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E Refer to EM-54. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-167 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717259 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. PBIB1604E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717260 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-122. Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 5% - 35% CAL/LD VALUE • • • • 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s MASS AIRFLOW 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. INFOID:0000000001717261 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition A) P0101 0101 A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Mass air flow sensor • EVAP control system pressure sensor • Intake air temperature sensor A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Intake air leaks • Mass air flow sensor • EVAP control system pressure sensor • Intake air temperature sensor Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance B) Possible cause DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717262 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-168 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC 2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 3. Check 1st trip DTC. C 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. D With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". If OK, go to following step. F G H I J K L PBIB3457E 7. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm TP SEN 1-B1 More than 3V TP SEN 2-B1 More than 3V Shift lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8. 9. M Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. N O P Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717263 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. Revision: August 2007 EC-169 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > With GST Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. 5. If NG, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure". 1. 2. 3. 4. SEF534P Revision: August 2007 EC-170 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717264 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2511E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-171 2008 Quest P DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 51 67 111 119 120 WIRE COLOR W/L B W/B R/G R/G ITEM Mass air flow sensor Sensor ground ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed 1.0 - 1.3V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717265 1.INSPECTION START Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. • Air duct • Vacuum hoses • Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. 3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-172 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0327E 3. O Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1597E Revision: August 2007 EC-173 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. 6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. 9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-398, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-174 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717266 A MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. EC Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition D MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm C E F 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4* *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. G H I J K Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. L M Condition Voltage V Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm N O 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. P If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. Revision: August 2007 EC-175 2008 Quest DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717267 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-15. Revision: August 2007 EC-176 2008 Quest DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717268 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D PBIB1604E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717269 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM E F CONDITION SPECIFICATION MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-122. Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 5% - 35% CAL/LD VALUE • • • • 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s MASS AIRFLOW 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s G On Board Diagnosis Logic H I INFOID:0000000001717270 J These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. K Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0102 0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Intake air leaks • Mass air flow sensor L P0103 0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Mass air flow sensor M FAIL-SAFE MODE N When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717271 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 Revision: August 2007 O EC-177 2008 Quest P DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Wait at least 5 seconds. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure". If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-178 2008 Quest DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717272 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2511E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-179 2008 Quest P DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 51 67 111 119 120 WIRE COLOR W/L B W/B R/G R/G ITEM Mass air flow sensor Sensor ground ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed 1.0 - 1.3V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm 1.6 - 2.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717273 1.INSPECTION START Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check the following for connection. • Air duct • Vacuum hoses • Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. 3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-180 2008 Quest DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0327E 3. O Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1597E Revision: August 2007 EC-181 2008 Quest DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM >> Repair harness or connectors. 6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-182, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717274 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Revision: August 2007 EC-182 2008 Quest DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Condition Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm A MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) EC C 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4* *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. D E F G H Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition J Voltage V Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 2.0 Idle to about 4,000 rpm I K L 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. M If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. • Crushed air ducts • Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element • Uneven dirt of air cleaner element • Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation N O P INFOID:0000000001717275 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer toEM-15. Revision: August 2007 EC-183 2008 Quest DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717276 The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.800 - 2.200 80 (176) 1.23 0.283 - 0.359 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. INFOID:0000000001717277 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. SEF012P Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Intake air temperature sensor INFOID:0000000001717278 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Wait at least 5 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-184 2008 Quest DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717279 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2512E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717280 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-185 2008 Quest P DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0327E 3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2 and ground. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connectors. PBIB1598E Revision: August 2007 EC-186 2008 Quest DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). F 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer toEC-130. G >> INSPECTION END H Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717281 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. I Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. J Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 K If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). L PBIB1604E M N O SEF012P P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717282 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-15. Revision: August 2007 EC-187 2008 Quest DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717283 The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717284 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition P0117 0117 DTC No. Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible Cause P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Engine coolant temperature sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition. CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-III display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting. 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. Revision: August 2007 EC-188 2008 Quest DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. INFOID:0000000001717285 A If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C Turn ignition switch ON. Wait at least 5 seconds. Check DTC. D If DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnosis Procedure". E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-189 2008 Quest DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717286 BBWA2513E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717287 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-190 2008 Quest DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0323E 3. O Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB0080E Revision: August 2007 EC-191 2008 Quest DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717288 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717289 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-24. Revision: August 2007 EC-192 2008 Quest DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717290 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717291 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM TP SEN 1-B1 TP SEN 2-B1* CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Shift lever: D SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G H *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717292 I These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. E Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0122 0122 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. P0123 0123 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) Accelerator pedal position sensor. (APP sensor 2) J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717293 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Revision: August 2007 EC-193 2008 Quest N O P DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717294 BBWA1604E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-194 2008 Quest DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 50 66 69 91 WIRE COLOR R Y G L O ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply Throttle position sensor 1 Throttle position sensor ground Throttle position sensor 2 APP sensor 2 power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V E [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V F [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released Less than 4.75V G [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnosis Procedure C D H I INFOID:0000000001717295 J 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-195 2008 Quest DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0318E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E Revision: August 2007 EC-196 2008 Quest DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit. D 4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. E ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-194 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-535 F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 5.CHECK APP SENSOR H Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. I 6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. J Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". K >> INSPECTION END 7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. N 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O 8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-197 2008 Quest P DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-198, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717296 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) PBIB1608E 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717297 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. Revision: August 2007 EC-198 2008 Quest DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717298 NOTE: EC If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or P0118. Refer to EC-188. The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine C coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the therD mistor decreases as temperature increases. E SEF594K F Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) G Voltage* V Resistance kΩ −10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 H I *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. J On Board Diagnosis Logic K DTC No. P0125 0125 INFOID:0000000001717299 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control • Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible cause • Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) • Engine coolant temperature sensor • Thermostat INFOID:0000000001717300 CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). Revision: August 2007 EC-199 2008 Quest M N O P DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. 4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. 5. Check 1st trip DTC. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-200, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717301 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION Revision: August 2007 EC-200 2008 Quest DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-24. EC CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT 4. Refer to EC-130. Refer to EC-190, "Wiring Diagram". C >> INSPECTION END D Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717302 E ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. F G H PBIB2005E I 2. Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 J K If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. L SEF012P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717303 M ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-24. N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-201 2008 Quest DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717304 The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. PBIB1604E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.800 - 2.200 80 (176) 1.23 0.283 - 0.359 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 INFOID:0000000001717305 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high SEF012P DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Intake air temperature sensor INFOID:0000000001717306 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-III 1. a. b. c. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check the engine coolant temperature. Revision: August 2007 EC-202 2008 Quest DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. A • Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. EC 4. Start engine. 5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. C 6. Check 1st trip DTC. 7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-203, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST D Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717307 E 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". F G H I J K L M BBIA0691E N : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. P 2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-204, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Revision: August 2007 EC-203 2008 Quest DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. Refer to EC-185, "Wiring Diagram". >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717308 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). PBIB1604E SEF012P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717309 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-15. Revision: August 2007 EC-204 2008 Quest DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic A INFOID:0000000001717310 Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long EC enough. This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name Thermostat function C DTC detecting condition Possible cause The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. • Thermostat • Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat • Engine coolant temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717311 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: • For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. • For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 71°C (160°F). • Before performing the following procedure, do not fill with the fuel. D E F G H WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Turn A/C switch OFF. Turn blower fan switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”. If it is below 71°C (160°F), go to following step. If it is above 71°C (160°F), cool down the engine to less than 71°C (160°F), then go to next step. Start engine. Wait at idle for a least 30 minutes. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 71°C (160°F) within 30 minutes, turn ignition switch OFF because the test result will be OK. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-205, "Diagnosis Procedure". I J K L M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717312 N 1.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-205, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Component Inspection O P INFOID:0000000001717313 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Revision: August 2007 EC-205 2008 Quest DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2. PBIB2005E 2. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717314 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-24. Revision: August 2007 EC-206 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717315 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). E F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717316 I Specification data are reference values. J MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm SPECIFICATION Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717317 To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0130 0130 (Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit P0150 0150 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition A) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other than approx. 1.5V. B) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. A) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly in the range other than approx. 1.5V. B) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. Possible Cause M O P INFOID:0000000001717318 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: EC-207 L N • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure Revision: August 2007 K 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTD is detected, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Shift lever D position with “OD” OFF 7. 8. 9. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. Release accelerator pedal fully. NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717319 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. Set D position with “OD” OFF, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 EC-208 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Turn ignition switch ON. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 8. Restart engine. 9. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times. 10. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 11. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure". A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-209 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717320 BANK 1 BBWA2503E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-210 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC Approximately 5V C 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed D PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed E Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V F Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-211 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2504E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-212 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) C PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V E Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717321 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-213 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0656E : 1. 2. 3. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank1 Bank 2 Revision: August 2007 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 EC-214 2008 Quest DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. 4. A Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 C D E Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. H 6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 I Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J K >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717322 L AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-25. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-215 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717323 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717324 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm On Board Diagnosis Logic Fluctuates around 1.5V INFOID:0000000001717325 To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P0131 0131 (Bank 1) P0151 0151 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit low voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717326 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. Revision: August 2007 EC-216 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-221, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C D E ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Gear position Suitable position F NOTE: • Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. • If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. 10. Check 1st trip DTC. 11. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-221, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H I WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-217 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717327 BANK 1 BBWA2503E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-218 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC Approximately 5V C 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed D PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed E Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V F Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-219 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2504E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-220 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) C PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V E Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717328 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-221 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0656E : 1. 2. 3. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank1 Bank 2 Revision: August 2007 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 EC-222 2008 Quest DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. 4. A Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 C D E Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. H 6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 I Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J K >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717329 L AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-25. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-223 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717330 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717331 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm On Board Diagnosis Logic Fluctuates around 1.5V INFOID:0000000001717332 To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P0132 0132 (Bank 1) P0152 0152 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717333 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. Revision: August 2007 EC-224 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C D E ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Gear position Suitable position F NOTE: • Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. • If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. 10. Check 1st trip DTC. 11. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H I WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-225 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717334 BANK 1 BBWA2503E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-226 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC Approximately 5V C 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed D PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed E Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V F Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-227 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2504E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-228 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) C PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V E Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717335 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-229 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0656E : 1. 2. 3. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank1 Bank 2 Revision: August 2007 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 EC-230 2008 Quest DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. 4. A Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 C D E Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. H 6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 I Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J K >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717336 L AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-25. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-231 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717337 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717338 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm On Board Diagnosis Logic Fluctuates around 1.5V INFOID:0000000001717339 To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause • The response of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. • Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater • Fuel pressure • Fuel injector • Intake air leaks • Exhaust gas leaks • PCV • Mass air flow sensor P0133 0133 (Bank 1) P0153 0153 (Bank 2) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717340 NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-232 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-III C 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. 8. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step. 9. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-122. 10. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. 11. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-122. 12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-237, "Diagnosis Procedure". D E F G H I J WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. • Intake air leaks • Exhaust gas leaks • Incorrect fuel pressure • Lack of fuel • Fuel injectors • Incorrect PCV hose connection • PCV valve • Mass air flow sensor 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 7. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. 8. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 9. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. 10. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-237, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-233 2008 Quest K L M N O P DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717341 BANK 1 BBWA2503E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-234 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC Approximately 5V C 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed D PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed E Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V F Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-235 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2504E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-236 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) C PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V E Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717342 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-237 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. 5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? BBIA0327E Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271or EC-281. No >> GO TO 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 6.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-238 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C BBIA0656E D : 1. 3. 4. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. G H PBIB1683E 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 N O P Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-239 2008 Quest DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 13. 10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11.CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-39. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair or replace. 13.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717343 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-25. Revision: August 2007 EC-240 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717344 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717345 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) E F CONDITION SPECIFICATION • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V On Board Diagnosis Logic LEAN ←→ RICH G H INFOID:0000000001717346 I The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut. J K L PBIB2162E M DTC No. P0137 0137 (Bank 1) P0157 0157 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit low voltage DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Fuel pressure • Fuel injector • Intake air leaks O INFOID:0000000001717347 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 N EC-241 2008 Quest P DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 9. Open engine hood. 10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. 11. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III. NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure". If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717348 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 10. If NG, go to EC-246, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-242 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717349 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2509E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-243 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 25 WIRE COLOR P ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) CONDITION [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Revision: August 2007 DATA (DC Voltage) EC-244 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2510E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-245 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 6 WIRE COLOR GR ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 55 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717350 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E Revision: August 2007 EC-246 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 A 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. C 2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-271. No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. D E F G H I BBIA0327E J 3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Oil pan (1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3) Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. L M N Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0685E P 4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-247 O 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC Terminals Bank ECM Sensor P0137 74 1 1 P0157 55 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals Bank ECM Sensor P0137 74 1 1 P0157 55 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-248, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717351 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-III. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. Revision: August 2007 EC-248 2008 Quest DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. A EC C JMBIA0640GB CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation F G H I J K L M INFOID:0000000001717352 N HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-25. O P Revision: August 2007 EC-249 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717353 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717354 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION SPECIFICATION • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V On Board Diagnosis Logic LEAN ←→ RICH INFOID:0000000001717355 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. MALFUNCTION A To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB1848E MALFUNCTION B To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. PBIB2376E Revision: August 2007 EC-250 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0138 0138 (Bank 1) P0158 0158 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition A) Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage B) Possible cause An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Fuel pressure • Fuel injector DTC Confirmation Procedure A EC C D INFOID:0000000001717356 E Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H I J K PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-III TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 9. Open engine hood. 10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. 11. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III. NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 12. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 F EC-251 2008 Quest L M N O P DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717357 PROCEDURE MALFUNCTION B Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 10. If NG, go to EC-256, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-252 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717358 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2509E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-253 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 25 WIRE COLOR P ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) CONDITION [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Revision: August 2007 DATA (DC Voltage) EC-254 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2510E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-255 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 6 WIRE COLOR GR ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. 0 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V 55 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 78 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717359 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E Revision: August 2007 EC-256 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > : Vehicle front A 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. C 2.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Oil pan (1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3) Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0685E H 3.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals I Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 G J K Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals L M Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 N Continuity should not exist. O 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P 4.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER Check HO2S2 connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-257 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Revision: August 2007 EC-258 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-281. No >> GO TO 3. A EC C D E BBIA0327E F 3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Oil pan (1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3) Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H I J Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0685E 4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. L Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals K M Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 N O Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. DTC Terminals Bank ECM Sensor P0138 74 1 1 P0158 55 1 2 Revision: August 2007 P EC-259 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717360 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-III. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. JMBIA0640GB “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. 7. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-260 2008 Quest DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. A (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. EC If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. C Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. D 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. F Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717361 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 G Refer to EM-25. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-261 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717362 The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717363 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION SPECIFICATION • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V On Board Diagnosis Logic LEAN ←→ RICH INFOID:0000000001717364 The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. SEF302U DTC No. P0139 0139 (Bank 1) P0159 0159 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Fuel pressure • Fuel injector • Intake air leaks INFOID:0000000001717365 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 EC-262 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). A 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. EC 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). D If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 9. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. E 10. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III. NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. F 11. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-267, "Diagnosis Procedure". If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. G a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717366 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. H I WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 secPBIB1607E ond during this procedure. 10. If NG, go to EC-267, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-263 2008 Quest J K L M N O P DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717367 BANK 1 BBWA2509E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-264 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 25 74 78 A WIRE COLOR P W B ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) CONDITION [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. DATA (DC Voltage) EC 0 - 1.0V C D [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - Approximately 1.0V Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-265 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2510E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-266 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 6 55 78 A WIRE COLOR GR W B ITEM Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) CONDITION [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. DATA (DC Voltage) EC 0 - 1.0V C D [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met - Engine: After warming up - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load 0 - Approximately 1.0V Heated oxygen sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnosis Procedure E G H INFOID:0000000001717368 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. F I Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". J K L M N O P BBIA0691E Revision: August 2007 EC-267 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? BBIA0327E Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271 or EC-281. No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Oil pan (1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) harness connector (2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) harness connector (3) Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0685E 4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-268 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC A Terminals Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 1 1 P0159 55 1 2 EC Continuity should exist. 2. C Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D DTC Terminals Bank ECM Sensor P0139 74 1 1 P0159 55 1 2 E F Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 H Refer to EC-269, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. I 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-130. K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717369 L HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-III. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-269 2008 Quest DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. JMBIA0640GB “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.78V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.78V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.78V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717370 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-25. Revision: August 2007 EC-270 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION A On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717371 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) A/F sensors 1 DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0171 0171 (Bank 1) P0174 0174 (Bank 2) Fuel injection system too lean ECM function Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Actuator D Fuel injector Possible cause • • • • • • • • Intake air leaks A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector Exhaust gas leaks Incorrect fuel pressure Lack of fuel Mass air flow sensor Incorrect PCV hose connection INFOID:0000000001717372 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E F G H I J WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC276, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Revision: August 2007 EC-271 2008 Quest K L M N O P DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 8. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 9. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 10. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 BBIA0327E should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 12. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 13. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. Revision: August 2007 EC-272 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717373 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2514E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-273 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 21 22 23 L/W R/Y R/B Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 (11 - 14V) SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: August 2007 EC-274 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2515E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-275 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 40 41 42 V/W R/L R/W Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 (11 - 14V) SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717374 1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-276 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. A 3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. EC Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. C D E BBIA0656E : 1. 3. 4. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. G Intake manifold collector Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 I J K L Continuity should exist. 5. F M Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. N Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 O P Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. Revision: August 2007 EC-277 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-585.) • Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".) • Fuel lines • Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. 6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-168. 7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With GST Install all removed parts. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9. OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-168. 8.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. Revision: August 2007 EC-278 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I A Without CONSULT-III 1. Stop engine. 2. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3) 3. Turn ignition switch ON. :Vehicle front Intake manifold collector (1) EC C D BBIA0657E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H PBIB2323E Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 I J Continuity should exist. K 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. L 10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II M Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. N Cylinder Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 O P PBIB2324E Operating sound should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. 11.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR Revision: August 2007 EC-279 2008 Quest DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. PBIB1986E 12.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-38. Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 2. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E 13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-280 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic A INFOID:0000000001717375 With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor A/F sensors 1 DTC No. P0172 0172 (Bank 1) P0175 0175 (Bank 2) Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) Actuator D Fuel injector Possible cause • • • • • A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector Exhaust gas leaks Incorrect fuel pressure Mass air flow sensor F G DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717376 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. E H I J Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC286, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. K L M N O P The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Revision: August 2007 EC-281 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 6. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 7. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. 8. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 9. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. 10. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go BBIA0327E to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 11. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 12. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-286, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. Revision: August 2007 EC-282 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717377 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2514E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-283 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 21 22 23 L/W R/Y R/B Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 (11 - 14V) SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: August 2007 EC-284 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2515E P Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-285 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed PBIB1584E BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 40 41 42 V/W R/L R/W Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 (11 - 14V) SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717378 1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-286 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. A 3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. EC Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. C D E BBIA0656E F : 1. 3. 4. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector G Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 I J K L Continuity should exist. 5. M Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 N Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 O P Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: August 2007 EC-287 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-585.) • Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".) >> Repair or replace. 6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-168. 7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With GST Install all removed parts. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9. OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-168. 8.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. 9.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I Revision: August 2007 EC-288 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. 2. 3. - Without CONSULT-III Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3) Turn ignition switch ON. : Vehicle front Intake manifold collector (1) A EC C D BBIA0657E 4. E Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G PBIB2323E Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 H I J Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. K L 10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. Cylinder M Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 N O PBIB2324E Operating sound should exist. P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. 11.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR Revision: August 2007 EC-289 2008 Quest DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. PBIB1986E 12.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-38. Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected 4. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors. 7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 13. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-290 2008 Quest DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717379 The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. EC C D BBIA0081E E F Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. H CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic SEF012P I INFOID:0000000001717380 J DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition Possible cause Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) from engine coolant temperature sensor and in• Fuel tank temperature sensor take air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure WITH CONSULT-III 4. 5. M N O Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-293, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F). Revision: August 2007 L INFOID:0000000001717381 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 1. 2. 3. K EC-291 P 2008 Quest DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Wait at least 10 seconds. 7. Check 1st trip DTC. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-293, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717382 BBWA2516E Revision: August 2007 EC-292 2008 Quest DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717383 A 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". EC C D E F G H I BBIA0691E J : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L 2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector (1). : Vehicle front Turn ignition switch ON. N O P BBIA0689E Revision: August 2007 EC-293 2008 Quest DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0932E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness connectors B148, B251 • Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness connectors B148, B251 • Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. 6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717384 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. Revision: August 2007 EC-294 2008 Quest DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 A EC C PBIB0931E D Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717385 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR E Refer to FL-5. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-295 2008 Quest DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717386 The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0081E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. INFOID:0000000001717387 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. SEF012P Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Fuel tank temperature sensor INFOID:0000000001717388 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Wait at least 5 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-296 2008 Quest DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717389 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2516E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717390 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-297 2008 Quest P DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector (1). : Vehicle front Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0689E 3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0932E Revision: August 2007 EC-298 2008 Quest DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness connectors B148, B251 • Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC >> Repair harness or connector. C 4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness connectors B148, B251 • Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ECM H I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. 6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-299, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. K 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END M Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717391 N FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 O P PBIB0931E Revision: August 2007 EC-299 2008 Quest DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717392 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5. Revision: August 2007 EC-300 2008 Quest DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717393 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717394 F Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM TP SEN 1-B1 TP SEN 2-B1* CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Shift lever: D SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G H *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717395 I These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. E Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0222 0222 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P0223 0223 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) J K L FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up. M Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717396 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Revision: August 2007 EC-301 2008 Quest N O P DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-303, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717397 BBWA1610E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-302 2008 Quest DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 50 66 69 91 WIRE COLOR R Y G L O ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply Throttle position sensor 1 Throttle position sensor ground Throttle position sensor 2 APP sensor 2 power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V E [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V F [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released Less than 4.75V G [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnosis Procedure C D H I INFOID:0000000001717398 J 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-303 2008 Quest DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0318E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E Revision: August 2007 EC-304 2008 Quest DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit. D 4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. E ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-302 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-535 F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 5.CHECK APP SENSOR H Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. I 6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. J Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". K >> INSPECTION END 7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. N 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O 8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-305 2008 Quest P DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-306, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717399 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) PBIB1608E 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717400 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. Revision: August 2007 EC-306 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717401 A EC When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. C Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. P0305 0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. P0306 0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire detected No. 6 cylinder misfires. • • • • Improper spark plug Insufficient compression Incorrect fuel pressure The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted Fuel injector Intake air leak The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted Lack of fuel Signal plate Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Incorrect PCV hose connection G H J K L M INFOID:0000000001717402 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Revision: August 2007 F N DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. E I Possible cause • • • • • • • D EC-307 2008 Quest O P DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. 7. Check 1st trip DTC. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-308, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature (T) condition Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717403 1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace it. 3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. With CONSULT-III Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Revision: August 2007 EC-308 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? A Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 11. EC 4.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I 1. 2. 3. - Stop engine. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3). Turn ignition switch ON. : Vehicle front Intake manifold collector (1) C D E F BBIA0657E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. G Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I PBIB2323E Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 J K L Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. M 5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II N Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. Cylinder O Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 P PBIB2324E Operating sound should exist. Revision: August 2007 EC-309 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. 6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected. Start engine. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound. Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-579. PBIB1986E 7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. BBIA0229E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: • Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil PBIB2325E within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. • It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 8. 8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 EC-310 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. 3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. A EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-591. C 9.CHECK SPARK PLUG Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)". NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 10. D E F SEF156I 10.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. Spark should be generated. G H I OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)". J 11.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE K Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-94, "On-Vehicle Service". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. L 12.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. M Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". N At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. O 13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P Check the following. • Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-585.) • Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check".) • Fuel lines • Fuel filter for clogging >> Repair or replace. Revision: August 2007 EC-311 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14.CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection". Items Specifications Target idle speed 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Follow the EC-68, "Basic Inspection". 15.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0656E : 1. 3. 4. Vehicle front Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) 3. harness connector Intake manifold collector Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 Revision: August 2007 EC-312 2008 Quest DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 A EC Continuity should not exist. C 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 16.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1. E F 17.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-III Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: G at idling at 2,500 rpm H With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: I at idling at 2,500 rpm J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-168. 18.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART K L Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-85, "Symptom Matrix Chart". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace. M 19.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". N O >> GO TO 20. 20.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-313 2008 Quest DTC P0327, P0328 KS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description INFOID:0000000001717404 The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. BBIA0067E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717405 The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition P0327 0327 Knock sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0328 0328 Knock sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • Knock sensor INFOID:0000000001717406 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-316, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-314 2008 Quest DTC P0327, P0328 KS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717407 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA1611E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-315 2008 Quest P DTC P0327, P0328 KS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 15 WIRE COLOR W ITEM Knock sensor CONDITION [Engine is running] • Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717408 1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. BBIA0067E Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F26, F301 • Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-318, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-316 2008 Quest DTC P0327, P0328 KS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. A Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E I : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. J Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K 6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. L Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. N O 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F26, F301 • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground P >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Revision: August 2007 EC-317 2008 Quest DTC P0327, P0328 KS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717409 KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF227W Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717410 KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-116. Revision: August 2007 EC-318 2008 Quest DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717411 The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB0562E E F G H PBIB2744E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717412 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION SPECIFICATION • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication J K On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717413 L DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit • The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. • The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. • The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. Possible cause M • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Crankshaft position sensor (POS) • Signal plate O DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717414 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 N EC-319 2008 Quest P DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-321, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717415 BBWA2518E Revision: August 2007 EC-320 2008 Quest DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC C Approximately 10V D [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 13 W Crankshaft position sensor (POS) E PBIB1041E F Approximately 10V G [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm H PBIB1042E 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V I [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717416 L 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-321 2008 Quest DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. : Vehicle front Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (1) (View from under the vehicle) 2. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0686E 3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1872E Revision: August 2007 EC-322 2008 Quest DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM • Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R EC >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 4.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D Continuity should exist. E 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground H >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. I Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 7.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). M N 8.CHECK GEAR TOOTH Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. O P 9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-323 2008 Quest DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717417 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717418 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EM-29. Revision: August 2007 EC-324 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description A INFOID:0000000001717419 The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB0562E E F G H PBIB2744E I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0340 0340 (Bank 1) P0345 0345 (Bank 2) INFOID:0000000001717420 J Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. • The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) • Camshaft (Intake) • Starter motor (Refer to SC-10.) • Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10.) • Dead (Weak) battery DTC Confirmation Procedure L INFOID:0000000001717421 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. 1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure". If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. 4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. 5. Check 1st trip DTC. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 K EC-325 2008 Quest M N O P DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717422 BANK 1 BBWA2519E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-326 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V Y Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) EC C [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 33 A D PBIB1039E E 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm G PBIB1040E 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H I J : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-327 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2520E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-328 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 14 W Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) C D PBIB1039E 1.0 - 4.0V E [Engine is running] • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm F PBIB1040E 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM G [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure I J INFOID:0000000001717423 1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM K Turn ignition switch to START position. L Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10.) M 2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". O P Revision: August 2007 EC-329 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. BBIA0239E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SEF481Y Revision: August 2007 EC-330 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1) • Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM • Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. F 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1) • Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground H I >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank2) and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J K Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. L M 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F26, F301 (bank 1) • Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM N O >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). P 10.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT) Check the following. Revision: August 2007 EC-331 2008 Quest DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end • Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear end or replace camshaft. SEC905C 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717424 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717425 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-76. Revision: August 2007 EC-332 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION A Description INFOID:0000000001717426 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation *1 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load Electrical load signal *1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed *1 TCM Gear position, shifting signal *1 ECM function Actuator C D E EGR volume control EGR volume control valve F G H *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions. • Engine stopped • Engine starting • Engine idling • Low engine coolant temperature • Excessively high engine coolant temperature • High engine speed • Wide open throttle • Low battery voltage I J K L M N O PBIB1843E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION P EGR Volume Control Valve Revision: August 2007 EC-333 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W EGR Temperature Sensor The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V SEF068X CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717427 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION EGR TEMP SEN • Engine: After warming up EGR VOL CON/V • • • • Revision: August 2007 Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: P or N No load SPECIFICATION Less than 4.5V Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step EC-334 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717428 A If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction is diagnosed. DTC No. P0400 0400 Trouble diagnosis name EGR function (Close) EC DTC detecting condition Possible cause No EGR flow is detected under the condition that calls for EGR. • Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) • EGR volume control valve stuck closed • Dead (Weak) battery • EGR passage clogged • EGR temperature sensor and circuit • Exhaust gas leaks DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717429 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. • P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III even though DTC work support test result is NG. TESTING CONDITION: • Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then stop engine immediately. • For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Confirm “COOLAN TEMP/S” value is within the range listed below. COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 8. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain the conditions until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds or more.) ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 9 msec Shift lever Suitable position 8. WITH GST EC-335 D E F G H I J K L M N O P If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC338, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 C 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 2. Check engine coolant temperature in Service $01 with GST. Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F) If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. 3. Start engine and let it idle monitoring the engine coolant temperature value. When the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step. 4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Engine speed: 1,200 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH) Shift lever: Suitable position 5. Stop vehicle. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 7. Select Service $07 with GST. 8. Check 1st trip DTC. 9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-338, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-336 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717430 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2547E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-337 2008 Quest P DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR P/B G L L/W ITEM EGR volume control valve 54 P/L EGR temperature sensor 67 B Sensor ground 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Idle speed 0.1 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • EGR system: Operating 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717431 1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM 1. 2. Start engine. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks. PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace exhaust system. 2.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0339E Revision: August 2007 EC-338 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A Voltage: Battery voltage EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. C PBIB0627E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R D E F >> Repair harness or connectors. 4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 G H I J Continuity should exist. K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 5.CHECK EGR PASSAGE M Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace EGR passage. N 6.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. O P 7.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0405, P0406. Refer to EC-347, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. Revision: August 2007 EC-339 2008 Quest DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-340 2008 Quest DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE A Description INFOID:0000000001717432 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation *1 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load Electrical load signal *1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed *1 TCM Gear position, shifting signal *1 ECM function Actuator C D E EGR volume control EGR volume control valve F G H *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions. • Engine stopped • Engine starting • Engine idling • Low engine coolant temperature • Excessively high engine coolant temperature • High engine speed • Wide open throttle • Low battery voltage I J K L M N O PBIB1843E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION P EGR Volume Control Valve Revision: August 2007 EC-341 2008 Quest DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717433 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EGR VOL CON/V CONDITION • • • • Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: P or N No load SPECIFICATION Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717434 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0403 0403 Trouble diagnosis name EGR volume control valve circuit DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) • EGR volume control valve INFOID:0000000001717435 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm for 10 times. 3. Check DTC. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-344, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-342 2008 Quest DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717436 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2546E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-343 2008 Quest P DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 111 119 120 WIRE COLOR P/B G L L/W W/B R/G R/G ITEM EGR volume control valve ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Idle speed 0.1 - 14V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717437 1.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0249E 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0627E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-344 2008 Quest DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 A EC C Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. F 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-130. H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717438 I EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. K Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)] 4. 5. 6. L If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. M N O P SEF605Y 7. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Revision: August 2007 EC-345 2008 Quest DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening steps. If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. SEF560W Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)] 4. 5. 6. If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. If OK, go to next step. Remove EGR volume control valve. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF. SEF605Y 7. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the ignition switch position. SEF560W Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717439 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EM-21. Revision: August 2007 EC-346 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717440 The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. EC C D SEF599K E F EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 G H *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I When EGR system is operating. J Voltage: 0 - 1.5V K L SEF068X On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717441 M DTC No. P0405 0405 P0406 0406 Trouble Diagnosis Name EGR temperature sensor circuit low input EGR temperature sensor circuit high input DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause An excessively low voltage from the EGR temperature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant temperature is low. • Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.) • EGR temperature sensor • Malfunction of EGR function An excessively high voltage from the EGR temperature sensor is sent to ECM even when engine coolant temperature is high. • Harness or connectors (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.) • EGR temperature sensor • Malfunction of EGR function DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717442 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Revision: August 2007 EC-347 2008 Quest N O P DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0405 With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 50°C (122°F). If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool the engine down. Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure". With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0406 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F). With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm. Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50 step and check “EGR TEMP SEN” indication. “EGR TEMP SEN” indication should decrease to less than 1.0V. If the check result is NG, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure". If the check result is OK, go to the following step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,800 rpm VHCL SPEED SE 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more B/FUEL SCHDL 4 - 9 msec Shift lever Suitable position 10. Check 1st trip DTC. 11. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure". With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $01 with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-348 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine speed 1,200 - 2,800 rpm Vehicle speed 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more Shift lever Suitable position 7. 8. 9. A EC Select Service $07 with GST. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnosis Procedure". C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-349 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717443 BBWA2545E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717444 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-350 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0319E 3. O Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. PBIB2577E Revision: August 2007 EC-351 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. 4.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor. 5.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717445 EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. SEF611Y Revision: August 2007 EC-352 2008 Quest DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > < Reference data> A 4. EGR temperature °C (°F) Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.011 - 0.014 EC C If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor. D E F G SEF068X Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717446 H EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EM-21. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-353 2008 Quest DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717447 The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. SEF484YB DTC No. P0420 0420 (Bank 1) P0430 0430 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Catalyst system efficiency below threshold DTC detecting condition • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • • • • • • • Three way catalyst (manifold) Exhaust tube Intake air leaks Fuel injector Fuel injector leaks Spark plug Improper ignition timing INFOID:0000000001717448 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 8. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 9. Open engine hood. 10. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. 12. Wait 5 seconds at idle. 13. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. 14. Check 1st trip DTC. Revision: August 2007 EC-354 2008 Quest DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check A INFOID:0000000001717449 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st EC trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground. 9. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. 10. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-355, "Diagnosis Procedure". • 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0 C D E F G H PBIB1108E I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717450 1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM J Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. K 2.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. L Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). M N O PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. P 3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. Revision: August 2007 EC-355 2008 Quest DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair or replace. 4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-68, "Basic Inspection". Items Specifications Target idle speed 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-68, "Basic Inspection". 5.CHECK FUEL INJECTORS 1. 2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram for FUEL INJECTOR, EC-580. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-581, "Diagnosis Procedure". PBIB2250E 6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. BBIA0229E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: • Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. • It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. Revision: August 2007 EC-356 PBIB2325E 2008 Quest DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7. EC CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 7. 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. C D Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-579. E 8.CHECK SPARK PLUG F Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)". NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 9. G H I SEF156I 9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. J K Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)". 10.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-38. Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. 3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. O P Refer to EC-130. EC-357 M N 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Revision: August 2007 L 2008 Quest DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold). Revision: August 2007 EC-358 2008 Quest DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description A INFOID:0000000001717451 NOTE: EC If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform trouble diagnosis for other DTC. C D E F G PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition Possible cause EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed • EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit • Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube • Blocked rubber tube • Cracked EVAP canister • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Blocked purge port • EVAP canister vent control valve DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717453 EC-359 J K CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Revision: August 2007 I INFOID:0000000001717452 Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. H 2008 Quest L M N O P DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) Shift lever Suitable position VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 9.0 msec COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) 9. If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC361, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717454 Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than P, N or R PBIB1109E 10. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. 11. If NG, go to EC-361, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-360 2008 Quest DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717455 A 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. EC C 2.CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D With CONSULT-III Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-28, "Description". Start engine and let it idle. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V 100% E F G Vacuum Should exist 0% Should not exist H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. I 3.CHECK PURGE FLOW Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-28, "Description". 4. Start engine and let it idle. Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. 5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after engine starting engine. 1. 2. 3. J K L Vacuum should not exist. 6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine. M Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. N 4.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE O 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. P 5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT Revision: August 2007 EC-361 2008 Quest DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B. 2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C. SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. SEF368U 6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-III Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 1. 2. 7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-399, P0453 EC-405. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. Check the rubber tube for clogging. Revision: August 2007 EC-362 2008 Quest DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. A 11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE EC Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. C 12.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE D Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. E 13.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE F Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. G 14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. H >> INSPECTION END I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-363 2008 Quest DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717456 This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. PBIB1026E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause • • • • • • P0442 0442 EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve Incorrect fuel filler cap used Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks EVAP purge line rubber tube bent Loose or disconnected rubber tube EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit Fuel tank temperature sensor O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged EVAP canister is saturated with water EVAP control system pressure sensor Fuel level sensor and the circuit Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ORVR system leaks CAUTION: • Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. • If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. • Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Revision: August 2007 EC-364 2008 Quest DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717457 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. EC 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C TESTING CONDITION: • Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. • Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). D WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Follow the instruction displayed. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to EC-68, "Basic Inspection". Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. E F G H I J WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. 8. Select Service $07 with GST. • If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure". • If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-361. M N INFOID:0000000001717458 1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN P Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 L O Diagnosis Procedure 1. K EC-365 2008 Quest DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0320E SEF916U With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7. Revision: August 2007 EC-366 2008 Quest DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. EC 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: C • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 2 • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. D Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG E OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. F SEF200U 7.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. G Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) H I J K BBIA0664E L : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: August 2007 EC-367 2008 Quest M N O P DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. • EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation". • EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. 9.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. PBIB1213E 10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • EVAP canister for damage • EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-III 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-368 2008 Quest DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. A Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. EC 14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE C Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. D 15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. F 16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR G Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. H 17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I J 18.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. K L 19.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. M >> GO TO 20. 20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE N Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. Revision: August 2007 EC-369 2008 Quest O P DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 24.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-370 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description INFOID:0000000001717459 A EC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 ECM function C Actuator D E EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve F G *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. H This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I J COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K L M SEF337U CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717460 N Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V Revision: August 2007 CONDITION • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-371 O P 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0443 0443 INFOID:0000000001717461 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve DTC detecting condition Possible cause The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. • EVAP control system pressure sensor • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) • EVAP canister vent control valve • EVAP canister • Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717462 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC374, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-374, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-372 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717463 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2517E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-373 2008 Quest P DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Idle speed • Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after engine starting 45 V/R SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEC991C 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717464 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0255E Revision: August 2007 EC-374 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A Voltage: Battery voltage EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. C PBIB0080E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors F44, F101 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM E F >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H I Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. J 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. • Harness connectors F44, F101 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M 5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. N O P BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor Revision: August 2007 2. EVAP canister vent control valve EC-375 3. EVAP canister 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 6.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 7. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 1. 2. 3. 4. 8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. Revision: August 2007 EC-376 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 12. No >> GO TO 14. A EC C PBIB1213E 12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER D Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. E F 13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • EVAP canister for damage • EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection H >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END J Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717465 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE K With CONSULT-III Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions. L M Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No N PBIB0149E O Without CONSULT-III P Revision: August 2007 EC-377 2008 Quest DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717466 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-17. Revision: August 2007 EC-378 2008 Quest DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description INFOID:0000000001717467 A EC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 ECM function C Actuator D E EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve F G *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. H This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I J COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K L M SEF337U CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717468 N Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V Revision: August 2007 CONDITION • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal is not depressed even slightly, after engine starting) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-379 O P 2008 Quest DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name INFOID:0000000001717469 DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0444 0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve • Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve P0445 0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve • Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717470 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-382, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-380 2008 Quest DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717471 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2517E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-381 2008 Quest P DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Idle speed • Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after engine starting 45 V/R SEC990C EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEC991C 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717472 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0255E Revision: August 2007 EC-382 2008 Quest DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A Voltage: Battery voltage EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. C PBIB0080E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness connectors F44, F101 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM E F >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H I Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 5. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. J K 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F44, F101 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-III Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 1. 2. 3. 6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Revision: August 2007 EC-383 2008 Quest N O P DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717473 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-III Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No PBIB0149E Without CONSULT-III Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB0150E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717474 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-17 . Revision: August 2007 EC-384 2008 Quest DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717475 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0664E I : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister J CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717476 K Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION L OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717477 M DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) • EVAP canister vent control valve INFOID:0000000001717478 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 1. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-385 2008 Quest N O P DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717479 BBWA2521E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-386 2008 Quest DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 111 WIRE COLOR W/B ITEM CONDITION ECM relay (Self shut-off) DATA (DC Voltage) A EC [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D E C 117 LG/B EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717480 1.INSPECTION START G Do you have CONSULT-III? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. H 2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. I With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen. Check for operating sound of the valve. J K Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. L 3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. N O P BBIA0664E : 1. 3. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 EC-387 2008 Quest DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0152E 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors B107, E139 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R >> Repair harness or connectors. 5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors B107, E139 • Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-388 2008 Quest DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717481 A EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. EC Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. 3. 4. 5. 6. C D E PBIB1033E Condition VENT CONTROL/V F Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes G Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. H Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. I Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. J K L PBIB1033E M 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition N Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes O P Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: August 2007 EC-389 PBIB1034E 2008 Quest DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description INFOID:0000000001717482 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. PBIB1263E BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717483 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0448 0448 INFOID:0000000001717484 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close SPECIFICATION OFF DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • EVAP canister vent control valve • EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit • Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve • EVAP canister is saturated with water INFOID:0000000001717485 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 EC-390 2008 Quest DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. A 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. 4. Repeat next procedures three times. EC a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. C b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. 5. Check 1st trip DTC. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnosis Procedure". D If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. 7. Repeat next procedure 20 times. a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. E b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. F G H PBIB0972E 8. 9. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnosis Procedure". I WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-391 2008 Quest DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717486 BBWA2521E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-392 2008 Quest DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 111 A WIRE COLOR W/B ITEM ECM relay (Self shut-off) 117 LG/B EVAP canister vent control valve 119 120 R/G R/G Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717487 F 1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. G H I J BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. K EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. L M 2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-394, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. N 3.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. O Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. Revision: August 2007 EC-393 2008 Quest P DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. PBIB1213E 4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • EVAP canister for damage • EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717488 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Revision: August 2007 EC-394 2008 Quest DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. A EC C PBIB1033E Condition VENT CONTROL/V D Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes E Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. F Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. G Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. H I J PBIB1033E K 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition L Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes M N Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. PBIB1034E O P Revision: August 2007 EC-395 2008 Quest DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717489 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. PBIB1207E BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EVAP canister INFOID:0000000001717490 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717491 NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. P0451 0451 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP control system pressure sensor performance ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. Possible cause • Harness or connectors • EVAP control system pressure sensor INFOID:0000000001717492 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-396 2008 Quest DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. 3. Check 1st trip DTC. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnosis Procedure". A EC Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717493 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". D E F G H I J K BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 L 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. M 2.CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER N 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. O P BBIA0664E Revision: August 2007 EC-397 2008 Quest DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > : 1. 2. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-398, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-401. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717494 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: • Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. • Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-398 PBIB1173E 2008 Quest DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description A INFOID:0000000001717495 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D PBIB1207E E F G H BBIA0664E : 1. I Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 3. EVAP canister J INFOID:0000000001717496 Specification data are reference values. K MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V L On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717497 NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure N Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • EVAP control system pressure sensor O INFOID:0000000001717498 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. Revision: August 2007 M EC-399 2008 Quest P DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-402, "Diagnosis Procedure". PBIB1110E Revision: August 2007 EC-400 2008 Quest DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717499 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2522E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-401 2008 Quest P DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 BR EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 G/O EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 67 B Sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717500 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-402 2008 Quest DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C BBIA0664E D : 1. 2. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister E Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. G 3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. H Voltage: Approximately 5V I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. J PBIB0138E K 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. P 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Revision: August 2007 EC-403 2008 Quest DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717501 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) 4. Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: • Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. • Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-404 PBIB1173E 2008 Quest DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description A INFOID:0000000001717502 The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D PBIB1207E E F G H BBIA0664E : 1. I Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode 3. EVAP canister J INFOID:0000000001717503 Specification data are reference values. K MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V L On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717504 NOTE: If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EVAP control system An excessively high voltage from the sensor is pressure sensor high insent to ECM. put DTC Confirmation Procedure N Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) • EVAP control system pressure sensor • EVAP canister vent control valve • EVAP canister • Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to vehicle frame INFOID:0000000001717505 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-405 M 2008 Quest O P DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 10 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnosis Procedure". With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine wait at least 10 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnosis Procedure". PBIB1110E Revision: August 2007 EC-406 2008 Quest DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717506 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2522E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-407 2008 Quest P DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 BR EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 G/O EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 67 B Sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717507 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-408 2008 Quest DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C BBIA0664E D : 1. 2. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister E Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. G 3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. H Voltage: Approximately 5V I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. J PBIB0138E K 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM L M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. P 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Revision: August 2007 EC-409 2008 Quest DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness connectors B106, E138 • Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. 10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-411, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 12.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. Revision: August 2007 EC-410 2008 Quest DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 13. No >> GO TO 15. A EC C PBIB1213E 13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER D Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. E F 14.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • EVAP canister for damage • EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection H >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END J Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717508 K EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring, replace it with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: • Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. • Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-411 L M N O PBIB1173E P 2008 Quest DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717509 This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition Possible cause EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. • Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. • Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve • Incorrect fuel filler cap used • Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. • Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. • Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. • EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks • EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit • Fuel tank temperature sensor • O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. • EVAP control system pressure sensor • Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve • ORVR system leaks CAUTION: • Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. • If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. • Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717510 CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-412 2008 Quest DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. A • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: • Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed C on flat level surface. • Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. D WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Follow the instruction displayed. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to EC-68, "Basic Inspection". Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-413, "Diagnosis Procedure". If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure". F G H I J WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. • If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-361, "Diagnosis Procedure". • If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-365, "Diagnosis Procedure". • If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-413, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717511 1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. E K L M N O Turn ignition switch OFF. P Revision: August 2007 EC-413 2008 Quest DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. 5.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 6.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. 7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. • EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation". • EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. 8.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP Revision: August 2007 EC-414 2008 Quest DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. A EC C BBIA0320E D E F G SEF916U With CONSULT-III >>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 10. H 9.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. I J K L M N SEF200U O 10.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) Revision: August 2007 EC-415 2008 Quest P DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-III 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. 12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13.CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing". Revision: August 2007 EC-416 2008 Quest DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. A 14.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EC With CONSULT-III Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 1. 2. 15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C D E Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. F 16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR G Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. H 17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR I Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. J 18.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. K L 19.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 20.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE P 21.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END EC-417 N O Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. Revision: August 2007 M 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717512 This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. PBIB1026E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause • • • • • • P0456 0456 Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) • EVAP system has a very small leak. • EVAP system does not operate properly. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve Incorrect fuel filler cap used Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks EVAP purge line rubber tube bent Loose or disconnected rubber tube EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit Fuel tank temperature sensor O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged EVAP canister is saturated with water EVAP control system pressure sensor Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ORVR system leaks Fuel level sensor and the circuit Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve CAUTION: • Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. • If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. • Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Revision: August 2007 EC-418 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717513 A NOTE: • If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. • After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. EC • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: • Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. D • If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. - Fuel filler cap is removed. E - Refilled or drained the fuel. - EVAP component parts is/are removed. • Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. F WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Follow the instruction displayed. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-420, "Diagnosis Procedure". NOTE: • If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go to EC-68, "Basic Inspection". • Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Overall Function Check G H I J K L INFOID:0000000001717514 M WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. • Do not start engine. • Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi). N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-419 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. BBIA0320E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select Service $08. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-420, "Diagnosis Procedure". If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual. Diagnosis Procedure SEF462UI INFOID:0000000001717515 1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-420 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. A 3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION EC Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. C 4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE D Refer to EC-30, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. E 5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. F G H BBIA0320E I J K L SEF916U M With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7. 6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. 3. N With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. Revision: August 2007 EC-421 2008 Quest O P DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 7.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0664E : 1. Vehicle front EVAP control system pressure sensor 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP canister 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: • Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. • Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U 8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. • EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-32, "Removal and Installation". • EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-389, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: August 2007 EC-422 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? EC Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12. C No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. 1. D PBIB1213E 10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. E F G 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. • EVAP canister for damage • EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. J 12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-III 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. K L M 13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. O P Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing". Revision: August 2007 N EC-423 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-384, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-28, "Description". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. 20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-34. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-36, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-424 2008 Quest DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. A 24.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-425 2008 Quest DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717516 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0081E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717517 NOTE: • If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Possible cause Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Combination meter • Fuel level sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. INFOID:0000000001717518 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-426, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717519 1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". 2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-426 2008 Quest DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. A 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. EC >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717520 C FUEL LEVEL SENSOR D Refer to FL-5. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-427 2008 Quest DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717521 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0081E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717522 NOTE: • If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition Possible cause The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Combination meter • Fuel level sensor Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717523 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-9. TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-III NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. 6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it. 10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. 11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Revision: August 2007 EC-428 2008 Quest DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to EC-429, "Diagnosis Procedure". A WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 EC Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". C 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. D 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). E 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-429, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717524 F 1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". G H 2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. I J 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. K >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717525 L FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-429 2008 Quest DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717526 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0081E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717527 NOTE: • If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P0462 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0462 0462 Fuel level sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage is sent from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0463 0463 Fuel level sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage is sent from the sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Combination meter • Fuel level sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717528 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Wait at least 5 seconds. 3. Check 1st trip DTC. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-430, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717529 1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION Refer to DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". 2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 EC-430 2008 Quest DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. A 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC Refer to EC-130. C >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717530 D FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-431 2008 Quest DTC P0500 VSS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0500 VSS Description INFOID:0000000001717531 NOTE: • If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0500 0500 INFOID:0000000001717532 Trouble diagnosis name Vehicle speed sensor DTC detecting condition Possible cause The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) • Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) • Wheel sensor • Combination meter • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Detected items Vehicle speed sensor Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates (High) while engine is running. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717533 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure". If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-432 2008 Quest DTC P0500 VSS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENG SPEED 1,600 - 6,000 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 4.4 - 31.8 msec Shift lever Except P or N position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. 7. A EC C Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000001717534 D Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure F G INFOID:0000000001717535 1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” H Refer to BRC-50 (models with VDC) or BRC-10 (models without VDC). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. I 2.COMBINATION METER J Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-5. K >> INSPECTION END L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-433 2008 Quest DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000001717536 NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected INFOID:0000000001717537 DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Electric throttle control actuator • Intake air leak INFOID:0000000001717538 NOTE: • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. • If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-73, before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-618. TESTING CONDITION: • Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. • Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). 1. Open engine hood. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. 7. Check 1st trip DTC. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-434, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717539 1.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Revision: August 2007 EC-434 2008 Quest DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. A 4. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". 5. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". 6. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". EC 7. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-435 2008 Quest DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000001717540 NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 INFOID:0000000001717541 Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Electric throttle control actuator • Intake air leak • PCV system INFOID:0000000001717542 NOTE: • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. • If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-73, before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the “Service Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-618. TESTING CONDITION: • Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. • Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). 1. Open engine hood. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. 7. Check 1st trip DTC. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-436, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717543 1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and let it idle. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Revision: August 2007 EC-436 2008 Quest DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. A 3.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-437 2008 Quest DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717544 Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. BBIA0241E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717545 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Steering wheel: Not being turned. OFF Steering wheel: Being turned. ON On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717546 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) • Power steering pressure sensor INFOID:0000000001717547 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-440, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-438 2008 Quest DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717548 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2523E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-439 2008 Quest P DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 12 WIRE COLOR W ITEM CONDITION Power steering pressure sensor DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V [Engine is running] • Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V 67 B Sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 68 BR/W Power steering pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717549 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 EC-440 2008 Quest DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. A EC C BBIA0241E D 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G SEF479Y 3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. J 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K 4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. L Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. M 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N 5.CHECK PSP SENSOR O Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. P 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-441 2008 Quest DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717550 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V MBIB0126E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717551 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to PS-24. Revision: August 2007 EC-442 2008 Quest DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description A INFOID:0000000001717552 Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. EC C D PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic E INFOID:0000000001717553 F DTC No. P0603 0603 Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit DTC detecting condition ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Possible cause • Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] • ECM INFOID:0000000001717554 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Repeat step 2 to 4 for 4 times. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-445, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-443 2008 Quest DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717555 BBWA2524E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-444 2008 Quest DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 121 A WIRE COLOR G ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] Diagnosis Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) EC BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) INFOID:0000000001717556 C 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. F G MBIB0026E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. • IPDM E/R harness connector E124 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between ECM and battery I J >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K L 4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again? With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select Service $04 with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-443, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END M 1. 2. 3. 4. N O P 5.REPLACE ECM Revision: August 2007 EC-445 2008 Quest DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. 3. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". 4. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". 5. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". 6. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-446 2008 Quest DTC P0605 ECM < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0605 ECM A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717557 The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC C D PBIB1164E On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717558 This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module E F DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. Possible cause G • ECM H FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. I Detected items Malfunction A Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode • ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. • ECM deactivates ASCD operation. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717559 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K L M N PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch ON. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure". O PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B 1. 2. 3. 4. P Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Revision: August 2007 EC-447 2008 Quest DTC P0605 ECM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times 4. Check 1st trip DTC. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-448, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717560 1.INSPECTION START With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-447, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select Service $04 with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-447, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 4. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-180. Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-448 2008 Quest DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY A On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717561 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0643 0643 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short EC DTC detecting condition ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. Possible cause • Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) • Power steering pressure sensor • EVAP control system pressure sensor • Refrigerant pressure sensor C D E F FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. G Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure H INFOID:0000000001717562 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-451, "Diagnosis Procedure". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-449 2008 Quest DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717563 BBWA2008E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-450 2008 Quest DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 48 G/O EVAP control system pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 BR/Y Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 68 BR/W PSP sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 82 B APP sensor 1 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V D 83 G APP sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 R/V APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 O APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V 98 106 W/B W Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 C F G H I J Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717564 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-451 2008 Quest DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0335E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1851E Revision: August 2007 EC-452 2008 Quest DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 7 and ECM terminal 90. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit. D 4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. E ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 90 APP sensor terminal 7 EC-450 48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-401 49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-604 68 PSP sensor terminal 3 EC-439 G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H F 5.CHECK COMPONENTS Check the following. • EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-404, "Component Inspection".) • Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-27). • Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-442, "Component Inspection".) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component. I J K 6.CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. L 7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY M 1. 2. 3. 4. N Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". O >> INSPECTION END 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-453 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH Component Description INFOID:0000000001717565 When the shift position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is turned ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. The park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also indicates a transmission range switch to detect shift lever position. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717566 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Shift lever: P or N ON Shift lever: Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0850 0850 INFOID:0000000001717567 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. • Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717568 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal P or N position ON Except above position OFF 3. 4. 5. If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure". If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED 1,200 - 6,375 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 31.8 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Shift lever Suitable position Revision: August 2007 EC-454 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Check 1st trip DTC. 7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure". Overall Function Check A INFOID:0000000001717569 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this EC check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Condition (Gear position) P or N position Except above position 3. C Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. D Voltage V (Known-good data) Approx. 0 E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnosis Procedure". F MBIB0043E G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-455 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717570 BBWA2532E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-456 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 102 A WIRE COLOR O/B ITEM PNP switch CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] • Shift lever: P or N BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Except above position Approximately 0V Diagnosis Procedure EC C INFOID:0000000001717571 D 1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START. Does starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Refer to SC-10. E F 2.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester under the following conditions. G H Condition (Shift position) P or N position Except above position Voltage BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I Approximately 0 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 3. J PBIB3286E 3.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector (1). : Vehicle front Turn ignition switch ON. M N BBIA0687E O P Revision: August 2007 EC-457 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB3071E 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 5 and combination meter terminal 30. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F33, E19 • Harness connectors E25, M90 • Harness for open or short between PNP switch and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK PNP SWITCH Refer to AT-83. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace PNP switch. 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END 9.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. Revision: August 2007 EC-458 2008 Quest DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. A 10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART EC Check the following. • Harness connectors E134, M83 • Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 11.CHECK CONBINATION METER Refer to DI-5. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace combination meter E F 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-459 2008 Quest DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717572 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 (Bank 1) P1168 1168 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. Possible cause • Harness or connectors [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.] • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater NOTE: DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. Revision: August 2007 EC-460 2008 Quest DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT A Description INFOID:0000000001717573 The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS EC actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. C On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717574 Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1211 1211 Trouble diagnosis name TCS control unit DTC detecting condition ECM receives a malfunction information from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. D Possible cause E • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • TCS related parts F DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717575 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-461, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure G H INFOID:0000000001717576 I Go to BRC-10 or BRC-50. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-461 2008 Quest DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description INFOID:0000000001717577 NOTE: • If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717578 The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1212 1212 Trouble diagnosis name TCS communication line DTC detecting condition ECM can not receive the information from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” continuously. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). • Dead (Weak) battery INFOID:0000000001717579 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-462, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717580 Go to BRC-10 or BRC-50. Revision: August 2007 EC-462 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE A Description INFOID:0000000001717581 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC NOTE: • If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. C Cooling Fan Control D Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Actuator E Cooling fan control IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) F G *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF]. I Cooling Fan Operation J K L M N O P PBIB3072E Cooling Fan Relay Operation The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. Revision: August 2007 EC-463 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Cooling fan relay Cooling fan speed 1 2 3 Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF Low (LOW) OFF ON OFF Middle (MID) ON OFF OFF High (HI) ON OFF ON COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows. Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) Cooling fan motor terminals (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717582 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM AIR COND SIG COOLING FAN CONDITION • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine • Air conditioner switch: OFF SPECIFICATION Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.) ON Engine coolant temperature: 94°C (201°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature: Between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW Engine coolant temperature: Between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F) MID Engine coolant temperature: 105°C (221°F) or more HI On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717583 If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. Revision: August 2007 EC-464 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition • • P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) • • A Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) Cooling fan does not operate properly • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) (Overheat). • Cooling fan Cooling fan system does not operate • Radiator hose properly (Overheat). • Radiator Engine coolant was not added to the sys• Radiator cap tem using the proper filling method. • Water pump Engine coolant is not within the specified • Thermostat range. For more information, refer to EC-471, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating". CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation". 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check EC C D E F INFOID:0000000001717584 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. G H I WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. If the results are NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". J K L SEF621W M WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". If NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-465 N O P SEF621W 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717585 BBWA2528E Revision: August 2007 EC-466 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2529E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717586 1.INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-III? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 EC-467 2008 Quest P DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to “COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT”.) 3.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION Without CONSULT-III Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to “COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT”.) 1. 4.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK CO-10, "System Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". • Hose • Radiator • Water pump 5.CHECK RADIATOR CAP CO-10, "System Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace radiator cap. 6.CHECK COMPONENT PARTS Check the following. Thermostat. Refer to CO-24. Engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to EC-201, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-471, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating". >> INSPECTION END COOLING FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT 1.CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E123. Revision: August 2007 EC-468 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A Voltage: Battery voltage EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. C PBIB1681E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. • 40A fusible link • Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery E >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F 3.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121, E123 and E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 16, 38, 60 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. H 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. I 4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. J Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector. K L M BBIA0328E 2. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 1, 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. N Voltage: Battery voltage O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. P PBIB1670E 5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • 40A fusible link Revision: August 2007 EC-469 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-2 and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8, Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 3, 4 and ground. Refer to Wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. BBIA0328E 8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 10, 14, Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 13. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS Refer to EC-471, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors. 10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-470 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Main 12 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000001717587 A Engine Step OFF 1 • • • • 2 3 4 Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page • Visual No blocking • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-11 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck CO-10 59 - 98 kPa CO-16 Blocked radiator Blocked condenser Blocked radiator grille Blocked bumper • Radiator cap • Pressure tester EC — C D (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) E ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-10 ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot CO-24 ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-463). OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature gauge • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — • Coolant overflow to reservoir tank • Visual No overflow during driving and idling CO-10 OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator • Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank CO-10 OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) EM-94 12 • Cylinder block and pistons • Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston EM-116 F G H I J K *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. L *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-6. Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717588 M COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. 2. N Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. O Cooling fan speed Middle (MID) High (HI) Cooling fan motor terminals (+) (−) 1 3 and 4 2 3 and 4 1 and 2 3 1 and 2 4 1 and 2 3 and 4 P SEF734W Cooling fan motor should operate. Revision: August 2007 EC-471 2008 Quest DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE < SERVICE INFORMATION > If NG, replace cooling fan motor. Revision: August 2007 EC-472 2008 Quest DTC P1225 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1225 TP SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717589 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic EC C D PBIB0145E INFOID:0000000001717590 F The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1225 1225 E Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause G • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) INFOID:0000000001717591 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check 1st trip DTC. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-473, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717592 H I J K L M 1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. O P BBIA0318E 2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Revision: August 2007 EC-473 2008 Quest DTC P1225 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". 3. Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717593 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. Revision: August 2007 EC-474 2008 Quest DTC P1226 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1226 TP SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717594 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic EC C D PBIB0145E INFOID:0000000001717595 F The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1226 1226 E Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause G • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) INFOID:0000000001717596 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for 32 times. 5. Check 1st trip DTC. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-475, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure H I J K L M INFOID:0000000001717597 1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. P BBIA0318E Revision: August 2007 EC-475 2008 Quest DTC P1226 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717598 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. Revision: August 2007 EC-476 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION A Description INFOID:0000000001717599 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation *1 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Electrical load Electrical load signal *1 Wheel sensor Vehicle speed *1 TCM Gear position, shifting signal *1 ECM function Actuator C D E EGR volume control EGR volume control valve F G H *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions. • Engine stopped • Engine starting • Engine idling • Low engine coolant temperature • Excessively high engine coolant temperature • High engine speed • Wide open throttle • Low battery voltage I J K L M N O PBIB1843E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION P EGR Volume Control Valve Revision: August 2007 EC-477 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. SEF552W EGR Temperature Sensor The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases. This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis. SEF599K EGR temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance MΩ 0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. When EGR system is operating. Voltage: 0 - 1.5V SEF068X CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717600 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION EGR TEMP SEN • Engine: After warming up EGR VOL CON/V • • • • Revision: August 2007 Engine: After warming up Air conditioner switch: OFF Shift lever: P or N No load SPECIFICATION Less than 4.5V Idle 0 step Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm quickly 10 - 55 step EC-478 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717601 A If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed. DTC No. P1402 1402 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition EGR flow is detected under the condition that does not call for EGR. EGR function (Open) EC Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The EGR volume control valve circuit is open or shorted.) • EGR volume control valve leaking or stuck open • EGR temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure C D INFOID:0000000001717602 NOTE: • Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch ON (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below 30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure. • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: • Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). • Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range below, the test cannot be conducted. E F G H I COOLAN TEMP/S EGR TEMP SEN : −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)* : Less than 4.8V If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant temperature or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result. *: Although CONSULT-III screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temperature, ignore it. 5. K L WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “START”. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take 80 seconds or more.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition OFF and cool the engine coolant temperature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC482, "Diagnosis Procedure". M N O WITH GST 1. 2. P Turn ignition switch ON and select Service $01 with GST. Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Revision: August 2007 EC-479 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Stop engine. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 7. Select Service $07 with GST. 8. Check 1st trip DTC. 9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-482, "Diagnosis Procedure". PBIB1671E Revision: August 2007 EC-480 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717603 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2547E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-481 2008 Quest P DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 17 18 19 20 WIRE COLOR P/B G L L/W ITEM EGR volume control valve 54 P/L EGR temperature sensor 67 B Sensor ground 111 119 120 W/B R/G R/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] • Idle speed 0.1 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] Less than 4.5V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • EGR system: Operating 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717604 1.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0339E 4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB0627E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 Revision: August 2007 EC-482 2008 Quest DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and ECM A >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal EGR volume control valve 17 6 18 3 19 4 20 1 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 4.CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. I 5.CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR J Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor. K 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-130. M >> INSPECTION END N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-483 2008 Quest DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL Description INFOID:0000000001717605 ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition. This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1421 1421 INFOID:0000000001717606 Trouble diagnosis name Cold start emission reduction strategy monitoring DTC detecting condition ECM does not control ignition timing and engine idle speed properly when engine is started with prewarming up condition. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause • Lack of intake air volume • Fuel injection system • ECM INFOID:0000000001717607 NOTE: • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. • If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F). If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go to step 1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-484, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717608 1.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following. • Crushed intake air passage • Intake air passage clogging OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part Revision: August 2007 EC-484 2008 Quest DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION A Perform EC-271, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" in DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. OK or NG EC OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Go to EC-276, "Diagnosis Procedure". 4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE C With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-484, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1421 displayed again? With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select Service $04 with GST. 3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-484, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". 4. Is the 1st trip DTC P1421 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. D E F G H 5.REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-181, "ECM Re-communicating Function". Perform EC-72, "VIN Registration". Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". I J K >> INSPECTION END L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-485 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description INFOID:0000000001717609 ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. BBIA0688E 1. ASCD steering switch 2. MAIN switch 4 SET/COAST switch 5. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 3. CANCEL switch Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717610 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON RESUME/ACC SW SET SW • Ignition switch: ON • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION MAIN switch: Pressed ON MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717611 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-447. DTC No. P1564 1564 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD steering switch DTC Detecting Condition • An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. • ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. • ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. Possible Cause • Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) • ASCD steering switch • ECM INFOID:0000000001717612 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Revision: August 2007 EC-486 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A b. Turn ignition switch ON. c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC 3. Wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. C 6. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. 7. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. D 8. Check DTC. 9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-489, "Diagnosis Procedure". E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-487 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717613 BBWA2530E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-488 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 67 99 A WIRE COLOR B G/Y ITEM CONDITION Sensor ground ASCD steering switch DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] • ASCD steering switch: OFF Approximately 4V [Ignition switch: ON] • MAIN switch: Pressed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] • CANCEL switch: Pressed Approximately 1V [Ignition switch: ON] • RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approximately 3V [Ignition switch: ON] • SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approximately 2V Diagnosis Procedure C D E F INFOID:0000000001717614 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-489 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET/COAST SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. 1. 2. Switch Monitor item MAIN switch MAIN SW CANCEL switch CANCEL SW RESUME/ACCELERATE switch RESUME/ACC SW SET/COAST switch SET SW 1. 2. Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 PBIB0311E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 Revision: August 2007 EC-490 2008 Quest DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness connectors E26, M91 • Combination switch (spiral cable) • Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch A >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC 5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. D 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. E 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check the following. • Harness connectors E26, M91 • Combination switch (spiral cable) • Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH H Refer to EC-491, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. I 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-130. K >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717615 L ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Revision: August 2007 Condition Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 EC-491 M N O PBIB1621E 2008 Quest P DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description INFOID:0000000001717616 When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function. BBIA0329E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717617 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) • Ignition switch: ON BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717618 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: • If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-447. • This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. DTC No. P1572 1572 Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition A) When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/ h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the ECM at the same time. B) ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving ASCD brake switch DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause • Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.) • Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) • Stop lamp switch • ASCD brake switch • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation • Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation • ECM INFOID:0000000001717619 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-492 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be detected. A WITH CONSULT-III EC TESTING CONDITION: Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. C 1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indictor lights up. D 4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Shift lever Suitable position 5. 6. 7. E Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-495, "Diagnosis Procedure". If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. F G VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Shift lever Suitable position Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than 5 seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned vehicle speed. 8. 9. H I Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-495, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST J Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-493 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717620 BBWA2531E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-494 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 101 108 A WIRE COLOR R/G G/B ITEM Stop lamp switch ASCD brake switch CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717621 E 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I F With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION G INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON H I Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released J VOLTAGE K Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. L MBIB0061E M 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION N INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON O Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. Revision: August 2007 EC-495 P 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1677E 3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0329E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0857E 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: August 2007 EC-496 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A Refer to EC-498, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. EC 7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. D E F BBIA0329E 3. G Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. H Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. I J PBIB1184E 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. M Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. N Continuity should exist. O 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P 10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-498, "Component Inspection" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. Revision: August 2007 EC-497 2008 Quest DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717622 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should exist Should not exist If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-5, and perform step 3 again. SEC023D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should not exist Should exist If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and perform step 3 again. PBIB1185E Revision: August 2007 EC-498 2008 Quest DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717623 The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC tion meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-25 for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717624 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: • If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. • If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to EC-141. • If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-432. • If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-447. DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor D E F G DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. • Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • Wheel sensor • TCM • ECM DTC Confirmation Procedure C H I INFOID:0000000001717625 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. 1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). 2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). 3. Check DTC. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-499, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717626 J K L M N O 1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM P Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. 2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” Refer to BRC-10 or BRC-50. Revision: August 2007 EC-499 2008 Quest DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: August 2007 EC-500 2008 Quest DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717627 The VIAS control solenoid valve (2) cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator (1). • : Vehicle front EC C D BBIA0649E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717628 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V-1 E F CONDITION • Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic G INFOID:0000000001717629 H The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1800 1800 Trouble diagnosis name VIAS control solenoid valve circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure I Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • VIAS control solenoid valve INFOID:0000000001717630 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 2. Check 1st trip DTC. 3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-503, "Diagnosis Procedure". J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-501 2008 Quest DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717631 BBWA2533E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-502 2008 Quest DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 29 111 119 120 A WIRE COLOR Y/G W/B R/G R/G ITEM VIAS control solenoid valve ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] • Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm. 0 - 1.0V C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V D [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure E F INFOID:0000000001717632 G 1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. - Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector (2). Turn ignition switch ON. : Vehicle front Power valve actuator (1) H I J BBIA0649E 4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. K L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. N PBIB0173E 2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM P >> Repair harness or connectors. 3.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 EC-503 2008 Quest DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-504, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717633 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS S/V-1 Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. JMBIA0180ZZ Without CONSULT-III Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717634 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Revision: August 2007 EC-504 2008 Quest DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to EM-23. A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-505 2008 Quest DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description INFOID:0000000001717635 Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717636 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717637 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. • Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) • Stop lamp switch FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. INFOID:0000000001717638 Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC. Check 1st trip DTC. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-508, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-506 2008 Quest DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717639 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2534E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-507 2008 Quest P DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 101 WIRE COLOR R/G ITEM Stop lamp switch CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717640 1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Slightly depressed Illuminated OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0329E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1184E 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • 10A fuse • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Revision: August 2007 EC-508 2008 Quest DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A Continuity should exist. EC 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C 5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D Refer to EC-509, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END G Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717641 STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. H Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. I J K BBIA0329E 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Conditions Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed 3. L Continuity M Should not exist Should exist N If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and perform step 2 again. PBIB1185E O P Revision: August 2007 EC-509 2008 Quest DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description INFOID:0000000001717642 Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717643 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION ON On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717644 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P2100 2100 Throttle control motor relay circuit open ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. • Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) • Throttle control motor relay P2103 2103 Throttle control motor relay circuit short ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. • Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) • Throttle control motor relay FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717645 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-510 2008 Quest DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717646 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2526E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-511 2008 Quest P DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V 4 O/L Throttle control motor (Close) [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released PBIB1104E 0 - 14V 5 W/L Throttle control motor (Open) [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed PBIB1105E 104 O Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717647 1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1171E 2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: August 2007 EC-512 2008 Quest DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK FUSE A 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. EC 4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I C Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester. D Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. E F MBIB0028E 5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H I Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. J 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R L >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-513 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description INFOID:0000000001717648 NOTE: If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100 or P2119. Refer to EC-510 or EC-526. Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717649 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2101 2101 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control performance DTC detecting condition Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. Possible cause • Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) • Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717650 TESTING CONDITION: • Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. 1. If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. b. Turn ignition switch ON. c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. 3. Check DTC. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-516, "Diagnosis Procedure". Revision: August 2007 EC-514 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717651 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2525E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-515 2008 Quest P DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V 4 O/L Throttle control motor (Close) [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released PBIB1104E 0 - 14V 5 W/L Throttle control motor (Open) [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed PBIB1105E 104 O Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717652 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-516 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I K Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 3. L M N MBIB0028E 3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. O Turn ignition switch OFF. P Revision: August 2007 EC-517 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1171E 4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 15A fuse. 6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT Revision: August 2007 EC-518 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal ECM terminal 3 6 A EC Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist C BBIA0318E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace. D E F 10.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. G H I BBIA0318E J 11.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-519, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 13. K L 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M N 13.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". O >> INSPECTION END P Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717653 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-519 2008 Quest DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". PBIB0095E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717654 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-23. Revision: August 2007 EC-520 2008 Quest DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717655 The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. C On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717656 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2118 2118 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. D Possible cause • Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) • Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) E F FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. G Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. H INFOID:0000000001717657 If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-523, "Diagnosis Procedure". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-521 2008 Quest DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717658 BBWA2527E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-522 2008 Quest DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR R ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC C 0 - 14V 4 O/L Throttle control motor (Close) D [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released E PBIB1104E 0 - 14V 5 W/L Throttle control motor (Open) F [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G PBIB1105E 104 O Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V H I : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717659 J 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-523 2008 Quest DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 6 ECM terminal Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist BBIA0318E 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. 3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-525, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: August 2007 EC-524 2008 Quest DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. EC 5.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. C Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717660 E THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. F Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] G If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". H I PBIB0095E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717661 J ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-525 2008 Quest DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717662 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717663 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2119 2119 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open. Possible cause • Electric throttle control actuator FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717664 NOTE: • Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. • If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second. Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. Set shift lever to N or P position. Turn ignition witch OFF and wait at least 10 second. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second. Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. Set shift lever to N or P position. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnosis Procedure". PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C Revision: August 2007 EC-526 2008 Quest DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Set shift lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. 3. Set shift lever to P or N position. 4. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. 5. Check DTC. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure A EC INFOID:0000000001717665 C 1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY D 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. E F G BBIA0318E 2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. H Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". I >> INSPECTION END J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-527 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717666 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717667 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717668 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause • Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717669 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Revision: August 2007 EC-528 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-530, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717670 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA2026E Revision: August 2007 EC-529 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 82 B APP sensor 1 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 83 G APP sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R/V APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 O APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V 98 106 W/B W Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717671 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-530 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0335E 3. O Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB1851E Revision: August 2007 EC-531 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-532, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717672 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 EC-532 2008 Quest DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 0.2 - 2.5V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. A EC C MBIB0023E D If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Removal and Installation E INFOID:0000000001717673 F ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3. G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-533 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717674 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717675 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717676 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2127 2127 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. P2128 2128 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause • Harness or connectors (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717677 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: August 2007 EC-534 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-536, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717678 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA1639E Revision: August 2007 EC-535 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 47 R Throttle position sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 82 B APP sensor 1 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 83 G APP sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V 90 R/V APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 O APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 0.2 - 2.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V 98 106 W/B W Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717679 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-536 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0335E 3. O Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1852E Revision: August 2007 EC-537 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to wiring diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit. 4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-535 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-541 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace electric throttle control actuator. PerformEC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. Revision: August 2007 EC-538 2008 Quest DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK APP SENSOR A Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. EC 10.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. C Replace accelerator pedal assembly. PerformEC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". D E >> INSPECTION END 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. F >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717680 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. G H Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. I J Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 0.2 - 2.5V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. K MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Removal and Installation L M INFOID:0000000001717681 N ACCELERATOR PEDAL O Refer to ACC-3. P Revision: August 2007 EC-539 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717682 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717683 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM TP SEN 1-B1 TP SEN 2-B1* CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) • Shift lever: D SPECIFICATION Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717684 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P2135 2135 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. Possible cause • Harness or connector (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717685 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. Revision: August 2007 EC-540 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-542, "Diagnosis Procedure". Wiring Diagram A INFOID:0000000001717686 EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P BBWA1640E Revision: August 2007 EC-541 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 50 66 69 91 WIRE COLOR R Y G L O ITEM Throttle position sensor power supply Throttle position sensor 1 Throttle position sensor ground Throttle position sensor 2 APP sensor 2 power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully released Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Shift lever: D • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717687 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". Revision: August 2007 EC-542 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. I Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. K Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. L M N BBIA0318E 3. O Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. P Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0082E Revision: August 2007 EC-543 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit. 4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-541 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-548 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-552, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. PerformEC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. Revision: August 2007 EC-544 2008 Quest DTC P2135 TP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A 9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR EC Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. C 10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. D Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". E >> INSPECTION END 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END G Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717688 H THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Turn ignition switch ON. Set shift lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. I J K Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) L PBIB1608E 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Removal and Installation M N INFOID:0000000001717689 O ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-17. P Revision: August 2007 EC-545 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717690 The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717691 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V CLSD THL POS • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717692 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-449. DTC No. P2138 2138 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance Possible cause • Harness or connector (APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1 and 2) • Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000001717693 NOTE: Revision: August 2007 EC-546 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. 1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. C 2. Check DTC. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-549, "Diagnosis Procedure". D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-547 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717694 BBWA1641E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-548 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 47 R Throttle position sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 82 B APP sensor 1 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V C 83 G APP sensor 2 ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V D 90 R/V APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 O APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 0.2 - 2.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V [Ignition switch: ON] • Engine stopped • Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V 98 106 W/B W Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 E F G H I Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717695 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-549 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0335E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 7 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB1851E Revision: August 2007 EC-550 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. 1. EC Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4. C D PBIB1852E 4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to wiring diagram. F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit. G 5.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III H Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. I ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-548 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-541 J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K 6.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR L Refer to EC-545, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 7. M 7.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". N O >> INSPECTION END 8.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 1 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 83. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. Revision: August 2007 EC-551 2008 Quest P DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10.CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-552, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". >> INSPECTION END 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717696 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. Accelerator pedal Voltage Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 0.2 - 2.5V MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-73, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". Perform EC-73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Revision: August 2007 EC-552 2008 Quest DTC P2138 APP SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717697 A ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3. EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-553 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description INFOID:0000000001717698 The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717699 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION • Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000001717700 To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side. DTC No. P2A00 2A00 (Bank 1) P2A03 2A03 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit range/performance • The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause • • • • • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater Fuel pressure Fuel injector Intake air leaks INFOID:0000000001717701 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next step. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. Revision: August 2007 EC-554 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. A Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. C Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. E Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. Check 1st trip DTC. F If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-559, "Diagnosis Procedure". WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-559, "Diagnosis Procedure". G H I J K BBIA0327E L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-555 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717702 BANK 1 BBWA2503E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-556 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC Approximately 5V C 2 R/G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed D PBIB1584E 16 BR 35 O/B 56 V 75 P Approximately 3.1V A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed E Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V F Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-557 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > BANK 2 BBWA2504E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-558 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V 24 W EC [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) C PBIB1584E 57 W/R 58 LG/R 76 O 77 LG Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) Approximately 2.3V E Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) F Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717703 1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. D G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". H I J K L M N O BBIA0691E P : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: August 2007 EC-559 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 and P0175 detected? BBIA0327E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-271 or EC-281. No >> GO TO 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0656E Revision: August 2007 EC-560 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > : 1. Vehicle front A Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. harness connector Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector 3. Intake manifold collector EC 3. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. C 6.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. D Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. F G PBIB1683E 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • IPDM E/R harness connector E122 • 15A fuse • Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse I J >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank1 Bank 2 L A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 M N O P Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-561 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 11. 10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-130. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. 11.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: • Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. • Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> GO TO 12. 12.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 13. 13.CLEAR A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 1. 2. 3. Revision: August 2007 EC-562 2008 Quest DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-43, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. A EC C >> GO TO 14. BBIA0541E 14.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. E >> INSPECTION END F Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717704 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 G Refer to EM-25. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-563 2008 Quest ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description INFOID:0000000001717705 When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function. BBIA0329E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717706 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW1 (ASCD brake switch) • Ignition switch: ON BRAKE SW2 (Stop lamp switch) • Ignition switch: ON Revision: August 2007 SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON EC-564 2008 Quest ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717707 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2542E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-565 2008 Quest P ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 101 108 WIRE COLOR R/G G/B ITEM Stop lamp switch ASCD brake switch CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: OFF] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717708 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0061E 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. Revision: August 2007 EC-566 2008 Quest ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed A VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage EC OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. C PBIB1677E 3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. E F G BBIA0329E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. H I Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. J K PBIB0857E 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L Check the following. • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse M N >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. O P Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: August 2007 EC-567 2008 Quest ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-569, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. 7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0329E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB1184E 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-569, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. Revision: August 2007 EC-568 2008 Quest ASCD BRAKE SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END EC Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717709 C ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. D E Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Continuity Should exist F Should not exist If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-5, and perform step 3 again. G SEC023D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed I Continuity J Should not exist Should exist K If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-5, and perform step 3 again. PBIB1535E L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-569 2008 Quest ASCD INDICATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > ASCD INDICATOR Component Description INFOID:0000000001717710 ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. • CRUISE indicator is illuminated. • SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-25 for the ASCD function. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717711 Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON SET LAMP • MAIN switch: ON • When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) Revision: August 2007 SPECIFICATION MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF ASCD: Operating ON ASCD: Not operating OFF EC-570 2008 Quest ASCD INDICATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717712 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA2543E Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717713 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. Revision: August 2007 EC-571 2008 Quest P ASCD INDICATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON SET LAMP • MAIN switch: ON • When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) SPECIFICATION MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF ASCD: Operating ON ASCD: Not operating OFF OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139. 3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-5. 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-572 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL A Description INFOID:0000000001717714 The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred EC through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717715 C Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL CONDITION • Ignition switch: ON HEATER FAN SW • Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF. OFF Heater fan: Operating ON Heater fan: Not operating OFF Diagnosis Procedure D E F INFOID:0000000001717716 1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I G 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch ON. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Rear window defogger switch: ON ON Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. J 2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II K Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. L Condition Indication Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF OFF M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. N 3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions. Condition LOAD SIGNAL Heater fan control switch: ON ON Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF P OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 6. 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 O EC-573 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to GW-76. >> INSPECTION END 5.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM Refer to LT-5 or LT-25. >> INSPECTION END 6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM Refer to ATC-28 or MTC-27. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-574 2008 Quest ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT < SERVICE INFORMATION > ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT A System Description INFOID:0000000001717717 EC Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor Vehicle speed* ECM function Actuator Engine mount control Electronic controlled engine mount C *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. D The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The control system has 2-step control [Soft/Hard] E Vehicle condition Engine mount control Engine speed: Below 950 rpm Soft Engine speed: Above 950 rpm Hard CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode F INFOID:0000000001717718 G Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENGINE MOUNT CONDITION • Engine: Running SPECIFICATION Engine speed: Below 950 rpm IDLE Engine speed: Above 950 rpm TRVL H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-575 2008 Quest ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717719 BBWA2007E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-576 2008 Quest ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 8 9 A WIRE COLOR W W/R ITEM Electronic controlled engine mount-1 Electronic controlled engine mount-2 CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Above 950 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or less 0 - 1.0V C [Engine is running] • 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or less 2.0 - 3.0V D [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Below 950 rpm BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • For 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or more 0 - 1.0V [Engine is running] • 2 seconds after engine speed: 950 rpm or more 2.0 - 3.0V E F G Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717720 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION H With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III and touch “ON/OFF” on the CINSULT-II screen. 3. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds according to the switching condition of “ENGINE MOUNTING”. 1. 2. Without CONSULT-III Make sure that gear position is P or N. Start engine and let it idle. Change the engine speed from idle to more than 1,000 rpm and then return to idle (with vehicle stopped). Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds when changing engine speed. It is better to hear the operating sound around the left side front wheel house. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. I J K L M N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount harness connector. O P BBIA0325E Revision: August 2007 EC-577 2008 Quest ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. SEC920C 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E8, F17 • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 15A fuse • Harness for open and short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery >> Repair harness or connectors. 4.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and electronic engine mount terminals as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. ECM terminal Electronic controlled engine mount terminal 8 1 9 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT Visually check electronic controlled engine mount. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount. 6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Revision: August 2007 EC-578 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL INJECTOR A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717721 The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. EC C D SEF375Z CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717722 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM F CONDITION B/FUEL SCHDL • EC-122. INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 • • • • Engine: After warming up Shift lever: P or N Air conditioner switch: OFF No load E SPECIFICATION G Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-579 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717723 BBWA2539E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 EC-580 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A EC BATTERY VOLTAGE 21 22 23 40 41 42 L/W R/Y R/B V/W R/L R/W Fuel injector No. 5 Fuel injector No. 3 Fuel injector No. 1 Fuel injector No. 6 Fuel injector No. 4 Fuel injector No. 2 [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle C (11 - 14V) D SEC984C E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. G SEC985C H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717724 I 1.INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 7. J K 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. M OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. N 3.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I 1. O Without CONSULT-III Stop engine. Revision: August 2007 P EC-581 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect harness connector F44 (2), F101 (3). 3. Turn ignition switch ON. : Vehicle front Intake manifold collector (1) BBIA0657E 4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. PBIB2323E Cylinder Harness connector F44 terminal ECM terminal 1 6 23 3 2 22 5 1 21 Continuity should exist. 8. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E8, F17 • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse • Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II Provide battery voltage between harness connector F101 as follows and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. Cylinder Harness connector F101 terminal (+) (–) 1 5 6 3 5 2 5 5 1 PBIB2324E Revision: August 2007 EC-582 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Operating sound should exist. A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 7. EC 6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected. Start engine. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound. C D Clicking noise should exist. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. E F PBIB1986E 7.CHECK FULE INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. H I J BBIA0237E K 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. N PBIB0582E 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O Check the following. • Harness connectors E8, F17 • Harness connectors F44, F101 • Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 • 10A fuse • Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse P >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: August 2007 EC-583 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F101, F44 • Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR Refer to EC-584, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace fuel injector. 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717725 FUEL INJECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] PBIB1727E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717726 FUEL INJECTOR Refer to EM-38. Revision: August 2007 EC-584 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL PUMP A Description INFOID:0000000001717727 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM Function Actuator C Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay D *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition E F Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking G Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. H COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. I J K BBIA0081E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY L INFOID:0000000001717728 M CONDITION SPECIFICATION • For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON • Engine running or cranking ON • Except above conditions OFF N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-585 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717729 BBWA2540E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-586 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 113 A WIRE COLOR B/O ITEM Fuel pump relay CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Ignition switch: ON] • For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: ON] • More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C D Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717730 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. F Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. G H BBIA0340E 2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. J K Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. L M PBIB1187E 3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ECM terminal 113. Refer to Wiring Diagram. O Continuity should exist. P 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power or short to ground in harness or connectors. 4.CHECK CONDENSER-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Revision: August 2007 EC-587 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between condenser-2 terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB0624E 5.CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace fuse. 6.CHECK CONDENSER-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser-2 terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 7. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors B107, E139 • Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-2 >> Repair harness or connectors. 8.CHECK CONDENSER-2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between condenser-2 terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK CONDENSER-2 Refer to EC-589, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser-2. 10.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Revision: August 2007 EC-588 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. 3. Disconnect harness connectors E139, B107 4. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B107 terminal 1, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A EC C Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0689E D E 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connector B107 • Harness connectors B148, E251 • Harness for open or short between harness connector B107 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” • Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”and ground F G >> Repair harness or connectors. 12.CHECK FUEL PUPMP H Refer to EC-589, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. I 13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Component Inspection K INFOID:0000000001717731 L FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 1 and 3. M N Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] O P SEC918C CONDENSER-2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-589 2008 Quest FUEL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals as 1 and 2. Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] PBIB0794E Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717732 FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-5. Revision: August 2007 EC-590 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > IGNITION SIGNAL A Component Description INFOID:0000000001717733 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR EC The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. C D E BBIA0244E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-591 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717734 BBWA2535E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-592 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. 111 119 120 A WIRE COLOR W/B R/G R/G ITEM ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-593 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBWA2536E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-594 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 0 - 0.4V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 60 61 62 P/L L/R Y/R Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 C D SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V E [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm F SEC987C G : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-595 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBWA2537E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-596 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 0 - 0.4V [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 79 80 81 GR/R GR G/R Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 C D SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V E [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm F SEC987C G : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717735 H 1.CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. I J 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION K With CONSULT-III 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. L M 3.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Without CONSULT-III Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 1. 2. N O P PBIB1186E SEC986C OK or NG Revision: August 2007 EC-597 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-131. MBIB0034E 5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. WBIA0542E 4. Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal + and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0851E 6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser-1 terminal +. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-131. NG >> GO TO 7. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 Revision: August 2007 EC-598 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser-1 A >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8.CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. EC Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal – and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D E 9.CHECK CONDENSER-1 Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser-1. F G 10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. H I J K BBIA0244E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. N PBIB0138E 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F43, F201 • Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F14 P >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-599 O 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. 13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F201, F43 • Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 14.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors F43, F201 • Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 16.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. 17.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717736 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. Revision: August 2007 EC-600 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. A Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ 1 and 3 2 and 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. EC Except 0 If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. C PBIB0847E D E F G BBIA0229E H I Spark should be generated. J CAUTION: • Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. • It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. L M CONDENSER-1 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals + and –. N Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)] O P PBIB0848E Revision: August 2007 EC-601 2008 Quest IGNITION SIGNAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717737 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-35. Revision: August 2007 EC-602 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description A INFOID:0000000001717738 The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed in the RH side of the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. EC C D BBIA0348E E F G H PBIB2657E I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-603 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717739 BBWA2541E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-604 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC 49 BR/Y Refrigerant pressure sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 67 B Sensor ground [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Idle speed Approximately 0V C Refrigerant pressure sensor [Engine is running] • Warm-up condition • Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates.) 1.0 - 4.0V D 70 W Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001717740 E 1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. F Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. G Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V H OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. I PBIB1188E J 2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. 3. Stop engine. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-605 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BBIA0691E : Vehicle front 1. Body ground E24 4. Body ground E15 2. ECM 3. Body ground E9 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0348E 3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0188E Revision: August 2007 EC-606 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor EC >> Repair harness or connectors. 5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT C 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. E 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. F 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor H >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. K L 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. • Harness connectors E19, F33 • Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor M >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N 9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. O P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717741 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-173, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" or MTC-155, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor". Revision: August 2007 EC-607 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > VIAS Description INFOID:0000000001717742 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Battery Battery voltage* ECM function VIAS control Actuator VIAS control solenoid valve *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. PBIB1874E When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher torque generation. The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector. Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction resistance under high speeds. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator (1) operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve (2). • : Vehicle front BBIA0649E Revision: August 2007 EC-608 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > VIAS Control Solenoid Valve The VIAS control solenoid valve (2) cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator (1). • : Vehicle front A EC C BBIA0649E CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000001717743 E Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VIAS S/V-1 CONDITION • Engine: After warming up D SPECIFICATION 1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON Except above conditions OFF F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-609 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717744 BBWA2538E Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Revision: August 2007 EC-610 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINAL NO. A WIRE COLOR 29 Y/G 111 W/B 119 120 R/G R/G ITEM VIAS control solenoid valve ECM relay (Self shut-off) Power supply for ECM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC [Engine is running] • Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] • Engine speed: Between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm 0 - 1.0V C [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] • For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF 0 - 1.5V D [Ignition switch: OFF] • More than a few seconds passed after turning ignition switch OFF BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnosis Procedure E F INFOID:0000000001717745 G 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-III Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves as shown in the figure. NOTE: Use an inspection mirror (A) to confirm the operation of power valve actuator rod. H I J : Vehicle front 1. Power valve actuator K L PBIB3053E Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Rev engine up to between 1,800 and 3,600 rpm and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves as shown in the figure. NOTE: Use an inspection mirror (A) to confirm the operation of power valve actuator rod. : Vehicle front Power valve actuator (1) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (With CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 2. NG (Without CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 3. M N O P PBIB3053E 2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE 1. With CONSULT-III Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Revision: August 2007 EC-611 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Install the vacuum gauge as shown in the figure. 3. Start engine and let it idle. 4. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. 5. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following conditions. : Vehicle front 1. Power valve actuator 2. Vacuum gauge 3. VIAS control solenoid valve VIAS S/V-1 Vacuum ON Should exist OFF Should not exist JMBIA1065ZZ OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-III Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. Install the vacuum gauge as shown in the figure. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. Start engine and let it idle. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. PBIB3052E : 1. 6. Vehicle front Power valve actuator 2. Vacuum gauge 3. VIAS control solenoid valve Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. Condition Vacuum 12V direct current supply Should exist No supply Should not exist OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. NG >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE 1. Stop engine. Revision: August 2007 EC-612 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-96, "Vacuum Hose Drawing". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair hoses or tubes. A EC C SEF109L 5.CHECK VACUUM TANK D Refer to EC-614, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace vacuum tank. E 6.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F 1. 2. 3. - G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve (2) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. : Vehicle front Power valve actuator (1) H I BBIA0649E J 4. Check voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. K Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. L M PBIB0173E 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N Check the following. • Harness connectors E5, F14 • Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R • Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM O >> Repair harness or connectors. 8.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Revision: August 2007 EC-613 2008 Quest P VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-614, "Component Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. 10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-130. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001717746 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition VIAS S/V-1 Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C ON Yes No OFF No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. JMBIA0180ZZ Without CONSULT-III Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B Air passage continuity between A and C 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No No supply No Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB2532E VACUUM TANK Revision: August 2007 EC-614 2008 Quest VIAS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the center port of vacuum tank. 3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the other port. A EC C PBIB0846E D Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717747 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E Refer to EM-23. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-615 2008 Quest MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001717748 BBWA2544E Revision: August 2007 EC-616 2008 Quest MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EC C D E F G H I J K L M N O BBWA1653E P Revision: August 2007 EC-617 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000001717749 Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000001717750 675 ± 50 rpm Target idle speed No load* (in P or N position) Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 825 rpm or more Ignition timing In P or N position 15 ± 5° BTDC *: Under the following conditions: • Air conditioner switch: OFF • Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) • Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000001717751 Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-III or GST) At idle 5 - 35 At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35 Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000001717752 Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3*V 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST) *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000001717753 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000001717754 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 EGR Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000001717755 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 0 (32) Revision: August 2007 0.73 - 0.88 EC-618 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 50 (122) 0.074 - 0.082 100 (212) 0.011 - 0.014 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater A INFOID:0000000001717756 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater EC C INFOID:0000000001717757 D Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000001717758 E INFOID:0000000001717759 F INFOID:0000000001717760 G Refer to EC-324, "Component Inspection". Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Refer to EC-332, "Component Inspection". Throttle Control Motor Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω Fuel Injector H INFOID:0000000001717761 I Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000001717762 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] J Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EC-619 2008 Quest BODY SECTION EI EXTERIOR & INTERIOR A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 Removal and Installation .........................................20 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 FENDER PROTECTOR .................................... 21 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution ................................................................. 2 Removal and Installation .........................................21 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ....................................................................... 4 Work Flow ................................................................. 4 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 Removal and Installation .........................................22 LICENSE LAMP FINISHER .............................. 23 ROOF RACK ..................................................... 24 EI Removal and Installation .........................................24 ROOF SIDE MOLDING ..................................... 25 Removal and Installation .........................................25 Removal and Installation .........................................26 Removal and Installation .........................................27 L DOOR FINISHER .............................................. 29 Removal and Installation .........................................29 BODY SIDE TRIM ............................................. 31 M Removal and Installation .........................................31 FLOOR TRIM .................................................... 36 N Removal and Installation .........................................36 COWL TOP .........................................................18 Removal and Installation ......................................... 18 K SIDE GUARD MOLDING .................................. 27 FRONT GRILLE .................................................17 Removal and Installation ......................................... 17 J DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ............................. 26 REAR BUMPER .................................................15 Removal and Installation ......................................... 15 H Removal and Installation .........................................23 FRONT BUMPER ...............................................13 Removal and Installation ......................................... 13 G MUDGUARD ..................................................... 22 CLIP AND FASTENER .......................................10 Description .............................................................. 10 F HEADLINING .................................................... 38 FRONT FENDER ................................................20 Removal and Installation .........................................38 O P Revision: August 2007 EI-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718713 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution INFOID:0000000001718714 • When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may get in the way with cloth. • When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping the tool with vinyl or tape. • Keep removed parts protected with cloth. • If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it. • If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one. • Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque. • After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly. • Remove stains in the following way. - Water-soluble stains: Dip a cloth in warm water, and squeeze tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth. - Oil stain: Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain with the cloth. Next, dip the soft cloth in fresh water, and then squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth. • Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine. Revision: August 2007 EI-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718715 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name B Description C Locating the noise — (J-39570) Chassis ear D E F SBT839 Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit G H EI J SBT840 Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718716 K (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear L Locating the noise M N SIIA0995E (J-47126) Net Hook Socket Remove and install the net hook fasteners O P WIIA0780E Revision: August 2007 EI-3 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Work Flow INFOID:0000000001718717 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to EI-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. - Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping - Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. - Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. - Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. - Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. - Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. - Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 EI-4 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: • Close a door. • Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. • Rev the engine. • Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. • At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). • Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: G • Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. H Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. • Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing EI the noise. • Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to EI-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". J REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. Revision: August 2007 EI-5 2008 Quest K L M N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718718 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and upper/lower cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. BACK DOOR Luggage compartment noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the luggage compartment by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Back door bumpers out of adjustment 2. Back door striker out of adjustment 3. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 EI-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. A SUNROOF/HEADLINER Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) B C D Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. E F SEATS When isolating seat noises it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of G the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holders H 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- EI ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J UNDERHOOD Some interior noises may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noises include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EI-7 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718719 LAIA0072E Revision: August 2007 EI-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H EI J K L M N O LAIA0071E P Revision: August 2007 EI-9 2008 Quest CLIP AND FASTENER < SERVICE INFORMATION > CLIP AND FASTENER Description INFOID:0000000001718720 • Clips and fasteners in EI section correspond to the following numbers and symbols. • Replace any clips and/or fasteners which are damaged during removal or installation. Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation C101 SBF302H SBF367BA SBT095 SBF423H SBF258G LIIA0236E MBT080A SBF638CA MBF519B MBF520B SBF104B SBF147B C103 C203 C205 C206 CE103 Revision: August 2007 EI-10 2008 Quest CLIP AND FASTENER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation A B CE107 C SBF411H SBF767B D CE117 E SBF174D SBF175DA F CF110 G H SBF648B SBF649B EI CF118 J SBF151D SBF259G K CG101 L SBF145B SBF085B CS101 M N O SBF078B SBF992G P Revision: August 2007 EI-11 2008 Quest CLIP AND FASTENER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symbol No. Shapes Removal & Installation CR103 SBF768B SBF770B WBT072 WBT073 Metal Clip Revision: August 2007 EI-12 2008 Quest FRONT BUMPER < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT BUMPER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718721 B C D E F G H EI J K L M N O P WIIA1130E 1. Splash guard 2. Front bumper fascia 3. Side front bumper bracket 4. Fog lamp assembly brackets (if equipped) 5. Fog lamp assemblies (if equipped) 6. Energy absorbing foam Revision: August 2007 EI-13 2008 Quest FRONT BUMPER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Front bumper reinforcement 10. Front bumper stay assemblies 8. Engine under cover seal A. Clip C205 9. Engine under cover REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Remove splash guards RH/LH. Partially remove front fender protectors RH/LH at front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-21. Remove engine under cover. Remove engine under cover seal. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-17. Disconnect fog lamps, if equipped. Remove clips from top and screws from side of front bumper fascia. Remove front bumper fascia. Remove energy absorbing foam. Remove front bumper reinforcement. Remove front bumper stay assemblies. Remove fog lamp assembly brackets RH/LH, if equipped. Remove fog lamp assemblies RH/LH, if equipped. Remove side front bumper brackets RH/LH. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-14 2008 Quest REAR BUMPER < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR BUMPER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718722 B C D E F G H EI J K L M N O P WIIA1155E 1. Rear combination lamp LH 2. Rear combination lamp RH 3. Rear bumper reinforcement 4. Rear bumper energy absorber 5. Drafter duct 6. Rear bumper side brackets RH/LH Revision: August 2007 EI-15 2008 Quest REAR BUMPER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Side retainer RH/LH 10. Rear bumper fascia a. 8. Sonar sensor harness (if equipped) 11. Sonar sensor (if equipped) 9. Sonar sensor connector (if equipped) 12. Rear bumper step pad Clip C205 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove rear combination lamps RH/LH. Refer to LT-102. Disconnect sonar sensor connectors, if equipped. Remove C205 clips from rear bumper fascia. Remove side retainers RH/LH. • Rotate clip 1/4 turn to release retainer. 5. Remove screws and rear bumper fascia. 6. Remove rear bumper side brackets RH/LH. 7. Remove rear bumper reinforcement. • Separate rear bumper energy absorber from rear bumper reinforcement. 8. Remove rear bumper step pad from rear bumper fascia. 9. Remove sonar sensors and retainers from rear bumper fascia, if equipped. • Separate sonar sensors and retainers. 10. Remove sonar sensor harness from rear bumper fascia. 11. Remove drafter duct from rear bumper area. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-16 2008 Quest FRONT GRILLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT GRILLE A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718723 B C D E F G H EI WIIA1131E 1. Front bumper fascia 2. Front license plate bracket (if equipped) 3. Front grille J REMOVAL 1. Release the tabs attaching front grille to front bumper fascia, then remove front grille. NOTE: If equipped, remove the screws and remove the front license plate bracket from front bumper fascia. INSTALLATION K L Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M N O P Revision: August 2007 EI-17 2008 Quest COWL TOP < SERVICE INFORMATION > COWL TOP Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718724 WIIA1134E 1. Cowl top weatherstrip 2. Fastener cover 3. Brake fluid access cover 4. Cowl top cover 5. Cowl top seal 6. Cowl top extension A. Clip C103 B. Clip CE103 ⇐ Vehicle front REMOVAL 1. 2. a. b. c. d. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms". Remove cowl top cover. Release fastener covers and clips. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl top cover, then releasing plastic clips. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. Remove windshield washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to WW-23, "Washer Tube Layout" Revision: August 2007 EI-18 2008 Quest COWL TOP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove cowl top extension. a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to ATC-143. b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension. A INSTALLATION B Installation is in the reverse order of removal. C D E F G H EI J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EI-19 2008 Quest FRONT FENDER < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT FENDER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718725 WIIA1135E 1. Front fender 4. Outside corner cover 2. Front bumper fascia 3. Fender protector REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EI-13. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21. Remove outside corner cover. Remove bolts, then remove front fender. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-20 2008 Quest FENDER PROTECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > FENDER PROTECTOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718726 B C D E F G H EI J WIIA0800E 1. Front fender protector a. Metal clip-forged nut type c. Pushpin clip C205 ⇐ Vehicle front b. Metal clip-stamped nut type K REMOVAL L 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. M Remove splash guard. Refer to EI-13. Remove pushpin clips. Remove screws. Remove front fender protector. Remove metal clips. N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O P Revision: August 2007 EI-21 2008 Quest MUDGUARD < SERVICE INFORMATION > MUDGUARD Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718727 WIIA1132E 1. Front mudguard 2. Center mudguard (front) 4. Rear mudguard A. Pushpin CS101 3. Center mudguard (rear) REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove screws and pushpins from mudguard. NOTE: For center mudguard, remove rear first. Remove mudguard (front/rear). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-22 2008 Quest LICENSE LAMP FINISHER < SERVICE INFORMATION > LICENSE LAMP FINISHER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718728 B C D E F G H EI J K L WIIA1136E 1. Rubber bumper B. Clip C101 2. License lamp finisher A. Clip CS101 M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31. Remove nuts from license lamp finisher. Release clips, then remove license lamp finisher. Remove rubber bumpers. NOTE: If replacing rubber bumpers, degrease surface where rubber bumpers will be mounted with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-23 2008 Quest N O P ROOF RACK < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROOF RACK Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718729 WIIA1127E 1. Roof rack side bar (if equipped) 2. Roof rack cross bar (if equipped) 4. Foam washer ⇐ Vehicle front 3. Gasket REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38. Remove screws from end brackets, then remove roof rack cross bars, if equipped. Remove nuts from underside of roof panel, then remove roof rack side bar RH/LH (if equipped). Remove foam washers and gaskets from roof surface. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Make sure the arrows on the crossbar brackets are pointing forward, if equipped. • During installation, always position the foam washers with the soft (non-plastic) side facing towards the roof sheet metal. Revision: August 2007 EI-24 2008 Quest ROOF SIDE MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROOF SIDE MOLDING A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718730 B C D E F G H EI WIIA1137E 1. Roof side molding 2. Molding tape 3. Molding clip J REMOVAL Lift roof side molding upward from front edge, then work rearward. NOTE: Molding clips are attached to vehicle with molding tape. K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Degrease surface of roof where molding tape will be mounted as well as surface of molding clip where tape is attached with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent. • Use new molding tape on molding clips for installation. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EI-25 2008 Quest DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718731 WIIA0804E 1. Double-faced adhesive tape 2. Door outside molding ⇐ Front of vehicle REMOVAL 1. Open windows fully. 2. Remove door mirror. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". 3. Lift molding beginning from rear edge, disconnecting clips from flange. NOTE: Front end of molding has double-faced adhesive tape. Carefully separate double-faced adhesive tape from door sheet metal. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-26 2008 Quest SIDE GUARD MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > SIDE GUARD MOLDING A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718732 B C D E F G H EI WIIA0805E 1. Door sash cover 4. Sliding door rail cover 2. Double-faced adhesive tape 3. Side guard molding J SIDE GUARD MOLDING K Removal CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints. NOTE: Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape. 1. Heat side guard molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun. 2. Raise end of side guard molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of tape. Installation CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation. NOTE: On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200 or C-100 or equivalent. The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape. To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new double-faced tape to the molding. 1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F). 3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. 4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface. SLIDING DOOR RAIL COVER Revision: August 2007 EI-27 2008 Quest L M N O P SIDE GUARD MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove LH rear combination lamp. Refer to LT-102. Remove screw from slide door rail cover. Open sliding door and release the front clip. Close sliding door. Carefully pull off slide door rail cover releasing clips so as not to deform body sheet metal. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always discard clips and replace with new clips. DOOR SASH COVER Removal 1. 2. Open door and remove screw from top of door sash cover. Pull bottom of door sash cover rearward, then pull up off hooks. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-28 2008 Quest DOOR FINISHER < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR FINISHER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718733 FRONT DOOR B C D E F G H EI J K L WIIA1133E M 1. Pull cup bracket 2. Screw cover 3. Power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly 4. Memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly 5. Step light 6. Front door finisher 7. Front door release handle 8. Front corner cover A. Clip C101 B. Clip CS101 ⇐ Vehicle front N O Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Release clip and remove front corner cover. Remove screw cover then screw from cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. • Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly. • Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. Remove step light. • Release tab and disconnect harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 EI-29 2008 Quest P DOOR FINISHER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. • Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to BL-168. 7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR WIIA0807E 1. Sliding door garnish 2. Screw cover 3. Sliding door handle assembly 4. Sliding door finisher a. Clip C101 5. Lower seal ⇐ Vehicle front b. Metal clip Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove sliding door garnish. Remove sliding door finisher assembly. Remove sliding door handle screw covers and screws. Remove sliding door handle assembly. • Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to BL-171. Remove lower seal. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-30 2008 Quest BODY SIDE TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > BODY SIDE TRIM A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718734 LEFT SIDE B CAUTION: • Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. • When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. C D E F G H EI J K L M N O P WIIA1128E Revision: August 2007 EI-31 2008 Quest BODY SIDE TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Sliding door drip weatherstrip LH 2. Center pillar upper finisher LH 3. Sliding door welt 4. Assist grip end cap 5. 7. Center pillar lower finisher LH 8. Screw cover 6. Center pillar assist grip Sliding door open/close switch LH 9. Center pillar lower escutcheon LH 10. Rear kicking plate 11. 13. Cargo net hook 14. Back door close switch 12. Rear pillar upper finisher LH Power point cap 15. 16. Luggage side panel LH 17. 3rd row seat spring escutcheon RH Power point 18. Luggage side lower escutcheon LH 19. Rear kick escutcheon LH 20. Rear lower finisher assembly LH 21. Rear center pillar finisher LH 22. Finisher cover 23. Luggage side cup holder LH 24. Seat belt guide 25. Front kicking plate 26. Lower dash side finisher LH 27. Upper dash side finisher LH 28. Front pillar finisher LH 29. Front door welt A. Clip C101 ⇐ Vehicle front RIGHT SIDE AND REAR CAUTION: • Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes. • When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar garnish. Revision: August 2007 EI-32 2008 Quest BODY SIDE TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H EI J K L M N WIIA1129E 1. Roof finisher 2. Luggage room lamp 3. Rear center pillar finisher RH 4. Screw cover 5. Rear pillar upper finisher RH 6. Cargo net 7. Cup holder luggage side RH 8. Rear kick escutcheon RH 9. Rear lower finisher assembly RH 10. Luggage side lower escutcheon RH 11. Cargo net hook 12. 3rd row seat spring escutcheon RH 13. Gas leak check lid 14. Back door welt 15. Pull handle covers RH/LH 16. Back door pull handle 17. Release cover 18. Back door lower finisher 19. Back door upper finisher A. B. ⇐ Clip C101 Metal clip Vehicle front CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER Revision: August 2007 EI-33 2008 Quest O P BODY SIDE TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove seat belt anchor. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt". Remove front and rear kicking plates. Remove center pillar lower finisher. • Disconnect harness to power opening door switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt". Remove front and rear kicking plates. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". Remove cover and screws. Remove center pillar upper finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR CENTER PILLAR FINISHER Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove rear kicking plate. Remove rear kick escutcheon. Remove cargo net hook using Tool. Tool number 4. 5. 6. 7. : J-47126 Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finisher. Refer to SB-4, "Second Row Seat Belt". Remove cover and screws from rear center pillar finisher. Remove rear center pillar finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER) Removal 1. Remove front kicking plate. 2. Remove upper dash side finisher. 3. Remove lower dash side finisher. CAUTION: Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle and clip (as indicated with arrow), and disconnect clip. SIIA0810E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT PILLAR FINISHER Removal Revision: August 2007 EI-34 2008 Quest BODY SIDE TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove upper dash side finisher. Refer to "DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)". 3. Release clips and remove front pillar finisher. A Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY C Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove rear kicking plate. Remove rear kick escutcheon. Remove 3rd row seat spring escutcheon. Remove cargo net hooks using Tool. Tool number 6. D E : J-47126 F Release clips and remove rear lower finisher assembly. • For LH, disconnect harness connectors. G Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR PILLAR UPPER FINISHER H Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove rear kicking plate. Remove rear kick escutcheon. Remove cargo net hooks using Tool. Tool number 4. 5. 6. EI J : J-47126 Remove seat belt D rings from rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to SB-6, "Third Row Seat Belt". Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to "REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY". Remove screw covers and screws, then remove rear pillar upper finisher. • For LH, disconnect harness connectors. K Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. L BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER M Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove pull handle covers. Remove screws and remove back door pull handle. Release clips and remove back door lower finisher. N Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER Removal 1. 2. 3. P Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER". Disconnect top of door open/close link. Refer to BL-162. Release clips and remove back door upper finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-35 2008 Quest FLOOR TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718735 WIIA1138E 1. Floor mat hooks 2. Front carpet 3. Cargo organizer cover 4. Cargo organizer 5. Front floor spacer 6. Rear seat striker covers 7. Tailgate kicking plate 8. Rear carpet A. Clip C103 ⇐ Vehicle front REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31. Remove front seats. Refer to SE-75. Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-88. Remove 3rd row rear seat assembly. Refer to SE-88. Remove kicking plates. Refer to EI-31. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3. Remove rear seat striker covers. Remove tailgate kicking plate. Remove front carpet. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet. Remove rear carpet. Remove front floor spacer. Remove cargo organizer cover. INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 EI-36 2008 Quest FLOOR TRIM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EI-37 2008 Quest HEADLINING < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEADLINING Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718736 Without Sunroof WIIA1154E 1. Rear roof console bracket 2. Front roof console bracket 3. Assist grip bracket 4. Assist grip 5. Rear audio control assembly 6. Air vent grille Sun visor assembly RH 7. Headlining 8. Sun visor holder 9. 10. Lens 11. Front roof console assembly 12. Sun visor assembly LH 13. Rear roof console assembly 14. Interior lamp assembly 15. Rear air control rear 16. Coat hanger A. ⇐ Revision: August 2007 Clip C103 EI-38 Vehicle front 2008 Quest HEADLINING < SERVICE INFORMATION > With Sunroof A B C D E F G H EI J K L M N O WIIA1153E P 1. Sunshade 2. Coat hanger 3. Assist grip 4. Assist grip bracket 5. Front roof console bracket 6. Sun visor assembly RH 7. Sun visor holder 8. Rear audio control assembly 9. Lens 10. Front roof console assembly 11. Sun visor assembly LH 12. Storage bin assembly, front 13. Front storage bin door 14. Sunroof welt 15. 16. Lamp assembly 17. Eyeball lamps 18. Air vent grille Revision: August 2007 EI-39 Rear roof console assembly 2008 Quest HEADLINING < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Storage bin assembly, center 20. Center storage bin door 21. Center sunglass bin 22. Rear storage bin door 23. Rear storage bin assembly 24. Rear roof console lower bracket 25. Rear air control 26. Headlining 27. Rear roof console upper bracket 28. Rear roof console front bracket A. ⇐ Clip C103 Vehicle front REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Disconnect both negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least 3 minutes. Remove sun visor assemblies. • Disconnect harness from each sun visor assembly. Remove sun visor holders. Remove front roof console assembly. • Disconnect harnesses from sunroof switch assembly. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped). Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation". Remove front pillar finishers. Refer toEI-31. Remove front kicking plates and door welts. Refer toEI-31. Remove center pillar assist grips. Refer to EI-31. Remove assist grips from headlining. Remove rear kicking plates and door welts. Refer toEI-31. Remove center pillar seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3. Remove center pillar lower finishers. Refer to EI-31. • Disconnect harness from door open/close switch. Remove center pillar lower then center pillar upper finishers. Refer to EI-31. Remove tailgate kicking plate. Refer to EI-36. Remove rear lower finisher assemblies RH/LH. Refer to EI-31. Remove roof finisher. refer to EI-31. Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finishers and rear upper finishers. Refer to SB-3. Remove front pillar upper finishers. Refer to EI-31. Release clips from the rear, then remove rear roof console assembly (if equipped). • Disconnect harness from rear roof console assembly. Remove lower rear console bracket. Remove rear audio control assembly (if equipped). • Disconnect harness from audio control. Remove rear air control assembly (if equipped). • Disconnect harnesses from rear air control assembly. Disconnect rear washer hose from headlining. Remove headlining. Remove the front roof console bracket. Remove rear roof console front and upper brackets. Remove assist grip brackets from roof. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EI-40 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION EM ENGINE MECHANICAL A EM C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Drain Coolant ..................................... 3 Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ................. 3 Precaution for Removal and Disassembly ................ 3 Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replacement .......................................................................... 3 Precaution for Assembly and Installation .................. 3 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening .......................... 4 Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4 PREPARATION ................................................... 6 Special Service Tool ................................................. 6 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 8 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................10 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST ........................................................ 25 F Removal and Installation .........................................25 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ......................... 29 G Removal and Installation .........................................29 IGNITION COIL ................................................. 35 H Removal and Installation .........................................35 SPARK PLUG ................................................... 36 Removal and Installation .........................................36 I FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ................ 38 Removal and Installation .........................................38 J ROCKER COVER ............................................. 41 Removal and Installation .........................................41 K FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE ......................... 43 Removal and Installation .........................................43 L NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise ..................... 10 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom ....................................................... 10 TIMING CHAIN .................................................. 54 CAMSHAFT ....................................................... 76 M DRIVE BELTS ....................................................12 Removal and Installation .........................................76 Inspection After Installation .....................................84 Valve Clearance ......................................................85 N Checking Drive Belts ............................................... 12 Tension Adjustment ................................................ 12 Removal and Installation ......................................... 14 Removal and Installation .........................................54 OIL SEAL .......................................................... 90 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ........................15 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ..............90 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ..............90 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal ...............92 O CYLINDER HEAD ............................................. 94 P Removal and Installation ......................................... 15 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR ...................17 Removal and Installation ......................................... 17 On-Vehicle Service ..................................................94 Removal and Installation .........................................95 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 103 Inspection After Disassembly ................................ 104 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ....................21 Removal and Installation ......................................... 21 INTAKE MANIFOLD ...........................................23 Removal and Installation ......................................... 23 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 110 Removal and Installation ....................................... 110 Revision: August 2007 EM-1 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK ......................................... 116 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................116 How to Select Piston and Bearing .........................127 Inspection After Disassembly ................................131 Revision: August 2007 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 142 Standard and Limit ................................................ 142 EM-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" EM INFOID:0000000001717763 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Drain Coolant INFOID:0000000001717764 C D E F G H • Drain coolant when engine is cooled. Precaution for Disconnecting Fuel Piping INFOID:0000000001717765 • Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. • Release fuel pressure before disassembly. • After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precaution for Removal and Disassembly J INFOID:0000000001717766 K • When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations. • Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. • Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. • Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. • When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used where noted in the step. Precaution for Inspection, Repair and Replacement I INFOID:0000000001717767 L M N • Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precaution for Assembly and Installation O INFOID:0000000001717768 • Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification. • When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, do exactly as specified. • Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. • Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check oil or coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. • Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Revision: August 2007 EM-3 2008 Quest P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Release air within route after draining coolant. • Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. • After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage. Parts Requiring Angular Tightening • • • • INFOID:0000000001717769 Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts: Cylinder head bolts Main bearing cap bolts Connecting rod cap nuts Crankshaft pulley bolt Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil. Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000001717770 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING • After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. • In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the Tool (1) where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Using a scraper, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface. • Remove the sealant completely from the groove of the gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the gasket application surface and the mating surface and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials. Attach the sealant tube to the tube presser. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42. PBIC0003E 4. Apply the sealant using Tool without breaks to the specified location. Tool number : WS39930000 ( — ) • If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. • As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. If specified, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of this manual. • Within five minutes of the sealant application, install the mating component. • If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. Revision: August 2007 EM-4 WBIA0567E 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Do not retighten after the installation. • After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11. A EM C SEM159F CAUTION: Follow all specific instructions in this manual. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-5 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717771 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-47242) Engine support table Engine and transmission assembly removal WBIA0658E Disassembling valve mechanism Part (1) is a component of KV10116200 (J26336-B), but Part (2) is not. KV10116200 (J-26336-B) Valve spring compressor 1 KV10115900 (J-26336-20) Attachment 2 KV1019230 ( — ) PBIC1650E Removing valve oil seal KV10107902 (J-38959) Valve oil seal puller S-NT011 (J-39386) Valve oil seal drift Installing valve oil seal NT024 Installing rear main seal KV991J0120 (J-47128) Seal installer LBIA0452E Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore EM03470000 (J-8037) Piston ring compressor NT044 Revision: August 2007 EM-6 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST16610001 (J-23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing crankshaft pilot bushing A EM C NT045 Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter D E F NT046 Pressing the tube of liquid gasket WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser G H NT052 Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head, etc. KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Angle wrench I J NT014 K Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) Unit: mm (in) KV991J0050 (J-44626) Air fuel sensor Socket L M LBIA0444E Loosening or tightening rear heated oxygen sensor a: 22 (0.87) Unit: mm (in) KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench N O NT636 P Revision: August 2007 EM-7 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10117700 (J-44716) Ring gear stopper Removing and installing crankshaft pulley NT822 Disconnecting fuel tube quick disconnect connectors in engine compartment — (J-45488) Quick connector release PBIC0198E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717772 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (BT-3373-F) Belt tension gauge Checking drive belt tension AMA126 (J-24239-01) Cylinder head bolt wrench Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt a: 13 (0.51) dia. b: 12 (0.47) c: 10 (0.39) Unit: mm (in) NT583 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug NT047 Revision: August 2007 EM-8 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions A EM C NT048 Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring D E NT030 Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a = 9.5 (0.374) dia. b = 5.5 (0.217) Unit: mm (in) F G H NT015 Valve guide reamer Reaming valve guide 1 or hole for oversize valve guide 2 Intake & Exhaust: d1 = 6.0 (0.236) dia. d2 = 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) Unit: mm (in) I J NT016 Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a = (J-43897-18) 18 mm (0.71 in) for zirconia heated oxygen sensor b = (J-43897-12) 12 mm (0.47 in) for titania heated oxygen sensor (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner L M AEM488 Lubricating heated oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) K N O AEM489 P Revision: August 2007 EM-9 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting - Engine Noise INFOID:0000000001717773 SEM706G Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001717774 Locate the area where noise occurs. Confirm the type of noise. Revision: August 2007 EM-10 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Specify the operating condition of engine. 4. Check specified noise source. Repair or replace the identified part as necessary. A Operating condition of engine Location of noise Type of noise Top of engine Rocker cover Cylinder head Front of engine Timing chain cover Front of engine Reference page EM After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Ticking or clicking C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-85 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-76 D — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-94 E Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-116 Connecting rod bushing clearance (Small end) Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) EM-116 EM-116 Slap or knock Crankshaft pulley Cylinder block (Side of engine) Oil pan Source of noise Before warmup — Slap or rap A A — — — B B B B A Check item Knock A B C B B B Connecting rod bearing noise Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation Drive belts (Sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection B Drive belts (Slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation B Water pump noise Water pump operation Tapping or ticking A Squeaking or fizzing A Creaking A Squall Creak A: Closely related B: Related A A B B B — — A — C: Sometimes related B B B B B — A A C C F G H I J EM-54 K EM-12 L M CO-19 N —: Not related O P Revision: August 2007 EM-11 2008 Quest DRIVE BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts INFOID:0000000001717775 WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown. Tool number : BT-3373-F NOTE: • Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. • Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. CAUTION: WBIA0325E • When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. • Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness. PBIC1162E Belt Deflection and Tension Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Used belt Generator and air conditioner compressor Power steering oil pump Limit After adjustment 7 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) 11 (0.43) 7.3 - 8.0 (0.29 - 0.30) Applied pushing force New belt Tension adjustment* Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f) Used belt New belt Limit After adjustment 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 196 (20, 44) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points as shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. Tension Adjustment INFOID:0000000001717776 Belt description Belt tightening method for adjustment Power steering oil pump belt Adjusting bolt on power steering oil pump Generator and air conditioner compressor belt Adjusting bolt on idler pulley bracket CAUTION: • When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for ″New belt″ to accommodate for insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves. Revision: August 2007 EM-12 2008 Quest DRIVE BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds ″Used belt limit″ adjust it to value for ″After adjustment″ of ″Used belt″. A • When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. EM • When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove. • Keep oil and water away from belt. • Do not twist or bend belt excessively. C GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT 1. 2. 3. Remove engine undercover. Loosen idler pulley lock nut ″A″ and adjust the belt by turning adjusting bolt ″B″. • For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". Tighten lock nut ″A″. Lock nut ″A″ 4. D E : 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) F Tighten adjusting bolt ″B″. Adjusting bolt ″B″ : 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb) G H I J WBIA0324E POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT K 1. 2. 3. L 4. 5. Remove engine undercover. Loosen adjusting bolt ″C″. Loosen power steering oil pump bolt ″D″. NOTE: Bolt head ″D″ is at the engine rear side. Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt ″E″. • For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". NOTE: Adjusting bolt ″E″ is loosened with counterclockwise rotation. Tighten adjusting bolt ″C″. Adjusting bolt ″C″ 6. M N O : 28.0 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) Tighten power steering oil pump bolt ″D″. P Power steering pump bolt ″D″ : 43.2 N·m (4.4 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) WBIA0324E Revision: August 2007 EM-13 2008 Quest DRIVE BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717777 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove engine undercover. Fully loosen each belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment". Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt. CAUTION: Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the belts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove. • Clean off any for oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove. • Adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment". Revision: August 2007 EM-14 2008 Quest AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717778 EM C D E F G H I J WBIA0500E Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube 4. Air cleaner case (upper) 5. Air cleaner filter 6. Air cleaner case (lower) 7. Air cleaner case bracket 8. Grommet 9. Resonator (in fender) 10. Fresh air duct 2. Mass air flow sensor 3. K 1. O-ring L 11. PCV hose REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the fresh air duct. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. Disconnect the PCV hose. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. • Do not shock it. • Do not disassemble it. • Do not touch ithe sensor. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EM-15 2008 Quest M N O P AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT < SERVICE INFORMATION > CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7. 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EM-16 LLIA0016E 2008 Quest INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717779 EM C D E F G H I J K L M N O P WBIA0592E 1. Electric throttle control actuator 2. Intake manifold collector (upper) 3. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve 4. Intake manifold collector (lower) 5. Power valve 6. VIAS control solenoid valve 7. Vacuum tank 8. Service port 9. Fuel hose Revision: August 2007 EM-17 2008 Quest INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Gasket 11. EGR temperature sensor 12. EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower)] 13. EGR volume control valve 14. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) 15. EGR volume control valve bracket 16. Intake manifold collector (upper) support bracket 17. Washers REMOVAL WARNING: • To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. • The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector (lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced. 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 3. Remove air cleaner case, (upper) mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". 4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to CO11, "Changing Engine Coolant". 5. Disconnect the following: • Power brake booster vacuum hose • Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector (upper) • Vacuum lines from the intake manifold collector (lower) and power valve • Fuel injector electrical connectors • PCV hose • Electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose • EGR temperature sensor electrical connector CAUTION: • Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 6. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector, (lower)] nuts. 7. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket from the back of the WBIA0339E intake manifold collector (upper). 8. Remove the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 9. Remove the VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 10. Remove the vacuum tank. 11. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper) support bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper) using power tool. 12. Loosen the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower) and gasket. WBIA0285E Revision: August 2007 EM-18 2008 Quest INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 13. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown and remove the electric throttle control actuator. CAUTION: • Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator. • Do not disassemble. A EM C SEM711G D 14. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown, using power tool and remove the intake manifold collector (upper). CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator, if installed. E F G SEM712G 15. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the order as shown and remove the power valve. 16. If necessary remove the following components: • Vacuum tank • VIAS control solenoid valve • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve H I J SEM714G K INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion • Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of intake manifold collector (lower). Limit L M : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) • If it exceeds the limit, replace the intake manifold collector (lower). N O PBIC1168E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows: 1. Perform the ″Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning″ when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-73, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". 2. Perform the ″Idle Air Volume Learning″ when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC73, "Idle Air Volume Learning". Revision: August 2007 EM-19 2008 Quest P INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If removed, install power valve bolts in the order as shown. Power valve bolts : 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) SEM714G • If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (upper) bolts : 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) SEM712G • If removed, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown. Install gasket with three protrusions facing down. Electric throttle control actuator bolts : 8.4 N·m (0.86 kg-m, 74 in-lb) SEM711G • Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (lower) bolts : 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) SEM713G Revision: August 2007 EM-20 2008 Quest EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717780 EM C D E F G H I WBIA0591E 1. Gasket 2. EGR temperature sensor 3. EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower)] 4. EGR volume control valve 5. EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) 6. EGR volume control valve bracket 7. Coolant lines 8. Washers REMOVAL J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-21 2008 Quest EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". 3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to CO11, "Changing Engine Coolant". CAUTION: Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 4. Disconnect the EGR temperature sensor electrical connector and bracket. 5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor. 6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve electrical connector. 7. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts at the intake manifold collector (lower). 8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts at the EGR volume control valve and remove the tube. 9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve. 10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as follows: a. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". b. Disconnect the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting. c. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1). d. Remove the RH heat shield. e. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting. 11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve. 12. Remove the EGR volume control valve bolts and the valve. WBIA0339E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten the RH heat shield bolts to specification. WBIA0341E Revision: August 2007 EM-22 2008 Quest INTAKE MANIFOLD < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE MANIFOLD A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717781 EM C D E F PBIC1169E 1. Intake manifold 2. G Gasket REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and Installation". 4. Loosen the intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold. H I J K L WBIA0043E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL M Surface Distortion Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of both the intake manifold and the intake manifold collector (lower). N Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) O P WBIA0052E Revision: August 2007 EM-23 2008 Quest INTAKE MANIFOLD < SERVICE INFORMATION > PBIC0870E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • If removed, install the stud bolts. Stud bolts : 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb) • Install intake manifold nuts and bolts inthe order in two steps as shown. Step 1 Step 2 : 7.4 N·m (0.75 kg-m, 65 in-lb) : 29 N·m (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) SEM950F Revision: August 2007 EM-24 2008 Quest EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST < SERVICE INFORMATION > EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001717782 EM C D E F G H I J K L M N O P WBIA0743E 1. Exhaust manifold (RH bank) Exhaust manifold (LH bank) 3. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) 4. Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 5. 2) Three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) 6. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) 7. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 9. Gasket Revision: August 2007 2. 8. EM-25 2008 Quest EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Three way catalyst supports ⇐ A. Stud B. Bolt Engine Front REMOVAL WARNING: • Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down. • When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". 1. Disconnect battery. Refer to SC-8, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time through the wheel well opening, using Tool. Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626) 8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO16, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-16, "Removal and Installation". 11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order as shown. • ⇐: Engine front WBIA0674E 12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors. • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts using power tool. Revision: August 2007 EM-26 2008 Quest EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. Remove the RH bank(1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. • ⇐: Engine front A EM C WBIA0675E D E F G WBIA0676E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL H Surface Distortion • Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces. I Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) J K PBIC1173E L INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • ⇐: Engine front • Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. CAUTION: • Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/ F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool numbers N O : J-43897-18 : J-43897-12 • Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage. Revision: August 2007 M EM-27 WBIA0677E 2008 Quest P EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) WBIA0678E • Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) WBIA0674E • Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts. WBIA0341E • Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts. Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts Revision: August 2007 : 8.3 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb) EM-28 2008 Quest OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717783 EM C D E F G H WBIA0744E 1. Front cover gasket 2. Upper oil pan 3. O-ring 4. Oil pressure switch 5. Relief valve 6. Oil cooler 7. Oil cooler connection 8. Oil filter 9. Gasket J 10. Oil strainer (connects to oil pump body) 11. Gasket (⇐ oil pan side) 12. Drain plug 13. Lower oil pan 14. Rear cover plate 15. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 16. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) shield 17. Rear oil seal retainer gasket ⇐ K Oil pan side L REMOVAL WARNING: • You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely cooled off. • When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. CAUTION: When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth. 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". 4. Remove the oil dipstick. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 7. Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". 8. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 9. Remove coolant pipe bolts. 10. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Revision: August 2007 I EM-29 2008 Quest M N O P OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor". 12. Remove oil cooler from the upper oil pan. Refer to LU-16, "Removal and Installation". 13. Remove the oil pressure switch, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan. 14. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8. 15. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-16, "Removal and Installation". 16. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two three way catalysts manifold from the exhaust manifolds using power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 17. Remove the rear cover plate from the upper oil pan. SEM717G 18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. WBIA0258E 19. Remove the lower oil pan. a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. • After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) • In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the Tool (1) where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flatbladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Revision: August 2007 EM-30 WBIA0566E 2008 Quest OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 20. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. A EM C SEM469G D 21. Remove the upper oil pan. a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool. E F G WBIA0503E b. c. Insert a suitable tool into the notch (1) of the upper oil pan as shown. Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the suitable tool up and down (2) as shown. H I J SEM155F K 22. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block and oil pump housing, use new O-rings for installation. L M N WBIA0327E O 23. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. 24. Remove the oil strainer. P WBIA0328E Revision: August 2007 EM-31 2008 Quest OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 25. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from the mating surfaces using a scraper. • Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block. • Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant. MEM108A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer of any foriegn material. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes after completeing instalation before refilling the engine with oil. 1. Install oil strainer refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". 2. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front cover gasket and the rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown. Refer to GI-42. SEM964E 3. Install a new front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. WBIA0328E 4. Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of the upper oil pan as shown. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. • Be sure the sealant is applied as shown, and the sealant is 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. • Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. SEM185FA Revision: August 2007 EM-32 2008 Quest OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EM C SEM159F D 5. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body. E F G WBIA0327E 6. Install the upper oil pan. • Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown refer to EM29, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. H I J PBIC1636E 7. Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". K L M N SEM469G 8. O Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. • Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. • Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. P SEM159F Revision: August 2007 EM-33 2008 Quest OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. WBIA0261E 10. Install rear plate cover refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. SEM717G INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". • Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. Revision: August 2007 EM-34 2008 Quest IGNITION COIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > IGNITION COIL A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717784 EM C D E F G H WBIA0344E 1. Ignition coil 4. Rocker cover (LH) 2. Spark plug 3. I Rocker cover (RH) J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the engine cover using power tool. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation". Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". Remove the six ignition coils. CAUTION: Do not shock it. K L M N O P WBIA0339E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 EM-35 2008 Quest SPARK PLUG < SERVICE INFORMATION > SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717785 WBIA0344E 1. Ignition coil 4. Rocker cover (LH) 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover (RH) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the engine cover, using power tool. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation". Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". Remove the six ignition coils. CAUTION: Do not shock them. WBIA0339E Revision: August 2007 EM-36 2008 Quest SPARK PLUG < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the six spark plugs using a suitable tool. • If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to MA-20, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)". A EM C SEM294A D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. • Do not drop or shock spark plug. E F G SMA773C H If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time I : less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds J Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) K L M SMA806CA N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: - Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures • The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: - Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution Revision: August 2007 EM-37 2008 Quest O P FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717786 WBIA0745E 1. Insulator 2. Fuel tube assembly 3. Quick connector cap 4. Clip 5. Fuel hose 6. Quick connector cap 7. O-ring 8. Fuel injector 9. Clip 10. Fuel damper retainer 11. Fuel damper 12. O-ring ⇐ Front A. Refer to EM-38 B. Installed condition C. Protrusion D. Alignment protrusion E. Clip mounting groove CAUTION: • Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so. • Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. • Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number Revision: August 2007 : — (J-45488) EM-38 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE < SERVICE INFORMATION > a. Remove quick connector cap. A EM C LBIA0090E D b. c. d. 4. 5. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: • Pull quick connector holding it at the ″A″ position, as WBIA0295E shown. • Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. • Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. • Avoid fire and sparks. • Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector Orings and use new O-rings for installation. If necessary, remove fuel damper bolts and the fuel dampers. Remove fuel damper O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. INSTALLATION 1. 2. If necessary, install fuel dampers and fuel damper bolts. Use new O-rings for installation. Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached. NOTE: • Carefully install O-ring. • Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil. • Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring sealing surfaces. Do not expand or twist O-rings. • Discard old clips; replace with new ones. • Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. • Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors. • Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of the fuel injectors. • After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube WBIA0287E assembly, check that the fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are fully engaged with the clips. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-39 2008 Quest FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts in the order as shown, in two steps: Fuel tube assembly bolts Step 1 : 10.1 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 89 in-lb) Step 2 : 22.0 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 4. a. b. c. d. 5. CAUTION: • After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. WBIA0255E Install the quick connector as follows: Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector and that there is no damage. Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel tube. Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard. Install the quick connector cap. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. LBIA0090E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. Revision: August 2007 EM-40 2008 Quest ROCKER COVER < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROCKER COVER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717787 EM C D E F G H WBIA0346E 1. PCV hose 2. Oil filler cap 3. Rocker cover (RH) 4. PCV valve 5. O-ring 6. Rocker cover gasket 7. Rocker cover (LH) I J REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the engine cover using power tool. If removing rocker cover (RH), disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube and air cleaner lid. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". 3. If removing rocker cover (Rh), remove the front cowl panel. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 4. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". 5. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". 6. If removing rocker cover (LH), disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor. 7. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation". 8. Position engine harness aside. 9. Disconnect PCV hoses. 10. Remove the engine oil dipstick. 11. Remove rocker covers bolts in the order as shown. K L M N O P WBIA0339E INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 EM-41 2008 Quest ROCKER COVER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to EM-94. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. • Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps in the order as shown. Rocker cover bolts Step 1 : 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 : 8.33 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 74 in-lb) WBIA0039E • Install engine cover using power tools. WBIA0339E Revision: August 2007 EM-42 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717788 EM C D E F G H I J K L M N O P WBIA0505E 1. Timing chain tensioner 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Timing chain (secondary) Revision: August 2007 EM-43 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Timing chain tensioner 14. IVT control valve cover - right 15. Chain tensioner cover 16. RH engine mounting bracket 17. Water hose clamp 18. Water pump cover 19. IVT control valve cover - left 20. Front oil seal 21. Crankshaft pulley 22. Idler pulley 23. Idler pulley bracket 24. Front timing chain case 25. Timing chain tension guide 26. Collared O-ring 27. Seal ring 28. O-ring NOTE: • This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and timing chain related parts without removing the upper oil pan from the vehicle. • When upper oil pan needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is removed or installed, remove upper and lower oil pans first. Then remove front timing chain case, timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and install in reverse order of removal. Refer to EM-54. • Refer to EM-54 for component parts location. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". Remove engine cover using power tool. Remove the upper air cleaner case, mass air flow sensor and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". Remove the engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". WBIA0339E 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Remove the IPDM E/R and position aside. Remove the bracket. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". Remove the front RH wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6. Remove the engine undercover. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. Remove the drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". Recover the A/C refridgerant and remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts. Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank with lines attached and position them aside. Refer to PS-21, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-44 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. Remove the lower oil pan. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". A 17. Remove the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation". 18. Disconnect the engine harness and position aside. 19. Remove the A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (ATC)or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC). EM 20. Support the engine and remove the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". C 21. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover using plastic hammer to tap (1) and slide (2) Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) D CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surface. E PBIC0846E F G H I WBIA0566E J 22. Loosen the IVT control cover bolts in the order as shown and remove the IVT control covers. NOTE: The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. 23. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation". 24. Remove the upper and lower intake manifold collectors. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". K L WBIA0260E M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-45 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 25. Remove the six ignition coils. 26. Remove the engine oil dipstick. WBIA0513E 27. If necessary, remove the rocker covers. Loosen the rocker covers bolts in the order as shown. NOTE: Necessary only when removing secondary timing chains. LBIA0078E 28. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. • Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. WBIA0169E Revision: August 2007 EM-46 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 29. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. A EM C SEM918G D b. Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown. • If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. E F G WBIA0681E H 30. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) I CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. J K WBIA0506E 31. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. b. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. L M N O EMQ0477D P Revision: August 2007 EM-47 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 32. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in the order as shown. Remove the lower oil pan. WBIA0258E 33. Remove the lower oil pan. a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. Tool number b. : KV10111100 (J-37228) • Be careful not to damage the mating surface. • Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. WBIA0566E 34. Loosen upper oil pan front bolts in the order as shown. WBIA0259E 35. 36. 37. a. Temporarily install lower oil pan. Support front of engine under oil pan using a jack. Remove the front timing chain case. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. WBIA0290E Revision: August 2007 EM-48 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. Insert the suitable tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case to pry (2) it loose as shown. A EM C SEM156F D c. Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. Tool number E : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: • Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. • After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. F G WBIA0566E 38. Remove the water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from the front timing chain case using Tool. Tool number H : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the mating surface. • Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. 39. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. 40. Remove timing chain and related parts if necessary. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". I J K L WBIA0680E M 41. Remove O-rings and seal rings from front and rear timing chain case. N 42. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. O P SEM428G INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 EM-49 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Install timing chain and related parts. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". 2. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length using suitable tool. NOTE: If removed during disassembly make sure dowel pins are installed correctly to insure proper assembly. PBIC2615E 3. Apply new engine oil to new oil seal and install it flush with front of mounting surface using a suitable tool. • Install new oil seal in the direction as shown. Suitable drift Outer diameter Inner diameter : 59 mm (2.32 in) : 49 mm (1.93 in) CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. 4. SEM715A Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. • Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. PBIC1133E Revision: August 2007 EM-50 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-11. A EM C PBIC1099E D 6. a. Install front timing chain case. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION: Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place. E F G PBIC1100E b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until the outer end becomes flush with surface using suitable tool. • Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. H I J PBIC1115E 7. K Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. L Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 – 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 8. M Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. • Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 – 22 : 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) N SEM730G O P Revision: August 2007 EM-51 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Install the upper oil pan front bolts in the order as shown. Upper oil pan front bolts : 17.2 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) PBIC1116E 10. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). WBIA0512E b. c. Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. SEM437G • Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control covers. • Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order as shown. Intake valve timing control cover bolts : 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) SEM728G 11. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover and the chain tensioner cover. Water pump cover bolts Chain tensioner cover bolts : 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb) : 11 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 97 in-lb) • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42. SEM744GA Revision: August 2007 EM-52 2008 Quest FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 12. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. • Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. • For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool. Step 1 Step 2 A : 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise Tool number EM C : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) 13. Remove Tool. Tool number D : KV10117700 (J-44716) E F WBIA0506E 14. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION G H Inspection for Leaks I The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. • Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. • Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. • Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. • Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. • Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. • Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. • After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. J K L M N Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Fuel Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage O P * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. Revision: August 2007 EM-53 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > TIMING CHAIN Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717789 WBIA0507E *Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". 1. Timing chain tensioner 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Timing chain (secondary) Revision: August 2007 EM-54 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Timing chain tensioner 14. IVT control valve cover - right 15. Chain tensioner cover 16. RH engine mounting bracket 17. Water hose clamp 18. Water pump cover 19. IVT control valve cover - left 20. Front oil seal 21. Crankshaft pulley 22. Idler pulley 23. Idler pulley bracket 24. Front timing chain case 25. Rear timing chain case 26. Timing chain tension guide 27. O-ring 28. Collared O-ring 29. Seal ring A EM CAUTION: • After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. • When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. • Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. • Before removing the upper oil pan, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). • Be careful not to damage sensor edges. • Do not spill engine oil or coolant on drive belts. NOTE: • This section describes procedures for removal/installation procedure of the front timing chain case and timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case, when oil pan (upper) needs to be removed/installed for engine overhaul, etc. • To remove/install front timing chain case, timing chain, and its related parts without removing oil pan (upper), refer to EM-43. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". Install engine slingers. Engine slinger bolts D E F G H REMOVAL 1. 2. C I : 28 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) J K WBIA0353E L M N O WBIA0354E 3. 4. 5. Remove idler pulley and bracket. Remove the upper and lower oil pans. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-55 P 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the chain tensioner cover and water pump cover using plastic hammer to tap (1) and slide (2) Tool. PBIC0846E Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surface. WBIA0566E 7. 8. 9. Remove the IVT control cover bolts in the order as shown and remove the IVT control covers. NOTE: The shaft in the cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the cover by pulling straight out until the cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation". Remove the intake manifold collectors (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". WBIA0260E 10. Remove the six spark plugs. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation". 11. Remove the rocker covers. Refer to EM-41, "Removal and Installation". 12. Disconnect the connectors and remove the bank 1 and bank 2 IVT control solenoid valves. • Discard the gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. WBIA0169E Revision: August 2007 EM-56 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 13. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. A EM C SEM918G D b. Check that intake and exhaust camshaft lobes on No. 1 cylinder (right bank of engine) are located as shown. • If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. E F G WBIA0681E H 14. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) I CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. J K WBIA0506E 15. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. b. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. L M N O EMQ0477D P Revision: August 2007 EM-57 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. Remove the front timing chain case. a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. WBIA0290E b. Insert the suitable tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case to pry (2) it loose as shown. SEM156F c. Use the Tool by tapping (1) and sliding (2) using a plastic hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: • Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. • After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. WBIA0566E 17. Remove the internal chain guide (1). • Timing chain tensioner (2) • Timing chain tensioner guide (3) • Slack guide (4) WBIA0682E Revision: August 2007 EM-58 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 18. Remove the timing chain tensioner (1) and slack guide (6). • Place paint marks on the timing chain and sprockets to indicate the correct position of the components for installation. a. Pull lever (4) down and release plunger stopper tab (2). Plunger stopper tab (2) can be pushed up to release [coaxial structure with lever (4)]. • ⇐: pull lever b. Insert stopper pin (3) into tensioner body hole to hold lever (4), and keep the tab (2) released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] (3) is used for a stopper pin as an example. c. Insert plunger (5) into tensioner body hole by pressing the slack guide (6). • ⇐: Press slack guide d. Keep the slack guide (6) pressed and hold it by pushing the stopper pin (3) through the lever hole and body hole as shown. e. Remove the timing chain tensioner installation bolts (7) and remove the timing chain tensioner (1). f. Remove slack guide installation bolt and the slack guide (6). A EM C D E F G WBIA0691E 19. Remove primary timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. CAUTION: After removing timing chain, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. 20. Attach a suitable stopper pin (1) to the RH (2) and LH (3) secondary timing chain tensioners. H I J K L WBIA0683E M 21. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts. • Apply paint to the timing chain and camshaft sprockets for alignment during installation. • Secure the hexagonal portion of the camshaft using a wrench to loosen the bolts as shown. N O P WBIA0172E 22. Remove the secondary timing chains (3) with camshaft sprockets. Revision: August 2007 EM-59 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Illustration shows RH (1) secondary timing chain (3), and side view (7) if needed. a. Rotate camshaft slightly, and loosen secondary timing chain (3) on secondary timing chain tensioner side. b. Insert metal or resin plate (5) [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into plunger (6) between secondary timing chain (3) and secondary timing chain tensioner plunger (6). Remove camshaft sprocket and secondary timing chain (3) with secondary timing chain removed from plunger (6) groove. • Intake camshaft sprocket is two-for-one structure of primary WBIA0684E and secondary sprockets. • Handle the intake sprockets as an assembly. CAUTION: • Secondary timing chain tensioner plunger (6) can move while stopper pin (4) is inserted in timing chain tensioner (2). Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal. • Avoid impact or dropping the intake sprockets. • Do not disassemble the intake sprockets (never loosen bolts A and B as shown). SEM734G 23. Loosen the No. 1 camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the order as shown and remove No. 1 camshaft brackets. LBIA0343E 24. Remove the timing chain tension guide. Revision: August 2007 EM-60 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 25. Remove the rear timing chain case. CAUTION: • Do not remove the plate metal covers for the oil passage. • After removing the chain case, do not apply any load to the case that might bend it. A EM C KBIA1307E D a. Loosen and remove the rear timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. E F G WBIA0685E b. Cut the sealant using Tool (A) and remove the rear timing chain case. Tool number H : KV10111100 (J-37228) I CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surface. J WBIA0686E 26. Remove the engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly. 27. Remove O-rings (3) on the RH (1) and LH (2) No. 1 camshaft bracket, cylinder head and cylinder block. K L M N WBIA0687E O P Revision: August 2007 EM-61 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > PBIC0788E 28. If necessary, remove the water pump. Refer to CO-19, "Removal and Installation". LBIA0361E 29. Remove the camshaft chain tensioners (for secondary timing chains). 30. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front and rear timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. SEM428G 31. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts. CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces. SEM161F Revision: August 2007 EM-62 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 32. Use a scraper to remove all the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and IVT control covers. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. A EM C WBIA0173E D 33. Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the camshaft No. 1 bracket mating surface using a scraper. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface. E F G SEM892E 34. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. H I J WBIA0680E Inspection after removal Check for cracks and any excessive wear at the roller links of the timing chain. Replace the timing chain as necessary. K L M N SEM928E O Installation NOTE: P Revision: August 2007 EM-63 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > The figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. WBIA0280E 1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (intake) 3. Mating mark (yellow link) 4. Mating mark (punched) 5. Secondary timing chain tensioner 6. Mating mark (gold link) 7. Secondary timing chain 8. Camshaft sprocket (exhaust) 9. Timing chain tension guide 10. Water pump 1. 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Primary timing chain 14. Slack guide 15. Primary timing chain tensioner 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners (3). Secondary timing chain tensioner bolts : 8.5 N·m (0.87 kg-m, 75 in-lb) • O-ring (4) • Stopper pin (5) WBIA0688E Revision: August 2007 EM-64 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Before installing No. 1 camshaft bracket, apply sealant to mating surface. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. • Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. • Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket". A EM C D E F G WBIA0509E 3. Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown. H Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 : 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 : 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb) I J SEM885EA K L M N SEM886EA 4. Install the engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly and gasket and coolant inlet housing. Engine coolant inlet and thermostat assembly bolts O : 9.8 N·m (1.00 kg-m, 87 in-lb) P Revision: August 2007 EM-65 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Install rear timing chain case as follows: a. Install new O-rings on cylinder block. PBIC0788E b. Install new O-rings (4) on RH (1) and LH (2) cylinder heads. • Secondary timing chain tensioner (3) • Stopper pin (5) WBIA0688E 6. If removed, install the water pump. Refer to CO-19, "Removal and Installation". LBIA0361E Revision: August 2007 EM-66 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to rear timing chain case as shown. A EM C D E F G H I WBIA0336E • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. • Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. 8. a. Align the rear timing chain case with the dowel pins (RH and LH) on the cylinder block and install the case. Make sure the O-rings stay in place during installation. Tighten the rear timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. There are two bolt lengths used. Follow the chart below for proper bolt length specifications. Bolt position 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 4, 5, 11 - 26 b. Bolt length 20 mm (0.79 in) 16 mm (0.63 in) K L M SEM735G After all bolts are initially tightened, retighten them to the specification in the order as shown. Rear timing chain case bolts 9. J N : 12.7 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) After installing rear timing chain case, check surface height difference between the rear timing chain case to cylinder block. Standard : -0.24 - 0.14 mm (-0.0094 - 0.0055 in) P • If not within standard, repeat above installation procedure. 10. Install the timing chain tension guide. Timing chain tension guide bolts Revision: August 2007 : 21.6 N·m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) EM-67 O 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Position the crankshaft so No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. • Make sure that the dowel pin hole, dowel pin and crankshaft key are located as shown. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): at cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side): at cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key: at cylinder head side of RH bank. CAUTION: Hole on small diameter side must be used for intake camshaft sprocket dowel pin. Do not misidentify (ignore big diameter side). KBIA1073E 12. Install the secondary timing chains and camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: Matching marks between the timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all matching mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. • Push the sleeve of the secondary chain tensioner and keep it pressed in with a stopper pin. SEM430G a. b. Align the intake (1) and exhaust (9) sprockets (stamped) matching marks (4), (5), (7) and (10) to the secondary timing chain (8) [gold link (2)] and install them. • Illustration shows RH (rear view) • Matching marks for the intake sprocket are on the back side of the secondary sprocket. • There are two types of matching marks, round (7) and (10) and oval (4) and (5) types. They should be used for the RH and LH banks, respectively. RH bank: use round type (7) and (10). LH (6) bank: use oval type (4) and (5). Align the dowel pin (3) and pin hole on the camshaft (1) the dowel pin groove (11) and dowel pin on the camshaft front end, and install them. • On the intake side, align the pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with the dowel pin (3) on the back side of the camshaft sprocket (1), and install them. • On the exhaust side, align the dowel pin on the camshaft front end with the dowel pin groove (11) on the camshaft sprocket (9), and install them. • Camshaft sprocket bolts must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of the dowel pins (3). Revision: August 2007 EM-68 WBIA0689E 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating marks during and after installation. To make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the sprocket teeth in advance with paint. A EM C SEM811G D 13. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts. • Secure the camshaft using a wrench at the hexagonal portion to tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts. E F G WBIA0172E 14. Pull the stopper pins (1) out from the secondary timing chain tensioners (2) and (3). H I J WBIA0683E 15. Install the crankshaft sprocket on the crankshaft. • Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face the front of the engine. K L M N SEM929E O P Revision: August 2007 EM-69 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. Install the primary timing chain. • Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the yellow link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as shown. • When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks. • During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. WBIA0510E 17. Install the internal chain guide. • Timing chain tensioner (2) • Timing chain tensioner guide (3) • Slack guide (4) SEM740G 18. Install the slack guide. • Do not overtighten the slack guide installation bolt. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when the installation bolt are tightened to specification. SEM741G Revision: August 2007 EM-70 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Install the timing chain tensioner (1) and slack guide (6). a. Install the timing chain tensioner (1) and install the timing chain tensioner installation bolts (7). b. Keep the slack guide (6) pressed and hold it by pushing the stopper pin (3) through the lever hole and body hole as shown. c. Insert plunger (5) into tensioner body hole by pressing the slack guide (6). • ⇐: Press slack guide d. Insert stopper pin (3) into tensioner body hole to hold lever (4), and keep the tab (2) released. An Allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] (3) is used for a stopper pin as an example. e. Pull lever (4) down and release plunger stopper tab (2). Plunger stopper tab (2) can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with lever (4)). • ⇐: pull lever • When installing the chain tensioner, push in the sleeve and keep it pressed in with the stopper pin. • Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of the chain tensioner. • After installation, pull out the stopper pin by pressing the slack guide. A EM C D E F G WBIA0691E 20. Reconfirm that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 21. Install new RH (1) and LH (2) O-rings (3) on the rear timing chain case. H I J K WBIA0690E L 22. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges. • Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. Suitable drift Outer diameter Inner diameter M : 59 mm (2.32 in) : 49 mm (1.93 in) N CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. SEM715A O P Revision: August 2007 EM-71 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case end face, using a suitable drift. • Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and seal lip is not inverted. PBIC0790E 23. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to MA-11. • Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. • If removed install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. PBIC1133E 24. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 – 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 25. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. • Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N·m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 – 22 : 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) Revision: August 2007 EM-72 SEM730G 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 26. After installing the front timing chain case, check the surface height difference between the following parts on the oil pan mounting surface. • If not within specification, repeat the installation procedure. Front timing chain case to rear timing chain case Front timing chain case to cylinder block A EM : (–0.14) - 0.14 mm [(– 0.0055) - 0.0055 in] : (–0.36) - (–0.10) mm [(– 0.0142) - (–0.0039) in] C SEM746G D 27. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). E F G WBIA0512E b. c. Install new seal rings on the IVT control covers. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control covers. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. H I J SEM437G • Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control covers. • Tighten the intake valve timing control cover bolts in the order as shown. K L M Intake valve timing control cover bolts : 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) N SEM728G 28. Apply liquid gasket and install the chain tensioner cover. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42. O P SEM744GA Revision: August 2007 EM-73 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 29. Install the RH engine mounting insulator, mount and bracket. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". 30. Install the rocker covers. Refer to EM-41, "Removal and Installation". 31. Install the IVT control solenoid valve bank 1 and bank 2. IVT control solenoid valve bolts : 11.3 N·m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) WBIA0169E 32. Install the six spark plugs in their original positions refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation". 33. Install the intake manifold collectors (upper and lower). Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". 34. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. • Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. • For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool. Step 1 Step 2 : 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) 35. Remove Tool. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) WBIA0506E 36. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 37. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. 38. Refill the engine with oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". CAUTION: • Wait at least 30 minutes for the Silicone RTV Sealant to set before filling the engine with fluids to avoid leaks. • Activate the fuel system. Check for any leaks when the system is repressurized and correct as necessary. • Start the engine and check all systems for leaks or improper operation. Correct as necessary. • After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure oil chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. Revision: August 2007 EM-74 2008 Quest TIMING CHAIN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". A • Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. • Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. EM • Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. • Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may C generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. • Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids includ- D ing engine oil and engine coolant. • Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. • After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the E specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items: Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Item Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage Fuel F G * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-75 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717790 WBIA0515E 1. Oil filler cap 2. Rocker cover (LH) 3. Camshaft bracket (LH) 4. Camshaft (INT) 5. PCV valve 6. Cylinder head (LH) 7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. Spark plug 9. Camshaft (EXH) 10. Tensioner sleeve 11. Tensioner spring 12. Secondary camshaft chain tensioner 13. 14. PCV hose 15. Gasket 17. Seal washer 18. Dowel pin IVT control solenoid valve 16. O-ring CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-76 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right and left bank) from cylinder head back side. CAUTION: • Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks. • Do not disassemble. • Do not allow any metal particles to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip. • Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism. A EM C KBIA1046E D 3. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. • Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. E F G WBIA0169E 4. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts. • Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. • Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the order as shown. H I J SEM856E K L M N SEM857E 5. Remove valve lifters. NOTE: Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation. O P Revision: August 2007 EM-77 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove camshaft RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioner (3) from cylinder head with the stopper pin (5) inserted. NOTE: Stopper pin (5) was installed when secondary timing chain was removed. • O-rings (4) WBIA0688E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Visual Check Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary. Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown. Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by hand, measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauges. • Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution. Camshaft Runout Standard : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) Limit : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) 4. PBIC0929E If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Lobe Height 1. 2. Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". If wear has reduced the lobe height below specifications, replace the camshaft. SEM549A Camshaft Journal Clearance Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal • Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown. Standard outer diameter, No.1 Standard outer diameter, No.2, 3, 4 : 25.935 - 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 in) : 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 in) SEM012A Revision: August 2007 EM-78 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket 1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to specified torque. Follow the "INSTALLATION" procedure. 2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter ″A″ of camshaft bearing. Standard inner diameter No. 1 Standard inner diameter No. 2, 3, 4 : 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in) : 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 in) A EM C PBIC1645E D E Calculation of Camshaft Journal to Bracket Clearance (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) – (outer diameter of camshaft journal) Standard No.1 Standard No. 2, 3, 4 Limit F : 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 in) : 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 in) G : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) • When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTICE: Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head assembly. I Camshaft End Play 1. 2. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation". Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure end play when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis) as shown. Standard Limit H J K : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) : 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) • If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. • If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head. L SEM864E M Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. 3. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout. Limit 4. N O : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. P PBIC0930E Valve Lifter Revision: August 2007 EM-79 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. KBIA0182E Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter • Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. JEM798G Valve Lifter Bore Diameter • Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of cylinder head. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly. SEM867E Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance • (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) – (outer diameter of valve lifter). Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from component mating surfaces using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces. NOTE: Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and threads. SEM161F Revision: August 2007 EM-80 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using suitable scraper. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface. A EM C SEM892E D 3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. • The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown. E F G SEM532G 4. Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners (3) on the cylinder heads. • O-rings (4) • Stopper pins (5) H I J WBIA0688E 5. 6. Install valve lifters. NOTE: Install them in original positions. K L Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. • Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange. M N O WBIA0516E P Revision: August 2007 EM-81 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Follow your identification marks (2) and (3) made during removal, or follow the identification marks (1) that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of the components. ⇐ Indicates engine front Bank RH (4) LH (5) INT/EXH Identification mark (1) Drill mark INT RE EXH Paint marks M1 (3) M2 (2) Yes Yes No RE No No Yes INT LH Yes Yes No EXH LH No No Yes WBIA0692E • Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock. LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock. KBIA1072E 7. Before installing No. 1 camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft bracket. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. WBIA0509E Revision: August 2007 EM-82 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. • Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket". A EM C D E F G SEM446G • Install remaining camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown. • If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or camshaft, check valve clearance according to the reference data. Refer to EM-85, "Valve Clearance". H I J SEM564G 8. K Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown. L Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 : 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 : 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb) M N SEM885EA O P SEM886EA Revision: August 2007 EM-83 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Standard : – 0.14 (– 0.0055 in) • If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket. EMQ0044D 10. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. WBIA0169E 11. If necessary, install camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.) 12. Install the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Inspection After Installation INFOID:0000000001717791 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE CAUTION: • Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". • Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-8. 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-76. 4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. End crank after checking. WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to protect the engine components and the vehicle. Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belt or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off PBIC2869E any splashed engine oil. • Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to LU-6. 5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check each oil groove for clogging. Revision: August 2007 EM-84 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to LU-6. 6. After inspection, install removed parts. Valve Clearance A INFOID:0000000001717792 EM CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to EM-35, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove the rocker covers. EM-41, "Removal and Installation". C D E SEM713A 4. F Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. • Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. G H I SEM918G J • Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. - RH cylinder head (1) - ⇐ Engine front K L M WBIA0681E N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-85 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Check only the valves as shown. Crank Position Valve No. 1 Valve No. 2 Valve No. 3 Valve No. 6 No. 1 TDC Intake Exhaust Exhaust Intake SEM893E • Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. • Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. Valve Clearance for Checking (cold) Intake : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) KBIA0185E 6. 7. Turn crankshaft 240°. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Revision: August 2007 EM-86 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Check only those valves as shown. A Crank Position Valve No. 2 Valve No. 3 Valve No. 4 Valve No. 5 No. 3 TDC Intake Intake Exhaust Exhaust EM C D E F G SEM894E 9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. H 11. Check only those valves as shown. I Crank Position Valve No. 1 Valve No. 4 Valve No. 5 Valve No. 6 No. 5 TDC Exhaust Intake Intake Exhaust J K L M N O SEM958E 12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. Follow the "VALVE ADJUSTING" procedure. VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: • Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). Revision: August 2007 EM-87 2008 Quest P CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. SEM754G 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: t = t1 + (C1 – C2 ) t = Valve lifter thickness to be replaced = Removed valve lifter thickness t1 C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: Intake : 0.30 mm (0.012 in)* Exhaust : 0.33 mm (0.013 in)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F) • Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). KBIA0119E Intake and Exhaust 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Stamp mark Thickness 788U 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) 840U 8.40 mm (0.3307 in) Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit" . CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, “U” and “N”, at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) Install the selected replacement valve lifter. Install the camshaft. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation". Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Revision: August 2007 EM-88 2008 Quest CAMSHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Valve Clearance Cold Hot* (reference data) Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in) A EM * Approximately 80°C (176°F) INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. • Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. • Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. • Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. • Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. • Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. • Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. • After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. • Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Working fluid Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage — Leakage — Fuel Exhaust gas C D E F G H I *Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-89 2008 Quest OIL SEAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal INFOID:0000000001717793 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove camshaft and valve lifter relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-76, "Removal and Installation". Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve from dropping inside cylinder. CAUTION: When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front timing chain case with the timing chain. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109230 ( — ) WBIA0578E 4. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) WBIA0489E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. Press in valve oil seal to height ″H″ using Tool to specified height. Tool number : — (J-39386) NOTE: Dimension ″H″: height measured before valve spring seat installation. Intake and exhaust 3. : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal WBIA0490E INFOID:0000000001717794 REMOVAL 1. Remove the following parts: • Engine undercover. • Drive belts. Refer to EM-12. • Radiator fan. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-90 2008 Quest OIL SEAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation". b. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. A : KV10117700 (J-44716) EM CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear when setting the Tool. C Tool number D WBIA0506E c. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. E d. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. F G H EMQ0477D 3. I Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case or crankshaft. J K L WBIA0680E INSTALLATION 1. M Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges. • Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. Suitable drift Outer diameter Inner diameter : 59 mm (2.32 in) : 49 mm (1.93 in) O CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. Revision: August 2007 N EM-91 P SEM715A 2008 Quest OIL SEAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case end face, using a suitable drift. • Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and seal lip is not inverted. PBIC0790E 2. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. • Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. • For the second step of angle tightening. Use Tool. Step 1 Step 2 : 44 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise Tool number 3. : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Remove Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) WBIA0506E 4. 5. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal INFOID:0000000003248490 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove oil pan (upper). Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove the transaxle. Refer to AT-224, "Removal". Remove drive plate. Remove rear oil seal retainer using Tool. Tool Number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage mating surface. • If rear oil retainer is removed, replace it with a new one SEM830E INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 EM-92 2008 Quest OIL SEAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove old liquid gasket material from mating surface of cylinder block and oil pan using a suitable scraper. A 2. Apply liquid gasket to the new rear oil seal retainer using suitable tool. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GIEM 42, "Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant". • Assembly should be completed within 5 minutes after coating. C D AWBIA0028ZZ 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly. • Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components. E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-93 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001717796 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to EM-36, "Removal and Installation". Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm SEM387C Standard Minimum Difference limit between cylinders 1,275 (13.0, 185) 981 (10.0, 142) 98 (1.0, 14) 9. a. b. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). • If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. • If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. • If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: - The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-78. Revision: August 2007 EM-94 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717797 A EM C D E F G H I J K WBIA0747E 1. Oil filler cap 2. Oil seal 3. Rocker cover 4. PCV hose 5. IVT control solenoid valve 6. PCV valve 7. Tensioner sleeve 8. Spring 9. Secondary timing chain tensioner L 10. Valve 11. Cylinder head 12. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 13. Spark plug 14. Valve spring seat 15. Valve spring 16. Valve spring retainer 17. Valve collet 18. Valve lifter 19. Camshaft (EXH) 20. Camshaft (INT) 21. Camshaft bracket 22. Spark plug tube 23. Gasket 24. O-ring 25. Seal washer 26. Dowel pin A. Refer to EM-41 B. M N Selectable parts Refer to EM-76 C. Follow the "INSTALLATION" procedure O REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation". Remove the timing chains. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three way catalysts (manifolds), exhaust manifold heat shields and RH exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-95 2008 Quest P CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts and the camshaft brackets. • Mark the camshaft brackets so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. • Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the order as shown. SEM856E SEM857E 5. 6. Remove the water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Removal and Installation". Remove the RH and LH cylinder head bolts, using power tool. • The bolts should be loosened gradually in three steps in the order as shown. SEM859E SEM860E 7. Remove cylinder heads and gaskets. • Discard the cylinder head gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. SEM863E Revision: August 2007 EM-96 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. If necessary, remove the LH exhaust manifold. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. A EM C WBIA0289E D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts • Inspect the cylinder head bolts before installing the cylinder heads. CAUTION: Cylinder head bolts are tightened by degree rotation tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts with new ones. F G Limit (d1 - d2) : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) • If a reduction in outer diameter appears in a position other than d2, use it as the d2 measuring point. • Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new engine oil for installation. H I SEM957E INSTALLATION 1. Before installing the rear timing chain case, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from mating surface using a scraper. • Also remove old sealant from mating surface of cylinder block. J K L SEM891E • Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt hole and thread. M N O P SEM161F Revision: August 2007 EM-97 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using a scraper. • Do not scratch the mating surface. SEM892E 3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. • The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown. SEM532G 4. Install new gaskets on the cylinder heads. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately or valves will strike piston heads. SEM445G 5. If necessary, install the LH exhaust manifold. Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. Exhaust manifold nuts : 30.9 N·m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft - lb) WBIA0278E 6. Install the cylinder heads on the cylinder block. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in five steps in the order as shown using Tool. Tool number Step a Step b Step c : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) : 98 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) : Loosen in the reverse order of tightening. : 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) SEM879EA Revision: August 2007 EM-98 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > Step d Step e : 90° clockwise : 90° clockwise A EM C D SEM877EA E F G H SEM878EA 7. 8. Install the water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Removal and Installation". Install secondary timing chain tensioners (3) on both RH (1) and LH (2) cylinder heads. • O-rings (4) • Stopper pin (5) I J K L WBIA0688E 9. Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. • Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange. M N O WBIA0516E Revision: August 2007 EM-99 2008 Quest P CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on the new camshaft components for proper placement. ⇐ Indicates engine front. Bank RH (4) LH (5) INT/EXH Identification mark Drill mark INT RE EXH Paint marks M1 (3) M2 (2) Yes Yes No RE No No Yes INT LH Yes Yes No EXH LH No No Yes WBIA0692E • Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock. KBIA1072E 10. Before installing No. 1 camshaft bracket, apply sealant to mating surface. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. WBIA0509E Revision: August 2007 EM-100 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. • Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket". A EM C D E F G SEM446G • Install No. 2 and 4 camshaft brackets in their original positions and directions. Align the stamp marks as shown. • If any part of the valve assembly or camshaft is replaced, check and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to EM-85, "Valve Clearance". H I J SEM564G 11. Tighten the camshaft brackets in four steps in the order as shown. NOTE: Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the camshaft bracket bolts with new engine oil before installation. K L M Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 7 - 10) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 6) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 : 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 : 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb) N SEM885EA O P Revision: August 2007 EM-101 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEM886EA 12. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of camshaft No. 1 bracket and cylinder head. Standard : –– 0.14 mm (–0.0055 in) NOTE: If measurement is outside the specific range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket. EMQ0044D 13. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. WBIA0169E 14. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block. SEM534G 15. Install RH (1) and LH (2) new O-rings (3) on the cylinder heads. WBIA0687E Revision: August 2007 EM-102 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. Install the RH exhaust manifold, three way catalysts (manifolds) and exhaust manifold heat shields. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation". 17. Install timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". 18. Install the intake manifold. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation". Disassembly and Assembly A EM INFOID:0000000001717798 C D E F G H I J K L M N O WBIA0693E 1. Cylinder head (right bank) 2. Spark plug 3. Valve lifter 4. Valve collet 5. Valve spring retainer 6. Valve spring 7. Valve oil seal 8. Valve guide 9. Valve seat (INT) 10. Valve (INT) Revision: August 2007 11. Valve (EXH) EM-103 12. Valve seat (EXH) 2008 Quest P CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 13. Cylinder head (left bank) 14. Intake manifold 15. Valve spring seat 16. Spark plug tube 17. Gaskets ⇐ Engine front CAUTION: • When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. • Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surface when installing cylinder head, camshaft sprocket, crankshaft pulley, and camshaft bracket. • Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up. DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove valve lifter. • Mark position for installation. Remove valve collet. • Compress valve spring using Tool. Remove valve collet with magnet driver. Tool numbers 3. 4. 5. Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring, and valve spring seat. WBIA0578E Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve, mark for assembly. • Inspect valve guide clearance before removal. Refer to EM-104, "Inspection After Disassembly". • Confirm installation point. Remove the valve oil seals using Tool. Tool number 6. 7. 8. 9. : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109230 ( — ) : KV10107902 (J-38959) If valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-104, "Inspection After Disassembly". If valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-104, "Inspection After Disassembly". Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench. Remove spark plug tube, as necessary. WBIA0489E • Using a pair of pliers, pull spark plug tube out of cylinder head. CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage cylinder head. • Once removed, a spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Do not remove it unless absolutely necessary. Inspection After Disassembly INFOID:0000000001717799 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION • Clean the surface of the cylinder head. Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of cylinder head surface. • Check along six positions as shown. Head surface distortion Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) • If beyond the specified limit, resurface or replace it. • The limit for cylinder head resurfacing is determined by the cylinder block resurfacing. SEM861E Revision: August 2007 EM-104 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > Resurfacing Limit Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is “A”. Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is “B”. The maximum limit : A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in) A EM • After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates freely by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be replaced. Nominal cylinder head height ″H″ C : 126.3 - 126.5 mm (4.972 - 4.980 in) D E PBIC0924E F VALVE DIMENSIONS Check dimensions of each valve, refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". G H I SEM188A VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE 1. J Measure valve deflection as shown. (Valve and valve guide mostly wear in this direction.) K Valve deflection limit (dial gauge reading) Intake : 0.24 mm (0.0094 in) Exhaust : 0.28 mm (0.0110 in) L M SEM178F 2. a. b. If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance. Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter. Check that clearance is within specification. N O Valve to valve guide clearance standard Intake : 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in) Exhaust : 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 - 0.0025 in) Valve to valve guide clearance limit Intake : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) Exhaust : 0.09 mm (0.0035 in) c. P SEM938C If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide. VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT Revision: August 2007 EM-105 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOTE: When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide. 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. WARNING: Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent getting burned. SEM008A 2. Drive out the valve guide with a press [under a 20 kn (2.2 US ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool. SEM931C 3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable reamer. Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts), intake and exhaust : 10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in) SEM932C 4. Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil and press new valve guide from camshaft side into the cylinder head to the dimensions as shown. WARNING: Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent getting burned. Projection ″L″ : 12.6 - 12.8 mm (0.496 - 0.504 in) SEM950E Revision: August 2007 EM-106 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Apply a reamer finish to the valve guide, using suitable reamer. A Intake and exhaust finished size : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in) EM C SEM932C D VALVE SEAT CONTACT • After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within specifications, perform this procedure. • Apply prussian blue onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the surface. • Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. • If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has N.G conditions even after the re-check, replace valve seat. E F G SBIA0322E VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT 1. 2. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. Ream cylinder head recess for service valve seat. Oversize Intake Exhaust 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. H I : 0.5 mm (0.020 in) : 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in) : 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in) J • Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center. SEM795A • This will enable valve seat to fit correctly. Heat cylinder head to 110° - 130°C (230° - 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. WARNING: Cylinder head is hot. Wear protective equipment to prevent getting burned. Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom. Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool to the specified dimensions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound. Check valve seating condition. Seat face angle “α” Contacting width “W” for intake Contacting width “W” for exhaust : 45° 25' - 46° 15' degrees/minutes (45.42° - 46.25° degree decimal) : 1.09 - 1.31 mm (0.043 - 0.052 in) : 1.29 - 1.51 mm (0.051 - 0.059 in) EM-107 L M N O P SEM892B Revision: August 2007 K 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance between the mounting surface of the cylinder head spring seat and the valve stem end. If the distance is shorter than specified, repeat step 5 to adjust it. If it is longer, replace the valve seat with a new one. Valve seat resurface limit “L” intake Valve seat resurface limit “L” exhaust : 41.07 - 41.67 mm (1.6169 - 1.6405 in) : 41.00 - 41.60 mm (1.6142 - 1.6378 in) SEM621F VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of spring and try square. Out-of-square limit : Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in) PBIC0080E VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD Check valve spring pressure at specified spring height. Standard Limit : 166 - 188 N (16.9 - 19.2 kg, 37.3 - 42.3 lb) at height 37.0 mm (1.457 in) : 378 - 426 N (38.6 - 43.5 kg, 85.0 - 95.8 lb) at height 27.8 mm (1.094 in) If it is not within specifications, replace the spring. SEM113 ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Install valve guide. Follow the "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" procedure. Install valve seat. Follow the "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" procedure. Install new valve spring seats and new valve oil seals using Tool. Tool number : (J-39386) • Install with valve oil seal drift to match dimension in illustration. NOTE: Dimension ″H″: Height measured before valve spring seat installation. Height ″H″ Intake and exhaust 4. : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) WBIA0490E Install the valves in their original position, as marked during disassembly. Revision: August 2007 EM-108 2008 Quest CYLINDER HEAD < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Install valve spring (uneven pitch type). • Install smaller pitch end (paint mark) to cylinder head side (valve spring seat side). 6. Install valve spring retainer. A EM Paint mark color Blue Violet C SEM085D D 7. Install valve collet. Tool numbers 8. : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109230 ( — ) E F • Compress valve spring using Tool and install valve collet. • Tap stem edge lightly with plastic hammer after installation to check its installed condition. Install valve lifter. G WBIA0578E 9. a. b. c. H Install spark plug tube as follows: Remove old liquid gasket from all cylinder head holes. Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from edge of spark plug tube press fit side. • Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI42. Press fit the spark plug tube so that it height ″H″ is as specified, using suitable tool. Standard press fit height ″H″ : 38.55 - 38.65 mm (1.5177 - 1.5217 in) I J KBIA1248E CAUTION: • When press fitting, take care not to deform spark plug tube. • After press fitting, wipe off liquid gasket protruding onto cylinder head upper face. 10. Install spark plug with spark plug wrench. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-109 2008 Quest ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717800 Engine mounting WBIA0746E 1. Rear engine mounting bracket 2. RH engine mounting insulator 3. RH engine mounting bracket 4. Front engine mounting bracket 5. Stopper 6. Front engine mounting insulator 7. LH transaxle mounting bracket 8. LH transaxle mounting insulator 9. Air guide ⇐ Front 10. Rear engine mounting insulator Revision: August 2007 Stamping indication EM-110 2008 Quest ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front suspension member mounting A EM C D E F G H I WBIA0379E 1. Cup 2. Member pin stay, RH 3. Member pin stay, LH WARNING: • Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels. • For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts as described in the NISSAN Parts Catalog. CAUTION: • Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool. • If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, follow the applicable procedures. • Use the correct supporting points for lifting and jacking. Refer to GI-37. • In removing the drive shafts, be careful not to damage any transaxle grease seals. • Before separating the engine and transaxle, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). • Do not damage the edge of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) or the ring gear teeth. J K L M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect battery positive and negative terminals. Drain coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Drain A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing A/T Fluid". Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect engine room harness from the PCM and the two connections at the RH strut tower. Disconnect engine harness ground connections. 6. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the fresh air intake tube and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube attached to air cleaner lid. Remove air cleaner case (lower). Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation". 8. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 9. Remove the battery and battery tray. Refer to SC-8, "Removal and Installation". 10. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". Revision: August 2007 EM-111 2008 Quest N O P ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11. Disconnect fuel hose quick connection at vehicle piping side. a. Remove connector cap from the fuel hose. b. Squeeze the two tabs and pull the fuel hose from the fuel line. NOTE: If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: • The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. • Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. • Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. • Prevent acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on the resin tube. • Do not bend or twist the tube during removal or installation. • Do not remove the remaining retainer on the tube. • When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one. • To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials entering, cover the ends of the fuel tubes with plastic bags or something similar. LBIA0370E PBIC0163E 12. Remove the radiator assembly, engine coolant reservoir tank, and system hoses. Refer to CO-16, "Removal and Installation". 13. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the back of the intake manifold collector. 14. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose. 15. Disconnect heater hoses at the water outlet and heater pipe. 16. Disconnect the two fusible link connectors at the battery positive terminal. 17. Disconnect two engine harness connectors below mass air flow sensor attached to the strut tower. 18. Disconnect the harness retainers and position the engine harness aside. 19. Remove the ground cable and ground wire from transaxle. 20. Disconnect the transaxle shift controls. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation". 21. Remove the drive belts. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". 22. Remove the front exhaust tube and hanger using power tools. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 23. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8. 24. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate the transverse link from the steering knuckle. 25. Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member. 26. Remove the bolts on the lower side of the steering gear. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". 27. Disconnect the front engine mount electrical connector. WEIA0033E Revision: August 2007 EM-112 2008 Quest ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 28. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power tool. A EM C SFA796B D 29. Disconnect power steering line brackets from rear engine mounting insulator and rear of lower intake manifold collector. 30. Remove engine oil cooler pipe bolts. 31. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 32. Remove A/C low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (ATC) or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC). 33. Remove A/C high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-168, "Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose" (ATC) or MTC-151, "Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose" (MTC). 34. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to ATC-164, "Removal and Installation for Compressor". 35. Disconnect transaxle breather hose. 36. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch. 37. Disconnect harness retainer from power steering oil pump bracket. 38. Remove the idler pulley and idler pulley bracket and power steering pump, without disconnecting the piping, from the engine and position and secure it aside. Refer to PS-21, "Removal and Installation" 39. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). 40. Remove the rear cover plate and bolts securing the torque converter to drive plate E F G H I J K L SEM717G M 41. 42. 43. a. b. 44. 45. 46. 47. Position a transmission jack under the engine/transaxle assembly. Remove the RH engine mounting insulator nuts and bolt. Remove the front suspension member and engine/transaxle assembly as follows: Remove the RH and LH member pin stay bolts. Remove the front suspension member nuts and cups and carefully lower the front suspension member and engine/transaxle assembly avoiding interference with the vehicle body. CAUTION: • Make sure to disconnect electrically controlled engine mounting insulator harness clips from the front suspension member prior to removal. • Before and during this procedure, always check if any harnesses are left connected. • Avoid any damage to, or any oil/grease smearing or spills onto the engine mounting insulators. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-15, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the electrical connectors, harness retainers and remove harnesses. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses and remove the ATF cooler. Refer to AT-220, "ATF Cooler". Remove the front and rear engine mount through bolts. Revision: August 2007 EM-113 2008 Quest N O P ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 48. Remove the LH transaxle mount bolts. 49. Raise the engine/transaxle and remove the front suspension member. 50. Remove the ATF cooler valve from the engine with the hoses attached. Refer to AT-220, "ATF Cooler". 51. Separate the engine and transaxle and mount the engine on a suitable engine stand. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transaxle to the engine, use the specified tightening torque in the numerical sequence as shown. Bolt No. 1 Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 2 3 4 5 74.5 (7.6, 55) 6 7 8 9 41.5 (4.2, 31) LBIA0355E • Install converter to drive plate bolts. Converter to drive plate bolts 5 A/T : 54 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb) NOTE: With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transaxle rotates freely without binding. • Install rear cover plate. Rear cover plate bolt : 6.91 N·m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb) • Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Crankshaft position sensor (POS) bolt : 9.6 N·m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) • Tighten the front suspension member nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". • Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation". • Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component". • Tighten the steering gear bolts to specification. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to GI-42. • Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. • Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. • Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. Revision: August 2007 EM-114 2008 Quest ENGINE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. • Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of Fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids includ- A ing engine oil and engine coolant. • Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. • After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specEM ified level, if necessary. • Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluids* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage — Leakage — Fuel Exhaust gas After engine stopped C D E *Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-115 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > CYLINDER BLOCK Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001717801 WBIA0552E 1. Rear oil seal retainer 2. Cylinder block 3. Knock sensor 4. Upper main bearing 5. Lower main bearing 6. Water drain plug (LH side) 7. Water connector (RH side) 8. Water drain plug (water pump side) 9. Main bearing cap 10. Main bearing beam 11. Crankshaft 12. Pilot converter 13. Drive plate with signal plate 14. 15. Oil ring set 16. Piston pin 17. Connecting rod bearing 19. Piston 20. Top ring Drive plate reinforcement 18. Connecting rod 21. Second ring 22. Cylinder block heater (Canada only) 23. Oil jet 24. Key 25. Snap ring 26. Baffle plate 27. Gasket 28. Thrust bearing 29. Gasket 30. O-ring 31. Connector protector cap CAUTION: • Apply new engine oil to parts as marked in illustrations before installation. • Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps in their proper order and direction. Revision: August 2007 EM-116 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When installing the connecting rod nuts, and main bearing cap bolts, apply new engine oil to the threads and mating surfaces • Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the signal plate teeth on the drive plate. A EM C D E F G H WBIA0356E I 1. Cylinder block 4. Connector protector cap 2. O-ring 3. Cylinder block heater J DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove the engine assembly. Refer to EM-110. Lift engine and mount it on Tool. • A commercial engine stand can be used. CAUTION: Use an engine stand that has a load capacity of approximately 220kg (441 lb) or more. NOTE: This example is an engine stand for holding at the transaxle mounting side with the drive plate removed. K L M N PBIC0085E 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the knock sensor. CAUTION: Carefully handle sensor avoiding shocking it. Drain the engine of all coolant and oil. Remove the lower and upper oil pans. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Remove oil pump. Refer to LU-12, "Removal and Installation". Remove the cylinder heads. Refer to EM-95, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-117 O P PBIC0810E 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9. Remove the driveplate. Secure the driveplate using Tool, and remove drive plate bolts. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) NOTE: Match mark the driveplate position to the crankshaft dowel pin prior to removal to assist in installation. • Loosen the bolts in diagonal order. CAUTION: • Do not disassemble drive plate. • Never place the drive plate with signal plate facing down. • When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it. • Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized. 10. Remove pilot converter using Tool. Tool number : ST16610001 (J-23907) WBIA0492E 11. Cut away liquid gasket using Tool and remove rear oil seal retainer. Refer to EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket". Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage mounting surface. • If rear oil seal retainer is removed, replace it with a new one. NOTE: Rear oil seal and retainer form a single part and are handled as an assembly. WBIA0491E 12. Remove baffle plate from main bearing beam. 13. Remove the piston and connecting rod assemblies. a. Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center. b. Remove the connecting rod cap. c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder head side. • Before removing the piston and connecting rod assembly, check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". PBIC0086E 14. Remove the connecting rod bearings. CAUTION: • When removing the connecting rod side bearings, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. Revision: August 2007 EM-118 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 15. Remove the piston rings from the piston. • Use a piston ring expander. • Before removing the piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly". CAUTION: • When removing the piston rings, be careful not to damage the piston. Do not expand the rings excessively. • Be careful to mark the rings if they are to be reused so they are installed in their original position. A EM C PBIC0087E D 16. Remove the piston from the connecting rod as follows. a. Remove the snap ring, using suitable snap ring pliers. E F G WBIA0553E b. Heat the pistons to 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F). H I J SEM965A c. Push out the piston pin using a suitable tool, with an outer diameter approximately 20 mm (0.8 in). K L M N WBIA0554E O P Revision: August 2007 EM-119 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 17. Loosen the main bearing cap bolts as shown and remove the main bearing beam, bearing caps and crankshaft. • Before loosening the main bearing cap bolts, measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly". SEM842E 18. Remove the oil jets. 19. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and main bearing caps. CAUTION: When removing them, note their direction and position. Keep them in the correct order for installation. PBIC0898E ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Blow out the coolant and oil passages and cylinder bore to remove any foreign materials. WARNING: Use goggles to protect your eyes. Apply liquid gasket and install each plug into the cylinder block. • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. Install the oil jets. • Insert the oil jet dowel pin into the cylinder block dowel pin hole, and tighten the oil jet bolts. Oil jet bolts : 27 N·m (2.8 kg-m, 20 ft-lb) PBIC0898E 4. a. b. Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings. Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the cylinder block and the main bearing cap. Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap. • Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside). • Install bearing with a projection on one end on cylinder block and bearing with a projection at center on cap. Align each projection with mating notch. PBIC0807E Revision: August 2007 EM-120 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Set the upper main bearings in their proper positions on the cylinder block. • Confirm the correct main bearings are used. Refer to EM-131, "Inspection After Disassembly". A EM C SEM175F D 6. Check specifications for the re-use of the main bearing cap bolts. • Measure d1 and d2 as shown. • For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area. • If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts for assembly. Limit (d1 - d2) E F : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) G SEM177F 7. a. b. c. After installing the crankshaft, lower main bearings, main bearing caps, main bearing beam, and bearing cap bolts. Make sure that the front marks on the main bearing beam faces the front of the engine. Prior to tightening all the bearing cap bolts, place the bearing beam in its proper position by shifting the crankshaft in the axial position. Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces of the bolts with new engine oil. H I J K SEM456G d. L Tighten the bearing cap bolts in two steps in the order as shown: Step 1 Step 2 : 35 N·m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) : 90° - 95° degrees clockwise M CAUTION: Measure the tighten angle with an angle wrench. Do not measure visually. Tool number N : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) O SEM851E P Revision: August 2007 EM-121 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > WBIA0493E e. After tightening the bearing cap bolts, make sure the crankshaft turns smoothly. 8. Using a dial indicator, measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and the connecting rods when the crankshaft is moved from front to rear. Standard Limit : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) • If beyond the limit, replace the thrust bearings and measure again. If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft. SEM852E 9. Install the rear oil seal retainer. • Apply sealant to rear oil seal retainer using Tool. Refer to EM4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket". Tool number : WS39930000 ( — ) • Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI42. Rear oil seal retainer bolts : 8.8 N·m (0.90 kg-m, 78 in-lb) CAUTION: Rear oil seal is replaced with the rear oil seal retainer and must be replaced as an assembly. PBIC0922E 10. Install the piston to the connecting rod. a. Install the snap ring into the pin-groove of the piston rear side using suitable tool. • Insert it fully into groove to install. PBIC0099E b. Install the piston to the connecting rod. Revision: August 2007 EM-122 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force [approx. 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F)]. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and through the connecting rod. A EM C SEM965A D • Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the oil holes and the cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown. E F G SEM838F c. Install the snap ring into the front of the piston pin-groove. • After installing, check that the connecting rod pivots smoothly on the pin. H I J WBIA0553E 11. Install the piston rings using a piston ring expander. • Install the top ring and the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. If the ring is not stamped it can face in either direction. CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the piston. • When the piston rings are not replaced, remount the rings in their original positions. K L M N PBIC0087E O P Revision: August 2007 EM-123 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When replacing the piston rings, those without punch marks can be installed either side up. SEM757G • Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark. PBIC0808E 12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap. • When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing surface (crankshaft side). Do not apply oil to the back surface (connecting rod and cap side), but thoroughly clean it. • When installing, align the connecting rod bearing protrusion with the notch of the connecting rod to install. • Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and on the corresponding bearing are aligned. WBIA0555E 13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly into the corresponding cylinder. • Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center. • Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. • Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install. • Install the piston using Tool with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine. Tool number WBIA0556E : EM03470000 (J-8037) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin and cylinder wall, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. Revision: August 2007 EM-124 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 14. Install the connecting rod cap. • Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cylinder cap for installation. • Install the piston connecting rod assembly and cap so that the front mark on the cap and piston are facing the front of the engine. • Lubricate the threads and seat surfaces with new engine oil. A EM C SEM457G D 15. Check the connecting rod cap bolts before reusing, then install in their original position in the connecting rod. The bolts should screw in smoothly by hand. • Measure the outer diameter of the connecting rod cap bolt as shown. E F Outer diameter ″d″ of the connecting rod bolt Standard : 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in) Limit : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) G SEM538G H 16. Tighten the connecting rod bolts in two steps: Connecting rod bolts Step 1 : 20 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 15 ft-lb) Step 2 : 90° - 95° degrees clockwise I CAUTION: Always use either an angle wrench or protractor. Avoid tightening based on visual check alone. Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) J SEM953E • Apply engine oil to the threads and seats of the connecting rod bolts. • After tightening the bolts, make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. • Check the connecting rod side clearance. If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and/or crankshaft. Revision: August 2007 EM-125 L M Connecting rod side clearance: Standard : 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in) Limit : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) 17. Install the baffle plate. 18. Install the knock sensor. • Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block mating surface and the back surface of the knock sensor. • Install the knock sensor with the connector facing the rear of the engine. • Do not tighten the knock sensor bolt while holding the connector. • Make sure that the knock sensor does not interfere with other parts. CAUTION: If any impact by dropping occurs to the knock sensor, replace it with new one. K N O P PBIC0810E 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Install the pilot converter using suitable tool. Outer diameter of drift Pilot converter : Approx. 33 mm (1.30 in) PBIC0899E • Install pilot converter as shown. WBIA0358E 20. Install the drive plate and reinforcement plate aligning the matchmark. CAUTION: • Ensure the dowel pin is installed in the crankshaft. • When installing the drive plate to crankshaft, be sure to correctly align crankshaft side dowel pin and drive plate side dowel pin hole. KBIA2494E • Install the driveplate and reinforcement plate in the direction shown. PBIC0910E 21. Secure the driveplate using Tool. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) • Tighten the driveplate bolts crosswise several times using a suitable tool. 22. Install the cylinder head. Refer to EM-95, "Removal and Installation". 23. Install the oil pump. Refer to LU-12, "Removal and Installation". 24. Install the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 EM-126 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 25. Install the upper and lower oil pans. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation". 26. Remove the engine from the stand and install the engine assembly into the vehicle. Refer to EM-110, A "Removal and Installation". 27. Assembly of the remaining parts is in the reverse order of disassembly. EM 28. Fill the engine with the specified oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes for the sealant to set-up before filling the engine with fluids and running it. How to Select Piston and Bearing INFOID:0000000001717802 DESCRIPTION D Selection points Between cylinder block and crankshaft C Selection parts Selection items Main bearing grade (bearing thickness) Main bearing Selection methods Determined by matching of cylinder block bearing housing grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal grade (outer diameter of journal) Between crankshaft and connecting rod Connecting rod bearing Connecting rod bearing grade (bearing thickness) Combining service grades for connecting rod big end inner diameter and crankshaft pin outer diameter determine connecting rod bearing selection. Between cylinder block and piston Piston and piston pin assembly (The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.) Piston grade (piston outer diameter) Piston grade = cylinder bore grade (inner diameter of bore) – – *Between piston and connecting rod E F G H I – * For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. • The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. • For reused or repair parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values or each selection table. • For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure. J K L HOW TO SELECT A PISTON When New Cylinder Block is Used • Check the cylinder bore grade (1, 2 or 3) on rear side of cylinder block, and select a piston of the same grade. • The piston is available with piston pin as a set for the service part. (Only 0 grade piston pin is available.) M N O SEM756G When Cylinder Block is Reused Revision: August 2007 EM-127 2008 Quest P CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Measure the cylinder block bore inner diameter. 2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the cylinder bore inner diameter of the "Piston Selection Table". 3. Select the piston of the same grade. PBIC0812E Piston Selection Table Unit: mm (in) Grade 1 2 (or no mark) 3 Inner diameter of cylinder bore 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 3.7602) 95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 3.7606 95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 3.7610) Outer diameter of piston 95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 3.7594) 95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 3.7598) 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 3.7602) NOTE: • The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. • The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no piston pin grades can be selected. (Only 0 grade is available.) • No grade mark is indicated on 2 grade piston. HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used Check pin diameter grade number (0, 1 or 2) stamped in front of crankshaft and select connecting rod bearing of same grade number. NOTE: There is no grading for connecting rod big end inner diameter. SEM452G When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. 2. 3. 4. Measure dimensions of the big end inner diameter of connecting rod and outer diameter of crankshaft pin individually. Confirm the big end inner diameter of connecting rod is within the standard value. Apply the measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Determine the grade of crankshaft pin diameter grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the crankshaft pin outer diameter of the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table Revision: August 2007 EM-128 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit: mm (in) Connecting rod big end inner diameter A 55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659) Crankshaft pin outer diameter Grade (Mark) – (No grade) 51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462) 0 Bearing grade No. STD 0 Bearing thickness range: 1.500 - 1.503 (0.00591 - 0.0592) Color: Black 51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460) 1 Bearing grade No. STD 1 Bearing thickness range: 1.503 - 1.506 (0.00592 - 0.0593) Color: Brown C 51.956 - 51.962 (2.0455 - 2.0457) 2 Bearing grade No. STD 2 Bearing thickness range: 1.506 - 1.509 (0.00593 - 0.0594) Color: Green D EM Undersize Bearings Usage Guide • When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings use undersize bearings. • When using undersize bearings measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. E F Bearing Undersize Table Unit: mm (in) Size 0.25 (0.0098) Thickness G 1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643) CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (all crankshaft pins). H I PBIC0813E HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARINGS J When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. "Main Bearing Selection Table" rows correspond to bearing housing grade on rear left side of cylinder block. K L M SEM756G 2. 3. Apply journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". Find sign (main bearing grade) at crossing of row and column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". N O P SEM452G When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused Revision: August 2007 EM-129 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Measure inner diameter of cylinder block main bearing housing and outer diameter of crankshaft journal. 2. Find measured dimension in ″Cylinder block bearing housing inner diameter″ row of "Main Bearing Selection Table". 3. Find the measured dimension in ″Crankshaft main journal diameter″ column in "Main Bearing Selection Table". 4. Select main bearing grade at the point where selected row and column intersect. Main Bearing Selection Table PBIC0814E Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals) Grade number Revision: August 2007 Thickness “T” mm (in) Width “W” mm (in) EM-130 Identification color (UPR/LWR) Remarks 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 0 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) Black 1 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) Brown 2 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) Green 3 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow 4 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue 5 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink 6 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple 7 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) White UPR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) LWR 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) UPR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) LWR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) UPR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) LWR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) UPR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) LWR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) UPR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) LWR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) UPR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) LWR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) UPR 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) LWR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) A Grade is the same for upper and lower bearings. C D Brown/Black 19.9 - 20.1 (0.783 - 0.791) EM Green/Brown E Yellow/Green F Blue/Yellow Grade is different for upper and lower bearings. G Pink/Blue H Purple/Pink White/Purple I Undersize Bearing Usage Guide • Use undersize bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. CAUTION: Keep fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersize bearing (all journals). • When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and grind journal until oil clearance falls within specification. J K L M PBIC0813E Bearing Undersize Table Unit: mm (in) Size 0.25 (0.0098) 2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843) O Inspection After Disassembly INFOID:0000000001717803 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY Revision: August 2007 N Thickness P EM-131 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Using a dial indicator, measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and the crankshaft arms when the crankshaft is moved from front to rear. Standard Limit : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) • If beyond the limit, replace the thrust bearings and measure again. If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft. SEM852E 1. CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE • Measure the side clearance between the connecting rod and crankshaft with a feeler gauge. Standard Limit : 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.0079 - 0.0138 in) : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) • If beyond the limit, replace the connecting rod and measure again. If still beyond the limit, replace the crankshaft. PBIC0815E 1. PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Inner Diameter of Piston Pin Hole • Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole ″dp″. Standard diameter ″dp″ Grade No. 0 : 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in) Grade No. 1 : 21.999 - 22.005 mm (0.8661 - 0.8663 in) AEM023 Outer Diameter of Piston Pin • Measure outer diameter of piston pin ″Dp″. Standard diameter ″Dp″ Grade No. 0 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) Grade No. 1 : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 - 0.8662 in) AEM024 Piston and Piston Pin Interference Fit Revision: August 2007 EM-132 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Standard Interference Fit = ″Dp″ – ″dp″ A Standard : 0.002 mm - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in) • If clearance is exceeds specification, replace piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each part. • When replacing piston/piston pin assembly, follow the "PISTONTO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE" procedure. EM C SEM838F D PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE • Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with feeler gauge. E Standard Side Clearance Top ring : 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 in) 2nd ring : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Oil ring : 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 in) F G Maximum Limit Top ring : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) 2nd ring : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Oil ring :— SEM024AA H • If out of specification, replace piston ring assembly. If clearance exceeds maximum limit with new rings, replace piston I PISTON RING END GAP • Check if inner diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • Insert piston ring until it is in the middle of the cylinder bore and measure the end gap. Standard Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Limit: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring J K : 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in) : 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 in) : 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 in) L M SEM599A : 0.54 mm (0.0213 in) : 0.80 mm (0.0315 in) : 0.95 mm (0.0374 in) N • If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. O CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION P Revision: August 2007 EM-133 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Bend Torsion : Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length : Limit 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length SEM038F • If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. SEM003F CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END) • Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod bearing housing big end inner diameter using an inside micrometer. Standard : 55.000 - 55.013 mm (2.1654 - 2.1659 in) PBIC1641E CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Inner Diameter of Connecting Rod (Small End) • Measure inner diameter of piston pin bushing. Standard Grade No. 0 Grade No. 1 : 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in) : 22.006 - 22.012 mm (0.8664 - 0.8666 in) PBIC0120E Outer Diameter of Piston Pin Revision: August 2007 EM-134 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Measure outer diameter of piston pin. A Standard Grade No. 0 Grade No. 1 : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) : 21.995 - 22.001 mm (0.8659 -0.8662 in) EM C PBIC0117E D Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End) (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Outer diameter of piston pin) Standard Limit E : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) : 0.030 mm (0.0012 in) • If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. • If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, use the Table for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • If replacing the connecting rod assembly, refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". F G SEM457G H Factory installed parts grading: • Service parts apply only to grade 0. I Unit: mm (in) Grade 0 1 Piston pin bushing inner diameter* 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) 22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666) Piston pin outer diameter 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) 21.995 - 22. 001 (0.8659 - 0.8662) Piston pin hole diameter 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) J K SEM838F L *: After installing in connecting rod CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION • Remove any old gasket material on the cylinder block surface, and remove any oil, scale, carbon, or other contamination using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket flakes to enter the oil or coolant passages. • Measure the distortion on the block upper face at different points in six directions. Distortion limit M N O : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) SEM123C • If out of specification, resurface the cylinder block. The allowable amount of resurfacing is dependent on the amount of any cylinder head resurfacing. The resurfacing limit is [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] + [amount of cylinder head resurfacing] = 0.2 mm (0.008 in). Cylinder block height : 214.95 - 215.05 mm (8.4626 - 8.4665 in) INNER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING HOUSING Revision: August 2007 EM-135 2008 Quest P CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. • Using a bore gauge, measure the inner diameter of the main bearing housing. Standard : 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in) • If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly. NOTE: These components cannot be replaced individually, since they were processed together. PBIC1643E PISTON-TO-CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE 1. Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper. The X axis is in the longitudinal direction of the engine. Cylinder bore inner diameter Grade No. Standard inner diameter No. 1 95.500 - 95.510 mm (3.7598 - 3.7602 in) No. 2 95.510 - 95.520 mm (3.7602 - 3.7606 in) No. 3 95.520 - 95.530 mm (3.7606 - 3.7610 in) Wear limit 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) SEM843E If it exceeds the limit, re bore all cylinders. Replace cylinder block if necessary. Out-of-round (Difference between, X - Y) Taper (Difference between, C - A) : less than 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) : less than 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) SEM321AA 2. Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone it. • If both cylinder block and piston are replaced with new ones, select piston of the same grade number punched on cylinder block rear position. These numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals. SEM756G Revision: August 2007 EM-136 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Measure piston skirt diameter. A Piston diameter “A” Measuring point “a” (distance from the top) : Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". : 41.0 mm (1.614 in) EM C SEM258C D 4. Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification. Piston-to-bore clearance at “B” : 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in) E • The piston-to-bore clearance is measured at the ″B″ level in the cylinder as shown. F G SEM321AA 5. 6. Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder wear. • Oversize pistons are available for service. • If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston ring. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter ″A″. Rebored size calculation where, D A B C :D=A+B−C H I J : Bored diameter : Piston diameter as measured : Piston-to-bore clearance : Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) K L 7. Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted after boring. 8. Cut cylinder bores. • When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. • Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time. 9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. 10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. • Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. M N O OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL P Revision: August 2007 EM-137 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Measure outer diameter of crankshaft journals. Follow the "OUT-OFROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT" procedure. PBIC0127E OUTER DIAMETER OF CRANKSHAFT PIN Measure outer diameter of crankshaft pin. Follow the "OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT" procedure. OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT • Check the crankshaft main and pin journals for scoring, wear, or cracks. • Measure the journals for taper and out-of-round. Standard Out-of-round (differ- : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) ence between, X - Y) Taper (difference : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) between, A - B) SEM316A CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT • Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on the both ends of the crankshaft. • Place a dial gauge straight up on the No. 3 journal. • While rotating the crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the dial gauge. Runout limit (total indicator reading) : less than 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) SEM346D OIL CLEARANCE OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING Method by Calculation 1. 2. Install the connecting rod bearing to the connecting rod and cap. Install the connecting rod cap to the connecting rod. Tighten to specification. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly". Revision: August 2007 EM-138 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Measure the inner diameter ″C″ of each connecting rod (big end) as shown. A EM C WBIA0335E D 4. 5. Measure the outer diameter ″Dp″ of each crankshaft pin journal. Calculate the connecting rod bearing clearance. Connecting rod bearing clearance = C - Dp Standard Limit 6. E : 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 in) : 0.070 mm (0.0028 in) F If the clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any bearing, grind the crankshaft journal and use undersized bearings. Refer to EM-127, "How to Select Piston and Bearing". G AEM034 Method of Using Plastigage • Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely. • Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. • Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-116 CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. • Remove the connecting rod cap and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. SEM142 NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is same as that described in "Method by Calculation". H I J K L OIL CLEARANCE OF MAIN BEARING Method by Calculation 1. 2. Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and bearing cap. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly". Calculate the main bearing clearance. (Oil clearance) = (Inner diameter of main bearing) - (Outer diameter of crankshaft journal) Standard Limit 3. : 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 in) : 0.065 mm (0.0026 in) P PBIC1644E Method of Using Plastigage EM-139 N O If the calculated clearance exceeds the specified limit, replace the bearings. Refer to EM-127, "How to Select Piston and Bearing". Revision: August 2007 M 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely. • Cut a Plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. • Install the main bearings and main bearing caps. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly". CAUTION: Never rotate the crankshaft. • Remove the main bearing caps and bearings, and using the scale on the Plastigage bag, measure the Plastigage width. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is same as that described in "Method by Calculation". SEM142 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING • When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly" for tightening procedure. Standard : There must be a crush height. • If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. SEM502G CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING • When the connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-116, "Disassembly and Assembly" for tightening procedure. Standard : There must be a crush height. • If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings. PBIC1646E OUTER DIAMETER OF MAIN BEARING CAP BOLTS Check specifications for the re-use of the main bearing cap bolts. • Measure d1 and d2 as shown. • For d2, select the minimum diameter in the measuring area. • If the difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolts for assembly. Limit (d1 - d2) : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) PBIC0911E OUTER DIAMETER OF CONNECTING ROD BOLTS Revision: August 2007 EM-140 2008 Quest CYLINDER BLOCK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Measure outer diameter d as shown. A Standard Limit : 7.90 - 8.00 mm (0.3110 - 0.3150 in) : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) EM • When the value of d exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner) replace the bolt with a new one. C PBIC0912E D DRIVE PLATE Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or damage. CAUTION: • The signal plate is built into the drive assembly. Be careful not to damage the signal plate, particularly the teeth. • Check the drive plate and signal plate for deformation or cracks. • Keep any magnetized objects away from the signal plate, particularly the teeth. E F G SEM760G OIL JET H • Check nozzle for deformation and damage. • Blow compressed air from nozzle, and check for clogs. • If it is not satisfied, clean or replace oil jet. I OIL JET RELIEF VALVE • Using a clean plastic stick, press check valve in oil jet relief valve. Make sure that valve moves smoothly with proper reaction force. • If it is not satisfied, replace oil jet relief valve. J K L EMU0468D M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-141 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit INFOID:0000000001717804 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement Displacement cm3 Bore and stroke V-6 3,498 (213.45) (cu in) mm (in) 95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Number of piston rings Compression 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 4 Compression ratio 10.0:1 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm Standard 1,275 (13.0, 185) Minimum 981 (10.0, 142) Differential limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 14) Cylinder number SEM713A Valve timing (IVTC - OFF) PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 240° 238° - 6° 64° 8° 52° DRIVE BELT Revision: August 2007 EM-142 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A EM C D E F G H WBIA0385E 1. Power steering oil pump 2. Idler pulley 3. Power steering oil pump 4. Crankshaft pulley 5. Air conditioner compressor 6. Generator Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Used belt Limit After adjustment Generator and air conditioner compressor 7 (0.28) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) Power steering oil pump 11 (0.43) 7.3 - 8.0 (0.29 - 0.31) Applied pushing force New belt I Tension adjustment* Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f) Used belt J New belt Limit After adjustment 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) K 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) L 196 (20, 44) 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) M — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. N INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Unit: mm (in) Item Surface distortion Limit Intake manifold collector 0.1 (0.004) Intake manifold 0.1 (0.004) Exhaust manifold 0.3 (0.012) O P SPARK PLUG Make NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Revision: August 2007 EM-143 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Cold type PLFR6A-11 Gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) CYLINDER HEAD Unit: mm (in) PBIC0924E Head surface distortion Nominal cylinder head height ″H″ Standard Limit — 0.1 (0.004) 126.3 - 126.5 (4.972 - 4.980) — VALVE Valve Dimensions Unit: mm (in) SEM188 Valve head diameter ″D″ Valve length ″L″ Valve stem diameter ″d″ Valve seat angle ″α″ degree/minute (degree decimal) Valve margin ″T″ Intake 37.0 - 37.3 (1.4567 - 1.4685) Exhaust 31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240) Intake 96.21 - 96.71 (3.7878 - 3.8075) Exhaust 93.74 - 94.24 (3.6905 - 3.7102) Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) Exhaust 5.945 - 5.960 (0.2341 - 0.2346) Intake 45°25′ - 46°75′ (45.42° - 46.25°) Exhaust Intake 1.15 - 1.45 (0.0453 - 0.0571) Exhaust 1.45 - 1.75 (0.0571 - 0.0689) Valve margin ″T″ limit More than 0.5 (0.020) Valve stem end surface grinding limit Less than 0.2 (0.008) Valve oil seal installation height 14.3 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) Valve Clearance Revision: August 2007 EM-144 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit: mm (in) Cold Hot* (reference data) Intake 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015) 0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017) A EM *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Valve Spring Free height Pressure C mm (in) 46.90 (1.8465) N (kg, lb) at height mm (in) Out-of-square Standard 166 - 188 (16.9 - 19.2, 37.3 - 42.3) at 37.0 (1.457) Limit 378 - 426 (38.6 - 43.5, 85.0 - 95.8) at 27.8 (1.094) mm (in) D Less than 2.0 (0.079) E Valve Lifter Unit: mm (in) Valve lifter outer diameter 33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381) Lifter lifter bore diameter 34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392) Clearance between lifter and lifter guide F 0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015) G Available Valve Lifter H I J SEM758G Revision: August 2007 K Identification Mark Thickness mm (in) 788U 7.88 (0.3102) 790U 7.90 (0.3110) 792U 7.92 (0.3118) 794U 7.94 (0.3126) 796U 7.96 (0.3134) 798U 7.98 (0.3142) 800U 8.00 (0.3150) 802U 8.02 (03.157) 804U 8.04 (0.3165) 806U 8.06 (0.3173) 808U 8.08 (0.3181) 810U 8.10 (0.3189) 812U 8.12 (0.3197) 814U 8.14 (0.3205) 816U 8.16 (0.3213) 818U 8.18 (0.3220) 820U 8.20 (0.3228) EM-145 L M N O P 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEM758G Identification Mark Thickness mm (in) 822U 8.22 (0.3236) 824U 8.24 (0.3244) 826U 8.26 (0.3252) 828U 8.28 (0.3260) 830U 8.30 (0.3268) 832U 8.32 (0.3276) 834U 8.34 (0.3283) 836U 8.36 (0.3291) 838U 8.38 (0.3299) 840U 8.40 (0.3307) Valve Guide Unit: mm (in) SEM950E Valve guide Outer diameter Valve guide Inner diameter (Finished size) Valve guide hole diameter Standard Service 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029) 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369) 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) Interference fit of valve guide Valve to valve guide clearance Valve deflection 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) Standard Limit Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) 0.08 (0.0031) Exhaust 0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) 0.09 (0.0035) Intake — 0.24 (0.0094) Exhaust — 0.28 (0.0110) Projection length “L” 12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504) Valve Seat Revision: August 2007 EM-146 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit: mm (in) A EM C WBIA0498E D E F G SEM621F Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Valve seat interference fit Valve seat outer diameter (d) Height (h) Service Intake 38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967) 38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164) Exhaust 32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683) 32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880) Intake 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044) Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038) Intake 38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005) 38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202) Exhaust 32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715) 32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912) Intake 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 5.05 - 5.15 (0.1988 - 0.2028) Exhaust 5.9 - 6.0 (0.232 - 0.236) 4.95 - 5.05 (0.1949 - 0.1988) Depth (H) Valve seat resurface limit (L) H Standard 41.07 - 41.67 (1.6169 - 1.6405) Exhaust 41.00 - 41.60 (1.6142 - 1.6378) Standard Limit No. 1 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) No. 2, 3, 4 0.035 - 0.076 (0.0014 - 0.0030) 0.15 (0.0059) O Inner diameter of camshaft bracket — Outer diameter of camshaft journal No. 1 25.935 - 25.955 (1.0211 - 1.0218) No. 2, 3, 4 23.445 - 23.465 (0.9230 - 0.9238) — Less than 0.02 (0.0008) 0.05 (0.0020) EM-147 M N No. 1 26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244) No. 2, 3, 4 23.500 - 23.521 (0.9252 - 0.9260) Revision: August 2007 K L Unit: mm (in) Camshaft runout [TIR*] J 5.9 - 6.1 (0.232 - 0.240) Intake CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Camshaft journal to bracket clearance I P 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] Camshaft end play — 0.15 (0.0059) 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) 0.24 (0.0094) *: Total indicator reading SEM671 Cam lobe height “A” Intake and exhaust 44.865 - 45.055 (1.7663 - 1.7738) Wear limit of cam lobe height 0.2 (0.008) CYLINDER BLOCK Unit: mm (in) SEM022EA Surface distortion Cylinder bore Main Bearing Housing Limit Inner diameter Inner Diameter 0.10 (0.0039) Standard Grade No. 1 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) Grade No. 2 95.510 - 95.520 (3.7602 - 3.7606) Grade No. 3 95.520 - 95.530 (3.7606 - 3.7610) Wear limit 0.20 (0.0079) Standard : 63.993 - 64.017 mm (2.5194 - 2.5203 in) Out-of-round (Difference between X - Y) Revision: August 2007 Less than 0.015 (0.0006) EM-148 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Taper (Difference between C - A) Main journal inner diameter grade (Without bearing) Less than 0.015 (0.0006) 63.993 - 63.994 (2.5194 - 2.5194) 63.994 - 63.995 (2.5194 - 2.5195) 63.995 - 63.996 (2.5195 - 2.5195) 63.996 - 63.997 (2.5195 - 2.5196) 63.997 - 63.998 (2.5196 - 2.5196) 63.998 - 63.999 (2.5196 - 2.5196) 63.999 - 64.000 (2.5196 - 2.5197) 64.000 - 64.001 (2.5197 - 2.5197) 64.001 - 64.002 (2.5197 - 2.5198) 64.002 - 64.003 (2.5198 - 2.5198) 64.003 - 64.004 (2.5198 - 2.5198) 64.004 - 64.005 (2.5198 - 2.5199) 64.005 - 64.006 (2.5199 - 2.5199) 64.006 - 64.007 (2.5199 - 2.5200) 64.007 - 64.008 (2.5200 - 2.5200) 64.008 - 64.009 (2.5200 - 2.5200) 64.009 - 64.010 (2.5200 - 2.5201) 64.010 - 64.011 (2.5201 - 2.5201) 64.011 - 64.012 (2.5201 - 2.5202) 64.012 - 64.013 (2.5202 - 2.5202) 64.013 - 64.014 (2.5202 - 2.5202) 64.014 - 64.015 (2.5202 - 2.5203) 64.015 - 64.016 (2.5203 - 2.5203) 64.016 - 64.017 (2.5203 - 2.5203) Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 A EM C D E F G PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN H Available Piston Unit: mm (in) I J K L SEM882E Piston skirt diameter “A” Standard Grade No. 1 95.480 - 95.490 (3.7590 - 3.7594) Grade No. 2 95.490 - 95.500 (3.7594 - 3.7598) Grade No. 3 95.500 - 95.510 (3.7598 - 3.7602) 0.20 (0.0079) oversize (service) 95.680 - 95.710 (3.7669 - 3.7681) “a” measuring point (distance from the top) Piston pin hole diameter 41.0 (1.614) N Grade No. 0 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) Grade No. 1 21.999 - 22.005 (0.8661 - 0.8663) Piston-to-bore clearance to cylinder block M 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) O Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Side clearance Standard Limit Top 0.045 - 0.080 (0.0018 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.1 (0.004) Oil ring 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0026 - 0.0053) — Revision: August 2007 EM-149 2008 Quest P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > End gap Top 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130) 0.54 (0.0213) 2nd 0.33 - 0.48 (0.0130 - 0.0189) 0.80 (0.0315) Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.50 (0.0079 - 0.0197) 0.95 (0.0374) Piston Pin Unit: mm (in) Piston pin outer diameter Grade No. 0 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) Grade No. 1 21.995 - 22.001 (0.8659 - 0.8662) Interference fit of piston pin to piston Piston pin to connecting rod bushing oil clearance 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Standard 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) Limit 0.030 (0.0012) CONNECTING ROD Unit: mm (in) Center distance 144.15 - 144.25 (5.6752 - 5.6791) Bend [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.30 (0.0118) Piston pin bushing inner diameter* Grade No. 0 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) Grade No. 1 22.006 - 22.012 (0.8664 - 0.8666) Connecting rod big end inner diameter Connecting rod side clearance 55.000 - 55.013 (2.1654 - 2.1659) Standard 0.20 - 0.35 (0.0079 - 0.0138) Limit 0.40 (0.0157) *: After installing in connecting rod CRANKSHAFT Revision: August 2007 EM-150 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit: mm (in) A EM C SEM645 Main journal dia. “Dm” grade Pin journal dia. “Dp” SEM715 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 59.975 - 59.974 (2.3612 - 2.3612) 59.974 - 59.973 (2.3612 - 2.3611) 59.973 - 59.972 (2.3611 - 2.3611) 59.972 - 59.971 (2.3611 - 2.3611) 59.971 - 59.970 (2.3611 - 2.3610) 59.970 - 59.969 (2.3610 - 2.3610) 59.969 - 59.968 (2.3610 - 2.3609) 59.968 - 59.967 (2.3609 - 2.3609) 59.967 - 59.966 (2.3609 - 2.3609) 59.966 - 59.965 (2.3609 - 2.3608) 59.965 - 59.964 (2.3608 - 2.3608) 59.964 - 59.963 (2.3608 - 2.3607) 59.963 - 59.962 (2.3607 - 2.3607) 59.962 - 59.961 (2.3607 - 2.3607) 59.961 - 59.960 (2.3607 - 2.3606) 59.960 - 59.959 (2.3606 - 2.3606) 59.959 - 59.958 (2.3606 - 2.3605) 59.958 - 59.957 (2.3605 - 2.3605) 59.957 - 59.956 (2.3605 - 2.3605) 59.956 - 59.955 (2.3605 - 2.3604) 59.955 - 59.954 (2.3604 - 2.3604) 59.954 - 59.953 (2.3604 - 2.3603) 59.953 - 59.952 (2.3603 - 2.3603) 59.952 - 59.951 (2.3603 - 2.3603) Grade No. 0 51.968 - 51.974 (2.0460 - 2.0462) Grade No. 1 51.962 - 51.968 (2.0457 - 2.0460) Grade No. 2 51.956 - 51.962 (2.0445 - 2.0457) Center distance “r” Standard Less than 0.002 (0.0001) Taper (Difference between, A B) Standard Less than 0.002 (0.0001) Runout [TIR*] Limit Less than 0.10 (0.0039) End play E F G H I J K L 40.36 - 40.44 (1.5890 - 1.5921) Out-of-round (Difference between, X - Y) D M Standard N 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Limit 0.30 (0.0118) O *: Total indicator reading AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING P Revision: August 2007 EM-151 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEM175F Grade number Thickness “T” mm (in) Width “W” mm (in) Identification color (UPR/LWR) 0 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) Black 1 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) Brown 2 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) Green 3 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Yellow 4 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Blue 5 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) Pink 6 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Purple 7 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) White 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 UPR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) LWR 2.000 - 2.003 (0.0787 - 0.0789) UPR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) LWR 2.003 - 2.006 (0.0789 - 0.0790) UPR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) LWR 2.006 - 2.009 (0.0790 - 0.0791) UPR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) LWR 2.009 - 2.012 (0.0791 - 0.0792) UPR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) LWR 2.012 - 2.015 (0.0792 - 0.0793) UPR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) LWR 2.015 - 2.018 (0.0793 - 0.0794) UPR 2.021 - 2.024 (0.0796 - 0.0797) LWR 2.018 - 2.021 (0.0794 - 0.0796) Remarks Grade is the same for upper and lower bearings. Brown/Black 19.9 - 20.1 (0.783 - 0.791) Green/Brown Yellow/Green Blue/Yellow Grade is different for upper and lower bearings. Pink/Blue Purple/Pink White/Purple Undersize Unit: mm (in) 0.25 (0.0098) Thickness Main journal diameter “Dm” 2.132 - 2.140 (0.0839 - 0.0843) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. CONNECTING ROD BEARING Grade number Thickness “T” mm (in) Identification color (mark) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Black 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Brown 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Green Revision: August 2007 EM-152 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Undersize Unit: mm (in) 0.25 (0.0098) Thickness Crank pin journal diameter “Dp” 1.626 - 1.634 (0.0640 - 0.0643) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. A EM BEARING CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) Main bearing clearance Connecting rod bearing clearance Standard C 0.035 - 0.045 (0.0014 - 0.0018)* Limit 0.065 (0.0026) Standard D 0.034 - 0.059 (0.0013 - 0.0023)* Limit 0.070 (0.0028) *: Actual clearance E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EM-153 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION EX EXHAUST SYSTEM A EX C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PREPARATION .................................................. 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4 Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 4 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 EX-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003261021 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 EX-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717830 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. EX Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors: a: 22 mm (0.87 in) C D E S-NT636 Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717831 F (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below): a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia , 0.71 in) for zirconia heated oxygen sensor. b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia., 0.49 in) for titania heated oxygen sensor. G H I AEM488 Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) J K AEM489 Power tool L Loosening nuts and bolts. M N PBIC0190E O P Revision: August 2007 EX-3 2008 Quest EXHAUST SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > EXHAUST SYSTEM Checking Exhaust System INFOID:0000000001717832 Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting components for incorrect attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, or deterioration. SMA211A Revision: August 2007 EX-4 2008 Quest EXHAUST SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717833 A EX C D E F G H I J K L M N WBIA0741E 1. Rear muffler hanger 2. 4. Center exhaust tube hanger 5. 7. Center exhaust tube 8. Rear muffler 3. U clamp Dynamic damper 6. Center exhaust tube hanger bracket Gasket 9. Front exhaust tube 10. Ring gasket 11. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 12. Front exhaust tube hanger bracket 13. Main muffler hanger 14. Main muffler B. ⇐ Slit A. Button Vehicle front WARNING: Revision: August 2007 EX-5 2008 Quest O P EXHAUST SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down to avoid injury from the hot exhaust system. • Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge. NOTE: Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tool number Tool number : : — — (J-43897-12) (J-43897-18) CAUTION: • Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. • Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean the exhaust tube threads using commercial service tool and approved anti-seize lubricant. • Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one. • Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. • If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulator, clean and inspect them. • Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises. • Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration. Revision: August 2007 EX-6 2008 Quest DRIVELINE/AXLE SECTION FAX FRONT AXLE A B C FAX E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ............. 5 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution ................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ...................................... 8 F G Removal and Installation (Left Side) ......................... 8 Removal and Installation (Right Side) ...................... 9 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) ...................11 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) .................16 H SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 22 I Wheel Bearing .........................................................22 Drive Shaft ...............................................................22 Damper ....................................................................22 J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FAX-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718124 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution INFOID:0000000001718125 CAUTION: • When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on the ground. *Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. • After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment. • Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link . Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. • Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. • Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. • Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service location. • Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. • Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. • Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Revision: August 2007 FAX-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718126 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Ball joint remover Removing outer tie-rod B C FAX E NT146 Installing drive shaft LH: KV38106700 (J-34296) RH: KV38106800 (J-34297) KV38106700 (J-34296) KV38106800 (J-34297) Differential side oil seal protector F G NT147 H Installing boot bands KV40107300 ( — ) Boot Band crimping tool I J ZZA1229D Removing drive shaft KV40107500 ( — ) Drive shaft attachment K L ZZA1230D M Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718127 Tool name Description Power tool Removing nuts and bolts N O P PBIC0190E Revision: August 2007 FAX-3 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000001718128 Symptom FRONT AXLE Refer to FRONT AXLE in this chart. WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart. BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FRONT AXLE TIRES ROAD WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT BRAKES STEERING × FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-5 Wheel bearing damage — Parts interference FAX-5 × × SUSPENSION DRIVE SHAFT Improper installation, looseness × Shake Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FAX-8, FAX-9 FAX-11, FAX-16 Joint sliding resistance Noise Reference page Imbalance — Excessive joint angle Use chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: August 2007 FAX-4 2008 Quest FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE A On-Vehicle Inspection and Service INFOID:0000000001718129 Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. B FRONT WHEEL BEARING • Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit C : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less • Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any FAX irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718130 E F G H I J WDIA0032E K 1. Cotter pin 2. Disc rotor 3. 4. Splash guard 5. Steering knuckle Wheel hub and bearing assembly L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen nut using power tool. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and SDIA1480E Installation". Revision: August 2007 FAX-5 2008 Quest M N O P FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) WGIA0101E 8. 9. Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: • When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. • Support drive shaft when removing. SDIA0972J 10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 11. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. 12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to FSU-6, "Component". 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. AFA047 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. Ball Joint Inspection • Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: • Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring cover with wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle. Revision: August 2007 FAX-6 2008 Quest FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-28, "Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly".) A B C SDIA1480E FAX E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FAX-7 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation (Left Side) INFOID:0000000001718131 WDIA0351E 1. Differential side oil seal 2. ⇐: Front Cotter pin REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation". Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft. Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation". Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: • When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. SDIA0972J 7. Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft puller or suitable tool. • Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle as shown and remove drive shaft. Tool number : KV40107500 ( — ) WDIA0098E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. Revision: August 2007 FAX-8 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. • If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. A B C SFA108A FAX INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: • Refer to "Removal and Installation (Left Side)" for tightening torque. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. Tool number E F : KV38106700 (J-34296) G • Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to FAX-11, "Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)". CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened. • After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear. H WDIA0298E I Removal and Installation (Right Side) INFOID:0000000001718132 J K L M N WDIA0352E 1. Cotter pin 2. Dust shield 3. Support bearing bracket ⇐: Front P REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-85, "Removal and Installation". Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut. Revision: August 2007 O FAX-9 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation". 6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: • When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. SDIA0972J 7. Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pry drive shaft from transaxle. • Pry off drive shaft from transaxle. SFA989 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. • Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. • If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. SFA108A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: • Refer to "Removal and Installation (Right Side)" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. Tool number : KV38106800 (J-34297) • Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to FAX-11, "Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)". CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened. • After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear. Revision: August 2007 FAX-10 WDIA0298E 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) INFOID:0000000001718133 A B C FAX E F WDIA0354E 1. Circlip 2. Dust shield 4. 7. Snap ring 5. Boot band 8. 10. Damper band 3. Slide joint housing Spider assembly 6. Stopper ring Boot 9. Shaft 11. Damper 12. Boot band 13. Boot 14. Ball cage / Steel ball / Inner race assembly 15. Circlip 16. Joint sub-assembly ⇐: Front G H I DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Mount front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating joint assembly. Remove stopper ring with a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing. J K L M N O SFA476 P Revision: August 2007 FAX-11 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft. SFA963 7. 8. 9. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. Remove boot from shaft. Clean the old grease off of the slide joint assembly. SFA612 Wheel Side 1. 2. 3. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft. CAUTION: • Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. • If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft assembly. SDIA0606E 4. 5. 6. Remove boot from shaft. Remove circlip from shaft. While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly. Damper • Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shaft • Replace shaft if there is bending, cracking, or other damage. Joint Sub-Assembly • Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. • Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly. • Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures. CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly. Revision: August 2007 FAX-12 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Slide Joint Housing • Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks or fractures or unusual wear of ball rolling surface. • Make sure there is no damage to shaft screws. • Make sure there is no deformation of boot installation parts. A B Ball Cage • Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures of sliding surface. Steel Ball • Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures or unusual wear. C Inner Race • Check ball sliding surface for compression scars, cracks or fractures. FAX • Make sure there is no damage to serrated part. CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions in the component, replace with a new set of joint sub-assembly, ball cage, steel ball and inner race. E Damper • Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands. F ASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. 2. Install new boot and new small boot band on shaft. CAUTION: • Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. G H I SFA800 3. 4. 5. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent). Grease amount J K L : 134 – 144 g (4.73 – 5.08 oz) M N SFA023A 6. 7. Install new stopper ring to housing of slide joint assembly. After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring. O P Revision: August 2007 FAX-13 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Clean all grease from surfaces. 9. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the length specified below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. SDIA1505E Boot installation length “L” : 167.9 mm (6.61 in) CAUTION: • Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. • Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. 10. Secure large and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown. CAUTION: Discard old boot bands and replace with new ones. SFA395 11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, make sure boot position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Wheel Side 1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. SDIA1127E 2. 3. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot band and boot to shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: Discard old boot band and boot; replace with new one. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. SFA800 Revision: August 2007 FAX-14 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly. Use a suitable tool to press-fit. CAUTION: Discard old circlip and replace with new one. A B C RAC0049D FAX 5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot. Grease amount 6. 7. E : 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz) Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the specified length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. F G H SDIA1505E Boot installation length “L” 8. I : 163 mm (6.42 in) CAUTION: • Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. • Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool. Tool number : KV40107300 ( — J K ) NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands. L M RAC1133D N CAUTION: • Secure boot band so that dimension “M” meets specification as shown. O Dimension “M” : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in) P DSF0047D 9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Revision: August 2007 FAX-15 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Damper 1. 2. Use new damper bands for installation. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely. “A” “B” : 205 – 215 mm (8.07 – 8.46 in) : 70 mm (2.76 in) SFA313B Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) INFOID:0000000001718134 WDIA0353E 1. Joint sub-assembly 2. Circlip 3. Ball cage / Steel ball / Inner race assembly 4. Boot bands 5. Boot 6. Shaft 7. Damper bands 8. Damper 9. Boot band 10. Boot 11. Stopper ring 12 Spider assembly 13. Snap ring 14. Slide joint housing 15. Dust cover 16. Snap ring 17. Bearing 18. Bracket 19. Snap ring 20. Dust shield 21. Dust shield 22. Circlip ⇐: Front DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. 2. 3. Press shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When retaining shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing. Remove boot bands and slide the boots back. Revision: August 2007 FAX-16 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating slide joint housing. 5. Remove stopper ring using a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing. A B C SFA476 6. FAX Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft. E F G SFA963 7. 8. 9. H Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. Remove boot from shaft. Clean old grease off of the slide joint housing. I J K SFA612 Wheel Side 1. 2. 3. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft. CAUTION: • Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. • If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft assembly. L M N O P SDIA0606E 4. 5. 6. Remove boot from shaft. Remove circlip from shaft. While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly. Support Bearing Revision: August 2007 FAX-17 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove dust shield from slide joint assembly using a suitable tool. SFA442B 2. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool. SFA692 3. Press support bearing assembly off slide joint assembly using a suitable tool. SFA693 4. Separate support bearing from bracket using a suitable tool. SFA617 Damper • Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shaft • Replace shaft if there is any bending, cracking, or other damage. Joint Sub-assembly • Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. • Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly. • Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 FAX-18 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly. Sliding Joint Housing and Spider Assembly • If roller surface of spider assembly has scratches or wear, replace housing and spider assembly. NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set. A B Support Bearing • Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. C Damper • Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands. FAX ASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. 2. E Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: • Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. F G SFA800 3. 4. 5. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent). Grease amount H I J : 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz) K L SFA023A 6. 7. 8. 9. Install new stopper ring to slide joint assembly. After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. M N O P SDIA1505E Boot installation length “L” : 189.30 mm (7.45 in) CAUTION: • Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. • Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. Revision: August 2007 FAX-19 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Secure big and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown. CAUTION: Discard old boot bands; replace with new ones. 11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. SFA395 Wheel Side 1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. SDIA1127E 2. 3. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. SFA800 4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly. Use a suitable tool to press-fit. CAUTION: Discard old circlip; replace with new ones. RAC0049D 5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot. Grease amount Revision: August 2007 : 170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz) FAX-20 2008 Quest FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 7. Make sure boot installation length “L” is the specified length. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length “L” 8. : 163 mm (6.42 in) A B C SDIA1505E FAX CAUTION: • Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. • Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool. Tool number : KV40107300 ( — E ) F NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands. G RAC1133D CAUTION: • Secure boot band so that dimension “M” meets specification as shown. Dimension “M” H I : 1.0 – 4.0 mm (0.039 – 0.157 in) J K DSF0047D 9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. L M Damper 1. 2. Use new damper bands for installation. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely. “A” “B” N : 205 – 215 mm (8.07 – 8.46 in) : 70 mm (2.76 in) O P SFA313B Revision: August 2007 FAX-21 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000001718135 Axial end play limit 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000001718136 SDIA1505E Joint type Grease quantity Boots installed length Wheel side LH Transaxle side RH LH 170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz) 163 mm (6.42 in) RH 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz) 167.9 mm (6.61 in) Damper 189.30 (7.45 in) INFOID:0000000001718137 SFA313B "A" 205 - 215 mm (8.07 -8.46 in) "B" 70 mm (2.76 in) Revision: August 2007 FAX-22 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION FL FUEL SYSTEM A FL C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 General Precaution ................................................... 4 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ......................... 5 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 FUEL TANK ....................................................... 9 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 FUEL SYSTEM .................................................... 4 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 13 Checking Fuel Line ................................................... 4 Standard and Limit ..................................................13 F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FL-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001717805 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 FL-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717806 The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0090 (J-46214) Fuel tank lock ring tool Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring FL C D E LBIA0353E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717807 Tool name Description Power tools Loosening bolts and nuts F G H I PBIC0190E J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FL-3 2008 Quest FUEL SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Line INFOID:0000000001717808 Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. Repair or replace faulty parts as necessary. SMA803A General Precaution INFOID:0000000001717809 WARNING: When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following: • Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area. • Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher. • Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. CAUTION: • Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: - Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area. - Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". - Disconnect the battery ground cable. • Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones. • Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed. • After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure the quick connectors are secure. Ensure that the connector and resin tube do not contact any adjacent parts. • After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel leaks at the connections using the following steps: - a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel lines by turning the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then check for fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections. - b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections. • Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. • For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to EC-28. • For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)” parts, refer to EC-34. PBIC0199E Revision: August 2007 FL-4 2008 Quest FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001717810 FL C D E F G H I J K L WBIA0749E 1. Lock ring 2. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 4. Fuel tank ← Front 3. O-ring M REMOVAL N WARNING: Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-4, "General Precaution". 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to FL-9, "Removal and Installation". O P Revision: August 2007 FL-5 2008 Quest FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) WBIA0376E 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: • Do not bend the float arm during removal. WBIA0377E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. LBIA0338E • Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. LBIA0378E Revision: August 2007 FL-6 2008 Quest FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. A FL C SFE562A D • Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. E F G H I J PBIC0199E K INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FL-7 2008 Quest FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001717811 Fuel Level Sender Unit LBIA0458E 1. Harness connectors 2. Fuel sensor 4. Wire connector 5. Floater arm assembly 3. Tabs Disassembly 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: August 2007 FL-8 2008 Quest FUEL TANK < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUEL TANK A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717812 FL C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0750E N 1. Fuel filler cap 2. Grommet 3. Fuel filler tube 4. Fuel tank 5. Fuel filler hose 6. Fuel tank protector 7. Fuel tank mounting straps 8. O-ring 9. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O 10. Lock ring P REMOVAL WARNING: Read “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-4, "General Precaution". Revision: August 2007 FL-9 2008 Quest FUEL TANK < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (7/8 full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at or below as shown (7/8 full). • In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure. a. Insert fuel tubing of less than 25 mm (0.98 in) diameter into the fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the fuel filler tube. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube. WBIA0753E c. Insert fuel tubing into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain fuel from the fuel tank. • As a guide, the fuel level reaches or is less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approximately 10 (2 5/8 US gal, 2 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank. 2. Open the fuel filler lid and unscrew the fuel filler cap to release the pressure inside the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-75, "Fuel Pressure Check". 4. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 5. Remove the center exhaust tube, with mufflers. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 6. Disconnect the parking brake cables from the equalizer, then disconnect the three parking brake cable mounting brackets on each cable and position the cables out of the way. Refer to PB-5, "Component". 7. Remove the fuel tank protector. 8. Disconnect the fuel filler hose, recirculation hose and EVAP canister hose at the fuel tank as shown. 9. Disconnect the fuel tank mounting straps while supporting the fuel tank. 10. Lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. LBIA0341E 11. Disconnect the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose from the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. LBIA0338E Revision: August 2007 FL-10 2008 Quest FUEL TANK < SERVICE INFORMATION > a. Disconnect the quick connectors as follows: • Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the A tube. • If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them FL by pulling. CAUTION: • The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. C • Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. • Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful SFE562A when welding near the tube. D • Prevent liquid acids, such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. • Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and removal. • Only when the tube is replaced, remove the remaining retainer on the tube or fuel level sensor, E fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. • When the tube or fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (green colored retainer). • To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damF age and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags or something similar. G H PBIC0163E 12. Remove the fuel tank. 13. If replacing the fuel tank, disconnect the EVAP hose and remove the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly to transfer to the new fuel tank. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation". I J INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Before tightening the fuel tank mounting straps, temporarily install the fuel filler hose, recirculation hose, and EVAP canister hose. Tighten all fasteners to specification. • Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. K L M N SFE562A O P Revision: August 2007 FL-11 2008 Quest FUEL TANK < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. • Check the parking brake for proper operation. Adjust the parking brake as necessary. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service". PBIC0199E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Revision: August 2007 FL-12 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Standard and Limit INFOID:0000000001717813 Fuel Tank FL unit: Fuel tank capacity (US gal, Imp gal) 75.6 (20, 16 5/8) C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FL-13 2008 Quest SUSPENSION SECTION FSU FRONT SUSPENSION A B C D FSU CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution ................................................................. 2 Removal and Installation .........................................10 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................10 STABILIZER BAR ............................................. 12 Removal and Installation .........................................12 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 14 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 16 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 19 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 6 Component ................................................................ 6 On-vehicle Service .................................................... 6 Front Wheel Alignment .............................................. 7 Removal and Installation .........................................14 Removal and Installation .........................................16 General Specification (Front) ...................................19 Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ........................19 Lower Ball Joint .......................................................20 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ..................................20 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ........10 F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution INFOID:0000000001717814 • When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. • After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. • Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. • Always torque brake lines when installing. • Lock nuts are unreusable parts; always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off the new lock nut before tightening. Revision: August 2007 FSU-2 SBR686C 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717815 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HT72520000 (J25730-A) Ball joint remover Removing outer tie-rod end and lower ball joint C D FSU NT146 Front suspension member removal KV101J0010 (J-47242) Engine support table F G WBIA0658E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717816 H Tool name Description I Attachment wheel alignment Measure wheel alignment a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. d: 56 mm (2.20 in) e: 12 mm (0.47 in) J K NT148 Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring L M NT717 N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool name Description Engine lifting bracket Removing and installing suspension member LEIA0062E Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: August 2007 FSU-4 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart A INFOID:0000000001717817 PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-12 FSU-7 FSU-6 FSU-10 — FSU-10 C D FSU Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Shudder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × STEERING × BRAKES × ROAD WHEEL × TIRES × AXLE Shake DRIVE SHAFT × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Stabilizer bar fatigue × Incorrect wheel alignment × Suspension looseness Parts interference × G Spring fatigue Bushing or mounting deterioration Symptom FSU-10 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Noise Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS B F Improper installation, looseness Reference page FSU-6 Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × H I J K L ×: Applicable M N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-5 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Component INFOID:0000000001717818 WEIA0107E 1. Strut spacer 2. Strut mount insulator 3. Mounting insulator bracket 4. Thrust bearing 5. Upper spring seat 6. Upper rubber seat 7. Dust cover 8. Lower rubber seat 9. Coil spring 10. Shock absorber (Strut) 11. Front suspension member 12. Cup 13. Member pin stay 14. Wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly 15. Cotter pin 16. Transverse link 17. Connecting rod 18. Stabilizer bar 19. Drive shaft 20. Stabilizer clamp 21. Stabilizer bushing On-vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001717819 FRONT SUSPENSION PARTS Check the front axle and front suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage. Revision: August 2007 FSU-6 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Raise the vehicle on a hoist and shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. • Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted in the lower ball joint. • Retighten all of the axle and suspension nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torque A B : Refer to FSU-6, "Component". C SMA525A D • Check the strut (shock absorber) for any oil leakage or other damage. • Check the suspension ball joint for grease leakage and the ball joint dust cover for any cracks or other damage. If the ball joint dust cover is cracked or damaged, replace the transverse link. FSU F G SFA392B H • Check the wheelarch height "Hf" and "Hr" from the top of the wheelarch to the ground. - For proper measurement of the wheelarch height, the vehicle must be unladen*, parked on a level surface, and tires checked for proper inflation and wear (the tread wear indicators must not be showing). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. - Bounce the vehicle up and down several times before measuring the height. Wheelarch height I J WEIA0030E : Refer to FSU-20, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". - The wheelarch height is not adjustable. If the height is out of specification, check for worn springs or suspension parts. Front Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000001717820 K L M DESCRIPTION NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION • • • • • • • Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to WT-29, "Tire". Check the wheel runout. Refer to WT-5, "Inspection". Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service". Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service". Check that the front shock absorbers work properly. Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service". GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. • This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. Revision: August 2007 FSU-7 2008 Quest N O P FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. • The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. • The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. • Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. • Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. • The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. • This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional “Rolling Compensation” method to “compensate” the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this “Rolling Compensation” method. • Use the “Jacking Compensation” method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. • See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge. Camber, caster and kingpin inclination 2. : Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts. SRA096A TOE-IN WARNING: • Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. • Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. AFA050 Revision: August 2007 FSU-8 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. A B C SFA234AC Total toe-in 7. a. b. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length “L” c. D : Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". FSU F : Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". G Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque. Lock nut : Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". SFA486A FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. 2. H I Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the turning angles “A” and “B” as shown. J K Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". L SFA439BA M N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-9 2008 Quest COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717821 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the wheel sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber (strut). Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire. Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using power tool. Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber (strut) assembly. SFA956A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment". • When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown. • Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component". WARNING: • Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting nuts. • When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening nuts. • Install wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". WEIA0108E Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001717822 DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. Revision: August 2007 FSU-10 SSU002 2008 Quest COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. A B C SSU003 D INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly • Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. • Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. • Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. FSU Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. F Thrust Bearing Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary. G Coil Spring • Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. • Check the free spring height. H Front spring free height SE model : 340 mm (13.39 in) Base, S and : 350 mm (13.78 in) SL models I J ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. K L M SFA508A 2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points. N O P SFA564B Revision: August 2007 FSU-11 2008 Quest STABILIZER BAR < SERVICE INFORMATION > STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717823 WEIA0109E 1. Connecting rod 4. Stabilizer clamp 2. Stabilizer bar 3. Stabilizer bushing REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Remove the steering gear bolts on the lower side. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". • Support steering gear. Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using power tool. • Prevent the connecting rod from turning by inserting a hex wrench into the end of the ball stud, then remove nut. Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension member. Remove the stabilizer bar by withdrawing from side. • Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary. SFA796B INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if necessary. • Check the stabilizer bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary. • Check that the connecting rod ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace connecting rod. ARA027 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 FSU-12 2008 Quest STABILIZER BAR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When installing stabilizer bar, make sure that the stabilizer clamps are facing in the correct direction as shown. A B C WEIA0032E D • Make sure that slit in stabilizer bushing is in the position as shown. • Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the stabilizer bushing using a silicone lubricant. FSU F G SFA604B H • Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed as shown. • When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". I J K SFA449BB L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-13 2008 Quest TRANSVERSE LINK < SERVICE INFORMATION > TRANSVERSE LINK Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717824 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool, then separate transverse link from the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly. WEIA0033E 3. 4. Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts and transverse link bolt using power tool. Remove the transverse link. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visual Check • Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary. • Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary. Lower Ball Joint • Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following exists: • Lower ball joint stud is worn. • Lower ball joint is hard to swing. • Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. Swinging Force Check ball joint swinging force. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force “A” (measuring at groove of ball stud) : 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f) SFA858A Turning Force Check ball joint turning force. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Revision: August 2007 FSU-14 2008 Quest TRANSVERSE LINK < SERVICE INFORMATION > Turning torque “B” : 0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb) A B C SFA858A D Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play “C” FSU : 0 mm (0 in) F G SFA858A H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts and nuts to specified torque, refer to FSU-6, "Component". During installation, the final tightening must be done with the vehicle at curb weight and the tires on the ground. CAUTION: Discard the old pinch nut and use a new pinch nut for installation of the lower ball joint pinch bolt. • After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment". • Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 FSU-15 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717825 WEIA0145E 1. Front engine mount 2. Dynamic damper 3. Front suspension member 4. Cup 5. LH transaxle mounting insulator 6. Member pin stay, LH 7. Member pin stay, RH 8. Rear engine mount ⇐ Front REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. a. b. Remove the front wheels and tires using power tool. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Remove the engine under cover. Remove the splash shields. Remove the LH transaxle mounting insulator nuts using power tool. Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Install a commercially available engine lifting bracket onto the transaxle with bolt as shown. LEIA0060E Revision: August 2007 FSU-16 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Support engine from engine lifting bracket using suitable tool as shown. CAUTION: Be sure suitable tool is securely resting on hoodledge as shown. A B C LEIA0061E D d. Remove the three LH transaxle mounting insulator nuts using power tool. FSU F G WEIA0042E 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool, then separate the transverse link from the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly. Refer to FSU-6, "Component". Remove the front exhaust tube using power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". Remove the power steering line bracket from the front suspension member. Remove the bolts on the lower side of the steering gear. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the front engine mount electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the connecting rod from the front strut using power tool. 11. Set a transmission jack under the front suspension member, then remove the nuts from the front suspension member using power tool. 12. Remove the bolts from the member pin stay on the vehicle body side using power tool. 13. Remove the through bolts from the front and rear engine mounts. 14. Lower the transmission jack slowly to remove the front suspension member. • If necessary, remove the exhaust hanger bracket from the front suspension member. • If necessary, remove the front and rear engine mounts. • If necessary, remove the transverse link. • If necessary, remove dynamic damper. H I J WEIA0033E L M N SFA796B O P INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the front suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal noting the following: • Install the stabilizer bar bushings and clamps in the specified orientation. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation". • Tighten the stabilizer bar and connecting rod nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Component". Revision: August 2007 FSU-17 K 2008 Quest FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Tighten the steering gear bolts to specification. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". • Tighten the transverse link bolts and nuts to specification. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation". • Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment". Revision: August 2007 FSU-18 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A General Specification (Front) INFOID:0000000001717826 Unit: mm (in) Model SE B Base, S and SL Suspension type Independent strut with coil springs Shock absorber type C Double-acting hydraulic Stabilizer bar Standard equipment Free spring height 340 (13.39) 350 (13.78) Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) D INFOID:0000000001717827 FSU Market Camber degree minute (decimal degree) United States and Canada Mexico Minimum −1° 15′ (−1.25°) −0° 4′ (−0.07°) Nominal −0° 30′ (−0.50°) −0° 4′ (−0.07°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) 0° 41′ (0.68°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 1° 57′ (1.95°) 2° 27′ (2.45°) Nominal 2° 42′ (2.70°) 2° 27′ (2.45°) Maximum 3° 27′ (3.45°) 3° 12′ (3.20°) Left and right difference 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13° 39′ (13.65°) 13° 42′ (13.70°) Nominal 14° 24′ (14.40°) 13° 42′ (13.70°) Maximum 15° 09′ (15.15°) 14° 27′ (14.45°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster degree minute (decimal degree) Kingpin inclination degree minute (decimal degree) F G H I J K L M SFA234AC Total toe-in Minimum Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left plus right) degree minute (decimal degree) Wheel turning angle full turn*2 Inside degree minute (decimal degree) Outside degree minute (decimal degree) Revision: August 2007 −0.75 (−0.0295) −0.75 (−0.0295) Nominal 0.25 (0.0098) 0.25 (0.0098) Maximum 1.25 (0.0492) 1.25 (0.0492) Minimum -0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°) -0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°) Nominal 0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°) 0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°) Maximum 0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°) 0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°) Minimum 35° 15′ (35.25°) 38° 00′ (38.00°) Nominal 38° 45′ (38.75°) 41° 30′ (41.50°) Maximum 39° 45′ (39.75°) 42° 30′ (42.50°) Nominal 32° 30′ (32.5°) 33° 24′ (33.4°) FSU-19 2008 Quest N O P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > *1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg-f, 22 to 33 lb-f) with engine idle. Lower Ball Joint INFOID:0000000001717828 SFA858A Swinging force “A” (Measuring point: groove of ball stud) Turning torque “B” 7.8 - 54.9 (0.8 - 5.6, 1.8 - 12.3) N (kg-f, lb-f) N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) Vertical end play “C” 0.49 - 3.43 (5.0 - 35.0, 4.3 - 30.4) mm (in) 0 (0) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000001717829 Unit: mm (in) WEIA0030E Market United States and Canada Mexico Front (Hf) 740 (29.13) 770 (30.31) Rear (Hr) 749 (29.49) 779 (30.67) *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Revision: August 2007 FSU-20 2008 Quest QUICK REFERENCE INDEX Edition: August 2007 Revision: August 2007 Publication No. SM8E-1V42U0 A GENERAL INFORMATION GI General Information B ENGINE EM Engine Mechanical LU Engine Lubrication System CO Engine Cooling System EC Engine Control System FL Fuel System EX Exhaust System ACC C TRANSMISSION/ TRANSAXLE D DRIVELINE/AXLE E SUSPENSION F BRAKES Accelerator Control System AT Automatic Transaxle FAX Front Axle RAX Rear Axle FSU Front Suspension RSU Rear Suspension WT Road Wheels & Tires BR Brake System PB Parking Brake System BRC Brake Control System G STEERING PS Power Steering System H RESTRAINTS SB Seat Belts SRS Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) I BODY J AIR CONDITIONER K ELECTRICAL L MAINTENANCE BL Body, Lock & Security System GW Glasses, Window System & Mirrors RF Roof EI Exterior & Interior IP Instrument Panel SE Seat AP Adjustable Pedal ATC Automatic Air Conditioner MTC Manual Air Conditioner SC Starting & Charging System LT Lighting System DI Driver Information System WW Wiper, Washer & Horn BCS Body Control System LAN LAN System AV Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System ACS Auto Cruise Control System PG Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements MA Maintenance © 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc. -1 A B C D E F G H I J K L FOREWORD This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 2008 NISSAN QUEST. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected. -2 PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER! Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals. Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals. Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to: Nissan North America, Inc. Technical Service Information 39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200 Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331 FAX: (248) 488-3910 SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year: PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ): Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail: Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. Page number(s) Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. If no, what page number(s)? Please describe the issue or problem in detail: Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO Please comment: What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or repairing customer vehicles? DATE: DEALER: CITY: YOUR NAME: DEALER NO.: STATE/PROV./COUNTRY: POSITION: ADDRESS: ZIP/POSTAL CODE: QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST 2008 QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST Engine Tune-up Data INFOID:0000000003332592 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement V-6 3 3,498 (213.45) Displacement cm (cu in) Bore and stroke mm (in) 95.5 x 81.4 (3.760 x 3.205) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Number of piston rings Compression 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 4 Compression ratio 10.0:1 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm Standard 1,275 (13.0, 185) Minimum 981 (10.0, 142) Differential limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 14) Cylinder number SEM713A Valve timing (IVTC - OFF) PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 240° 238° - 6° 64° 8° 52° SPARK PLUG QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST 2008 Make NGK Standard type PLFR5A-11 Hot type PLFR4A-11 Cold type PLFR6A-11 Gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000003332591 Market Camber degree minute (decimal degree) United States and Canada Mexico Minimum −1° 15′ (−1.25°) −0° 4′ (−0.07°) Nominal −0° 30′ (−0.50°) −0° 4′ (−0.07°) 0° 15′ (0.25°) 0° 41′ (0.68°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 1° 57′ (1.95°) 2° 27′ (2.45°) Nominal 2° 42′ (2.70°) 2° 27′ (2.45°) Maximum 3° 27′ (3.45°) 3° 12′ (3.20°) Left and right difference 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 13° 39′ (13.65°) 13° 42′ (13.70°) Nominal 14° 24′ (14.40°) 13° 42′ (13.70°) Maximum 15° 09′ (15.15°) 14° 27′ (14.45°) Minimum −0.75 (−0.0295) −0.75 (−0.0295) Nominal 0.25 (0.0098) 0.25 (0.0098) Maximum 1.25 (0.0492) 1.25 (0.0492) Minimum -0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°) -0° 1′ 54″ (-0.03°) Nominal 0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°) 0° 0′ 36″ (0.01°) Maximum 0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°) 0° 3′ 6″ (0.05°) Minimum 35° 15′ (35.25°) 38° 00′ (38.00°) Nominal 38° 45′ (38.75°) 41° 30′ (41.50°) Maximum 39° 45′ (39.75°) 42° 30′ (42.50°) Nominal 32° 30′ (32.5°) 33° 24′ (33.4°) Maximum Left and right difference Caster degree minute (decimal degree) Kingpin inclination degree minute (decimal degree) SFA234AC Total toe-in Distance (A − B) mm (in) Angle (left plus right) degree minute (decimal degree) Wheel turning angle full turn*2 Inside degree minute (decimal degree) Outside degree minute (decimal degree) *1: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: On power steering models, wheel turning force (at circumference of steering wheel) of 98 to 147 N (10 to 15 kg-f, 22 to 33 lb-f) with engine idle. QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST 2008 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000003332589 United States and Canada Mexico Minimum −1° 3' (−1.05°) 0° 3' (0.05°) Nominal −0° 33′ (−0.55°) 0° 33′ (0.55°) Maximum -0° 3′ (-0.05°) 1° 3′ (1.05°) Minimum 1.6 (0.063) 1.6 (0.063) Nominal 3.2 (0.126) 3.2 (0.126) Maximum 4.8 (0.189) 4.8 (0.189) Minimum -2.0 (-0.079) -2.0 (-0.079) Nominal 0 (0) 0 (0) Market Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) SFA234AC Distance (“A” − “B”) mm (in) Total toe-in Difference between LH, RH Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Maximum 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) Minimum 0° 3′ 35" (0.06°) 0° 3′ 35" (0.06°) Nominal 0° 7′ 48" (0.13°) 0° 7′ 48" (0.13°) Maximum 0° 12′ 0" (0.20°) 0° 12′ 0" (0.20°) *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000003332590 Unit: mm (in) WEIA0030E Market United States and Canada Mexico Front (Hf) 740 (29.13) 770 (30.31) Rear (Hr) 749 (29.49) 779 (30.67) *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST 2008 Brake Specification INFOID:0000000003332586 Unit: mm (in) Brake model AD35VB disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Front brake 47.62 (1.87) Pad Length × width × thickness 132.0 × 53.5 × 10 (5.20 × 2.11 × 0.39) Rotor outer diameter × thickness 290 × 28 (11.42 × 1.10) Brake model AD14VE disc brake Cylinder bore diameter Rear brake 42.86 (1.69) Pad Length × width × thickness 83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.27 × 1.30 × 0.33) Rotor outer diameter × thickness Master cylinder 308 × 16 (12.13 × 0.63) Cylinder bore diameter 25.4 (1.00) Booster model Brake booster Diaphragm diameter M245T Primary 252 (9.92) Secondary 230 (9.06) Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent, DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Recommended brake fluid Disc Brake INFOID:0000000003332587 Unit: mm (in) Brake model Pad wear limit Minimum thickness Maximum runout Rotor repair limit Minimum thickness Maximum thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) AD35VB (Front) AD14VE (Rear) 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 (0.0020) 26.0 (1.02) 14.0 (0.55) 0.015 (0.0006) or less QUICK REFERENCE CHART: QUEST 2008 Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000003332588 Unit: mm (in) WFIA0160E Free height “H” * 156.3 - 166.3 (6.15 - 6.55) Depressed pedal height “D” [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] * Clearance switch “C1” or “C2” more than 90.3 (3.55) between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch or ASCD Pedal play “A” 0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077) 3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43) *: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000003332585 Capacity (Approximate) Description Metric US measure Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal With oil filter change 4.0 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt Without oil filter change 3.7 3 7/8 qt 3 1/4 qt 5.0 5 1/4 qt 4 3/8 qt 10.5 2 3/4 gal 2 3/8 gal Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) 7.4 7 7/8 qt 6 1/2 qt Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt — — Fuel Engine oil Drain and refill Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system With reservoir at “MAX” level Brake fluid — Multi-purpose grease — — — Brake grease — — — 1 1/4 gal 1 gal 1.98 ± 0.11 lb 1.98 ± 0.11 lb 7.44 fl oz 7.7 fl oz Windshield washer fluid Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil 4.5 900 ± 50 g 220 m GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION GI GENERAL INFORMATION GI B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ..............................................................24 Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................31 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Description ................................................................ 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped) .................................................................. 2 General Precaution ................................................... 3 Precaution for Three Way Catalyst ........................... 4 Precaution for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) ......................................................... 4 Precaution for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ............................................. 5 Precaution for Hoses ................................................. 5 Precaution for Engine Oils ........................................ 6 Precaution for Air Conditioning ................................. 6 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 7 Description ................................................................ 7 Terms ........................................................................ 7 Units .......................................................................... 7 Contents .................................................................... 7 Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 8 Component ................................................................ 8 How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 9 How to Read Wiring Diagram .................................. 12 Abbreviations .......................................................... 19 CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM ................. 34 Description ...............................................................34 Function and System Application ............................34 CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit....35 G H LIFTING POINT ................................................. 37 Special Service Tool ................................................37 Garage Jack and Safety Stand ................................37 2-Pole Lift ................................................................38 Board-on Lift ............................................................39 I J TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 40 Tow Truck Towing ...................................................40 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............40 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ............................................................... 41 K Tightening Torque Table .........................................41 L RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS ............................................... 42 M Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant .......42 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .................... 43 Model Variation ........................................................43 Identification Number ...............................................44 Dimensions ..............................................................45 Wheels & Tires ........................................................45 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ...........................................................21 TERMINOLOGY ................................................ 46 How to Check Terminal ........................................... 21 SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................46 Revision: August 2007 F GI-1 2008 Quest N O P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Description INFOID:0000000001718145 Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section. Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718146 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS) (If Equipped) INFOID:0000000001718147 NVIS/IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS/IVIS (NATS) registered. The security indicator is located on the instrument panel. The indicator blinks when the immobilizer system is functioning. Therefore, NVIS/IVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. • When NVIS/IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition switch is in "ON" position. This lighting up indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning, so prompt service is required. • When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), CONSULT-III hardware and CONSULT-III NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software is necessary. Regarding the procedures of NVIS/IVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III operation manual, NVIS/IVIS (NATS). Therefore, CONSULT-III NVIS/IVIS (NATS) software (program card and operation manual) must be kept strictly confidential to maintain the integrity of the anti-theft function. • When servicing NVIS/IVIS (NATS) (trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS/IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. A maximum of four or five key IDs can be registered into NVIS/IVIS (NATS). • When failing to start the engine first time using the key of NVIS/IVIS (NATS), start as follows. 1. Leave the ignition key in "ON" position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn ignition key to "OFF" or "LOCK" position and wait approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again. 4. Restart the engine while keeping the key separate from any others on key-chain. Revision: August 2007 GI-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > General Precaution INFOID:0000000001718148 GI • Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any flammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any flammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. B C D SGI285 E • Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. • When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder. F G SGI231 • Before starting repairs which do not require battery power: Turn off ignition switch. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. • If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of radio and each control unit is erased. • Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. H I J K SEF289H L • To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. • Dispose of or recycle drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an appropriate manner. • Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. • Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent prior to inspection or assembly. • Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. • Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set. • Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence. • Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM). Static electricity may damage internal electronic components. • After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection. • Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual. • Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required. Revision: August 2007 GI-3 M N O SGI233 P 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. • When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems, check all affected lines for leaks. PBIC0190E • Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. SGI234 WARNING: To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module) system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections. Precaution for Three Way Catalyst INFOID:0000000001718149 If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. • Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. • When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. • Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Precaution for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended) INFOID:0000000001718150 Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN/INFINITI recommend the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) may only be used in vehicles specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models). Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Revision: August 2007 GI-4 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Precaution for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System INFOID:0000000001718151 GI • Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the multiport fuel injection system or ECM: Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM. • Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure. • Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow sensor. B C D SGI787 Precaution for Hoses INFOID:0000000001718152 E HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION • To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with tapered tool or screwdriver. F G H SMA019D • To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose stopper.) I J K L SMA020D HOSE CLAMPING M • If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at that position. • Discard old clamps; replace with new ones. N O P SMA021D Revision: August 2007 GI-5 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. SMA022D Precaution for Engine Oils INFOID:0000000001718153 Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS • • • • • • • • • • • • Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. Do not put oily rags in pockets. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Precaution for Air Conditioning INFOID:0000000001718154 Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" for specific instructions. Revision: August 2007 GI-6 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GI Description INFOID:0000000001718155 This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”. Terms B INFOID:0000000001718156 C • The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed. CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed. BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment. Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment. Units D E INFOID:0000000001718157 F • The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system. Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the standard tightening torque. “Example” Range Outer Socket Lock Nut G H : 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb) I Standard Drive Shaft Installation Bolt J : 44.3 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) Contents INFOID:0000000001718158 • ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. • A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab. • THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section. • THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system. • THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”). • THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-7 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions INFOID:0000000001718159 The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in the text and the service procedures. SAIA0519E Component INFOID:0000000001718160 • THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to perform repairs. The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG. Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration. Revision: August 2007 GI-8 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > GI B C D E SFIA2959E 1. Union bolt 2. Copper washer 3. Brake hose 4. Cap 5. Bleed valve 6. Sliding pin bolt 7. Piston seal 8. Piston 9. Piston boot G 10. Cylinder body 11. Sliding pin 12. Torque member mounting bolt 13. Washer 14. Sliding pin boot 15. Bushing 16. Torque member 17. Inner shim cover 18. Inner shim 19. Inner pad 20. Pad retainer 21. Pad wear sensor 22. Outer pad 23. Outer shim 24. 1: PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease 2: Rubber grease F H Outer shim cover I : Brake fluid Refer to GI section for additional symbol definitions. J SYMBOLS K L M N SAIA0749E How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718161 P DESCRIPTION NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”. 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. Revision: August 2007 O GI-9 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SAIA0256E 1. 2. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V b. Voltage : Approximately 0V → Less than 1V 3. 4. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Reference Information Refer to GI-8, "Component". Revision: August 2007 GI-10 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES GI B C D E F G H SAIA0750E I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-11 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > SAIA0751E How to Read Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000001718162 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Revision: August 2007 GI-12 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. • Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. • Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. GI B C D E F G SAIA0257E • Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. H I J K L M N SGI363 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - O P Revision: August 2007 GI-13 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”. SGI091A Revision: August 2007 GI-14 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Optional Splice GI B C D E F G H SGI942 DESCRIPTION I Number 1 Item Description Power condition • This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated). 2 Fusible link • The double line shows that this is a fusible link. • The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. 3 Fusible link/fuse location • This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING. 4 Fuse • The single line shows that this is a fuse. • The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. 5 Current rating • This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. 6 Connectors • This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male. • The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors. • Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION). 7 Optional splice • The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application. 8 Splice • The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle. 9 Page crossing • This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page. • The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page. 10 Common connector • The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector. 11 Option abbreviation • This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application. 12 Relay • This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY. 13 Connectors • This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut. Revision: August 2007 GI-15 J K L M N O 2008 Quest P HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Number Item Description • This shows a code for the color of the wire. 14 Wire color BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (Violet) = Purple GY or GR = Gray SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe 15 Option description • This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page. 16 Switch • This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position. 17 Assembly parts • Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly. 18 Cell code • This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page number. • Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow. 19 Current flow arrow • A double arrow “ operation. ” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on circuit 20 System branch • This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and system). 21 Page crossing • This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code. • The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages. 22 Shielded line • The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire. 23 Component box in wave line • This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by wave line) within the system. 24 Component name • This shows the name of a component. 25 Connector number • This shows the connector number. • The letter shows which harness the connector is located in. • Example: M: main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors. 26 Ground (GND) • The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the grounded connector. 27 Ground (GND) • This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in PG section. 28 Connector views • This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page. 29 Common component • Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component. 30 Connector color 31 Fusible link and fuse box • This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section. The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out. 32 Reference area • This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details. • This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes, Number 14 of this chart. Harness Indication Revision: August 2007 GI-16 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. • Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. GI B C D E F G AGI070 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. H Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: • ignition switch is “OFF”, • doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, • pedals are not depressed, and • parking brake is released. I J K L M N O SGI860 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. Revision: August 2007 GI-17 2008 Quest P HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > • A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. • A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. SGI862-B Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. • The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. • The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. SGI875 Reference Area Revision: August 2007 GI-18 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, GI these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. B C D E F G H I J K L SGI092A Abbreviations INFOID:0000000001718163 N The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION A/C Air Conditioner A/T Automatic Transaxle/Transmission ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid D1 Drive range 1st gear D2 Drive range 2nd gear D3 Drive range 3rd gear D4 Drive range 4th gear FR, RR Revision: August 2007 M O P Front, Rear GI-19 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL < SERVICE INFORMATION > ABBREVIATION LH, RH DESCRIPTION Left-Hand, Right-Hand M/T Manual Transaxle/Transmission OD Overdrive P/S Power Steering SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. SDS Service Data and Specifications SST Special Service Tools 2WD 2-Wheel Drive 22 2nd range 2nd gear 21 2nd range 1st gear 12 1st range 2nd gear 11 1st range 1st gear Revision: August 2007 GI-20 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal GI INFOID:0000000001718164 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT B Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J38751-95NI) Connector and terminal pin kit (NISSAN) (J38751-95INF) Connector and terminal pin kit (INFINITI) (J42992-98KIT) OBD and terminal repair kit (J42992-2000UPD) OBD-II Connector Kit Update C D Description E F G H WAIA0004E WAIA0005E I HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip. J K Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with “T” pin. • If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. • Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. L M N SGI841 Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL • There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. O P SEL265V Revision: August 2007 GI-21 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. SEL266V MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin. Do not bend terminal. SEL267V How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. SEL270V 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. SEL271V Revision: August 2007 GI-22 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. GI B C SEL272V D • If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. E F G SEL273V Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. H I RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION • Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. • The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. J K L SEL275V WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. M N Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. O P SEL330V Revision: August 2007 GI-23 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident INFOID:0000000001718165 WORK FLOW SGI838 STEP DESCRIPTION Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred. The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: STEP 1 WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio). WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency. WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation. HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction). Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. STEP 2 Operate the system, road test if necessary. Verify the parameter of the incident. If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”. STEP 3 Get the proper diagnosis materials together including: • Power Supply Routing • System Operation Descriptions • Applicable Service Manual Sections • Check for any Service Bulletins Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments. STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts. STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component. STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps. INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: • Vehicle vibration • Heat sensitive • Freezing • Water intrusion • Electrical load Revision: August 2007 GI-24 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the GI problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. B C CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. D E F G H I J SGI839 ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: • Connectors not fully seated. • Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. • Wires laying across brackets or moving components. • Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. • Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Revision: August 2007 GI-25 2008 Quest K L M N O P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. SGI842 Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. SGI843 Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. SGI844 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. SGI845 Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorRevision: August 2007 GI-26 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > ough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. GI You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. B OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. There are two types of shorts. SHORT C • SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. • SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. D NOTE: Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal. Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. E F G H SGI846-A CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. • Disconnect the battery negative cable. • Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) • Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. • Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) • Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) • Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. • Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. • Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. • With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). • Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. Revision: August 2007 GI-27 2008 Quest I J K L M N O P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). • Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. SGI847-A RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD • Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. • Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. • Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. • With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. • Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. • Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD • Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. • Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). • With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. • With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. • With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: • Remove the ground bolt or screw. Revision: August 2007 GI-28 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. • Clean as required to assure good contact. GI • Reinstall bolt or screw securely. • Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. • If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the B wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section. C D E F G H SGI853 Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: • Undersized wiring (single strand example) • Corrosion on switch contacts • Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. I J K L MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD • Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. • Operate the circuit. • The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit. M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-29 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. SGI974 MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”). Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. SAIA0258E Control Unit Circuit Test System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. MGI034A INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Revision: August 2007 GI-30 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Pin No. Item 1 Switch 2 Lamp Voltage value [V] Condition In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Battery voltage Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 GI B C The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. D E F G MGI035A INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. Item 1 Lamp 2 Switch H Voltage value [V] Condition In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Approx. 0 Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage Switch ON Approx. 0 Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 5 Approx. 5 I J The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Control Units and Electrical Parts INFOID:0000000001718166 K L PRECAUTIONS • Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. • Install only parts specified for a vehicle. • Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. • Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. • If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. M N O SAIA0251E Revision: August 2007 GI-31 2008 Quest P SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. SAIA0252E • For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. SAIA0253E • For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. SAIA0254E • Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. • Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. • Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. • Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. • Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. SAIA0255E Revision: August 2007 GI-32 2008 Quest SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. • When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. GI B C D E F G SEF348N H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-33 2008 Quest CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Description INFOID:0000000003289216 • When the CONSULT-III is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. • Refet to "CONSULT-III Operation Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Function ENGINE ABS (including VDC) AIR BAG IPDM E/R BCM METER/M&A AUTO DRIVE POS. TRANSMISSION REARVIEW CAMERA HVAC NVIS (NATS)*1 NVIS (NATS BCM OR S/ENT)*1 INFOID:0000000003289217 Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following indications on CONSULT-III. x x - - x - x x x - - - Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. x x - x x x x x - x x x Trouble diagnostic record Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read. - - x - - - - - - - - - Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECU can be read. x x - x - x x x x x - - Data monitor (spec) Data monitor specification can be read. x - - - - - - - - - - - CAN diagnosis Based on the condition of CAN communication line, diagnosis is automatically carried out. - - - - - - - - x - - CAN diagnostic support monitor The communication condition of CAN communication line can be read. x x - x x x x x - x - - Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives actuators apart from ECU shifting some parameters in a specified range. x x - x - - x x - - - - Function test This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either "OK" or "NG". For engines, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available. x x x - - - - x - - - - DTC & SRT confirmation The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. x - - - - - - - - - - - DTC work support The operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes can be selected. x - - - - - - - - - - - ECM/ECU part number ECM/ECU part number can be read. x x - - x - x x x x - - ECU discriminated No. Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed. - - x - - - - - - - - - Passenger airbag Displays the STATUS (readiness) of front passenger air bag. - - x - - - - - - - - - Diagnostic test mode Configuration Sets control module parameters to match vehicle options. - - - - x - - - - - - - initialization Write new data in the EEPROM of the control unite. - - - - - - - - x - - - Control unit initialization All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components can be initialized and new IDs can be registered. - - - - - - - - - - x - PIN Read This mode enables technician to get BCM-specific 5-digit code. - - - - - - - - - - - x x: Applicable. *1: NVIS (NATS) [NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (Nissan Anti-theft System)]. Revision: August 2007 GI-34 2008 Quest CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INFOID:0000000003289218 GI B C D E F G H I J K L M N O WAWA0007E INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-III cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items. Revision: August 2007 GI-35 2008 Quest P CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Check item CONSULT-III cannot access any system. CONSULT-III DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4). CONSULT-III cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.) • Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system). • Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-III DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system). • Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-13. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 6, 7 and 14 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-III access to other systems. Revision: August 2007 GI-36 2008 Quest LIFTING POINT < SERVICE INFORMATION > LIFTING POINT GI Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718173 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name B Description C D LM4086-0200 ( — ) Board-on attachment E S-NT001 F LM4519-0000 ( — ) Safety stand attachment G S-NT002 H CAUTION: • Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. • Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. • Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. • Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts. Garage Jack and Safety Stand INFOID:0000000001718174 WARNING: • Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. • Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. • Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-37 2008 Quest LIFTING POINT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels. WAIA0021E 2-Pole Lift INFOID:0000000001718175 WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. Revision: August 2007 GI-38 2008 Quest LIFTING POINT < SERVICE INFORMATION > When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. GI B C D E F G H WAIA0022E Board-on Lift INFOID:0000000001718176 CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. • The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. • Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. I J K L M AGI016 N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-39 2008 Quest TOW TRUCK TOWING < SERVICE INFORMATION > TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing INFOID:0000000001718177 CAUTION: • Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. • Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as shown. CAUTION: • Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the ground. WAIA0027E Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) INFOID:0000000001718178 Front • Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. • Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. • The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle. • Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Rear WAIA0023E • Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. • Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. • Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. • Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Revision: August 2007 GI-40 2008 Quest TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS GI Tightening Torque Table INFOID:0000000001718179 B Grade 4T 7T 9T Bolt size Bolt diameter * mm M6 6.0 M8 8.0 M10 10.0 Tightening torque (Without lubricant) Pitch mm Hexagon head bolt N·m kg-m ft-lb Hexagon flange bolt in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.1 0.52 3.8 45.1 6.1 0.62 4.5 53.8 1.25 13 1.3 9 — 15 1.5 11 — 1.0 13 1.3 9 — 16 1.6 12 — 1.5 25 2.5 18 — 29 3.0 22 — 1.25 25 2.6 19 — 30 3.1 22 — 1.75 42 4.3 31 — 51 5.2 38 — M12 12.0 1.25 46 4.7 34 — 56 5.7 41 — M14 14.0 1.5 74 7.5 54 — 88 9.0 65 — M6 6.0 1.0 8.4 0.86 6.2 74.6 10 1.0 7 87 M8 8.0 1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.5 18 — 1.0 22 2.2 16 — 26 2.7 20 — M10 10.0 1.5 41 4.2 30 — 48 4.9 35 — 1.25 43 4.4 32 — 51 5.2 38 — M12 12.0 1.75 71 7.2 52 — 84 8.6 62 — 1.25 77 7.9 57 — 92 9.4 68 — M14 14.0 1.5 127 13.0 94 — 147 15.0 108 — M6 6.0 1.0 12 1.2 9 — 15 1.5 11 — M8 8.0 1.25 29 3.0 22 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.0 31 3.2 23 — 37 3.8 27 — M10 10.0 1.5 59 6.0 43 — 70 7.1 51 — 1.25 62 6.3 46 — 74 7.5 54 — M12 12.0 M14 14.0 1.75 98 10.0 72 — 118 12.0 87 — 1.25 108 11.0 80 — 137 14.0 101 — 1.5 177 18.0 130 — 206 21.0 152 — C D E F G H I J K L *: Nominal diameter M 1. Special parts are excluded. 2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head. N O P MGI044A Revision: August 2007 GI-41 2008 Quest RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS Recommended Chemical Product and Sealant INFOID:0000000001718180 Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant. 1 2 3 6 Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos. Rear View Mirror Adhesive Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to windows. 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844 Anaerobic Liquid Gasket For metal-to-metal flange sealing. Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications. 999MP-AM001P 99998-50503 Permatex 51813 and 51817 High Performance Thread Sealant Provides instant sealing on any threaded straight or parallel threaded fitting. (Thread sealant only, no locking ability.) • Do not use on plastic. 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521 99998-50506 (Ultra Grey) Permatex Ultra Grey 82194; Three Bond 1207,1215, 1216, 1217F and 1217G; Nissan RTV Part No. 999MP-A7007 999MP-AM003P (Ultra Grey) Silicone RTV Gasket Maker for Maxima/ Quest 5-speed automatic transmission (RE5F22A) 5 Nissan Canada Part No. (Canada) Purpose Gasket Maker 4 Nissan North America Part No. (USA) Product Description High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Blue) Revision: August 2007 Threadlocker Threadlocker (service tool removable) – 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM005P GI-42 – Three Bond 1281B or exact equivalent in its quality 999MP-AM004P Permatex 27200; Three Bond 1360, 1360N, 1305 N&P, 1307N, 1335, 1335B, 1363B, 1377C, 1386B, D&E and 1388 999MP-AM005P Permatex 24200, 24206, 24240, 24283 and 09178; Three Bond 1322, 1322N, 1324 D&N, 1333D, 1361C, 1364D, 1370C and 1374 2008 Quest IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION GI Model Variation INFOID:0000000001718181 B Body Wagon Engine VQ35DE Destination Transmission Grade USA Canada Mexico 5 A/T SE TLJ2LGB-EUA TLJ2LGB-ENA TLJ2LGB-EJA 5 A/T SL TLJ2LJB-EUA TLJ2LJB-ENA TLJ2LJB-EJA 5 A/T S TLJ2LHB-EUA TLJ2LHB-ENA TLJ2LFB-EJA 5 A/T Base TLJ2LFB-EUA TLJ2LFB-ENA TLJ2LHB-EJA C D Model code designations: E Position (Left to Right) Character 1 T Body type T: Wagon LJ Engine LJ: VQ35DE 4 2 Axle 2: 2WD 5 L Handle L: LH drive 2 3 Qualifier Definition F G 6 H Grade F: Base H: 3.5 S J: 3.5 SL G: 3.5 SE 7 B Transmission B: 5 A/T 482 Model 482: Quest 11 E Intake E: EGI U Zone U: Federal (50 state) N: Canada J: Mexico K 12 13 A Equipment A: Standard L H I 8 9 J 10 14 15 16 xxxxx M Option Codes 17 18 N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-43 2008 Quest IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Identification Number INFOID:0000000001718182 WAIA0025E Vehicle identification number arrangement: VIN Position (Left to Right) Character Qualifier Definition 1 2 5N1 Country code and vehicle manufacturer 5N1: USA produced multi-purpose vehicle 1N6: USA produced truck B: VQ35DE 3 4 B Engine 5 V Vehicle type V: NISSAN, Quest 6 3 Model change 0 to 9 7 8 Body type 8: 4 door wagon (passenger vehicle, 4-door van (cargo van)) 8 U Gross vehicle weight rating U: Standard (2-wheel drive with 4-wheel ABS, class D) 9 * Check digit 0 to 9 or X 10 8 Model year 8: 2008 Model year 11 N Manufacturing Plant N: Canton Mississippi Vehicle serial number Chassis number 12 13 14 15 XXXXXX 16 17 Revision: August 2007 GI-44 2008 Quest IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Serial Number GI B C WAIA0017E D Transaxle Serial Number E F G LAIA0039E H Dimensions INFOID:0000000001718183 Unit:mm (in) Overall length 5185 (204.13) Overall width 1972 (77.64) Overall height Tread width With roof rack J 1826 (71.90) Without roof rack 1778 (70.0) Front 1710 (67.32) Rear 1710 (67.32) Wheelbase 3150 (124.02) Minimum ground clearance 148 (5.83) I K L Wheels & Tires INFOID:0000000001718184 M Conventional Road wheel/offset mm (in) Tire size 16 X 6.5JJ Steel wheel/40 (1.57) 16 X 6.5JJ Aluminum/40 (1.57) 17 X 6.5JJ Aluminum/40 (1.57) P225/65R16 Spare N 16 X 4t T135/80D16 P225/60R17 O P Revision: August 2007 GI-45 2008 Quest TERMINOLOGY < SERVICE INFORMATION > TERMINOLOGY SAE J1930 Terminology List INFOID:0000000001718185 All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart. NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Air cleaner ACL Air cleaner Barometric pressure BARO *** Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD BAROS-BCDD BCDD Camshaft position CMP *** Camshaft position sensor CMPS Crank angle sensor Canister *** Canister Carburetor CARB Carburetor Charge air cooler CAC Intercooler Closed loop CL Closed loop Closed throttle position switch CTP switch Idle switch Clutch pedal position switch CPP switch Clutch switch Continuous fuel injection system CFI system *** Continuous trap oxidizer system CTOX system *** Crankshaft position CKP *** Crankshaft position sensor CKPS *** Data link connector DLC *** Data link connector for CONSULT-III DLC for CONSULT-III Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-III Diagnostic test mode DTM Diagnostic mode Diagnostic test mode selector DTM selector Diagnostic mode selector Diagnostic test mode I DTM I Mode I Diagnostic test mode II DTM II Mode II Diagnostic trouble code DTC Malfunction code Direct fuel injection system DFI system *** Distributor ignition system DI system Ignition timing control Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater EFE-mixture heater Mixture heater Early fuel evaporation system EFE system Mixture heater control Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM *** Electronic ignition system EI system Ignition timing control Engine control EC *** Engine control module ECM ECCS control unit Engine coolant temperature ECT Engine temperature Engine coolant temperature sensor ECTS Engine temperature sensor Engine modification EM *** Engine speed RPM Engine speed Erasable programmable read only memory EPROM *** Evaporative emission canister EVAP canister Canister Evaporative emission system EVAP system Canister control solenoid valve Exhaust gas recirculation valve EGR valve EGR valve Revision: August 2007 GI-46 2008 Quest TERMINOLOGY < SERVICE INFORMATION > NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT valve EGRC-BPT valve BPT valve Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid valve EGRC-solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor EGRT sensor GI B Exhaust gas temperature sensor C D EGR temperature sensor Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory FEEPROM *** Flash erasable programmable read only memory FEPROM *** Flexible fuel sensor FFS *** Flexible fuel system FF system *** Fuel pressure regulator *** Pressure regulator Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid valve *** PRVR control solenoid valve Fuel trim FT *** Heated Oxygen sensor HO2S Exhaust gas sensor Idle air control system IAC system Idle speed control Idle air control valve-air regulator IACV-air regulator Air regulator Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control valve IACV-AAC valve Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve IACV-FICD solenoid valve FICD solenoid valve Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve IACV-idle up control solenoid valve Idle up control solenoid valve Idle speed control-FI pot ISC-FI pot FI pot Idle speed control system ISC system *** Ignition control IC *** Ignition control module ICM *** Indirect fuel injection system IFI system *** Intake air IA Air Intake air temperature sensor IAT sensor Air temperature sensor Knock *** Detonation Knock sensor KS Detonation sensor Malfunction indicator lamp MIL Check engine light Manifold absolute pressure MAP *** Manifold absolute pressure sensor MAPS *** Manifold differential pressure MDP *** Manifold differential pressure sensor MDPS *** E F G H I J K L M N O Manifold surface temperature MST *** Manifold surface temperature sensor MSTS *** Manifold vacuum zone MVZ *** Manifold vacuum zone sensor MVZS *** Mass air flow sensor MAFS Air flow meter Mixture control solenoid valve MC solenoid valve Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve Multiport fuel injection System MFI system Fuel injection control Revision: August 2007 GI-47 P 2008 Quest TERMINOLOGY < SERVICE INFORMATION > NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM *** On board diagnostic system OBD system Self-diagnosis Open loop OL Open loop Oxidation catalyst OC Catalyst Oxidation catalytic converter system OC system *** Oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust gas sensor Park position switch *** Park switch Park/neutral position switch PNP switch Park/neutral switch Inhibitor switch Neutral position switch Periodic trap oxidizer system PTOX system *** Positive crankcase ventilation PCV Positive crankcase ventilation Positive crankcase ventilation valve PCV valve PCV valve Powertrain control module PCM *** Programmable read only memory PROM *** Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve PAIRC solenoid valve AIV control solenoid valve Pulsed secondary air injection system PAIR system Air induction valve (AIV) control Pulsed secondary air injection valve PAIR valve Air induction valve Random access memory RAM *** Read only memory ROM *** Scan tool ST *** Secondary air injection pump AIR pump *** Secondary air injection system AIR system *** Sequential multiport fuel injection system SFI system Sequential fuel injection Service reminder indicator SRI *** Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system *** Simultaneous fuel injection Smoke puff limiter system SPL system *** Supercharger SC *** Supercharger bypass SCB *** System readiness test SRT *** Thermal vacuum valve TVV Thermal vacuum valve Three way catalyst TWC Catalyst Three way catalytic converter system TWC system *** Three way + oxidation catalyst TWC + OC Catalyst Three way + oxidation catalytic converter system TWC + OC system *** Throttle body TB Throttle chamber SPI body Throttle body fuel injection system TBI system Fuel injection control Throttle position TP Throttle position Throttle position sensor TPS Throttle sensor Throttle position switch TP switch Throttle switch Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve Lock-up cancel solenoid Lock-up solenoid Revision: August 2007 GI-48 2008 Quest TERMINOLOGY < SERVICE INFORMATION > NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Transmission control module TCM A/T control unit Turbocharger TC Turbocharger Vehicle speed sensor VSS Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor VAFS Air flow meter Warm up oxidation catalyst WU-OC Catalyst Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system WU-OC system *** Warm up three way catalyst WU-TWC Catalyst Warm up three way catalytic converter sysWU-TWC system tem *** Wide open throttle position switch Full switch WOTP switch GI B C D E ***: Not applicable F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GI-49 2008 Quest BODY SECTION GW GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Handling for Adhesive and Primer ............................ 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 5 Work Flow ................................................................. 5 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 9 WINDSHIELD GLASS ........................................11 Removal and Installation ......................................... 11 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING .........13 Removal and Installation ......................................... 13 SKYVIEW ROOF ................................................15 Removal and Installation ......................................... 15 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ..............................17 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 17 System Description ................................................. 17 CAN Communication System Description ............... 20 Schematic (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .... 21 Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ........................................................ 22 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................ 24 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .................................... 25 Revision: August 2007 Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout .....................................26 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/ Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .............................................26 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................27 Schematic (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .........28 Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ........................................................29 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout .....................................32 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .............................................33 Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................34 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .............................................34 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................35 Work Flow ................................................................35 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................35 Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) .......................................................................36 Symptom Chart (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ....37 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ....38 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................38 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................39 GW-1 2008 Quest F G H GW J K L M N O P Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 40 Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection... 42 Front Power Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection... 42 Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ................................... 43 Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ................................... 45 Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front RH ................ 47 Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ............................................ 50 Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) ............................................ 52 Encoder Circuit Inspection Front RH ...................... 54 Door Switch Check ................................................. 56 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ...................................................................... 57 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With Rear Power Vent Windows)... 59 Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) ............... 60 Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) .................... 62 Rear Power Vent Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection .................................................................. 64 Rear Power Vent Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection .................................................................. 65 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ..... 67 Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 SLIDE DOOR GLASS ........................................ 70 Removal and Installation ........................................ 70 SIDE WINDOW GLASS ..................................... 72 Removal and Installation (without Rear Power Vent Windows) ....................................................... 72 Revision: August 2007 Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows) ................................................................ 73 INSIDE MIRROR ................................................ 74 Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR - ....................................... 74 Removal and Installation ......................................... 75 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ........................... 76 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 76 System Description ................................................. 76 CAN Communication System Description .............. 77 Schematic ............................................................... 78 Wiring Diagram - DEF - ........................................... 79 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 81 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 81 Work Flow ............................................................... 82 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 82 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart ......................... 82 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ... 83 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection... 83 Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection ................................................................... 84 Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection .............. 85 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection ................................................................... 86 Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection ............ 88 Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection ........... 89 Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection .............. 89 Filament Check ....................................................... 90 Filament Repair ....................................................... 91 DOOR MIRROR ................................................. 92 Automatic Drive Positioner Reverse Tilt Mirror ....... 92 Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ................................... 92 Door Mirror Assembly ............................................. 93 Door Mirror Glass .................................................... 93 GW-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718604 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Handling for Adhesive and Primer INFOID:0000000001718605 C D E F G H • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. GW • Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder. • Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found, J do not use it. • If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with soap. • When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718606 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Locating the noise — (J-39570) Chassis ear SIIA0993E Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718607 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E ( – ) Suction lifter Holding the door glass LIIA1991E Revision: August 2007 GW-4 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow A INFOID:0000000001718608 B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain GW all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. • Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) K Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. • Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L dent on materials/often brought on by activity. • Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. • Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. N • Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) O Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. • Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 GW-5 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. • feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. • placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. Revision: August 2007 GW-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. A B CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718609 C D Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL E Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel F 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield G 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint H These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harGW ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. J CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. K L DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK GW-7 N O P Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 M 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINER Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: August 2007 GW-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718610 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O LIWA0276E Revision: August 2007 GW-9 2008 Quest P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > LAIA0071E Revision: August 2007 GW-10 2008 Quest WINDSHIELD GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WINDSHIELD GLASS A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718611 B C D E F LIIA0652E G REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to GW-75, "Removal and Installation". H 2. Partially remove the headliner (front edge). Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 4. Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. GW • Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. • If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: J When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: K • When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. L M N PIIA0186E O INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. • While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. • The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. • Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Revision: August 2007 GW-11 2008 Quest P WINDSHIELD GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. • The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. • Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. • Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. • Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. • The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. LIIA0850E Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: August 2007 GW-12 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718612 B C D E F G H GW LIIA1562E 1. Foam dam 4. Back door outer panel 2. Back door window glass 3. Bond J REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wiper arm and motor. Refer to EI-31. 2. Remove the connectors and grounds for the rear window defogger. • Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. • If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: • When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. K L M N SBF034B INSTALLATION P Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. • While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. • The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. • Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. Revision: August 2007 O GW-13 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: • Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. • The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. • Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. • Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. • Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. • The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water leaks for Rear Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: August 2007 GW-14 2008 Quest SKYVIEW ROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > SKYVIEW ROOF A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718613 B C D E F G H GW LIIA0851E J REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-38. 2. Apply protective tape around the skyview roof glass to protect the painted surface from damage. 3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: • When a skyview roof glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. K L M N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. • While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. • The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. • Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: • Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable. • The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Revision: August 2007 GW-15 2008 Quest O P SKYVIEW ROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. • Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the skyview roof in case of an accident. CAUTION: • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. • Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off. • The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Skyview Roof Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: August 2007 GW-16 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718614 B C D E F G H GW LIIA2453E 1. 4. A. Rear power vent window motor LH B52, RH B147 B. Condenser-3 B65, -4 B68 (view with rear finishers removed) 2. A. A-pillar LH B. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 3. A. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch D7, D8 Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH D105 B. Front door switch LH B8, RH B108 C. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) D14 Front power window motor LH D9, RH D104 (view with door finisher removed) K L System Description INFOID:0000000001718615 Power is supplied at all times • from 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70 • through BCM terminal 69 • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 (without rear power vent windows) or 19 (with rear power vent windows) • to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38 • through BCM terminal 68 • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10. With ignition switch in ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 Revision: August 2007 J GW-17 2008 Quest M N O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows) or 17 (with rear power vent windows) • to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. MANUAL OPERATION Front Door LH WINDOW UP When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the up position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8 • to front power window motor LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11 • to front power window motor LH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. WINDOW DOWN When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11 • to front power window motor LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8 • to front power window motor LH terminal 2. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. Front Door RH POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OPERATION WINDOW UP When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8 • to front power window motor RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9 • to front power window motor RH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. WINDOW DOWN When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9 • to front power window motor RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8 • to front power window motor RH terminal 2. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION Power window serial link signal is sent • though main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) or 14 (with rear power vent windows) • to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. VENT WINDOW CLOSE (WITH REAR POWER VENT WINDOWS) When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the close position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 • to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3 • to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 2. Then, the motor closes the window until the switch is released. Revision: August 2007 GW-18 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the close position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 • to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 • to rear power window motor RH terminal 2. Then, the motor closes the window until the switch is released. VENT WINDOW OPEN (WITH REAR POWER VENT WINDOWS) When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the open position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3 • to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 • to rear power vent window motor LH terminal 1. Then, the motor opens the window until the switch is released. When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the open position, power is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 • to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 • to rear power vent window motor RH terminal 1. Then, the motor opens the window until the switch is released. A B C D E F G H AUTO OPERATION The AUTO feature allows the front window LH or RH (driver) or front window RH (passenger) to open or close without holding the window switch in the down or up position. GW POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link and BUS signal. The following signals are transmitted from BCM to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH • Front door window RH operation signal • Power window control by front door lock assembly (key cylinder switch) signal • Power window lock signal • Keyless power window down signal • Retained power operation signal J K L POWER WINDOW LOCK The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for front door window LH. When in the lock position, the power window lock signal is transmitted to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH by power window serial link. This prevents the power window motor from operating. M RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10 • from BCM terminal 68. When power and ground are supplied, the BCM continues to be energized, and the power window can be operated. The retained power operation is canceled when the front LH or front RH door is opened. Retained power operation period can be changed by CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH monitor the power window motor operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for front LH and front RH power window by the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window motor LH and RH. When main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH detects interruption during the following close operations Revision: August 2007 GW-19 2008 Quest N O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position • automatic close operation during retained power operation Main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH controls each front power window motor for open and the power window will be lowered. POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) When ignition switch is OFF, front power window LH and RH can be opened or closed by turning the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) to the UNLOCK/LOCK position for more than 1 second. • Front power windows can be opened as the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is kept fully turned to the UNLOCK position. • Front power windows can be closed as the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is kept fully turned to the LOCK position. • While performing open/close operation for the windows, power window is stopped when the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is placed in the NEUTRAL position. • When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening operation is performed, the power window opening stops. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718616 Refer toLAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 GW-20 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718617 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O WIWA1774E Revision: August 2007 GW-21 2008 Quest P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718618 WIWA1775E Revision: August 2007 GW-22 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O WIWA1776E P Revision: August 2007 GW-23 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1777E Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Win- Revision: August 2007 GW-24 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > dows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718619 A B C LIIA2454E D Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718620 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery power supply — Battery voltage Encoder power supply Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) lock signal Key position (Neutral → Locked) 5→0 7 R Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) unlock signal Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) 5→0 8 G/R Front power window motor LH UP signal Front power window motor LH is operated UP Battery voltage Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON) 0 Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 Terminal Wire Color 1 W/R 5 G/R 6 9 10 11 12 G/W W/L G/W Y Item Limit switch signal RAP signal E F G H GW J K Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 second after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 second after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 Front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates 0 Front power window motor LH DOWN signal Front power window motor LH is operated DOWN Battery voltage Power window serial link Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates L M N O P PIIA2344J Revision: August 2007 GW-25 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color 13 G/Y Item Encoder pulse signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front power window motor LH operates OCC3383D 14 W/B 15 B Limit switch and encoder ground — 0 Ground — 0 Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718621 LIIA2454E Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/ Unlock Switch RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718622 Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 3 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground — 0 4 G/R Encoder power supply Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 8 L Front power window motor RH UP signal Front power window motor RH is operated UP Battery voltage 9 G Front power window motor RH DOWN signal Front power window motor RH is operated DOWN Battery voltage 10 W/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage 11 B Ground — 0 12 G/Y Encoder pulse signal Front power window motor RH operates OCC3383D Revision: August 2007 GW-26 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal 15 16 Wire Color G/W Y/B Item Limit switch signal Power window serial link Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON) 0 Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 A B C D Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates E PIIA2344J Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718623 F Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". G H GW J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-27 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718624 WIWA1778E Revision: August 2007 GW-28 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718625 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O WIWA1779E Revision: August 2007 GW-29 2008 Quest P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1780E Revision: August 2007 GW-30 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O WIWA1781E P Revision: August 2007 GW-31 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1782E Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows) Revision: August 2007 GW-32 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718626 A B C LIIA2455E D Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718627 Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Rear LH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated CLOSE 1 R/Y Rear power vent window LH CLOSE signal 2 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground 3 R/B Rear power vent window LH OPEN signal Rear LH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated OPEN 4 L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) lock signal Key position (Neutral → Locked) Rear power window vent OPEN signal Rear RH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated OPEN — 5 L/Y 6 R Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) unlock signal Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) 7 R Rear power window RH CLOSE signal 8 G/R Front power window motor LH UP signal 9 10 11 G/W W/L G/W Revision: August 2007 Limit switch signal RAP signal Front power window motor LH DOWN signal Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery voltage E F G 0 H Battery voltage GW 5→0 J Battery voltage 5→0 K Rear RH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated CLOSE Battery voltage L Front power window motor LH is operated UP Battery voltage M Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON) 0 Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 N O Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 Front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates 0 Front power window motor LH is operated DOWN Battery voltage GW-33 2008 Quest P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color 13 G/Y Item Encoder pulse signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front power window motor LH operates OCC3383D 14 Y Power window serial link Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates PIIA2344J 15 G/R 17 B 19 W/R Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 Ground — 0 Battery power supply — Battery voltage Encoder power supply Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718628 LIIA2454E Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718629 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — 0 Encoder power supply Ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 L Front power window motor RH UP signal Front power window motor RH is operated UP Battery voltage 9 G Front power window motor RH DOWN signal Front power window motor RH is operated DOWN Battery voltage 10 W/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage 11 B Ground — 0 Terminal Wire Color 3 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground 4 G/R 8 Revision: August 2007 Item GW-34 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color Item Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition A B 12 G/Y Front power window motor RH operates Encoder pulse signal C OCC3383D 15 G/W Limit switch signal Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fullyclosed position (ON) 0 D Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 E F 16 Y/B Power window serial link Ignition switch is ON or power window timer operating G PIIA2344J Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (With Rear Power Vent Windows) H INFOID:0000000001718630 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". GW Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. INFOID:0000000001718631 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-17, "System Description". According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-36, "Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows)" or GW-37, "Symptom Chart (With Rear Power Vent Windows)". Does power window system operate normally? Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3. Inspection End. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718632 J K L CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. M BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Content WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. ACTIVE TEST Revision: August 2007 GW-35 2008 Quest N O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test Item RETAINED PWR Description This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when turning on “RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-III screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-III can be operated with ignition switch in OFF position. “RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-III might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is OFF. WORK SUPPORT Work item RETAINED PWR Description RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power supply period between three steps • MODE1 (45 sec.) / MODE2 (OFF) / MODE3 (2 min.). DATA MONITOR Work item Description IGN ON SW Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of ignition switch DOOR SW-DR Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of front door switch driver side DOOR SW-AS Indicates (ON/OFF) condition of front door switch passenger side Symptom Chart (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718633 • Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Symptom None of the power windows can be operated using any switch Front power window LH alone does not operate Front power window RH alone does not operate Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front LH) Revision: August 2007 Repair order Refer to page 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check BCS-15 2. Main power window and door lock/unlock supply and ground circuit check GW-38 3. Power window serial link check GW-60 1. Front power window motor LH circuit check GW-42 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch EI-29 1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH power and ground circuit check GW-40 2. Power window serial link check GW-60 3. Front power window motor RH circuit check GW-42 4. Replace BCM BCS-18 1. Door window sliding part malfunction • A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. • Glass run rubber wear or deformation. • Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. — 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-67 3. Limit switch circuit check LH GW-43 4. Encoder circuit check LH GW-50 GW-36 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Repair order 1. Door window sliding part malfunction • A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. • Glass run rubber wear or deformation. • Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front RH) Power window retained power operation does not operate properly Front power windows do not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) Power window lock switch does not function Refer to page A — B 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-67 3. Limit switch circuit check RH GW-47 4. Encoder circuit check RH GW-54 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting. GW-35 2. Door switch check GW-56 3. Replace BCM. BCS-18 1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check GW-57 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch 1. Power window lock switch circuit check Symptom Chart (With Rear Power Vent Windows) EI-29 C D E F GW-60 INFOID:0000000001718634 G • Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. H Symptom Repair order Refer to page 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check BCS-15 2. Main power window and door lock/unlock supply and ground circuit check GW-39 3. Power window serial link check GW-60 1. Front power window motor LH circuit check GW-42 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch EI-29 1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH power and ground circuit check GW-40 2. Power window serial link check GW-62 3. Front power window motor RH circuit check GW-42 4. Replace BCM BCS-18 Rear power vent window LH alone does not operate 1. Rear power vent window motor LH circuit check GW-64 Rear power vent window RH alone does not operate 1. Rear power vent window motor RH circuit check GW-65 None of the power windows can be operated using any switch Front power window LH alone does not operate Front power window RH alone does not operate Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front LH) Revision: August 2007 1. Door window sliding part malfunction • A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. • Glass run rubber wear or deformation. • Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. J K L M N — 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-67 3. Limit switch circuit check LH GW-45 4. Encoder circuit check LH GW-50 GW-37 GW 2008 Quest O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (front RH) Power window retained power operation does not operate properly Front power windows do not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) Power window lock switch does not function Repair order Refer to page 1. Door window sliding part malfunction • A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. • Glass run rubber wear or deformation. • Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. — 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-67 3. Limit switch circuit check RH GW-47 4. Encoder circuit check RH GW-54 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting. GW-35 2. Door switch check GW-56 3. Replace BCM. BCS-18 1.Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check GW-59 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch 1. Power window lock switch circuit check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection EI-29 GW-62 INFOID:0000000001718635 Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718636 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10 and ground. 10 - Ground 1 - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2312E 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0604E 3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-38 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 2. Check continuity between BCM connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector. A B Connector A Terminal 68 BCM: M20 Connector B Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 69 Terminal Continuity 10 Yes 1 Yes C LIIA2363E 3. Check continuity between BCM and ground. Connector A Terminal BCM: M20 68 D Continuity Ground E No 69 No F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. H GW 68 - Ground 69 - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". J LIIA0917E Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply Circuit Inspection (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718637 K L 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10, D8 terminal 19 and ground. 10 - Ground 19 - Ground N : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O LIIA2297E 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-39 2008 Quest P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 3. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0392E 3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between BCM connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connectors. Connector A Connector Terminal B Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 68 Terminal Continuity 10 Yes LIIA2215E BCM: M20 C Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D8 69 3. 19 Yes Check continuity between BCM and ground. Connector A Terminal BCM: M20 68 Continuity Ground 69 No No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 - Ground 69 - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". LIIA0917E Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718638 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-40 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 10 and ground. 10 - Ground A : Battery voltage B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C LIIA1257E 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 - Ground E F : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G LIIA1258E 3.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between BCM connector and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connectors. Connector A BCM: M20 B Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH: D105 69 GW J Connector Terminal H Terminal Continuity 10 Yes K LIIA2364E 3. Check continuity between BCM and ground. Connector A Terminal BCM: M20 Ground 69 L Continuity M No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N 4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. O Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and ground. 69 - Ground P : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". WIIA0508E Revision: August 2007 GW-41 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718639 1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 8 D7 Ground 11 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Closing Battery voltage Opening 0 Closing 0 Opening Battery voltage LIIA0317E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and front power window motor LH connector D9 terminals 1, 2. 8-2 11 - 1 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Front Power Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection LIIA1260E INFOID:0000000001718641 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 8 D105 Ground 9 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Closing Battery voltage Opening 0 Closing 0 Opening Battery voltage LIIA1261E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-42 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. 3. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH (A) connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and front power window motor RH (B) connector D104 terminals 1, 2. 8-2 9-1 A B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2296E D Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) E INFOID:0000000001718642 1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground. Connector D7 Terminals (+) 9 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 (-) Ground G H GW LIIA0339E Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) J 5 OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 3. O LIIA0923E 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 P GW-43 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 2. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector. Connector A Connector Terminal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 B Terminal Continuity 6 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 14 LIIA2276E 3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal B Continuity Ground Front power window motor LH: D9 6 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector. Connector A Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 2. Connector Terminal 9 B Terminal Continuity 5 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor LH: D9 Terminal LIIA2277E Continuity Ground 5 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. Connector Terminal Main power window door lock/unlock switch: D7 14 Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. LIIA2278E Revision: August 2007 GW-44 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 - Ground B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D LIIA0604E 7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. E Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector. Connector Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 Terminals (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 (-) 9 14 F G H LIIA2279E GW Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 J OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation" . Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) K INFOID:0000000001718643 1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground. Connector D7 Terminals (+) 9 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 (-) Ground M N O LIIA0339E Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) P 5 OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-45 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front power window motor LH. 3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA0923E 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector. Connector A Connector Terminal Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 B Terminal Continuity 6 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 2 LIIA2222E 3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal B Continuity Ground Front power window motor LH: D9 6 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and front power window motor LH connector. Connector A Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 2. Connector Terminal 9 B Terminal Continuity 5 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor LH: D9 Terminal LIIA2277E Continuity Ground 5 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: August 2007 GW-46 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND A Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. B Connector Terminal Main power window door lock/unlock switch: D7 2 Continuity Ground Yes C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. D LIIA2224E 6.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT E Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 - Ground F : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. G H LIIA1253E 7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. GW Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector. Connector Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 Terminals (+) 9 (-) 2 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window LH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Front door window LH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 J K LIIA2225E M N OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation" . Limit Switch Circuit Inspection Front RH O INFOID:0000000001718645 1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH LIMIT SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 GW-47 L P 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between power window motor RH connector D105 terminal 15 and ground. Terminals Connector (+) D105 15 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 (-) Ground LIIA1263E Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA0923E 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and front power window motor RH connector. Connector A Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH: D105 Connector Terminal 3 B Terminal Continuity 6 Yes Front power window motor RH: D104 LIIA2285E 3. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor RH: D104 Terminal Continuity Ground 6 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 GW-48 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and front power window motor RH connector. Connector A Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH: D105 2. Connector Terminal B Terminal Continuity 5 Yes Front power window motor RH: D104 15 Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor RH: D104 Terminal A B C LIIA2286E D Continuity E Ground 5 No F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 5.CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and ground. Connector Power window door lock/ unlock switch RH: D105 Terminal 3 H Continuity Ground GW Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. J LIIA2283E 6.CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH GROUND CIRCUIT K Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. M N LIIA1258E 7.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH LIMIT SIGNAL O P Revision: August 2007 GW-49 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Connect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH and front power window motor RH. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector. Terminals Connector (+) Power window and door lock/ unlock switch RH: D105 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door window RH is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Front door window RH is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 (-) 15 3 LIIA2284E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718646 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Approx. 10V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA2299E 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector. Connector A Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 4. Terminal 5 Connector B Terminal Continuity 4 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 LIIA2287E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor LH: D9 Terminal 4 Ground Continuity No OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 GW-50 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground B C : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. D LIIA0923E 4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 6 - 14 F : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. H LIIA1158E 5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. GW Connect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Condition J K Signal L LIIA0364E D7 13 Ground Opening M OCC3383D OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 6. N O 6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT P Revision: August 2007 GW-51 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector. Connector Terminal A Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch: D7 4. Connector B Terminal Continuity 3 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 13 LIIA2210E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal B Continuity Ground Front power window motor LH: D9 3 No OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Encoder Circuit Inspection Front LH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718647 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Approx. 10V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA2299E 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector. Connector A Main power window and door lock/unlock switch: D7 4. Terminal 15 Connector B Terminal Continuity 4 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 LIIA2289E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor LH: D9 Revision: August 2007 Terminal 4 Ground Continuity No GW-52 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. A 3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND B 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. E LIIA0923E 4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. F Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 2. 6-2 G : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW WIIA0511E 5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. J Connect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Condition K L Signal M LIIA0364E D7 13 Ground Opening N OCC3383D OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-53 2008 Quest O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. 3. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector. Connector Terminal A Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch: D7 4. Connector B Terminal Continuity 3 Yes Front power window motor LH: D9 13 LIIA2210E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal B Continuity Ground Front power window motor LH: D9 3 No OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Encoder Circuit Inspection Front RH INFOID:0000000001718649 1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Approx. 10V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA2290E 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector. Connector A Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH: D105 4. Terminal 4 Connector B Terminal Continuity 4 Yes Front power window motor RH: D104 LIIA2294E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector B Front power window motor RH: D104 Revision: August 2007 Terminal Continuity Ground 4 No GW-54 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. A 3.CHECK ENCODER GROUND B 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground. 6 - Ground : Continuity should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. E LIIA0923E 4.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. F Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 3. 6-3 G : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW LIIA1264E 5.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. J Connect front power window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Condition K L Signal M LIIA1267E D105 12 Ground Opening N OCC3383D OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-55 2008 Quest O P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. 3. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector. Connector A Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH: D105 4. Connector Terminal B Terminal Continuity 3 Yes Front power window motor RH: D104 12 LIIA2295E Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal B Continuity Ground Front power window motor RH: D104 3 No OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Door Switch Check INFOID:0000000001718650 1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check front door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Monitor item Condition OPEN: ON DOOR SW-DR CLOSE: OFF OPEN: ON DOOR SW-AS CLOSE: OFF Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. Item Connector Front RH M18 Terminals (+) (-) 12 Ground Front LH M19 47 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) OPEN 0 CLOSE Battery voltage OPEN 0 CLOSE Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Front door switch is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. WIIA0515E 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-56 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front door switch LH or RH and BCM. 3. Check continuity between front door switch LH or RH and BCM. Connector A 4. Connector Terminal B Terminal Continuity BCM: M18 12 Front door switch RH: B108 1 Yes BCM: M19 47 Front door switch LH: B8 1 Yes A B C WIIA1126E D Check continuity between front door switch LH or RH and ground. E Connector Terminal A Front door switch LH: B8 1 Front door switch RH: B108 1 Continuity Ground F No No G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 1 and body ground part of front door switch. Terminal 1 Body ground part of front door switch Door switch GW Continuity Pushed No Released Yes OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace malfunctioning front door switch. J K WIIA0782E L Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718651 M With CONSULT-III • Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". N 1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL O “KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to lock. • Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". “KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to unlock. Without CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 GW-57 2008 Quest P POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. Terminals Connector (+) (-) 7 D7 Ground 6 Key position Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Unlock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Lock 0 LIIA1161E OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6. 7-6 6-1 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1602E 3.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1572E 4.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5. Terminals 6 5 1 Key position Continuity Neutral/Lock No Unlock Yes Neutral/Unlock No Lock Yes OK or NG LIIA1573E OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 GW-58 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718652 1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A B With CONSULT-III • Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". C “KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to lock. D • Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-III. Refer to GW-35, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". E “KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to unlock. F Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 6 D7 Ground 4 Key position Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Lock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Unlock 5 Unlock 0 G H GW LIIA1269E OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> GO TO 2. J 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6. 6-6 4-1 L M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA1571E O 3.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND P Revision: August 2007 GW-59 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1572E 4.CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5. Terminals 6 5 1 Key position Continuity Neutral/Lock No Unlock Yes Neutral/Unlock No Lock Yes OK or NG LIIA1573E OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-168, "Removal and Installation". Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718653 1.CHECK BUS OUTPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door lock and unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”, “UNLK SW DR/AS”) in DATA MONITOR mode for “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item". • When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR/AS : ON • When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR/AS : ON Without CONSULT-III Remove key from ignition switch, and close front door LH and RH. 2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 1. LIIA0391E Revision: August 2007 GW-60 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector A Terminals (+) Signal (-) B M18 22 Ground C PIIA1297E D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. E 2.CHECK BCM BUS SIGNAL Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item". When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, is the front power window LH and RH lowered? OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND 1. 2. 3. G H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 - Ground F GW J : Continuity should exist. K LIIA0604E 4. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA1270E 4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT O P Revision: August 2007 GW-61 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM. 2. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 12. 22 - 12 : Continuity should exist. LIIA0649E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 - 16 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1271E Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (With Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718654 1.CHECK BUS SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door lock and unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”, “UNLK SW DR/AS”) in DATA MONITOR mode for “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item". • When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR/AS : ON • When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR/AS : ON Without CONSULT-III Remove key from ignition switch, and close front door LH and RH. 2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 1. LIIA0391E Revision: August 2007 GW-62 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector A Terminals (+) Signal (-) B M18 22 Ground C PIIA1297E D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. E 2.CHECK BCM BUS OUTPUT SIGNAL Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "MULTI REMOTE ENT" with CONSULT-III. Refer to BL-56, "CONSULT-III Application Item". When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, is the front power window LH and RH lowered? OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND 1. 2. 3. G H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 - Ground F GW J : Continuity should exist. K LIIA0392E 4. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 - Ground L : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. N LIIA1270E 4.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT O P Revision: August 2007 GW-63 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM. 2. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 22 - 14 : Continuity should exist. LIIA0394E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 - 16 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1271E Rear Power Vent Window Motor LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718655 1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power vent window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power vent window motor LH connector B52 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Connector Rear power vent window motor LH: B52 Terminals (+) (-) 1 Ground 2 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Closing Battery voltage Opening 0 Closing 0 Opening Battery voltage LIIA2273E OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power vent window motor LH. Refer to GW-73, "Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows)". NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR POWER VENT WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 1, 3 and rear power vent window motor LH (B) connector B52 terminals 1, 2. 3-2 1-1 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: August 2007 LIIA2274E GW-64 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. A Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position. Connect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 3 and connector D8 terminal 17. 1 - 17 3 - 17 B C : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Rear Power Vent Window Motor RH Circuit Inspection D LIIA0623E E INFOID:0000000001718656 1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power vent window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power vent window motor RH connector B147 terminals 1, 2 and ground. G H Connector Terminals (+) Rear power vent window motor RH: B147 (-) 1 Ground 2 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Closing Battery voltage Opening 0 Closing 0 Opening Battery voltage GW LIIA2273E J OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power vent window motor RH. Refer to GW-73, "Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows)". NG >> GO TO 2. K 2.CHECK REAR POWER VENT WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector (A) D7 terminals 5, 7 and rear power vent window motor RH connector (B) B147 terminals 1, 2. 5-2 7-1 N : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2275E 3.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 GW-65 P 2008 Quest POWER WINDOW SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position. 2. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 5, 7 and connector D8 terminal 17. 5 - 17 7 - 17 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 GW-66 LIIA0331E 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718657 B C D E F G H WIIA0793E 1. Door glass run 2. Door glass regulator nuts 3. GW Regulator motor FRONT DOOR GLASS J Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. Connect the battery negative cable. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Remove the inside seal. Remove the door glass bolts. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. K L M N O P LIIA1687E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Revision: August 2007 GW-67 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. Connect the battery negative cable. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Remove the door glass bolts. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). WIIA0767E 9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly. 10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. • Wire wear • Regulator deformation The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. LIIA0670E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". Door glass bolts : 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Disassembly 1. 2. Remove the regulator motor bolts. Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION • Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. Revision: August 2007 GW-68 2008 Quest FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. A Setting of Limit Switch B If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). • Removal and installation of the regulator. • Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator. • Removal and installation of the door glass. • Removal and installation of the door glass run. C Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. D E F G SIIA0347E H Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: GW Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position. 3. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-69 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SLIDE DOOR GLASS Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718658 LIIA0673E REMOVAL 1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: • When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. • While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. • The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. • Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: • Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable. • The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. • Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. Revision: August 2007 GW-70 2008 Quest SLIDE DOOR GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the slide door glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: • Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. • Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator. • Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off. • The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-71 2008 Quest SIDE WINDOW GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal and Installation (without Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718659 WBIA0751E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31. Remove the rear side window latch bolts. Disconnect the antenna. Remove the side window front bolts and glass. CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified torque. Install rear side window latch bolts. Connect the antenna. Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31. Revision: August 2007 GW-72 2008 Quest SIDE WINDOW GLASS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows) INFOID:0000000001718660 A B C D E F G H WBIA0751E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. GW Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31. Disconnect the antenna. Disconnect the rear side window motor harness. Remove the rear side window motor bolts. Remove the side window front bolts and glass. CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. • Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. J K L INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified torque. Install rear side window motor bolts. Connect the rear side window motor harness. Connect the antenna. Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to EI-31. M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-73 2008 Quest INSIDE MIRROR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSIDE MIRROR Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR - INFOID:0000000001718661 WIWA1783E Revision: August 2007 GW-74 2008 Quest INSIDE MIRROR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718662 A B C D E LIIA0277E 1. Inside mirror 2. F Inside mirror finisher REMOVAL G 1. 2. 3. 4. H Remove inside mirror finisher. Remove inside mirror screw. Slide the mirror upward to remove. Disconnect the connector. GW INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-75 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718663 LIIA2456E 1. A. Hood opener B. Rear window defogger relay B4 2. IPDM E/R E119, E121, E124 3. A. A-pillar LH B. BCM M18, M19 (view with instrument panel removed) 4. Door mirror LH (door mirror defogger) D13 Door mirror RH (door mirror defogger) D113 5. Rear window defogger D504 (view of 6. back door LH with back door upper finishers removed) Rear window defogger ground connector D515 (view of back door RH with back door upper finishers removed) 7. Front air control M49, M50 (with au- 8. tomatic air conditioner) Front air control M49, M50 (with manual air conditioner) System Description INFOID:0000000001718664 The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuses (No. 32 and 37, located in the IPDM E/R) • to rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 6 • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to rear window defogger relay terminal 1 • through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38 • through 10A fuse [No. 2, located in the fuse block (J/B)] Revision: August 2007 GW-76 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to front air control terminal 15. Ground is supplied A • to BCM terminal 67 • to front air control terminal 36 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 B • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 9 C • through front air control terminal 16 • through front air control terminal 36 • through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. D Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated. Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger switch is turned to ON. Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display control unit (with color display) via E CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L). When IPDM E/R receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied • to rear window defogger relay terminal 2 • through IPDM E/R terminal 52 F • through IPDM E/R terminal 60 • through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Then rear window defogger relay is energized. G With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When rear window defogger relay is turned to ON (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied • through rear window defogger relay terminal 5 • through fuse block (J/B) terminal 2Q H • through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • through fuse block (J/B) terminal 5N • to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 6. GW Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 5 is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. With power and ground supplied, door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718665 J Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 GW-77 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718666 WIWA1784E Revision: August 2007 GW-78 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - DEF - INFOID:0000000001718667 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O ALLWA0136GB Revision: August 2007 GW-79 2008 Quest P REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1786E Revision: August 2007 GW-80 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H GW J K L M N O WIWA1787E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM P INFOID:0000000001718668 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001718669 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 GW-81 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. INFOID:0000000001718670 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-76, "System Description". According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-82, "Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart". Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3. Inspection End. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718671 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Content WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Display Item List Monitor item “Operation” Content REAR DEF SW “ON/OFF” Displays “Press (ON)/others (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch. IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays “IGN (ON)/OFF” status determined with the ignition switch signal. ACTIVE TEST Display Item List Test item Content REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Gives a drive signal to the rear window defogger to activate it. Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001718672 • Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Symptom 1. Rear window defogger and door mirror defoggers do not operate. (With door mirror defogger) Revision: August 2007 Diagnoses/Service procedure Refer to page BCM power supply and ground circuit check BCS-15 2. IPDM E/R auto active test check PG-20 3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check GW-83 4. Rear window defogger power supply circuit check GW-84 5. Replace IPDM E/R PG-28 GW-82 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom 1. Diagnoses/Service procedure Refer to page BCM power supply and ground circuit check BCS-15 2. IPDM E/R auto active test check PG-20 3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check GW-83 4. Rear window defogger power supply circuit check GW-84 5. Rear window defogger circuit check GW-85 6. Filament check GW-90 7. Replace IPDM E/R PG-28 1. Rear window defogger circuit check GW-85 2. Filament check GW-90 Both door mirror defoggers do not operate but rear window defogger operates. (With door mirror defogger) 1. Door mirror defogger power supply circuit check GW-86 Door mirror LH defogger does not operate. 1. Door mirror LH defogger circuit check GW-88 Door mirror RH defogger does not operate. 1. Door mirror RH defogger circuit check GW-89 Rear window defogger does not operate. (Without door mirror defogger) Rear window defogger does not operate but both door mirror defoggers operate. (With door mirror defogger) Rear window defogger switch does not light, and rear window defogger is not displayed on the color display (if equipped), but rear window defogger operates. A B C D E F 1. Rear window defogger signal check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection GW-89 G INFOID:0000000001718673 Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection H INFOID:0000000001718674 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION GW With CONSULT-III Check (“REAR DEF SW”, “IGN ON SW”) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-III. J When rear window defogger switch is turned to ON REAR DEF SW: ON When ignition switch is turned to ON IGN ON SW: ON K L Without CONSULT-III 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector ground. M Connector M18 Terminals (+) 9 (-) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch is pressed. 0 Rear window defogger switch is OFF. 5 OK or NG OK >> Rear window defogger switch check is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. N O LIIA0402E P 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 GW-83 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and front air control. 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 (A) terminal 9 and front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 16. 9 - 16 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground 9 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. LIIA2459E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground. 9 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to ATC-127. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". LIIA0402E Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718675 1.CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) and IPDM E/R are blown. COMPONENT PARTS TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL) AMPERE FUSE NO. Fuse block (J/B) 2T (Ignition power supply) 10A 12 5 (Battery power supply) 20A 32 6 (Battery power supply) 20A 37 IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse, refer to PG3. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage 1 B4 3 PIIA4233E 6 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 GW-84 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY A Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. Terminals 6 7 3 5 Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No B C D SEC202B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace rear window defogger relay. E 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT F 1. 2. 3. Install rear window defogger relay. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 52 and ground. Connector E121 Terminals (+) 52 (-) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) When rear window defogger switch ON 0 When rear window defogger switch OFF Battery voltage G H GW LIIA2315E J OK or NG OK >> Rear window defogger power supply circuit check is OK. NG >> GO TO 5. K 5.CHECK IPDM E/R HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger relay. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 (A) terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay connector B4 (B) terminal 2. 52 - 2 L M : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection N LIIA2316E O INFOID:0000000001718676 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 GW-85 P 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector D504 terminal + and ground. Terminals Connector (+) D504 + (-) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON. Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF. 0 LIIA0655E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear window defogger connector D515 terminal - and ground. - - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> NG Check filament. Refer to GW-90, "Filament Check". • If filament is OK. Check the condition of the harness and the connector. • If filament is NG. Repair filament. >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0409E 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector B4 terminal 5 and rear window defogger connector D504 terminal +. 5-+ : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0656E Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718677 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuse in fuse block (J/B) is blown. COMPONENT PARTS TERMINAL NO. (SIGNAL) AMPERE FUSE NO. Fuse block (J/B) 5N (Battery power supply) 10A 8 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1 Revision: August 2007 GW-86 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground. Connector E30 Terminals (+) 2Q Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 (-) Ground A B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0411E D 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 E Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground. Connector M3 Terminals (+) 5N (-) Ground F Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 G H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace fuse block (J/B). LIIA0412E GW 4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) and door mirror LH or RH. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) connector M3 terminal 5N and door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 6. 5N - 6 J K : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. L LIIA0657E 5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT M Check continuity between each door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground N : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O P LIIA0658E 6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Revision: August 2007 GW-87 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 5 and 6. 6-5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". LIIA2457E Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718678 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector D13 Terminals (+) 6 Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 LIIA2212E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D13 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0658E 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between door mirror LH terminals 5 and 6. 6-5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". LIIA2457E Revision: August 2007 GW-88 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718679 A 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. B C Connector D113 Terminals (+) 6 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 (-) Ground D LIIA2212E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E F 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D113 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground H : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW LIIA0658E J 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between each door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 5 and 6. 6-5 K : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". M LIIA2457E Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection INFOID:0000000001718680 1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE O AV communication line check is executed. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)". Is rear window defogger displayed on the display? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Revision: August 2007 N GW-89 2008 Quest P REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN communication line check is executed. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)". OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)". Filament Check 1. INFOID:0000000001718681 When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. SEL122R 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of each filament. SEL263 3. 4. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. SEL265 Revision: August 2007 GW-90 2008 Quest REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Filament Repair INFOID:0000000001718682 A REPAIR EQUIPMENT • • • • • • Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long Drawing pen Heat gun Alcohol Cloth B C REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. D Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. E F PIIA0215E 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. G H GW J SEL012D K 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. L M N SEL013D O P Revision: August 2007 GW-91 2008 Quest DOOR MIRROR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DOOR MIRROR Automatic Drive Positioner Reverse Tilt Mirror INFOID:0000000001718683 Automatic drive positioner reverse tilt mirror. Refer to SE-11. Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - INFOID:0000000001718684 WIWA1788E Revision: August 2007 GW-92 2008 Quest DOOR MIRROR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Door Mirror Assembly INFOID:0000000001718685 A REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION B C D E F WIIA0790E G 1. Door mirror bolts 2. Door mirror assembly 3. Door mirror connectors Removal H NOTE: Be careful not to damage the door mirror assembly. 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to EI-29. 2. Disconnect the door mirror connectors. 3. Remove the door mirror bolts and the door mirror assembly. GW Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J Door Mirror Glass INFOID:0000000001718686 K REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. L Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward. Apply tape to protect mirror housing. Insert a screwdriver as shown and remove mirror glass by pushing up two hooks. M N O WIIA0160E 4. Disconnect electrical connectors from mirror holder. INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 GW-93 2008 Quest P DOOR MIRROR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Set mirror holder bracket (1) and mirror glass (2) in the horizontal position. 2. Connect electrical connectors to the back of the mirror holder. 3. Heat lower hooks with a heat gun to prevent breaking the hooks. 4. Align upper hooks to bracket. 5. Align lower hooks to bracket and push lower part of mirror glass (2) down into holder bracket (1) until you hear a click. Ensure that mirror glass is secure in door mirror assembly. WIIA0792E Revision: August 2007 GW-94 2008 Quest BODY SECTION IP INSTRUMENT PANEL A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ................. 10 Instrument Panel .....................................................10 Cluster Lid A ............................................................11 Combination Meter ..................................................12 Instrument Lower Panel LH .....................................12 Steering Column Cover ...........................................12 Cluster Lid C ............................................................13 Cluster Lid D ............................................................13 Center Stack Trim Panel .........................................13 Glove Box ................................................................14 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ....................................................................... 4 F G H IP CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY .................... 16 Work Flow ................................................................. 4 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 Component ..............................................................16 Removal ..................................................................17 Disassembly ............................................................17 Assembly .................................................................19 Installation ...............................................................19 J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 IP-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718737 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 IP-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718738 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name B Description C Locating the noise — (J-39570) Chassis ear D E F SBT839 Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit G H IP J SBT840 Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718739 K (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear L Locating the noise M N SIIA0995E Power Tool Loosening bolts and nuts O P PBIC0191E Revision: August 2007 IP-3 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Work Flow INFOID:0000000001718740 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer, if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. - Squeak — (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. - Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. - Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. - Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. - Tick — (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. - Thump — (Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. - Buzz — (Like a bumblebee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 IP-4 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1. Close a door. 2. Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3. Rev the engine. 4. Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5. At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565, and mechanics stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: G • Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. H Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. • Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing IP the noise. • Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". J REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100 x 135 mm (3.94 x 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 x 85 mm (2.36 x 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 x 50 mm (1.97 x 1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 x 50 mm (1.18 x 1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15 x 25 mm (0.59 x 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. Revision: August 2007 IP-5 2008 Quest K L M N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718741 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 IP-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. A SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) B C D Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. E F SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder H 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- IP ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 IP-7 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718742 LAIA0072E Revision: August 2007 IP-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H IP J K L M N O LAIA0071E P Revision: August 2007 IP-9 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Instrument Panel INFOID:0000000001718743 COMPONENTS LIIA2487E 1. Steering member assembly 2. Defrost grille 3. Speaker cover LH 4. Meter cover 5. Instrument panel 6. Combination meter Revision: August 2007 IP-10 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Cluster lid A 10. Instrument lower panel LH 8. LH vent grille 9. Instrument panel side finisher LH 11. Storage bin 12. Steering column upper cover 13. Steering column lower cover 14. Ignition switch bezel 15. Knee protector 16. Instrument panel side cover LH 17. Instrument panel side cover RH 18. Center stack trim panel 19. Center lower trim 20. DVD door 21. DVD deck 22. Audio unit 23. Cluster lid C 24. AV switch 25. Assistant under cover panel 26. Glove box assembly 27. Front air control 28. RH vent grille 29. Instrument panel side finisher RH 30. Display unit 31. Cluster lid D 32. Speaker cover RH A B C REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. D Disconnect the battery negative and positive terminals. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C". Remove steering column. Refer to PS-9. Remove combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". Remove display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect center speaker. Disconnect GPS antenna. Remove defrost grille. Remove front pillar finishers LH and RH. Remove front speakers. Refer to AV-72, "Removal and Installation". Remove instrument panel assembly. E F G H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. IP Cluster Lid A INFOID:0000000001718744 REMOVAL 1. J Remove instrument panel side finisher. K L M LIIA2484E 2. Remove screw (1) and LH vent grille. N O P LIIA2485E 3. 4. Remove upper and lower steering column covers. Pull to release clips and remove cluster lid A. Revision: August 2007 IP-11 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Combination Meter INFOID:0000000001718745 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Cluster Lid A". Remove the combination meter, using power tool. Disconnect combination meter electrical connectors. LIIA2486E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Instrument Lower Panel LH INFOID:0000000001718746 REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Remove the ignition switch bezel (1), screws (A), and instrument lower panel LH (2). LIIA2479E 3. Disconnect harness connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Steering Column Cover INFOID:0000000001718747 REMOVAL 1. Remove tilt lever knob from tilt lever by inserting a suitable tool into slot of tilt knob, then depress tab and withdraw tilt lever knob. WGIA0061E Revision: August 2007 IP-12 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the screws and the steering column upper and lower covers. A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Cluster Lid C INFOID:0000000001718748 B REMOVAL CAUTION: To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts. 1. Disconnect battery negative and positive terminals. 2. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". 3. Remove selector knob. Refer to AT-215, "Removal and Installation". 4. Pull up to release cluster lid C clips. 5. Disconnect harness connectors and remove cluster lid C. C D E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F Cluster Lid D INFOID:0000000001718749 REMOVAL 1. G Pull up to release clips and remove cluster lid D. H IP J LIIA2488E INSTALLATION K Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Center Stack Trim Panel INFOID:0000000001718750 L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the screws (A) and center lower trim (1). M N O P LIIA2480E Revision: August 2007 IP-13 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove center stack lower trim RH and LH. LIIA2481E 5. Remove lower screws using power tool. LIIA2482E 6. 7. Pull to release clips and remove center stack trim panel. Disconnect both power point electrical connectors. LIIA2483E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glove Box INFOID:0000000001718751 REMOVAL CAUTION: To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts. 1. Place the door weatherstrip by the glove box aside. Revision: August 2007 IP-14 2008 Quest INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove glove box screws using power tool. 3. Carefully remove the clips by prying loose. 4. Disconnect glove box lamp harness. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not let the glove box hang from glove box lamp harness. A B C LIIA2478E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G H IP J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 IP-15 2008 Quest CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Component INFOID:0000000001718752 LIIA2468E 1. Cup holder 2. Top cover assembly 3. RH console side trim panel 4. Clip 5. RH case 6. Front bin latch assembly 7. Front bin assembly 8. Front bin latch handle 9. Console mat 10. LH case 11. LH console side trim panel 13. Storage bin door assembly 14. Rear console trim cover Revision: August 2007 IP-16 12. Storage bin insert 2008 Quest CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal INFOID:0000000001718753 A 1. Remove storage bin insert (1) and console mat (2). B C D E F G LIIA2470E 2. H Remove top cover assembly. IP J K LIIA2471E 3. L Open the front bin (1), remove the bolts (A), and center console (2). M N LIIA2473E Disassembly 1. INFOID:0000000001718754 P Remove center console. Refer to IP-17, "Removal". Revision: August 2007 O IP-17 2008 Quest CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove front bin assembly. LIIA2472E 3. Remove rear console trim cover. LIIA2474E 4. Remove RH and LH console side trim panels. LIIA2475E 5. Remove storage bin door assembly. LIIA2476E 6. Remove screws and split RH from LH case. LIIA2477E Revision: August 2007 IP-18 2008 Quest CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Assembly INFOID:0000000001718755 A INFOID:0000000001718756 B Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. C D E F G H IP J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 IP-19 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION LAN LAN SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS CAN FUNDAMENTAL SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 2 Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................... 3 CAN Communication System .................................... 3 Diag on CAN ............................................................. 4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 6 Condition of Error Detection ...................................... 6 Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System ............................................................ 6 Self-Diagnosis ........................................................... 9 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .............................. 9 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW ............12 Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis ............. 12 How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart ...... 12 Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart ................................. 13 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 13 CAN SERVICE INFORMATION ........................... 35 INDEX FOR DTC ................................................35 DTC No. Index ........................................................ 35 HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ...........................36 Caution .................................................................... 36 Abbreviation List ...................................................... 36 PRECAUTIONS ..................................................37 Revision: August 2007 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................37 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ............................37 Precaution for Harness Repair ................................37 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .................................... 38 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor .............................38 CAN System Specification Chart .............................41 CAN Communication Signal Chart ..........................42 Schematic ................................................................47 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ...........................................48 Interview Sheet ........................................................51 Data Sheet ...............................................................51 CAN System (Type 1) ..............................................53 CAN System (Type 2) ..............................................54 CAN System (Type 3) ..............................................55 Component Parts Location ......................................56 Harness Layout .......................................................56 Malfunction Area Chart ............................................56 Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector ....57 ECM Branch Line Circuit .........................................58 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit ..................................................58 TCM Branch Line Circuit .........................................59 Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit ...........59 BCM Branch Line Circuit .........................................60 Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit .................61 Display Unit Branch Line Circuit ..............................61 Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit ................62 Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit .......................62 Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit ...................63 Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit .............64 IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit .................................64 CAN Communication Circuit ....................................65 LAN-1 2008 Quest F G H I J LAN L M N O P PRECAUTIONS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003032415 CAUTION: • Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. • Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when checking the harness. Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003032416 • Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). SKIB8766E • Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area. NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. SKIB8767E • Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line. Revision: August 2007 LAN-2 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A CAN Communication System INFOID:0000000003032417 • CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L). • Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit. They receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions. • CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. SYSTEM DIAGRAM B C D E F G H I J LAN SKIB8887E Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN communication signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN communication system transmits and receives CAN communication signals by the potential difference. Component L Description Main line CAN communication line between splices Branch line CAN communication line between splice and a control unit Splice A point connecting a branch line with a main line Termination circuit Refer to "CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT". M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-3 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT SKIB8713E Component System description CAN controller It controls CAN communication signal transmission and reception, error detection, etc. Transceiver IC It converts digital signal into CAN communication signal, and CAN communication signal into digital signal. Noise filter It eliminates noise of CAN communication signal. Termination circuit* (Resistance of approx. 120 Ω) It produces potential difference. *: These are the only control units wired with both ends of CAN communication system. Diag on CAN INFOID:0000000003032418 DESCRIPTION “Diag on CAN” is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2 communication lines, between control units and diagnosis unit. Revision: August 2007 LAN-4 2008 Quest SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Diagram A B C D E F G H I J LAN SKIB8714E Name Harness Description L DDL1 Tx Rx It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling) DDL2 K-LINE It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling) Diag on CAN CAN-H CAN-L It is used for trouble diagnosis and control. M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-5 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Condition of Error Detection INFOID:0000000003032419 “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR • CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both) • CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses) • Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line WHEN “U1000” OR “U1001” IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IS NORMAL • Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be detected.) • Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease. • Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication). • Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication, malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication). • Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally. NOTE: CAN communication system is normal if “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each unit. Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System INFOID:0000000003032420 In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. ERROR EXAMPLE NOTE: • Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring. • Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the unit abbreviation. Example: TCM branch line open circuit SKIB8738E Unit name Symptom ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases. BCM Reverse warning chime does not sound. Revision: August 2007 LAN-6 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit name Symptom A EPS control unit Normal operation. Combination meter • Shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF. • Warning lamps turn ON. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Normal operation. TCM No impact on operation. IPDM E/R Normal operation. B C Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit D E F G H SKIB8739E I Unit name Symptom ECM J BCM EPS control unit Combination meter Normal operation. LAN ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) TCM L IPDM E/R NOTE: • When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit. • When data link connector branch line is open, “ECU list” displayed on the CONSULT-III “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit. However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences. “ECU list” on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” (CONSULT-III) Revision: August 2007 N Difference of symptom O Normal operation. Data link connector branch line open circuit CAN-H, CAN-L harness short-circuit M All Diag on CAN units are not indicated. LAN-7 Most of the units which are connected to the CAN communication system enter fail-safe mode or are deactivated. 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit SKIB8740E Unit name Symptom ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases. BCM • Reverse warning chime does not sound. • The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wiper switch being in the intermittent position. EPS control unit The steering effort increases. Combination meter • The shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF. • The speedometer is inoperative. • The odo/trip meter stops. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Normal operation. TCM No impact on operation. IPDM E/R When the ignition switch is ON, • The headlamps (Lo) turn ON. • The cooling fan continues to rotate. Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit SKIB8741E Revision: August 2007 LAN-8 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Unit name Symptom A ECM • Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases. • Engine speed drops. BCM • Reverse warning chime does not sound. • The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wiper switch being in the intermittent position. • The room lamp does not turn ON. • The engine does not start (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the ignition switch OFF.) • The steering lock does not release (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the ignition switch OFF.) EPS control unit The steering effort increases. Combination meter • The tachometer and the speedometer do not move. • Warning lamps turn ON. • Indicator lamps do not turn ON. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Normal operation. TCM No impact on operation. IPDM E/R When the ignition switch is ON, • The headlamps (Lo) turn ON. • The cooling fan continues to rotate. Self-Diagnosis B C D E F G INFOID:0000000003032421 H DTC U1000 Self-diagnosis item (CONSULT-III indication) CAN COMM CIRCUIT DTC detection condition Inspection/Action When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. When a control unit (except for ECM) is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. I Refer to LAN-12. CAN COMM CIRCUIT When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. U1002 SYSTEM COMM When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or less. Start the inspection. Refer to the applicable section of the indicated control unit. U1010 CONTROL UNIT [CAN] When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of each control unit. Replace the control unit indicating “U1010”. U1001 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor J LAN L M INFOID:0000000003032422 N CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for detecting root cause. O MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III) P Revision: August 2007 LAN-9 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] PKID1075E Without PAST Item Initial diagnosis Transmission diagnosis PRSNT OK Normal at present NG Control unit error (Except for some control units) OK Normal at present UNKWN OK Control unit name (Reception diagnosis) Description Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more. Diagnosis not performed Normal at present Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more. UNKWN Diagnosis not performed No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts) With PAST Item PRSNT PAST OK Transmission diagnosis OK UNKWN 1 – 39 0 OK OK Control unit name (Reception diagnosis) 1 – 39 UNKWN 0 – – Description Normal at present and in the past Normal at present, but unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles from OFF to ON.) Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more at present. Normal at present and in the past Normal at present, but unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles from OFF to ON.) Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more at present. Diagnosis not performed. No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts) MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) NOTE: • For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) • Refer to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor" for the details. Revision: August 2007 LAN-10 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Example: Vehicle Display Item CAN_COMM (Initial diagnosis) CAN_CIRC_1 (Transmission diagnosis) CAN_CIRC_2 – 9 (Reception diagnosis of each unit) Result indicated Error counter OK 0 NG 1 – 50 OK 0 UNKWN 1 – 50 OK 0 A Description Normal at present Control unit error (The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.) B Normal at present C Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present. (The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.) Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present. (The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.) UNKWN 1 – 50 D Normal at present E Diagnosis not performed. No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts) F G H I J LAN L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-11 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003032423 CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools. Tool Usage Interview sheet For filling in vehicle information and interview with customer. Data sheet For copying on-board diagnosis data. Diagnosis sheet For detecting the root cause. (Diagnosis sheet includes system diagram for every CAN system type) ECU list (On the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”) SELF-DIAG RESULTS (CONSULT-III) For checking the condition of control units and the status of CAN communication. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (CONSULT-III) CAN communication signal chart For converting information received from a customer into CAN communication signal transmission and reception. This information can be used to judge whether a circuit between control units is normal or abnormal. Abbreviation list For checking abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart and diagnosis sheet. How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000003032424 The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit. SKIB8715E Revision: August 2007 LAN-12 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart INFOID:0000000003032425 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N PKID1210E O Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003032426 INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis. Points in interview • • • • What: Parts name, system name When: Date, Frequency Where: Road condition, Place In what condition: Driving condition/environment Revision: August 2007 LAN-13 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Result: Symptom NOTE: • Check normal units as well as error symptoms. - Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates tachometer functions normally. • When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into failsafe mode. • Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units. SKIB8717E INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION • Check whether or not “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” by CONSULT-III. NOTE: Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if “U1000” or “U1001” is not indicated. • Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not. NOTE: • Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause. • The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE". CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART) Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available system types, either style A or style B may be used. CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A) NOTE: Revision: August 2007 LAN-14 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L SKIB8888E CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B) NOTE: M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-15 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. SKIB8889E CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview sheet. Revision: August 2007 LAN-16 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Interview Sheet (Example) A B C D E F G H I J LAN L PKID1211E COLLECT DATA M Collect CONSULT-III Data Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data. • SELF-DIAG RESULTS • CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU list” included) NOTE: N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-17 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW < SERVICE INFORMATION > Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle. [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] PKID1212E Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle monitor, etc. Copy them on the on-board diagnosis copy sheet. NOTE: • For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) Revision: August 2007 LAN-18 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • For the details, refer to LAN-51, "Data Sheet". A B C D E F G H I J SKIB8722E LAN CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET NOTE: Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type. L Print Diagnosis Sheet Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type. M Check Collected Data Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to “ECU list”. N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-19 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW < SERVICE INFORMATION > • For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List". [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] PKID1213E DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet. Identifying the root cause • Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search. NOTE: • Color-code when drawing lines. • Do not draw a line onto a existing line. • Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error — Short Circuit —", "Past Error — Short Circuit —". Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure. • "Present Error — Open Circuit —" • "Present Error — Short Circuit —" • "Past Error — Open Circuit —" • "Past Error — Short Circuit —" NOTE: When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the control unit as well as the communication line. Present Error — Open Circuit — Revision: August 2007 LAN-20 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Identify the error circuit using information from the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” (“ECU list” included). 1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in “ECU list”. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. NOTE: CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not indicated. An error may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line. a. “TCM” which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on “ECU list”. This indicates that DLC is not receiving a signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below). NOTE: • Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the “ECU list” when the CAN line between Diag on CAN unit and the data link connector is open. • For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to LAN-4, "Diag on CAN". A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N PKID1214E 2. a. b. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. Reception item of “ECM”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means ECM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below). NOTE: If “UNKWN” is indicated on “TRANSMIT DIAG”, then the control unit cannot transmit CAN communication signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice. Reception item of “AFS”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below). Revision: August 2007 LAN-21 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Reception item of “AV”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between AV and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. PKID1215E d. e. Reception item of “BCM”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below). Reception item of “EPS” and “I-KEY”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between EPS and I-KEY and their receiving units. Do not draw any line. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 LAN-22 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), “UNKWN” is indicated even though the item is not used in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support monitor, refer to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". A B C D E F G H I J LAN PKID1216E f. g. Reception item of “M&A”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means M&A cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A and TCM (line 2-f in the figure below). Reception item of “ADP”: On “TCM”, “UNKWN” is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below). L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-23 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > h. Reception item of “ABS”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between ABS and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. PKID1217E i. 3. a. b. Reception item of “IPDM-E”: “UNKWN” is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. Based on information received from “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, place a check mark on the known good CAN communication line between ECM and IPDM-E. Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM has the most amount of lines (shade 3-a in the figure below). Place a check mark on the known good lines to establish the error circuit. Revision: August 2007 LAN-24 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Reception item of “IPDM-E”: On “ECM”, “OK” is indicated. IPDM-E communicates normally with ECM. Put a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the figure below). A B C D E F G H I J LAN PKID1218E 4. Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-25 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Perform the inspection for the detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart". PKID1219E Present Error — Short Circuit — When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Received data Item (CONSULT-III) Indication ECU list (on the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR) All Diag on CAN units are not indicated. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR “UNKWN” is indicated under “TRANSMIT DIAG” and most reception items. Error symptom • Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are deactivated. Inspection procedure Revision: August 2007 LAN-26 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart". A B C D E F G H I J PKID1220E Past Error — Open Circuit — Review CAN communication signal chart based on information received from the interview with the customer and on past error information from SELF-DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR. LAN L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-27 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. PKID1221E 2. a. b. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST) of units indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to LAN-38, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". Reception item of “ECM”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means ECM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below). Reception item of “M&A”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means M&A could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between M&A and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below). Revision: August 2007 LAN-28 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Reception item of “TCM”: “VDC/TCS/ABS”, “3” is indicated in the “PAST”. This means TCM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below). A B C D E F G H I J LAN PKID1222E 3. a. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST) of units indicating “U1000” or “U1001” on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: • While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is not received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items. • Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST).) Reception item of “EPS”: Assume that the unit could not receive the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A. Draw a line among EPS, ECM, ABS, and M&A (line 3-a in the figure below). L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-29 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. Reception item of “ABS”: Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a line between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the figure below). PKID1223E 4. a. Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the interview with the customer. NOTE: For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to LAN-42, "CAN Communication Signal Chart". ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that “ABS warning lamp signal” and “Vehicle speed signal” could not communicate between M&A and ABS (4-a in the figure below). Revision: August 2007 LAN-30 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that “Engine speed signal” could communicate normally between ECM and M&A (4-b in the figure below). A B C D E F G H I J LAN L SKIB8895E 5. a. Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4. The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause is no communication between M&A and ABS. Draw a line between M&A and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure below). M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-31 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A. The circuit between ECM and M&A is functioning properly (check marks 5-b in the figure below). SKIB8735E 6. The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List". Revision: August 2007 LAN-32 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Perform the inspection procedure for the possible cause. Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart". A B C D E F G H I J LAN L PKID1224E Past Error — Short Circuit — When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Item (CONSULT-III) Indication SELF-DIAG RESULTS “U1000” and “U1001” is indicated in the past for most units. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Only on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST), “1 - 39” is indicated on “PAST” of “TRANSMIT DIAG” and the reception item. Inspection procedure M N Refer to LAN-56, "Malfunction Area Chart". O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-33 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW [CAN FUNDAMENTAL] < SERVICE INFORMATION > PKID1225E Revision: August 2007 LAN-34 2008 Quest INDEX FOR DTC [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index DTC U1000 U1001 U1002 U1010 INFOID:0000000001719329 Self-diagnosis item (CONSULT-III indication) CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN COMM CIRCUIT SYSTEM COMM CONTROL UNIT [CAN] DTC detection condition Inspection When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. When a control unit (except for ECM) is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. B C D Refer to LAN-36. E When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or less. Start the inspection. Refer to the applicable section of the indicated control unit. When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for CAN controller of each control unit. Replace the control unit indicating “U1010”. F G H I J LAN L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-35 2008 Quest HOW TO USE THIS SECTION [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > HOW TO USE THIS SECTION Caution INFOID:0000000001719330 • This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and inspection procedures. • For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure". Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000001719331 Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following list. Abbreviation Unit name SELECT SYSTEM (CONSULT-III) CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (CONSULT-III) A-BAG Air bag diagnosis sensor unit AIR BAG – ABS ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ABS VDC/TCS/ABS ADP Driver seat control unit AUTO DRIVE POS. – BCM BCM BCM BCM/SEC Display unit – – Display control unit – DISPLAY DISP DLC Data link connector – – ECM ECM ENGINE ECM HVAC Front air control HVAC HVAC IPDM-E IPDM E/R IPDM E/R IPDM E/R M&A Combination meter METER/M&A METER/M&A STRG Steering angle sensor – STRG TCM TCM TRANSMISSION TCM Revision: August 2007 LAN-36 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > PRECAUTIONS A Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003032428 B The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis C D E F G INFOID:0000000001719334 CAUTION: • Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. • Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less. • Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when checking the harness. Precaution for Harness Repair H I INFOID:0000000001719335 J • Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). LAN L M SKIB8766E • Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area. NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. N O P SKIB8767E • Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line. Revision: August 2007 LAN-37 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor INFOID:0000000001719336 Use “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for detecting the root cause. MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III) ECM 0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON) Normal CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Description TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status VDC/TCS/ABS Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ITEM METER/M&A Signal receiving status from the combination meter BCM/SEC Signal receiving status from the BCM ICC PRSNT PAST PRSNT PAST OK OK or UNKWN 0 UNKWN 0 UNKWN 0 1 – 39* Not used even though indicated HVAC ECM TCM Error Signal receiving status from the TCM OK OK or 1 – 39* EPS IPDM E/R Not used even though indicated Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R OK OK or 1 – 39* e4WD Not used even though indicated AWD/4WD *: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased. ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) • Models with TCS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ITEM ABS Description INITIAL DIAG Status of CAN controller TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM TCM Signal receiving status from the TCM Normal Error PRSNT NGCaution OK UNKWN CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG” at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures. • Models with VDC Revision: August 2007 LAN-38 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ITEM ABS Status of CAN controller TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM TCM Signal receiving status from the TCM METER/M&A Error A PRSNT NGCaution INITIAL DIAG STRG Normal Description B OK UNKWN C Not used even though indicated Signal receiving status from the steering angle sensor ICC OK UNKWN D Not used even though indicated CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG” at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures. TCM NOTE: Replace the unit when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG”. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ITEM INITIAL DIAG TCM E F Normal Description Error PRSNT Status of CAN controller G NG TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM VDC/TCS/ABS Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) METER/M&A Signal receiving status from the combination meter H OK UNKWN I Driver Seat Control Unit J 0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON) CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ITEM TRANSMIT DIAG METER/M&A ADP Normal Description PRSNT Error PAST PRSNT PAST UNKWN 0 LAN Not used even though indicated Signal receiving status from the combination meter BCM/SEC Signal receiving status from the BCM TCM Signal receiving status from the TCM OK OK or L 1 – 39* M *: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased. BCM NOTE: Replace the unit when “NG” is indicated on the “INITIAL DIAG”. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ITEM BCM Description INITIAL DIAG Status of CAN controller TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM IPDM E/R Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R METER/M&A Signal receiving status from the combination meter I-KEY N Normal Error NG P OK UNKWN Not used even though indicated Front Air Control Revision: August 2007 O PRSNT LAN-39 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON) ITEM CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Description TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM TCM BCM/SEC Signal receiving status from the BCM VDC/TCS/ABS Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) DISPLAY Error PRSNT PAST PRSNT PAST OK OK or UNKWN 0 UNKWN 0 UNKWN 0 1 – 39* Not used even though indicated IPDM E/R HVAC Normal OK or OK 1 – 39* Not used even though indicated Signal receiving status from the display control unit OK or OK 1 – 39* I-KEY EPS AWD/4WD e4WD Not used even though indicated ICC LANE KEEP TIRE-P *: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased. Combination Meter 0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON) ITEM M&A Normal CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Description TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM TCM Signal receiving status from the TCM BCM/SEC Signal receiving status from the BCM VDC/TCS/ABS Signal receiving status from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) IPDM E/R Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R Error PRSNT PAST PRSNT PAST OK OK or UNKWN 0 1 – 39* DISPLAY I-KEY EPS AWD/4WD e4WD Not used even though indicated ICC LANE KEEP TIRE-P *: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased. IPDM E/R Revision: August 2007 LAN-40 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 0: Error at present, 1 – 39: Error in the past (Number means the number of times the ignition switch is turned OFF→ON) IPDM-E Normal CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Description TRANSMIT DIAG Signal transmission status ECM Signal receiving status from the ECM BCM/SEC Signal receiving status from the BCM ITEM A Error PRSNT PAST PRSNT PAST OK OK or UNKWN 0 B 1 – 39* C *: 39 or higher number is fixed at 39 until the self-diagnosis result is erased. MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) Display Control Unit NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following. • Models with color display: Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)". • Models with navigation system: Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check". D E F G H PKIB6080E I Indicated items on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Normal Unit name Diagnosis item Description Result indicated Display control unit CAN_COMM Status of CAN controller CAN_CIRC_1 Signal transmission status CAN_CIRC_2 Signal receiving status from the BCM CAN_CIRC_3 Signal receiving status from the ECM CAN_CIRC_4 Signal receiving status from the front air control CAN_CIRC_5 Signal receiving status from the combination meter CAN_CIRC_6 CAN_CIRC_7 J Error Error counter (Reference) Result indicated Error counter (Reference) L OK 0 or 1 – 50 * UNKWN 1 – 50* M N Not used even though indicated Signal receiving status from the IPDM E/R CAN_CIRC_8 CAN_CIRC_9 OK 0 or O UNKWN 1– 50* 1 – 50* P Not used even though indicated *: The error counter stops counting when it reaches “50” and holds “50” until it is deleted. CAN System Specification Chart INFOID:0000000001719337 Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: Revision: August 2007 LAN NG LAN-41 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" for how to use CAN system specification chart. Body type Wagon Axle 2WD Engine VQ35DE Transmission A/T Brake control TCS VDC Automatic drive positioner X Color display X X Monochrome display X CAN system type 1 2 3 LAN-53 LAN-54 LAN-55 Diagnosis sheet CAN communication signal chart “TYPE 1/TYPE 2” “TYPE 3” X: Applicable VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION NOTE: Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment. AWMIA0223GB CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000001719338 Refer to LAN-12, "How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart" for how to use CAN communication signal chart. TYPE 1/TYPE 2 NOTE: Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units. Revision: August 2007 LAN-42 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] Accelerator pedal position signal T ASCD CRUISE indicator signal T ASCD OD cancel request signal T R ASCD operation signal T R ASCD SET indicator signal T Cooling fan speed request signal T R HVAC DISP* B C R T Engine coolant temperature signal T R Engine speed signal T R E R R R R R R T R T T R ABS operation signal T R ABS warning lamp signal T R Brake warning lamp signal T R SLIP indicator lamp signal T R Stop lamp switch signal T TCS OFF indicator lamp signal T TCS operation signal T H R J R R R R R T R R P range signal LAN R L T R Shift position signal R T T R I R T O/D OFF indicator lamp signal Output shaft revolution signal G R T A/T self-diagnosis signal F R A/T shift schedule change demand signal Vehicle speed signal D R R Malfunction indicator lamp signal R R R Fuel consumption monitor signal A R T Engine and A/T integrated control signal R: Receive IPDM-E T T: Transmit M&A A/C compressor request signal BCM TCM ABS Signal name/Connecting unit ECM < SERVICE INFORMATION > T T R Turbine revolution signal R A/C switch signal R T Blower fan motor switch signal R T M T Buzzer output signal T Cornering lamp request signal T Door switch signal T R N R R R R Front fog light request signal T R Front wiper request signal T R High beam request signal T Horn chirp signal T R Ignition switch signal T R Low beam request signal T R Position light request signal T Revision: August 2007 LAN-43 R R O R R R 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] R Sleep wake up signal T R R ABS T R R T Tire pressure data signal T R Tire pressure signal T R Turn indicator signal T R System setting signal A/C switch/indicator signal BCM wake up request signal Fuel level sensor signal R T R T R T T T R T R T Front wiper stop position signal High beam status signal R R Seat belt buckle switch signal Cooling fan speed signal T R Distance to empty signal IPDM-E HVAC R M&A DISP* T TCM Rear window defogger switch signal Signal name/Connecting unit ECM BCM < SERVICE INFORMATION > R T R T Ignition power supply confirmation signal R T IPDM E/R refuse to sleep signal R T IPDM E/R wake up sleep request signal Low beam status signal R T R T Oil pressure switch signal Rear window defogger control signal R T R T *: Models with color display NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted. TYPE 3 NOTE: Refer to LAN-36, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units. A/C compressor request signal T Accelerator pedal position signal T ASCD CRUISE indicator signal T ASCD OD cancel request signal T R ASCD operation signal T R ASCD SET indicator signal T Cooling fan speed request signal T R IPDM-E STRG M&A HVAC DISP BCM R R R R R R T Engine coolant temperature signal T R Engine speed signal T Revision: August 2007 R: Receive R T Engine and A/T integrated control signal ADP TCM ABS Signal name/Connecting unit ECM T: Transmit R R LAN-44 R R R R R 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Fuel consumption monitor signal Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R T R R ABS operation signal T R ABS warning lamp signal T R Brake warning lamp signal T R SLIP indicator lamp signal T R Stop lamp switch signal T C R E R R T VDC operation signal T R R R T R T R G R T R T R R range signal R T R H T R F R P range signal Turbine revolution signal R R T O/D OFF indicator lamp signal Shift position signal D R T VDC OFF indicator lamp signal Output shaft revolution signal B T T A/T self-diagnosis signal R I T System setting signal T T R R R T A/C switch signal R T Blower fan motor switch signal R T Buzzer output signal J R T Cornering lamp request signal R T LAN R T Door switch signal R R R R Front fog light request signal T R Front wiper request signal T R High beam request signal T Horn chirp signal T R R Ignition switch signal R T Key fob door unlock signal R T Key fob ID signal R T Key switch signal R T R T Position light request signal T Rear window defogger switch signal T Sleep wake up signal T Tire pressure data signal T Tire pressure signal T R Turn indicator signal T R LAN-45 R L M N O Low beam request signal Revision: August 2007 A R A/T shift schedule change demand signal Vehicle speed signal STRG M&A HVAC DISP BCM ADP TCM ABS ECM Signal name/Connecting unit IPDM-E [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > R R R R R R R R R 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BCM wake up request signal R STRG T M&A R T T T T R Steering angle sensor signal T R T R T Front wiper stop position signal High beam status signal R R Seat belt buckle switch signal Cooling fan speed signal T R Distance to empty signal Fuel level sensor signal HVAC A/C switch/indicator signal DISP BCM ADP TCM ABS ECM Signal name/Connecting unit IPDM-E [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > R T R T Ignition power supply confirmation signal R T IPDM E/R refuse to sleep signal R T IPDM E/R wake up sleep request signal R T Low beam status signal R T Oil pressure switch signal Rear window defogger control signal R R T T NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted. Revision: August 2007 LAN-46 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719339 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N O AWMWA0110GB Revision: August 2007 LAN-47 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - CAN - INFOID:0000000001719340 BKWA0693E Revision: August 2007 LAN-48 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N O AWMWA0111GB P Revision: August 2007 LAN-49 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > AWMWA0140GB Revision: August 2007 LAN-50 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Interview Sheet INFOID:0000000001719341 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N O SKIB8898E P Data Sheet INFOID:0000000001719342 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following. • Models with color display: Refer to AV-145, "CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display)". Revision: August 2007 LAN-51 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Models with navigation system: Refer to AV-193, "CAN Communication Line Check". SKIB8771E Revision: August 2007 LAN-52 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN System (Type 1) INFOID:0000000001719343 A DIAGNOSIS SHEET B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N O P JPMIA0709GB Revision: August 2007 LAN-53 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN System (Type 2) INFOID:0000000001719344 DIAGNOSIS SHEET JPMIA0710GB Revision: August 2007 LAN-54 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN System (Type 3) INFOID:0000000001719345 A DIAGNOSIS SHEET B C D E F G H I J LAN L M N O P JPMIA0711GB Revision: August 2007 LAN-55 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001719347 BKIA0205E 1. TCM E143 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) E125 3. IPDM E/R E121 4. Display control unit M95 5. Display unit M93 6. Combination meter M24 7. BCM M18 8. Steering angle sensor M47 9. Data link connector M22 10. Driver seat control unit B401 11. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit M35 12. Front air control M50 13. ECM E16 Harness Layout INFOID:0000000001719348 Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout". Malfunction Area Chart INFOID:0000000001719349 MAIN LINE Malfunction Area Reference LAN-57, "Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector" Main line between TCM and data link connector BRANCH LINE Malfunction Area Reference ECM branch line circuit LAN-58, "ECM Branch Line Circuit" ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line circuit LAN-58, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit" TCM branch line circuit LAN-59, "TCM Branch Line Circuit" Driver seat control unit branch line circuit LAN-59, "Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit" BCM branch line circuit LAN-60, "BCM Branch Line Circuit" Display control unit branch line circuit LAN-61, "Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit" Display unit branch line circuit LAN-61, "Display Unit Branch Line Circuit" Data link connector branch line circuit LAN-62, "Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit" Front air control branch line circuit LAN-62, "Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit" Combination meter branch line circuit LAN-63, "Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit" Revision: August 2007 LAN-56 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Malfunction Area Reference Steering angle sensor branch line circuit LAN-64, "Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit" IPDM E/R branch line circuit LAN-64, "IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit" A B SHORT CIRCUIT Malfunction Area Reference C LAN-65, "CAN Communication Circuit" CAN communication circuit Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector INFOID:0000000001719350 D INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR E 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector E26 Harness connector M91 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. 2. Connector No. Harness connector Terminal No. 3 E143 4 G H Disconnect the harness connectors E26 and M91. Check the continuity between the TCM harness connector and the harness connector. TCM harness connector F Connector No. Terminal No. E26 I Continuity J 5 Yes 14 Yes LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the main line between the TCM and the harness connector E26. L 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector. Harness connector Connector No. M91 M Data link connector Terminal No. 5 14 Connector No. M22 Terminal No. Continuity 6 Yes 14 Yes OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Check the following items again. - Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU list” included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. • Past error: Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the data link connector. NG >> Repair the main line between the harness connector M91 and the data link connector. Revision: August 2007 LAN-57 2008 Quest N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ECM Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719351 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of ECM. Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals. ECM harness connector Connector No. E16 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 94 86 Approx. 108 – 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ECM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-131, "Wiring Diagram". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-72, "Procedure After Replacing ECM". • Past error: Error was detected in the ECM branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719352 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. - Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals. Models with TCS ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector Connector No. E125 - Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 22 9 Approx. 54 – 66 Models with VDC Revision: August 2007 LAN-58 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector Connector No. Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. E125 7 9 A Approx. 54 – 66 B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. C 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. • Models with TCS: BRC-14, "Schematic" • Models with VDC: BRC-54, "Schematic" OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. - Models with TCS: BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" - Models with VDC: BRC-87, "Removal and Installation" • Past error: Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. TCM Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719353 D E F G INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR H 1. 2. 3. I Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. LAN Disconnect the connector of TCM. Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals. L TCM harness connector Connector No. E143 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 3 J 4 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the TCM branch line. M N 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to AT-49, "Circuit Diagram". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the TCM. Refer to AT-47, "A/T Electrical Parts Location". • Past error: Error was detected in the TCM branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit O P INFOID:0000000001719354 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 LAN-59 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Driver seat control unit Harness connector B400 Harness connector B37 Harness connector B1 Harness connector M11 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals. Driver seat control unit harness connector Connector No. Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. B401 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the driver seat control unit branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-13, "Schematic". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-67, "Removal and Installation". • Past error: Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. BCM Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719355 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of BCM. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals. BCM harness connector Connector No. M18 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 39 40 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the BCM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Revision: August 2007 LAN-60 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". • Past error: Error was detected in the BCM branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. A Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit B INFOID:0000000001719356 INSPECTION PROCEDURE C 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. D E F Disconnect the connector of display control unit. Check the resistance between the display control unit harness connector terminals. G Display control unit harness connector Connector No. M95 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 25 26 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display control unit branch line. H I 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT J Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display control unit. Refer to . • Models with color display: AV-130, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit" • Models with navigation system: AV-181, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Display Control Unit" LAN OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the display control unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". • Past error: Error was detected in the display control unit branch line. L NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Display Unit Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000003032430 M INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR N 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the display unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of display unit. Check the resistance between the display unit harness connector terminals. Revision: August 2007 LAN-61 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Display unit harness connector Connector No. M93 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 14 16 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display unit branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display unit. Refer to AV-95, "Schematic (With Monochrome Display)". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the display unit. Refer to AV-148, "Removal and Installation". • Past error: Error was detected in the display unit branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719357 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals. Data link connector Connector No. M22 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Check the following items again. - Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (“ECU list” included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. • Past error: Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit. NG >> Repair the data link connector branch line. Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719358 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. Revision: August 2007 LAN-62 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect the connector of front air control. Check the resistance between the front air control harness connector terminals. B Front air control harness connector Connector No. Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. M50 41 40 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the front air control branch line. C D 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following. • Models with automatic air conditioner: ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control" • Models with manual air conditioner: MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control" OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the front air control. Refer to the following. - Models with automatic air conditioner: ATC-127, "Removal and Installation" - Models with manual air conditioner: MTC-113, "Removal and Installation" • Past error: Error was detected in the front air control branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719359 E F G H INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection J (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. LAN NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect the connector of combination meter. Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals. M Combination meter harness connector Connector No. M24 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 9 11 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the combination meter branch line. O 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter". • Past error: Error was detected in the combination meter branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Revision: August 2007 LAN-63 N 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719360 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor. Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals. Steering angle sensor harness connector Connector No. Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. M47 4 5 Approx. 54 – 66 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the steering angle sensor branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-54, "Schematic". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-89, "Removal and Installation". • Past error: Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit INFOID:0000000001719361 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). IPDM E/R Harness connector E25 Harness connector M90 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals. IPDM E/R harness connector Connector No. E121 Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 48 49 Approx. 108 – 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 LAN-64 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [CAN] < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT A Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". OK or NG OK >> • Present error: Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". • Past error: Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. CAN Communication Circuit B C INFOID:0000000001719362 D INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION E 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. 4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. F G 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals. H Data link connector Connector No. M22 Continuity Terminal No. 6 I 14 No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause. J 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) LAN Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground. Data link connector Connector No. M22 Continuity Terminal No. Ground 6 14 L No M No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause. N 4.CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT 1. Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R. O P Revision: August 2007 LAN-65 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals. ECM Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 94 3. [CAN] 86 Approx. 108 – 132 Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals. IPDM E/R Resistance (Ω) Terminal No. 48 LKIA0037E 49 Approx. 108 – 132 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R. 5.CHECK SYMPTOM Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced. Inspection result Reproduced>>GO TO 6. Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is detected. 6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system. NOTE: ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first. 4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced. NOTE: Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms. Inspection result Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure. Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected. Revision: August 2007 LAN-66 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION LT LIGHTING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 4 Aiming Adjustment ...................................................33 Bulb Replacement ...................................................33 Removal and Installation .........................................33 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................34 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4 General precautions for service operations .............. 4 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................35 System Description ..................................................35 CAN Communication System Description ...............36 Major Component and Functions ............................36 Schematic ................................................................37 Wiring Diagram - AUTO/L - .....................................38 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................40 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........40 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................41 Preliminary Check ...................................................41 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................41 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) .........................43 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .....................44 Lighting Switch Inspection .......................................45 Optical Sensor System Inspection ...........................45 Removal and Installation .........................................46 FRONT FOG LAMP .......................................... 47 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - ...............................................25 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 25 System Description ................................................. 25 CAN Communication System Description ............... 27 Schematic ............................................................... 28 Wiring Diagram - DTRL - ......................................... 29 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 32 Revision: August 2007 G AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ..................................... 35 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ..................................... 5 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 5 System Description ................................................... 5 CAN Communication System Description ................. 6 Schematic ................................................................. 7 Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP - ....................................... 8 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 11 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 11 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 12 Preliminary Check ................................................... 12 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 12 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 14 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ...... 15 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ........ 17 High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate .... 18 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) .... 18 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 20 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................. 21 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 21 Bulb Replacement ................................................... 22 Removal and Installation ......................................... 23 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 24 F LT-1 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................47 System Description ..................................................47 CAN Communication System Description ...............48 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .......................................49 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................50 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........50 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................51 Preliminary Check ...................................................51 CONSULT-III Functions ...........................................51 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ....51 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....52 Aiming Adjustment ...................................................52 Bulb Replacement ...................................................53 Front Fog Lamp Assembly ......................................54 2008 Quest H I J LT L M N O P TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS ............................................................... 55 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 55 System Description ................................................. 55 CAN Communication System Description .............. 57 Schematic ............................................................... 58 Wiring Diagram - TURN - ........................................ 59 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 62 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 62 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ... 63 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 63 Front Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ............ 64 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ............ 65 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operates ................................... 66 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate ...... 67 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 67 Removal and Installation ........................................ 67 Bulb Replacement ................................................... 88 Removal and Installation ......................................... 89 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ............................................................... 90 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 90 System Description ................................................. 90 CAN Communication System Description .............. 91 Schematic ............................................................... 92 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L - ....................................... 93 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 96 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 96 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 97 Preliminary Check ................................................... 97 CONSULT-III Functions .......................................... 97 Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate ................................................................. 97 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ................... 100 Bulb Replacement ................................................. 100 Removal and Installation ....................................... 100 CORNERING LAMP .......................................... 68 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 68 System Description ................................................. 68 CAN Communication System Description .............. 69 Schematic ............................................................... 70 Wiring Diagram - CORNER - .................................. 71 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 73 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 73 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ................. 74 Preliminary Check .................................................. 74 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ........................ 74 Cornering Lamp Does Not Operate ........................ 75 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 76 Removal and Installation ........................................ 76 REAR COMBINATION LAMP .......................... 102 Bulb Replacement ................................................. 102 Removal and Installation ....................................... 102 TRAILER TOW ................................................. 103 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 103 System Description ............................................... 103 Wiring Diagram - T/TOW - .................................... 104 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 104 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .................................. 106 Wiring Diagram - COMBSW - ................................. 79 Combination Switch Reading Function ................... 79 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................ 80 Combination Switch Inspection .............................. 81 Removal and Installation ........................................ 83 Switch Circuit Inspection ........................................ 83 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 106 System Description ............................................... 107 Schematic ............................................................. 111 Wiring Diagram - INT/L - ....................................... 113 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ............... 119 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ............... 119 Preliminary Check ................................................. 120 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .............................. 120 Room/Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate ........ 122 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate (Room/ Map Lamps Operate) ............................................ 123 Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate ................................................................. 124 All Step/Foot Lamps Do Not Operate ................... 125 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 126 STOP LAMP ...................................................... 84 ILLUMINATION ................................................ 127 System Description ................................................. 84 Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - ..................................... 85 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 86 Removal and Installation ........................................ 87 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................ 127 System Description ............................................... 127 CAN Communication System Description ............ 129 Schematic ............................................................. 130 Wiring Diagram - ILL - ........................................... 132 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ......... 77 Removal ................................................................. 77 Installation .............................................................. 77 HAZARD SWITCH ............................................. 78 Removal and Installation ........................................ 78 COMBINATION SWITCH .................................. 79 BACK-UP LAMP ................................................ 88 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - ..................................... 88 Revision: August 2007 LT-2 2008 Quest BULB SPECIFICATIONS ................................. 140 Headlamp .............................................................. 140 Exterior Lamp ........................................................ 140 Interior Lamp/Illumination ...................................... 140 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-3 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719031 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. General precautions for service operations INFOID:0000000001719032 • Never work with wet hands. • Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector. • When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehicle and with the power connected to the vehicle-side connector. • Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot. • When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and discard. Do not break the bulb. • Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. • Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant. Revision: August 2007 LT-4 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEADLAMP (FOR USA) A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719033 B C D E F G H I WKIA5259E 1. IPDM E/R 4. Combination meter M24 2. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 3. System Description Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 INFOID:0000000001719034 Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized, these relays direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate. J LT L M OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to IPDM E/R CPU, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to IPDM E/R CPU, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 40. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and Revision: August 2007 LT-5 N O P 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38, and • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • to combination meter terminal 20 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. Low Beam Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power • through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 20 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and • through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 30 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate. High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R and combination meter across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power • through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 27 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 3, and • through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 28 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 3. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate. BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON) and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Refer to LT-35, "System Description" for auto light operation. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (PANIC ALARM) The vehicle security system (panic alarm) will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-48, "System Description". CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719035 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 LT-6 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719036 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4679E Revision: August 2007 LT-7 2008 Quest P HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP - INFOID:0000000001719037 WKWA4680E Revision: August 2007 LT-8 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4681E P Revision: August 2007 LT-9 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4682E Revision: August 2007 LT-10 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O ALLWA0138GB P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719038 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719039 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-11 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001719040 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-5, "System Description". Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-12, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719041 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719042 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". Display Item List Item Description CONSULT-III Factory setting Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp battery saver control mode between ON/OFF. ON × BATTERY SAVER SET OFF — DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. Revision: August 2007 LT-12 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > A ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". B C Display Item List D Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF) PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays status of the front door RH as judged from the front door switch RH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the back door as judged from the back door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. CARGO LAMP SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of cargo lamp switch. OPTICAL SENSOR [0 - 5V] Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical sensor signal. E F G H I J LT L M N O ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. P Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Revision: August 2007 LT-13 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test item Description TAIL LAMP Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. HEAD LAMP Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF. FR FOG LAMP Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. CARGO LAMP Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF. CORNERING LAMP Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching ON-OFF. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Display Item List Monitored item CAN communication CAN communication system CONSULT-ll display Description CAN communication [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. CAN communication system 1 to 6 [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN system. CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000001719043 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. DATA MONITOR Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. 3. 4. 5. Touch “START”. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Revision: August 2007 LT-14 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT−III screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Headlamp high beam request Item name A ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM CRNRNG LMP REQ ON/OFF × – × Signal status input from BCM FR FOG REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM Parking, license plate and tail lamps request Cornering lamp Monitor item selection Front fog lamps request NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST B C D E F Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test item H CONSULT−III screen display Description TAIL LAMP Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. I Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). J Tail lamp relay output Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output LAMPS Front fog lamp relay (FOG) output Cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) output G Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. CORNERING LAMP Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) INFOID:0000000001719044 LT L 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HI BEAM SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in HIGH position : HI BEAM SW ON M N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". O 2.HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure headlamp high beam operates. Headlamp high beam should operate. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 LT-15 2008 Quest P HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "HL LO REQ" and "HL HI REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in HIGH position. When lighting switch is in HIGH position : HL LO REQ ON : HL HI REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 4.CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals (+) Front combination lamp connector RH E13 LH E45 (–) Voltage Ground Battery voltage Terminal 3 WKIA4130E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector terminals. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B Terminal Front combination lamp connector 27 RH E13 28 LH E45 Terminal Continuity 3 Yes WKIA4044E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Revision: August 2007 LT-16 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector terminals and ground. A Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E13 LH E45 Terminal 4 Ground Continuity B Yes C OK or NG OK >> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) WKIA4131E D INFOID:0000000001719045 E 1.BULB INSPECTION F Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". G 2.CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP 1. 2. 3. Disconnect inoperative front combination lamp connector. Turn the high beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground. H I Terminals (+) Front combination lamp connector RH E13 LH E45 (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage J Terminal 3 LT WKIA4256E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. L 3.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. M Turn the high beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground. N Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E13 LH E45 Continuity Terminal 4 Ground O Yes OK or NG OK >> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. P WKIA4131E 4.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Revision: August 2007 LT-17 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B Terminal Front combination lamp connector 27 RH E13 28 LH E45 Terminal Continuity 3 Yes WKIA4044E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. High-Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate INFOID:0000000001719046 1.CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INSPECTION Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-38. OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-22, "Combination Meter". NG >> Repair as necessary. Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) INFOID:0000000001719047 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in 2ND position : HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON : HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". 2.HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure headlamp low beam operates. Headlamp low beam should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "HL LO REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 2ND position. When lighting switch is in 2ND position : HL LO REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Revision: August 2007 LT-18 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp RH and LH harness connectors and ground. B C D Terminals (+) Front combination lamp connector RH E12 LH E44 (–) Voltage Ground Battery voltage E Terminal 1 WKIA4184E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. F G 5.CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front combination lamp harness connector terminal. A IPDM E/R connector I B Front combination lamp connector Terminal E122 20 RH E12 30 LH E44 Terminal Continuity 1 J Yes WKIA4185E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Repair harness or connector. LT L 6.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground. N Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E12 LH E44 Voltage Terminal 2 O Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 LT-19 P WKIA4186E 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) INFOID:0000000001719048 1.BULB INSPECTION Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". 2.CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP 1. 2. 3. Disconnect inoperative front combination lamp connector. Turn the low beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative front combination lamp connector terminal and ground. Terminals (+) Front combination lamp connector RH E12 LH E44 (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Terminal 1 WKIA4184E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn the low beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp connector terminal and ground. Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E12 LH E44 Continuity Terminal 2 Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp and IPDM E/R connector. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. WKIA4186E 4.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminals. A IPDM E/R connector E122 B Terminal Front combination lamp connector 20 RH E12 30 LH E44 Terminal Continuity 1 Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-20 WKIA4185E 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF INFOID:0000000001719049 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL B Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in OFF position A C : HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF : HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF D OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace lighting switch. Refer to LT-83, "Removal and Installation". F 3.CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R G Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III and perform self-diagnosis for BCM. Display of self-diagnosis results NO DTC>>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)". Aiming Adjustment H I INFOID:0000000001719050 J LT L M N O WKIA5278E 1. RH headlamp (low beam) adjustment screw 2. LH headlamp (low beam) adjustment screw P For details, refer to the regulations in your area. NOTE: If vehicle front body has been repaired and /or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check headlamp aiming. HEADLAMP AIMING NOTE: Revision: August 2007 LT-21 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following: - Confirm headlamp aiming switch is set to "0" (zero) position (if equipped). - Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure. - Place vehicle and screen on level surface. - Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position). Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full. - Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed. - Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. WKIA1053E • Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps accordingly. LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM NOTE: Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen. 1. Turn headlamp low beam on. 2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719051 CAUTION: • Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result. • Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. • Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to replace it with a new one. • After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness. HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM Removal 1. 2. 3. Turn headlamp switch OFF. Disconnect the electrical connector. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Revision: August 2007 LT-22 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM Removal B 1. 2. 3. C Turn headlamp switch OFF. Disconnect the electrical connector. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP Removal 1. 2. E Turn the front turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. Pull bulb to remove it from socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719052 G FRONT COMBINATION LAMP Removal 1. 2. H Remove front fascia. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation". Remove front combination lamp bolts. I J LT WKIA1054E 3. Pull front combination lamp toward front of the vehicle, disconnect connectors, and remove front combination lamp. Installation 1. 2. L M Connect front combination lamp connectors. Install front combination lamp bolts. N O P WKIA1054E 3. 4. Install front fascia. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation". Verify headlamp aiming. Refer to LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment". Revision: August 2007 LT-23 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR USA) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001719053 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP WKIA1055E 1. Headlamp bulb (High beam) 2. Headlamp assembly 3. Cornering lamp bulb 4. Cornering lamp bulb socket 5. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb socket 6. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb 7. Headlamp bulb (Low beam) Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn high beam bulb counterclockwise to unlock and remove high beam bulb. Turn low beam bulb counterclockwise to unlock and remove low beam bulb. Turn turn signal/parking lamp (front) bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove turn signal/parking lamp (front) bulb. Turn cornering lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock and remove cornering lamp bulb. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Revision: August 2007 LT-24 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location A INFOID:0000000001719054 B C D E F G H I WKIA5260E 1. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. IPDM E/R E121, E122, E124 3. 4. Combination meter M24 5. Daytime light control unit E103, E104 6. 7. Daytime light relay E148 Generator F1, E112 J Parking brake switch E140 LT System Description INFOID:0000000001719055 The headlamp system for Canada vehicles is equipped with a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running and the lighting switch is in the OFF or 1st position. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied. Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and • to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and • through 15A fuse (No. 29, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to daytime light control unit terminals 2 and 3, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU in the IPDM E/R. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to daytime light control unit terminal 12, and Revision: August 2007 LT-25 2008 Quest L M N O P HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 9, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to daytime light control unit terminal 1. Ground is supplied • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60, and • to daytime light control unit terminal 9 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to BCM terminal 67 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. HEADLAMP OPERATION Low Beam Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power • through 15A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 30, and • to front combination lamp LH terminal 1, and • to daytime light control unit terminal 4 • through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 20 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and • through diode 3 • to daytime light control unit terminal 1. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate. High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power • through 10A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 27 • to daytime light relay terminal 2, and • through diode-3 • to daytime light control unit terminal 1, and When energized, the daytime light relay directs power • through daytime light relay terminal 3 • to daytime light control unit terminal 8 and • to front combination lamp RH terminal 3. Also when the headlamp high relay is energized, it directs power • through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 28 • to daytime light control unit terminal 5 • through daytime light control unit terminal 6 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 3. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp RH terminal 4 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to front combination lamp LH terminal 4 • to daytime light control unit terminal 7 • through daytime light control unit terminal 9 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. Revision: August 2007 LT-26 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate. A BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. B AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) C For auto light operation, refer to LT-35, "System Description". DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is supplied • through daytime light control unit terminal 6 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 3 • through front combination lamp LH terminal 4 • to daytime light control unit terminal 7, and • through daytime light control unit terminal 8 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 3. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp RH terminal 4 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719056 D E F G H Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-27 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719057 WKWA4684E Revision: August 2007 LT-28 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - DTRL - INFOID:0000000001719058 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4685E Revision: August 2007 LT-29 2008 Quest P HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4686E Revision: August 2007 LT-30 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4687E P Revision: August 2007 LT-31 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719059 DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT WKIA5200E DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Terminal No. Wire color 1 BR/W 2 SB Battery Ignition switch in all positions Battery voltage 3 SB Battery Ignition switch in all positions Battery voltage 4 L Lighting switch in the headlamp ON (2ND) position and low beam (B) position Battery voltage 5 6 7 G L/W Y/G Item Ignition switch start signal Lighting switch headlamp LH low beam output Lighting switch headlamp LH high beam output Headlamp LH high beam Headlamp LH (high) control Condition Ignition switch in START position All other conditions All other conditions Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position All other conditions 8 Y Revision: August 2007 Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage 0V Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position Battery voltage With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N position. Battery voltage All other conditions 0V Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position and high beam position 0V With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N position. Battery voltage All other conditions Lighting switch headlamp RH high beam output Voltage (Approx.) 0V Lighting switch in the flash-to-pass (C) position or headlamp ON (2ND) position and high beam (A) position Battery voltage With parking brake released, engine running and lighting switch in OFF or parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) positions CAUTION: Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P or N position. 6V All other conditions 0V LT-32 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 9 B 10 Y/G 11 BR/Y 12 G Ground Parking brake switch Generator (L terminal) Ignition switch on signal — Parking brake released — Battery voltage Parking brake set When engine is running 0V Battery voltage All other conditions 0V Ignition switch OFF, ACC positions 0V Ignition switch ON, START positions Aiming Adjustment A Battery voltage B C INFOID:0000000001719060 D Refer to LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment". Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719061 E Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719062 F FRONT COMBINATION LAMP Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation". G DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. 2. 3. H Remove the daytime light control unit bolt. Disconnect connectors. Remove daytime light control unit. I J WKIA1057E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LT L DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY Removal NOTE: The daytime light relay is taped to the main wiring harness near the lower dash side finisher RH. 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". 2. Carefully remove the tape holding the daytime light relay to the main harness. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove daytime light relay. M N O P WKIA1093E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 LT-33 2008 Quest HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001719063 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP Refer to LT-24, "Disassembly and Assembly". Revision: August 2007 LT-34 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719064 B C D E F G H I WKIA5261E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination switch M28 3. Optical sensor M16 4. Sliding door switch LH B46, RH B135 5. Front door switch LH B8, RH B108 6. Back door latch (door ajar switch) D511 System Description J LT INFOID:0000000001719065 Automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with ambient light. Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using eight modes. Mode selections are accessed through the vehicle electronic settings menu of the color display (refer to owners manual) or with CONSULTIII. L M OUTLINE The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects outside brightness. When the lighting switch is in "AUTO" position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted using four modes. For the details of the setting, refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". Optical sensor ground is supplied • to optical sensor terminal 3 • through BCM (body control module) terminal 18. When ignition switch is turned to "ON" position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level, input is supplied • to BCM terminal 58 • from optical sensor terminal 4. The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-5, "System Description". COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 LT-35 2008 Quest N O P AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, and one of the front doors is opened, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the headlamp are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III. DELAY TIMER FUNCTION When the ignition switch is ON and auto light switch is ON, the BCM turns on/off the headlamps. In delay timer function, ignition is OFF, auto light sensor power source is OFF and the headlamps are not turned on/off by the BCM. On condition that: • when the state of ignition switch ON or ACC is ON and output judgment by auto light function is headlamp ON changes to ignition switch and ACC are OFF and any door switch is ON, output judgment by BCM should be headlamp ON for 5 minutes by timer. After time out, output judgment by BCM should be headlamp OFF. • when the state of any door switch is turned to ON from OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 5 minutes, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After time out, BCM judges output as headlamp OFF. • when the state of front door switch LH, front door switch RH, rear door switch LH, rear door switch RH or back door latch (door ajar switch) is ON turns to all door switches are OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 45 seconds, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After timer out, BCM judges output as headlamp OFF. • when the state is ignition switch ON or ACC is ON or auto light switch OFF while timer is counting, timer stops counting and BCM turns on/off lamps according to headlamp function, front fog lamp function, auto light function and headlamp battery save function. Delay timer control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III or with the display (with color display). CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719066 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Major Component and Functions INFOID:0000000001719067 Components Functions BCM • Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch (AUTO), front door switch LH, front door switch RH, sliding door switch LH and RH, back door latch (door ajar switch), and ignition switch (ON, OFF). Optical sensor • Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage and sends it to BCM. (Detects lightness of 50 to 1,300 lux) Revision: August 2007 LT-36 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719068 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4688E Revision: August 2007 LT-37 2008 Quest P AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AUTO/L - INFOID:0000000001719069 WKWA4689E Revision: August 2007 LT-38 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4690E P Revision: August 2007 LT-39 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4691E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719070 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719071 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-40 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719072 A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-35, "System Description". Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-44, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719073 B C D SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS • Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-III. Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". E CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION 1.CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION F Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". OK or NG OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT". NG >> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". G CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT H Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". I CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719074 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part J SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. LT L Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. M BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. N WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING" or "ILL DELAY SET" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch “START”. Touch "MODE 1-4" of setting to be changed (CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING). Touch "MODE1-8" of setting to be changed (ILL DELAY SET). Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". Revision: August 2007 LT-41 2008 Quest O P AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Work Support Setting Item • Sensitivity of auto light can be selected and set from four modes. Work item Description CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING ILL DELAY SET Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes. • MODE 1 (Normal)/ MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE4 (Insensitive) Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer period among eight modes. • MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/MODE 5 (90 sec.)/ MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.) DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF) PASSING SW “ON/OFF” Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays status of the front door RH as judged from the front door switch RH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the sliding door as judged from the sliding door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays status of the sliding door as judged from the sliding door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the back door as judged from the back door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/ Door is closed: OFF) Revision: August 2007 LT-42 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item Contents TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. CARGO LAMP SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of cargo lamp. OPTICAL SENSOR [0 - 5V] A B Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical sensor signal. C ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. D E Display Item List Test item F Description TAIL LAMP Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. HEAD LAMP Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF. FR FOG LAMP Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. CARGO LAMP Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF. CORNERING LAMP G H Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching ON-OFF. CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000001719075 I CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS Description J Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. DATA MONITOR Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. LT DATA MONITOR L Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. N ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. 3. 4. 5. Touch "START". Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECTION FROM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Revision: August 2007 M LT-43 2008 Quest O P AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Headlamp high beam request Item name ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM CRNRNG LMP REQ ON/OFF × – × Signal status input from BCM FR FOG REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM Parking, license plate and tail lamps request Cornering lamp Monitor item selection Front fog lamps request NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test item Tail lamp relay output CONSULT-III screen display Description TAIL LAMP Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output LAMPS Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Front fog lamp relay output Cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) output Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). CORNERING LAMP Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom INFOID:0000000001719076 Trouble phenomenon Malfunction system and reference • Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) • Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) • Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light, but parking lamps stay on. • Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • Refer to LT-45, "Lighting Switch Inspection". • Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection". If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) • Refer to LT-41, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". • Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection". If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) • Refer to LT-45, "Optical Sensor System Inspection". If above systems is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Revision: August 2007 LT-44 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble phenomenon Malfunction system and reference Auto light adjustment system will not operate. • CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)". Shut off delay feature will not operate. • CAN communication line inspection between BCM and combination meter. Refer to BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)". • Refer to BL-35, "Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)". If above systems is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". A B C D Lighting Switch Inspection INFOID:0000000001719077 1.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL E With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in AUTO position F : AUTO LIGHT SW ON G Without CONSULT-III Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". Optical Sensor System Inspection H INFOID:0000000001719078 I 1.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "OPTICAL SENSOR" data monitor, check difference in the voltage when the optical sensor is illuminated and not illuminated. J LT Illuminated OPTICAL SENSOR Not illuminated OPTICAL SENSOR : 3.1V or more L : 0.6V or less CAUTION: Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy the standard. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 2. M N O 2.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT P Revision: August 2007 LT-45 2008 Quest AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and optical sensor connector. 3. Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 and optical sensor harness connector M16 terminal 3. 18 - 3 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 and ground. 18 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WKIA1059E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 58 and optical sensor connector M16 (B) terminal 4. 58 - 4 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 58 and ground. 58 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace optical sensor. Refer to LT-46, "Removal and Installation". Recheck sensor output with CONSULT-III. If NG, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. Removal and Installation WKIA5416E INFOID:0000000001719079 OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove defrost grille. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Disconnect the connector. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. WKIA5279E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 LT-46 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT FOG LAMP A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719080 B C D WKIA5262E 1. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 F System Description INFOID:0000000001719081 Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) for front fog lamp operation. When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. When the headlamps are illuminated, this input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When activated, this relay directs power to the front fog lamps. G H I OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R) • to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. J LT L M N O P FOG LAMP OPERATION The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp operation. With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power • through IPDM E/R terminal 37 • to front fog lamp LH terminal +, and Revision: August 2007 E LT-47 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through IPDM E/R terminal 36 • to front fog lamp RH terminal +. Ground is supplied • to front fog lamp LH and RH terminal – • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), the fog lamp switch is ON and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the fog lamps (and headlamps) are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719082 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 LT-48 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - INFOID:0000000001719083 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4692E Revision: August 2007 LT-49 2008 Quest P FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4693E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719084 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719085 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-50 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719086 A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-47, "System Description". Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-51, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the front fog lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check B C INFOID:0000000001719087 D CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION 1.CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION E Confirm BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". OK or NG OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT". NG >> Change BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-17, "Configuration". F CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Refer to PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Functions INFOID:0000000001719088 H Refer to LT-12, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-14, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) I INFOID:0000000001719089 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL J Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in FOG position LT : FR FOG SW ON OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". L 2.FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. M Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure fog lamps operate. Fog lamps should operate. O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. P 3.CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "FR FOG REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in FOG position. When lighting switch is in FOG position Revision: August 2007 N : FR FOG REQ ON LT-51 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 4.IPDM E/R INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect front fog lamp LH/RH harness connector. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". When front fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right front fog lamp connector terminals and ground. Front fog lamp (+) Voltage (Approx.) (–) Connector Terminal RH E101 LH E102 + Ground Battery voltage WKIA1064E OK or NG OK >> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary. NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) INFOID:0000000001719090 1.BULB INSPECTION Inspect bulb of lamp which does not illuminate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace fog lamp bulb. Refer to LT-53, "Bulb Replacement". 2.INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector. Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM E/R and inoperative front fog lamp harness connector terminal. IPDM E/R Connector E124 Front fog lamp Terminal Connector 36 RH E101 37 LH E102 Terminal + Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> Check ground circuit. If NG, repair harness or connector. WKIA1063E If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and inoperative front fog lamp. Aiming Adjustment INFOID:0000000001719091 NOTE: • If vehicle front body has been repaired and /or the fog lamp assembly has been replaced, check fog lamp aiming. • Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following: - Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure. - Place vehicle and screen on level surface. - Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position). Coolant and engine oil is filled to correct level, and fuel tank full. - Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed. Revision: August 2007 LT-52 2008 Quest FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the front fog lamp lens as shown. A B C MEL327G D 2. 3. Position fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21. Turn front fog lamps ON and adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw (1) so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the front fog lamp centers as shown. E F G LKIA0704E H Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719092 I J LT L M N MEL328G O The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. REMOVAL CAUTION: • Turn fog lamp switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector. • Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. • Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. Keep grease and other oily substances away from bulb. • Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc., may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. Revision: August 2007 LT-53 2008 Quest P FRONT FOG LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. 2. 3. Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21. Disconnect electrical connector. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. LKIA0705E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Fog Lamp Assembly INFOID:0000000001719093 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. • Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. • Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc., may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. 1. 2. 3. Position the fender protector aside. Refer to EI-21. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the front fog lamp assembly. • Remove the screw (5). • Pull the bracket (2) toward the rear of vehicle to release the snap clip (1). • Remove the front fog lamp screws (3) and remove the front fog lamp housing (4). LKIA0706E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Install front fog lamp assembly. • Position the front fog lamp housing (4) and install the front fog lamp screws (3) • Press the bracket (2) onto the snap clip (1). • Install the screws (5). Connect the electrical connector. Verify fog lamp aiming. Refer to LT-52, "Aiming Adjustment". Install the fender protector. Refer to EI-21. LKIA0706E Revision: August 2007 LT-54 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719094 B C D E F G H I WKIA5263E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 4. Hazard switch M55 2. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 3. System Description Combination meter M24 J INFOID:0000000001719095 OUTLINE L Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 40. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38, and • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 38. When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 and • to combination meter terminal 20 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. M N O P TURN SIGNAL OPERATION LH Turn Revision: August 2007 LT-55 LT 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > When the turn signal switch is moved to the left position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminal 60. The BCM supplies power • through BCM terminal 60 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 7 • through front combination lamp LH terminal 6 • to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 • to grounds B7 and B19. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator lamp within combination meter. RH Turn When the turn signal switch is moved to the right position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminal 61. The BCM supplies power • through BCM terminal 61 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 7 • through front combination lamp RH terminal 6 • to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 • to grounds B117 and B132. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator lamp within combination meter. HAZARD LAMP OPERATION When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 29 • through hazard switch terminal 2 • through hazard switch terminal 1 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the hazard switch is depressed, the BCM, interpreting it as hazard warning lamps are ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61. The BCM supplies power • through BCM terminals 60 and 61 • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7 • through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6 • to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 • to grounds B7 and B19, and • to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 • to grounds B117 and B132. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator lamps within combination meter. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61. The BCM supplies power • through BCM terminals 60 and 61 • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7 • through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6 • to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to rear combination lamp LH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 • to grounds B7 and B19, and • to rear combination lamp RH terminal 3 • through rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 Revision: August 2007 LT-56 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to grounds B117 and B132. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines and turns on turn signal indicator lamps within combination meter. With power and input supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is used to activate the remote keyless entry system. A B COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719096 C Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". D E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-57 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719097 WKWA4694E Revision: August 2007 LT-58 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - TURN - INFOID:0000000001719098 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4695E Revision: August 2007 LT-59 2008 Quest P TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4696E Revision: August 2007 LT-60 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4697E P Revision: August 2007 LT-61 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4698E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719099 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001719100 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-55, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 LT-62 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-63, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection C CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719102 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. D Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION B INFOID:0000000001719101 Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". BCM diagnostic test item A E F Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. G The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. H Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure I 1. 2. 3. J Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual signal. 4. 5. 6. LT Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". L M Display Item List Monitor item IGN ON SW N Contents "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. HAZARD SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal. TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. BRAKE SW "OFF" Displays status of parking brake switch. P ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. Revision: August 2007 LT-63 O 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Description FLASHER (RH) Turn signal lamp (RH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. FLASHER (LH) Turn signal lamp (LH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Front Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719103 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "FLASHER" data monitor, mak sure "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in TURN RH position When lighting switch is in TURN LH position : TURN SIGNAL R ON : TURN SIGNAL L ON Without CONSULT-III Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". 2.ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-III Select "FLASHER" during active test. Refer to LT-63, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". Make sure "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal. A BCM connector RH LH B Terminal M20 Front combination lamp connector 61 RH E107 60 LH E11 Terminal Continuity 6 Yes WKIA5265E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK GROUND Revision: August 2007 LT-64 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between inoperative front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground. A Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E107 LH E11 Terminal 5 Ground Continuity B Yes C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA4508E D 5.CHECK BULB Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp". OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement". Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719104 E F G 1.CHECK TAIL LAMPS AND STOP LAMPS Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement". H I 2.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and rear combination lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM (A) connector M20 terminal 61 and rear combination lamp RH (B) connector B130 (without trailer tow), B306 (with trailer tow) terminal 3. 61 - 3 3. J LT : Continuity should exist. L Check continuity between BCM (A) connector M20 terminal 60 and rear combination lamp LH harness connector B35 (without trailer tow), B302 (with trailer tow) terminal 3. WKIA5266E 60 - 3 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. M N 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT O Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector B35 (without trailer tow), B302 (with trailer tow) LH and B130 (without trailer tow), B306 (with trailer tow) RH terminal 5 and ground. P 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check rear combination lamp connector for proper connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1255E Revision: August 2007 LT-65 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operates INFOID:0000000001719105 1.CHECK BULB Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement" for front turn signal bulb. Refer to LT-67, "Bulb Replacement" for rear turn signal bulb. 2.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of hazard switch. When hazard switch is in ON position : HAZARD SW ON Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29 and ground. BCM (+) (–) Connector Terminal M18 29 Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Hazard switch is ON 0V Hazard switch is OFF 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 3. SKIA5911E 3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29 and hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 2. 29 - 2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. SKIA5912E 4.CHECK GROUND Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. SKIA5913E Revision: August 2007 LT-66 2008 Quest TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH A Check continuity of hazard switch. Hazard switch Terminal 1 2 Condition B Continuity Hazard switch is ON Yes Hazard switch is OFF No OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if hazard warning lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-78, "Removal and Installation". Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate C D SKIA5914E E INFOID:0000000001719106 1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM F Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-6, "Condition of Error Detection". OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-12, "Combination Meter". NG >> Repair as necessary. Bulb Replacement G INFOID:0000000001719107 H FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". I REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement". J Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719108 LT FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation". REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP L Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation". M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-67 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > CORNERING LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719109 WKIA5267E 1. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 System Description INFOID:0000000001719110 OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to cornering lamp relay LH and RH, and • to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. CORNERING LAMP OPERATION LH Turn When the lighting switch is in the 2nd position or in the AUTO position (headlamp ON) and turn signal switch is moved to the left position, BCM sends signal through CAN communication lines to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R then operates cornering lamp relay LH. When this relay is energized, power is supplied • through IPDM E/R terminal 34 • to front combination lamp LH terminal 9. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp LH terminal 8 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. RH Turn When the lighting switch is in the 2nd position or in the AUTO position (headlamp ON) and turn signal switch is moved to the right position, BCM sends signal through CAN communication lines to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R then operates cornering lamp relay RH. When this relay is energized, power is supplied Revision: August 2007 LT-68 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through IPDM E/R terminal 23 • to front combination lamp RH terminal 9. Ground is supplied • to front combination lamp RH terminal 8 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. A B COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719111 C Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". D E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-69 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719112 WKWA4699E Revision: August 2007 LT-70 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - CORNER - INFOID:0000000001719113 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4700E Revision: August 2007 LT-71 2008 Quest P CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALLWA0139GB Revision: August 2007 LT-72 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O ALLWA0140GB P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719114 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719115 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-73 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001719116 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-68, "System Description". Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-74, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719117 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" and PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000001719118 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual signal. 3. 4. 5. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Item name Cornering lamp CONSULT−III screen display Display or unit CRNRNG LMP REQ ON/OFF Monitor item selection ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description × – × Signal status input from BCM NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "CORNERING LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "RH" or "LH" item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. Revision: August 2007 LT-74 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. A Display Item List Test item Description CORNERING LAMP (RH) Cornering lamp (RH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. CORNERING LAMP (LH) Cornering lamp (LH) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Cornering Lamp Does Not Operate B INFOID:0000000001719119 C 1.ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-III 1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "CORNERING LAMP" during active test. 3. Select "RH", then "LH" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Make sure cornering lamp LH and RH operate. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Make sure "CRNRNG LMP REQ" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. NOTE: Lighting switch must not be in OFF position. D E F G H I When lighting switch is in TURN RH position When lighting switch is in TURN LH position : CRNRNG LMP REQ R J : CRNRNG LMP REQ L OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". LT 3.CHECK BULB L Check bulb standard of each cornering lamp is correct. Refer to LT-140, "Exterior Lamp". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace cornering lamp bulb. Refer to LT-76, "Bulb Replacement". M 4.CHECK CORNERING LAMPS CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front combination lamp LH and RH connectors. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front combination lamp harness connector terminal. A IPDM E/R connector O B Terminal Front combination lamp connector RH E122 23 RH E137 LH E124 34 LH E43 Terminal 7 Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: August 2007 P Continuity WKIA4189E LT-75 2008 Quest CORNERING LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK GROUND Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E137 LH E43 Continuity Terminal 8 Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Repair harness or connector. Bulb Replacement WKIA4190E INFOID:0000000001719120 Refer to "LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719121 Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 LT-76 2008 Quest LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal 1. 2. A INFOID:0000000001719122 Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover". While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. B C D LKIA0013E Installation E INFOID:0000000001719123 F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-77 2008 Quest HAZARD SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719124 Removal 1. 2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C". Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1). LKIA0707E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 LT-78 2008 Quest COMBINATION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > COMBINATION SWITCH A Wiring Diagram - COMBSW - INFOID:0000000001719125 B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O P WKWA4703E Combination Switch Reading Function INFOID:0000000001719126 For details, refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 LT-79 2008 Quest COMBINATION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719127 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME Revision: August 2007 [1 - 7] Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal. LT-80 2008 Quest COMBINATION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents A RR WIPER ON "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Wiper (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. RR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Wiper INT (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. RR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Washer (ON)/(OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. Combination Switch Inspection B INFOID:0000000001719128 C 1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. D System 1 System 2 System 3 System 4 System 5 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LO TURN LH TURN RH FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEAD LAMP1 INT VOLUME 1 RR WASHER — HEAD LAMP2 HI BEAM RR WIPER INT INT VOLUME 3 AUTO LIGHT — TAIL LAMP INT VOLUME 2 RR WIPER ON — FR FOG — E F G >> GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally. H I Without CONSULT-III J Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. LT Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3. L HARNESS INSPECTION 3. 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-81 2008 Quest COMBINATION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > Suspect system BCM Connector 1 2 3 M18 4 5 4. Combination switch Terminal Connector Terminal Input 1 6 6 Output 1 36 1 Input 2 5 7 Output 2 35 2 Input 3 4 Output 3 34 Input 4 3 9 Output 4 33 4 Input 5 2 8 Output 5 32 5 M28 10 3 Continuity Yes LKIA0284E Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Suspect system BCM Connector 1 2 3 M18 4 5 Continuity Terminal Input 1 6 Output 1 36 Input 2 5 Output 2 35 Input 3 4 Output 3 34 Input 4 3 Output 4 33 Input 5 2 Output 5 32 Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. Set wiper dial to position 4. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. Revision: August 2007 LT-82 2008 Quest COMBINATION SWITCH < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Turn ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. A B Combination switch Suspect system (+) Connector Terminal 1 Input 1 1 2 Input 2 2 3 Input 3 3 4 M28 Input 4 4 5 Input 5 5 C D E OK or NG OK >> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". F G SKIA4976E 5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION H Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. Procedure 1 Replace lighting switch. 2 Confirm check results. 3 OK INSPECTION END NG Replace wiper switch. 4 Confirm check results. 5 OK INSPECTION END NG Replace switch base. 6 Confirm check results. 7 OK INSPECTION END NG Confirm symptom again. >> Inspection End. I J LT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719129 L Refer to LT-77, "Removal". Switch Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719130 M Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-83 2008 Quest STOP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > STOP LAMP System Description INFOID:0000000001719131 Power is supplied at all times • through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to stop lamp switch terminal 1. When the brake pedal is pressed, the stop lamp switch is closed and power is supplied • through stop lamp switch terminal 2 • to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and • to high-mounted stop lamp terminal +. Ground is supplied • to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 • through grounds B7 and B19, and • to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 • through grounds B117 and B132, and • to high-mounted stop lamp terminal – • through grounds D403 and D404. With power and ground supplied, the stop lamps illuminate. Revision: August 2007 LT-84 2008 Quest STOP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - INFOID:0000000001719132 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4704E Revision: August 2007 LT-85 2008 Quest P STOP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4705E Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719133 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Removal Revision: August 2007 LT-86 2008 Quest STOP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-35, "Rear Washer Nozzle". 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop lamp. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the high-mounted stop lamp housing. 5. Pull the bulb from the socket. A B C WKIA1260E D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. STOP LAMP E Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719134 F HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Removal 1. 2. 3. G Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-35, "Rear Washer Nozzle". Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop lamp. H I J WKIA1260E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LT STOP LAMP Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation". L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-87 2008 Quest BACK-UP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > BACK-UP LAMP Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - INFOID:0000000001719135 WKWA4706E Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719136 Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement". Revision: August 2007 LT-88 2008 Quest BACK-UP LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719137 A Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation". B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-89 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719138 WKIA5268E 1. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 System Description INFOID:0000000001719139 Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This relay, when energized, directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34 located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU in the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which when energized, directs power • through IPDM E/R terminal 22 • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5 • to license plate lamp LH and RH terminal + • to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied Revision: August 2007 LT-90 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and • to license plate lamp LH and RH terminal – • through grounds D403 and D404, and • to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 • through grounds B7 and B19, and • to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 • through grounds B117 and B132. With power and ground supplied, the parking, license plate and tail lamps illuminate. A B C COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". D EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the parking, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the parking, license plate and tail lamps are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III. CAN Communication System Description E F INFOID:0000000001719140 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-91 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719141 WKWA4707E Revision: August 2007 LT-92 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L - INFOID:0000000001719142 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4708E Revision: August 2007 LT-93 2008 Quest P PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4709E Revision: August 2007 LT-94 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4710E P Revision: August 2007 LT-95 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4711E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719143 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719144 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 LT-96 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719145 A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-90, "System Description". Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-97, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check B C INFOID:0000000001719146 D CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" and PG-27, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Functions E INFOID:0000000001719147 F Refer to LT-12, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-14, "CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate INFOID:0000000001719148 G 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in 1ST position H I : LIGHT SW 1ST ON Without CONSULT-III Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-81, "Combination Switch Inspection". J LT 2.ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-III 1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamp operation. Parking, license plate and tail lamp should operate L M N Without CONSULT-III 1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 2. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamp operation. O Parking, license plate and tail lamp should operate OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. P 3.CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "TAIL&CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 1ST position. Revision: August 2007 LT-97 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > When lighting switch is in 1ST position : TAIL&CLR REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 4.CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. Without CONSULT-III 1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 2. When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Terminals (+) Front combination lamp connector RH E107 LH E11 (–) Voltage Ground Battery voltage Terminal 4 WKIA4194E License plate lamp (+) Connector RH D508 LH D509 (–) Voltage Ground Battery voltage Terminal + WKIA1076E Rear combination lamp (+) Connector RH B130 (without trailer tow) B306 (with trailer tow) LH B35 (without trailer tow) B302 (with trailer tow) (–) Voltage Ground Battery voltage Terminal 2 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: August 2007 WKIA1257E LT-98 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. A B B IPDM E/R connector Terminal E122 22 Front combination lamp connector RH E107 LH E11 C Continuity Terminal 4 D Yes WKIA4195E 4. E Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamp harness connector. F IPDM E/R Connector License plate lamp Terminal E122 Connector 22 RH D508 LH D509 Continuity Terminal G + Yes H WKIA1078E 5. I Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and rear combination lamp harness connector. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal Connector RH E122 J Rear combination lamp 22 Terminal B130 (without trailer tow) B306 (with trailer tow) B35 (without trailer tow) B302 (with trailer tow) LH Continuity LT 2 Yes L OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1258E M 6.CHECK GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground. N O Terminals Front combination lamp connector RH E107 LH E11 Continuity Terminal P 5 Ground Yes WKIA4197E Revision: August 2007 LT-99 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between license lamp plate harness connector and ground. License plate lamp Connector RH D508 LH D509 Continuity Terminal – Ground Yes WKIA1080E 4. Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. Rear combination lamp Connector RH B130 (without trailer tow) B306 (with trailer tow) LH B35 (without trailer tow) B302 (with trailer tow) Continuity Terminal 5 Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check bulbs. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1259E Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) INFOID:0000000001719149 1.CHECK IPDM E/R 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes. OK or NG OK >> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-18, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction". NG >> Inspection End. Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719150 FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to LT-22, "Bulb Replacement". LICENSE PLATE LAMP Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer toEI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove license plate lamp socket. Remove license plate lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TAIL LAMP Refer to LT-102, "Bulb Replacement". Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719151 FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 LT-100 2008 Quest PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS < SERVICE INFORMATION > LICENSE PLATE LAMP A Removal 1. 2. Remove license plate finisher. Refer to EI-23. Remove license plate lamp. B Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. C TAIL LAMP Refer to LT-102, "Removal and Installation". D E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-101 2008 Quest REAR COMBINATION LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000001719152 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Turn rear combination lamp socket counterclockwise and remove from rear combination lamp. Remove bulb from rear combination lamp socket.. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719153 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Turn rear combination lamp socket counterclockwise and remove rear combination lamp. Remove rear combination lamp bolts. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from vehicle. WKIA1081E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Install rear combination lamp harness and grommet so that paint mark on grommet is at top and harness points down. WKIA1641E Revision: August 2007 LT-102 2008 Quest TRAILER TOW < SERVICE INFORMATION > TRAILER TOW A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719154 B C D WKIA4513E 1. Fuse and fusible link box 2. A. Trailer tow control unit B303 B. Trailer tow ground (View with rear lower finisher assembly LH removed) System Description E F INFOID:0000000001719155 G Power is supplied at all times • through 20A fuse (No. 24, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to trailer tow control unit terminal 7. Ground is supplied • to trailer tow control unit terminal 5, and • to trailer connector terminal 4 • through grounds B7 and B19. H I TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied J • through rear combination lamp LH • to trailer tow control unit terminal 3. The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow control unit. The trailer tow control unit supplies power LT • through trailer tow control unit terminal 1 • to trailer connector terminal 3. TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are all controlled by the trailer tow control unit. The trailer tow control unit regulates the amount of voltage supplied to the trailer lamps. If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on and the trailer tow control unit gets a brake lamp input, the trailer tow control unit supplies more voltage to the trailer lamps to make them illuminate brighter. Stop lamp input is supplied • through rear combination lamp LH • to trailer tow control unit terminal 8. Left turn signal and hazard lamp input is supplied • through rear combination lamp LH • to trailer tow control unit terminal 4. Right turn signal and hazard lamp input is supplied • through rear combination lamp RH • to trailer tow control unit terminal 9. Based on the stop lamp, turn signal lamp and hazard lamp inputs to the trailer tow control unit, power is supplied to trailer stop/turn lamp LH • through trailer tow control unit terminal 2 • to trailer harness connector terminal 2. Power is also supplied to trailer stop/turn lamp RH • through trailer tow control unit terminal 6 • to trailer harness connector terminal 1. Revision: August 2007 LT-103 2008 Quest L M N O P TRAILER TOW < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - T/TOW - INFOID:0000000001719156 WKWA4712E Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719157 TRAILER TOW CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Revision: August 2007 LT-104 2008 Quest TRAILER TOW < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. Wire color 1 BR 2 Y Item Tail lamps signal output Stop/LH turn lamp (output) Condition When tail lamps operate All other conditions 4 R/L G/B Tail lamps signal input LH turn lamps input When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage When LH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate Battery voltage (intermittently) 0V When tail lamps operate All other conditions 6 W When LH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate G Ground Stop/RH turn lamp (output) R — 8 R/G 9 G/Y Stop lamps signal input RH turn lamps input Battery voltage (intermittently) — When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage When RH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate Battery voltage (intermittently) Power supply C D E F 0V — When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released When RH turn lamps or hazard lamps operate All other conditions B Battery voltage 0V All other conditions 7 A 0V All other conditions 5 Battery voltage 0V All other conditions 3 Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage G Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage (intermittently) 0V H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-105 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719158 WKIA5269E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Lamps on demand switch M108 4. Foot lamp LH M99 RH M100 5. Personal lamp with rear roof console 6. R52, R54 Revision: August 2007 LT-106 3. Key switch M27 Ignition keyhole illumination M25 Personal lamp without rear roof console R2, R7, R12, R13 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Cargo lamp R11 8. Room/map lamps R9 9. Vanity lamp ( if equipped), LH R3 RH R8 10. Back door switch (without power back door) D512 Back door latch (door ajar switch) (with power back door) D511 11. Main power window and door lock/ 12. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) D14 unlock switch D7, D8 Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH D105 13. Front door switch LH B8 RH B108 14 Sliding door switch LH B46 RH B135 A B 15. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 C System Description INFOID:0000000001719159 When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, room/map lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF is controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch, door switches, unlock signal from keyfob, door lock and unlock switch, key cylinder switch, and ignition switch. When room/map lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room/ map lamp and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second. The room/map lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module). Room/map lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-III. Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when front door LH is opened (door switch ON) or key is removed from key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when front door LH is closed (door switch OFF). Step and foot lamp turns ON when any door is opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when all doors are closed (all door switches OFF). D E F G POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] H • to key switch terminal 1, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) I • to BCM terminal 70. When the key is inserted in key switch, power is supplied • through the key switch terminal 2 J • to BCM terminal 37. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] LT • to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. L When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 47 • through front door switch LH terminal 1 M • through case ground of front door switch LH. When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 12 • through front door switch RH terminal 1 N • through case ground of front door switch RH. When the sliding door LH is opened, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 48 O • through sliding door switch LH terminal 1 • through case ground of sliding door switch LH. When the sliding door RH is opened, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 13 P • through sliding door switch RH terminal 1 • through case ground of sliding door switch RH. When the liftgate is opened, ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 43 • through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal 7 (with power back door) • through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal 8 (with power back door) Revision: August 2007 LT-107 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through grounds D403 and D404. When doors are locked or unlocked by either door lock/unlock switch, BCM receives a ground signal • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows), or • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16 • through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 7 (without rear power vent windows) • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6 • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is locked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 6 (without rear power vent windows) • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 1 • through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied • through BCM terminal 63 • to lamps on demand switch terminal 3 • through lamps on demand switch terminal 4 (with switch in DOOR position) • to room/map lamps terminal 2 • to personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 2 (without rear roof console) or personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 3 (with rear roof console). With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate. SWITCH OPERATION When front door switch LH is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied • to ignition keyhole illumination terminal – • through BCM terminal 1. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to ignition keyhole illumination terminal +. When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied • to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and • to foot lamp LH and RH terminal – • through BCM terminal 62. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 2 • to foot lamp LH and RH terminal +. When room/map lamps switch is ON, ground is supplied • to room/map lamps terminal 3 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to room/map lamps terminal 1. When vanity lamp (if equipped), LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied • to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal – • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied Revision: August 2007 LT-108 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through BCM terminal 56 • to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal +. When personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied • to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly) • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 1 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly). When personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied • to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly) • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 1(without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly). When cargo lamp is ON, ground is supplied • to cargo lamp terminal 1 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied • through BCM terminal 56 • to cargo lamp terminal 2. A B C D E F G ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION H When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room/map lamp ON/OFF. Power is supplied at all times • through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] I • to key switch terminal 1. Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied J • to BCM terminal 22 • through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or 12 (without rear power vent windows). At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines that interior LT room/map lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. Key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied • through key switch terminal 2 L • to BCM terminal 37. When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room/map lamp timer conditions are met, and M turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. When front door LH opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room/map lamp operation are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. N Timer control is canceled under the following conditions. • Front door LH is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)] O • Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON) • Ignition switch ON. INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL If interior lamp is left "ON", it will not be turned out even when door is closed. BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF. BCM controls interior lamps listed below: • Vanity lamp (if equipped) • Room/map lamp • Cargo lamp • Personal lamp • Step lamps Revision: August 2007 LT-109 2008 Quest P INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Foot lamps • Ignition keyhole illumination After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when • signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked • door is opened or closed • key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder. Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III and through the display (with color display). Revision: August 2007 LT-110 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719160 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O ALLWA0141GB Revision: August 2007 LT-111 2008 Quest P INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4714E Revision: August 2007 LT-112 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - INT/L - INFOID:0000000001719161 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4715E Revision: August 2007 LT-113 2008 Quest P INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4716E Revision: August 2007 LT-114 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4717E P Revision: August 2007 LT-115 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4718E Revision: August 2007 LT-116 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O ALLWA0142GB P Revision: August 2007 LT-117 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE WKWA4720E Revision: August 2007 LT-118 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4721E P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719162 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. INFOID:0000000001719163 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Revision: August 2007 LT-119 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-107, "System Description". 3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-120, "Preliminary Check". 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719164 SWITCH INSPECTION • Ensure lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR or ON position. BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719165 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR Displays BCM input/output data in real time. ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". Display Item List Item Description CONSULT-III SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON The 30 seconds operating function of the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination can be selected when front door LH is released (unlocked). ON/OFF ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned on. MODE 1 - 7 ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps and the ignition keyhole illumination is turned off. MODE 1 - 7 Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF". MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Time (sec.) 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 0 Revision: August 2007 LT-120 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > DATA MONITOR A Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. C ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual signal. 4. 5. 6. B Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". D E Display Item List Monitor item F Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the front door LH as judged from the front door switch LH signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from front door switch RH signal. DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from sliding door switch RH signal. DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from sliding door switch LH signal. BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from back door switch signal. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in front door LH. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in front door LH. CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in front door LH. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in front door RH. KEYLESS LOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal. KEYLESS UNLOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal. G H I J LT L M ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure N 1. 2. 3. 4. O Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List P Test item Description INT LAMP Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. IGN ILLUM Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation. STEP LAMP TEST Step lamps can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. LUGGAGE LAMP TEST Cargo lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Revision: August 2007 LT-121 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Room/Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719166 1.CHECK EACH SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. 2.ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Select "INT LAMP" active test. When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, use active test to make sure interior room lamp operates. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK ROOM/MAP LAMPS INPUT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between room/map lamps harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals (+) Room/map lamps connector Terminal R9 1 (–) Voltage (approx.) Ground Battery voltage WKIA4253E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. 4.CHECK LAMPS ON DEMAND SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect lamps on demand switch connector. Check continuity between lamps on demand switch terminals. Lamps on demand switch Terminal 3 4 Condition Continuity Lamps on demand switch position: DOOR Yes Lamps on demand switch position: OFF No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace lamps on demand switch. WKIA1085E 5.CHECK LAMPS ON DEMAND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Connect lamps on demand switch connector. Turn lamps on demand switch to DOOR position. Revision: August 2007 LT-122 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect BCM connector. 4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and lamps on demand switch harness connector terminal. A A B B BCM connector Terminal Lamps on demand switch connector Terminal M20 63 M108 3 Continuity C Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if room/map lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA5270E D 6.CHECK ROOM/MAP LAMPS CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Disconnect BCM connector and room/map lamps connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and room/map lamps harness connector terminal. A BCM connector M20 F B Terminal Room/map lamps connector Terminal 56 R9 1 G Continuity Yes H OK or NG WKIA5271E OK >> Replace BCM if room/map lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector between BCM and room/map lamps or between room/map lamps and lamps on demand switch. Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate (Room/Map Lamps Operate) I J INFOID:0000000001719167 1.CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH LT Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-107, "System Description" for switches and their function. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning door switch. L M 2.CHECK PERSONAL LAMP OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Confirm lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR position. Disconnect personal lamp connector. Open any door. Check voltage between personal lamp harness connector terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground N O : Battery voltage should exist. P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1088E Revision: August 2007 LT-123 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK PERSONAL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect lamps on demand switch connector. Check continuity between lamps on demand switch harness connector M108 terminal 4 and personal lamp harness connector terminal 2 (without rear roof console assembly) or terminal 3 (with rear roof console assembly). 4 - 2 or 3 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace personal lamp. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1089E Ignition Keyhole Illumination Control Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719168 1.CHECK EACH SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. 2.ACTIVE TEST 1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Select "INT LAMP". 2. Select "IGN ILLUM" active test to make sure lamp operates. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION INPUT 1. Check voltage between ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal + and ground. + - Ground : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. WKIA1090E 4.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION BULB 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ignition keyhole illumination connector. Check continuity between ignition keyhole illumination terminals + and –. +-– : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace ignition keyhole illumination bulb. WKIA1248E 5.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 LT-124 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM connector. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 1 and ignition keyhole illumination harness connector M25 terminal –. –-1 A B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WKIA1911E D 6.CHECK IGNITION KEYHOLE ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and ignition keyhole illumination connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 56 and ignition keyhole illumination connector M25 (B) terminal +. + - 56 E F : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if ignition keyhole illumination does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. All Step/Foot Lamps Do Not Operate G WKIA5272E H INFOID:0000000001719169 I 1.CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-120, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)" for switches and J their functions. OK or NG LT OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. 2.CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector terminal and ground. M Terminals (+) Front step lamp LH connector Terminal D11 2 (–) Voltage (approx.) Ground Battery voltage N O WKIA5273E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. P 3.CHECK STEP LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 LT-125 2008 Quest INTERIOR ROOM LAMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and front step lamp LH harness connector terminal. A B BCM connector Terminal Front step lamp LH connector Terminal M20 62 D11 1 Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if front step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA5274E 4.CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminal and front step lamp LH harness connector terminal. A B BCM connector Terminal Front step lamp LH connector Terminal M20 56 D11 2 Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if front step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair harness or connector. All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate WKIA5275E INFOID:0000000001719170 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. All interior room lamps switch are OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 and ground. 56 - Ground : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative cable after repairing harness and then reconnect. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Revision: August 2007 LT-126 WKIA5276E 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > ILLUMINATION A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719171 B C D WKIA5277E 1. BCM M18, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) 2. Combination switch (lighting switch) M28 3. E Combination meter M24 (illumination control) F System Description INFOID:0000000001719172 Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position or if the auto light system (if equipped) G is activated the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail H lamp relay. This relay, when energized, directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and I • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and J • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 57, and LT • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse [No.19, located in fuse block (J/B)] L • to combination meter terminal 40. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] M • to BCM terminal 38, and • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 38. N With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied O • to BCM terminal 67 and • to combination meter terminals 20 and 21 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and P • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position or if the auto light system (if equipped) is activated, the BCM receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay which, when energized, directs power Revision: August 2007 LT-127 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through IPDM E/R terminal 22 • to A/T device (illumination) terminal 3 • to front heated seat switch LH (illumination) terminal 5 (with heated seats) • to pedal adjusting switch (illumination) terminal 5 (with adjustable pedals) • to TCS OFF switch (illumination) terminal 3 (without VDC) • to VDC OFF switch (illumination) terminal 3 (with VDC) • to AV switch (illumination) terminal 3 • to hazard switch (illumination) terminal 3 • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 16 • to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 5 • to audio unit terminal 8 • to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 5 (with rear sonar system) • to lamps on demand switch terminal 5 • to DVD player terminal 12 (with DVD entertainment system) • to glove box lamp terminal + • to display unit terminal 4 (with monochrome display unit) • to display control unit terminal 14 (with color display unit) • to front air control terminal 8 • to NAVI control unit terminal 61 (with NAVI) • to rear air control (rear) terminal 10 • to front heated seat switch RH (illumination) terminal 5 (with heated seats) • to console lamp terminal 2 • to automatic door main switch terminal 5 (with power sliding door) • to Bluetooth on indicator terminal 3 (with Bluetooth) • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 6 (with rear audio remote control unit) • through resistor-1 terminal 2 (with steering wheel audio control switches) • through resistor-1 terminal 1 (with steering wheel audio control switches) • through combination switch (spiral cable) terminal 26 (with steering wheel audio control switches) • to spiral cable (steering switch) terminal 18 (with steering wheel audio control switches). Illumination is controlled • through combination meter (illumination control) terminal 1 • to A/T device terminal 4 • to TCS OFF switch terminal 4 (without VDC) • to VDC OFF switch terminal 4 (with VDC) • to AV switch terminal 4 • to hazard switch terminal 4 • to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 • to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 1 • to audio unit terminal 7 • to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 4 (with rear sonar system) • to lamps on demand switch terminal 6 • to DVD player terminal 10 (with DVD entertainment system) • to front air control terminal 9 • through combination switch (spiral cable) terminal 27 (with steering wheel audio control switches) • to spiral cable (steering switch) terminal 21 (with steering wheel audio control switches). • to console lamp terminal 1 (with power sliding door) and • to automatic door main switch terminal 7 (with power sliding door). Ground is supplied • to glove box lamp terminal – • to display unit terminal 6 (with monochrome display unit) • to display control unit terminal 3 (with color display unit) • to console lamp terminal 1 (without power sliding door) • to rear air control (front) terminal 1 • to combination meter terminals 20 and 21 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 (with rear audio remote control unit) • through grounds B7 and B19, and • to NAVI control unit terminal 1 (with NAVI) • to rear air control (rear) terminal 9 • through grounds B117 and B132. With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate. Revision: August 2007 LT-128 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position or if auto light system (if equipped) is activated and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control function is activated. Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the illumination lamps are turned off. When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after illumination lamps are turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III and the display (with NAVI). CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719173 A B C D Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". E F G H I J LT L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LT-129 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719174 ALLWA0143GB Revision: August 2007 LT-130 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4723E P Revision: August 2007 LT-131 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - ILL - INFOID:0000000001719175 WKWA4724E Revision: August 2007 LT-132 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4725E P Revision: August 2007 LT-133 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4726E Revision: August 2007 LT-134 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4727E P Revision: August 2007 LT-135 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4728E Revision: August 2007 LT-136 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O ALLWA0144GB P Revision: August 2007 LT-137 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4730E Revision: August 2007 LT-138 2008 Quest ILLUMINATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J LT L M N O WKWA4731E P Revision: August 2007 LT-139 2008 Quest BULB SPECIFICATIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BULB SPECIFICATIONS Headlamp INFOID:0000000001719176 Item Wattage (W)* Low 51 (HB4) High 60 (HB3) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Exterior Lamp INFOID:0000000001719177 Item Wattage (W)* Turn signal lamp/parking lamp Front combination lamp Cornering lamp 27 Stop/Tail lamp Rear combination lamp 29/8 27/7 Turn signal lamp 27 Back-up lamp 18 Fog lamp 55 (H11) License plate lamp 5 High-mounted stop lamp 13 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Interior Lamp/Illumination INFOID:0000000001719178 Item Wattage (W)* Glove box lamp 3.4 Ignition keyhole illumination lamp 0.74 Room/Map lamp 8 Console lamp LED A/T device lamp 3 Foot lamp 3.4 Step lamp 3.8 Cargo lamp 7 Vanity lamp 1.32 Personal lamp (with rear roof console assembly) 8 Personal lamp (without rear roof console assembly) 8 Running board lamp 3.4 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: August 2007 LT-140 2008 Quest ENGINE SECTION LU ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM A LU C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................. 8 Changing Engine Oil ................................................. 9 OIL FILTER ....................................................... 10 Removal and Installation .........................................10 LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................... 6 Lubrication Circuit ..................................................... 6 Schematic ................................................................. 7 G OIL PUMP ......................................................... 12 Removal and Installation .........................................12 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................13 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 F OIL COOLER .................................................... 16 H Removal and Installation .........................................16 I SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 18 J Standard and Limit ..................................................18 ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 8 K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001717129 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000001717130 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING • After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the sealant using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. • In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap (1) the Tool to slide (2) it in the areas where the sealant is applied. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Using a scraper, remove the old sealant adhering to the mating surface. • Remove the sealant completely from the groove, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surface removing any adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. PBIC0003E 3. Attach the sealant tube to the Tool. Tool number : WS39930000 ( — ) • Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. Revision: August 2007 LU-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Apply the sealant without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions using Tool. • If there is a groove for the sealant application, apply the sealant to the groove. A LU C WBIA0567E D • As for the bolt holes, normally apply the sealant inside the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes. Make sure to read the text of service manual. • Within five minutes of sealant application, install the mating component. • If the sealant protrudes, wipe it off immediately. • Do not retighten after the installation. • After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill the engine with the proper oil and coolant. Refer to MA-11. E F G SEM159F H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001717131 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST25051001 (J-25695-1) Oil pressure gauge Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 kg-cm2, 356 psi) NT050 Adapting oil pressure gauge to upper oil pan ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Hose S-NT559 Removing and installing oil filter KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench S-NT772 WS39930000 ( — Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket ) NT052 Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter NT046 Commercial Service Tool Revision: August 2007 INFOID:0000000001717132 LU-4 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool name Description Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch Deep socket size 26 mm, 3/8 drive A LU C NT818 Power tools Loosening nuts and bolts D E PBIC0190E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-5 2008 Quest LUBRICATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit INFOID:0000000001717133 WBIA0366E 1. Intake camshaft journal (No. 2) 2. Intake camshaft 3. Main oil gallery 4. Piston oil jet 5. Chain case oil gallery 6. Oil pan 7. Oil cooler 8. Oil filter 9. Oil strainer 10. Oil pump 11. Timing chain oil jet 12. Chain case 13. IVT control cover 14. IVT controller 15. No. 1 camshaft bracket 16. IVT control solenoid valve 17. Exhaust camshaft journal (No. 1) 18. Camshaft chain tensioner oil gallery 19. Exhaust camshaft Revision: August 2007 LU-6 2008 Quest LUBRICATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001717134 A LU C D E F G H SBIA0534E I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-7 2008 Quest ENGINE OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE OIL Inspection INFOID:0000000001717135 ENGINE OIL LEVEL • Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking. • Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. • If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to MA-11. SMA954C ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE • Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. • If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: • Upper and lower oil pan • Oil pan drain plug • Oil pressure sensor • Oil filter • Oil cooler • Water pump cover • Timing chain tensioner cover • Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve • Front cover • Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head • Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover • Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case • Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case • Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: • Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. • Put the selector lever in the Park “P” position. 1. Check the oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection". 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector. 3. Remove the oil pressure sensor. 4. Install Tools. WBIA0571E 5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Revision: August 2007 LU-8 2008 Quest ENGINE OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. A 7. a. b. Engine Speed Approximate Discharge Pressure Idle speed More than 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 rpm 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) LU CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. After the inspections, install the oil pressure sensor as follows: Remove the old sealant adhering to sensor and engine. Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure sensor to specification using Tool. • Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. Oil pressure sensor C D E : 14.8 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Changing Engine Oil INFOID:0000000001717136 F WARNING: • Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. • Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil drain plug. G H I J Oil pan drain plug : Refer to EM-29 . CAUTION: • Clean the drain plug and install using a new washer. K SMA096D Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11 . CAUTION: • The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. • Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection" . L 7. M N O P SMA954C Revision: August 2007 LU-9 2008 Quest OIL FILTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL FILTER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717137 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the RH splash shield. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: • The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter. • Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. • When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills. • Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. • Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. SMA096D INSTALLATION 1. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface on the oil cooler. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or tighten to specification using Tool. Oil filter Tool number : 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 lb-ft) : KV10115801 (J-38956) SMA229B 4. 5. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. Install the RH splash shield. Revision: August 2007 LU-10 2008 Quest OIL FILTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection" . A LU C SMA954C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-11 2008 Quest OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL PUMP Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717138 WBIA0601E 1. Cylinder block 2. Oil strainer 3. Oil pump REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the engine. Refer to EM-110, "Removal and Installation". Remove the timing chain. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". Remove the oil strainer. Remove the oil pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 LU-12 2008 Quest OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001717139 A LU C D E F G H WBIA0602E I 1. Oil pump cover 2. Inner rotor 3. Outer rotor 4. Oil pump body 5. Oil strainer 6. Regulator valve 7. Regulator spring 8. Regulator plug 9. Regulator valve set (6, 7, and 8) J 10. O-ring DISASSEMBLY K 1. 2. 3. L Remove oil pump cover. Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body. Remove the regulator valve plug, regulator valve spring and regulator valve. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Clearance of Oil Pump Parts • Measure the rotor clearance with a feeler gauge as shown. - Clearance between outer rotor and oil pump body (position 1). Position 1 M N : 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in) - Tip clearance between inner rotor and outer rotor (position 2). Position 2 O : less than 0.180 mm (0.0071 in) P SLC932A Revision: August 2007 LU-13 2008 Quest OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Measure the rotor clearance with a feeler gauge and straightedge as shown. - Side clearance is between the inner rotor and the oil pump body (position 3). Position 3 : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) - Side clearance is between the outer rotor and the oil pump body (position 4). Position 4 : 0.050 - 0.110 mm (0.0020 - 0.0043 in) SLC933A • Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows. - Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor (position A). - Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer (position B). - Clearance 5 = (inner diameter of oil pump body B) – (outer diameter of inner rotor A). Clearance 5 : 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in) SLC934AB Regulator Valve 1. 2. 3. 4. Visually inspect the components for wear and damage. Check the regulator valve sliding surface and the regulator spring. Coat the regulator valve with engine oil. Check that the regulator valve falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. If damaged, replace the regulator valve set or the oil pump body as necessary. WBIA0321E Regulator Valve to Oil Pump Body Clearance • Clearance 6 = (regulator valve hole diameter D) – (outer regulator valve diameter E). • If the calculated clearance 6 exceeds the standard, replace the oil pump body. Clearance 6 : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) CAUTION: • Coat the regulator valve with clean engine oil. • Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. SLC935AA ASSEMBLY Revision: August 2007 LU-14 2008 Quest OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. • Assemble the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punch marks on the oil pump cover side. A LU C SLC324B D E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-15 2008 Quest OIL COOLER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL COOLER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001717140 WBIA0497E 1. Oil filter 2. Oil cooler bolt 3. Coolant outlet pipe 4. Coolant outlet hose 5. Oil cooler 6. O-ring 7. Oil pan 8. Coolant inlet pipe 9. Relief valve 10. Drain plug 11. Copper gasket 12. Water connector REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Drain the engine oil. Refer to LU-9, "Changing Engine Oil". Drain the engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation". Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Remove the splash shield. Disconnect the coolant hoses from the oil cooler. CAUTION: Do not spill coolant on the drive belt. Remove the oil cooler from the upper oil pan. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Revision: August 2007 LU-16 2008 Quest OIL COOLER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Oil Cooler Check the oil cooler for cracks. Check the oil cooler for clogging by blowing through the coolant inlet. If necessary, replace the oil cooler. A Relief Valve Inspect the relief valve for movement, cracks, and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, LU remove the relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve by tapping it into place with a suitable tool. INSTALLATION C Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • When installing the oil cooler, align the stopper slot with the stopper on the upper oil pan. • Install the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel" for torque specification. D E F WBIA0369E G INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection" and CO-10, "System Inspection". Start the engine and check that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 LU-17 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit INFOID:0000000001717141 OIL PRESSURE Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 rpm 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) REGULATOR VALVE Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump body clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) OIL PUMP Unit: mm (in) Oil pump body to outer rotor radial clearance 0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079) Oil pump inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.18 (0.0071) Oil pump body to inner rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Oil pump body to outer rotor axial clearance 0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043) Inner rotor outer diameter to oil pump body inner diameter clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: Drain and refill With oil filter change 4.0 (4 1/4, 3 1/2) Without oil filter change 3.7 (3 7/8, 3 1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) Revision: August 2007 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.0 (5 1/4, 4 3/8) LU-18 2008 Quest MAINTENANCE SECTION MA MAINTENANCE A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................ 5 Explanation of General Maintenance ........................ 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ................................ 7 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ........................ 7 Schedule 1 ................................................................ 7 Schedule 2 ................................................................ 9 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................................11 Fluids and Lubricants .............................................. 11 Engine Oil Recommendation .................................. 11 ENGINE MAINTENANCE ...................................13 Checking Drive Belts ............................................... 13 Changing Engine Coolant ........................................13 Checking Fuel Line ..................................................17 Changing Air Cleaner Filter .....................................17 Changing Engine Oil ................................................18 Changing Oil Filter ...................................................18 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type) ......20 Checking EVAP Vapor Line .....................................22 F G H CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ........... 23 Changing In-cabin Microfilter ...................................23 Checking Exhaust System .......................................23 Checking A/T Fluid ..................................................23 Changing A/T Fluid ..................................................24 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) ..............25 Tire Rotation ............................................................27 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ...................27 Checking Brake Line and Cables ............................27 Checking Disc Brake ...............................................27 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ......................28 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Line ................28 Axle and Suspension Parts .....................................29 Drive Shaft ...............................................................30 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch .............30 Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters .................................................30 I J K MA M N O P Revision: August 2007 MA-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719561 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 MA-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719562 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter cap wrench Removing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) B C D E NT375 For refilling engine cooling system KV991J0070 (J-45695) Coolant refill tool F G LMA053 Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant KV991J0010 (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer H I J WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719563 K (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (BT-3373-F) Belt tension gauge Checking drive belt tension MA M N AMA126 O P Revision: August 2007 MA-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plugs S-NT047 Power Tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: August 2007 MA-4 2008 Quest GENERAL MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > GENERAL MAINTENANCE A Explanation of General Maintenance INFOID:0000000001719564 General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them. OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Item Tires Wheel nuts C Reference page Check the pressure including the spare, at least once a month and always prior to a long distance trip with a gauge. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. WT-29, "Tire" When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. WT-6 Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. GW-11 Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles). MA-27 Transmitter components in tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Replace grommet seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter on TPMS every tire replacement by reaching wear limit of tire. Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Windshield wiper blades Doors and engine hood Lamps Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Replace as necessary. Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Make sure that the head lamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check head lamp aim. Clean the eclampsia on a regular basis. WT-27 Item E F G H — I MA-30 LT-21, "Aiming Adjustment" (US), LT-33, "Aiming Adjustment" (Canada) Reference page Warning lamps and chimes Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly. — Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. — Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. — Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seat backs. — Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. MA-30 Revision: August 2007 D FSU-7, "Front Wheel Alignment" and MA-25, "Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)" INSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Seat belts B J K MA M N MA-5 O PS-7 P 2008 Quest GENERAL MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Item Reference page Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Brake pedal and booster Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal. BR-5 and BR-21 Parking brake Check that the pedal has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service" Automatic transaxle “Park” mechanism Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the “P” position without applying any brakes. — — BR-25 UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Item Reference page Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. — Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir. MA-27 Battery Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. SC-4 — MA-13 Engine drive belts Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-13 Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. MA-18 Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. MA-28 Automatic transaxle fluid level Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the engine idling. MA-23 Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. MA-23 The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate. — Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately. — Underbody Fluid leaks Revision: August 2007 MA-6 2008 Quest PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A Introduction of Periodic Maintenance INFOID:0000000001719565 Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Emission Control System Maintenance Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions: • Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). • Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. • Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. • Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. • Driving in dusty conditions. • Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. • Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier. C MA-7 D Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits. Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-7 Emission Control System Maintenance MA-9 Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-9 Schedule 1 E F Abbreviations: R = Replace. H I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Drive belts NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section Page or Content Title [R] MA-17 I* MA-22 Fuel lines I* MA-17 Fuel filter NOTE (3) — Engine coolant NOTE (4) MA-13 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-18 Engine oil filter (use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-20 NOTE (5) K MA N EM-85 O MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title Drive belts NOTE (1) I* MA-13 Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) [R] MA-17 EVAP vapor lines I* MA-22 Fuel lines I* MA-17 Revision: August 2007 J M Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. I MA-13 EVAP vapor lines Intake & exhaust valve clearance* G INFOID:0000000001719566 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. B MA-7 2008 Quest P PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Fuel filter NOTE (3) Engine coolant NOTE (4) 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section Page or Content Title - R* MA-13 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-18 Engine oil filter (use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). Intake & exhaust valve clearance* MA-20 NOTE (5) EM-85 (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 Brake lines & cables 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 I Brake pads & rotors I Automatic transaxle fluid I NOTE (1) I Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts I Tire rotation I I I 30 (48) 24 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-27 I MA-27 I MA-24 I MA-28, MA-29 NOTE (2) MA-27 Exhaust system I I I I MA-23 Front drive shaft boot I I I I MA-30 R MA-23 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-27 I MA-27 I MA-24 I MA-28, MA-29 In-cabin microfilter R MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 Brake lines & cables I Exhaust system Revision: August 2007 I NOTE (1) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 I Brake pads & rotors Automatic transaxle fluid 45 (72) 36 I I I I I 56.25 (90) 45 NOTE (2) MA-27 I I MA-8 I I MA-23 2008 Quest PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 Front drive shaft boots 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 I 48.75 (78) 39 I In-cabin microfilter 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-30 R MA-23 I R (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. For 5 A/T models, using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. A B C D (2) Refer to MA-5. Schedule 2 INFOID:0000000001719567 E EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belts [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I* MA-13 NOTE (1) G Air cleaner filter [R] [R] MA-17 EVAP vapor lines I* I* MA-22 Fuel lines I* I* MA-17 Fuel filter NOTE (2) Engine coolant NOTE (3) R* MA-13 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-18 Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R MA-18 H I J Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Intake & exhaust valve clearance* F Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-20 NOTE (4) K EM-85 MA (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section. M (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE O Abbreviations: R = Replace. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or Content Title Brake lines & cables I I I I MA-27 Brake pads & rotors I I I I MA-27 I I I I MA-23 Automatic transaxle fluid Revision: August 2007 NOTE (1) N MA-9 2008 Quest P PERIODIC MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Tire rotation 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or Content Title I I I I MA-23 NOTE (2) MA-28, MA-29 MA-27 Exhaust system Front drive shaft boots I I I I MA-30 In-cabin microfilter R R R R MA-23 (1) For 5 A/T models, using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. (2) Refer to MA-5. Revision: August 2007 MA-10 2008 Quest RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS A Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000001719568 B Capacity (Approximate) Description Metric Fuel Engine oil Drain and refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change US measure Imp measure 75.6 20 gal 16 5/8 gal 4.0 4 1/4 qt 3 1/2 qt Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2 • Viscosity SAE 5W-30 3.7 3 7/8 qt 3 1/4 qt 5.0 5 1/4 qt 4 3/8 qt 10.5 2 3/4 gal 2 3/8 gal Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF) 7.4 7 7/8 qt 6 1/2 qt Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *3 Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *4 Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system With reservoir at “MAX” level — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base) — — PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease or equivalent 1 1/4 gal 1 gal 1.98 ± 0.11 lb 1.98 ± 0.11 lb 7.44 fl oz 7.7 fl oz Windshield washer fluid Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil — 4.5 900 ± 50 g 220 m D E Brake fluid Brake grease C Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent HFC-134a (R-134a) *6 F G H I J NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6 *1: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Research octane number 96). *2: For further details, refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation". *3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. *4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM IV ATF may also be used. K MA M *5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer. *6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. Engine Oil Recommendation INFOID:0000000001719569 N O P Revision: August 2007 MA-11 2008 Quest RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification and International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard (2). These oils have the API certification mark (1) on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. ALPIA0001ZZ ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. For outside temperatures down to: Anti-freeze coolant mixture ratio °C °F Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze coolant Demineralized water or distilled water – 35° – 30° 50 % 50 % CAUTION: • When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. • Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Revision: August 2007 MA-12 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE MAINTENANCE A Checking Drive Belts INFOID:0000000003301698 WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown. B C D Tool number : BT-3373-F NOTE: • Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. • Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. CAUTION: WBIA0325E • When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. • Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness. E F G H I PBIC1162E J Belt Deflection and Tension Deflection adjustment Unit: mm (in) Used belt Limit Generator and air conditioner compressor Power steering oil pump After adjustment 7 (0.28) 11 (0.43) 4.2 - 4.6 (0.17 - 0.18) 7.3 - 8.0 (0.29 - 0.30) Applied pushing force New belt 3.7 - 4.1 (0.15 - 0.16) 6.5 - 7.2 (0.26 - 0.28) 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) Tension adjustment* Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f) Used belt New belt Limit After adjustment 294 (30, 66) 730 - 818 (74.5 - 83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.5 - 94.5, 188 - 208) 495 - 583 (50.5 - 59.5, 111 - 131) 603 - 691 (61.5 - 70.5, 135.6 - 155.4) 196 (20, 44) MA DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT Remove engine undercover. Revision: August 2007 N O INFOID:0000000003301699 WARNING: • To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. • Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way. 1. M — *: If belt tension gauge cannot be installed at check points as shown, check drive belt tension at different location on the belt. Changing Engine Coolant K MA-13 2008 Quest P ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial cooling system drain. 3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before installation. • Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts. LBIA0063E 4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs. PBIC0846E CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. PBIC1285E 5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. • If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant". REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT Revision: August 2007 MA-14 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and tighten to specification. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. • The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. • Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-42 . A B C D E F G PBIC1285E H I J PBIC0846E K Radiator drain plug Cylinder block front drain plug Cylinder block RH drain plug Cylinder block LH drain plug 2. 3. : Refer to CO-16 . : Refer to EM-116 . : Refer to EM-116 . : Refer to EM-116 . MA If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. M N O P Revision: August 2007 MA-15 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number 5. : KV991J0070 (J-45695) Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. • Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "Engine Oil Recommendation". Engine coolant capacity (with reservoir) 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure 7. 8. : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: LLIA0058E The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum LLIA0057E 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. Revision: August 2007 MA-16 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant". 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. A Checking Fuel Line INFOID:0000000001719572 Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper hose attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts. B C D E SMA803A Changing Air Cleaner Filter INFOID:0000000001719573 F VISCOUS PAPER TYPE G H I J K MA M N O WBIA0500E Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube 4. Air cleaner case (upper) 5. Air cleaner filter 6. Air cleaner case (lower) 7. Air cleaner case bracket 8. Grommet 9. Resonator (in fender) 10. Fresh air duct 2. Mass air flow sensor 3. P 1. O-ring 11. PCV hose NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7. Revision: August 2007 MA-17 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Changing Engine Oil LLIA0016E INFOID:0000000001719574 WARNING: • Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. • Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil drain plug. Oil pan drain plug : Refer to EM-29. CAUTION: • Clean the drain plug and install using a new washer. SMA096D 7. Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11. CAUTION: • The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. • Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up the engine and check the oil drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection". SMA954C Changing Oil Filter 1. INFOID:0000000001719575 Remove the RH splash shield. Revision: August 2007 MA-18 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. A Tool number 3. : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: • The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter. • Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. • When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills. • Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. • Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface on the oil cooler. B C SMA096D D E 4. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. F G H SMA010 5. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or tighten to specification using Tool. Oil filter Tool number I J : Refer to LU-10. : KV10115801 (J-38956) K SMA229B 6. 7. 8. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. Install the RH splash shield. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to LU-8, "Inspection". MA M N O SMA954C Revision: August 2007 MA-19 2008 Quest P ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type) INFOID:0000000001719576 WBIA0344E 1. Ignition coil 4. Rocker cover (left bank) 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover (right bank) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the engine cover, using power tool. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant". Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. Refer to EM15, "Removal and Installation". Remove the intake manifold collector (upper), gasket, and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-17, "Removal and Installation". Remove the six ignition coils. CAUTION: Do not shock them. WBIA0339E Revision: August 2007 MA-20 2008 Quest ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the six spark plugs using a suitable tool. • If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)". A B C SEM294A D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. • Do not drop or shock spark plug. E F G SMA773C H If plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time I : less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) : less than 20 seconds J Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Gap (nominal) : Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". K MA M SMA806CA N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to EM-142, "Standard and Limit". • The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: - Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures • The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: - Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution Revision: August 2007 MA-21 2008 Quest O P ENGINE MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Checking EVAP Vapor Line 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001719577 Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, and sticking. Revision: August 2007 MA-22 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Changing In-cabin Microfilter 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A INFOID:0000000001719578 Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box" Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Checking Exhaust System B C D E LJIA0058E F INFOID:0000000001719579 Check the exhaust pipes, muffler, and exhaust mounts for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, chafing, or deterioration. G H I J SMA211A Checking A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. INFOID:0000000001719580 Warm up the engine. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the “COLD” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. K MA M Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) a. b. c. N Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the “P” park position. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 MA-23 WLIA0014E O P 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lintfree paper. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and LLIA0065E then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: • Do not overfill the transaxle. • Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds. 5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) 6. WLIA0014E Check the fluid for the following conditions: • If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the AT section for checking the operation of the transaxle. Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle. • If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the transaxle. Refer to CO-16. SMA853B Changing A/T Fluid 1. INFOID:0000000001719581 Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature “HOT”. Temperature range COLD : 30° – 40° C (86° – 104° F) HOT : 70° – 80° C (158° – 176° F) 2. 3. Stop the engine. Remove the engine undercover. Revision: August 2007 MA-24 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer. Drain plug A : Refer to AT-225, "Component". B C LLIA0066E 5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. Fluid grade and capacity (with torque converter) 6. 7. D E : Refer to MA-11. F Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-23, "Checking A/T Fluid". If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5. Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type) G INFOID:0000000001719582 H PAX Run Flat Tire and Wheel CAUTION: • Servicing a PAX run flat tire and wheel requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX run flat tire and wheel with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. • If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. I J Conventional Tires and Wheels 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel. K CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. Use a releasing agent to remove the double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel. MA CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. • After removing the double-faced adhesive tape, wipe off any traces of the releasing agent from M the road wheel. Set the road wheel on the wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. NOTE: If a tire balance machine has an adhesion balance weight mode setting and drive-in weight mode setting, N select and adjust in the drive-in weight mode suitable for the road wheels. When the inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 O to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value, then install it at the designated outer position of, or at the P designated angle position on the road wheel. CAUTION: • Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. • Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel. SMA054D Calculation: Indicated unbalance value × 1.6 = balance weight to be installed Revision: August 2007 MA-25 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 1.6 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) NOTE: The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz) 37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz) a. b. Install the balance weight in the position as shown. When installing the balance weight to the road wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown, so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: • Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. • Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. • Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight. SMA055D c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. SMA056D 5. 6. 7. Start the wheel balancer. Install the drive-in balance weight on the inner side of the road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights in one position (angle). Start the wheel balancer. Make sure that the inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or less. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Unbalance) Maximum allowable unbalance Dynamic (at rim flange) Static (at rim flange) Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) • If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat the installation procedures. Revision: August 2007 MA-26 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tire Rotation INFOID:0000000001719583 A 1. Rotate the tires as shown. • ⇐ : Front B Wheel nuts 2. 3. : Refer to WT-6. After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure to specification. Retighten the wheel nuts to specification after the vehicle has been driven the first 1,000 km (600 miles). Also retighten the wheel nuts to specification after a flat tire repair, or any type of service where the wheels have been removed and installed. CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks C D WEIA0044E E INFOID:0000000001719584 • Check the brake fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the sub tank. • Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks. • If the brake fluid level is extremely low or below the “MIN” level, check the brake system for leaks. • Release the parking brake lever and check that the brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check the brake system for leaks. F G H LFIA0204E Checking Brake Line and Cables I INFOID:0000000001719585 J Check the brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, and damage. Repair or replace parts as necessary. K MA SBR389C Checking Disc Brake M INFOID:0000000001719586 N ROTOR Check the rotor condition and thickness. Resurface or replace the rotor as necessary. Refer to BR-38, "Disc Brake". O P SMA260A CALIPER Revision: August 2007 MA-27 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check the caliper for leakage. SMA922A PAD Check the brake pads for wear or damage. Refer to BR-38, "Disc Brake". BRA0010D Checking Steering Gear and Linkage INFOID:0000000001719587 STEERING GEAR • Check the gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and power steering fluid leaks. • Check the power steering hose connections for leaks. • Check the steering column for looseness. STEERING LINKAGE Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leaks. Checking Power Steering Fluid and Line INFOID:0000000001719588 CHECKING FLUID LEVEL Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir tank with the engine off. Use the “HOT” range or the “COLD” range fluid temperatures. “HOT” range PSF temperature “COLD” range PSF temperature : 50° – 80° C (122° – 176° F) : 0° – 30° C (32° – 86° F) CAUTION: • Do not overfill the power steering reservoir tank. • Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. • Use the recommended power steering fluid. Refer to MA-11. LGIA0021E CHECKING FLUID LEAKS Revision: August 2007 MA-28 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leaks. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more SGIA0506E than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leaks at the connectors are noticed, loosen the flare nut and then retighten to specification. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leaks from the power steering oil pump are noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to PS-23, "Disassembly and Assembly". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear fluid leak. C Axle and Suspension Parts F INFOID:0000000001719589 Check the front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear, or other damage. • Shake each wheel as shown to check for excessive play. • Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise. A B D E G H I SMA525A J • Check the strut mount nuts for looseness. K MA M SMA614 • Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness. N O P LLIA0019E Revision: August 2007 MA-29 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Check the struts for oil leakage or other damage. • Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. SFA392B Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000001719590 • Check the boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease leakage as shown. SFA108A Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch INFOID:0000000001719591 WBIA0752E Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters INFOID:0000000001719592 Check the seat belt buckles, webbing, retractors, anchors and adjusters. Replace any seat belt assembly as necessary. Refer to SB-9, "Seat Belt Inspection". • Check the seat belt anchors for loose bolts, damage, or excessive wear. • Check the seat belt webbing for any damage, cuts, fraying, or excessive wear. • Check the retractor for smooth operation. Revision: August 2007 MA-30 2008 Quest CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Check the function of the buckles by inserting the seat belt tongue and checking for proper engagement of the buckle and press the button on the buckle to check for proper release of the seat belt tongue. CAUTION: • After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached components, such as the guide rail set. NISSAN recommends replacing all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision, unless they are not damaged and are inspected to confirm they are operating properly after a minor collision. Also inspect all seat belt assemblies that are not in use during a collision, and replace any components if damaged or not operating properly. The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags have been deployed. • If any component of the seat belt assembly is suspected of being damaged or not operating properly, do not repair the component. Replace the components as an assembly. • If the seat belt webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged then replace the seat belt assembly. • Never lubricate the seat belt buckle or tongue. • When replacing any seat belt assembly always use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. A B C D E F G H I J K MA M N O P Revision: August 2007 MA-31 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER SECTION MTC MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...... 3 Contaminated Refrigerant ......................................... 3 General Refrigerant Precaution ................................ 4 Precaution for Leak Detection Dye ........................... 4 A/C Identification Label ............................................. 4 Precaution for Refrigerant Connection ...................... 4 Precaution for Service of Compressor ...................... 8 Precaution for Service Equipment ............................. 9 PREPARATION ..................................................11 Special Service Tool ............................................... 11 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment.... 11 Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 13 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..............................15 Refrigerant Cycle .................................................... 15 Refrigerant System Protection ................................ 15 Component Part Location ....................................... 16 OIL ......................................................................19 Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor ........... 19 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL .........................21 Description .............................................................. 21 Operation ................................................................ 21 Description of Control System ................................. 22 Control Operation .................................................... 23 Discharge Air Flow .................................................. 25 System Description ................................................. 26 CAN Communication System Description ............... 26 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................27 CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) ............................... 27 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 28 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 29 Revision: August 2007 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................30 Schematic ................................................................34 Wiring Diagram - A/C,M - ........................................35 Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value ....43 A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function .......................44 Operational Check (Front) .......................................45 Operational Check (Rear) ........................................47 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control .....................................................................48 Mode Door Motor Circuit .........................................50 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit .......................................54 Intake Door Motor Circuit .........................................63 Defroster Door Motor Circuit ....................................67 Front Blower Motor Circuit .......................................69 Rear Blower Motor Circuit .......................................75 Rear Temperature Control Circuit ...........................84 Magnet Clutch Circuit ..............................................90 Insufficient Cooling ..................................................94 Insufficient Heating ................................................ 101 Heater Pump Circuit .............................................. 102 Noise ..................................................................... 105 Self-Diagnosis ....................................................... 107 Ambient Sensor Circuit .......................................... 108 Intake Sensor Circuit ............................................. 110 CONTROL UNIT .............................................. 113 Removal and Installation ....................................... 113 F G H I MTC K L M N AMBIENT SENSOR ........................................ 115 Removal and Installation ....................................... 115 O INTAKE SENSOR ........................................... 116 Removal and Installation ....................................... 116 P BLOWER MOTOR .......................................... 118 Component ............................................................ 118 Removal and Installation ....................................... 119 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ............................... 120 Removal and Installation ....................................... 120 MTC-1 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ....... 121 REFRIGERANT LINES ..................................... 143 Component ............................................................121 Removal and Installation .......................................122 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................ 143 Component ........................................................... 145 Removal and Installation for Compressor ............. 147 Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch . 148 Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 151 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ................................................................ 151 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 151 Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe ....................................................................... 152 Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor ................................................................... 155 Removal and Installation for Condenser ............... 156 Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator ..... 157 Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator ...... 159 Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve ..................................................................... 160 Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve ..................................................................... 160 Checking of Refrigerant Leaks .............................. 161 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 161 Dye Injection ......................................................... 161 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 162 HEATER CORE ............................................... 124 Component ............................................................124 Removal and Installation .......................................125 HEATER PUMP ............................................... 127 Removal and Installation .......................................127 DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ......................... 128 Removal and Installation .......................................128 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .................................. 129 Component ............................................................129 Removal and Installation .......................................130 MODE DOOR MOTOR .................................... 132 Removal and Installation .......................................132 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR .................................. 134 Component ............................................................134 Removal and Installation .......................................134 VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL ................... 136 Component ............................................................136 Removal and Installation .......................................137 DUCTS AND GRILLES .................................... 138 Component ............................................................138 Removal and Installation .......................................141 Revision: August 2007 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................ 165 Service Data and Specification (SDS) .................. 165 MTC-2 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718925 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) INFOID:0000000001718926 C D E F G H WARNING: I • CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. MTC • Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. • The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following K handling precautions must be observed: - When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. - When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just L before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. - Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without M proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used. - Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling N equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers. - Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. O Contaminated Refrigerant INFOID:0000000001718927 If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: • Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. • Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. • Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. • If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does Revision: August 2007 MTC-3 2008 Quest P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. • If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precaution INFOID:0000000001718928 WARNING: • Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. • Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. • Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). • Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. • Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. • Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. • Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. • Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Precaution for Leak Detection Dye INFOID:0000000001718929 • The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. • Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. • The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J41995). • For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions prior to performing work. • A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). • Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service. • Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed. • Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). • Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. • Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. • The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. A/C Identification Label INFOID:0000000001718930 Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have an identification label on the underside of hood. Precaution for Refrigerant Connection INFOID:0000000001718931 A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. • Expansion valve to cooling unit • Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) • Refrigerant pressure sensor FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION Revision: August 2007 MTC-4 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the Oring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. • The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. A B C D E F G SHA815E O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-5 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front A/C Compressor and Condenser WJIA1967E 1. High-pressure service valve 2. Low-pressure service valve 3. High-pressure pipe 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Low-pressure flexible hose 6. High-pressure flexible hose 7. Shaft seal 8. Condenser 9. Liquid tank 10. Pressure relief valve 11. Compressor 12. High/low pressure pipe (production) 13. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) 14 15 Revision: August 2007 High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) MTC-6 Expansion valve (front) 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear A/C A B C D E F G H I MTC LJIA0016E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. K L O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications M Connection type O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 10 J2476 89956 9.25 (0.3642) 1.78 (0.0701) 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 71L00 11.0 (0.433) 2.4 (0.094) 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 72L00 14.3 (0.563) 2.3 (0.091) 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) 92477 N8200 17.12 (0.6740) 1.78 (0.0701) 92195 AH300 21.8 (0.858) 2.4 (0.094) New Former New Former New SHA814E Former New 12 16 19 24 mm (in) W mm (in) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. WARNING: Revision: August 2007 MTC-7 2008 Quest N O P PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. • When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber. • When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. • After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. • When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection. • Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. • Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. • Always replace used O-rings. • When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply oil to threaded portion. • O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. • When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. • Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. • After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. WJIA1774E 1. Plug 2. O-ring A. Torque wrench B. Apply oil C. Do not apply oil to threads D. NG (no good) E. OK (okay) F. Inflated portion Precaution for Service of Compressor INFOID:0000000001718932 • Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. • When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. • When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor” exactly. Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". • Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with oil, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. • After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both directions. This will equally distribute oil inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour. • After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation. Refer to MTC-148, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" Revision: August 2007 MTC-8 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Precaution for Service Equipment INFOID:0000000001718933 A RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. B ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. C VACUUM PUMP The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. • Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. • For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. • If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. D E F G H I RHA270D MTC MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a) Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified oil. K L M SHA533D N SERVICE HOSES Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. O P RHA272D SERVICE COUPLERS Revision: August 2007 MTC-9 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close RHA273D REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified oils have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2”-16 ACME. RHA274D CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Revision: August 2007 MTC-10 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718934 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-38873-A) Pulley installer Installing pulley B C D E LHA171 Removing pulley KV99233130 (J-29884) Pulley puller F G LHA172 H HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tool and Equipment INFOID:0000000001718935 Never mix HFC-134a refrigerant and/or its specified oil with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or its oil. I Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/oil. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or oil) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed MTC use of the refrigerants/oil. Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/oil contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. K Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HFC-134a (R-134a) ( — ) Refrigerant Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size: Thread size • large container 1/2”-16 ACME L M N S-NT196 Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type S Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate compressors (NISSAN only) Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) — ( — ) NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S S-NT197 Revision: August 2007 MTC-11 2008 Quest O P PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991J0130 (ACR2005-NI) ACR5 A/C Service Center Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging WJIA0293E Checking for refrigerant leaks (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-41995) Electronic refrigerant leak detector AHA281A Leak detection dye (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety goggles (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) Quantity 24, 1/4 ounce bottles of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner ZHA200H Checking for refrigerant leaks when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles (Power supply: DC 12V battery terminal) — (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector SHA438F Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) — (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) SHA439F For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. — (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with (J-41447) 1/4 ounce bottles SHA440F Revision: August 2007 MTC-12 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner For cleaning dye spills. A B C SHA441F Identification: • The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size: Thread size • 1/2”-16 ACME — (J-39183-C) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) D E F G RJIA0196E Hose colors: • Low side hose: Blue with black stripe • High side hose: Red with black stripe • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: • 1/2”-16 ACME Service hoses: • (J-39500-72B) High side hose • (J-39500-72R) Low side hose • (J-39500-72Y) Utility hose H I S-NT201 Hose fitting to service hose: • M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. Service couplers: • (J-39500-20A) High side coupler • (J-39500-24A) Low side coupler MTC K L S-NT202 For measuring of refrigerant Fitting size - thread size: • 1/2” - 16 ACME — (J-39699) Refrigerant weight scale M N S-NT200 Capacity: • Air displacement: 4 CFM • Micron rating: 20 microns • Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size: Thread size • 1/2”-16 ACME — (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) S-NT203 Commercial Service Tool Revision: August 2007 INFOID:0000000001718936 MTC-13 2008 Quest O P PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number Tool name Description (J-41810-NI) Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a) For checking refrigerant purity and system contamination RJIA0197E Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E (J-44614) Clutch disc holding tool Clutch disc holding tool WHA230 Revision: August 2007 MTC-14 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A Refrigerant Cycle INFOID:0000000001718937 Refrigerant flow B The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank, through the front and rear evaporators, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coils are controlled by a front and rear externally equalized expansion valves, located inside the front and rear evaporator cases. Refrigerant System Protection C INFOID:0000000001718938 D Refrigerant pressure sensor The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2, 398 psi), or below about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2, 17.4 psi). E F Pressure Relief Valve The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/ G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-15 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > cm2, 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. WJIA1342E Component Part Location INFOID:0000000001718939 FRONT REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Revision: August 2007 MTC-16 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O WJIA2219E 1. Defroster nozzle (part of the instrument panel) 2. Fresh air duct 3. P Defroster duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH side demister duct extension 6. LH side demister duct extension 7. LH side demister duct 8. RH ventilator duct 9. Center ventilator duct 10. LH ventilator duct 11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 13. Floor junction duct extension 14. Floor junction duct 15. Floor distribution duct ⇐ 16. Floor duct Revision: August 2007 12. Floor connector duct MTC-17 Front 2008 Quest REFRIGERATION SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR REFRIGERATION SYSTEM LJIA0086E 1 Rear overhead duct 2 Rear heat duct 3 Rear heater and cooling unit assembly 4. Clips Revision: August 2007 MTC-18 2008 Quest OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > OIL A Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor INFOID:0000000001718940 The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: • Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor • Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Oil B C D Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: • Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm • A/C switch: On • Blower fan speed: Maximum position • Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] • Intake position: Recirculation ( ) • Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. E F G Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. H Amount of Oil to be Added I Oil to be added to system Part replaced m Amount of oil (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) Remarks MTC Front evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) Rear evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak — K L *1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of oil is needed. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-19 2008 Quest OIL < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA1716E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1. New compressor 2. Old compressor 3. Recovery/recycling equipment 4. Measuring cup X 5. Measuring cup Y 6. New oil A. Drain oil from the new compressor into clean container B. Record amount of oil recovered C. Add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of new oil when replacing liquid tank D. Install new oil equal to recorded amounts in measuring cups X plus Y Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. Drain the oil from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. Drain the oil from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this oil to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Revision: August 2007 MTC-20 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL A Description INFOID:0000000001718941 The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following three sensors: • Ambient sensor • Intake sensor • PBR (position balanced resistor). The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control: • Outlet air volume • Air temperature • Air distribution The front air control also provides separate regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature for the rear passenger area. The system is based on the temperature and rear blower settings selected from rear air control (front) control dials located in the overhead console, or from the rear temperature and blower settings from the rear air control (rear) control dials, when the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator light is on) on the rear air control (front). B C D E F The front air control is used to select: • Outlet air volume • Air temperature/distribution G Operation INFOID:0000000001718942 H AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the temperature switch. BLOWER SPEED CONTROL I Blower speed is controlled based on front and rear blower control dial settings. When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower conMTC trol dial is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower control dial switch is turned counterclockwise. K INTAKE DOORS CONTROL The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) switch setting. L MODE DOOR CONTROL The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode switch. M DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL The defroster door is controlled by pressing the defroster mode switch. N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-21 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL WJIA2161E When the A/C switch is pressed, or the defroster mode switch is pressed, the front air control outputs a compressor ON signal to BCM. The BCM then sends a compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of certain symptoms. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Description of Control System INFOID:0000000001718943 The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. Revision: August 2007 MTC-22 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: A B C D E F G H I WJIA2160E Control Operation INFOID:0000000001718944 MTC Front air control K L M N O WJIA2162E P Revision: August 2007 MTC-23 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear air control (rear) WJIA2015E TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (FRONT) Increases or decreases the set temperature. TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (REAR) Increases or decreases the set temperature. RECIRCULATION ( ) SWITCH • When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. • When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. • REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor mode. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH When switch is ON, rear window is defogged. OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot position. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. MODE SWITCHS (FRONT) Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors. MODE DIAL (REAR) Controls the air/temperature at discharge outlets. FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control. REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (FRONT) When the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off) the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower control dial (rear) position. The rear air control (front) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings. REAR BLOWER CONTROL DIAL (REAR) When the REAR CTRL switch is on (indicator on) the rear air control (rear) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (front) blower control dial (front) position. The rear air control (rear) controls the blower motor speed and the temperature/mode settings. Revision: August 2007 MTC-24 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Discharge Air Flow INFOID:0000000001718945 A FRONT B C D WJIA2016E E REAR NOTE: Hot air comes from the floor vents, cold air comes from the roof vents, and blended air comes from both vents. F G H I MTC K L LJIA0127E M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-25 2008 Quest AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Description INFOID:0000000001718946 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION WJIA0531E WJIA2163E CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718947 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 MTC-26 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A CONSULT-III Function (HVAC) INFOID:0000000001718948 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER B Description Displays front air control self-diagnosis results. C Displays front air control input/output data in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. D Front air control part number can be read. SELF-DIAGNOSIS E Operation Procedure 1. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen to view all set DTC's. F Display Item List DTC Reference page B2573 Battery voltage out of range SC-4 B2575 BCM not responding to A/C request MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" B2576 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-76 B2577 Air mix door motor (front) circuit failure MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" B257A Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" B257B Ambient sensor circuit open B257C Ambient sensor circuit short B2581 Intake sensor circuit short B2582 Intake sensor circuit open B2583 Defroster door motor circuit failure MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" B2584 Intake door motor (passenger) circuit failure MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" U1000 CAN bus fault LAN-6 B2586 Intake door motor (driver) circuit failure MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" B2587 Stuck button MTC-113, "Removal and Installation" B2587 Mode door motor circuit failure MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" G H I MTC-108, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" MTC MTC-110, "Intake Sensor Circuit" K L M DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. N Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch either “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen. O MAIN SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 3. 4. 5. P When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “MAIN SIGNALS” is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch “START”. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch “STOP”. Display Item List Revision: August 2007 MTC-27 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item Value BATT VIA CAN IGN VIA CAN Contents "V" Displays battery voltage signal. "ON/OFF" Displays ignition switch signal. AMB TEMP SEN "°C/°F" Displays ambient temperature sensor signal. EVAP TEMP SEN "°C/°F" RR TEMPSET FR "V" Displays air mix door (front) set point signal. RR TEMPSET RR "V" Displays air mix door (rear) set point signal. MODE FDBCK "V" Displays mode door motor feedback signal. DVR MIX FDBCK "V" Displays intake door motor (driver) feedback signal. PAS MIX FDBCK "V" Displays intake door motor (passenger) feedback signal. RR FDBCK "V" Displays air mix door motor (rear) feedback signal. DEF FDBCK "V" Displays defroster door motor feedback signal. Displays intake sensor signal. RECIRC "ON/OFF" Displays recirculation switch signal. A/C "ON/OFF" Displays A/C switch signal. MODE "ON/OFF" Displays MODE dial signal. RR DEFOG "ON/OFF" Displays rear defroster request signal. " [ PNL ]" " [ MIX ]" " [ FLR ]" " [ DEFR ]" " [ MAX ]" " [ DENT ]"* MODE SELECT Displays mode door motor position. *: DENT is displayed when MODE dial is between selections. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718949 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch “AIR CONDITIONER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch either “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. Touch “START”. Revision: August 2007 MTC-28 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “ALL SIGNALS” is selected, all the items will be monitored. 6. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch “STOP”. A Display Item List B Monitor item name “operation or unit” Contents C IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays “IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal. COMP ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal. FAN ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower motor switch signal. How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair D INFOID:0000000001718950 E WORK FLOW F G H SHA900E *1 I MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)" SYMPTOM TABLE MTC Symptom Reference Page A/C system does not come on. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System. MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control" A/C system cannot be controlled. Go to Self-diagnosis Function. MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" Air outlet does not change. Mode door motor is malfunctioning. MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" M Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" N Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" O Intake door does not change. Intake door motor is malfunctioning. Defroster door motor is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor. MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor. MTC-69, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" Rear blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Blower Motor. MTC-75, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit" Revision: August 2007 L Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. Discharge air temperature does not change. Air mix door motor is malfunctioning. K MTC-29 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Reference Page Rear discharge air temperature and/or air outlet does not change. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Rear Air Control circuit. MTC-84, "Rear Temperature Control Circuit" Magnet clutch does not engage. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" Insufficient cooling Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. MTC-94, "Insufficient Cooling" Insufficient heating Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. MTC-101, "Insufficient Heating" Noise Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. MTC-105, "Noise" Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location MTC-107, "SelfDiagnosis" INFOID:0000000001718951 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Revision: August 2007 MTC-30 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N WJIA2221E 1. Refrigerant pressure sensor E111 4. Heater pump E127 2. Compressor F3 (view from right tire housing) 3. Ambient Sensor E1 O P FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Revision: August 2007 MTC-31 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA2164E 1. Intake door motor (driver) M58 4. Intake sensor M305 7. Defroster door motor M303 2. Air mix door motor (front) M307 3. Evaporator 5. Variable blower control (front) M122 6. Mode door motor M304 8. Intake door motor (passenger) M302 9. Front air control M49, M50 10. Front blower motor M62 REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Revision: August 2007 MTC-32 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N WJIA2172E 1. Rear air control (rear) B150 4. Air mix door motor (rear) B146 2. Rear blower motor B134 3. Variable blower control (rear) B151 O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-33 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718952 WJWA0424E Revision: August 2007 MTC-34 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - A/C,M - INFOID:0000000001718953 A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O WJWA0425E Revision: August 2007 MTC-35 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJWA0426E Revision: August 2007 MTC-36 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O WJWA0427E P Revision: August 2007 MTC-37 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJWA0428E Revision: August 2007 MTC-38 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O WJWA0429E P Revision: August 2007 MTC-39 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJWA0430E Revision: August 2007 MTC-40 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O LJWA0013E P Revision: August 2007 MTC-41 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJWA0432E Revision: August 2007 MTC-42 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front Air Control Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000001718954 A FRONT AIR CONTROL HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT B C D WJIA2020E TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUES FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL Terminal No. Wire Color 3 Y 4 L/R Compressor ON signal 5 L/Y Blower ON signal 6 Y/B Air mix door motor (front) feedback ON - 0 - 5V 7 LG Mode door motor feedback ON - 0 - 5V 10 R/L Heater pump ON 11 R/W Intake sensor ON - 0 - 5V 12 W/G Aux blower speed ON - 0 - 5V 13 O Variable blower control (front) signal ON - 0 - 5V 15 G/Y Power supply for IGN ON - Battery voltage 16 W/L Rear defroster request ON 17 L/B Air mix door motor (front) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 18 L/W Air mix door motor (front) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 19 L/O Mode door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 20 SB Mode door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 21 R Intake door motor (driver) CW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 22 R/B Intake door motor (driver) CCW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 23 W Defroster door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 24 W/B Defroster door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 25 GR/R Ambient sensor ON - 0 - 5V 26 O/B Sensor return ON - 0 - 5V 27 Y/R Power supply for BAT - - Battery voltage 28 W/G Position balanced resistor (PBR) power ON - 5V 30 G/B Air mix door motor (rear) feedback ON - 0 - 5V 33 R/G AUX Rear select switch ON - 0 - 5V 34 BR/Y AUX backlight dim ON Headlamps OFF Battery voltage 35 V/W AUX tell tale LED ON Tell tale OFF Battery voltage Item Position balance resistor (PBR) ground Revision: August 2007 Ignition Switch Condition ON - E Voltage (V) (Approx.) F 0V ON A/C switch OFF 5V ON A/C switch ON 0V ON Fan switch OFF 5V ON Fan switch ON 0V Heater pump OFF Battery voltage Heater pump ON 0V - G H I MTC K Battery voltage L M N O P MTC-43 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal No. Wire Color Item Ignition Switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 36 B Ground - - 40 P CAN-L ON - - 41 L CAN-H ON - - 43 P/L Air mix door motor (rear) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 44 LG/R Air mix door motor (rear) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 45 P Intake door motor (passenger) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 46 P/B Intake door motor (passenger) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 47 Y/L Rear aux blower pot ON Rear blower motor 0 - 5V 48 W/R Rear aux temp pot ON Rear air control (rear) temperature control dial 0 - 5V 49 G/O Front aux blower pot ON Rear air control (front) blower motor 0 - 5V 50 GR/L Front aux temp pot ON Rear air control (front) temperature control dial 0 - 5V A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function 0V INFOID:0000000001718955 DESCRIPTION NOTE: If using CONSULT-III, refer to MTC-27, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)". The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, CAN system, battery voltage, and stuck button on front air control. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by the following: The ignition switch must be on and ambient temperature must be at least 10°C (50°F). Press the A/C switch to turn on the HVAC system. Press the vent ( and defrost button at the same time. Then press the recirculation ( ) switch. the fault codes (if any are present) will display in the ambient temperature area. Refer to Revision: August 2007 MTC-44 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". The fault codes will continue to scroll until self-diagnostic mode is exited. To exit self-diagnostic mode, press any button. A B C D E F G H WJIA2166E SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART NOTE: If using CONSULT-III, refer to MTC-27, "CONSULT-III Function (HVAC)". Code No. 03 I MTC Reference page Battery voltage out of range SC-4 20 BCM not responding to A/C request GW-76 21 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-76 22 Air mix door motor (front) circuit failure MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 38 Air mix door motor (rear) circuit failure MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 40 Ambient sensor circuit short 41 Ambient sensor circuit open 56 Intake sensor circuit short 57 Intake sensor circuit open 62 Defroster door drive short /open/out of limits MTC-67, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" 72 Intake door motor (passenger) short/open MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" 80 CAN bus fault LAN-6 82 Intake door motor (driver) short/open MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" 90 Stuck button MTC-113, "Removal and Installation" 92 Mode door motor short/open/out of limits MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" K L ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" M ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit" Operational Check (Front) N O P INFOID:0000000001718956 The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. Conditions Revision: August 2007 : Engine running and at normal operating temperature MTC-45 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > CHECKING BLOWER 1. Turn blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate on low speed. 2. Turn the blower control dial again, and continue checking each blower speed until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave blower on maximum speed. If NG, Refer to MTC-69, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR 1. 2. Press each mode switch. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". Mode door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-50, "Mode Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF or D/F is selected. WJIA0528E CHECKING RECIRCULATION 1. Press recirculation ( ) switch one time. Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Press recirculation ( ) switch one more time. Recirculation indicator should go off. 3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should change slightly). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-63, "Intake Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF, D/F or floor is selected. CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Rotate temperature dial counterclockwise. 2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-94, "Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Rotate temperature dial clockwise. 2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-101, "Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECK A/C SWITCH 1. 2. Press A/C switch with the blower ON. A/C switch indicator will turn ON. • Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). NOTE: If current mode setting is DEF or D/F compressor clutch may already be engaged If NG, Refer to MTC-90, "Magnet Clutch Circuit". Revision: August 2007 MTC-46 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > If OK, continue with next check. A Operational Check (Rear) INFOID:0000000001718957 The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. B Conditions : Engine running and at normal operating temperature CHECKING REAR BLOWER MOTOR C 1. Press the A/C switch on the front air control. 2. Rotate rear air control (front) blower control dial to low speed. 3. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. 4. Leave blower on maximum speed. 5. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 6. Rotate rear air control (rear) blower control dial to low speed. 7. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise and continue checking blower speed until all speeds are checked. 8. Leave blower on maximum speed. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. CHECKING REAR DISCHARGE AIR D E F G 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial from maximum heat to maximum cold. 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial from maximum heat to maximum cold. 5. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". Air mix door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. H I MTC K L M LJIA0127E N CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 5. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-102, "Insufficient Cooling". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If OK, continue with next check. Revision: August 2007 MTC-47 2008 Quest O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > CHECKING REAR TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Rotate the rear air control (front) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat. 2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. 3. Press the REAR CTRL switch from the rear air control (front). 4. Rotate the rear air control (rear) temperature/mode control dial clockwise to maximum heat. 5. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-109, "Insufficient Heating". If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-93, "Rear Air Temperature Control Circuit". If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform tests as outlined. If symptom appears, refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures. Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control INFOID:0000000001718958 SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK 1. Press A/C switch. 2. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated YES >> Refer toMTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM". OK or NG OK >> System OK. NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motors, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system. Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) Revision: August 2007 MTC-48 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > The PTC is built into the front air control. It can be set from cold to hot or any intermediate position by rotating the temperature dial. A B C WJIA2171E D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. E F G WJIA2024E H 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connectors. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 15 and connector M50 (B) terminal 27, and ground. Terminals I MTC Ignition switch position (+) Front air control connector Terminal No. M49 (A) 15 (-) Ground M50 (B) 27 OFF ACC ON Approx. 0V Approx. 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage K WJIA2025E L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check 10A and 15A fuses [Nos. 2 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78. • If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. • If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. M 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL O N P Revision: August 2007 MTC-49 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 36 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2026E Mode Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718959 SYMPTOM: • Air outlet does not change. • Mode door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DISCHARGE AIR 1. 2. Press each of the four mode position switches and then press the (DEF) switch. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (visual inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when DEF ( ) or D/F ( ) is selected. Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK MODE DOOR OPERATION Check and verify mode door mechanism for smooth operation in each mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair as necessary. 5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK THE MODE DOOR MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT Perform diagnostic procedure for the mode door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR". Revision: August 2007 MTC-50 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace motor. A 7.RECHECK FOR CODES B Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnostic codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 8. C 8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Repair as necessary. NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION D E F Component Parts Mode door control system components are: G • Front air control • Mode door motor • PBR (built into mode door motor) System Operation The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. H I MTC COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the front air control Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. K L M WJIA0424E N DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-51 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Press the B/L ( ) mode switch. 3. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19 while pressing the floor ( ) mode switch. Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 19 20 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Press floor mode switch Battery voltage WJIA2027E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20, 19 and ground. 20 - Ground 19 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2028E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press the D/F ( ) mode switch. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 19 and terminal 20 while pressing the mode switch to the vent ( ) mode. Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 20 19 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Press vent mode switch Battery voltage WJIA2029E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20 and terminal 19. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2030E Revision: August 2007 MTC-52 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5.CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. A Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 20, 19 and the mode door motor harness connector (B) terminal 5, 6. 20 - 5 19 - 6 B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. C D WJIA2031E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. E Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28. Connector Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (M50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. F G H WJIA2032E I 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 28 and ground. MTC K Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. L WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS M 1. 2. 3. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. O Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. P WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-53 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector. 2. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-1 : Continuity should exist. WJIA2035E OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 7 and ground while cycling mode switch through all modes. Voltage : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2036E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 7 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2037E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the mode door motor harness connector and front air control harness connector. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M304 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 7. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to ATC-148. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Air Mix Door Motor Circuit WJIA2038E INFOID:0000000001718960 SYMPTOM: • Discharge air temperature does not change. Revision: August 2007 MTC-54 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Air mix door motor does not operate. A INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. 2. B Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to maximum heat. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. C >> GO TO 2. 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Turn the temperature control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. D E 3.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS F G H Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 5. I 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation from maximum cold to maximum heat in each MTC mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. K NG >> Repair as necessary. 6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 7. L M 7.CHECK THE AIR MIX DOORS MOTOR PBR CIRCUIT Perform diagnostic procedure for the air mix door motors. Refer to "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace air mix door motor. Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation". 8.RECHECK FOR CODES Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnostic codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 9. Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? MTC-55 O P 9.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Revision: August 2007 N 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: • Front air control • Air mix door motors (Front and rear) • PBR (built-into air mix door motor) System Operation The front air control receives data based on the temperature selected by the driver and rear passenger. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. Air Mix Door Control Specification WJIA0435E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motors The air mix door motor (front) (1) is attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The rear air mix door motor is attached to the rear heater & cooling unit. These motors rotate so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front (or rear) air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors. WJIA2173E WJIA0498E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) Revision: August 2007 MTC-56 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial to maximum heat. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control dial (front) to maximum cold. Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 18 17 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage B C D WJIA2039E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND F 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18, 17 and ground. 18 - Ground 17 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. H I WJIA2040E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. MTC Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (front) to maximum cold. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17 while rotating temperature control dial (front) to maximum heat. K L Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) 17 (-) 18 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage M WJIA2041E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". N 4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-57 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 and terminal 17. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2042E 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 18, 17 and the air mix door motor (front) harness connector M307 (B) terminal 5, 6. 18 - 5 17 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2043E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Connectors Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. WJIA2032E 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 28 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2033E 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS Revision: August 2007 MTC-58 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. C WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M307 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. D E F : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M39 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-1 : Continuity should exist. G WJIA2035E H OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. I 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 6 and ground while rotating temperature control dial from maximum heat to maximum cold. Voltage MTC K : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. L WJIA2044E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 6 and ground. N O Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. P WJIA2045E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-59 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) harness connector and front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M307 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 6. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2046E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum heat. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold. Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 43 44 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage WJIA2055E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43, 44 and ground. 43 - Ground 44 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2056E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Rotate temperature control dial (rear) to maximum cold. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44 while rotating temperature control dial (rear) to maximum hot. Connector Front air control: M50 Revision: August 2007 Terminals (+) (-) 44 43 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Rotate temp control dial Battery voltage MTC-60 WJIA2057E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". A 4.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 43 and terminal 44. C Continuity should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. E WJIA2058E 5.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. F Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 43, 44 and the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 1, 6. 43 - 1 44 - 6 G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. H WJIA2059E 6.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR PBR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. MTC Reconnect front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Connectors Front air control: M49/M50 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 28 (M50) 3 (M49) 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. K L M WJIA2032E N 7.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 28 and ground. O P Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2033E Revision: August 2007 MTC-61 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE AND GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (B) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. WJIA2034E 9.CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 3 and front air control harness connector M50 (C) terminal 28. 28 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3. 3-2 : Continuity should exist. WJIA2060E OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. 10.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Reconnect the front air control harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 30 and ground while rotating temperature control dial (rear) from maximum cold to maximum hot. Voltage : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. WJIA2061E 11.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 30 and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2062E 12.CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-62 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor (rear) harness connector and front air control harness connector. 3. Check continuity between air mix door motor (rear) harness connector B146 (B) terminal 4 and front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 30. A B Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (rear). Refer to MTC-134, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2063E D Intake Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718961 E SYMPTOM: • Intake door does not change. • Intake door motor does not operate normally. NOTE: Recirculation is not allowed in defrost, defrost/floor or floor modes. F INSPECTION FLOW G 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REC ( ) 1. Press the vent mode ( ). 2. Press REC ( ) switch. The REC ( )indicator should illuminate. 3. Press REC ( ) switch again. The REC ( ) indicator should go out. 4. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower sound changes slightly). Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. H I MTC 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)" Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. K L 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. M >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK THE INTAKE DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS N Perform diagnostic procedure for the intake door motor. Refer to "Intake Door Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace front air control or repair wiring. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". O 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR OPERATION P Check and verify intake door mechanism for smooth operation. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor. Refer to MTC-129. NG >> Repair intake door mechanism. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Revision: August 2007 MTC-63 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component Parts Intake door control system components are: • Front air control • Intake door motor (driver and passenger) System Operation The intake door control determines the intake door (driver and passenger) positions based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motors rotate closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motors rotate in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motors The driver and passenger intake door motors are attached to the intake unit. They rotate so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. WJIA0433E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 22 21 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage WJIA2064E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22, 21 and ground. 22 - Ground 21 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2065E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER Revision: August 2007 MTC-64 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Press any button to exit out of self-diagnostic mode. 2. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 21 22 Condition Self-diagnostic mode A B Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage C WJIA2066E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". D 4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN E 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 22 and terminal 21. F G Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 5. H WJIA2067E 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. I Disconnect the intake door motor (driver) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 22, 21 and the intake door motor (driver) harness connector M58 (B) terminal 1, 6. 1 - 22 6 - 21 MTC : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (driver). Refer to ATC-146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. K L WJIA2068E M DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. N Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 45 and terminal 46 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 45 46 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage O P WJIA2069E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 MTC-65 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46, 45 and ground. 46 - Ground 45 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2070E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press the any button to exit out of self-diagnostic mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M50 Terminals (+) (-) 46 45 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage WJIA2071E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 4.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46 and terminal 45. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2072E 5.CHECK INTAKE DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 terminal 46, 45 and the intake door motor (passenger) harness connector terminal 1, 6. 46 - 1 45 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor (passenger). Refer to ATC146, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: August 2007 MTC-66 WJIA2073E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Defroster Door Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718962 A SYMPTOM: • Defroster door does not change. • Defroster door does not operate normally. B INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - DEFROSTER DOOR C 1. Press the vent switch ( ). 2. Press the defrost switch ( ). Defroster indicator should illuminate. 3. Listen for defroster door position change (blower sound should change slightly). Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. D E 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> GO TO 6. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS F G Check for any service bulletins. H >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR I Perform diagnostic procedure for defroster door motor. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR". MTC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair PBR circuit or replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-128. K CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR OPERATION 5. Check and verify defroster door mechanism for smooth operation. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-128. NG >> Repair defroster door mechanism. L 6.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS M Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> System OK. N SYSTEM DESCRIPTION O Component Parts Defroster door control system components are: P • Front air control • Defroster door motor System Operation The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode dial. When the mode dial is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts. Revision: August 2007 MTC-67 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Defroster door motor The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling assembly unit. The front air control sends voltage to rotate the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door. LJIA0063E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR 1.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR POWER AND GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 24 and terminal 23 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Terminals (+) (-) 23 24 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage WJIA2074E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23, 24 and ground. 24 - Ground 23 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA2075E 3.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR GROUND AND POWER 1. 2. Press any button to exit self-diagnostic mode. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24 while placing the HVAC system into self-diagnostic mode. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Connector Front air control: M49 Revision: August 2007 Terminals (+) (-) 24 23 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Self-diagnostic mode Battery voltage MTC-68 WJIA2076E 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". A 4.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 23 and terminal 24. C Continuity should exist. D OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. NG >> GO TO 5. E WJIA2077E 5.CHECK DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR OPEN 1. 2. F Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 24, 23 and the defroster door motor harness connector M303 (B) terminal 1, 6. 24 - 1 23 - 6 G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to ATC-144. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Front Blower Motor Circuit H WJIA2078E I INFOID:0000000001718963 MTC SYMPTOM: • Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. K INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - FRONT BLOWER 1. 2. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise. Blower should operate. Rotate the blower control dial clockwise, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. L M 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS N Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer the symptom table. Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. O P 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Revision: August 2007 MTC-69 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> GO TO appropriate malfunctioning sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION Check and verify blower motor operates in all speeds. Does blower motor operate in all speeds? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR". 6.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts • Front air control • Front blower switch • Variable blower control • Front blower motor • Front blower motor relay System Operation WJIA1898E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control (front) is located on the cooling unit assembly. The variable blower control (front) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). WJIA0442E Revision: August 2007 MTC-70 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting blower speed control. A B C D E F G WJIA2080E 1.CHECK FUSES H Check 20A fuses (No. 28 and 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box). For fuse layout. Refer to PG-79. I Fuses are good. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 7. MTC 2.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Press the A/C switch. Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal (+) and ground. K L Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 3. M WJIA0326E N 3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor relay connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 3 and 6 and ground. O P Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1896E Revision: August 2007 MTC-71 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY Check voltage between front blower motor relay connector H-2 terminal 1 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0080E 5.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor connector. Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 5 and 7 and front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal (+). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0968E 6.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminal 2 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace blower motor relay. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2147E 7.REPLACE FUSES 1. Replace fuses. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Activate the front blower motor. 4. Does fuse blow? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Inspection End. 8.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check front blower motor relay. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace front blower motor relay. 9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Check front blower motor. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG Revision: August 2007 MTC-72 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". A 10.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 terminals 6 and 3 and ground. B Continuity should not exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WJIA2148E 11.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect variable blower control (front) harness connector. Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 1 and ground. E F Continuity should not exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to MTC137, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. H WJIA2083E I 12.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect variable blower control (front) connector and front blower motor relay connector. Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector H-2 (A) terminals 5 and 7 and variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 (B) terminal 1. MTC K Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2081E 13.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Check front blower motor. Refer to ATC-76, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace front blower motor relay. M N O 14.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT P Revision: August 2007 MTC-73 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 (A) terminal 3 and front blower motor harness connector M62 (B) terminal (-). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2149E 15.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 4 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2150E 16.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 13 and variable blower control (front) connector M122 (A) terminal 2. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2084E 17.CHECK VARIBLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all disconnected parts except the variable blower control (front) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn front blower motor to maximum speed. Check voltage between variable blower control (front) harness connector M122 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 2 Ground 5V Front air control: M122 WJIA2158E OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (front). Refer to MTC-137, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Blower Motor Relay Revision: August 2007 MTC-74 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. A B C D E F G LJIA0068E Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. • Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. • Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. H I MTC K WJIA2168E Rear Blower Motor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718964 SYMPTOM: • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear). • Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (front) only. • Rear blower motor operates from rear air control (rear) only. • Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected. • Rear blower motor speed does not match the rear air control (rear) speed selected. • Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (front). • Rear blower motor operates in high all the time when controlled from the rear air control (rear). L M N O INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) 1. 2. Press A/C switch. Turn the rear air control (front) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation (REAR CTRL indicator off). 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: August 2007 MTC-75 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1. Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower motor back the rear air control (rear). 2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation. 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> • Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 ". • Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 ". NO >> • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 ". 3.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1. Press the REAR CTRL switch (indicator on) on the rear air control (front) to send control of the rear blower motor back the rear air control (rear). 2. Turn the rear air control (rear) blower control dial to the lowest speed and check for rear blower operation. 3. Continue checking that rear blower speed increases as the rear blower control dial is rotated clockwise. Does the rear blower motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Check rear air control (rear). Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 ". 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 5. 5.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check (Rear)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> INSPECTION END. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Rear blower speed control system components are: • Front air control • Rear air control (front) • Rear air control (rear) • Variable blower control (rear) • Rear blower motor • Rear blower motor relay Revision: August 2007 MTC-76 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Operation A B C D E F WJIA2085E Rear Blower Control NOTE: The rear blower motor can only operate when the front blower motor is on. When the rear air control (front) blower control dial is turned on and the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), it allows the rear air control (rear) to control the rear blower motor speed. If the REAR CTRL switch is off (indicator off), the rear air control (front) controls the rear blower motor speed regardless of the rear air control (rear) blower speed control dial position. G H COMPONENT DESCRIPTION I Variable Blower Control (Rear) The variable blower control (rear) (1) is located on the rear blower motor case. The variable blower control (rear) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). MTC K L WJIA2086E TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 1 M SYMPTOM: • Rear blower motor does not operate at any speed from the rear air control (front). 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY N 1. 2. 3. O Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. P OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE Revision: August 2007 MTC-77 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2099E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2093E TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 2 SYMPTOM: • Rear blower motor operates in high speed all the time or does not match the rear air control (front) speed selected. 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) FRONT AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. WJIA2099E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 MTC-78 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. A Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2093E 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 49 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 6. E F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. G WJIA2101E H TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 3 SYMPTOM: • Rear blower motor does not operate from the rear air control (front) and the rear air control (rear). I 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) 1. Disconnect rear air control (front) connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Press A/C switch. Does rear blower motor operate in high speed? YES >> GO TO 17. NO >> GO TO 2. MTC K 2.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear blower motor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Press A/C switch. Rotate rear air control (front) blower speed control dial to maximum speed (REAR CTRL indicator off). Check voltage between rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+) and ground. M N Battery voltage should exist. O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 9. LJIA0099E P 3.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) POWER SUPPLY Revision: August 2007 MTC-79 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect variable blower control (rear) connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between variable blower control connector B151 terminal 1 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2154E 4.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Check voltage between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 2 and ground. Connector Front air control: B151 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 2 Ground 4.5 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. WJIA2155E 5.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 terminal 4 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2150E 6.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR Check rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". 7.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear blower motor connector B134 terminal (-) and variable blower control (rear) connector B151 terminal 3. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2156E 8.CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) AUX BLOWER SPEED CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-80 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 12 and variable blower control (rear) harness connector B151 (B) terminal 2. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2157E D 9.CHECK FUSES Check 15A fuses [Nos. 10 and 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 14. E 10.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY F Check rear blower motor relay. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace rear blower motor relay. G 11.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR BLOWER MOTOR AND FUSE BLOCK (J/ H B) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3 terminal 3N and 8N and rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+). I MTC Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0107E L 12.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector M3 terminal 7N and ground. M Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. O LJIA0102E 13.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-81 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector E30 terminal 3Q and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace fuse block (J/B). NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0101E 14.REPLACE FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Replace fuses. 3. Reconnect all disconnected parts. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Activate the rear blower motor from the rear air control (front). 6. Does fuse blow? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 15. No >> Inspection End. 15.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR Check rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-84, "Rear Blower Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace rear blower motor. Refer to ATC-135, "Removal and Installation". 16.CHECK REAR BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) M3 harness connector and variable blower control (rear). Check continuity between rear blower motor harness connector B134 terminal (+) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control (rear). Refer to MTC137, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. LJIA0104E 17.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 18.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL FRONT AUX BLOWER POT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT Revision: August 2007 MTC-82 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control harness connector M50. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 6 and ground. A B Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front) Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2152E D TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE 4 SYMPTOM: • Inoperative rear air control (rear). E 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear air control (rear) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 6 Ground 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. F G H WJIA2099E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. I MTC Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1, and 9 and ground. K Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation" NG >> Repair harness or connector. L M WJIA2100E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT FOR SHORT 1. 2. N Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 6 and ground. O Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2152E 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REAR AUX BLOWER POT BETWEEN FRONT AIR CONTROL AND REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) Revision: August 2007 MTC-83 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect front air control harness connector. 2. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 47 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 6. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2153E COMPONENT INSPECTION Rear Blower Motor Relay Check circuit continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relays. WJIA0973E Rear Blower Motor Check that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit. Apply 12 volts to terminal (+) and ground to terminal (-) and ensure that the blower motor rotates freely and quietly. LJIA0115E Rear Temperature Control Circuit INFOID:0000000001718965 SYMPTOM: • Temperature cannot be adjusted from the rear air control (rear). INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Turn front blower switch on (rear air control only operates when front blower is on). Revision: August 2007 MTC-84 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Press REAR CTRL switch on the rear air control (front). 3. Turn rear air control (rear) temperature control dial clockwise. 4. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets. Does hot air blow from rear floor discharge air outlets? YES >> Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check (Rear)". NO >> GO TO 2. A B 2.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE C 1. Turn rear air control (rear) temperature control dial counterclockwise. 2. Check for cold air at rear vent discharge air outlets. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. D 3.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS E Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check (Rear)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. F 4.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS G Check for any service bulletins. Have any service bulletins been issued? YES >> Refer to applicable service bulletin. NO >> GO TO 5. H 5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS I Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK REAR BLOWER AIR OUTLET POSITION CHANGE K 1. Turn front blower switch on. 2. Turn the rear temperature/mode (front) dial to maximum heat. 3. Check for hot air at rear floor discharge air outlets. 4. Turn the rear temperature/mode (front) dial to maximum cold. 5. Check for cold air at rear vent discharge air outlets. Does rear outlet position and temperature change when adjusted from front air control? YES >> Check the rear air control circuit. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)". NO >> Check air mix door motor circuit. Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". L M N SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Rear air control system components are: • Front air control • Rear air control (front) • Rear air control (rear) • Air mix door motor (rear) • Rear blower motor relay • Rear blower motor Revision: August 2007 MTC O P MTC-85 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > System Operation WJIA2102E Rear Air Control The front air control must be turned on before either rear air control can be used. When the REAR CTRL indicator is off the rear air control (front) will control all rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations. When the REAR CTRL switch is pressed (indicator on), the rear air control (rear) will control all the rear blower motor speeds and the rear temperature/mode operations. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) SYMPTOM: • Temperature/mode operation is malfunctioning. 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear air control (front) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 10 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2087E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 3 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 3 Ground 4.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. WJIA2103E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) AUX TEMP POT VOLTAGE Revision: August 2007 MTC-86 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check voltage between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 7 and ground. Connector Rear air control (front): R19 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 7 Ground 4.5V A B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. WJIA2104E D 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 1 and ground. E Continuity should exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. G WJIA2093E 5.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT H Check continuity between rear air control (front) harness connector R19 terminal 8 and ground. I Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (front). Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> GO TO 8. MTC K WJIA2105E 6.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 3. N Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. O WJIA2108E 7.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) BLOWER POT CIRCUIT Revision: August 2007 MTC-87 P 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M50 (A) terminal 50 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 7. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2109E 8.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (front) harness connector R19 (B) terminal 8. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2107E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) 1.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AUX TEMPERATURE POT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear air control (rear). Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 7 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 7 Ground 4.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 5. WJIA2110E 2.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE VOLTAGE Check voltage between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 3 and ground. Connector Rear air control (rear): B150 Terminals (+) (-) Voltage (Approx.) 3 Ground 4.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6 WJIA2103E 3.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) REFERENCE RETURN GROUND Revision: August 2007 MTC-88 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 8 and ground. A Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. C WJIA2105E 4.CHECK REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) GROUND CIRCUITS 1. D Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 9 and ground. E Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 terminal 1 and ground. F Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace rear air control (rear). Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2106E H 5.CHECK REAR AUX TEMP CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 48 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 7. I MTC K Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. L WJIA2111E 6.CHECK REFERENCE VOLATAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR M CONTROL FOR OPEN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M50 (A) terminal 28 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 3. N O Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WJIA2108E 7.CHECK REFERENCE RETURN GROUND CIRCUIT BETWEEN REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL FOR OPEN Revision: August 2007 MTC-89 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between rear air control (rear) harness connector M49 (A) terminal 3 and rear air control (rear) harness connector B150 (B) terminal 8. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. Magnet Clutch Circuit WJIA2107E INFOID:0000000001718966 SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - MAGNET CLUTCH 1. Rotate blower control dial clockwise. Press vent switch ( ). 2. Press A/C switch. Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 4. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis to check for any codes. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Are any self-diagnosis codes present? YES >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". NO >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR Check and verify ambient sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-108, "Ambient Sensor Circuit". >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR Check and verify intake sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-110, "Intake Sensor Circuit". >> GO TO 7. 7.RECHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 MTC-90 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature. Refer to the following table. Ambient temperature °C (°F) Compressor ON intake temperature C (°F) Compressor OFF intake temperature C (°F) 0 (32) 2.5 (37) 2.0 (36) 10 (50) 2.5 (37) 2.0 (36) 20 (68) 2.5 (37) 1.5 (35) 30 (86) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) 40 (104) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) 50 (122) 2.0 (36) 1.0 (34) A B C D E F G DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. H I MTC K L WJIA2112E 1.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT M Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". N 2.PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST O Perform Auto Active Test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". Does magnet clutch operate? Yes or No Yes >> • WITH CONSULT-III GO TO 5. • WITHOUT CONSULT-III GO TO 6. No >> Check 10A fuse (No. 33, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3. P 3.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR Revision: August 2007 MTC-91 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and compressor (magnet clutch) connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E124 terminal 33 and compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1. 33 – 1 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0331E 4.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage direct current to terminal. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-165, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch". SJIA0197E 5.CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". A/C SW ON A/C SW OFF : COMP ON SIG ON : COMP ON SIG OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. 6.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 27 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 4. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2113E 7.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL) Revision: August 2007 MTC-92 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 4 and ground. A B Terminals (+) Front air control connector Condition Voltage (Approx.) A/C switch: ON 0V A/C switch: OFF 5V (-) Terminal No. C WJIA2114E M49 4 Ground D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". E F 8.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. G Start engine. Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70 and ground. H Terminals (+) ECM connector Terminal No. F54 70 (-) Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) I A/C switch: ON 0.36 - 3.88V MTC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Refer to EC-603. LJIA0124E K 9.CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to ATC-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". FAN CONTROL SWITCH ON FAN CONTROL SWITCH OFF L : FAN ON SIG ON : FAN ON SIG OFF M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. N 10.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 (A) terminal 28 and front air control harness connector M49 (B) terminal 5. O P Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA2115E Revision: August 2007 MTC-93 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 11.CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL) 1. 2. 3. Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 5 and ground. Terminals (+) Front air control connector (-) Terminal No. M49 5 Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) A/C switch: ON Blower motor operates 0V A/C switch: OFF 5V WJIA2116E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". 12.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION Check CAN communication. Refer to ATC-27, "CAN Communication System Description". • BCM – ECM • ECM – IPDM E/R • ECM – Front air control OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s). Insufficient Cooling INFOID:0000000001718967 SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Turn front and rear temperature control dial counterclockwise to maximum cold. 2. Press the A/C switch. 3. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets. Can the symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FOR ANY SYMPTOMS Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 3. 4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". Revision: August 2007 MTC-94 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". A 5.CHECK DRIVE BELTS B Check compressor belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Adjust or replace compressor belt. Refer to EM-12. C 6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION D Check and verify air mix door mechanism for smooth operation. Does air mix door operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace air mix door control linkage. E 7.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION Check and verify cooling fan motor for smooth operation. Refer to EC-463, "Description". Does cooling fan motor operate correctly? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Check cooling fan motor. Refer to EC-463. F G 8.CHECK RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT BEFORE USAGE Check recovery/recycling equipment before connecting to vehicle. Verify there is no pressure in the recovery/ recycling equipment by checking the gauges. If pressure exists, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. >> GO TO 9. H I 9.CHECK REFRIGERANT PURITY 1. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. 2. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling and refrigerant identifier. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Check contaminated refrigerant. Refer to MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". MTC K 10.CHECK FOR EVAPORATOR FREEZE UP Start engine and run A/C. Check for evaporator freeze up. Does evaporator freeze up? YES >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES". NO >> GO TO 11. 11.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE Check refrigerant pressure with manifold gauge connected. Refer to "Test Reading". OK or NG OK >> Perform performance test diagnoses. Refer to "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES". NG >> GO TO 12. 12.CHECK AIR DUCTS Check ducts for air leaks. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Repair air leaks. M N O P PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES Revision: August 2007 L MTC-95 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA0533E *1 "PERFORMANCE CHART" *4 MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" Revision: August 2007 *2 "PERFORMANCE CHART" MTC-96 *3 "Trouble Diagnoses for UNUSUAL Pressure" 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O WJIA0534E P *1 MTC-148, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *2 MTC-69, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" *3 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" PERFORMANCE CHART Test Condition Testing must be performed as follows: Revision: August 2007 MTC-97 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Windows Open Hood Open TEMP. Max. COLD Mode dial (Ventilation) set Recirculation (REC) switch (Recirculation) set Max. speed set Blower speed (FR and RR) Engine speed Idle speed RR system ON Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. Test Reading Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Relative humidity % Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) 25 (77) 9.7 - 13.7 (49 - 57) 30 (86) 12.6 - 16.6 (55 - 62) 35 (95) 14.9 - 19.9 (59 - 68) 40 (104) 17.3 - 23.3 (63 - 74) 50-70 Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % High-pressure (Discharge side) Low-pressure (Suction side) Air temperature °C (°F) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 25 (77) 1,059 - 1,294 (10.8 - 13.2, 153.6 - 187.7) 216 - 255 (2.2 - 2.6, 31.3 - 37.0) 30 (86) 1,206 - 1,481 (12.3 - 15.1, 174.9 - 214.8) 255 - 304 (2.6 - 3.1, 37.0 - 44.1) 35 (95) 1,393 - 1,706 (14.2 - 17.4, 202.0 - 247.5) 275 - 343 (2.8 - 3.5, 39.8 - 49.8) 40 (104) 1,510 - 1,844 (15.4 - 18.8, 219.0 - 267.4) 343 - 422 (3.5 - 4.3, 49.8 - 61.2) 50-70 Trouble Diagnoses for Unusual Pressure Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table). Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High Revision: August 2007 MTC-98 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle. • Low-pressure pipe is not cold. • When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approx- Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. • Clean condenser. • Check and repair cooling fan as necessary. Evacuate and recharge system. Engine tends to overheat. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair engine cooling system. • An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. • Plates are sometimes covered with frost. • Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side. • Excessive refrigerant discharge flow. • Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. ↓ Improper expansion valve adjustment. AC359A Refrigerant cycle E F G H Replace expansion valve. I MTC High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low Gauge indication C D Poor heat exchange in condenser. (After compressor operation stops, high-pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle. imately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2, 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. A B Insufficient condenser cooling performance. ↓ Air suction by cooling fan is in1. Condenser fins are sufficient. clogged. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan. Both high- and low-pressure sides are too high. Corrective action Probable cause Corrective action K High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. • Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. • Check oil for contamination. L M AC360A High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. Refrigerant cycle N Probable cause Corrective action High- and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. No temperature difference between high- and low-pressure sides. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. Replace compressor. AC356A O P Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low Revision: August 2007 MTC-99 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action • There is a big temperature difference between liquid tank outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. • Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. Liquid tank inside is slightly clogged. • Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. • Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. • Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side. High-pressure pipe located be- • Check and repair malfunctioning parts. tween liquid tank and expan• Check oil for contamination. sion valve is clogged. Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. Low refrigerant charge. ↓ Leaking fittings or components. Check refrigerant system for leaks. Refer to MTC-161, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment. 2. Malfunctioning expansion valve. 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. • Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. • Check oil for contamination. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. • Check and repair malfunctioning parts. • Check oil for contamination. Evaporator is frozen. • Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-110, "Intake Sensor Circuit". • Replace compressor. AC353A Air flow volume is too low. • Replace liquid tank. • Check oil for contamination. Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action • Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. • The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. • Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. • Replace liquid tank. AC354A Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative Revision: August 2007 MTC-100 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the malfunction is caused by water or foreign particles. • If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. • If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove the particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). • If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion valve. • Replace liquid tank. • Check oil for contamination. Low-pressure side becomes negative. Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve′s pipe is frosted or dewed. AC362A Insufficient Heating A B C D E F G INFOID:0000000001718968 SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating H INSPECTION FLOW 1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM BY PERFORMING OPERATIONAL CHECK - TEMPERATURE INCREASE I 1. Press the switch. 2. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to the maximum heat. 3. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets. MTC Can this symptom be duplicated? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Perform complete system operational check (front). Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check K (Front)". 2.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS L Check for any service bulletins. >> GO TO 3. M 3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refer to MTC-44, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function". N 4.CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM O 1. 2. 3. 4. P Check for proper engine coolant level. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". Check hoses for leaks or kinks. Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-10, "System Inspection". Check for air in cooling system. >> GO TO 5. 5.CHECK HEATER PUMP 1. Rotate temperature control dial to maximum heat. Revision: August 2007 MTC-101 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Rotate fan control dial clockwise to maximum speed. 3. Heater pump should be activated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check heater pump circuit. Refer to MTC-102, "Heater Pump Circuit". 6.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR OPERATION Check the operation of the air mix door. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the air mix door motor circuit. Refer to MTC-54, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". 7.CHECK AIR DUCTS Check for disconnected or leaking air ducts. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair all disconnected or leaking air ducts. 8.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses. OK or NG OK >> Hot inlet hose and a warm outlet hose: GO TO 9. NG >> Both hoses warm: GO TO 10. 9.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SYSTEM Check engine control temperature sensor. Refer to EC-188. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Retest. 10.CHECK HEATER HOSES Check heater hoses for proper installation. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> 1. Back flush heater core. 2. Drain the water from the system. 3. Refill system with new engine coolant. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". 4. GO TO 11 to retest. 11.CHECK HEATER HOSE TEMPERATURES 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Touch both the inlet and outlet heater hoses. OK or NG OK >> System OK. NG >> Replace heater core. Refer to MTC-124. Heater Pump Circuit INFOID:0000000001718969 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Heater pump control system components are: • Front air control • Heater pump relay • Heater pump • Intake sensor System Operation Revision: August 2007 MTC-102 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > The heater pump improves heater performance specifically at idle conditions. It is designed to operate in either of the following 2 situations: 1. Front blower motor set to maximum speed and temperature control dial set to full hot or 2. Engine coolant temperature (signal via CAN communication) minus heater core outlet temperature (intake sensor input to front air control) is greater than 20° C (68° F). If the difference is less than 16° C (61° F), the heater pump will not operate unless the conditions in item No. 1 above are met. A B C D E F G WJIA1780E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR HEATER PUMP CIRCUIT H 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO HEATER PUMP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect heater pump connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Set front blower motor to maximum speed. Turn temperature control dial to maximum heat. Check voltage between heater pump harness connector E127 terminal 1 and ground. (1) - Ground I MTC : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. K WJIA2117E 2.CHECK HEATER PUMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between heater pump harness connector E127 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground M : Continuity should exist. N OK or NG OK >> Replace heater pump. Refer to ATC-143. NG >> Repair harness or connector. O WJIA2118E 3.CHECK HEATER PUMP RELAY 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check heater pump relay. Refer to ATC-110, "Heater Pump Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace heater pump relay. Revision: August 2007 MTC-103 L 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4.CHECK RELAY POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between heater pump relay harness connector E128 terminals 1, 5 and ground. 1 - Ground 5 - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1783E 5.CHECK HEATER PUMP MOTOR POWER CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (A) terminal 3 and heater pump harness connector E127 (B) terminal 1. 3-1 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (A) terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WJIA2119E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEATER PUMP RELAY AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 10 and heater pump relay harness connector E128 (B) terminal 2. 2 - 10 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between heater pump relay harness connector E128 (B) terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WJIA2120E OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair harness or connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Heater Pump Relay Revision: August 2007 MTC-104 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. A Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No B If NG, replace relay. C LHA160 D Noise INFOID:0000000001718970 SYMPTOM: Noise E INSPECTION FLOW F G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-105 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WJIA1972E *1 MTC-148, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *4 MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)" *5 Revision: August 2007 *2 MTC-148, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" *3 MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor" EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" MTC-106 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Self-Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718971 A SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. INSPECTION FLOW B 1.CONFIRM A/C MODE OPERATION 1. Press the A/C switch. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. C 2.PERFORM COMPLETE OPERATIONAL CHECK D Perform a complete operational check and check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Can a symptom be duplicated? YES >> Refer to MTC-29, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> System OK. 3.CHECK FOR SERVICE BULLETINS Check for any service bulletins. Have any service bulletins been issued? YES >> Refer to appropriate service bulletin. NO >> GO TO 4. E F G H 4.CHECK POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to ATC-49, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control". I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refer to MTC-48, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control". MTC CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT 5. Check ambient sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. K L 6.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUIT Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. M 7.CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) PBR CIRCUIT N Check air mix door motor PBR circuit. Refer to ATC-57, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. O 8.RECHECK FOR SYMPTOMS P Perform a complete operational check for any symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Does another symptom exist? YES >> Refer to ATC-30, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair". NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 MTC-107 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Ambient Sensor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718972 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the front air control. WJIA0338E AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33°C (0.6°F) per 100 seconds. This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. WJIA2121E 1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ambient sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 and ground. Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. WJIA0526E 2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL Revision: August 2007 MTC-108 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. 3. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 25. A B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C WJIA2122E 3.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR D Check ambient sensor. Refer to ATC-117, "Ambient Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace ambient sensor. ATC-129. 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. E F 4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 26. H Continuity should exist. 4. I Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector E1 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2123E MTC OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> Repair harness or connector. K COMPONENT INSPECTION L Ambient Sensor M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-109 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > After disconnecting ambient sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor component side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 12.73 −10 (14) 9.92 −5 (23) 7.80 0 (32) 6.19 5 (41) 4.95 10 (50) 3.99 15 (59) 3.24 20 (68) 2.65 25 (77) 2.19 30 (86) 1.81 35 (95) 1.51 40 (104) 1.27 45 (113) 1.07 WJIA0339E If NG, replace ambient sensor. Intake Sensor Circuit INFOID:0000000001718973 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control WJIA0482E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-III, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-III, code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. WJIA2140E 1.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND Revision: August 2007 MTC-110 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect intake sensor connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M305 terminal 2 and ground. A B Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. C WJIA0465E 2.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 1 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 26. E F Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. G WJIA2141E 3.CHECK INTAKE SENSOR H Check intake sensor. Refer to ATC-125, "Intake Sensor Circuit". OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to ATC-132. 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. I MTC 4.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 2 and front air control harness connector M49 (A) terminal 11. K L Continuity should exist. 4. M Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M305 (B) terminal 2 and ground. Continuity should not exist. WJIA2142E OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-113, "Removal and Installation". 2. Go to ATC-45, "A/C System Self-Diagnosis Function" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> Repair harness or connector. O COMPONENT INSPECTION P Intake Sensor Revision: August 2007 N MTC-111 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 209.0 −10 (14) 160.0 −5 (23) 123.0 0 (32) 95.8 5 (41) 74.9 10 (50) 58.9 15 (59) 46.7 20 (68) 37.3 25 (77) 30.0 30 (86) 24.2 35 (95) 19.7 40 (104) 16.1 45 (113) 13.2 WJIA0978E If NG, replace intake sensor. Revision: August 2007 MTC-112 2008 Quest CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > CONTROL UNIT A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718974 FRONT AIR CONTROL B Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to IP-13, "Cluster Lid C". Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). C D E F LJIA0196E 4. G Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. H REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. 2. 3. I Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to EI-38. MTC Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). K L M LJIA0195E 4. Remove the rear air control (front). N Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) O Removal P Revision: August 2007 MTC-113 2008 Quest CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. WJIA2143E 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 MTC-114 2008 Quest AMBIENT SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > AMBIENT SENSOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718975 REMOVAL 1. 2. B Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. C D E WJIA0341E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-115 2008 Quest INTAKE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718976 Intake Sensor WJIA0513E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 6. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim (1). LIIA2480E Revision: August 2007 MTC-116 2008 Quest INTAKE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. A B C LIIA2481E D 4. 5. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-117 2008 Quest BLOWER MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > BLOWER MOTOR Component INFOID:0000000001718977 Front Blower Motor LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case 2. Blower motor side cover 3. Blower motor case Rear Blower Motor WJIA2145E 1. Rear blower motor Revision: August 2007 2. Rear blower motor case MTC-118 3. Variable blower control (rear) 2008 Quest BLOWER MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718978 A FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the RH and LH ventilator duct. Refer to MTC-141, "Removal and Installation". Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to MTC-141, "Removal and Installation". Remove the blower motor side cover. Remove the front blower motor. C D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR BLOWER MOTOR E Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-119 2008 Quest IN-CABIN MICROFILTER < SERVICE INFORMATION > IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718979 FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. LJIA0012E REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to MA-7. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Revision: August 2007 MTC-120 LJIA0058E 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY A Component INFOID:0000000001718980 Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L WJIA1968E 1. High/low pressure pipe (production) 2. 4. Front heater core pipe and hose as- 5. sembly 7. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) ⇐ High/low pressure pipe bracket 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly Heater pump 6. High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) Front M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-121 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0066E 1. Rear heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Rear A/C pipes 3. Rear heater core pipes 4. Rear heater core hose 5. Rear blower motor 6. Underfloor rear A/C pipes 7. Underfloor rear heater core pipes Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718981 FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18. Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Revision: August 2007 MTC-122 2008 Quest HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-40, "Harness Layout". 9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: • Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". A B C D E F REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY G Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". H Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. I Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: MTC • Rear blower motor • Rear blower motor resistor • Rear air mix door motor Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit K assembly. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. L LJIA0021E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: • Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". • Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-123 2008 Quest HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER CORE Component INFOID:0000000001718982 Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case Revision: August 2007 2. Blower motor side cover MTC-124 3. Blower motor case 2008 Quest HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly A B C D E F G H I MTC K L WJIA2146E 1. Front cover 2. Evaporator and heater core case 3. Evaporator 4. Side cover 5. Heater core 6. Rear blower motor 7. Blower motor case 8. Variable blower control (rear) ⇐ Front M N Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718983 FRONT HEATER CORE O Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the side cover. Revision: August 2007 MTC-125 2008 Quest P HEATER CORE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. LJIA0019E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. 2. 3. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. LJIA0069E 4. 5. Remove the rear heater core bracket. Remove the rear heater core. LJIA0071E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 MTC-126 2008 Quest HEATER PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATER PUMP A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718984 Heater Pump B C D E F G H I MTC WJIA2220E 1. Cowl top extension 2. Heater pump electrical connector 3. Heater pump 4. Front heater core pipe and hose assembly 5. Heater hose ⇐ Front K REMOVAL L 1. 2. 3. 4. M Remove the cowl top. Refer to EI-18. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Changing Engine Coolant". Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-127 2008 Quest DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718985 Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0513E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 6. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 MTC-128 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > INTAKE DOOR MOTOR A Component INFOID:0000000001718986 Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L WJIA0446E 1. Intake door motor (driver) 2. Air mix door motor (front) 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-129 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0513E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 6. Intake sensor Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718987 DRIVER SIDE Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. LJIA0082E Installation Revision: August 2007 MTC-130 2008 Quest INTAKE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A PASSENGER SIDE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. B C Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D E F G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-131 2008 Quest MODE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718988 Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0513E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 6. Intake sensor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor. LJIA0083E INSTALLATION Revision: August 2007 MTC-132 2008 Quest MODE DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-133 2008 Quest AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Component INFOID:0000000001718989 Air Mix Door Motor (Front) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0446E 1. Intake door motor (driver) 2. Air mix door motor (front) 3. Front heater and cooling unit assembly Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718990 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) Removal 1. 2. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Revision: August 2007 MTC-134 2008 Quest AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. A B C LJIA0084E D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) E Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door motor. F G H I LJIA0021E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-135 2008 Quest VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Component INFOID:0000000001718991 Variable Blower Control (Front) WJIA0513E 1. Defroster door motor 2. Intake door motor (passenger) 3. Mode door motor 4. Variable blower control (front) 5. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 6. Intake sensor Revision: August 2007 MTC-136 2008 Quest VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > Variable Blower Control (Rear) A B C D E WJIA2145E 1. Rear blower motor 2. Rear blower motor case 3. F Variable blower control (rear) Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718992 G VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) H Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to IP-13, "Center Stack Trim Panel". Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). I MTC Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) K Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the variable blower control (rear) electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear). L Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-137 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > DUCTS AND GRILLES Component INFOID:0000000001718993 Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA2219E 1. Defroster nozzle (part of the instrument panel) 2. Fresh air duct 3. Defroster duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH side demister duct extension 6. LH side demister duct extension Revision: August 2007 MTC-138 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. LH side demister duct 8. RH ventilator duct 10. LH ventilator duct 11. Front heater and cooling unit assembly 13. Floor junction duct extension 14. Floor junction duct 9. Center ventilator duct A 12. Floor connector duct 15. Floor distribution duct ⇐ 16. Floor duct Front B Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly C D E F G H I MTC K L LJIA0086E 1. Rear overhead duct 4. Clips 2. Rear floor duct 3. Rear heater and cooling unit assembly M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-139 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Grilles LJIA0197E 1. Overhead console 2. Overhead console front grilles 3. Overhead console rear grilles 4. Front demister grille 5. LH ventilator grille 6. Center LH ventilator grille 7. Center ventilator grille screws 8. Center RH ventilator grille 9. Cluster lid C 10. RH ventilator grille 11. Instrument panel 12. RH side demister grille 13. Front pillar finisher RH Revision: August 2007 MTC-140 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718994 A DEFROSTER NOZZLE NOTE: The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly. B Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel" . C Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRESH AIR DUCT D Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel" . Remove the defroster nozzle. Remove the fresh air duct. E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F DEFROSTER DUCT G Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the defroster duct. H Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC K RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT L Removal 1. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct. M Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT N Removal 1. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. P FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Installation Revision: August 2007 O MTC-141 2008 Quest DUCTS AND GRILLES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Remove the floor junction duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION Removal 1. 2. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-36. Remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR OVERHEAD DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct. NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to EI-38. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GRILLES Removal 1. 2. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to EI-31 or EI38. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 MTC-142 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > REFRIGERANT LINES A HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure INFOID:0000000001718995 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT B Discharging Refrigerant C D E F G WJIA2195E 1. Shut-off valve A. Preferred (best) method 2. A/C service valve 3. H Recovery/recycling equipment I WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting MTC requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil man- K ufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant L M N O P WJIA2196E 1. Shut-off valve 2. A/C service valve 3. Recovery/recycling equipment 4. Refrigerant container (HFC-134a) 5. Weight scale (J-39650) 6. Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699) Revision: August 2007 MTC-143 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Manifold gauge set (J-39183) C. For charging A. Preferred (best) method B. Alternative method WJIA1923E 1 MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quan- 3 tity in Compressor". MTC-161, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". 2 MTC-161, "Checking of Refrigerant Leaks". MTC-94, "Insufficient Cooling". Revision: August 2007 4 MTC-144 5 MTC-3, "Contaminated Refrigerant". 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Component INFOID:0000000001718996 A Front A/C Compressor and Condenser B C D E F G H I MTC K L M N O P WJIA1967E 1. High-pressure service valve 2. Low-pressure service valve 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Low-pressure flexible hose 6. High-pressure flexible hose 7. Shaft seal 8. Condenser 9. Liquid tank Revision: August 2007 MTC-145 3. High-pressure pipe 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Pressure relief valve 11. Compressor 12. High/low pressure pipe (production) 13. High/low pressure pipe - upper (service) 14 15 High/low pressure pipe - lower (service) Expansion valve (front) Rear A/C LJIA0016E CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. Revision: August 2007 MTC-146 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Compressor INFOID:0000000001718997 A Compressor Mounting B C D E F WJIA0371E G 1. Stud 2. Compressor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-14. Remove the compressor mounting stud. Disconnect the compressor connector. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools. H I MTC K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-147 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch INFOID:0000000001718998 Magnet Clutch Assembly WJIA0372E 1. Magnet clutch assembly 2. Magnet coil 3. Pulley 4. Clutch disc 5. Snap ring 6. Thermal protector (built in) 7. Compressor REMOVAL NOTE: For clarity, the compressor is shown out of the vehicle, but the compressor does not need to be removed to remove the compressor clutch. 1. Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number 4. : J-44614 Remove the clutch disc. WHA228 5. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. RHA072C Revision: August 2007 MTC-148 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number A : KV99233130 (J-29884) B CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. C WJIA1017E D 7. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. E F G WHA212 INSPECTION H Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. I MTC K WHA183 Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. L M N INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. O P WHA213 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. Revision: August 2007 MTC-149 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : — (J-38873-A) WJIA1016E 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. WHA184 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Refer to MTC145, "Component". Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. WHA229 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance 7. 8. 9. : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. Install the drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation". Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. WHA194 Revision: August 2007 MTC-150 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose INFOID:0000000001718999 A B REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the engine under cover. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". C D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose INFOID:0000000001719000 E F G REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the engine under cover. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. H I INSTALLATION MTC Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it K when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe INFOID:0000000001719001 L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Revision: August 2007 MTC-151 2008 Quest M N O P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe INFOID:0000000003261161 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to ATC-160, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". WARNING: • Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. • If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the way. Refer to ATC-143, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. • A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. • Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. LJIA0182E 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. • A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. LJIA0183E 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. LJIA0184E Revision: August 2007 MTC-152 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. • Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) • Electric throttle control actuator (3) • ⇐: Front A B C LJIA0185E D 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. • ⇐: Front E F G LJIA0186E 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. • ⇐: Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. H I MTC LJIA0187E 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. K L M N LJIA0188E d. O Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. P LJIA0189E Revision: August 2007 MTC-153 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. LJIA0190E INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. • Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. • Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. • Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) • Electric throttle control actuator (3) • ⇐: Front LJIA0185E b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. • ⇐: Front LJIA0191E c. d. e. f. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. LJIA0184E Revision: August 2007 MTC-154 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. a. b. c. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: • Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. • Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. • Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). A B C D E LJIA0188E d. e. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. • ⇐: Front CAUTION: • Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. F G H I LJIA0191E 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. MTC Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to ATC-160, "HFCK 134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000001719003 L REMOVAL 1. 2. M Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. N O P WJIA0123E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. Revision: August 2007 MTC-155 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Removal and Installation for Condenser INFOID:0000000001719004 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. WJIA0124E 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. WJIA0373E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Revision: August 2007 MTC-156 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator INFOID:0000000001719005 A Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC LJIA0017E 1. Front blower motor 4. Heater core and evaporator case 2. Blower motor side cover 3. Blower motor case K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the blower motor side cover. Remove the front blower motor. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. L M N O LJIA0018E 5. Remove the blower motor case. Revision: August 2007 MTC-157 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator. LJIA0019E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them. • When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction arrow printed on the side of the filters. Revision: August 2007 MTC-158 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator INFOID:0000000001719006 A Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L M LJIA0020E 1. Front cover 2. Evaporator and heater core case 3. Evaporator 4. Side cover 5. Heater core 6. Rear blower motor 7. Blower motor case 8. Variable blower control (rear) N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. O Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the rear blower motor. Remove the variable blower control (rear). Revision: August 2007 MTC-159 2008 Quest P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to MTC141, "Removal and Installation". 6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator. LJIA0021E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve INFOID:0000000001719007 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-122, "Removal and Installation". Remove the cooler grommet. Remove the expansion valve. WJIA0128E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve bolts A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb) : Refer to MTC-145, "Component". CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve INFOID:0000000001719008 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air and contaminants. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 MTC-160 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Expansion valve bolts A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : 4 N·m (0.4 kg-m, 35 in-lb) : Refer to MTC-145, "Component". A CAUTION: • Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. • After charging refrigerant, check for leaks C Checking of Refrigerant Leaks INFOID:0000000001719009 Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. 2. 3. 4. E F G H INFOID:0000000001719010 INFOID:0000000001719011 NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 3. D Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a I low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). MTC If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent K future misdiagnosis. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). L NOTE: • Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. M • Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. • Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. N Dye Injection 1. 2. B Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi). Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. Connect the injector tool (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. Revision: August 2007 MTC-161 2008 Quest O P REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector INFOID:0000000001719012 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. AHA281A 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. SHA707EA 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. SHA706E Revision: August 2007 MTC-162 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. A B C SHA708EA D CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R134a) Service Procedure". 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. E F Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified G amount of refrigerant. Refer to MTC-143, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa H (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) pressure. Conduct the leak test from the high pressure side (compressor discharge to evaporator inlet) to the low pressure side (evaporator drain hose to shaft seal). Refer to MTC-145, "Component". Clean the compoI nent to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. • Compressor MTC • High and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal • Liquid tank • Refrigerant pressure sensor • Service valves. Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the ser- K vice valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the ser- L vice valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). • Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the M manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: N Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, O then repeat the leak check. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. P If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. Start the engine. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually. A/C switch: ON Air flow: VENT mode Revision: August 2007 MTC-163 2008 Quest REFRIGERANT LINES < SERVICE INFORMATION > c. Intake position: RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature: MAX cold e. Blower fan speed: HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. SHA839E 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to MTC-45, "Operational Check (Front)". Revision: August 2007 MTC-164 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Service Data and Specification (SDS) INFOID:0000000001719013 COMPRESSOR B Make ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL Model DKS-17D Type Swash plate Displacement 175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3) / revolution Cylinder bore x stroke 30.5 x 24.0 mm (1.201 x 0.94 in) Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V ribbed C D E OIL F Name NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Total in system 220 m Compressor (service part) charging amount Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Capacity (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 lmp fl oz) REFRIGERANT G H Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) I MTC K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 MTC-165 2008 Quest BRAKES SECTION PB PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ........................... 5 PB PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Component ............................................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 PARKING BRAKE SHOE .................................. 7 Component ............................................................... 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ............................... 4 G H SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 10 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 4 Parking Drum Brake ................................................10 Parking Brake Control .............................................10 I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PB-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718280 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SR section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 PB-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718281 B Tool name Description Power tool Removing fasteners C D PBIC0190E E PB G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PB-3 2008 Quest PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718282 PEDAL STROKE • When parking brake pedal is operated at specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number of notches. (Check it by listening and counting the ratchet clicks.) Pedal force Pedal stroke : 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f) : 5 to 6 notches • If the pedal stroke is not within specification, perform the adjustment operation. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". INSPECT COMPONENTS • • • • Make sure the components are attached properly (check for looseness, backlash, etc.). Check parking brake pedal assembly for bend, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary. Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary. Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary. Refer to DI-24, "Wiring Diagram - WARN -". ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove lower instrument panel LH using power tool. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen the cable sufficiently. Then, return the pedal to the free height. Remove wheel and tire from the vehicle using power tool. Using wheel nuts, secure the disc to the hub and prevent it from tilting. WFIA0138E 5. 6. 7. a. b. c. Remove adjusting hole plug installed on the disc rotor. Rotate the adjuster in direction "A" as shown, until the disc rotor is locked, using a suitable tool. After locking, turn the adjuster in the opposite direction by 5 or 6 notches. Rotate the disc rotor to make sure there is no drag. Install the adjusting hole plug. Adjust cable as follows: Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 294 N (30 kg-f, 66 lb-f). Rotate adjusting nut with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke. PFIA0295E NOTE: Do not reuse the adjusting nut after removing it. When parking brake pedal is operated at specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number of notches. (Check it by listening and counting the ratchet clicks.) Pedal force Pedal stroke d. : 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f) : 5 to 6 notches With the pedal completely returned, make sure there is no drag on the rear brake. Revision: August 2007 PB-4 2008 Quest PARKING BRAKE CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > PARKING BRAKE CONTROL A Component INFOID:0000000001718283 B C D E PB G H I J WFIA0338E 1. Parking brake pedal assembly 2. Equalizer 3. Return spring 6. Rear left cable 4. Rear right cable 5. Pin 7. Front cable 8. Adjusting nut K L Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718284 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. M Remove instrument lower panel LH and knee protector using power tool. Refer to IP-12, "Instrument Lower Panel LH". Disconnect parking brake switch electrical connector. Remove adjusting nut from threaded end of front cable. Remove parking brake pedal assembly nuts. Disconnect front cable from parking brake pedal assembly while compressing legs of spring clip. Remove parking brake pedal assembly. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Remove front cable bolts, then remove front cable from vehicle. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor". WFIA0138E Revision: August 2007 PB-5 2008 Quest N O P PARKING BRAKE CONTROL < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Remove rear cables from toggle levers. 11. Remove right and left rear cables nuts and bolts, then remove right and left cable assemblies from vehicle. LFIA0095E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. • Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service". NOTE: Do not reuse the adjusting nut. Revision: August 2007 PB-6 2008 Quest PARKING BRAKE SHOE < SERVICE INFORMATION > PARKING BRAKE SHOE A Component INFOID:0000000001718285 B C D E PB G H I J PFIA0443E 1. Return spring 4. Shoe (primary) 7. Anti-rattle springs 2. Adjuster assembly 3. Shoe (secondary) 5. Anti-rattle pins 6. Retainers 8. Toggle lever K L Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718286 REMOVAL M CAUTION: Clean dust on the disc and back plate with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove the disc rotor with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position. 3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: a. Secure the disc rotor in place with wheel nuts and remove disc rotor plug. N O P Revision: August 2007 PB-7 2008 Quest PARKING BRAKE SHOE < SERVICE INFORMATION > b. Rotate adjuster in direction "B" to retract and loosen brake shoes, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the anti-rattle pins, retainers, and anti-rattle springs, then return springs. 5. Remove the parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly, and toggle lever. PFIA0309E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection • Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness (new) "A" Repair limit thickness "A" : 3.2 mm (0.126 in) : 1.5 mm (0.059 in) SBR021A Drum Inner Diameter Inspection • Check drum inner diameter. Standard inner diameter (new) Wear limit of inner diameter : 190 mm (7.48 in) : 191 mm (7.52 in) Other Inspections • • • • • Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage. Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion. Check return spring for sagging. Check that adjuster moves smoothly. Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside the drum. SBR768A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, observing the following: • Refer to PB-7, "Component" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. • There is a difference between the adjusters orientation from left and right. Assemble the adjuster so the threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. • Shorten adjuster by rotating it. • When disassembling the adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone based grease to the threads. Refer to MA-11. • After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke to the specified stroke. Refer to PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service". 2. Perform break-in (drag run) operation by driving the vehicle under the following conditions: SFIA0153E Drive forward • Vehicle speed approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) set (forward) Revision: August 2007 PB-8 2008 Quest PARKING BRAKE SHOE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Parking brake operating force approx. 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f) set • Distance approx. 100 m (328 ft) 3. A After break-in operation, check lever stroke of the parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified stroke. • To prevent the lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. • Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of the lining. B C D E PB G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PB-9 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Drum Brake INFOID:0000000001718287 Type Brake lining Drum (disc) DS19HC Standard thickness (new) 3.2 mm (0.126 in) Wear limit thickness 1.5 mm (0.059 in) Standard inner diameter (new) 190 mm (7.48 in) Wear limit of inner diameter 191 mm (7.52 in) Parking Brake Control INFOID:0000000001718288 Control type Foot pedal Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg-f, 44 lb-f)] 5 to 6 notches Number of notches when warning lamp switch activates warning lamp Revision: August 2007 1 notch PB-10 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION PG POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 30 Ground Distribution ..................................................30 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 HARNESS ......................................................... 40 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ............... 3 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION .................... 67 Schematic ................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagram - POWER - ...................................... 5 Fuse ........................................................................ 16 Fusible Link ............................................................. 16 Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) .............................. 16 Circuit Breaker (PTC) .............................................. 16 Electrical Units Location ..........................................67 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) .................17 System Description ................................................. 17 CAN Communication System Description ............... 18 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction .... 18 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 18 Auto Active Test ...................................................... 20 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ........................... 23 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ......... 24 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection ........... 27 Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) ....... 28 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R .................... 28 F Harness Layout .......................................................40 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) .......................63 HARNESS CONNECTOR ................................. 71 Description ...............................................................71 G H I ELECTRICAL UNITS ........................................ 74 Terminal Arrangement .............................................74 J STANDARDIZED RELAY ................................. 75 Description ...............................................................75 PG SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) ............. 77 Terminal Arrangement .............................................77 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) .............. 78 L Terminal Arrangement .............................................78 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ...................... 79 M Terminal Arrangement .............................................79 N O P Revision: August 2007 PG-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719534 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 PG-2 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Schematic A INFOID:0000000001719535 For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-30, "Ground Distribution". B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKWA4809E P Revision: August 2007 PG-3 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4810E Revision: August 2007 PG-4 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - POWER - INFOID:0000000001719536 A BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O P WKWA4811E Revision: August 2007 PG-5 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4812E Revision: August 2007 PG-6 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKWA4813E P Revision: August 2007 PG-7 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4814E Revision: August 2007 PG-8 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O ALMWA0128GB P Revision: August 2007 PG-9 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON WKWA4816E Revision: August 2007 PG-10 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O ALMWA0129GB P Revision: August 2007 PG-11 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4818E Revision: August 2007 PG-12 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O ALMWA0130GB P Revision: August 2007 PG-13 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4820E Revision: August 2007 PG-14 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKWA4944E P Revision: August 2007 PG-15 2008 Quest POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Fuse INFOID:0000000001719537 • If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. • Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. • Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly. • Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. CEL083 Fusible Link INFOID:0000000001719538 A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: • If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. • Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. • Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) INFOID:0000000001719539 For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: • Power windows • Power sunroof SBF284E Circuit Breaker (PTC) INFOID:0000000001719540 The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. SEL109W Revision: August 2007 PG-16 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description A INFOID:0000000001719541 B • IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. • IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. • It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. C D SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. E Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: • Headlamps (High, Low) F • Parking lamps • Tail and license plate lamps • Cornering lamps • Front fog lamps G Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. H Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. A/C compressor control I Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). Starter control J Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. PG Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL L With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control • When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. • Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: Controlled system Headlamp Tail, license plate and parking lamps N Fail-safe mode O • With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low relay) is ON. • With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low relay) is OFF. • With the ignition switch ON, the tail lamp relay is ON. • With the ignition switch OFF, the tail lamp relay is OFF. P Cooling fan • With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI relay is ON. • With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan relays are OFF. Front wiper Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper relays remain in the same status they were in just before fail−safe control was initiated. Rear window defogger Rear window defogger relay OFF Revision: August 2007 M PG-17 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Controlled system Fail-safe mode A/C compressor A/C relay is OFF Front fog lamps Front fog lamp relay OFF IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status • CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. • Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. • When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status • Process to stop CAN communication is activated. • All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status • IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. • CAN communication is stopped. • When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. • When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001719542 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction INFOID:0000000001719543 • When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/ R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. • When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Ignition switch signal Ignition relay status Tail lamp relay ON ON — OFF OFF — ON OFF — OFF ON ON (10 minutes) NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000001719544 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Revision: August 2007 PG-18 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > TIME Display items CONSULT-III display code Malfunction detection NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. — — U1000 • If CAN communication reception/transmission data has a malfunction, or if any of the control units fail, data reception/transmission cannot be confirmed. • When the data in CAN communication is not received before the specified time. CAN COMM CIRC Possible causes A — — B X Any of items listed below have errors: • TRANSMIT DIAG • ECM • BCM/SEC CRNT PAST — X NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: • CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. • PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. C D E DATA MONITOR F All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Item name CONSULT-III screen display Monitor item selection Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description Motor fan request MOTOR FAN REQ 1/2/3/4 X X X Signal status input from ECM Compressor request AC COMP REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from ECM G H I Parking, license, and tail lamp request TAIL & CLR REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM Headlamp low beam request HL LO REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM Headlamp high beam request HL HI REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM Front fog request FR FOG REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM FR wiper request FR WIP REQ STOP/1LO/LO/HI X X X Signal status input from BCM Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P X X X Output status of IPDM E/R Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/LS/HS/Block X X X Control status of IPDM E/R Starter request ST RLY REQ ON/OFF X X Status of input signal NOTE Ignition relay status IGN RLY ON/OFF X X X Ignition relay status monitored with IPDM E/R Rear defogger request RR DEF REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM Oil pressure switch OIL P SW OPEN/CLOSE X X Signal status input from IPDM E/R Hood switch HOOD SW (*1) OFF X X Signal status input from IPDM E/R Theft warning horn request THFT HRN REQ (*1) ON/OFF X X Signal status input from BCM Horn chirp HORN CHIRP ON/OFF X X Output status of IPDM E/R Cornering lamp request CRNRNG LMP REQ OFF/LEFT/RIGHT X X Signal status input from BCM J NOTE: Revision: August 2007 PG-19 2008 Quest PG L M N O P IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position, display may not be correct. • (*1) This item is displayed, but does not function. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". ACTIVE TEST Test name CONSULT-III screen display Description Tail lamp output TAIL LAMP With a certain ON-OFF operation, the tail lamp relay can be operated. Rear defogger output REAR DEFOGGER With a certain ON-OFF operation, the rear defogger relay can be operated. Front wiper (HI, LO) output FRONT WIPER With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay (Lo, Hi) can be operated. Cooling fan output MOTOR FAN With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated. Lamp (HI, LO, FOG) output LAMPS With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, FOG ON), the lamp relay (Lo, Hi, Fog) can be operated. Cornering lamp output CORNERING LAMP Horn output HORN — With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated. Auto Active Test INFOID:0000000001719545 DESCRIPTION • In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-37, "Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System)" or BL-35, "Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE Revision: August 2007 PG-20 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. A B C D E WKIA4484E (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. F Item Number Test Item Operation Time/Frequency 1 Rear window defogger 10 seconds 2 Front wipers LOW 5 seconds then HIGH 5 seconds 3 Cornering lamps 10 seconds 4 Tail, license, and parking lamps 10 seconds 5 Front fog lamps 10 seconds 6 Headlamps (low) 10 seconds 7 Headlamps (high) ON-OFF 5 times 8 A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) ON-OFF 5 times 9 Cooling fan LOW 2 seconds → MID 2 seconds → HIGH 2 seconds → MID 2 seconds → LOW 2 seconds G H I J Concept of Auto Active Test PG L M N O WKIA5163E • IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. • If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Revision: August 2007 PG-21 2008 Quest P IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause YES Rear window defogger does not operate. Any of front wipers, tail and parking lamps, front fog lamps, cornering lamps, and headlamps (High, Low) do not operate. A/C compressor does not operate. Cooling fan does not operate. Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate. Revision: August 2007 Perform auto active test. Does rear window defogger operate? Perform auto active test. Does system in question operate? Perform auto active test. Does magnet clutch operate? Perform auto active test. Does cooling fan operate? Perform auto active test. Does oil pressure warning lamp blink? NO • BCM signal input circuit • • • • Rear window defogger relay Open circuit of rear window defogger IPDM E/R malfunction Harness or connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and rear window defogger YES • BCM signal input system NO • Lamp/wiper motor malfunction • Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction • Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in question • IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction YES • BCM signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM. • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Magnet clutch malfunction • Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnet clutch • IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction YES • ECM signal input circuit • CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R NO • Cooling fan motor malfunction • Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor • IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction YES • Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure switch • Oil pressure switch malfunction • IPDM E/R NO • CAN communication signal between BCM and Combination Meter • Combination meter PG-22 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000001719546 A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA1203E Revision: August 2007 PG-23 2008 Quest P IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719547 Measuring condition Terminal Wire color Signal name Signal input/ output Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) 1 R Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage 2 B/Y Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage 3 B/W Starter motor Output START — Battery voltage 4 B/R Ignition switch Input — 5 W Rear window defogger Output — — Battery voltage 6 L Battery power supply (Rear window defogger) Output — — Battery voltage 7 B/W Input — 8 10 11 L L/B R Ignition switch supplied power Cooling fan motor low 1 Cooling fan motor high 2 Cooling fan motor high 1 Revision: August 2007 Input Output Input — — — OFF or ACC or ON START 0V Battery voltage OFF or ACC 0V ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature above 100 °C (212 °F) or with air conditioner switch : ON 0V Ignition switch OFF or ACC, with engine coolant temperature below 100 °C (212 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher with air conditioner switch : ON Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F) and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Less than battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher with air conditioner switch : ON 0V Ignition switch OFF or ACC, with engine coolant temperature 94 °C (201 °F) or less or with air conditioner switch : OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F) and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Less than battery voltage PG-24 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal 12 13 14 Wire color R R/Y L/B Signal name Cooling fan motor ground 2 Cooling fan motor low 2 Cooling fan motor ground Signal input/ output Input Output Output Measuring condition Ignition switch — — — Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F) and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Less than battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC, or with engine coolant temperature below 95 °C (203 °F) or with engine coolant temperature above 99 °C (210 °F) but below 105 °C (221 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher with air conditioner switch : ON 0V Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature above 100 °C (212 °F) or with air conditioner switch : ON Battery voltage B C F Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature between 95 °C (203 °F) and 99 °C (210 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Less than battery voltage I 0V L G Battery power supply Input — — Battery voltage 16 B Ground Input — — 0V 17 R ECM Relay Output — 18 R/G ECM relay Output — 20 R/Y RH Low beam headlamp Output — 21 L Wiper low speed signal Output ON or START 22 R/L Rear parking, license plate, and tail lamp Output — Lighting switch 1ST position 23 W/L RH Cornering lamp Output — Lighting switch ON or AUTO and turn signal switch in the RIGHT position Battery voltage 24 G Ignition 1 Output — Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V M Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V PG-25 J PG Ignition switch ON or START, with engine coolant temperature 105 °C (221 °F) or higher with air conditioner switch : ON 15 Revision: August 2007 G H 0V Wiper switch D E Ignition switch OFF or ACC, with engine coolant temperature below 100 °C (212 °F) or with air conditioner switch : OFF Lighting switch in 2nd position A N Battery voltage O OFF 0V LO Battery voltage OFF 0V ON Battery voltage P 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Measuring condition Signal input/ output Ignition switch Ignition 1 Output — Ignition 1 Output — L/W RH High beam headlamp Output — Lighting switch in 2nd position and placed in HIGH or PASS position Battery voltage 28 G LH High beam headlamp Output — Lighting switch in 2nd position and placed in HIGH or PASS position Battery voltage 30 L LH Low beam headlamp Output — Lighting switch in 2nd position Battery voltage 31 L/B Wiper high speed signal Output ON or START Terminal Wire color 25 P 26 P 27 32 33 34 36 L/Y Y/B WG W/G Signal name Wiper auto stop signal A/C compressor LH Cornering lamp Front fog lamp (RH) 37 W/R Front fog lamp (LH) 38 B 39 B/Y Fuel pump 40 B/O 41 42 Ground Input ON or START Output ON or START Output Output Output — Reference value (Approx.) Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V Wiper switch OFF 0V HI Battery voltage Wipers not in park position Wipers in park position Battery voltage 0V A/C switch or auto A/C request ON Battery voltage A/C switch or auto A/C request OFF 0V Lighting switch ON or AUTO and turn signal switch in the LEFT position Battery voltage OFF 0V ON or START Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch ON Battery voltage OFF 0V ON or START Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch ON Battery voltage Input — Output — Fuel pump relay control Input — G Battery power supply Output — R Throttle control motor relay Output — Revision: August 2007 Operation or condition — 0V Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V Ignition switch ON or START 0V Ignition switch OFF or ACC Battery voltage — Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V PG-26 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire color 43 GR 44 Y/R 46 W/B Ignition switch Ignition 1 Output — Ignition 1 Output — ECM relay control 47 O Throttle control motor relay control 48 L 49 50 51 Measuring condition Signal input/ output Signal name Input — Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V Ignition switch ON or START 0V Ignition switch OFF or ACC Battery voltage Ignition switch ON or START 0V Ignition switch OFF or ACC Battery voltage Input — CAN-H — ON — — P CAN-L — ON — — B Ground Input — — 0V G/W Horn relay control Input — 52 G/R Rear window defogger relay control Input ON or START 53 G/R Starter relay (inhibit switch) Input ON or START 57 P/L Oil pressure switch Input 60 B Ground Input A B C D E F Horn switch : PUSHED or when a door is locked or unlocked via the keyfob 0V Horn switch: RELEASED or with no door lock feature activated via the keyfob Battery voltage G Defogger Switch: ON 0V Defogger Switch: OFF Battery voltage Selector lever in "P" or "N" Battery voltage H I Selector lever any other position 0V ON or START — Battery voltage — — 0V IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719548 J PG 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION L Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. Terminal No. Signal name Fuse, fusible link No. 1, 2 Battery power c, d M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace fuse or fusible link. N 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. O P Revision: August 2007 PG-27 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. SKIA1987E 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. WKIA4319E Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) INFOID:0000000001719549 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. CONSULT-III Display CRNT PAST — — — NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. CAN COMM CIRC TIME CONSULT-III display code U1000 X X Details of diagnosis result No malfunction Any of items listed below have errors: • TRANSMIT DIAG • ECM • BCM/SEC NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: • CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. • PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719550 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. Move coolant reservoir aside. Revision: August 2007 PG-28 2008 Quest IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. A B C WKIA1204E D 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. E F G WKIA0121E 6. 7. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. H I J WKIA0122E PG INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PG-29 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > GROUND CIRCUIT Ground Distribution INFOID:0000000001719551 Main Harness ALMIA0411GB Revision: August 2007 PG-30 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O ALMIA0412GB P Revision: August 2007 PG-31 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Room Harness WKIA5235E Revision: August 2007 PG-32 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5236E P Revision: August 2007 PG-33 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKIA5237E Revision: August 2007 PG-34 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Control Harness A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5238E P Revision: August 2007 PG-35 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Body Harness WKIA5239E Revision: August 2007 PG-36 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA4491E P Revision: August 2007 PG-37 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Body No. 2 Harness WKIA5240E Revision: August 2007 PG-38 2008 Quest GROUND CIRCUIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Back Door No. 2 Harness A B C D E F G H I WKIA5241E J PG L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PG-39 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > HARNESS Harness Layout INFOID:0000000001719552 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: • Main Harness and Air Conditioner Control Sub-harness • Engine Room Harness (RH View) Engine Compartment • Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) • Engine Room Harness (LH View) Engine Compartment • Engine Control Harness, Engine Control Sub-harness-1, Engine Control Sub-harness-2 and Engine Control Sub-harness-3 • Body Harness, Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness and Trailer Tow Sub-harness • Body No. 2 Harness and Fuel Tank Sub-harness • Room Lamp Harness and Overhead Console harness • Back Door Harness and Back Door No. 2 Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. SEL252V CONNECTOR SYMBOL Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below. Connector type Water proof type Male Female Standard type Male Female • Cavity: 4 or Less • Relay connector • Cavity: From 5 to 8 • Cavity: 9 or More • Ground terminal etc. — Revision: August 2007 PG-40 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OUTLINE A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5381E P Revision: August 2007 PG-41 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > MAIN HARNESS ALMIA0413GB A1 M1 W/16 A1 M2 W/32 : To R2 D3 M55 W/4 : Hazard switch A2 M3 W/8 : Fuse block (J/B) D4 M56 B/3 : Front power socket LH A3 M4 W/16 : Fuse block (J/B) A2 M57 — : Body ground B3 M6 GR/6 : TCS OFF switch (without VDC) C3 M58 B/6 : Intake door motor driver Revision: August 2007 : To R1 E2 PG-42 M53 W/16 : To M301 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > B3 M6 GR/6 : VDC OFF switch (with VDC) G3 M59 BR/2 : Glove box lamp A3 M8 W/12 : To D2 F2 M61 — : Body ground A3 M9 GR/12 : To D1 E2 M62 W/2 : Front blower motor B3 M10 W/4 : To E29 G3 M74 W/16 : To D102 A4 M11 W/16 : To B1 G4 M75 W/8 : To D101 A B A3 M12 GR/24 : To B2 F3 M77 Y/4 : Front passenger air bag module (service replacement) B4 M13 L/4 : Fuel lid opener relay F2 M79 — : Body ground B3 M14 W/16 : Pedal adjusting control unit A4 M81 W/16 : To B20 A3 M15 W/20 : To D15 B3 M83 W/12 : To E134 D1 M16 B/4 : Optical sensor (with auto lights) F4 M84 W/16 : To B101 A2 M18 W/40 : BCM (body control module) G3 M85 BR/24 : To B102 A2 M19 W/15 : BCM (body control module) F3 M86 BR/20 : To B103 A2 M20 B/15 : BCM (body control module) B4 M88 Y/4 : To E42 C3 M21 W/4 : NATS antenna amp. A4 M90 W/24 : To E25 C4 M22 W/16 : Data link connector G3 M91 BR/16 : To E26 C2 M24 W/40 : Combination meter C1 M93 W/24 : Display unit C3 M25 W/2 : Ignition keyhole illumination D2 M94 W/24 : Display control unit (with color display) C3 M26 W/6 : Ignition switch C1 M95 W/32 : Display control unit (with color display) C3 M27 W/2 : Key switch D2 M98 W/16 : AV switch C3 M28 W/16 : Combination switch C4 M99 BR/2 : Foot lamp LH C4 M29 Y/6 : Combination switch (spiral cable) E4 M100 BR/2 : Foot lamp RH C3 M30 GR/8 : Combination switch (spiral cable) F2 M105 Y/2 : Front passenger air bag module D2 M31 W/3 : Passenger air bag OFF indicator F2 M106 O/2 : Front passenger air bag module C3 M32 W/4 : In-vehicle sensor A2 M108 BR/6 : Lamps on demand switch D4 M33 B/3 : Front power socket RH B1 M109 BR/2 : Front tweeter LH C4 M34 GR/8 : A/T device D1 M110 BR/2 : Center speaker (with BOSE) D5 M35 Y/28 : Air bag diagnosis sensor unit G2 M111 BR/2 : Front tweeter RH D4 M39 B/6 : Air mix door motor (driver) F2 M112 B/24 : BOSE speaker amp. B4 M41 W/32 : Automatic drive positioner control unit F3 M113 GR/8 : BOSE speaker amp. B3 M42 W/16 : Automatic drive positioner control unit F3 M114 W/24 : To B104 D3 M43 W/10 : Audio unit G2 M115 W/4 : To B105 E3 M44 W/6 : Audio unit B3 M116 GR/8 : Rear sonar system OFF switch D3 M45† W/8 : Audio unit (with base audio system) D1 M117 B/2 : Sonar buzzer D3 M45† † W/6 : Audio unit (except base audio system) G2 M120 W/4 : Remote keyless entry receiver D3 M46 W/20 : Audio unit E3 M122 GR/4 : Variable blower control B2 M47 W/8 : Steering angle sensor C3 M123 W/2 : Tire pressure warning check connector E2 M48 BR/2 : To M501 E3 M127 W/12 : Audio unit (with satellite radio tuner) D2 M49 B/26 : Front air control E3 M128 W/16 : Satellite radio tuner E3 M50 L/24 : Front air control F3 M129 V/1 : Satellite radio tuner B2 M152 B/2 : Resistor-1 D4 M153 GR/16 : DVD player D4 M154 L/16 : DVD player D E F G H I J PG L M N O P Air conditioner control sub-harness Revision: August 2007 C PG-43 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > E2 M301 W/16 : To M53 E3 M302 B/6 : Intake door motor passenger E3 M303 B/6 : Defrost door motor E3 M304 B/6 : Mode door motor D4 M305 W/2 : Intake sensor E3 M306 B/6 : Air mix door motor (passenger) E3 M307 B/6 : Air mix door motor (front) (with MTC) ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) Revision: August 2007 PG-44 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Compartment A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5385E Refer to "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. E5 E1 B/2 : Ambient sensor B3 E2 GR/10 : To F32 E4 E3 B/1 : Horn (low) D5 E4 Y/2 : Crash zone sensor D3 E6 GR/2 : Fusible link box (battery) Revision: August 2007 PG-45 P 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > B3 E7 G/10 : To F15 B3 E8 B/12 : To F17 E2 E11 GR/3 : Front combination lamp LH D2 E14 — : Engine ground D2 E15 — : Engine ground C2 E18 GR/2 : Front wheel sensor LH C2 E21 GR/2 : Brake fluid level switch B2 E23 GR/6 : Front wiper motor C3 E27 BR/2 : Fusible link box (battery) E2 E43 GR/2 : Front combination lamp LH (cornering lamp) E2 E44 BR/2 : Front combination lamp LH (headlamp low) E3 E45 B/2 : Front combination lamp LH (headlamp high) E4 E102 B/2 : Front fog lamp LH D2 E103 GR/8 : Daytime light control unit D2 E104 GR/6 : Daytime light control unit C3 E151 B/1 : To F66 Revision: August 2007 PG-46 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Passenger Compartment A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5384E P Passenger compartment C3 E20 B/8 : Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A3 E25 W/24 : To M90 G3 E26 BR/16 : To M91 B3 E29 W/4 : To M10 Revision: August 2007 PG-47 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A2 E30 W/8 : Fuse block (J/B) A3 E31 B/2 : Fuse block (J/B) A2 E32 B/1 : Fuse block (J/B) B3 E37 BR/2 : ASCD brake switch B3 E38 W/4 : Stop lamp switch A3 E42 Y/4 : To M88 C2 E109 GR/2 : Pedal adjusting motor C2 E110 W/3 : Pedal adjusting motor G2 E128 L/4 : Heater pump relay A3 E134 W/12 : To M83 G3 E138 W/20 : To B106 F3 E139 W/6 : To B107 B3 E140 B/1 : Park brake switch A3 E141 W/2 : To B40 G2 E142 GR/28 : TCM F1 E143 GR/20 : TCM G1 E144 L/4 : A/T PV IGN relay A3 E145 W/8 : To B41 A2 E146 /3 : Diode-3 B2 E147 /2 : Diode-1 F2 E148 W/3 : Daytime light relay ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) Revision: August 2007 PG-48 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Engine Compartment A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5383E Refer to "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. D2 E5 B/8 : To F14 E2 E9 — : Engine ground D3 E12 BR/2 : Front combination lamp RH (headlamp low) Revision: August 2007 PG-49 P 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > D4 E13 B/2 : Front combination lamp RH (headlamp high) E2 E16 B/32 : ECM D2 E19 GR/9 : To F33 D2 E24 — : Engine ground D5 E101 B/2 : Front fog lamp RH D4 E105 GR/2 : Washer motor D5 E106 BR/2 : Washer fluid level switch D2 E107 GR/3 : Front combination lamp RH D5 E108 B/1 : Horn (high) E5 E111 B/3 : Refrigerant pressure sensor F4 E112 — : Generator F5 E113 GR/4 : Cooling fan motor-1 F5 E114 GR/4 : Cooling fan motor-2 D3 E116 — : Body ground (generator) F3 E117 GR/2 : Front wheel sensor RH E3 E118 B/4 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E3 E119 W/4 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E3 E120 B/2 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E4 E121 W/16 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E4 E122 GR/16 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E3 E123 W/6 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) E4 E124 W/12 : IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) F2 E125 B/32 : ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (without VDC) F2 E125 B/46 : ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (with VDC) F3 E126 — : Engine ground G2 E127 B/2 : Heater pump C3 E137 GR/2 : Front combination lamp RH (cornering lamp) Revision: August 2007 PG-50 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5386E P B4 F1 W/2 : Generator C4 F2 — : Generator D1 F46 B/3 : Power steering pressure sensor B4 F3 B/1 : Mass air flow sensor E2 F50 GR/6 : Electric throttle control actuator B3 F4 G/2 : Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank 2) B2 F54 B/76 : ECM C5 F5 B/6 : Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 2) F3 F62 GR/6 : Terminal cord assembly Revision: August 2007 D1 F44 PG-51 G/8 : To F101 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > C4 F6 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 2 (with power transistor) E3 F63 GR/2 : EGR temperature sensor D4 F7 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 4 (with power transistor) F2 F64 GR/6 : EGR volume control valve D4 F8 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 6 (with power transistor) C1 F65 B/6 : Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) B3 F9 — : Engine ground G4 F66 B/1 : To E151 Engine control sub-harness-1 D5 F10 BR/3 : Front electronic controlled engine mount E4 F11 B/3 : Crankshaft position sensor (POS) D1 F101 G/8 : To F44 C4 F12 L/4 : Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) C2 F102 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 1 D3 F13 G/4 : Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) D2 F103 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 3 A2 F14 B/8 : To E5 D3 F104 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 5 G3 F15 G/10 : To E7 E2 F105 L/2 : EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve C3 F16 — : Engine ground D5 F106 B/1 : Oil pressure switch G3 F17 B/12 : To E8 C1 F107 G/2 : Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (Bank-1) C3 F18 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 2 Engine control sub-harness-2 C3 F19 B/2 : VIAS control solenoid valve D1 F201 G/6 : To F43 D3 F20 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 4 C2 F202 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 1 (with power transistor) C3 F21 W/2 : Condenser-1 D2 F203 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 3 (with power transistor) D3 F22 GR/2 : Fuel injector No. 6 D2 F204 GR/3 : Ignition coil No. 5 (with power transistor) E4 F23 B/3 : Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) Engine control sub-harness-3 E4 F24 GR/2 : Engine coolant temperature sensor E3 F301 GR/6 : To F26 E3 F26 GR/6 : To F301 D3 F302 B/2 : Knock sensor D5 F27 — : Starter motor E3 F303 G/3 : Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) E5 F28 GR/1 : Starter motor F4 F29 GR/ 10 : Park/neutral position (PNP) switch F4 F30 BR/8 : Terminal cord assembly G3 F31 B/6 : Mass air flow sensor G3 F32 GR/ 10 : To E2 A1 F33 GR/9 : To E19 F4 F37 L/2 : Turbine revolution sensor F2 F38 L/2 : Revolution sensor G4 F39 — : Fusible link box (battery) F3 F40 — : Fusible link box (battery) F3 F41 — : Fusible link box (battery) D1 F43 G/6 : To F201 Revision: August 2007 PG-52 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BODY HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5387E P A3 B1 W/16 : To M11 C3 B58 W/4 : Sliding door open/close switch LH A3 B2 GR/24 : To M12 D4 B59 W/4 : Sliding door motor assembly LH (sliding door encoder) A3 B4 BR/6 : Rear window defogger relay E4 B60 W/24 : Sliding door control unit LH B4 B7 — : Body ground D4 B61 W/8 : Sliding door control unit LH C3 B8 W/3 : Front door switch LH E4 B62 B/2 : Fuel door interlock switch Revision: August 2007 PG-53 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > B3 B9 Y/12 : Air bag diagnosis sensor unit E3 B63 GR/6 : Back door close switch B3 B10 Y/2 : Front LH side air bag module B4 B64 W/6 : Front heated seat switch LH B3 B11 W/8 : Subwoofer F4 B65 W/2 : Condenser-3 B3 B12 W/3 : Seat belt buckle switch LH F5 B66 — : Body ground C4 B14 Y/2 : Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner E4 B67 — : Body ground C4 B15 Y/2 : LH side air bag (satellite) sensor F4 B68 W/2 : Condenser-4 E2 B19 — : Body ground D4 B69 W/6 : Sliding door control unit LH A3 B20 W/16 : To M81 F3 B71 — : Body ground B3 B22 BR/6 : Pedal adjusting switch Rear sonar sensor sub-harness C2 B23 W/16 : Rear audio remote control unit F5 B201 GR/6 : To B47 E4 B28 W/4 : Fuel lid opener actuator F4 B202 B/3 : Rear sonar sensor LH outer F4 B35 W/6 : Rear combination lamp LH (without trailer tow) F4 B203 B/3 : Rear sonar sensor LH inner F4 B35 W/6 : To D301 (with trailer tow) G4 B204 B/3 : Rear sonar sensor RH outer B4 B37 W/16† : To B400 (with memory seat) G4 B205 B/3 : Rear sonar sensor RH inner B4 B37 W/ 10†† : To B400 (without memory seat) Trailer tow sub-harness B4 B37 W/6 : To B400 (heated seat only) F5 B301 W/6 : To B35 C2 B38 Y/2 : LH side rear curtain air bag module F4 B302 W/6 : Rear combination lamp LH (with trailer tow) A2 B40 W/2 : To E141 E4 B303 W/10 : Trailer tow control unit (with trailer tow) A3 B41 W/8 : To E145 E5 B304 GR/4 : Trailer (with trailer tow) A3 B42 W/6 : Fuse block (J/B) G4 B305 W/6 : To B130 D4 B43 W/10 : To B111 G3 B306 W/6 : Rear combination lamp RH (with trailer tow) A3 B44 W/2 : Circuit breaker-2 E5 B308 W/1 : To B53 D4 B45 W/2 : Rear speaker LH C4 B46 W/3 : Sliding door switch LH C5 B47 GR/6 : To B201 E2 B48 W/12 : To D401 (without power back door) E2 B48 W/24 : To D401 (with power back door) E3 B49 W/4 : To D402 D4 B50 B/3 : Rear power socket (2nd row) F4 B51 B/3 : Rear power socket (cargo) E3 B52 W/2 : Rear power vent window motor LH E5 B53 W/1 : To B308 D2 B54 Y/2 : LH side front curtain air bag module F4 B55 W/26 : Back door control unit E4 B56 W/16 : Sonar control unit C3 B57 W/8 : Sliding door contact switch LH (pillar) Revision: August 2007 PG-54 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > BODY NO. 2 HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5388E P G2 B101 W/16 : To M84 B3 B144 W/8 : Sliding door control unit RH G2 B102 BR/24 : To M85 B3 B145 W/4 : Sliding door motor assembly RH (sliding door encoder) G1 B103 BR/20 : To M86 A3 B146 B/6 : Air mix door (rear) G2 B104 W/24 : To M114 B3 B147 W/2 : Rear power vent window motor RH G1 B105 W/4 : To M115 B4 B148 GR/6 : To B251 Revision: August 2007 PG-55 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > G1 B106 W/20 : To E138 A3 B149 GR/2 : Running board lamps pre-wiring G1 B107 W/6 : To E139 E1 B150 B/10 : Rear air control (rear) E2 B108 W/3 : Front door switch RH D1 B151 W/4 : Variable blower control (rear) G2 B109 L/4 : Heated seat relay C3 B141 W/6 : Sliding door control unit RH E2 B110 W/3 : Seat belt buckle switch RH Fuel tank sub-harness C3 B111 W/10 : To B43 B4 B251 GR/6 : To B148 F1 B113 Y/12 : Air bag diagnosis sensor unit B2 B252 GR/5 : Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump E3 B114 Y/2 : RH side air bag (satellite) sensor F3 B115 W/6 : To B501 E2 B116 W/48 : To B502 E2 B117 — : Body ground F2 B118 W/12 : To B503 B3 B119 GR/3 : EVAP control system pressure sensor G2 B120 W/2 : Circuit breaker-1 A3 B121 B/2 : EVAP canister vent control valve B4 B122 GR/2 : Rear wheel sensor RH A4 B123 L/2 : Rear wheel sensor LH F3 B124 BR/6 : Front heated seat switch RH F1 B125 B/6 : Yaw rate/side/decel G-sensor F3 B126 Y/2 : Front RH side air bag module E3 B127 Y/2 : Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner C1 B128 Y/2 : RH side rear curtain air bag module D1 B129 Y/2 : RH side front curtain air bag module A4 B130 W/6 : Rear combination lamp RH (without trailer tow) A4 B130 W/6 : To B305 (with trailer tow) C4 B131 W/2 : Rear speaker RH E3 B132 — : Body ground A4 B133 W/4 : Rear blower motor resistor A4 B134 W/2 : Rear blower motor C3 B135 W/3 : Sliding door switch RH F3 B136 W/8 : To B508 E3 B137 B/3 : Belt tension sensor E3 B138 W/2 : Condenser-2 E3 B139 W/8 : Sliding door contact switch RH (pillar) E2 B140 W/4 : Sliding door open/close switch RH C3 B143 W/24 : Sliding door control unit RH Revision: August 2007 PG-56 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROOM LAMP HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5389E P A5 R1 W/16 : To M1 A5 R2 W/32 : To M2 B4 R3 W/2 : Vanity lamp LH B3 R4 W/10 : Sunroof motor assembly E3 R5 W/3 : Personal lamp 2nd row LH (without rear roof console) Revision: August 2007 PG-57 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > B2 R6 GR/6 : Sunroof switch D1 R7 W/3 : Personal lamp 2nd row RH (without rear roof console) A2 R8 W/2 : Vanity lamp RH B3 R9 W/3 : Room/map lamps C3 R10 W/8 : Automatic door main switch G1 R11 W/3 : Cargo lamp F2 R12 W/3 : Personal lamp 3rd row LH (without rear roof console) F1 R13 W/3 : Personal lamp 3rd row RH (without rear roof console) E2 R14 W/4 : To R51 (without DVD entertainment system) E2 R14 W/24 : To R51 (with DVD entertainment system) C2 R15 W/12 : Video monitor (with DVD entertainment system except models with overhead console) B2 R16 W/4 : Bluetooth ON indicator A4 R17 B/10 : Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror A3 R18† W/2 : Console lamp (without power sliding door) A3 R18† † W/2 : Console lamp A3 R19 B/10 : Rear air control (front) B3 R20 W/4 : Microphone Overhead console harness E2 R51 W/4 : To R14 (without DVD entertainment system) E2 R51 W/24 : To R14 (with DVD entertainment system) D2 R52 W/3 : Personal lamp 2nd row (with rear roof console) C2 R53 W/12 : Front video monitor F1 R54 W/3 : Personal lamp 3rd row (with rear roof console) E2 R55 W/12 : Rear video monitor (with dual monitor DVD entertainment system) Revision: August 2007 PG-58 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH A B C D E F G H WKIA5390E D1 GR/12 : To M9 D8 W/3 : Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch D2 W/12 : To M8 D9 GR/6 : Front power window motor LH D3 W/2 : Front door speaker LH (without BOSE audio system) D10 W/10 : Door mirror remote control switch D3 BR/2 : Front door speaker LH (with BOSE audio system) D11 W/2 : Front step lamp LH D4 W/8 : Door mirror LH D13 W/6 : Door mirror LH D5 W/8 : Seat memory switch D14 B/6 : Front door lock assembly LH D6 W/4 : Fuel lid open switch D15 W/20 : To M15 W/16 : Main power window and door lock/ unlock switch D7 I J PG L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PG-59 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH WKIA5391E D101 W/8 : To M5 D105 W/16 : Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH) D102 W/16 : To M74 D107 W/8 : Door mirror RH D103 W/2 : Front door speaker RH (without BOSE audio system) D109 W/2 : Front step lamp RH D103 BR/2 : Front door speaker RH (with BOSE audio system) D113 W/6 : Door mirror RH D104 GR/6 : Front power window motor RH D114 B/6 : Front door lock actuator RH Revision: August 2007 PG-60 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SLIDING DOOR HARNESS LH A B C D E F G H WKIA5392E D201 GR/8 : Sliding door contact switch LH D205 GR/4 : Sliding door lock actuator LH D202 W/4 : Cinch latch switch LH D206 W/2 : Latch release actuator LH D203 W/2 : Cinch latch Motor LH D207 W/3 : Sliding door remote control switch LH D204 W/10 : Sliding door latch control unit LH I J SLIDING DOOR HARNESS RH PG L M N O P WKIA5393E Revision: August 2007 PG-61 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > D301 GR/8 : Sliding door contact switch RH D305 GR/4 : Sliding door lock actuator RH D302 W/4 : Cinch latch switch LH D306 W/2 : Latch release actuator RH D303 W/2 : Cinch latch Motor LH D307 W/3 : Sliding door remote control switch RH D304 W/10 : Sliding door latch control unit RH BACK DOOR HARNESS WKIA5394E Revision: August 2007 PG-62 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Back door No.2 harness A C1 D401 W/12 : To B48 (without power back door) C1 D401 W/24 : To B48 (without power back door) C2 D402 W/4 : To B49 B D1 D403 W/2 : Body ground D1 D404 W/10 : Body ground D1 D405 W/6 : To D501 D2 D406 W/12 : To D501 (without power back door) D2 D406 W/24 : To D501 (with power back door) C D Back door harness E1 D501 W/6 : To D405 E2 D502 W/12 : To D406 (without power back door) E2 D502 W/24 : To D406 (with power back door) E1 D503 W/2 : High mounted stop lamp F3 D504 B/1 : Rear window defogger (+) G4 D505 BR/2 : Pinch strip RH F4 D506 BR/2 : Rear tweeter RH E3 D507 W/4 : Rear wiper motor E4 D508 BR/2 : License plate lamp RH E4 D509 BR/2 : License plate lamp LH E4 D510 GR/2 : Back door handle switch D4 D511 W/8 : Back door latch D5 D512 W/3 : Back door switch E4 D513 W/4 : Back door lock actuator D4 D514 BR/2 : Back door warning chime C3 D515 B/1 : Rear window defogger (-) C4 D516 BR/2 : Rear tweeter LH E C4 D517 BR/2 : Pinch strip LH D4 D518 W/4 : Rear view camera F G H I J PG L Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) INFOID:0000000001719553 Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring diagram. Code 1STSIG Section AT A/T 1st Signal 2NDSIG AT A/T 2nd Signal AT A/T 3rd Signal 4THSIG AT A/T 4th Signal AT A/T 5th Signal A/C,A ATC Auto Air Conditioner A/C,M MTC Manual Air Conditioner AF1B1 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1 AF1B2 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2 AF1HB1 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 1 AF1HB2 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater Bank 2 APPS1 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Revision: August 2007 N Wiring Diagram Name 3RDSIG 5THSIG M PG-63 O P 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > APPS2 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS3 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor ASC/BS EC ASCD Brake Switch ASC/SW EC ASCD Steering Switch ASCBOF EC ASCD Brake Switch ASCIND EC ASCD Indicator AT/IND DI A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO AV Audio AUT/DP SE Automatic Drive Positioner AUTO/L LT Auto Light Control B/CLOS BL Back Door Auto Closure System BACK/L LT Back-up Lamp BRK/SW EC Brake Switch CAN AT CAN Communication Line CAN EC CAN Communication Line CAN LAN CAN System CHARGE SC Charging System CHIME DI Warning Chime COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control COMBSW LT Combination Switch COMM AV Audio Visual Communication System CORNER LT Cornering Lamps D/LOCK BL Power Door Lock DEF GW Rear Window Defogger DTRL LT Headlamp - With Daytime Light System DVD AV DVD Entertainment System ECM/PW EC ECM Power Supply for Back-Up ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EGR/TS EC EGR Temperature Sensor EGRC1 EC EGR Function EGVC/V EC EGR Volume Control Valve EMNT EC Engine Mount ETC1 EC Electric Throttle Control Function ETC2 EC Throttle Control Motor Relay ETC3 EC Throttle Control Motor F/FOG LT Front Fog Lamp F/LID BL Fuel Lid Opener F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor FTSP AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Failure FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor FUELB1 EC Fuel Injection System Bank 1 FUELB2 EC Fuel Injection System Bank 2 H/LAMP LT Headlamp H/PHON AV Hands Free Telephone HORN WW Horn HSEAT SE Heated Seat I/MIRR GW Inside Mirror (Auto Anti-Dazzling Mirror) IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGNSYS EC Ignition System ILL LT Illumination INF/D AV Vehicle Information and Integrated Switch System Revision: August 2007 PG-64 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > INJECT EC Injector INT/L LT Room/Map, Vanity, Cargo, Personal, Foot, Step, Puddle and Running Board Lamps IVCB1 EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 1 IVCB2 EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve Bank 2 KEYLES BL Remote Keyless Entry System KS EC Knock Sensor LVRSW AT A/T Device Lever Switch MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER DI Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL EC Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIRROR GW Door Mirror NATS BL Nissan Anti-Theft System NAVI AV Navigation System O2H2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 1 O2H2B2 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 2 O2S2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 1 O2S2B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 2 P/SCKT WW Power Socket PC/A AT AT Shift Pressure Solenoid Valve PC/C AT Pressure Control Solenoid Valve PC/CS AT Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Failure PEDAL AP Adjustable Pedal System PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PHSB1 EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) PHSB2 EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 2) PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) POWER PG Power Supply Routing PRE/SE EC EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PS/SEN EC Power Steering Pressure Sensor PWR/IN AT TCM Ignition Power R/VIEW DI Rear View Camera RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor S/CLOS BL Slide Door Auto Closure System SEAT SE Power Seat SEN/PW EC Sensor Power Supply SFTFNC AT Unusual Shifting SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System SONAR DI Rear Sonar System SROOF RF Sunroof SRS C D E F G H I J PG L M N O Supplemental Restraint System SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B SSV/C AT Shift Solenoid Valve C SSV/CS AT Shift Solenoid Valve C Failure SSV/D AT Shift Solenoid Valve D SSV/E AT Shift Solenoid Valve E START SC Starting System Revision: August 2007 B Line Pressure Solenoid Valve PC/B SRS A PG-65 P 2008 Quest HARNESS < SERVICE INFORMATION > STOP/L LT Stop Lamp T/TOW LT Trailer Tow T/WARN WT Low Tire Pressure Warning System TAIL/L LT Parking, License and Tail Lamps TCCSIG AT A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up) TCS BRC Traction Control System TPS1 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS2 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS3 EC Throttle Position Sensor TRNSCV BL HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver TRSC AT Turbine Revolution Sensor TURN LT Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps VDC BRC Vehicle Dynamic Control System VEHSEC BL VENT/V EC EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve VIAS EC Variable Air Induction Control System VIAS/V EC Variable Air Induction Control System Valve VSSATC AT Revolution Sensor W/ANT AV Audio Antenna WARN WINDOW Vehicle Security (Theft Warning) System DI Warning Lamps GW Power Window WIP/R WW Rear Wiper and Washer WIPER WW Front Wiper and Washer Revision: August 2007 PG-66 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION A Electrical Units Location INFOID:0000000001719554 ENGINE COMPARTMENT B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O P WKIA5366E Revision: August 2007 PG-67 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ALMIA0414GB Revision: August 2007 PG-68 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O WKIA5245E P Revision: August 2007 PG-69 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALMIA0415GB Revision: August 2007 PG-70 2008 Quest HARNESS CONNECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > HARNESS CONNECTOR A Description INFOID:0000000001719555 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) B • The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. • The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] C D E F G H I J PG L M N O SEL769DA HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) • A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. • The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. • The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Revision: August 2007 PG-71 2008 Quest P HARNESS CONNECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAUTION: • Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. • Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] AEL299C HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) • Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc. • Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors. • Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection. CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 PG-72 2008 Quest HARNESS CONNECTOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals. A B C D E F G H I LKIA0670E J 1. Control unit with single lever A. Fasten B. Loosen C. Lever 2. Control unit with dual levers A. Levers B. Fasten C. Loosen 3. SMJ connector A. Lever B. Fasten C. Loosen PG HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) L • SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. • Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. • Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: • Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. M N O P WHIA0103E Revision: August 2007 PG-73 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL UNITS < SERVICE INFORMATION > ELECTRICAL UNITS Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000001719556 WKIA5412E Revision: August 2007 PG-74 2008 Quest STANDARDIZED RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > STANDARDIZED RELAY A Description INFOID:0000000001719557 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS B Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. C D E F G SEL881H H TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS I J PG L M SEL882H 1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make 1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break N O P Revision: August 2007 PG-75 2008 Quest STANDARDIZED RELAY < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKIA0253E Revision: August 2007 PG-76 2008 Quest SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement A INFOID:0000000001719558 B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O P LKIA0358E Revision: August 2007 PG-77 2008 Quest FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000001719559 WKIA4511E Revision: August 2007 PG-78 2008 Quest FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX < SERVICE INFORMATION > FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX A Terminal Arrangement INFOID:0000000001719560 B C D E F G H I J PG L M N O P WKIA5415E Revision: August 2007 PG-79 2008 Quest STEERING SECTION PS POWER STEERING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................12 Inspection ................................................................12 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Steering System ................................ 2 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE .... 14 F PS H PREPARATION ................................................... 3 On-Vehicle Service ..................................................14 Removal and Installation .........................................15 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................17 Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force ...........................19 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ....................... 21 I NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5 On-Vehicle Service ..................................................21 Removal and Installation .........................................21 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................23 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5 J HYDRAULIC LINE ............................................ 24 POWER STEERING FLUID ................................ 6 Removal and Installation .........................................24 Checking Fluid Level ................................................. 6 Checking Fluid Leakage ............................................ 6 Bleeding Hydraulic System ....................................... 6 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 25 STEERING WHEEL ............................................. 7 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 7 Removal and Installation ........................................... 8 STEERING COLUMN .......................................... 9 General Specification ..............................................25 Steering Wheel ........................................................25 Steering Column ......................................................25 Power Steering ........................................................25 Steering Gear and Linkage ......................................25 K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PS-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718382 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Steering System INFOID:0000000001718383 • Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. • Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. • For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. • Use nylon cloths or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. • Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent. • Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease. • Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated. Revision: August 2007 PS-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718384 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV48102500 (J-33914) Pressure gauge adapter Measuring oil pressure B C D E S-NT542 Measuring oil pressure KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10) Pressure gauge F PS S-NT547 Removing ball joint HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Ball joint remover H I J NT146 Removing steering wheel KV481J0010 (J-1859-A) Steering wheel puller K L LHIA0043E Removing steering wheel KV481J0020 (J-42578) Steering wheel puller legs M N LHIA0044E O Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718385 P Revision: August 2007 PS-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > Tool number Description Spring gauge Measuring steering wheel turning force or rack sliding force LST024 Oil pump attachment Disassembling and assembling oil pump Unit: mm (in) S-NT774 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: August 2007 PS-4 2008 Quest Symptom Revision: August 2007 Tie-rod ball joint end play Steering gear fluid leakage Steering wheel play Steering gear rack sliding force Drive belt looseness × × × × × × × × × Shimmy Shudder Shake × × × Vibration × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × PS-5 × AXLE SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES × DRIVE SHAFT Steering linkage looseness Improper installation or looseness of steering column Steering column deformation or damage Mounting rubber deterioration Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever Improper steering wheel Tie-rod ball joint rotating torque Noise Tie-rod ball joint swinging force Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Air in hydraulic system BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NVH Troubleshooting Chart FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-14 PS-12 PS-12 PS-14 PS-12 PS-7 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" PS-19 PS-7 PS-6 PS-17 PS-17 PS-17 PS-6 PS-6 Reference page Fluid level NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING INFOID:0000000001718386 A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × 2008 Quest C D E F PS H I J K L M ×: Applicable N O P POWER STEERING FLUID < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level INFOID:0000000001718387 Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° – 80°C (122° – 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° – 30°C (32° – 86°F). CAUTION: • Do not overfill. • Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. • Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-11. LGIA0021E Checking Fluid Leakage INFOID:0000000001718388 Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more SGIA0506E than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to PS21, "On-Vehicle Service". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear leak. Bleeding Hydraulic System 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001718389 Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified level. Refer to MA-11. Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no longer decreases. LGIA0021E 3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms: • Air bubbles in reservoir tank • Clicking noise in oil pump • Excessive buzzing in oil pump If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the performance or durability of the system. Revision: August 2007 PS-6 2008 Quest STEERING WHEEL < SERVICE INFORMATION > STEERING WHEEL A On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718390 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY B • With wheels in a straight-ahead position, check steering wheel play. Steering wheel play C : 35 mm (1.38 in) or less • If it is not within specification, check the following for looseness or worn components: - Steering gear assembly - Steering column - Front suspension and axle - Check steering system for looseness while moving the steering wheel in all directions. Axial end play D E WGIA0034E F : 0 mm (0 in) CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL PS Pre-checking • Make sure that wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-19, "Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". • Verify that the steering gear is centered before removing the steering wheel. H Checking 1. 2. 3. Check that the steering wheel is in neutral position when driving straight ahead. If it is not in neutral position, remove the steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. If the neutral position is between two teeth, loosen tie-rod lock nuts. Turn the tie-rods by the same amount in opposite directions on both left and right sides. I J K WGIA0036E CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE L 1. 2. 3. M 4. Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake. Start engine. Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. Make sure the fluid temperature is approximately 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F). Tires need to be inflated to normal pressure. Check steering wheel turning force using a suitable spring gauge after turning steering wheel 360° from the neutral position. N O Steering wheel turning force 5. 6. 7. 8. : 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, check rack sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service". If rack sliding force is not within specifications, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-19, "Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force". If rack sliding force is OK, inspect steering column. Refer to PS12, "Inspection". If the steering column is OK, check the fluid pressure. Refer to PS-21, "On-Vehicle Service". Revision: August 2007 PS-7 P WGIA0035E 2008 Quest STEERING WHEEL < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. Refer to FSU-19, "General Specification (Front)". 2. If it is not within specifications, check rack stroke. Refer to PS25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". SMA127 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718391 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-34, "Removal and Installation". Remove the steering wheel center nut. Remove the steering wheel using Tools. Tool numbers A: KV481J0010 (J-1859-A) B: KV481J0020 (J-42578) CAUTION: Do not tap or bump the steering wheel to remove. • Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. • Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. • Disconnect the horn connector. WHIA0124E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. CAUTION: • The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position. • With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. • Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 PS-8 WGIA0038E 2008 Quest STEERING COLUMN < SERVICE INFORMATION > STEERING COLUMN A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718392 B C D E F PS H I J K L WGIA0176E 1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel side cover 4. Combination switch and spiral cable 5. Ignition switch 6. Steering column assembly 7. Tilt lever knob Spring 9. Self-shear bolt 8. 10. Upper joint 11. Hole cover seal 12. Clamp 13. Hole cover 14. Lower joint ⇐: Front M N CAUTION: • Care must be taken not to give axial impact to steering column assembly during removal and installation. • Care must be taken not to move steering gear during removal of steering column assembly. P REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable from steering column assembly with combination switches attached. Refer to SRS36, "Removal and Installation". 2. 3. Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover". Remove instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Revision: August 2007 O PS-9 2008 Quest STEERING COLUMN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Remove screws of knee protector, then remove knee protector from vehicle. SGIA0470E 5. Remove lock nut and bolt, then separate lower joint from upper joint. WGIA0062E 6. Remove nuts and bolt from steering member, remove steering column assembly from steering member. LGIA0028E 7. 8. 9. Remove hole cover seal and clamp. Remove nuts, then remove hole cover from dash panel. Raise vehicle, then remove bolt (lower side) of lower joint and remove lower joint from vehicle. SGIA0474E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL • Check for damage to steering column jacket tube, if damage is found, replace steering column with new one. Revision: August 2007 PS-10 2008 Quest STEERING COLUMN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If vehicle has been in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the column length “L” as shown. If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly. Steering column length “L” A : 428 mm (16.85 in) B • Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary. C WGIA0064E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Removal and Installation". E NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • When installing steering column to steering member, install nut from front side of vehicle. CAUTION: F When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts; then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column. NOTE: PS Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert the joint until surface A contacts surface B. H I SST491C • After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves smoothly. Ensure the number of turns are the same from the straight-forward position to left and right locks. Be sure that the steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight ahead. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION J K L • After installing steering column to vehicle, check tilt device and its operation range. Ranges of operation are shown. • Check if steering wheel operation can turn to the end of the left and right stops smoothly. M N O WGIA0063E P Revision: August 2007 PS-11 2008 Quest STEERING COLUMN < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718393 WGIA0177E 1. Steering column assembly 2. Ignition switch 3. Upper joint 4. Spring 5. Tilt lever knob 6. Self-shear bolt DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove spring from steering column assembly and tilt lever. Remove bolt from upper joint, then remove upper joint from steering column assembly. WGIA0055E 3. Remove ignition switch tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other suitable tool. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. • Tighten the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly". • Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws as shown. WGIA0009E Inspection INFOID:0000000001718394 • When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows: 1. Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. 2. Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. Revision: August 2007 PS-12 2008 Quest STEERING COLUMN < SERVICE INFORMATION > • If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the length “L” of the column. If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assembly. Steering column length “L” • • • • A : 428 mm (16.85 in) B Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary. Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary. Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area. Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage. C WGIA0064E D • After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for proper operation. Tilt mechanism range (manual tilt) E : 3° per notch at 6 steps CAUTION: • Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal. F • After installation, check for smooth steering wheel rotation, without any catches or noise. • Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damaged, or if any scratches or coating separation is present on the shaft seal area. • The nut on the upper joint may not be reused. PS • During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 PS-13 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718395 CHECKING STEERING GEAR • • • • Check gear housing and boots for looseness and damage. Check gear housing and boots for fluid leakage. Refer to PS-6, "Checking Fluid Leakage". Check connection with steering column for looseness. Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to "Checking rack sliding force". • If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to PS-19, "Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force". CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE • Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage. CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT 1. Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface. • Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg-f, 11 lb-f) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement. Turn off ignition key while checking. Movement of gear housing 2. : ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary. CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature. Using a suitable spring gauge, pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". SST090B Revision: August 2007 PS-14 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718396 A B C D E F WGIA0155E 1. Steering gear assembly 2. Cotter pin 3. Gear housing mounting bracket 4. Gear housing insulator 5. Sleeve ⇐ Front REMOVAL H CAUTION: • The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. • Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. 1. Remove the two front wheels and tires using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pins and nuts, then disconnect the outer tie-rods using Tool. Tool number 3. PS I J K : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Disconnect the outer stabilizer bar ends from connecting rods using power tool. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation". L M WGIA0101E 4. N Remove the front stabilizer bar bracket rear bolts and loosen the front bolts. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation". O P WGIA0046E Revision: August 2007 PS-15 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Remove the lower joint pinch bolt. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation". WGIA0047E 6. 7. 8. Drain the power steering fluid. Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the steering gear. Reposition the stabilizer bar up and out of the way. 9. Remove the two gear housing bolts using power tool. Refer to "Removal and Installation". • Do not remove the gear housing mounting bracket from the gear housing. 10. Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly. WGIA0048E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • Use the specified tightening torque when installing the high-pressure tube and low-pressure hose connections. Refer to PS-24, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring. • The O-ring in low-pressure hose connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take care to install the proper O-ring. • Initially, tighten nut on outer tie-rod socket and knuckle arm to specification. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so that the cotter pin can be installed. CAUTION: Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N·m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). • Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to PS-6. SST824A Revision: August 2007 PS-16 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718397 A B C D E F PS H I J K L WGIA0175E 1. Steering gear housing 2. Gear housing fluid tubes 3. Boot clamp 4 Dust boot 5. Boot band 6. Tie-rod inner socket 7. Inner tie-rod 8. Outer tie-rod 9. Cotter pin ⇐ Front N O DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: • Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise. • Do not disassemble steering gear housing. Replace as an assembly. 1. Remove the outer tie-rods. 2. Remove the boot clamps and boot bands 3. Remove the inner tie-rods and dust boots. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Revision: August 2007 M PS-17 2008 Quest P POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-11. Blow dry the parts with compressed air. Boot • Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it. • Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak. If found, replace the steering gear as an assembly. Gear • Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it. Inner and Outer Tie-rods • Check ball joints for swinging force: Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force “A”. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". • Check ball joint for rotating torque: Outer tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque “B”. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". • Check ball joints for axial end play: Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play “C”. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". • Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod. SST468C ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Install the inner tie-rods. Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the outer tie-rod lock nut to specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to GI-42. WGIA0114E 3. Measure rack stroke. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". SST086BA Revision: August 2007 PS-18 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Before installing the dust boot, coat the contact surfaces between the boot and the inner tie-rod with grease. A B C SST967A D 5. Install the boot clamps and boot bands securely. E F PS H I J WGIA0117E Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force K INFOID:0000000001718398 DECREASE L Decrease rack sliding force as follows: 1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations counterclockwise. CAUTION: • Do not remove adjusting screw. • Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. 2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". NOTE: Steering gear must be replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). M N O P LGIA0018E 3. 4. 5. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service". If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear. Revision: August 2007 PS-19 2008 Quest POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE < SERVICE INFORMATION > INCREASE Increase rack sliding force as follows: 1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface. CAUTION: • Do not remove adjusting screw. • Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. WGIA0030E 2. Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to PS-25, "Steering Gear and Linkage". NOTE: Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N·m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). LGIA0018E 3. 4. 5. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to PS-14, "On-Vehicle Service". If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear. Revision: August 2007 PS-20 2008 Quest POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER STEERING OIL PUMP A On-Vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718399 CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM B Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure. 1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System". C Tool numbers 2. 3. : KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10), KV48102500 (J-33914) Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F). WARNING: Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine SST834-F is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. Oil pump maximum standard pressure 4. 5. D : 8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi) F PS H • If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK. • If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to PS-25, "Power Steering". If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure again. CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. • If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to PS-15, "Removal and Installation". • If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to PS-21, "Removal and Installation". After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Refer to PS-6, "Bleeding Hydraulic System". Removal and Installation E I J K L INFOID:0000000001718400 M REMOVAL N O P Revision: August 2007 PS-21 2008 Quest POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > WGIA0173E 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Joint 2. Washers 3. Power steering oil pump 4. Bracket 5. Pulley 6. Spring washer 7. Suction pipe 8. O-ring ⇐ Front Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Remove side splash guard. Remove heat insulator. Loosen adjustment screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt. Drain power steering fluid. Remove power steering oil pump union bolt and hose. Remove power steering oil pump bracket bolts. Remove power steering oil pump. SGIA0502E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten component connections to specification. Refer to PS-23, "Disassembly and Assembly". • Adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". • Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to PS-6. Revision: August 2007 PS-22 2008 Quest POWER STEERING OIL PUMP < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718401 A B C D E F WGIA0173E 1. Joint 2. Washers 3. Power steering oil pump 4. Bracket 5. Pulley 6. Spring washer 7. Suction pipe 8. O-ring ⇐ Front PS H INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY If the following conditions are found, replace as necessary. • Oil leakage from oil pump • Deformed or damaged pulley • Poor performance I DISASSEMBLY J CAUTION: Do not disassemble pump body. Replace as an assembly. NOTE: Mount the oil pump in a soft jawed vise as necessary. 1. Remove nut, washer and pulley from drive shaft. 2. Remove the following from the power steering oil pump: • Union bolt, washers, and joint. • Bolts and bracket. • Bolts and suction pipe. • Suction pipe O-ring. K L M ASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount oil pump in soft jawed vise as required. 1. Check if drive shaft assembly turns smoothly. 2. Install bracket to power steering oil pump, and tighten the two bracket bolts to specification. 3. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly, then tighten lock nut to specification. 4. Install washers and joint to power steering oil pump, then tighten union bolt to specification. NOTE: Do not reuse washers. 5. Apply a coat of NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install O-ring to suction pipe. Refer to MA-11. 6. Install suction pipe to power steering oil pump and tighten bolts to the specification. Revision: August 2007 PS-23 2008 Quest N O P HYDRAULIC LINE < SERVICE INFORMATION > HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718402 WGIA0174E 1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Return line 3. Power steering cooler 4. Power steering pressure switch 5. Power steering gear 6. Power steering oil pump 7. Washers 8. Tube 9. Hose D 3 - 8 mm (0.1 - 0.3 in) ⇐ Front REMOVAL Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components necessary to access the lines. CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Refer to PS-14 and PS-21 for tightening torques. NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. • Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification. CAUTION: Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose. • To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the notch of the power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power steering pump, then tighten the eye bolt to specification. • Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely. Revision: August 2007 PS-24 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A General Specification INFOID:0000000001718403 B Steering model Power steering Steering gear type PR26AD Steering overall gear ratio C 17.1:1 Turns of steering wheel (lock to lock) 3.0 Steering column type Collapsible, manual tilt D Steering Wheel INFOID:0000000001718404 Unit: mm (in) Steering wheel axial play E 0 (0) Steering wheel play 35 (1.38) or less F ± 2 (± 0.08) or less Movement of gear housing Steering Column INFOID:0000000001718405 Unit: mm (in) PS H I J WGIA0064E Applied model K All Steering column length “L” 428 (16.85) Power Steering INFOID:0000000001718406 Applied model All Steering gear type L M PR26AD Pump type F40 Steering wheel turning force (Measured at one full turn from the neutral position) 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less Fluid capacity (approximate) 1.0 (2 1/8 US pt, 1 3/4 Imp pt) 8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi) Oil pump maximum pressure N Steering Gear and Linkage O INFOID:0000000001718407 P Applied model All Steering gear type Revision: August 2007 PR26AD PS-25 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SST468C Tie-rod outer ball joint Tie-rod inner ball joint Swinging force at cotter pin hole “A” 6.47 - 64.63 N (0.66 - 6.59 kg-f, 1.46 - 14.53 lb-f) Rotating torque “B” 0.29 - 2.94 N·m (3.0 - 30.0 kg-cm, 2.6 - 26.0 in-lb) Axial end play “C” 0.4 mm (0.016 in) or less Swinging force* “A” * Measuring point: 172 mm (6.77 in) Axial end play “C” 5.69 - 45.60 N (0.58 - 4.65 kg-f, 1.28 - 10.25 lb-f) 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less WGIA0114E Tie-rod standard length “L” Rack sliding force Under normal operating oil pressure 204.7 mm (8.059 in) Range within ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) from the neutral position at rack speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s Average force 235 - 314 N (24 - 32 kg-f, 53 71 lb-f)* Minimum force 186 N ( 19 kg-f, 41.8 lb-f) SST086BA Rack stroke “S” 73.5 mm (2.89 in) *: Target force of 279.5 N (kg-f, lb-f) Revision: August 2007 PS-26 2008 Quest DRIVELINE/AXLE SECTION RAX REAR AXLE A B C RAX E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Rear Axle ........................................... 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 4 F NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 WHEEL HUB ...................................................... 5 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 G H SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................. 8 Wheel Bearing (Rear) ............................................... 8 I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RAX-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718138 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Rear Axle INFOID:0000000001718139 CAUTION: • When installing each rear suspension rubber component, the final fastener tightening must be carried out with the vehicle under unladen condition* with the tires on the ground. *Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions. • After installing suspension components, check the rear wheel alignment. • Do not jack up the vehicle at the rear suspension components. Revision: August 2007 RAX-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718140 B Tool name Description Power tool Loosening and removing bolts and nuts C RAX PBIC0190E E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RAX-3 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000001718141 RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BRAKES × × × × Symptom Vibration × × × Shimmy × × × Shudder × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (brakes) PB-4, "On-Vehicle Service" (parking brake) TIRES × × ROAD WHEEL RAX-5 Wheel bearing damage × Shake Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS REAR SUSPENSION RAX-5 Parts interference Noise Reference page WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-6 Improper installation, looseness Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: August 2007 RAX-4 2008 Quest WHEEL HUB < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHEEL HUB A On-Vehicle Inspection and Service INFOID:0000000001718142 Check the axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear, or damage. • Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. B C RAX E SMA525A REAR WHEEL BEARING • Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification as shown. Axial end play F : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less • Check that the wheel hub bearing operates smoothly. • Replace the wheel hub assembly if the axial end play exceeds specification, or if the wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: The wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace the wheel hub assembly. • Growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub bearing during operation. • Wheel hub bearing drags or turns roughly. G H LDIA0029E I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RAX-5 2008 Quest WHEEL HUB < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718143 Rear Wheel Hub Assembly WDIA0111E 1. Wheel nut 4. Rear ABS sensor 2. Brake rotor 3. Wheel hub assembly REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the rear wheel and tire using power tool. Reposition the cylinder body assembly out of the way using a suitable wire without disconnecting the hydraulic hose. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor". • The brake hose should not be disconnected from the cylinder body. • Suspend the cylinder body assembly using a suitable wire so that the brake hose is not stretched. CAUTION: • Do not depress brake pedal, piston will pop out with cylinder body removed. • Do not twist the brake hose. Remove the brake rotor. NOTE: The parking brake must be fully released. Remove the rear ABS sensor, then position it away from the hub assembly using wire. Refer to BRC-39 (TCS/ABS), BRC-85 (VDC/TCS/ABS). CAUTION: • Failure to remove the rear ABS sensor may result in damage to the sensor, causing the sensor to become inoperative. • Do not stretch the rear ABS sensor wire harness. Remove the wheel hub assembly from the knuckle using power tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks, and damage on the wheel hub assembly, replace if necessary. CAUTION: The wheel hub assembly does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace the wheel hub assembly. • Growling noise is emitted from the wheel hub bearing during operation. • Wheel hub bearing drags or turns roughly. Revision: August 2007 RAX-6 2008 Quest WHEEL HUB < SERVICE INFORMATION > INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check that the wheel bearing operates smoothly. • Check that the wheel hub bearing axial end play is within specification as shown. Axial end play B : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less C RAX LDIA0029E E F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RAX-7 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) INFOID:0000000001718144 Axial end play Revision: August 2007 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less RAX-8 2008 Quest BODY SECTION RF ROOF A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution ................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 4 Work Flow ................................................................. 4 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 SUNROOF ..........................................................10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 10 System Description ................................................. 10 CAN Communication System Description ...............12 Wiring Diagram - SROOF - ......................................12 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................13 Sunroof Motor Assembly Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................14 Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly .................................................................14 Work Flow ................................................................14 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................14 Work Support ...........................................................15 Data Monitor ............................................................15 Active Test ...............................................................15 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .....................15 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ....16 Sunroof Switch System Inspection ..........................16 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........................................16 Door Switch Check ..................................................18 Removal and Installation .........................................20 Fitting Adjustment ....................................................25 F G H RF J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718687 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution INFOID:0000000001718688 • • • • Disconnect both battery cables in advance. Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance. Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts. When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may get in the way with cloth. • When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape. • Keep removed parts protected with cloth. • If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it. • If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one. • Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque. • After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly. • Remove stains in the following way. Water-soluble stains: Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth. Oil stain: Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth. • Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine. Revision: August 2007 RF-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718689 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise B C D E SIIA0993E F Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit G H SIIA0994E RF J Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718690 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise K L M SIIA0995E N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-3 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow INFOID:0000000001718691 SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. • Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions. Hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. • Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. • Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. • Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. • Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often drought on by activity. • Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 RF-4 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist". 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS D After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool F (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanics stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken G or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H porarily. • Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. RF • Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". J REPAIR THE CAUSE • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in) 76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in) 76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTHTAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Revision: August 2007 RF-5 2008 Quest K L M N O P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718692 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 RF-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. A SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) B C D Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. E F SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the G noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder H 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- RF ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-7 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718693 LAIA0072E Revision: August 2007 RF-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H RF J K L M N O LAIA0071E P Revision: August 2007 RF-9 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718694 LIIA2450E 1. BCM M18, M19, M20 2. (view with instrument panel removed) Front pillar LH 3. Sunroof switch R6 4. Sunroof motor assembly harness connector R4 Sunroof motor 6. Front door switch LH B8 RH B108 5. System Description INFOID:0000000001718695 OUTLINE Electric sunroof system consists of • Front door switches • Sunroof switch • Sunroof motor assembly • BCM (body control module) BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch condition. OPERATION Sunroof can be opened or closed and tilted up or down with sunroof switch. Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70 and • through BCM terminal 69 • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 5. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 and • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. TILT UP OPERATION When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, ground is supplied Revision: August 2007 RF-10 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 4 • through sunroof switch terminal 4 • through sunroof switch terminal 2 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will tilt up. A B TILT DOWN OPERATION When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, ground is supplied • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 10 • through sunroof switch terminal 6 • through sunroof switch terminal 2 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will tilt down. C D E SLIDE OPEN OPERATION When the switch is operated for slide open, ground is supplied • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 9 • through sunroof switch terminal 3 • through sunroof switch terminal 2 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will slide open. F G H SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION When the switch is operated for slide close, ground is supplied • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 3 • through sunroof switch terminal 1 • through sunroof switch terminal 2 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 • through sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will slide closed. RF J K RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds • through BCM terminal 68 • to sunroof motor assembly terminal 1. When power is supplied, the sunroof can be operated. The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened. RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-14, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". L M MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE If the battery is disconnected, or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. After it has closed all the way, push and hold the switch forward (DOWN) position for more than 2 seconds to re-establish the motor preset position. The sunroof should now operate normally. INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION O P The CPU (central processing unit) of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor. When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operation, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position. • automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position • automatic close operation during retained power operation Revision: August 2007 N RF-11 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718696 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Wiring Diagram - SROOF - INFOID:0000000001718697 WIWA1770E Revision: August 2007 RF-12 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H RF J K L M N O WIWA1771E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718698 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Revision: August 2007 RF-13 2008 Quest P SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Sunroof Motor Assembly Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718699 LIIA2447E Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly Terminal Wire Color Item Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is 3 W/L P/B turned OFF* RAP signal Sunroof switch CLOSE signal O 0 Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in CLOSE position 0 Battery voltage Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT UP position Sunroof switch TILT UP signal Other than above 5 W/R 7 Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating Other than above 4 Voltage (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch ON 1 INFOID:0000000001718700 0 Battery voltage BAT power supply — Battery voltage B Ground — — 8 Y Ground signal — — 9 P Sunroof switch OPEN signal Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in OPEN position 0 Other than above 10 L/R Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal Battery voltage Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Other than above 0 Battery voltage *: When MODE1 is selected. For more details, refer to RF-15, "Work Support". Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. INFOID:0000000001718701 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description". According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause or replace of the malfunction. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3. Inspection End. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718702 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Revision: August 2007 RF-14 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION A B Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. C Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. D Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. Work Support INFOID:0000000001718703 Work item E Description RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Select RAP signal’s power supply period between the following three modes: • MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.) RETAINED PWR SET Data Monitor INFOID:0000000001718704 Monitored item Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. Active Test G H Description IGN ON SW F RF INFOID:0000000001718705 J Test item Description This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on CONSULT-III screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-III can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power operation. CONSULT-III might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-III screen when ignition switch is OFF. RETAINED PWR Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom K L M INFOID:0000000001718706 N Symptom Sunroof does not operate. Retained power operation does not operate properly. Revision: August 2007 Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page 1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit check RF-16 2. Sunroof switch system check RF-16 3. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-20 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting RF-15 2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check RF-16 3. Door switch check RF-18 4. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-20 RF-15 2008 Quest O P SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed position. 1. Initialization procedure check RF-10 2. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-20 Sunroof interruption detection does operate properly. 1. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-20 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718707 Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Sunroof Switch System Inspection INFOID:0000000001718708 1.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sunroof motor assembly and sunroof switch. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 3, 4, 8, 9 and 10 and sunroof switch connector R104 terminals 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6. 3-1 4-4 8-2 9-3 10 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1245E 2.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH Operate sunroof switch, and check continuity of the sunroof switch as follows. Terminals 1 3 2 4 6 Condition Continuity Sunroof switch in CLOSE position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in OPEN position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT UP position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Yes Other than above No WIIA0232E OK or NG OK >> Sunroof switch and harness are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". NG >> Replace sunroof switch. Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718709 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1, 5 and ground. Revision: August 2007 RF-16 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector Terminals (+) 1 R4 (–) Ground Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF B C When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 5 A Voltage (Approx.) Condition 0 WIIA0250E D Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. E 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal 7 and ground. 7 - Ground F : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". NG >> Repair or replace harness. H RF WIIA0251E 3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 - Ground 69 - Ground K : Battery voltage : Battery voltage L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". M WIIA0425E 4.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS N 1. 2. 3. O Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68, 69 and sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1, 5. 68 - 1 69 - 5 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. P Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68, 69 and ground. 68 - Ground 69 - Ground Revision: August 2007 : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. RF-17 LIIA1246E 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Refer to RF-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom". NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. Door Switch Check INFOID:0000000001718710 1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR" and "DOOR SW-AS") in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. Monitor item Condition DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS 1. 2. OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. Item RH Connector M18 Terminals (+) (–) 12 Ground LH M19 47 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Door open (switch closed) 0 Door closed (switch open) Battery voltage Door open (switch closed) 0 Door closed (switch open) Battery voltage WIIA0234E OK or NG OK >> Door switches are OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front door switches and BCM. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) (B) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 (A) terminals 12 and 47. Front door switch LH 1 - 47 Front door switch RH 1 - 12 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) (B) terminal 1 and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. WIIA1126E 3.CHECK DOOR SWITCHES Revision: August 2007 RF-18 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 1 and body ground part of front door switch. A Terminal 1 Body ground part of door switch Condition Continuity Door switch pushed No Door switch released Yes B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace malfunctioning front door switch. C WIIA0782E D 4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12, M19 terminal 47 and ground. 12 - Ground 47 - Ground E : Battery voltage : Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". G H WIIA0234E RF J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-19 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718711 WIIA1141E 1. Glass lid assembly 2. Wind deflector 3. Rear drain hoses 4. Shade stoppers 5. Sunroof frame assembly 6. Front drain hose 7. Front overhead console bracket 9. Side cover 10. Sunshade assembly 13. Sunroof rear bracket 8. 11. Sunroof motor assembly Sunroof bracket 12. Front rear overhead console bracket Sunroof bracket LH • After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and glass lid assembly alignment. Revision: August 2007 RF-20 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Handle glass lid assembly with care to avoid damage. • For easier installation, mark each point before removal. CAUTION: • Always work with a helper. • Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the sunroof motor assembly. • After installing the glass lid assembly, check gap adjustment to make sure there is no malfunction. SUNROOF UNIT B C Removal CAUTION: • Always work with a helper. • When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage. • After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid assembly, be sure to check gap adjustment to make sure there is no malfunction. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38. 2. Remove the glass lid assembly. Refer to "GLASS LID ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove front overhead console bracket. 4. Remove front rear overhead console bracket. 5. Disconnect the drain hoses. 6. Remove front sunroof frame assembly bolts. 7. Remove sunroof bracket RH/LH bolts. 8. Remove the side sunroof frame assembly bolts, then the sunroof unit. D E F G H Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. A Position the sunroof frame assembly and install the side bolts. Install the sunroof bracket RH/LH bolts. Install the front sunroof frame assembly bolts. Install the front rear overhead console bracket. Connect drain hoses. Install the front overhead console bracket. Install the glass lid assembly. Refer to "GLASS LID ASSEMBLY". Install headlining. Refer to EI-38. RF J K GLASS LID ASSEMBLY L Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Open sunroof shade and confirm glass lid assembly is closed. Remove the side covers RH/L/H. Remove the screws securing glass lid assembly to the sunroof unit. Lift and remove the glass lid assembly. M N O P WIIA0556E Installation 1. 2. 3. Position glass lid assembly to sunroof assembly. Install the glass lid assembly screws. First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid assembly to prevent movement while tightening other bolts. Adjust the sunroof glass. Refer to RF-25, "Fitting Adjustment". Revision: August 2007 RF-21 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIND DEFLECTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Open the sunroof. Remove screws from left and right sides of wind deflector holder. Remove the wind deflector from the sunroof frame assembly. PIIA3510E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SUNSHADE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the sunroof unit. Refer to "SUNROOF UNIT". Remove the shade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. Remove the shade assembly from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. SBT251A Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY Removal CAUTION: • When removing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure that the glass lid assembly is in the fully closed position. • Never run the removed sunroof motor assembly as a single unit. 1. Position the glass lid assembly in the fully closed position. 2. Remove the front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38. 3. Disconnect the harness connector (1). • ⇐ Vehicle front 4. Remove the sunroof motor assembly screws (2). WIIA0771E Installation CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 RF-22 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position. • ⇐: Vehicle front 1. Move the sunroof motor assembly (1) laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof frame assembly, and the mounting surface becomes parallel. 2. Secure the sunroof motor assembly (1) with screws (3). 3. Connect the harness connector (2). A B C D WIIA0772E E 4. 5. Install the roof console assembly. Refer to EI-38. Check sunroof unit for proper operation. F DRAIN HOSES G H RF J K WIIA1142E Removal L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-23 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the headlining. Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation". LIIA1563E 2. Check visually for proper connections, damage or deterioration. 3. Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration. 4. Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage. • If any damage is found, replace the drain hose. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY NOTE: Before replacing any suspect part, be sure it is the source of the noise being experienced. 1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required. 2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide then replace wire. Revision: August 2007 RF-24 2008 Quest SUNROOF < SERVICE INFORMATION > Fitting Adjustment INFOID:0000000001718712 A B C D E F G H WIIA0557E GAP AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT RF If any gap or height difference between glass lid assembly and roof is found, check glass lid assembly fit. Adjust the sunroof glass lid assembly as follows: 1. Open sunshade, tilt glass lid assembly up and remove side trim. 2. Loosen glass lid assembly screws (2 each on left and right sides), then tilt glass lid assembly down. NOTE: To prevent glass lid assembly from moving after adjustment, first gently tighten the glass lid assembly screw at left front, then right rear. 3. For gap adjustments: • Manually adjust glass lid assembly forward or rearward until gap becomes equal in distance between front and rear of roof panel edge. 4. For height adjustments: • Manually adjust glass lid assembly up or down from outside of vehicle until it is within the specification “A-A” as shown. 5. After gap/height adjustment, tilt glass lid assembly up and tighten all screws. 6. Tilt mechanism up and down several times to check that it operates smoothly. NOTE: After glass lid assembly gap or height adjustments are performed, always cover the entire surface of the roof with water to check for leaks. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RF-25 2008 Quest SUSPENSION SECTION RSU REAR SUSPENSION A B C D RSU CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................12 Inspection ................................................................12 Precaution ................................................................. 2 RADIUS ROD .................................................... 13 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................13 Inspection ................................................................13 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 FRONT LOWER LINK ....................................... 14 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5 Component ................................................................ 5 On-vehicle Service .................................................... 6 Rear Wheel Alignment .............................................. 6 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER ......................... 9 REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING ........ 15 H I Removal and Installation .........................................15 Inspection ................................................................16 J STABILIZER BAR ............................................. 17 Removal and Installation .........................................17 Inspection ................................................................17 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 18 SHOCK ABSORBER .........................................11 General Specification (Rear) ...................................18 Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) ..........................18 Ball Joint ..................................................................18 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ..................................19 SUSPENSION ARM ...........................................12 G Removal and Installation .........................................14 Inspection ................................................................14 Removal and Installation ........................................... 9 Removal and Installation ......................................... 11 Inspection ................................................................ 11 F K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution INFOID:0000000001718186 • When installing each rubber part, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil. *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. • Use flare nut wrench when removing or installing brake tubes. • After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment. • Do not jack up at the trailing arm and lateral link. • Always torque brake lines when installing. • Lock nuts are not reusable parts; always use new ones. When replacing, do not wipe the oil off of the new lock nut before tightening. Revision: August 2007 RSU-2 SBR686C 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718187 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Ball joint remover Removing suspension arm ball joint C D RSU NT146 Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718188 F Tool name Description 1. 2. Removing and installing brake piping a: 10 mm (0.39 in) Flare nut crowfoot Torque wrench G H I S-NT360 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts J K PBIC0190E L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-3 2008 Quest NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000001718189 × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × STEERING Shudder BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × BRAKES × WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × ROAD WHEEL × WT-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Shimmy TIRES × RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × AXLE × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVE SHAFT Vibration RSU-17 Symptom Stabilizer bar fatigue × RSU-6 × × Incorrect wheel alignment × × RSU-5 RSU-5 Parts interference × × Suspension looseness RSU-5 Bushing or mounting × Shake Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS RSU-16 RSU-11 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Noise Reference page Spring fatigue RSU-5 Improper installation, looseness Use the following chart to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable Revision: August 2007 RSU-4 2008 Quest REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY A Component INFOID:0000000001718190 B C D RSU F G H I J K L M N O P WEIA0110E 1. Rear suspension member 2. Stabilizer bar 3. Stabilizer bar bushing 4. Stabilizer bar clamp 5. Connecting rod 6. Member stay 7. Member stopper 8. Radius rod 9. Adjusting bolt cam Revision: August 2007 RSU-5 2008 Quest REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Front lower link 11. 12. Wheel hub and spindle assembly 13. Rear lower link 14. Suspension arm Bushing 15. Lower rubber seat 16. Coil spring 17. Upper rubber seat 18. Shock absorber 19. Bound bumper cover 20. Bound bumper 21. Lower bushing 22. Upper bracket 23. Upper bracket sleeve 24. Gasket 25. Upper bushing 26. Washer On-vehicle Service INFOID:0000000001718191 • Check suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or damage. Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. • Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". • Make sure that the suspension arm cotter pin is inserted. • Check the shock absorber for any oil leakage or other damage. • Check wheelarch height. Refer to RSU-19, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". • Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. LEIA0040E Rear Wheel Alignment INFOID:0000000001718192 Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION • Check tires for wear and for improper inflation. • Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Refer to WT-5, "Inspection". • Check rear wheel bearings for looseness. • Check rear suspension for looseness. • Check that rear shock absorber works properly. • Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to RSU-19, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. 2. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. • This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. • The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. • The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. • The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. • Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. • Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to RSU-18, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)". 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. • The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. • This may result in an ERROR. Revision: August 2007 RSU-6 2008 Quest REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional “Rolling Compensation” method to “compensate” the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this “Rolling Compensation” method. • Use the “Jacking Compensation” method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. • See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. A B CAMBER • Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with the following procedures. Camber : Refer to RSU-18, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)". C D • If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction. RSU F SFA948A G 1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate. NOTE: Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. H I J LEIA0041E K L M LEIA0009E 2. Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". N TOE-IN Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. WARNING: • Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. • Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). Revision: August 2007 RSU-7 2008 Quest O P REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. SFA614B 4. 5. 6. Measure distance “A” (rear side). Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. Measure distance “B” (front side). Total toe-in 7. : Refer to RSU-18, "Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)". SFA234AC Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts. NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. LEIA0041E LEIA0009E 8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". Revision: August 2007 RSU-8 2008 Quest REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718193 Rear Suspension Assembly B C D RSU F G H I J K L M N O P WEIA0110E 1. Rear suspension member 2. Stabilizer bar 3. Stabilizer bar bushing 4. Stabilizer bar clamp 5. Connecting rod 6. Member stay 7. Member stopper 8. Radius rod 9. Adjusting bolt cam Revision: August 2007 RSU-9 2008 Quest REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Front lower link 11. 12. Wheel hub and spindle assembly 13. Rear lower link 14. Suspension arm Bushing 15. Lower rubber seat 16. Coil spring 17. Upper rubber seat 18. Shock absorber 19. Bound bumper cover 20. Bound bumper 21. Lower bushing 22. Upper bracket 23. Upper bracket sleeve 24. Gasket 25. Upper bushing 26. Washer REMOVAL CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Removal and Installation". 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to PB-5, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool. Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor". • Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper. • Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out. • Do not pull or twist the brake hose. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. LEIA0042E 5. 6. 7. 8. Disconnect the LH and RH ABS sensor harness connectors, and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension member. Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool. Use a support jack or suitable tool, to support the rear suspension member. Remove the rear suspension member nuts using power tool. Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the support jack. LEIA0043E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 RSU-10 2008 Quest SHOCK ABSORBER < SERVICE INFORMATION > SHOCK ABSORBER A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718194 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. B Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, under the rear lower link to relieve the coil spring tension, then remove the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool. NOTE: The rear brake rotor has been removed for clarity only. Remove the transmission jack supporting the rear lower link. C D RSU LEIA0044E F 4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. G H I LEIA0042E INSTALLATION J Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". Inspection INFOID:0000000001718195 K • Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. • Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. • Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. L M N LEIA0040E O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-11 2008 Quest SUSPENSION ARM < SERVICE INFORMATION > SUSPENSION ARM Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718196 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the rear suspension member assembly using power tool. Refer to RSU-9, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the connecting rod upper joint from the suspension arm using power tool. Remove the suspension arm nuts and bolts on the suspension member side using power tool. Remove the suspension arm cotter pin and lock nut on the wheel hub and spindle assembly side using power tool. Disconnect the suspension arm from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: • Do not damage ball joint with Tool. • While using Tool, temporarily tighten the lock nut so as not to damage the ball joint stud threads. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". • After installing the suspension arm, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment". Inspection INFOID:0000000001718197 • Check suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and replace if necessary. • Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace suspension arm assembly if necessary. • Check ball joint. Replace suspension arm assembly if any of the following exists: - Ball stud is worn. - Joint is hard to swing. - Play in axial direction is excessive. • Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force “A” Turning force “B” Vertical end play “C” Revision: August 2007 SFA858A : Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint". : Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint". : Refer to RSU-18, "Ball Joint". RSU-12 2008 Quest RADIUS ROD < SERVICE INFORMATION > RADIUS ROD A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718198 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. B Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the radius rod. Disconnect the radius rod from the rear suspension member using power tool. C D RSU F LEIA0045E 4. Disconnect the radius rod nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool, then remove the radius rod. G H I LEIA0046E J INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". • After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment". Inspection K INFOID:0000000001718199 L • Check radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. M N O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-13 2008 Quest FRONT LOWER LINK < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT LOWER LINK Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718200 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the front lower link. Disconnect the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool. LEIA0044E 4. Remove the front lower link adjusting bolt using power tool. LEIA0041E 5. Disconnect the front lower link nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool, then remove front lower link. LEIA0047E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". • After installing the front lower link, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment". Inspection INFOID:0000000001718201 Check front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. Revision: August 2007 RSU-14 2008 Quest REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001718202 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. B Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to WT-6. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear lower link. Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to the rear suspension member, using power tool. C D RSU F LEIA0009E 4. Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool. G H I LEIA0048E J 5. 6. Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper rubber seat, coil spring and lower rubber seat from the rear lower link. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear suspension member using power tool, then remove the rear lower link. K L M LEIA0009E N INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-15 2008 Quest REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange part of bracket are attached as shown. • Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to vehicle front. • Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear lower link to install. • Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to lower side. • After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to RSU-6, "Rear Wheel Alignment". WEIA0043E Inspection INFOID:0000000001718203 Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary. Revision: August 2007 RSU-16 2008 Quest STABILIZER BAR < SERVICE INFORMATION > STABILIZER BAR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718204 REMOVAL 1. B Disconnect the stabilizer bar ends from the connecting rods using power tool. C D RSU LEIA0049E 2. 3. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps using power tool, and remove the stabilizer bar bushings. Remove the stabilizer bar. F G H LEIA0050E I INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to RSU-5, "Component". • Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamp so they are positioned inside of the crimp ring on the stabilizer bar. J K L WEIA0111E Inspection M INFOID:0000000001718205 N • Check stabilizer bar for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. • Check rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary. O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-17 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification (Rear) INFOID:0000000001718206 Suspension type Independent multi-link suspension Shock absorber type Double-acting hydraulic Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000001718207 United States and Canada Mexico Minimum −1° 3' (−1.05°) 0° 3' (0.05°) Nominal −0° 33′ (−0.55°) 0° 33′ (0.55°) Maximum -0° 3′ (-0.05°) 1° 3′ (1.05°) Minimum 1.6 (0.063) 1.6 (0.063) Nominal 3.2 (0.126) 3.2 (0.126) Maximum 4.8 (0.189) 4.8 (0.189) Minimum -2.0 (-0.079) -2.0 (-0.079) Nominal 0 (0) 0 (0) Maximum 2.0 (0.079) 2.0 (0.079) Minimum 0° 3′ 35" (0.06°) 0° 3′ 35" (0.06°) Nominal 0° 7′ 48" (0.13°) 0° 7′ 48" (0.13°) Maximum 0° 12′ 0" (0.20°) 0° 12′ 0" (0.20°) Market Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) SFA234AC Distance (“A” − “B”) mm (in) Total toe-in Difference between LH, RH Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Ball Joint INFOID:0000000001718208 SFA858A Swinging force “A” (measuring point: cotter pin hole of ball stud) Revision: August 2007 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f) RSU-18 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Turning torque “B” 0.49 - 3.43 N·m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb) Vertical end play “C” A 0 mm (0 in) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000001718209 B Unit: mm (in) C D RSU WEIA0030E Market F United States and Canada Mexico Front (Hf) 740 (29.13) 770 (30.31) Rear (Hr) 749 (29.49) 779 (30.67) G *: Fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 RSU-19 2008 Quest RESTRAINTS SECTION SB SEAT BELTS A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 Second Row Seat Belt .............................................. 4 Third Row Seat Belt .................................................. 6 Seat Belt Inspection .................................................. 9 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................... 2 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM ............................... 12 SEAT BELTS ....................................................... 3 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ..... 13 Front Seat Belt .......................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................13 Removal and Installation .........................................12 F G SB I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SB-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718408 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Seat Belt Service INFOID:0000000001718409 CAUTION: • Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes. • Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector. • After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". • Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly. • Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. • Never oil tongue and buckle. • If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt assembly. • If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. • When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). • The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. Revision: August 2007 SB-2 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SEAT BELTS A Front Seat Belt INFOID:0000000001718410 COMPONENTS B C D E F G SB I J K L M WHIA0309E 1. Center pillar upper trim 2. Seat belt height adjuster 3. Center pillar 4. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector 5. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly 6. Seat belt buckle 7. Center pillar lower trim 8. Seat belt anchor cover 9. Seat belt guide 10. Assist handle 11. Assist handle bolt covers O 12. Center pillar upper bolt cover P REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal CAUTION: • Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 SB-3 N 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Separate the seat belt guide from the center pillar. 3. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. • On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. WHIA0310E 4. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector. CAUTION: • For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. • Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. PHIA0341E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation". Remove the screws and seat cushion inner finisher. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. LHIA0033E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Second Row Seat Belt INFOID:0000000001718411 COMPONENTS Revision: August 2007 SB-4 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Second Row A B C D E F G SB I J K L WHIA0311E 1. Seat belt height adjuster 2. Seat belt guide 3. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly 4. Seat belt lower anchor 5. D-ring anchor 6. D-ring anchor bolt cover M N REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the seat belt guide bolt. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the assembly. Remove the height adjuster assembly. O P Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 SB-5 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the seat back recliner handle. Remove the screws and seat cushion finisher. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle. WHIA0312E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Third Row Seat Belt INFOID:0000000001718412 COMPONENTS Revision: August 2007 SB-6 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Third Row Outboard A B C D E F G SB I J K L LHIA0029E 1. D-ring mounting bracket 2. Retractor mounting bracket 3. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly 4. Seat belt lower anchor 5. D-ring anchor bolt cover 6. D-ring anchor M N O P Revision: August 2007 SB-7 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Third Row Center WHIA0313E REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OUTBOARD SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the upper anchor bolt cover. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolt and retractor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Lower the rear portion of the headliner. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and retractor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. 2. 3. Rotate third row seat assembly rearward to expose underside. Release seat cushion trim cover locking strip. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Seat belt buckle anchor bolt Revision: August 2007 : 49 N·m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb) SB-8 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Seat Belt Inspection INFOID:0000000001718413 A AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: • The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). • The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). • The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. • Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. • The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. c. C D E F G PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. B Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should SB sound for about seven seconds. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. I If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. J Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. K Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the L seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does M not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Revision: August 2007 SB-9 2008 Quest N O P SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. Revision: August 2007 SB-10 2008 Quest SEAT BELTS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G PHIA0257E 15 degrees or less tilt 35 degrees or more tilt : Belt can be pulled out. : Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. SB I If retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly. J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SB-11 2008 Quest LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718414 NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. Revision: August 2007 SB-12 2008 Quest TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT < SERVICE INFORMATION > TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001718415 NOTE: The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable. B C D E F G SB I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SB-13 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION SC STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 System Description ..................................................10 Wiring Diagram - START - .......................................11 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester .........................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................15 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 17 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 System Description ..................................................17 Wiring Diagram - CHARGE - ...................................18 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester .........................................................18 Removal and Installation .........................................23 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 BATTERY ............................................................ 4 How to Handle Battery .............................................. 4 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ........................................................... 6 Removal and Installation ........................................... 8 Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection...... 9 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 25 STARTING SYSTEM ..........................................10 Battery .....................................................................25 Starter ......................................................................25 Generator ................................................................25 F G H I J SC L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SC-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719014 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 SC-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719015 B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-48087) Battery Service Center Tests battery. For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin and Battery Service Center User Guide. C D E WKIA5280E Tests starting and charging systems. For operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. — (J-44373) Model 620 Starting/Charging system tester F G SEL403X H I Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001719016 J Tool number Tool name Description SC Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts L M PBIC0190E N O P Revision: August 2007 SC-3 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > BATTERY How to Handle Battery INFOID:0000000001719017 CAUTION: • If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. • After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. • Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. • The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. • The terminal connections should be clean and tight. • At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and “maintenance-free”. MEL040F • When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. MEL041F • Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. MEL042F CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Revision: August 2007 SC-4 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. • Add distilled water up to the MAX level. A B C MEL043F D Sulfation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulfation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been sulfated, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulfated batteries. A sulfated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. E F G WKIA4166E SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. 2. H Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. I J SC MEL042FA Hydrometer Temperature Correction L Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading 71 (160) 0.032 66 (150) 0.028 60 (140) 0.024 54 (130) 0.020 49 (120) 0.016 43 (110) 0.012 38 (100) 0.008 32 (90) 0.004 27 (80) 0 21 (70) −0.004 16 (60) −0.008 10 (50) −0.012 4 (40) −0.016 −1 (30) −0.020 Revision: August 2007 SC-5 M N O P 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading −7 (20) −0.024 −12 (10) −0.028 −18 (0) −0.032 Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition 1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged 1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged 1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged 1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged 1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged 1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: • Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery. • Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. • When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. • If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 55°C (131°F). Charging Rates Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hours 10 5 hours 5 10 hours Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. • If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced. Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester INFOID:0000000001719018 CAUTION: When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection. NOTE: • To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. • If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to remove the surface charge. • If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to make the selection. Revision: August 2007 SC-6 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair as necessary. 2. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends with ignition switch in “OFF” position. NOTE: The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the test. 3. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal. 4. The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys, select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER” key. A B C SEL404X D E F G SEL405X H 5. 6. 7. Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top case of the battery to be tested. NOTE: The battery rating will be either of the following: • CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.) • JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard. When using the Battery Tester use the CCA rating only. • The tester requires the CCA rating for the battery be entered exactly as it is written or stamped on the battery. • (U.S. market) Refer to the latest "Battery Testing" Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) for a chart which contains these ratings listed by vehicle. • You must not use the JIS rating. Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating. NOTE: The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA. Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART". I J SC WKIA4228E L M N O P SEL407X Revision: August 2007 SC-7 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. 9. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. NOTE: • If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press the “ENTER” button to make the selection. • When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”. • If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE & RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. SEL576X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item Service procedure GOOD BATTERY Battery is OK. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester". REPLACE BATTERY Replace battery. Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. BAD CELL-REPLACE Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. GOOD-RECHARGE Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. CHARGE & RETEST Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. NOTE: If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719019 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect negative battery terminal and positive battery terminal. CAUTION: When removing, remove negative battery terminal first. Remove battery frame mounting nuts and battery frame. Remove battery cover. Remove battery. LKIA0163E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing, install positive battery terminal first. Battery frame mounting nut Battery terminal nut : 4.5 N·m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb) : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to SC-9, "Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection". Revision: August 2007 SC-8 2008 Quest BATTERY < SERVICE INFORMATION > Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection INFOID:0000000003288861 A SYSTEM Engine Control Brake Control ITEM Reference Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EC-73 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EC-73 Idle Air Volume Learning EC-73 Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position BL-92 Automatic Back Door BL-137 Glasses, Window & Mirrors Power Window System Initialization GW-67 Roof Sunroof Memory Reset/Initialization RF-10 Seats Automatic Drive Positioner System Initialization Audio (Radio Preset) Audio-visual System C BRC-84 Power Sliding Door Body, Lock & Security B D E Refer to Owner’s Manual — Navi F AV-150 Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment DI-62 G H I J SC L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SC-9 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > STARTING SYSTEM System Description INFOID:0000000001719020 Power is supplied at all times: • to starter motor terminal B, and • through 40A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: • from ignition switch terminal ST • to IPDM E/R terminal 4. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: • through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 1. With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied: • through PNP switch terminal 5 • to IPDM E/R terminal 53. Ground is supplied at all times: • to IPDM E/R terminals 38, 50 and 60 • through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied: • from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R • to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. Revision: August 2007 SC-10 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - START - INFOID:0000000001719021 A B C D E F G H I J SC L M N O WKWA5124E Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester INFOID:0000000001719022 NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. Revision: August 2007 SC-11 2008 Quest P STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester". 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test. SEL408X 4. Start the engine. SEL409X 5. Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART". NOTE: • If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start, perform engine diagnosis. • For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2". SEL410X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW Service procedure Go to “WORK FLOW”, "WORK FLOW". CHARGE BATTERY Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester". REPLACE BATTERY Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester". If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. WORK FLOW Revision: August 2007 SC-12 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J SC L M N WKIA4532E *1 "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/ Starting/Charging System Tester" *4 "Check Magnetic Switch Circuit" *2 "Check Starter Motor Circuit" *3 "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1" P DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check Starter Motor Circuit 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR 1. 2. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Revision: August 2007 O SC-13 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Check that the starter motor connector F27 connection is clean and tight. 5. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B and ground using a digital circuit tester. Battery voltage should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for open circuit. WKIA0137E 2.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal B and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START : Less than 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity. WKIA0138E 3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to "WORK FLOW". NG >> Check harness between the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity. WKIA0139E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Magnetic Switch Circuit 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAGNETIC SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect starter motor connector F28. Revision: August 2007 SC-14 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S and ground using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START A : Battery voltage B OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following: • 40A fusible link (letter k, located in fuse and fusible link box) • 15A fuses [No. 34 and 41, located in the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)] • Ignition switch • Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)] • Starter relay request ON signal • Harness for open or short C WKIA5243E D E 2.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. F Connect starter motor connector F28. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal S and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. G Ignition switch in START : Less than 1V H OK or NG OK >> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to "WORK FLOW". NG >> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic switch for poor continuity. I WKIA5244E MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE Engine coolant temperature SC Voltage V −30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F) 8.4 −19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F) 8.9 −9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F) 9.3 More than 1°C (More than 34°F) 9.7 J L M Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001719023 REMOVAL 1. N Disconnect the negative battery terminal. O P Revision: August 2007 SC-15 2008 Quest STARTING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the starter insulator. WKIA1015E 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness. Disconnect the starter harness connectors. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. Remove the starter. WKIA1234E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 SC-16 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > CHARGING SYSTEM A System Description INFOID:0000000001719024 The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator. Power is supplied at all times to generator terminal S through: • 10A fuse (No. 26, located in the fuse and fusible link box). Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal S detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the 140A fusible link [letter a, located in the fusible link box (battery)]. Ground is supplied: • to generator terminal E • through body ground E116. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: • through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to combination meter terminal 38 for the charge warning lamp. Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of the combination meter through terminal L of the generator. With power and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated. B C D E F G H I J SC L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SC-17 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - CHARGE - INFOID:0000000001719025 WKWA4658E Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester INFOID:0000000001719026 NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. Revision: August 2007 SC-18 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/ Charging system tester. 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test. 4. Start engine. A B C SEL417X D 5. 6. 7. 8. Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: • If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display. • Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting, particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected. The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the DIODE/RIPPLE check. When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads. • Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster. • Headlamp high beam • Rear window defogger NOTE: Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads. E F G SEL418X H I J SC SEL419X 9. L Press “ENTER” to continue. M N SEL420X O P Revision: August 2007 SC-19 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press “ENTER” to restart the test. SEL421X 11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART". SEL422X 12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. 13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. SEL577X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL Service procedure Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result. NO CHARGING VOLTAGE LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to "WORK FLOW". HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result. EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED Replace the generator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED Go to "WORK FLOW". Revision: August 2007 SC-20 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WORK FLOW A B C D E F G H I J SC L M N WKIA4022E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 O Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit P 1.CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION Check to see if terminal “L” is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "L" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. Revision: August 2007 SC-21 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect F1 connector from generator. Apply ground to connector F1 terminal L with the ignition switch in the ON position. CHARGE lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> GO TO "WORK FLOW". NG >> Check the following. • 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)] • CHARGE lamp • Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse • Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator WKIA0142E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Battery Circuit 1.CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION Check to see if terminal "B" is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "B" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2.CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B and ground using a digital circuit tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. • 140A fusible link [letter a, located in fusible link box (battery)] • Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link WKIA1237E 3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector F2 terminal B and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. With engine running at idle and warm : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation". Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. WKIA1238E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Check Voltage Regulator Circuit Revision: August 2007 SC-22 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1.CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION A Check to see if terminal "S" is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal "S" connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. B 2.CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT C Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S and ground using a digital circuit tester. D Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. • 10A fuse (No. 26, located in fuse and fusible link box) • Harness for open or short between generator and fuse E F WKIA0145E 3.CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT G Check voltage between generator connector F1 terminal S and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. With engine running at idle and warm H : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-23, "Removal and Installation". Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. I J WKIA0146E MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SC The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while generator is operating: • Excessive voltage is produced. • No voltage is produced. Removal and Installation L INFOID:0000000001719027 M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-16. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12. Remove the idler pulley. Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools. N O P Revision: August 2007 SC-23 2008 Quest CHARGING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 6. Remove the generator lower bolt and nut, using power tools. 7. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. 8. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools. 9. Remove the generator. WKIA1239E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment". CAUTION: Be sure to tighten B terminal nut carefully. B terminal nut tightening torque Revision: August 2007 : 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb) SC-24 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Battery INFOID:0000000001719028 B Type Gr. 24 Capacity (20 HR) minimum V-AH 12-63 Cold cranking current A (For reference value) Starter INFOID:0000000001719029 D Mitsubishi M000T20771ZC Manufacturer Type E Reduction gear type System voltage 12V Terminal voltage No-load C 550 @ -18°C (0°F) F 11V Current 90A Max. Revolution 2,800 rpm Min. Minimum diameter of commutator 28.8 mm Minimum length of brush 7.0 mm Brush spring tension G H 18.3-24.8 N (1.87-2.53 kg, 4.11-5.58 lb) Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper 0.5-2.0 mm I Generator INFOID:0000000001719030 J TG15C025 Type Valeo Nominal rating 12V-130A Ground polarity Negative Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied) 1100 rpm SC L More than 27A/1,500 rpm More than 100A/2,500 rpm More than 120A/5,000 rpm Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied) Regulated output voltage 14.2 - 14.6V @ 25°C Minimum length of brush 4.4 mm (0.173 in) Brush spring pressure M 1.8 - 3.1 N (0.184 - 0.32 kg, 0.40 - 0.70 lbs) Slip ring minimum outer diameter N 12.0 mm (.47 in) Rotor (Field coil) resistance 2.3 ohms O P Revision: August 2007 SC-25 2008 Quest BODY SECTION SE SEAT A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 3 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) .........................................33 Symptom Chart ........................................................33 Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection ...............................35 Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection .....................36 Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection ....................37 Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .....................38 Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection .................39 Mirror Motor LH Circuit Inspection ...........................40 Mirror Motor RH Circuit Inspection ..........................42 Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection .............................43 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection .........................44 Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection ..................45 Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection ...................46 Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection ...............47 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Inspection .........................48 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Inspection ........................49 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection ..............................51 Reclining Switch Inspection .....................................52 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection ...................53 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection ....................54 Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection ....................56 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection ...............56 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Inspection ........................................58 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Inspection ........................................59 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection ................................................................61 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection ...................61 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection ......62 Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection .....................................................63 A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection ...........................................................................64 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection ..................65 UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection ........66 Removal and Installation .........................................67 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3 Precaution for Work .................................................. 3 PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 5 Work Flow ................................................................. 5 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 9 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ...................11 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location .......................................................................... 11 System Description ................................................. 11 CAN Communication System Description ............... 12 Schematic ............................................................... 13 Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - ..................................... 15 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 23 Driver Seat Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............................................................ 24 Terminal and Reference Value for Driver Seat Control Unit ............................................................. 24 Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..................................... 26 Terminal and Reference Value for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit ................................... 27 Work Flow ............................................................... 28 Preliminary Check ................................................... 29 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection .... 29 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ......... 29 CONSULT-III Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) ......... 30 POWER SEAT ................................................... 68 Schematic ................................................................68 Revision: August 2007 SE-1 2008 Quest F G H SE J K L M N O P Wiring Diagram - SEAT - ........................................ 69 Seat Cushion .......................................................... 84 Seat Cushion .......................................................... 85 Lifter Motor .............................................................. 85 Slide Motor and Slide Gear ..................................... 86 HEATED SEAT .................................................. 72 Description .............................................................. 72 Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ..................................... 73 FRONT SEAT .................................................... 75 REAR SEAT ...................................................... 88 Removal and Installation ........................................ 75 Seatback Assembly ................................................ 82 Seatback Assembly ................................................ 84 Revision: August 2007 SE-2 Removal and Installation ......................................... 88 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 89 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION A PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" B INFOID:0000000001718757 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000001718758 C D E F G H • When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. SE • When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it. • Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them. J • Replace a deformed or damaged clip. • If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one. • Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque. • After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally. K • Follow the steps below to clean components. - Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the fouled area. L Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. - Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe the fouled area. Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub with M a soft and dry cloth. • Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline. • For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. N O P Revision: August 2007 SE-3 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718759 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Locating the noise — (J-39570) Chassis ear SIIA0993E Repairing the cause of noise — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718760 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0191E Revision: August 2007 SE-4 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow A INFOID:0000000001718761 B C D E F SBT842 G Customer Interview Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H customer's comments; refer to SE-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. • The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain SE all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). • If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. • After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics.The noise characteristics J are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. • Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) K Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces =lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping • Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L dent on materials/often brought on by activity. • Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. • Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. N • Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. • Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) O Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. • Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. • Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. • Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great affect on noise level. Duplicate the Noise and Test Drive If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. Revision: August 2007 SE-5 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle "twist". 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. • Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. • If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. Check Related Service Bulletins After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. Locate the Noise and Identify the Root Cause 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: • removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. • tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. • feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. • placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. • looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to SE-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting". Repair the Cause • • - If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25mm(0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTHTAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials, not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. Revision: August 2007 SE-6 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. A B Confirm the Repair Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000001718762 C D Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. Instrument Panel E Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel F 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield G 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint H These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harSE ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. J Center Console Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. K L Doors Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Trunk SE-7 N O P Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Revision: August 2007 M 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. Sunroof/Headliner Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. Overhead Console (Front And Rear) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. Seats When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. Underhood Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: August 2007 SE-8 2008 Quest SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001718763 A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O LAIA0072E Revision: August 2007 SE-9 2008 Quest P SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > LAIA0071E Revision: August 2007 SE-10 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001718764 B C D E F G H SE LIIA2458E 1. 2. A. Fuse block (J/B) B. Automatic drive positioner control unit M41, M42 (view with instrument panel removed) Pedal adjusting motor E109, E110 3. A. A/T selector lever B. A/T device M34 J 4. 5. A. Door mirror LH D4, D13 Door mirror RH D107, D113 B. Door mirror remote control switch D10 C. Seat memory switch D5 D. Front door switch LH B8 A. Sliding motor LH B403 Reclining motor LH B404 Lifting motor (front) B405 Lifting motor (rear) B406 B. Power seat switch LH B407 C. Pedal adjusting switch B22 D. Driver seat control unit B401, B402 (front seat LH view) 6. A. A-pillar B. BCM M18, M19, M20 (view with instrument panel removed) K System Description L M INFOID:0000000001718765 N • Refer to Owner's Manual for Automatic Drive Positioner system operating instructions. • The settings (ON/OFF) of the automatic sliding seat (entry/exiting operation) at entry/exit can be changed as desired, using the display unit in the center of the instrument panel. The set content is transmitted by CAN communication, from display control unit to driver seat control unit. • Using CONSULT-Ill, the seat slide amount at entry/exit setting can be changed. O P Revision: August 2007 SE-11 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Function Description The front seat LH, pedal (accelerator, brake) and door mirrors move to the stored driving position by pushing seat memory switch (1 or 2). Memory operation Entry/exiting function Exiting operation At exit, the front seat LH moves backward. (exiting position) Entry operation At entry, the front seat LH returns from exiting position to the previous driving position before the exiting operation. Keyfob interlock operation Perform a linked memory operation by pressing keyfob unlock button. NOTE: • Disconnecting the battery erases the stored memory. • After connecting the battery, insert the key into the ignition cylinder, turn ignition switch ON→OFF and then operate the front door switch LH ON (open)→OFF (close)→ON (open)→OFF (close), the entry/exiting function becomes possible. • After exiting operation is carried out, return operation can be operated. Auto operation temporary stop conditions. When ignition switch is turned to START during seat memory switch operation and return operation, seat memory switch operation and return operation is stopped. Auto operation stop conditions. • When the vehicle speed becomes 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher (memory switch operation and entry operation). • When the setting switch, seat memory switch 1 or 2 are pressed. • When A/T selector lever is in any position other than P. • When the door mirror switch is operated (when ignition switch turned to ON). • When power seat switch LH turned ON. • When pedal adjusting switch turned ON. • When front seat sliding entry/exiting setting is OFF (entry/exiting operation). NOTE: During automatic operation, if the ignition switch is turned ON→START, the automatic operation is suspended. When the ignition switch returns to ON, it resumes. FAIL-SAFE MODE When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of front seat LH or pedals are detected for T2 or more, status is judged “Output error”. OPERATED PORTION T2 Seat sliding Approx. 0.1 sec. Seat reclining Same as above Seat lifting (Front) Same as above Seat lifting (Rear) Same as above Pedal adjust Same as above CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE The mode is cancelled when the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position from any other position. NOTE: The front seat LH position and pedal adjustment functions (see the following table) operate simultaneously in the order of priority. Priority Function Priority Function 1 Seat sliding, (door mirror LH/RH)* 4 Seat lifter-FR 2 Pedal 5 Seat lifter-RR 3 Seat reclining *: In conjunction with sliding the seat, the door mirrors are positioned. CAN Communication System Description INFOID:0000000001718766 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Revision: August 2007 SE-12 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718767 A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WIWA1791E Revision: August 2007 SE-13 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1792E Revision: August 2007 SE-14 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - INFOID:0000000001718768 A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WIWA1793E Revision: August 2007 SE-15 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1794E Revision: August 2007 SE-16 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WIWA1795E P Revision: August 2007 SE-17 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1796E Revision: August 2007 SE-18 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O ALJWA0040GB P Revision: August 2007 SE-19 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1798E Revision: August 2007 SE-20 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WIWA1799E P Revision: August 2007 SE-21 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALJWA0041GB Revision: August 2007 SE-22 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WIWA1801E P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718769 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Revision: August 2007 SE-23 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Driver Seat Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718770 LIIA2449E Terminal and Reference Value for Driver Seat Control Unit Terminal Wire Color 1 R UART LINE (RX) 3 L CAN-H 6 LG/R Ignition switch (START) Ignition switch (START position) 9 L Reclining sensor signal ON (seat reclining motor operation) Item Condition INFOID:0000000001718771 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4813E — — Battery voltage LIIA2339E Other than above 10 L/Y Rear lifting sensor signal 0 or 5 ON (rear lifting motor operation) SIIA0693J Other than above 11 12 R/B O/B Revision: August 2007 Sliding switch BACKWARD signal Reclining switch BACKWARD signal ON (seat sliding switch BACKWARD operation) Other than above ON (seat reclining switch BACKWARD operation) Other than above SE-24 0 or 5 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 13 L/B Front lifting switch DOWN signal ON (front lifting switch DOWN operation) 0 Other than above 14 G/W Rear lifting switch DOWN signal ON (rear lifting switch DOWN operation) Other than above 15 16 GR L Pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD signal ON (pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD operation) Other than above Seat sensor power — A Battery voltage B 0 Battery voltage C 0 Battery voltage D 5 E 17 R/W UART LINE (TX) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) F PIIA4814E 19 P 21 G/Y CAN-L A/T device (park position switch) signal — Selector lever in P position Selector lever in other than P position G — 0 H Battery voltage SE 24 Y/G Seat sliding sensor signal ON (seat sliding motor operation) J SIIA0691J Other than above K 0 or 5 L 25 R/L Front lifting sensor signal ON (front lifting motor operation) M SIIA0691J Other than above. 26 27 28 P/B G/B Y/B Seat sliding switch FORWARD signal Seat reclining switch FORWARD signal Front lifting switch UP signal ON (seat sliding switch FORWARD operation) Other than above ON (seat reclining switch FORWARD operation) Other than above ON (front lifting switch UP operation) Other than above 29 R/W Rear lifting switch UP signal ON (rear lifting switch UP operation) Other than above Revision: August 2007 SE-25 0 or 5 N 0 Battery voltage O 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 2008 Quest P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color 30 V Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ON (pedal adjusting switch FORWARD operation) 0 Item Pedal adjusting switch FORWARD signal Other than above Battery voltage 31 Y Sensor ground — 0 32 B Ground — 0 33 W Battery power supply (PTC) — Battery voltage 35 R Sliding motor FORWARD output signal Sliding switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Battery voltage 36 37 38 39 R/W Y/B L L/W 40 Y/R 42 G 44 45 48 G/W Y B Reclining motor FORWARD output signal Front lifting motor DOWN output signal Rear lifting motor UP output signal Rear lifting motor DOWN output signal Other than above Reclining switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above Front lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated) Other than above Rear lifting switch UP operation (Motor operated) Other than above Rear lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated) Other than above Battery power supply Sliding motor BACKWARD output signal Reclining motor BACKWARD output signal Front lifting motor UP output signal 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 — Battery voltage Sliding switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) Battery voltage Other than above Reclining switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above Front lifting switch UP operation (Motor operated) Other than above Ground — 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 0 Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000001718772 LIIA2449E Revision: August 2007 SE-26 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal and Reference Value for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit INFOID:0000000001718773 A Terminal Wire Color 2 L/R Item Changeover switch RH signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Changeover switch in RH position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in UP position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in LEFT position 0 B C 3 Y/B Mirror switch UP signal 4 G/B Mirror switch LEFT signal 5 R/B Mirror sensor (RH vertical) signal Mirror motor RH is UP or DOWN operation Changes between 3.5 (close to peak) 0.5 (close to valley) 6 L/Y Mirror sensor (LH vertical) signal Mirror motor LH is UP or DOWN operation Changes between 3.5 (close to peak) 0.5 (close to valley) 8 W/R Pedal sensor input signal 9 LG/B Seat memory switch 1 signal Other than above D 5 Pedal position front end 0.5 Pedal position rear end 4.5 Memory switch 1 ON 0 Memory switch 1 OFF 5 E F G H 10 R UART LINE (TX) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) SE PIIA4813E J 12 GR/L Seat memory switch indicator1 signal Memory switch 1 ON 1 Memory switch 1 OFF Battery voltage 13 Y Seat memory switch indicator2 signal Memory switch 2 ON 1 Memory switch 2 OFF Battery voltage 14 GR/R 15 V/W Mirror motor RH UP signal Mirror motor RH LEFT signal Mirror motor LH DOWN signal 16 O Mirror motor LH RIGHT signal Mirror motor RH UP operation Other than above Mirror motor RH LEFT operation Other than above Mirror motor LH DOWN operation Other than above Mirror motor LH RIGHT operation 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 L 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 1.7 - Battery voltage 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above 0 Changeover switch in LH position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in DOWN position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in RIGHT position 0 Other than above 5 Y/R Changeover switch LH signal 19 L/B Mirror switch DOWN signal 20 V Mirror switch RIGHT signal 21 L/W Mirror sensor (RH horizontal) signal Mirror motor RH is LEFT or RIGHT operation Changes between 3.5 (close to left edge) 0.5 (close to right edge) 22 G Mirror sensor (LH horizontal) signal Mirror motor LH is LEFT or RIGHT operation Changes between 3.5 (close to right edge) 0.5 (close to left edge) SE-27 M 0 18 Revision: August 2007 K N O P 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminal Wire Color 24 G/W Seat set switch signal 25 P/L Seat memory switch 2 signal 26 R/W UART LINE (RX) Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Set switch 1 ON 0 Set switch 1 OFF 5 Memory switch 2 ON 0 Memory switch 2 OFF 5 Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4814E Mirror motor RH DOWN signal 30 SB Mirror motor RH RIGHT signal 31 R/Y Mirror motor LH UP signal 32 BR Mirror motor LH LEFT signal 33 W/L Sensor power supply 34 BR/Y Battery power supply 37 G 39 W 40 B/W 41 V 45 48 G/O B Pedal adjusting motor FORWARD signal Mirror motor RH DOWN operation Other than above Mirror motor RH RIGHT operation Other than above Mirror motor LH UP operation Other than above Mirror motor LH LEFT operation Other than above 5. 6. 7. 8. 0 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 — 5 — Battery voltage Pedal adjusting motor FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above Battery voltage 0 Battery power supply — Battery voltage Ground — 0 — 0 Pedal adjusting motor BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) Battery voltage Sensor ground Pedal adjusting motor BACKWARD signal Other than above Ground — Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.7 - Battery voltage 0 0 INFOID:0000000001718774 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the system description. Refer to SE-11, "System Description". Perform the preliminary check. Refer to SE-29, "Preliminary Check". Check the self-diagnosis results using CONSULT-III. Refer to SE-30, "CONSULT-III Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)". Repair or replace depending on the self-diagnostic results. Based on the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to SE-33, "Symptom Chart". Does the automatic drive positioner system operate normally? If it is normal, GO TO 8. If it is not normal, GO TO 3. Inspection End. Revision: August 2007 SE-28 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001718775 A SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION The settings of the automatic drive positioner system can be changed using CONSULT-III and the display in the center of the instrument panel. B ×: Applicable –: Not applicable Setting item CONSULT–III (WORK SUPPORT) Content Sliding Front Seat When Entering/Exiting Vehicle Default setting Factory setting × × — — — — 40mm The distance at exiting operation can be selected from the following 3 modes. SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET Display unit 80mm — 150mm The seat sliding and return at entry/exit can be selected: ON (operated)–OFF (not operated) ON ON: Indicator lamp ON — × OFF OFF: Indicator lamp OFF × — C D E F Reset custom settings* Returns all settings to default. — Default: Setting button ON — — *: Setting of sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle is ON at factory-shipment. But if custom settings are reset, setting turns OFF. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718776 H Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" . Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718777 SE 1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check if any of the following fuses for the driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit are blown. Unit Power source G J Fuse No. Driver seat control unit START power supply 9 (10A) Driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit Battery power supply 17 (10A) Battery power supply m (40A) K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG3. L M 2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. N O Connector Terminals Power source Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) (+) (-) B402 33, 40 Ground Battery power supply Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage B401 6 Ground START power supply Ignition switch START Battery voltage P LIIA1897E OK or NG Revision: August 2007 SE-29 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the driver seat control unit connectors B401 terminal 32, B402 terminal 48 and ground. 32 - Ground 48 - Ground : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Driver seat control unit circuit check is OK. Check the automatic drive positioner control unit. GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4542E 4.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 34, 39 and ground. Connector Terminals Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage Ground Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage (+) (-) 34 39 M42 PIIA4543E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 5.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 40, 48 and ground. 40 - Ground 48 - Ground : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Automatic drive positioner control unit circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4544E CONSULT-III Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) INFOID:0000000001718778 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. AUTO DRIVE POS. diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the driver seat control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the driver seat control unit and received data is displayed. SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Revision: August 2007 Displays driver seat control unit self-diagnosis results. Displays driver seat control unit input/output data in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. SE-30 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > AUTO DRIVE POS. diagnostic mode Description ACTIVE TEST A Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ECU PART NUMBER Driver seat control unit part number can be read. B SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM LIST C CONSULT-III display Item Malfunction is detected when... Reference page CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] CAN communication Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. LAN-3 D SEAT SLIDE [B2112] Seat slide motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat slide is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-35 SE-43 E SEAT RECLINING [B2113] Seat reclining motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat reclining is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-36 SE-44 SEAT LIFTER FR [B2114] Seat lifting FR motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat lifting FR is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-37 SE-45 Seat lifting RR motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat lifting RR is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-38 SE-46 Pedal adjust motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if motor operations of seat pedal is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-39 SE-47 ADJ PEDAL SENSOR [B2120] Pedal adjust sensor When pedal adjust sensor detects 0.5V or lower, or 4.5V or higher, for 0.5 seconds or more. SE-47 DETENT SW [B2126] Park SW With the A/T selector lever in P position (park position switch OFF), if the vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher was input the park position switch input system is judged malfunctioning. SE-64 UART COMM [B2128] UART communication Malfunction is detected in UART communication. SE-66 SEAT LIFTER RR [B2115] ADJ PEDAL MOTOR [B2117] SE J DATA MONITOR CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR Monitor item [UNIT] Revision: August 2007 Contents [OK/NG] When CAN communication circuit is malfunctioning, it displays “NG”. SE-31 G H NOTE: • If park switch error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed when ignition switch turns ON. • The displays of CAN communication and detection switch display error detecting condition from memory erase to the present on “TIME”. - If error is detected in the past and present error is detected, “CRNT” is displayed. - If error is detected in the past and present error is not detected, “PAST” is displayed. - If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”. • Any items other than CAN communication and park switch count error detection frequency occurred after erase history to “1-127”. - If error was detected in the past, error detection frequency from memory erase to the present is displayed on “TIME”. - If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”. - Can clear the detected memory. Normal: Clear memory in normal condition, history is erased and nothing is displayed on “TIME”. Error: Clear memory in error condition, error is detected again and “1” is displayed on “TIME”. INITIAL DIAG F 2008 Quest K L M N O P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item [UNIT] Contents TRANSMIT DIAG [OK/UNKWN] BCM [OK/UNKWN] METER/M&A [OK/UNKWN] ECM [OK/UNKWN] Displays [OK/UNKWN] condition of the CAN communication judged by each signal input. SELECTIOM FROM MENU Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents SLIDE SW-FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed. SLIDE SW-RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW-FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW-RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed. LIFT FR SW-UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. LIFT FR SW-DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW-UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW-DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (UP) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-RH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-LH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (LEFT) signal s displayed. MIR CHNG SW-R “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CHNG SW-L “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to LEFT) signal is displayed. SET SW “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed. PEDAL SW-FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed. PEDAL SW-RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed. MEMORY SW 1 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed. MEMORY SW 2 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed. DETENT SW “ON/OFF” The A/Tselector lever position “OFF (P position)/ON (other than P position)” judged from the park switch signal is displayed. STARTER SW “ON/OFF” Ignition key switch ON (START, ON)/OFF (ignition switch IGN, ACC, or OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal is displayed. SLIDE PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves BACKWARD, the value increases. If it moves FORWARD, the value decreases. RECLN PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves BACKWARD, the value increases. If it moves FORWARD, the value decreases. LIFT FR PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. LIFT RR PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. MIR/SEN RH R-L “V” Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. MIR/SEN RH U-D “V” Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. MIR/SEN LH R-L “V” Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. Revision: August 2007 SE-32 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents A MIR/SEN LH U-D “V” Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. PEDAL SEN “V” The pedal position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed. B ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: During vehicle driving, do not perform active test. NOTE: If active test is performed, reset automatic drive positioner seat memory after performing work. DISPLAY ITEM LIST Test item C D Description SEAT SLIDE The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT RECLINING The reclining motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT LIFTER FR The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT LIFTER RR The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal. PEDAL MOTOR The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. MEMORY SW INDCTR The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal. MIRROR MOTOR RH The door mirror RH motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. MIRROR MOTOR LH The door mirrorLH motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) E F SE 1. Connect to CONSULT-III, and select “AUTO DRIVE POS” on the “SELECT DIAG SYSTEM” screen. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check U1000 displayed in self-diagnostic results. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001718780 Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Preliminary check A part of seat system does not operate (both automatically and manually). Revision: August 2007 H INFOID:0000000003303103 1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK Only setting change function cannot be set with display. G 2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-III (selfdiagnosis) Refer to page K L M SE-29 LAN-9, "SelfDiagnosis" 3. If the above systems are normal, check display system AV-150 1. Sliding motor circuit inspection SE-35 2. Reclining motor circuit inspection SE-36 3. Lifting motor (front) circuit inspection SE-37 4. Lifting motor (rear) circuit inspection SE-38 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 SE-33 J 2008 Quest N O P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate (both automatically and manually). A part of seat system does not operate (only automatic operation). A part of door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation). All of the automatic operations do not operate. A part of seat system does not operate (only manual operation). A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate (only manual operation). Automatic drive positioner system does not operate (only memory switch operation). Diagnoses/service procedure Refer to page 1. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection SE-39 2. Mirror motor LH circuit check SE-40 3. Mirror motor RH circuit check SE-42 4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. Sliding sensor circuit inspection SE-43 2. Reclining sensor circuit inspection SE-44 3. Lifting sensor (front) circuit inspection SE-45 4. Lifting sensor (rear) circuit inspection SE-46 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Mirror sensor LH circuit check SE-48 2. Mirror sensor RH circuit check SE-49 3. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. A/T device (park position switch) circuit inspection SE-64 2. UART communication line circuit inspection SE-66 3. Pedal adjusting sensor circuit inspection SE-47 4. If all the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. Sliding switch circuit inspection SE-51 2. Reclining switch circuit inspection SE-52 3. Lifting switch (front) circuit inspection SE-53 4. Lifting switch (rear) circuit inspection SE-54 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Pedal adjusting switch circuit inspection SE-56 2. Door mirror remote control switch (change over switch) circuit inspection SE-58 3. Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) switching circuit inspection SE-59 4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit SE-11 1. Seat memory switch circuit inspection SE-61 2. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Seat memory indicator lamp circuit inspection SE-62 Seat memory indicator lamps 1 and 2 do not illuminate. 2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit. SE-11 The entry/exiting does not operate when door is opened and closed. (entry/exiting operates with key switch) 1. Front door switch circuit inspection SE-65 Door mirror system does not operate (only manual operation). 1. Door mirror remote control switch ground circuit inspection SE-61 Door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation). 1. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit inspection SE-63 Seat system does not operate (only manual operation). 1. Power seat switch ground circuit inspection SE-56 Revision: August 2007 2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the BCM. SE-34 BCS-18 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Symptom Reverse tilt mirrors do not operate. Diagnoses/service procedure Refer to page 1. Door mirror remote control switch is not in L or R position. — 2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-III (selfdiagnosis) LAN-9, "SelfDiagnosis" 3. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit inspection Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection A B SE-63 INFOID:0000000001718781 C Check the following. • Operation malfunction caused by sliding rail deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials • Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the sliding motor LH or sliding rail connector rod • Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. D 1.CHECK SEAT SLIDING MECHANISM E F 2.CHECK FUNCTION G With CONSULT-III Check operation with “SEAT SLIDE” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item SEAT SLIDE H Description The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Sliding motor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. SE J 3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. 35 - 4 42 - 6 4. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 terminals 35, 42 and sliding motor connector B403 terminals 4, 6. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 terminals 35, 42 and ground. 35 - Ground 42 - Ground L M LIIA0696E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. O OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. P 4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 N SE-35 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Connect the driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) 35 B402 Ground 42 Battery voltage Other than above 0 Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) PIIA4801E Battery voltage Other than above 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-75. NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75. Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718782 1.CHECK SEAT RECLINING MECHANISM Check the following. • Operation malfunction caused by an interference with the center pillar or center console • Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check operation with “SEAT RECLINING” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item Description SEAT RECLINING The reclining motor LH is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Reclining motor LH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 (A) terminals 36, 44 and reclining motor LH connector B404 (B) terminals 3, 4. 36 - 4 44 - 3 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 (A) terminals 36, 44 and ground. 36 - Ground 44 - Ground LIIA2460E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. Revision: August 2007 SE-36 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. A Connect the driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) 36 B402 Ground 44 B C Battery voltage D Other than above 0 Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) PIIA4802E Battery voltage Other than above E 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-75. NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75. Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection F INFOID:0000000001718783 G 1.CHECK FRONT END SEAT LIFTING MECHANISM Check the following. • Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials • Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (front) or lead screws • Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER FR” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item Description SEAT LIFTER FR The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal. 4. M N Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 terminals 37, 45 and lifting motor (front) connector B405 terminals 4, 6. O P : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 terminals 37, 45 and ground. Revision: August 2007 J L 3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 37 - 6 45 - 4 SE K Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Lifting motor (front) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. H SE-37 LIIA0698E 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 37 - Ground 45 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) Condition (-) Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) 37 B402 Ground 45 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery voltage Other than above Llifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) 0 PIIA4805E Battery voltage Other than above 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-75. NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75. Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718784 1.CHECK REAR SEAT LIFTING MECHANISM Check the following. • Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials • Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (rear) or lead screws • Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER RR” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item SEAT LIFTER RR Description The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Lifting motor (rear) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-38 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). 3. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B402 terminals 38, 39 and lifting motor (rear) connector B406 terminals 4, 6. 38 - 6 39 - 4 4. A B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit B402 terminals 38, 39 and ground. 38 - Ground 39 - Ground C LIIA0699E D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E 4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL F 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) 38 B402 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) Ground 39 G H Battery voltage SE Other than above 0 PIIA4804E Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) Battery voltage Other than above J 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-75. NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to SE-75. K Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718785 L Check the following. • Operation malfunction caused by pedal adjusting mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials • Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. M 1.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MECHANISM 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check operation with “ADJ PEDAL MOTOR” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item ADJ PEDAL MOTOR Description The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. SE-39 O P Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. Revision: August 2007 N 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting motor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 37, 45 and pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 4, 5. 37 - 5 45 - 4 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 37, 45 and ground. 37 - Ground 45 - Ground LIIA0700E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 37 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) Battery voltage PIIA4806E M42 Ground 45 Other than above 0 Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Battery voltage Other than above 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to SE-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Mirror Motor LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718786 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH MECHANISM Check the following items. Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in the ACTIVE TEST. Revision: August 2007 SE-40 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test item Description MIRROR MOTOR LH A The mirror motor LH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. B Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Mirror motor LH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. C 3.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR LH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 16, 31, 32 and door mirror LH connector D13 terminals 9, 10, 11. E F 16 - 11 31 - 10 32 - 9 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G LIIA0701E 4. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 16, 31, 32 and ground. 16 - Ground 31 - Ground 32 - Ground H : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. SE OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J 4.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. K Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 10 D13 9 11 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Mirror motor is operated UP 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above Ground Mirror motor is operated LEFT M 0 N LIIA0703E 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above Mirror motor is operated DOWN or RIGHT L 0 O 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above P 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: August 2007 SE-41 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Mirror Motor RH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718787 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH MECHANISM Check the following items. Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. 2.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” in the ACTIVE TEST. Test item Description MIRROR MOTOR RH The mirror motor RH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Mirror motor RH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH connector. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 14, 15, 30 and door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 9, 10, 11. 14 - 10 15 - 9 30 - 11 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. LIIA0704E 4. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 14, 15, 30 and ground. 14 - Ground 15 - Ground 30 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. LIIA0705E Revision: August 2007 SE-42 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Connector Terminals (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Mirror motor is operated UP 1.7 - Battery voltage (-) 10 Other than above D113 9 Ground B 0 Mirror motor is operated LEFT 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above C 0 Mirror motor is operated DOWN or RIGHT 11 A 1.7 - Battery voltage Other than above D 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror motor RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection E INFOID:0000000001718788 1.CHECK FUNCTION F G With CONSULT-III Check operation with “SLIDE PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. H Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] SLIDE PULSE 1. 2. — Contents The seat sliding position (pulse) judged from the sliding sensor signal is displayed SE Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. J K Connector B401 Terminals (+) (-) 24 Ground Condition Signal L M Sliding motor operation PIIA4556E N SIIA0691J OK or NG OK >> Sliding sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. O 2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-43 P 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding motor LH connector. 2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 16, 24, 31 and sliding motor B403 terminals 1, 2, 3. 16 - 3 24 - 2 31 - 1 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit B401 terminals 16, 24, 31 and ground. 16 - Ground 24 - Ground 31 - Ground LIIA0706E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace sliding motor. Refer to SE-75. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718789 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check operation with “RECLN PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] RECLN PULSE 1. 2. — Contents The seat reclining position (pulse) judged from the reclining sensor is displayed Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector B401 Terminals (+) (-) 9 Ground Condition Signal Reclining motor operation PIIA4559E LIIA2339E OK or NG OK >> Reclining sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-44 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. 2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 9, 31 and reclining motor LH connector B404 terminals 1, 2. 9-2 31 - 1 3. A B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 9, 31 and ground. 9 - Ground 31 - Ground C LIIA2461E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. D OK or NG OK >> Replace reclining motor. Refer to SE-75. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718790 F 1.CHECK FUNCTION G With CONSULT-III Check operation with “LIFT FR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. H Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] LIFT FR PULSE 1. 2. — Contents The front lifting position (pulse) judged from the lifting sensor (front) is displayed SE Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (+) (-) J K Condition Signal L B401 25 Ground Lifting motor (front) operation PIIA4561E M N SIIA0691J OK or NG OK >> Front lifting sensor is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. O 2.CHECK FRONT LIFTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY P Revision: August 2007 SE-45 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). 2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 16, 25, 31 and lifting motor (front) connector B405 terminals 1, 2, 3. 16 - 3 25 - 2 31 - 1 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 16, 25, 31 and ground. 16 - Ground 25 - Ground 31 - Ground LIIA0708E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-75. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718791 1.CHECK REAR END LIFTING SENSOR INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-III Check operation with “LIFT RR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] LIFT RR PULSE 1. 2. — Contents The rear lifting position (pulse) judged from the lifting sensor (rear) is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector B401 Terminals (+) (-) 10 Ground Condition Signal Lifting motor (rear) operation PIIA4563E SIIA0691J OK or NG OK >> Rear lifting sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR LIFTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-46 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). 2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 10, 16, 31 and lifting motor (rear) connector B406 terminals 1, 2, 3. 10 - 2 16 - 3 31 - 1 3. A B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 10, 16, 31 and ground. C LIIA0709E D 10 - Ground 16 - Ground 31 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. E OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-75. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection F INFOID:0000000001718792 G 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Operate the pedal adjusting switch with “PEDAL SEN” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the voltage changes. Contents SE The pedal adjusting position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed. J Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] PEDAL SEN 1. 2. “V” H Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. K L Connector M41 Terminals (+) 8 (-) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pedal front end position 0.5 Pedal back end position 4.5 M PIIA4569E OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. N O 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY P Revision: August 2007 SE-47 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting sensor. 2. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner connector M41, M42 terminals 8, 33, 41 and pedal adjusting sensor connector E110 terminals 1, 2, 3. 8-2 33 - 1 41 - 3 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41, M42 terminals 8, 33, 41 and ground. 8 - Ground 33 - Ground 41 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace pedal adjusting motor. Refer to SE-67, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0710E Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718793 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION Check the following items. Operation malfunction in memory control NOTE: If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. 2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR INSPECTION With CONSULT-III Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SEN LH R-L, MIR/SEN LH U-D" in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] 1. 2. Contents MIR/SEN LH R-L “V” Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. MIR/SEN LH U-D “V” Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 7 D4 Ground 6 Revision: August 2007 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) When motor is operated LEFT or RIGHT Changes between 3.5 (close to right edge) – 0.5 (close to left edge) When motor is operated UP or DOWN Changes between 3.5 (close to peak) – 0.5 (close to valley) SE-48 LIIA1616E 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Mirror sensor LH is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. A 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror LH connector D2 terminals 5, 8. C D 33 - 5 41 - 8 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. E Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 - Ground 41 - Ground LIIA1617E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 6, 22 and door mirror LH connector D4 terminals 6, 7. 6-6 22 - 7 2. H SE : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. J Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 6, 22 and ground. K 6 - Ground 22 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1618E L OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Inspection M INFOID:0000000001718794 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION N Check the following items. Operation malfunction in memory control NOTE: If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. 2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR INSPECTION With CONSULT-III Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SEN RH R-L, MIR/SEN RH U-D" in the DATA MONITOR. Revision: August 2007 SE-49 2008 Quest O P AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] 1. 2. Contents MIR/SEN RH R-L “V” Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. MIR/SEN RH U-D “V” Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 7 D107 Ground 6 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) When motor is operated LEFT or RIGHT Changes between 3.5 (close to left edge) – 0.5 (close to right edge) When motor is operated UP or DOWN Changes between 3.5 (close to peak) – 0.5 (close to valley) LIIA0714E OK or NG OK >> Mirror sensor RH is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 5, 8. 33 - 5 41 - 8 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 - Ground 41 - Ground LIIA0715E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 5, 21 and door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 6, 7. 5-6 21 - 7 2. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 5, 21 and ground. 5 - Ground 21 - Ground Revision: August 2007 : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. SE-50 LIIA0716E 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-93, "Door Mirror Assembly". NG >> Repair or replace harness. Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection A INFOID:0000000001718795 B 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III With “SLIDE SW-FR, SLIDE SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the sliding switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] D Contents SLIDE SW-FR "ON/OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed. SLIDE SW-RR "ON/OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed. E F Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminal (+) (-) 11 B401 Ground 26 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) 0 Other than above Battery voltage Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above G H SE PIIA4577E J 0 Battery voltage K OK or NG OK >> Sliding switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. L 2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and power seat switch LH connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 11, 26 and power seat switch LH connector B407 terminals 1, 7. 11 - 7 26 - 1 3. M N : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 11, 26 and ground. 11 - Ground 26 - Ground O LIIA0717E P : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH Revision: August 2007 C SE-51 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows. Terminal Condition 7 3 1 Continuity Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No LIIA2193E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75. Reclining Switch Inspection INFOID:0000000001718796 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III With “RECLN SW-FR, RECLN SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the reclining switch to check ON/ OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] 1. 2. Contents RECLN SW-FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW-RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 12 B401 Ground 27 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) 0 Other than above Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above Battery voltage PIIA4580E 0 Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Reclining switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-52 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. 2. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 12, 27 and power seat switch LH connector B407 terminals 9, 10. 12 - 9 27 - 10 3. A B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 12, 27 and ground. 12 - Ground 27 - Ground C LIIA0719E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E 3.RECLINING SWITCH INSPECTION F Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows. G Terminal 9 3 10 Condition Continuity Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No H SE LIIA2194E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75. J Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718797 K With CONSULT-III With “LIFT FR SW-UP, LIFT FR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the lifting switch (front) to check ON/OFF operation. L 1.CHECK FUNCTION M Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents LIFT FR SW-DN "ON/OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW-UP "ON/OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. N O Without CONSULT-III P Revision: August 2007 SE-53 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) 13 B401 Ground 28 0 Other than above Battery voltage PIIA4583E Lifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) 0 Other than above Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Lifting switch (front) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 13, 28 and power seat switch LH connector B407 terminals 5, 6. 13 - 5 28 - 6 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 13, 28 and ground 13 - Ground 28 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0721E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows. Terminals Condition 5 3 6 Continuity Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) Yes Other than above No Lifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) Yes Other than above No LIIA2195E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75. Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718798 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 SE-54 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > With “LIFT RR SW-UP, LIFT RR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the rear lifting switch to check ON/ OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. B LIFT RR SW-UP LIFT RR SW-DN “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. C D Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 14 B401 Ground 29 A Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) 0 Other than above F G Battery voltage PIIA4586E Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) Other than above E 0 H Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Rear lifting switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. SE 2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 14 - 8 29 - 2 3. J Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 14, 29 and power seat switch connector B407 terminals 2, 8. K : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. L Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 14, 29 and ground. M 14 - Ground 29 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0723E N OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. O 3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) P Revision: August 2007 SE-55 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between power seat switch LH terminals as follows. Terminals Condition 8 3 2 Continuity Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) Yes Other than above No Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) Yes Other than above No LIIA2196E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-75. Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000001718799 1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between power seat switch LH connector B407 terminal 3 and ground. 3 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0725E Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718800 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III With “PEDAL SW-FR, PEDAL SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the pedal adjusting switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] 1. 2. Contents PEDAL SW-FR “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed. PEDAL SW-RR “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. PIIA4591E Revision: August 2007 SE-56 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals Connector (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACKWARD operation) 0 (-) 15 B401 Ground 30 Other than above B Battery voltage C Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above A 0 D Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. E 2.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and pedal adjusting switch. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 15, 30 and pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminals 2, 3. 15 - 3 30 - 2 3. F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 15, 30 and ground. 15 - Ground 30 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0726E SE OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J 3.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH K Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch terminals as follows. Terminals Condition 2 4 3 L Continuity Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No M N LIIA0727E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace pedal adjusting switch. O 4.CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT P Revision: August 2007 SE-57 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector B22 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0728E Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718801 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW-R” or “MIR CHNG SW-L" in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] 1. 2. Contents MIR CHNG SW-R “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CHNG SW-L “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (switching to LEFT) signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-III Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) 2 M41 Ground 18 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Changeover switch RIGHT position 0 Other than above 5 Changeover switch LEFT position 0 Other than above 5 PIIA4767E OK or NG OK >> Door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch) is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch . Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 (A) terminals 2, 18 and door mirror remote control switch connector D10 (B) terminals 5, 6. 2-5 18 - 6 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 (A) terminals 2, 18 and ground. Revision: August 2007 SE-58 LIIA2197E 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2 - Ground 18 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. B 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH) C Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows. D Terminals Condition 5 7 6 Continuity Changeover switch RIGHT position Yes Other than above No Changeover switch LEFT position Yes Other than above No E F LIIA2198E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. G Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718802 H 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) SIGNAL SE With CONSULT-III Check the operation on “MIR CON SW-UP/DN” and “MIR CON SW-RH/LH” in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (UP) signal is displayed. “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-RH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-LH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control switch (LEFT) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW-UP MIR CON SW-DN J Contents K L M N Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC. 2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (+) (-) O Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition P PIIA4771E Revision: August 2007 SE-59 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3 4 M41 Ground 19 20 Mirror switch UP operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch LEFT operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch DOWN operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch RIGHT operation 0 Other than above 5 OK or NG OK >> Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 (A) terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and door mirror remote control switch connector D10 (B) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4. 3-2 4-4 19 - 1 20 - 3 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. LIIA2199E Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 (A) terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and ground. 3 - Ground 4 - Ground 19 - Ground 20 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows. Terminals 3 4 7 2 1 Condition Continuity Mirror switch RIGHT operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch LEFT operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch UP operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch DOWN operation Yes Other than above No LIIA2200E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Revision: August 2007 SE-60 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718803 A 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminal 7 and ground. B C 7 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D LIIA2201E 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH) Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals as follows. Terminals Condition 5 7 6 E F Continuity Changeover switch RIGHT position Yes Other than above No Changeover switch LEFT position Yes Other than above No G H LIIA2198E SE OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. J Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718804 1.CHECK FUNCTION K With CONSULT-III With “SET SW, MEMORY SW 1, MEMORY SW 2” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the switch to check ON/ OFF operation. L Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents MEMORY SW 1 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed. MEMORY SW 2 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed. “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed. SET SW M N O Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Seat memory switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. P 2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH Revision: August 2007 SE-61 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect seat memory switch. 3. Operate the setting switch and seat memory switch. 4. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals as follows. Terminal Condition 1 2 4 3 Continuity Memory switch 1: ON Yes Memory switch 1: OFF No Memory switch 2: ON Yes Memory switch 2: OFF No Set switch: ON Yes Set switch: OFF No PIIA4575E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 9, 24, 25 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 1, 2, 3. 9-1 24 - 3 25 - 2 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 9, 24, 25 and ground. 9 - Ground 24 - Ground 25 - Ground PIIA4576E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between seat memory switch D5 terminal 4 and ground. 4 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4821E Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718805 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III With “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in ACTIVE TEST, check operation. Revision: August 2007 SE-62 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Test item Description MEMORY SW INDCTR A The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal. B Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Seat memory switch indicator lamp circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. C 2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch. Check voltage between seat memory switch connector D5 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground E : Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G PIIA4595E 3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 12 - 6 13 - 7 3. H Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 6, 7. SE : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. J Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and ground. K 12 - Ground 13 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0735E L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M 4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR SIGNAL Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M41 terminals 12, 13 and ground. 12 - Ground 13 - Ground N : Battery voltage : Battery voltage O OK or NG OK >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. NG >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation". P PIIA4597E Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection INFOID:0000000001718806 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY Revision: August 2007 SE-63 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror (LH and RH). 2. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror LH connector D4 LH, D107 RH terminals 5, 8. 33 - 5 41 - 8 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 - Ground 41 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0736E 2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminal 33 and ground. 33 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. LIIA1136E 3.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M42 terminal 41 and ground. 41 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. LIIA1135E A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718807 1.CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-III Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF. Revision: August 2007 SE-64 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DETENT SW Contents A The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other than P position (ON)” judged from the park position switch signal is displayed. “ON/OFF” B Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> A/T device (park position switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. C D 2.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit. Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) connector M34 (A) terminal 7 and driver seat control unit connector B401 (B) terminal 21. 7 - 21 4. E F : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) connector M34 (A) terminal 7 and ground. 7 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. G LIIA2202E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H SE 3.CHECK A/T DEVICE (PARK POSITION SWITCH) Check continuity between A/T device (park position switch) terminals as follows. Terminals 6 Condition 7 J Continuity P position Yes Other than P position No K L OK or NG OK >> A/T device is OK. NG >> Replace A/T device. LIIA2203E Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718808 1.CHECK FUNCTION N With CONSULT-III Touch “DOOR SW DR” on the DATA MONITOR, check ON/OFF operation when the front door is open and closed. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DOOR SW DR “ON/OFF” O Contents P Door open (ON)/door closed (OFF) status judged from the front door switch is displayed. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Front door switch LH circuit is OK. Revision: August 2007 M SE-65 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door switch LH. Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal and ground part of door switch as follows. Terminals 1 Condition Ground Continuity With the front door switch LH pressed No With the front door switch LH released Yes WIIA0782E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace front door switch LH. 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 47 and front door switch LH connector B8 (B) terminal 1. 47 - 1 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 (A) terminal 47 and ground. 47 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Front door switch LH circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2489E UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001718809 1.CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector B401 Terminals (+) 17 (-) Ground Condition Signal Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4599E PIIA4814E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. • When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace driver seat control unit. • When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace automatic driver seat control unit. Revision: August 2007 SE-66 2008 Quest AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2.CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 2 A Check signal between automatic drive positioner control unit connector ground, with oscilloscope. B Connector M41 Terminals (+) 10 (-) Ground Condition Signal C Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) D PIIA4816E E PIIA4813E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. • When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace automatic drive positioner control unit. • When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace driver seat control unit. F G 3.CHECK UART LINE HARNESS 1. 2. 1 - 10 17 - 26 3. H Disconnect driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 1, 17 and automatic drive positioner connector M41 terminals 10, 26. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector B401 terminals 1, 17 and ground. 1 - Ground 17 - Ground SE J K PIIA4598E : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M 4.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Does the automatic drive positioner operate when the driver seat control unit is exchanged? N OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. O Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718810 Refer to ACC-3 and BR-5. Revision: August 2007 SE-67 2008 Quest P POWER SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER SEAT Schematic INFOID:0000000001718811 WIWA1802E Revision: August 2007 SE-68 2008 Quest POWER SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - SEAT - INFOID:0000000001718812 A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O ALJWA0042GB Revision: August 2007 SE-69 2008 Quest P POWER SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > ALJWA0043GB Revision: August 2007 SE-70 2008 Quest POWER SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O ALJWA0044GB P Revision: August 2007 SE-71 2008 Quest HEATED SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > HEATED SEAT Description INFOID:0000000001718813 • When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit. • To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated for front seat cushion LH. For seatback and front seat cushion RH, complete cushion or seatback assembly must be replaced. • Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim. WIIA0031E Revision: August 2007 SE-72 2008 Quest HEATED SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - INFOID:0000000001718814 A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O ALJWA0045GB Revision: August 2007 SE-73 2008 Quest P HEATED SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > WIWA1807E Revision: August 2007 SE-74 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT SEAT A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718815 Power Driver Seat B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O P WAIA0099E 1. Headrest 2. Seatback board 3. Seat cushion trim cover 4. Seat cushion heating element 5. Seat cushion pad 6. Silk film bag 7. Seat cushion frame 8. RH inner hinge cover 9. LH inner hinge cover Revision: August 2007 SE-75 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Driver seat power frame assembly 11. Seat cushion outer finisher 12. Power seat switch 13. Power seat switch escutcheon 14. Recliner switch knob 15. Slide switch knob 16. Driver seat wiring harness 17. Slide motor 18. Rear lifter motor 19. Bushing 20. Front lifter motor 21. Driver seat control unit 22. Drive cable 23. Outer pedestal finisher 24. Pedestal 25. Sub woofer 26. Seat cushion front finisher 27. Inner pedestal finisher (without tray table) 28. Inner pedestal finisher (with tray table) 29. Slide Gear 30. Seat cushion inner finisher 31. Tray table bracket outer finisher (without family entertainment) 32. Center tray table (without family entertainment) 33. Tray table bracket inner finisher (without family entertainment) 34. Tray table assembly (without family entertainment) 35. Seatback heating element (without side air bag) 36. Lumbar support handle 37. Armrest assembly 38. Armrest bolt cover 39. Armrest bushing (cloth armrest only) 40. Seatback assembly (with side air bag) 41 42. Headrest guide with multi position lock 43. Seatback trim (without side air bag) 44. Seatback pad (without side air bag) 46. Armrest bolt 47. Buckle Revision: August 2007 Headrest guide SE-76 45. Seatback frame (without side air bag) 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Manual Driver Seat A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WAIA0100E 1. Seatback board 2. Seatback frame 3. Lumbar support handle 4. Seat cushion inner finisher 5. Driver seat frame assembly 6. Recliner release handle 7. Seat cushion outer finisher 8. Seat cushion adjusting knobs 9. Seat cushion front finisher 10. Outer pedestal finisher 11. Pedestal 12. Inner pedestal finisher 13. Seat cushion frame 14. Seat belt buckle assembly 15. Seat cushion pad 16. Seat cushion trim cover 17. Armrest assembly 18. Seatback trim cover Revision: August 2007 SE-77 P 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Seatback pad 20. Headrest holder 21. Headrest holder with multi position lock 22. Headrest 23. Armrest bolt cover 24. Armrest bolt 25. Armrest bushing (cloth only) Manual Driver Seat WAIA0101E 1. Seatback board 2. Seatback frame 3. Lumbar support handle 4. Seat cushion inner finisher 5. Driver seat frame assembly 6. Recliner release handle Revision: August 2007 SE-78 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. Seat cushion outer finisher 8. Seat cushion adjusting knobs 9. Seat cushion front finisher A 10. Outer pedestal finisher 11. Pedestal 12. Seat cushion frame 13. Seat belt buckle assembly 14. Silk film bag 15. Seat cushion pad 16. Seat cushion trim cover 17. Armrest assembly 18. Seatback trim cover 19. Seatback pad 20. Headrest holder 21. Headrest holder with multi position lock 22. Headrest 23. Armrest bolt cover 24. Armrest bolt 25. Armrest bushing (cloth only) 26. Tray table assembly 27. Tray table bracket inner finisher 28. Center tray table 29. Tray table bracket outer finisher 30. Inner pedestal finisher B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SE-79 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Power Passenger Seat WAIA0102E 1. Headrest 2. Seatback board 3. Armrest assembly 4. Armrest bolt cover 5. Recliner link bar 6. LH inner hinge cover 7. Passenger seat power frame assem- 8. bly Seat cushion inner finisher 9. Seat belt assembly Passenger power seat harness 12. Inner pedestal finisher 15. NAVI control unit 10. Seat cushion front finisher 11. 13. Pedestal 14. Rear view camera module (if equipped) Revision: August 2007 SE-80 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 16. Outer pedestal finisher 17. Power seat switch 18. Seat cushion assembly 19. Seat cushion outer finisher 20. Recliner motor 21. RH inner hinge cover 22. Seatback assembly 23. Headrest holder with locking clip 24. Headrest holder with multi position lock 25. Bluetooth control unit (if equipped) 26. Armrest bolt A B Manual Passenger Seat C D E F G H SE J K L M N O P WAIA0103E Revision: August 2007 SE-81 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Headrest 2. Seatback board 3. Headrest holder with multi position lock 4. Headrest holder 5. Seatback assembly 6. Lumbar support handle 7. Wiring harness 8. Pedestal outer finisher 9. Pedestal 10. NAVI control unit 11. Seat cushion front finisher 12. Bluetooth control unit (if equipped) 13. Rear view camera module (if equipped) 14. Pedestal inner finisher 15. Seat cushion assembly 16. Seat cushion inner finisher 17. Seat frame assembly 18. LH inner hinge cover 19. Recliner link bar 20. RH inner hinge cover 21. Seat cushion outer finisher 22. Recliner handle 23. Armrest bolt cover 24. Armrest assembly 25. Armrest bushing 26. Armrest bolt 27. Seat belt assembly Removal WARNING: • When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy. • Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at lease 3 minutes. CAUTION: • Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with care. • Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. • If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS48 • After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced. NOTE: • When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect the vehicle from damage. • When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Slide the seat until the four body bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted. Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. Disconnect the side air bag module harness connector. Remove the four body bolts. Disconnect the power seat harness connectors (if equipped) and remove the seat from the vehicle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Tighten LH front seat bolts (1) in the order as shown. Tighten RH front seat bolts (2) in the order as shown. • ⇐: Vehicle front. LIIA2309E Seatback Assembly INFOID:0000000001718816 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY NOTE: Revision: August 2007 SE-82 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags. • Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position. A Disassembly 1. 2. 3. Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top hooks (A). Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the middle hooks (B). Separate the trim clips (C) from the seatback frame to remove the seatback finisher. B C D WIIA0773E 4. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. E F G PIIA0163E 5. H Remove the retainer. SE J K SIIA0113E L 6. 7. Remove the headrest. From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs at the base of the stay pipe and pull the up to remove. NOTE: Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/ rear and right/left). M N O LRS023 P Revision: August 2007 SE-83 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Remove the snap ring (1) and the lumbar support lever knob (2) from the shaft (3). WAIA0104E 9. Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim and pad assembly. Remove the hog ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater unit. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Seatback Assembly INFOID:0000000001718817 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. Bend both top corners inward (one at a time) to release the top hooks (A). Shift the seatback finisher to the Left and Right to release the middle hooks (B). Separate the trim clips (C) from the seatback frame to remove the seatback finisher. WIIA0773E 4. 5. Remove the bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Seat Cushion INFOID:0000000001718818 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. • Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. • When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage. • During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. • The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly. Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove seat. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation". Remove four seat cushion bolts. Remove seat cushion assembly. Revision: August 2007 SE-84 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A Seat Cushion INFOID:0000000001718819 B DISSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. Remove the power seat switch knobs and trim plate (or recline knobs on manual seat). C D E LIIA0681E 2. F Remove the front seat cushion finisher. G H SE LIIA0285E 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift knobs on manual seats). Remove seat cushion bolts and the seat cushion assembly. Release the trim retainer from the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater. For driver seat only, after removing the seat cushion assembly, remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the pad and seat cushion heater unit. J K L M N SIIA0503E Assembly O Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Lifter Motor INFOID:0000000001718820 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. Remove seat cushion Refer to SE-84, "Seat Cushion". Disconnect lifter motor connector. Revision: August 2007 SE-85 2008 Quest P FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Remove lifter motor nuts (A). 4. Slide lifter motor assembly (1) away from spacer (2), press tabs and remove spacer. LIIA2319E 5. Remove lifter motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Slide Motor and Slide Gear INFOID:0000000001718821 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal CAUTION: Do not bend drive cable to prevent slide motor operation noise. NOTE: Remove and reinstall slide motor, drive cable, and slide gears from driver seat power frame assembly as if it were one unit. 1. 2. Remove seat cushion Refer to SE-84, "Seat Cushion". Remove seat track bolts (A). LIIA2317E 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove seat cushion front finisher. Remove top screw from the seat cushion inner and outer finishers. Disconnect slide motor connector. Remove forward bolts from driver seat power frame assembly. Remove slide gear box nuts. Slide both seat rails to rear position. Remove slide gear and slide motor. Revision: August 2007 SE-86 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 10. Remove drive cable (1) by releasing tab (2). A B C LIIA2318E Installation NOTE: • Before reinstalling slide motor or slide gear, measure distance between slide gear box and a slide gear box bolt and adjust slide gears so the distance is equal for both slide gears. D E Installation is the reverse order of removal. F G H SE J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SE-87 2008 Quest REAR SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR SEAT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718822 Second Row Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Lift handle and tilt seat forward. Remove the rear anchor bolt. Tilt seat backward. Remove seat base trim cover. Remove front anchor nuts. Remove seat striker covers and seat strikers. LIIA0682E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Third Row Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the luggage side spring cover finishers.. Rotate the seat to mid position (between locked seating position and stowed position) Remove the lift assist springs. Retract the seat into the cargo floor position. Remove the hinge bolts from the seat assembly. Remove the seat assembly. WAIA0105E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 SE-88 2008 Quest REAR SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000001718823 A Second row B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O P WIIA0825E 1. Seatback board 2. Seatback frame 3. Seatback hinge LH 4. LH inner recliner cover 5. Recline release lever 6. LH cushion hinge cover 7. LH seatback hinge cover 8. LH arm rest 9. Armrest bolt cover 11. Isofix cover 12. LH seat anchor cover 10. Cup holder Revision: August 2007 SE-89 2008 Quest REAR SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 13. LH seat anchor striker 14. Lift assist cylinder 15. Seat base and hinge assembly 16. Seat base trim cover 17. Seat base apron 18. RH seat anchor cover 19. RH seat anchor striker 20. Seat belt buckle 21. Flexmat assembly 22. Seat cushion pad 23. RH cushion hinge cover 24. RH armrest 25. Seatback trim cover 26. RH inner recliner cover 27. Seatback pad 28. Seatback hinge RH 29. Seat cushion trim cover 30. Seatback fold flat hinge assembly 31. RH headrest guide 32. LH locking headrest guide Revision: August 2007 SE-90 2008 Quest REAR SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > Third row A B C D E F G H SE J K L M N O WAIA0106E P 1. Hook assembly 4. Headrest 5. Seatback pad 6. Headrest trim rear 7. Headrest pivot assembly 8. Seatback frame assembly 9. Seatback release handle and cable 11. Seat assembly hinge 12. Seat lock cover 10. Seat lock cover 2. Headrest release handle 3. Trim cover 13. Seat lock assembly 14. Upper hinge assembly 15. Upper seat cover 16. Assist spring 17. Seat assembly hinge anchor 18. Seat assembly hinge Revision: August 2007 SE-91 2008 Quest REAR SEAT < SERVICE INFORMATION > 19. Seat cushion frame assembly 20. Seat lock cable assembly 21. Seat cushion pad 22. Seat cushion trim cover 23. Headrest release cable assembly 24. Headrest trim front 25. Headrest support 26. Headrest trim cover Revision: August 2007 SE-92 2008 Quest RESTRAINTS SECTION SRS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On ...................................................33 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" Service ...................................... 2 Occupant Classification System Precaution ............. 2 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 34 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................38 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ................ 41 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ................................................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................41 SRS Configuration .................................................... 4 Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ...... 5 Front Side Air Bag ..................................................... 5 Side Curtain Air Bag .................................................. 5 Occupant Classification System (OCS) .................... 5 Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ............ 6 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 7 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................. 7 SRS Component Parts Location ............................... 9 Schematic ............................................................... 10 Wiring Diagram - SRS- ............................................ 11 CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG) .......................... 16 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-III) .... 17 SRS Operation Check ............................................. 18 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III ..................... 19 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III ................ 29 Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off ................................................... 32 Removal and Installation .........................................34 F G SPIRAL CABLE ................................................ 36 Removal and Installation .........................................36 SRS FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE ...... 38 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ................................... 43 I J Removal and Installation .........................................43 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ........... 44 K Removal and Installation .........................................44 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........... 45 Removal and Installation .........................................45 L DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 46 Removal and Installation .........................................46 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 47 Removal and Installation .........................................47 M N COLLISION DIAGNOSIS .................................. 48 For Frontal Collision ................................................48 For Side and Rollover Collision ...............................49 O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718416 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution for SRS "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" Service INFOID:0000000001718417 • Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. • Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pretensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. • The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required. • The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear. • Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down. • Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components. • After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. Occupant Classification System Precaution INFOID:0000000001718418 Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly. Revision: August 2007 SRS-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718419 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-42057A) Air bag lock master key set Part of kit (J-42057) Removing and installing air bag lock B C D E LRS210 F G SRS I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-3 2008 Quest SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) SRS Configuration INFOID:0000000001718420 WHIA0215E The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module, front passenger air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioners are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision. SRS configurations for some collision modes are as follows: SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision Driver air bag module × — — Front passenger air bag module × — — Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — Front LH side air bag module — × — Front RH side air bag module — — × LH side curtain air bag module — × — RH side curtain air bag module — — × Revision: August 2007 SRS-4 2008 Quest SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter INFOID:0000000001718421 A The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Front Side Air Bag B C D SRS444 E INFOID:0000000001718422 Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. F G SRS I WHIA0008E Side Curtain Air Bag INFOID:0000000001718423 J Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. K L M WHIA0041E Occupant Classification System (OCS) INFOID:0000000001718424 The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-III can be used to confirm the passenger air bag status (readiness). Revision: August 2007 SRS-5 2008 Quest N O P SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions Front Passenger Seat (Condition) Seat occupied Seat occupied NOTE Seat empty PASS AIR BAG OFF Indicator (Status) Passenger Air Bag Status (Readiness) CONSULT-III Display OFF Active (enabled) ON ON Deactivated (disabled) OFF OFF Deactivated (disabled) OFF NOTE: Passenger does not meet Occupant Classification System specifications for passenger air bag activation. WHIA0187E Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors INFOID:0000000001718425 The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors. • Driver front air bag module • Passenger front air bag module • LH side curtain air bag module • RH side curtain air bag module • Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner • Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. WHIA0103E Revision: August 2007 SRS-6 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000001718426 CAUTION: • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to do so in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. • Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify SRS wiring harnesses. If a harness is damaged, replace it with a new one. • Keep ground connections clean. B C DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION D The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-III. The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp. The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part. The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-III are as follows: E User mode Diagnosis mode Display type “AIR BAG” warning lamp X X ON-OFF operation CONSULT-III — X Monitoring F G HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symp- SRS toms or conditions for a customer complaint. Information From Customer WHAT - Vehicle model WHEN - Date, Frequencies WHERE - Road conditions HOW - Operating conditions, Symptoms I J Preliminary Check Check that the following parts are in good order. • Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery".) • Fuse (Refer to SRS-11, "Wiring Diagram - SRS-".) • System component-to-harness connections K WORK FLOW L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-7 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHIA0348E *1: "PRELIMINARY CHECK" *2: SRS-18 *3: SRS-19 *4: SRS-29 Revision: August 2007 SRS-8 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SRS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001718427 A B C D E F G SRS WHIA0304E I 1. Side curtain air bag modules 2. Front RH side air bag module 3. Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner 4. RH side air bag (satellite) sensor 5. Belt tension sensor 6. Occupant classification system sensor 7. Occupant classification system con- 8. trol unit Front passenger air bag module 9. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit 10. Crash zone sensor 11. Front passenger air bag off indicator 12. Spiral cable 13. Driver air bag module 14. Seat belt buckle switches 15. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor 16. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner 17. Front LH side air bag module J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-9 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001718428 WHWA0303E Revision: August 2007 SRS-10 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - SRS- INFOID:0000000001718429 A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O WHWA0283E Revision: August 2007 SRS-11 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHWA0284E Revision: August 2007 SRS-12 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O WHWA0304E P Revision: August 2007 SRS-13 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHWA0286E Revision: August 2007 SRS-14 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O WHWA0287E P Revision: August 2007 SRS-15 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHWA0288E CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG) INFOID:0000000001718430 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Revision: August 2007 SRS-16 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > AIR BAG diagnostic mode Description SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs. SELF-DIAG [PAST] A B Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. The stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed. TROUBLE DIAG RECORD With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, as shown. When replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-III screen. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned are F659 (for models with side air bags) and F658 (for models without side air bags). PASSENGER AIR BAG The STATUS (readiness) of the front passenger air bag module is displayed. The STATUS displayed (ON/OFF) depends on the signals supplied to the occupant classification system control module and air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-5, "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" for more information. HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-III C D E F G From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode. SRS From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode. I J HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS • “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” A current self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen in real time. After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. • “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-III screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-III and select “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” mode. NOTE: If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode will continue to show the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. K L M N • “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased. Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-III) O INFOID:0000000001718431 • The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”. • After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. Revision: August 2007 SRS-17 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE SHIA0183E HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. SRS Operation Check INFOID:0000000001718432 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp—User Mode 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks. Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the examples. BF-1845D Revision: August 2007 SRS-18 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Warning lamp examples “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode- SRS condition Reference item A B • No malfunction is detected. • No further action is necessary. — C D SHIA0011E E • The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired as indicated. Go to SRS-19, "Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III" or SRS-29, "Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III". F G SHIA0012E SRS • Air bag is deployed. • Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed. Go to SRS-48. I • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. • Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning. • SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. Go to SRS-32, "Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off". J K SHIA0013E L • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. • Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. Go to SRS-33, "Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On". M N SHIA0014E O Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-III INFOID:0000000001718433 P DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases: Revision: August 2007 SRS-19 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. • The SRS system malfunctions intermittently. CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]") Diagnostic item Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. NO DTC IS DETECTED Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement • Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . • Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. • Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . • No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] • Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] • Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] • Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] • Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. — 1. 2. ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] • Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] • Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. • Crash zone sensor 1. CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] 2. 3. 4. 5. Revision: August 2007 SRS-20 Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace driver air bag module. Replace the spiral cable. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front passenger air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the crash zone sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. 1. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 3. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 4. SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] • Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 3. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 4. SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] • Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 2. 5. 1. 2. 5. • LH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] 1. 3. 4. 5. SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] • The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. Revision: August 2007 1. 2. 3. 4. SRS-21 Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. B C D E F G SRS 2. • RH side air bag (satellite) sensor Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. A 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connections. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front LH seat belt pretensioner. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2008 Quest I J K L M N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] • The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. FR CURTN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1198] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open. FR CURTN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1199] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. FR CURTN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1200] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. FR CURTN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1201] • The circuits for the LH side front curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. FR CURTN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1193] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open. FR CURTN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1194] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. FR CURTN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1195] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. FR CURTN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1196] • The circuits for the RH side front curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] • The circuits for the LH side rear curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. Revision: August 2007 Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. SRS-22 5. Visually check the wiring harness connections. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front RH seat belt pretensioner. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] • The circuits for the RH side rear curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. 1. 2. 3. 4. • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 5. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. • Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. • Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2. 3. 4. 5. • Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. • Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. Replace the related harness. 2. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] 3. 4. 5. • Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] 3. 4. FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION [B1209] • Driver and front passenger air bag modules are deployed. 1. Refer to SRS-48 . SIDE COLLISION DETECTION [B1210] • Side or curtain air bag modules are deployed (with side air bags only). 1. Refer to SRS-48 . SRS-23 C E F G SRS I J K L M N O P NOTE: Revision: August 2007 B D 2. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. A 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-III each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Final Check of SRS Using CONSULT-III—Diagnosis Mode 1. If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 2. If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely. 2. Touch “ERASE”. NOTE: Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”). If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. 3. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III to “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. 4. 5. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-III. Go to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" . 6. 7. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) Check SRS Repair History 1.CONSIDER POSSIBILITY THAT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT WAS NOT ERASED AFTER REPAIR Check repair history of the SRS. Have any previous repairs been made to the SRS? Yes >> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3". No >> Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2". DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Check SRS Intermittent Malfunction Using CONSULT-III—Diagnosis Mode 1. If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to step 4. If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch “BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”. 2. Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. NOTE: With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed. 3. 4. 5. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. Touch “PRINT”. Compare diagnostic codes to "CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")" . Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-III until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-III, and both battery cables. 6. 7. Revision: August 2007 SRS-24 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component. 9. Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking. A CONSULT-III Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD") B Diagnostic item Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. NO DTC IS DETECTED Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement • Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . • Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. • Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . • Go to "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . • No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] • Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] • Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] • Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] • Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. • Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] • Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 1. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 3. 4. 5. • Crash zone sensor E Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace driver air bag module. Replace the spiral cable. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. F G SRS I 2. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front passenger air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. J K L M 1. CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] D — 2. ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] C 2. 3. 4. 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the crash zone sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-25 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. 1. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 3. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] • Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 4. SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] • Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 3. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] • Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 4. SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] • Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 2. 5. 1. 2. 5. • LH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. • RH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] • The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] • The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. Revision: August 2007 1. 2. 3. 4. SRS-26 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. Visually check the wiring harness connections. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front LH seat belt pretensioner. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] • The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] • The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. FR CURTN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1198] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open. FR CURTN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1199] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. FR CURTN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1200] • The LH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. FR CURTN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1201] • The circuits for the LH side front curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. FR CURTN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1193] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is open. FR CURTN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1194] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. FR CURTN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1195] • The RH side front curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. FR CURTN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1196] • The circuits for the RH side front curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 3. 4. 5. 1. 3. 4. CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] • The circuits for the LH side rear curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. C Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. E F G SRS 2. • The LH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open. B D 2. CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] Visually check the wiring harness connections. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front RH seat belt pretensioner. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. A 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. I J K L 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-27 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Explanation CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] • The RH side rear curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] • The circuits for the RH side rear curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. 1. 2. 3. 4. • Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 5. 1. 2. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. • Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. • Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] 2. 3. 4. 5. OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. • Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. • Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. Replace the related harness. 2. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] 3. 4. 5. • Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. 5. Visually check the wiring harness connection. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Replace the related harness. 2. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] 3. 4. FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION [B1209] • Driver and front passenger air bag modules are deployed. 1. Refer to SRS-48 . SIDE COLLISION DETECTION [B1210] • Side or curtain air bag modules are deployed (with side air bags only). 1. Refer to SRS-48 . Revision: August 2007 SRS-28 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-III INFOID:0000000001718434 A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 Inspect SRS Malfunction Using "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp—Diagnosis Mode NOTE: SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two more times (3 times total). 5. Turn ignition switch ON. SRS is now in Diagnosis mode. "AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows: B C D E WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART F G SRS SHIA0026E I J K WHIA0260E L M N O WHIA0198E P Revision: August 2007 SRS-29 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHIA0261E WHIA0200E WHIA0262E WHIA0263E WHIA0203E Revision: August 2007 SRS-30 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C WHIA0204E D E F WHIA0264E G SRS I J WHIA0265E K L M WHIA0252E N O P WHIA0253E Revision: August 2007 SRS-31 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > WHIA0254E WHIA0255E WHIA0211E WHIA0212E Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off INFOID:0000000001718435 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 1.CHECK CONDITION OF AIR BAG MODULE Inspect for deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. Is air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner deployed? Yes >> Refer to SRS-48. No >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-3. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 SRS-32 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. A 3.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN Replace 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON. Does the fuse blow again? Yes >> Repair harness. No >> Inspection End. B 4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT C Connect CONSULT-III. Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-III? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Visually inspect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connections. If the connections are OK, replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation". D 5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION E F Check for loose connections between the combination meter and the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. OK or NG OK >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation". NG >> Properly connect the combination meter and air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not turn off, replace the wiring harness. Trouble Diagnosis: "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On INFOID:0000000001718436 G SRS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 I 1.CHECK METER FUSE Check the 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-3. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J K 2.CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN Replace 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON. Does the fuse blow again? Yes >> Repair harness. No >> Inspection End. L 3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINATION METER Disconnect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors and turn ignition switch ON. Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on? Yes >> Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation". No >> Check the combination meter ground circuits. M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-33 2008 Quest DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718437 WHIA0286E 1. Steering wheel 4. Driver air bag module 2. Side lid LH 3. Side lid RH REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced. • Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the side lids LH/RH. 3. Remove the driver air bag module bolts. 4. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". CAUTION: • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. • Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. • Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. • Do not disassemble air bag module. • Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts. • Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). PHIA0291E Revision: August 2007 SRS-34 2008 Quest DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. • Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. A B C SBF814E D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check". E F G SRS I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-35 2008 Quest SPIRAL CABLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718438 WHIA0275E 1. Steering wheel 2. Lighting and turn signal switch 3. Wiper and washer switch 4. Spiral cable 5. Driver air bag module connector 6. Column cover upper 7. Column assembly 8. Column cover lower 9. Screw (Do not remove) 10. Screw REMOVAL CAUTION: • Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-34, "Removal and Installation". 4. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation". 5. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 6. Remove wiper/washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper/washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. LHIA0034E Revision: August 2007 SRS-36 2008 Quest SPIRAL CABLE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 7. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base. A B C LHIA0035E D 8. Remove the screws, release the tab, and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: • Do not disassemble spiral cable. • Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. E F G LHIA0036E 9. SRS Remove the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. I J K SHIA0193E 10. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. L INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. • If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". WGIA0038E CAUTION: • The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. • With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Revision: August 2007 SRS-37 2008 Quest M N O P FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718439 The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to "WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure. REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. • Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. • Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "Glove Box". 3. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember. 4. Disconnect the front passenger air bag module electrical connectors. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". 5. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". 6. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove from the instrument panel assembly. WHIA0185E CAUTION: • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. • Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward. • Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. • Do not disassemble air bag module. • Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. • Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). WHIA0111E • Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. • Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". SBF814E INSTALLATION Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 SRS-38 2008 Quest FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". CAUTION: • Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". A B Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument panel pad assembly. C D E WHIA0185E 2. 3. F Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air G bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket. CAUTION: • Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. SRS Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. CAUTION: • Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. • Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. • Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. 1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors. 3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-39 2008 Quest FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > 4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring harness. LHIA0017E 5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. WHIA0062E 6. 7. 8. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness. Locate the front passenger air bag module service replacement harness connector (1) that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector. WHIA0307E Revision: August 2007 SRS-40 2008 Quest SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001718440 B C D E F G WHIA0305E 1. Rear side curtain air bag module connector 2. Front side curtain air bag module connector SRS REMOVAL CAUTION: • Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a directconnect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. • Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-38, "Removal and Installation". 2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the front and rear side curtain air bag modules. CAUTION: • When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. • Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. • Do not disassemble air bag module. • Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). • Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. • Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. I J K L M N O P SBF814E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-6, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". Revision: August 2007 SRS-41 2008 Quest SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE < SERVICE INFORMATION > • After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check". Revision: August 2007 SRS-42 2008 Quest CRASH ZONE SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > CRASH ZONE SENSOR A Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718441 REMOVAL B CAUTION: • Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-17, "Removal and Installation". 3. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: • Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. • Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. C D E F WHIA0113E G INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-18, SRS "SRS Operation Check". I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-43 2008 Quest SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR < SERVICE INFORMATION > SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718442 REMOVAL CAUTION: • Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt". 3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector (2). CAUTION: • Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. • Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. • Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. • Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. WHIA0308E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check". Revision: August 2007 SRS-44 2008 Quest FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001718443 For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-3, "Front Seat Belt". B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-45 2008 Quest DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001718444 REMOVAL WHIA0306E 1. Diagnosis sensor unit ⇒ Vehicle front CAUTION: • Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to IP-10, "Instrument Panel". 4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: • Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. • Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. • Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check". CAUTION: • The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-16, "CONSULT-III Function (AIR BAG)". Revision: August 2007 SRS-46 2008 Quest OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT < SERVICE INFORMATION > OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation A INFOID:0000000001718445 The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-75, "Removal and Installation" to remove the seat, and SE-84, "Seat Cushion" to replace the seat cushion assembly. B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-47 2008 Quest COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision INFOID:0000000001718446 Check the SRS components using the following table. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check". SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated Driver air bag module If the driver air bag has deployed: REPLACE Install with new fasteners. If the driver air bag has NOT been activated: 1. Remove driver air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install driver air bag modules with new fasteners. Front passenger air bag module If the front passenger air bag has deployed: REPLACE Install with new fasteners. If the front passenger air bag has NOT been activated: 1. Remove front passenger air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install front passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install front passenger air bag modules with new fasteners. Crash zone sensor If any of the front air bags or seat belt pretensioners* have been activated: REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. If the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone sensor and bracket. 3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, reel, lap outer) If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated: REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only. Diagnosis sensor unit Revision: August 2007 If any of the SRS components have been activated: REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit. Install with new fasteners. If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. 6. If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 7. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 8. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners. If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. SRS-48 2008 Quest COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Part Steering wheel Spiral cable SRS is activated 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. SRS is NOT activated Visually check steering wheel for deformities. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. If no damage is found, reinstall. If damaged—REPLACE. If the driver front air bag has deployed: REPLACE the spiral cable. If the driver front air bag has not deployed: 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage. 2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage. 3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. D 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove passenger seat. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners. If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners. Harness and connectors 1. 2. 3. 4. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. If the passenger front air bag has deployed: REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. E F If the passenger front air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Visually check instrument panel for damage. 2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel. For Side and Rollover Collision B C Occupant classification system (Passenger seat) Instrument panel A G SRS INFOID:0000000001718447 Check the SRS components using the following table. • After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS18, "SRS Operation Check". I J WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. 2. 3. Replace the following components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) Diagnosis sensor unit (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. K L M WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-18, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. N O SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) P Revision: August 2007 SRS-49 2008 Quest COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Part SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated LH side curtain air bag module If the LH side curtain air bag has deployed: REPLACE the LH side curtain air bag module. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) If the LH side curtain air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged—Remove the LH side curtain air bag module. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the LH side curtain air bag module. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the LH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the LH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. RH side curtain air bag module If the RH side curtain air bag has deployed: REPLACE the RH side curtain air bag module. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) If the RH side curtain air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged—Remove the RH side curtain air bag module. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the RH side curtain air bag module. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the RH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the RH side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. Front LH side air bag module If the front LH side air bag has deployed: REPLACE front LH seatback assembly. If the front LH side air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front LH seatback assembly. Front RH side air bag module If the front RH side air bag has deployed: REPLACE front RH seatback assembly. If the front RH side air bag has NOT deployed: 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front RH seatback assembly. (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor If any of the SRS components have deployed: REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag (satellite) sensor. 3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. Diagnosis sensor unit If any of the SRS components have deployed: REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. If none of the SRS components have been activated: 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies (All applicable locations: buckle, reel, lap outer) If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated: REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners. If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated: 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. 6. If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 7. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 8. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners. *: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULTIII only. Revision: August 2007 SRS-50 2008 Quest COLLISION DIAGNOSIS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Part Seat (with front side air bag) SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated If either the front LH or front RH side air bag modules has been deployed: REPLACE front seatback assembly on the deployed side. If the front LH or front RH side air bag modules have NOT deployed: 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. Harness, connectors and terminals Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Center inner pillar 1. 2. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation). If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar. Trim/headlining 1. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts. A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 SRS-51 2008 Quest SUSPENSION SECTION WT ROAD WHEELS & TIRES A B C D WT CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 ROAD WHEEL .................................................... 5 Inspection .................................................................. 5 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY ...................... 6 PAX Run Flat Tires and Wheels ............................... 6 Conventional Tire and Wheel .................................... 6 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM..... 8 System Component ................................................... 8 System Description ................................................... 8 CAN COMMUNICATION ....................................11 System Description ................................................. 11 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ....................................12 Wiring Diagram -T/WARN - ..................................... 12 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................. 12 ID Registration Procedure ....................................... 13 Transmitter Wake Up Operation ............................. 14 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 14 Self-Diagnosis .........................................................15 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair .......................................................16 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart ...........................17 Preliminary Check ...................................................19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ................................................. 21 Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM .............................21 Inspection 2 Transmitter - 1 .....................................21 Inspection 3 Transmitter - 2 .....................................22 Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed Signal ..........................22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ...... 23 Inspection 1 Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................23 Inspection 2 Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................23 Inspection 3 Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................24 Inspection 4 Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................25 Inspection 5 "TIRE PRESSURE" Information in Display Unit Does Not Exist .....................................25 Inspection 6 ID Registration Cannot Be Completed .............................................................................25 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ..................... 27 F G H I J K L M N Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) ................................27 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 29 O Road Wheel .............................................................29 Tire ..........................................................................29 P Revision: August 2007 WT-1 2008 Quest PRECAUTIONS < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001718210 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 WT-2 2008 Quest PREPARATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > PREPARATION A Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718211 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV991B1000 (J-45295) Transmitter activation tool • Wake up • ID registration B C D WT WEIA0144E Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000001718212 Tool name Description Power tool Removing wheel nuts F G H I PBIC0190E J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 WT-3 2008 Quest TIRES Symptom ROAD WHEEL Revision: August 2007 Vibration × Shimmy × × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × × × Shimmy, shudder × × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × WT-4 × BR-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" STEERING × BRAKE × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVESHAFT × Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. × ROAD WHEEL × Refer to TIRES in this chart. Shake TIRES × RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION × FSU-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" — Non-uniformity × FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION — Deformation or damage × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-6 Uneven tire wear × DIFFERENTIAL WT-29 Incorrect tire pressure × WT-29 WT-6 Imbalance Noise Incorrect tire size WT-5 Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Out-of-round FAX-5, FSU-6 Reference page Improper installation, looseness NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SERVICE INFORMATION > NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000001718213 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2008 Quest ROAD WHEEL < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROAD WHEEL A Inspection 1. 2. a. b. INFOID:0000000001718214 Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) : Refer to WT-29, "Road Wheel". B C D WT F SFA975B 3. 4. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to FSU-6, "On-vehicle Service". G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 WT-5 2008 Quest ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY PAX Run Flat Tires and Wheels INFOID:0000000001718215 CAUTION: • Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. • If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. Conventional Tire and Wheel INFOID:0000000001718216 BALANCING WHEELS 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel. CAUTION: • Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal. • After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road wheel. Set road wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. • If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for road wheels. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value above and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: • Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. • Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel. SMA054D Calculation: Indicated unbalance value × 1.6 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 1.6 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) NOTE: The selected balance weight value must be the closest balance weight available to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz) 37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz) Revision: August 2007 WT-6 2008 Quest ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY < SERVICE INFORMATION > a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to road wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the road wheel as shown in the figure so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: • Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. • Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. • Do not install more than three pieces of balance weight. A B C D WT F G SMA055D c. 5. 6. 7. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight pieces in line with each other (as shown in the figure). CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight piece on top of another. Start wheel balancer again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual unbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or less. • If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance): Maximum allowable unbalance Dynamic (At rim flange) Static (At rim flange) H I J SMA056D K L Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz.) M ROTATION • After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. • Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Tightening torque of wheel nut N O P : 112 N·m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb) WEIA0044E Revision: August 2007 WT-7 2008 Quest LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM System Component INFOID:0000000001718217 LEIA0128E 1. Combination meter 4. Tire pressure warning check connector 5. 2. Remote keyless entry receiver 3. BCM Transmitter System Description INFOID:0000000001718218 TRANSMITTER A sensor-transmitter integrated with a valve is installed in each wheel, and transmits a detected air pressure signal in the form of a radio wave. WEIA0137E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER Revision: August 2007 WT-8 2008 Quest LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > The remote keyless entry receiver (1), which is located near the front pillar RH (2), is shown with the instrument panel removed. This remote keyless entry receiver receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the transmitter in each wheel. A B C LEIA0129E D BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) The BCM (1), which is located near the front pillar LH (2), is shown with the instrument panel removed. This BCM reads the air pressure signal received by the remote keyless entry receiver, and controls the combination meter warning lamp and the buzzer operations as shown below. It also has a judgement function to detect a system malfunction. Condition Warning lamp Buzzer ON OFF WT F G 2 Less than 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm , 28 psi) [Flat tire] LEIA0130E System malfunction After key ON, flashes once per second for 1 minute, then stays ON OFF System normal On for 1 second after ignition ON OFF H I COMBINATION METER J The combination meter receives tire pressure status from the BCM using CAN communication. When a low tire pressure condition is sensed by the BCM, the combination meter low tire pressure warning lamp and buzzer are activated. K L M LEIA0055E DISPLAY UNIT N Displays the air pressure of each tire. • After the ignition switch is turned ON, the pressure values are not displayed until the data of each wheel is received. O P WEIA0143E Revision: August 2007 WT-9 2008 Quest LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WEIA0169E Revision: August 2007 WT-10 2008 Quest CAN COMMUNICATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > CAN COMMUNICATION A System Description INFOID:0000000001718219 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". B C D WT F G H I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 WT-11 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Wiring Diagram -T/WARN - INFOID:0000000001718220 WEWA0066E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001718221 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Revision: August 2007 WT-12 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > ID Registration Procedure INFOID:0000000001718222 A ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL NOTE: This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM. New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed. 1. Connect CONSULT-III. 2. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST". 4. Push the transmitter activation tool against the tire near the front left transmitter. Press the button for 5 seconds. Tool number : (J-45295) B C D WT F LEIA0036E 5. Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH and RR LH. When ID registration of each wheel has been completed, a buzzer sounds and the hazard warning lamps flash. Activation tire position Buzzer 1 Front LH Once 2 Front RH 2 times 3 Rear RH 3 times 4 Rear LH 4 times Hazard warning lamp CONSULT-III 2 times flashing “YET” ↓ “DONE” G H I J 6. After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure. NOTE: Be sure to register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH, to RR LH, or the self-diagnostic results display will not function properly. K ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL L NOTE: This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM. New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed. 1. Connect CONSULT-III. 2. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on “SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on “SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST". 4. Adjust the tire pressure to the values shown in the table below for ID registration, and drive the vehicle at 15 km/h (9.4 MPH) or more for a few minutes. 5. Tire position Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Front – Left 250 (2.5, 36) Front – Right 230 (2.3, 33) Rear – Right 210 (2.1, 30) Rear – Left 190 (1.9, 27) WT-13 N O P After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure. Revision: August 2007 M 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Activation tire position CONSULT-III Front LH “YET” ↓ “DONE” Front RH Rear RH Rear LH 6. Inflate all tires to proper pressure. Refer to WT-29, "Tire". Transmitter Wake Up Operation INFOID:0000000001718223 WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL NOTE: This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM. New replacement transmitters are provided "asleep" and must first be "woken up" using Transmitter Activation Tool J-45295 before ID registration can be performed. 1. Push the transmitter activation tool against the tire near the front left transmitter. Press the button for 5 seconds. Tool number : (J-45295) • With ignition switch ON, as the hazard warning lamp flashes per the follow diagram, the respective transmitter then must be woken up. LEIA0036E 2. When the BCM finishes assigning each tire ID, the BCM flashes the hazard warning lamps and trailer flasher lamps (if equipped) and sends flashing indicator status by CAN according to the following time chart. Please see trailer flasher specification details of trailer flashing lamps since the BCM controls trailer flasher lamps as brake lamps. Refer to LT-103. LEIA0059E 3. After completing wake up of all transmitters, make sure low tire pressure warning lamp goes out. CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001718224 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Revision: August 2007 WT-14 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > BCM diagnostic test item Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR Displays BCM input/output data in real time. B C Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part A Diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER WT BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. Self-Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001718225 F DESCRIPTION During driving, the low tire pressure warning system receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter installed in each wheel, and gives alarms when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) for this system has pressure judgement and trouble diagnosis functions. FUNCTION G H When the low tire pressure warning system detects low inflation pressure, the warning lamp in the combination meter comes on and the buzzer may sound (with PAX tires). The malfunction location is indicated by the warning lamp flashing. I CONSULT-III Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System ITEM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DATA MONITOR Front - Left transmitter × × Front - Right transmitter × × Rear - Left transmitter × × Rear - Right transmitter × × Warning lamp — × Vehicle speed × × Buzzer (in combination meter) — × CAN Communication × — J K L M × : Applicable – : Not applicable N Self-Diagnostic Results Mode Diagnostic item FLAT - TIRE - FL [C1730] FLAT - TIRE - FR [C1731] FLAT - TIRE - RR [C1732] FLAT - TIRE - RL [C1733] LOW - PRESSURE - FL [C1704] LOW - PRESSURE - FR [C1705] LOW - PRESSURE - RR [C1706] LOW - PRESSURE - RL [C1707] Revision: August 2007 Diagnostic item is detected when ··· Reference page O — P FL tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less FR tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less RR tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less RL tire pressure 121 kPa (1.23 kg/cm2 , 17.5 psi) or less FL tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less FR tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less RR tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less — RL tire pressure 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less WT-15 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Diagnostic item Reference page Diagnostic item is detected when ··· [NO-DATA] - FL [C1708] [NO-DATA] - FR [C1709] [NO-DATA] - RR [C1710] [NO-DATA] - RL [C1711] Data from FL transmitter cannot be received. Data from FR transmitter cannot be received. Data from RR transmitter cannot be received. Data from RL transmitter cannot be received. WT-21 [CHECKSUM- ERR] - FL [CHECKSUM- ERR] - FR [CHECKSUM- ERR] - RR [CHECKSUM- ERR] - RL Checksum data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning. WT-21 [PRESSDATA- ERR] - FL [PRESSDATA- ERR] - FR [PRESSDATA- ERR] - RR [PRESSDATA- ERR] - RL Air pressure data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning. WT-22 [CODE- ERR] - FL [CODE- ERR] - FR [CODE- ERR] - RR [CODE- ERR] - RL Function code data from FL transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from FR transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from RR transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from RL transmitter is malfunctioning. WT-21 [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FL [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FR [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RR [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RL Battery voltage of FL transmitter drops. Battery voltage of FR transmitter drops. Battery voltage of RR transmitter drops. Battery voltage of RL transmitter drops. WT-21 VHCL_SPEED_SIG_ERR [C1729] Vehicle speed signal is in error. WT-22 NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID or else the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III. Data Monitor Mode MONITOR VHCL SPEED AIR PRESS FL AIR PRESS FR AIR PRESS RR AIR PRESS RL CONDITION SPECIFICATION Drive vehicle. Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH) • Drive vehicle for a few minutes. or Tire pressure (kPa or psi) • Ignition switch ON and activation tool is transmitting activation signals. ID REGST FL1 ID REGST FR1 ID REGST RR1 ID REGST RL1 Registration ID: DONE No registration ID: YET Ignition switch ON WARNING LAMP Low tire pressure warning lamp on: ON Low tire pressure warning lamp off: OFF BUZZER Buzzer in combination meter on: ON Buzzer in combination meter off: OFF NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or else the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-III. How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair INFOID:0000000001718226 INTRODUCTION • Before troubleshooting, verify customer complaints. • If a vehicle malfunction is difficult to reproduce, harnesses, harness connectors or terminals may be malfunctioning. Hold and shake these parts to make sure they are securely connected. • When using a circuit tester to measure voltage or resistance of each circuit, be careful not to damage or deform connector terminals. WORK FLOW Revision: August 2007 WT-16 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D WT F G H I J SEIA0100E Preliminary check: WT-19 Self-diagnosis: WT-15 Trouble diagnosis for symptoms: K WT-23 L Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart INFOID:0000000001718227 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine. 2. Perform the following procedures to enter the corresponding signals. Ground the tire pressure warning check harness connector terminal 1 for more than 5 seconds. Read the flickering of the low tire pressure lamp. Refer to "JUDGEMENT SELF-DIAGNOSIS". NOTE: When the low tire pressure warning lamp flashes 5 Hz and continues repeating it, the system is normal. M N O JUDGEMENT SELF-DIAGNOSIS P Revision: August 2007 WT-17 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by flickering of the low tire pressure warning lamp. SEIA0745E NOTE: When the low tire pressure warning lamp flashes 5 Hz and continues repeating it, the system is normal. Code/Symptom 15 16 17 18 Malfunction part Reference page Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less — Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2, 28 psi) or less 21 22 23 24 Transmitter no data (front - left) Transmitter no data (front - right) Transmitter no data (rear - right) Transmitter no data (rear - left) WT-21, "Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM" 31 32 33 34 Transmitter checksum error (front - left) Transmitter checksum error (front - right) Transmitter checksum error (rear - right) Transmitter checksum error (rear - left) WT-21, "Inspection 2 Transmitter 1" 35 36 37 38 Transmitter pressure data error (front - left) Transmitter pressure data error (front - right) Transmitter pressure data error (rear - right) Transmitter pressure data error (rear - left) WT-22, "Inspection 3 Transmitter 2" 41 42 43 44 Transmitter function code error (front - left) Transmitter function code error (front - right) Transmitter function code error (rear - right) Transmitter function code error (rear - left) WT-21, "Inspection 2 Transmitter 1" 45 46 47 48 Transmitter battery voltage low (front - left) Transmitter battery voltage low (front - right) Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - right) Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - left) WT-21, "Inspection 2 Transmitter 1" 52 Vehicle speed signal WT-22, "Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed Signal" Fuse or combination meter BCM connector or circuit BCM WT-23, "Inspection 1 Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" Fuse or combination meter BCM connector or circuit BCM WT-23, "Inspection 2 Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" Low tire pressure warning lamp does not come on when ignition switch is turned on. Low tire pressure warning lamp stays on when ignition switch is turned on. Revision: August 2007 WT-18 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > Code/Symptom Low tire pressure warning lamp flashes when ignition switch is turned on. Hazard warning lamp flashes when ignition switch is turned on. “TIRE PRESSURE” information in display unit does not exist. ID registration cannot be completed. Malfunction part BCM harness connector or circuit BCM Transmitter's mode off ID registration not yet completed BCM harness connector or circuit BCM Reference page WT-24, "Inspection 3 Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" WT-25, "Inspection 4 Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" Fuse Display unit BCM WT-25, "Inspection 5 "TIRE PRESSURE" Information in Display Unit Does Not Exist" Transmitter Remote keyless entry receiver harness connector or circuit Remote keyless entry receiver WT-25, "Inspection 6 ID Registration Cannot Be Completed" Preliminary Check A B C D WT F G H I INFOID:0000000001718228 J BASIC INSPECTION 1.CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES K Check all tire pressures. Refer to WT-29, "Tire". OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value. L 2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION M 1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp activation. 2. Does low tire pressure warning lamp activate for 1 second when ignition switch is turned ON? Does warning lamp activate? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check fuse and combination meter. N 3.CHECK CONNECTOR O 1. Disconnect BCM harness connector. 2. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. 3. Reconnect harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P 4.CHECK TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL Check transmitter activation tool battery. OK or NG Revision: August 2007 WT-19 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. NG >> Replace transmitter activation tool battery. Revision: August 2007 WT-20 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM A INFOID:0000000001718229 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 or 24 (DTC C1708, C1709, C1710 or C1711) B 1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT Drive for several minutes. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM”. Are all tire pressures displayed as 0 kPa? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. C D 2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CONNECTOR Check remote keyless entry receiver connector for damage or loose connections. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM, then GO TO 3. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair or replace remote keyless entry receiver connector. WT F 3.ID REGISTRATION Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Is there a tire that cannot register ID? YES >> Replace transmitter of the tire, then GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 4. G 4.VEHICLE DRIVING H 1. 2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH). Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 5. I J 5.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC. K Inspection 2 Transmitter - 1 M 1. 2. INFOID:0000000001718230 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 or 48 N 1.ID REGISTRATION (CORRECTION OF TRANSMITTER LOCATION) 1. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. >> GO TO 2. O P 2.REPLACE TRANSMITTER 1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp again for flashing, replace malfunctioning transmitter. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO Inspection 1. Refer to WT-21, "Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM". Revision: August 2007 L WT-21 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.VEHICLE DRIVING Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Replace malfunctioning transmitter, and perform “Step 3” again. Inspection 3 Transmitter - 2 INFOID:0000000001718231 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 or 38 1.CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES Check all tire pressures. Refer to WT-29, "Tire". Are there any tires with pressure of 64 psi or more? NO >> GO TO 2. YES >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value. 2.VEHICLE DRIVING 1. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH). >> Replace transmitter with new one if “DATA MONITOR ITEM” displays 64 psi or more. Then GO TO 3. 3.ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING • Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. • Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC. Inspection 4 Vehicle Speed Signal INFOID:0000000001718232 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52 [DTC C1729] 1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is " CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK BCM Perform BCM diagnosis. Refer to BCS-15, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". Inspection results OK? OK >> Perform Vehicle Speed Sensor Inspection. Refer to AT-104, "Diagnosis Procedure". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". Revision: August 2007 WT-22 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A Inspection 1 Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718233 B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK C Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38. NO >> GO TO 2. D 2.CHECK COMBINATION METER WT Check combination meter operation. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-17, "Trouble Diagnosis". F 3.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Disconnect BCM harness connector. Does the low tire pressure warning lamp activate? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NO >> Check combination meter and repair or replace. Inspection 2 Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On G H INFOID:0000000001718234 I DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18, M19 and M20. 3. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BAT) L Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 70 and ground. 1. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal M20 70 Ground M Voltage (Approx.) N Battery Voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short. O LEIA0098E 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IGN) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 38 and ground. Revision: August 2007 WT-23 2008 Quest P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal M18 38 Ground Voltage (Approx.) Battery Voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short. WEIA0038E 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal M20 67 Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Reconnect BCM and perform combination meter check DI-13, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter". If OK, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit. Inspection 3 Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On LIIA1040E INFOID:0000000001718235 NOTE: If warning lamp flashes as shown, the system is normal. Flash Mode A • This mode shows transmitter status is OFF-mode. Carry out transmitter wake up operation. Refer to WT-14, "Transmitter Wake Up Operation". SEIA0347E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18, M19 and M20. 3. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CHECK CONNECTOR CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 15 and check connector M123 terminal 1. Revision: August 2007 WT-24 2008 Quest TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > Continuity should exist. A OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. B C WEIA0041E D Inspection 4 Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On INFOID:0000000001718236 WT DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM harness connector M20. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. F G Terminals (+) Continuity (–) Connector Terminal M19 67 H Ground Yes I OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit. LIIA1040E J Inspection 5 "TIRE PRESSURE" Information in Display Unit Does Not Exist INFOID:0000000001718237 K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK L Using CONSULT-III, check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-38. NO >> GO TO 2. M 2.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT Perform display unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-120, "Self-Diagnosis Mode" without NAVI or AV-171, "SelfDiagnosis Mode (NAVI)" with NAVI. Inspection results OK? OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Inspection 6 ID Registration Cannot Be Completed INFOID:0000000001718238 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1.ID REGISTRATION (ALL) Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed? Revision: August 2007 WT-25 2008 Quest N O P TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS < SERVICE INFORMATION > YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO WT-21, "Inspection 1 Transmitter or BCM". Revision: August 2007 WT-26 2008 Quest REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) INFOID:0000000001718239 CAUTION: • Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. • If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. B C D Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. WT F G SEIA0047E 4. 5. 6. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. H I J K WEIA0046E L INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. M N O SEIA0049E 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to MA-11. NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Revision: August 2007 WT-27 2008 Quest P REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) WEIA0137E 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Conventional Tire and Wheel". WEIA0046E NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to WT-14, "Transmitter Wake Up Operation". Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to BRC-84, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Revision: August 2007 WT-28 2008 Quest SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A Road Wheel INFOID:0000000001718240 B Wheel type Maximum radial runout limit Maximum residual imbalance Steel Aluminum Inside Outside Lateral mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 1.0 (0.039) or less 0.9 (0.035) or less Radial mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 0.8 (0.031) or less 0.4 (0.016) or less Dynamic (at rim flange) Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side) Static (at rim flange) C D Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) Tire INFOID:0000000001718241 WT Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Tire size Air pressure F Conventional tire Spare tire T135/80*16 — 420 (4.2, 60) P225/65R16 240 (2.4, 35) — P225/60R17 240 (2.4, 35) — 225-700R480A 240 (2.4, 35) — H — Speed Rating G H *: D or R depending on manufacturer. I J K L M N O P Revision: August 2007 WT-29 2008 Quest ELECTRICAL SECTION WW WIPER, WASHER & HORN A B C D E CONTENTS SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 2 Washer Motor ..........................................................24 PRECAUTION ..................................................... 2 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .......... 25 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ...........................................................................25 System Description ..................................................25 Wiring Diagram - WIP/R - ........................................27 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ..................28 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ..........28 How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis ..................29 Preliminary Check ...................................................29 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) .................................29 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate ................................30 Rear Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect .....................32 Only Rear Wiper Does Not Operate ........................33 Only Rear Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate ....33 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates ..........................................................................33 Rear Wiper Arm .......................................................33 Rear Wiper Motor ....................................................34 Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment ............................35 Rear Washer Tube Layout ......................................35 Rear Washer Nozzle ...............................................35 Check Valve ............................................................36 Rear Wiper and Washer Switch ..............................36 Washer Fluid Reservoir ...........................................36 Washer Motor ..........................................................36 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .......... 3 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ............................................................................ 3 System Description ................................................... 3 CAN Communication System Description ................. 5 Schematic ................................................................. 6 Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ........................................ 7 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM ................... 9 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........... 9 Work Flow ............................................................... 10 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection .... 10 CONSULT-III Function (BCM) ................................. 10 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 11 Front Wiper Does Not Operate ............................... 12 Front Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect .................... 14 Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate ............... 15 Only Front Wiper High Does Not Operate ............... 16 Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate .... 17 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted ......................................... 17 Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates ......................................................................... 17 Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating This Operation Five Times, They Become Inoperative .................... 17 Front Wiper Arms .................................................... 18 Wiper Motor and Linkage ........................................ 19 Washer Nozzle ........................................................ 20 Washer Tube Layout ............................................... 23 Wiper and Washer Switch ....................................... 23 Washer Fluid Reservoir ........................................... 23 Revision: August 2007 F G H I J WW L M N POWER SOCKET ............................................. 37 Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT - .....................................37 Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo) ........................................................37 Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) ....................................................38 HORN ................................................................ 39 Wiring Diagram - HORN - ........................................39 Horn .........................................................................39 WW-1 2008 Quest O P PRECAUTION < SERVICE INFORMATION > SERVICE INFORMATION PRECAUTION Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001719251 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: August 2007 WW-2 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719252 B C D E F G H I WKIA5246E *1 IPDM E/R E118, E119, E120, E121, E122, E123, and E124 *2 Washer fluid reservoir (view with right fender protector RH removed) *4 Front wiper motor E23 (view with cowl top cover removed) *5 BCM M18, M19, and M20 (view with *6 instrument panel removed) System Description *3 Front and rear washer motor E105 (view with right fender protector RH removed) Combination switch (wiper switch) M28 WW INFOID:0000000001719253 • Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). • Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module) when switch is turned ON. • BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation. • IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM. Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70, and • to ignition relay, and • through 15A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU (central processing unit) of IPDM E/R, and • through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) • to CPU (central processing unit) of IPDM E/R, and • through 30A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R) • to front wiper relay, located in the IPDM E/R. With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied • to ignition relay, and • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38, and • through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 44 Revision: August 2007 J WW-3 2008 Quest L M N O P FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to combination switch terminal 14. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 and • to combination switch terminal 12 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and • to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 and • to front wiper motor terminal 1 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to low position, the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines • from BCM terminals 39 and 40 • to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied • through front wiper relay • to front wiper high relay • through IPDM E/R terminal 21 • to front wiper motor terminal 3. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed. HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to high position, the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines • from BCM terminals 39 and 40 • to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper and the front wiper high relays. With the front wiper and the front wiper high relays energized, power is supplied • through front wiper relay • to front wiper high relay • through IPDM E/R terminal 31 • to front wiper motor terminal 2. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed. INTERMITTENT OPERATION Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to intermittent position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. BCM then sends front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines • from BCM terminals 39 and 40 • to IPDM E/R terminals 48 and 49. When BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following operations. • BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position. • BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN communications. • BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. It then sends auto-stop signal to BCM, and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation. AUTO STOP OPERATION When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield, and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach windshield base. When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 1 and 4 are connected. Ground is supplied • to IPDM E/R terminal 32 Revision: August 2007 WW-4 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • through front wiper motor terminal 4 • through front wiper motor terminal 1 • through grounds E9, E15 and E24. The IPDM E/R sends auto stop operation signal to BCM through CAN communication lines. When BCM receives auto stop operation signal, BCM sends wiper stop signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position. FRONT WASHER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front and rear washer switches are OFF, the front and rear washer motor is supplied power • through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 44 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 14 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 13 • to front and rear washer motor terminal –. When front wiper switch is in front washer position, BCM detects front washer signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. Combination switch ground is supplied • to front and rear washer motor terminal + • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. With ground supplied, the front and rear washer motor is operated in the front direction. When BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM uses CAN communication and sends wiper request signal to IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers. When BCM detects that washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and then stops. A B C D E F G H MIST OPERATION When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and then stops. For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to "LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION". If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues. I J FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communiWW cations if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs. BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls. Until ignition switch is turned off, front wiper remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation until ignition L switch is turned OFF.) When fail-safe status is initiated, BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received. When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled. M COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". CAN Communication System Description N INFOID:0000000001719254 Refer to LAN-3, "CAN Communication System". O P Revision: August 2007 WW-5 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Schematic INFOID:0000000001719255 ALLWA0134GB Revision: August 2007 WW-6 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - WIPER - INFOID:0000000001719256 A B C D E F G H I J WW L M N O ALLWA0135GB Revision: August 2007 WW-7 2008 Quest P FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4652E Revision: August 2007 WW-8 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A B C D E F G H I J WW L M N O WKWA4653E P Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719257 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719258 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 WW-9 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. INFOID:0000000001719259 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand the system description, refer to WW-3, "System Description". Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-10, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4. Inspection End. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000001719260 Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection". CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719261 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "WIPER SPEED SETTING" on the "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". Work Support Setting Item Item Description CONSULT-III WIPER SPEED SETTING When wiper switch is at INTERMITTENT, front wiper intermittent time can be selected according to vehicle speed. ON/OFF • ON (Operated)/OFFNOTE (Not operated) NOTE: Factory setting DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. Revision: August 2007 WW-10 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > A ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". B C Display Item List D Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal. IGN SW CAN "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. (1 - 7) Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME FR WIPER STOP "ON/OFF" Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal. VEHICLE SPEED "0.0 km/h" Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication. E F G H I ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. J Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. WW Display Item List L Test item Display on CONSULT-III screen Description Front wiper HI output FR WIPER (HI) Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper LO output FR WIPER (LO) Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper INT output FR WIPER (INT) Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. M N CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000001719262 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. O IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. P Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure Revision: August 2007 WW-11 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. MAIN SIGNALS Monitors predetermined items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. Touch “RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection Item name CONSULT-III screen display Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description Front wiper request FR WIP REQ STOP/1LO/LO/HI x x x Signal status input from BCM. Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P x x x Output status of IPDM E/R. Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK x x x Control status of IPDM E/R. NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Front wiper (HI, LO) output CONSULT-III screen display FRONT WIPER Description With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated. Front Wiper Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719263 CAUTION: During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-17, "System Description" to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status. 1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG 1. 2. Revision: August 2007 WW-12 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. A 2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front wiper motor harness connector terminals. B C IPDM E/R Connector Front wiper motor Terminal Connector 31 E122 21 Continuity Terminal D 2 E23 3 32 Yes E 4 WKIA3167E 4. F Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and ground. G IPDM E/R Connector Continuity Terminal 31 E122 21 H Ground No 32 LKIA0383E 5. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E121 60 E124 38 J Continuity Ground I WW Yes L WKIA1021E M 6. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector terminal 1 and ground. N Front wiper motor Connector Terminal E23 1 Continuity Ground O Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. P WKIA3168E 3.IPDM E/R INSPECTION 1. 2. With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Without CONSULT-III Revision: August 2007 WW-13 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". When front wiper relay and front wiper high relay are operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground. IPDM E/R (+) Connector (–) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Stopped 0V LO operation Battery voltage Terminal 21 E122 Ground 31 Stopped 0V HI operation Battery voltage WKIA1246E OK or NG OK >> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". 4.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW" and "FR WIPER HI" turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". 5.BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM. Displayed self-diagnosis results NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM. GO TO BCS-17, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)". Front Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect INFOID:0000000001719264 1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III. With "DATA MONITOR", confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> GO TO 2. 2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Revision: August 2007 WW-14 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector. IPDM E/R Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E122 32 E23 4 A Continuity B Yes C WKIA3169E D 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. E IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E122 32 Continuity Ground F No G LKIA0321E 5. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Front wiper motor Connector Terminal E23 1 H I Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> • Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. • Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground. J WKIA3168E 3.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. WW L Turn ignition switch ON. While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground. M IPDM E/R (+) (–) Connector Terminal E122 32 Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) N Wiper operating Battery voltage O Wiper stopped 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate WKIA0407E P INFOID:0000000001719265 Inspection Procedure 1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 WW-15 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER LOW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". Only Front Wiper High Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719266 1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. 2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front wiper motor harness connector terminal. IPDM E/R Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E122 31 E23 2 Continuity Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. WKIA3170E 3.IPDM E/R INSPECTION With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test". 1. 2. 3. When front wiper high relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals. IPDM E/R (+) Voltage (Approx.) (–) Connector Terminal E122 31 Connector Terminal E124 38 E121 60 Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". WKIA0409E 4.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 WW-16 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate B INFOID:0000000001719267 1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION C Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted A D E INFOID:0000000001719268 1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION F Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from 1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". G Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates H INFOID:0000000001719269 1.COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION I Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of front washer switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". J Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating This Operation Five Times, They Become Inoperative WW CAUTION: • When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom. • This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP PROT" reads "BLOCK". L INFOID:0000000001719270 M 1.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR With CONSULT-III Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-III. With "DATA MONITOR", confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-III GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> GO TO 2. 2.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT INSPECTION Revision: August 2007 WW-17 2008 Quest N O P FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front wiper motor harness connector terminal. IPDM E/R Front wiper motor Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E122 32 E23 4 Continuity Yes WKIA3169E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. IPDM E/R Connector Terminal E122 32 Continuity Ground No OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. LKIA0321E 3.IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 32 and ground. IPDM E/R (+) Connector (–) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Wiper operating Battery voltage Wiper stopped 0V Terminal E122 32 Ground OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R". NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-19, "Wiper Motor and Linkage". Front Wiper Arms WKIA0407E INFOID:0000000001719271 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove front wiper arm covers and front wiper arm nuts. Remove front wiper arms. Remove front wiper blades. INSTALLATION 1. Operate front wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). Revision: August 2007 WW-18 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Clean up pivot area as shown. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness. A B C SEL024J D 3. 4. Install front wiper blades. Install front wiper arms and front wiper arm nuts and tighten to specified torque. E Front wiper arm nut 5. 6. 23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb) Install front wiper arm covers. Adjust wiper arms. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION". F ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Operate front windshield washer and front wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). Lift the wiper blade up, then rest it onto glass surface to set clearance "L1" and "L2" as shown. G H Clearance "L1" Clearance "L2" 3. 4. 5. : 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in) : 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657 in) I Remove front wiper arm covers and front wiper arm nuts. Adjust the front wiper arms on the motor pivot shafts to obtain specified blade clearances "L1" and "L2". Tighten front wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install front wiper arm covers. Front wiper arm nuts J SEL543TA WW : 23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb) Wiper Motor and Linkage INFOID:0000000001719272 L COMPONENTS M N O P WKIA5264E Revision: August 2007 WW-19 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Wiper link ⇐ Front 2. Wiper frame 3. Front wiper motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Operate the front wiper motor, and stop it at the OFF (auto stop) position. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector. Remove wiper frame assembly bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. WKIA1032E 5. Remove front wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: • Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. • Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect front wiper motor to electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate front wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector. 3. Install front wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 4. Connect front wiper motor electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the front wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 5. Install cowl top extension. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 6. Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms". Washer Nozzle INFOID:0000000001719273 INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not use needle pin to adjust washer nozzle. • If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. • If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory adjust washer nozzles. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". PKIA2552E Revision: August 2007 WW-20 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > ADJUSTMENT A B C D E LKIA0699E 1. 2. 1. Passenger side washer fluid spray pattern 2. Washer nozzles 4. Driver side washer fluid spray pattern Distance A. 3. F Rear edge of cowl G Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms". Measure the distance from rear edge of cowl to lowest point of washer fluid spray coverage (distance A). Determine recommended washer nozzle shim (refer to chart). NOTE: If distance A is in the middle range then no adjustment is required. H I Washer spray coverage High Middle Low 3. 4. Distance (A) 300 mm (11.81 in) and higher 250 - 300 mm (9.84 - 11.81 in) 210 - 250 mm (8.27 - 9.84 in) 170 - 210 mm (6.69 - 8.27 in) 130 - 170 mm (5.12 - 6.69 in) 90 - 130 mm (3.54 - 5.12 in) 90 mm (3.54 in) and lower Recommended washer nozzle shim Down 1.25 mm Down 0.75 mm No shim recommended Up 1.0 mm Up 2.25 mm Up 4.0 mm Up 6.5 mm Remove cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect washer tube from nozzle and remove washer nozzle from cowl top. J WW L M N O P Revision: August 2007 WW-21 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 5. Cut off upper portion of spring legs (2) from washer nozzle (1) as shown. LKIA0701E 6. Install the selected size washer nozzle shim (2) onto washer nozzle (1) as shown. LKIA0702E 7. Install washer spray nozzle (1) into cowl top cover (2), then install spring clip (A) between spring legs (3) as shown. LKIA0703E Revision: August 2007 WW-22 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 8. Install cowl top. Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation". 9. Install wiper arms. Refer to WW-18, "Front Wiper Arms". 10. Recheck washer nozzle spray for correct spray pattern. A Washer Tube Layout INFOID:0000000001719274 B C D E F G WIIA0726E H 1. Washer fluid hose to back door 2. Washer nozzles Wiper and Washer Switch 3. Washer fluid reservoir INFOID:0000000001719275 I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-12, "Steering Column Cover". Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. J WW L WKIA0071E M INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. N Washer Fluid Reservoir INFOID:0000000001719276 REMOVAL 1. O Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation". P Revision: August 2007 WW-23 2008 Quest FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove the washer fluid reservoir (2) from the vehicle. • Twist and pull out washer fluid reservoir inlet (1). • Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector (3) and washer fluid level sensor electrical connector. • Remove washer fluid reservoir screws (A). • Remove front and rear washer hoses. WKIA4297E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Washer fluid reservoir screws 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet, and check for water leaks. Washer Motor INFOID:0000000001719277 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation". Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector and front and rear washer hoses. Pull out front and rear washer motor in the direction of the arrow as shown, and remove the front and rear washer motor from the washer fluid reservoir. LKIA0346E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc. Revision: August 2007 WW-24 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM A Component Parts and Harness Connector Location INFOID:0000000001719278 B C D E F G H I WKIA5247E *1 BCM M18, M19, and M20 (view with *2 instrument panel removed) *4 Front and rear washer motor E105 (view with right fender protector RH removed) *5 Combination switch (wiper switch) M28 *3 Washer fluid reservoir (view with right fender protector RH removed) Rear washer nozzle *6 Rear wiper motor D507 WW System Description INFOID:0000000001719279 • Wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by BCM (body control module) when switch is turned ON. • BCM controls rear wiper ON and INT (intermittent) operation. Power is supplied at all times • through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in fuse and fusible link box) • to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied • through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in fuse block (J/B)] • to BCM terminal 38, and • through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 44 • to combination switch terminal 14. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 67 and • to combination switch terminal 12 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. REAR WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the rear wiper switch is in the ON position, the BCM detects a rear wiper ON signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. When the BCM operates the rear wiper motor, power is supplied • through BCM terminal 55 Revision: August 2007 J WW-25 2008 Quest L M N O P REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • to rear wiper motor terminal B. Ground is supplied • to rear wiper motor terminals E and G • through grounds D403 and D404. With power and ground supplied, the rear wiper operates. INTERMITTENT OPERATION The rear wiper motor operates the wiper arm at low speed approximately every 7 seconds. When the wiper switch is in the rear wiper INT position, the BCM detects a rear wiper INT signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. When BCM operates rear wiper motor, power supplied • through BCM terminal 55 • to rear wiper motor terminal B. Ground is supplied • to rear wiper motor terminals E and G • through grounds D403 and D404. With power and ground supplied, the rear wiper operates in intermittent mode. AUTO STOP OPERATION When the rear wiper arm is not located at the base of the rear window, and the rear wiper switch is turned OFF, the rear wiper motor will continue to operate until the rear wiper arm is at the base of the rear window. When the rear wiper arm reaches the base, rear wiper motor terminals P and E are connected. Ground is supplied • to BCM terminal 44 • through rear wiper motor terminal P • through rear wiper motor terminal E • through grounds D403 and D404. REAR WASHER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front and rear washer switches are OFF, the front and rear washer motor is supplied power • through 10A fuse (No. 47, located in the IPDM E/R) • through IPDM E/R terminal 44 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 14 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11 • to front and rear washer motor terminal +. When the rear wiper switch is in rear washer position, the BCM detects a rear washer signal by BCM wiper switch reading function. Combination switch ground is supplied • to front and rear washer motor terminal – • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 13 • through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12 • through grounds M57, M61 and M79. With ground supplied, the front and rear washer motor is operated in the rear direction. When the BCM detects that the rear washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, BCM operates the rear wiper motor. When the BCM detects that the rear washer switch is in OFF, the rear wiper motor cycles approximately 3 times and then stops. BCM Wiper Switch Reading Function Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 WW-26 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Wiring Diagram - WIP/R - INFOID:0000000001719280 A B C D E F G H I J WW L M N O WKWA4654E Revision: August 2007 WW-27 2008 Quest P REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > WKWA4655E Terminal and Reference Value for BCM INFOID:0000000001719281 Refer to BCS-11, "Terminal and Reference Value for BCM". Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R INFOID:0000000001719282 Refer to PG-24, "Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R". Revision: August 2007 WW-28 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000001719283 A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Confirm the symptoms and customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to WW-25, "System Description". Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to WW-29, "Preliminary Check". Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the rear wiper operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INFOID:0000000001719284 B C D BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CICUIT Refer to BCS-15, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" E CONSULT-III Function (BCM) INFOID:0000000001719285 CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item F Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. G DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. H Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. I The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. J Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. DATA MONITOR WW Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. L M Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". N O Display Item List P Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal. IGN SW CAN "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. Revision: August 2007 WW-29 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. (1 - 7) Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME VEHICLE SPEED "0.0 km/h" Displays vehicle speed as received over CAN communication. FR WIPER STOP "ON/OFF" Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto stop signal. RR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. RR WIPER ON "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Wiper (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. RR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Rear Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. RR WIPER STOP "ON/OFF" Displays "Stopped (OFF)/Operating (ON)" status as judged from the auto stop signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Display on CONSULT-III screen Description Front wiper HI output FR WIPER (HI) Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper LO output FR WIPER (LO) Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper INT output FR WIPER (INT) Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Rear wiper output RR WIPER Rear wiper can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Rear Wiper Does Not Operate INFOID:0000000001719286 1.REAR WIPER ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III, and select "WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "RR WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Make sure rear wiper operates. Wiper should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 70 and rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal B. 70 - B : Continuity should exist. OK or NO OK >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1024E Revision: August 2007 WW-30 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal B and ground. B - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> After repairing harness, be sure to disconnect battery negative cable, and then reconnect it. C D WKIA1025E 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT E Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal E and ground. E - Ground F : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. G H WKIA1026E 5. CHECK REAR WIPER OPERATING 1. 2. I Connect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector. Select "RR WIPER" during "ACTIVE TEST". Refer to WW-29, "CONSULT-III Function (BCM)". When rear wiper is operating, check voltage between BCM harness connector terminal and ground. J BCM (+) (–) Connector Terminal M20 70 Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Stopped 0V ON operation Battery voltage WW WKIA3906E OK or NG OK >> Replace rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper Motor". NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". L M 6.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL N Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER INT", "RR WIPER ON" turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. O When wiper switch is in INT position When wiper switch is in ON position : RR WIPER INT ON : RR WIPER ON P OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Revision: August 2007 WW-31 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > Rear Wiper Stop Position Is Incorrect INFOID:0000000001719287 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER STOP" turns ON-OFF according to wiper operation. When wiper switch is in OFF position : RR WIPER STOP OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and rear wiper motor connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 59 and rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal P. 59 - P : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1029E 3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal P and ground. P - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1030E 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal E and ground. E - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1026E 5.CHECK AUTO STOP SIGNAL Revision: August 2007 WW-32 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Connect BCM connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector D507 terminal P and ground. P - Ground A B : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Replace rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-34, "Rear Wiper Motor". Only Rear Wiper Does Not Operate C WKIA4295E D INFOID:0000000001719288 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL E Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER ON" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. F When rear wiper switch is in ON position : RR WIPER ON G OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Only Rear Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate H INFOID:0000000001719289 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL I Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. When rear wiper switch is in INT position J : RR WIPER INT ON OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates WW INFOID:0000000001719290 L 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-III. With "WIPER" data monitor, make sure "RR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of rear washer switch. When rear wiper switch is in WASHER position N : RR WASHER SW ON OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-18, "Removal and Installation of BCM". NG >> Check the wiper switch. Refer to BCS-3, "System Description". Rear Wiper Arm O INFOID:0000000001719291 REMOVAL 1. 2. Operate rear wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). Remove wiper arm cover, remove wiper arm nut, then remove rear wiper arm. INSTALLATION 1. Prior to rear wiper arm installation, operate wiper motor one full cycle then turn OFF (auto stop). Revision: August 2007 WW-33 M 2008 Quest P REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). • Using a suitable brush, clean pivot area as shown. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Install rear wiper arm onto pivot and ensure wiper blade is parallel to the ground. 3. Tighten wiper arm nut to specification, install wiper arm cover. Wiper arm nut : 15.5 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) SEL024J Rear Wiper Motor INFOID:0000000001719292 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LKIA0350E 1. Wiper arm cover 2. Pivot cap 4. Wiper blade 5. Rear wiper arm 3. Rear wiper motor Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-33, "Rear Wiper Arm". Remove pivot cap. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Disconnect rear wiper motor electrical connector. Remove rear wiper motor bolts, and remove rear wiper motor. LKIA0344E Installation CAUTION: Revision: August 2007 WW-34 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > • Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. 1. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Install rear wiper motor. 3. Attach pivot cap. 4. Connect rear wiper motor electrical connector. 5. Install back door finisher lower. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". 6. Attach rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-33, "Rear Wiper Arm". A B C SEL024J Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment INFOID:0000000001719293 E Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown. Adjustable range D : ±15° (In any direction) F G H LKIA0349E Rear Washer Tube Layout INFOID:0000000001719294 I J WW WEL912A L M N LKIA0347E Rear Washer Nozzle INFOID:0000000001719295 O REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. P Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to EI-31, "Removal and Installation". Revision: August 2007 WW-35 2008 Quest REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM < SERVICE INFORMATION > 2. Remove rear washer tube from rear washer nozzle. 3. Release retaining clips and remove rear washer nozzle. LKIA0348E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check Valve INFOID:0000000001719296 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Connect the check valve (2) to the washer fluid reservoir tube (1) so that the directional arrow on the check valve (2) points towards the washer nozzle tube (3). CAUTION: Directional arrow on the check valve (2) must point in the direction of the washer fluid flow. WKIA4242E Rear Wiper and Washer Switch INFOID:0000000001719297 Refer to WW-23, "Wiper and Washer Switch". Washer Fluid Reservoir INFOID:0000000001719298 Refer to WW-23, "Washer Fluid Reservoir". Washer Motor INFOID:0000000001719299 Refer to WW-24, "Washer Motor". Revision: August 2007 WW-36 2008 Quest POWER SOCKET < SERVICE INFORMATION > POWER SOCKET A Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT - INFOID:0000000001719300 B C D E F G H I J WW L M N O P WKWA4656E Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo) INFOID:0000000001719301 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal Revision: August 2007 WW-37 2008 Quest POWER SOCKET < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. WKIA1035E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) INFOID:0000000001719302 REMOVAL and INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. WKIA1035E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 WW-38 2008 Quest HORN < SERVICE INFORMATION > HORN A Wiring Diagram - HORN - INFOID:0000000001719303 B C D E F G H I J WW L M N O P WKWA4953E Horn INFOID:0000000001719304 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal Revision: August 2007 WW-39 2008 Quest HORN < SERVICE INFORMATION > 1. Remove the front bumper. Refer to EI-13, "Removal and Installation". 2. Disconnect horn electrical connector. 3. Remove horn bolt and remove horn from vehicle. WKIA1033E WKIA1034E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: August 2007 WW-40 2008 Quest